JP7507517B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

In conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information obtained from the entry of a gaming medium into the starting area, and to execute a game presentation according to the result of the determination (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Some of these gaming machines allow players to switch between the first and second starting holes.

JP 2019-033816 A

If the gaming machine does not allow the gaming ball to enter the starting hole according to the gaming status, etc., it may result in a disadvantage for the player and a decrease in interest in the game.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player, the gaming machine is provided with an operation means (operation button 17) operable by a player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition or the establishment of a second acquisition condition , a performance control means (performance control unit 130m) for executing a game performance in which a performance pattern is changed in a display means based on the judgment information and then displayed as stopped for a predetermined stop display period, and a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific game state that is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state, and the performance control means is provided with a light emitting means (starting gate lamp NR, board lighting device, frame lighting device) provided at a predetermined position as a performance that makes the player expect the execution of a special game. a light emitting effect using the light emitting element, a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect, the game effect can be executed with the effect symbols of a first mode (1 to 9) and the effect symbols of a second mode (pseudo consecutive symbols, changing symbols, mode entry symbols, development symbols) that are displayed at a specific timing of the game effect, the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect that generates an operation effective period and is executed in response to operation of the operation means during the operation effective period, and a second vibration effect that is executed without generating the operation effective period, the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that their effect periods do not overlap, the game effect can include a first vibration effect that generates an operation effective period and is executed in response to operation of the operation means during the operation effective period, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that their effect periods do not overlap, a first game presentation corresponding to the result, and a second game presentation corresponding to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, wherein the ease of execution of the second vibration presentation in a predetermined period after the start of the game presentation differs between a case where the first game presentation is executed in the specific game state and a case where the second game presentation is executed in the specific game state, and a linked presentation (color effect, operation of a role) which is performed in linkage with the appearance of the presentation pattern of the second mode is more likely to be executed when the first game presentation is executed in the normal game state than when the first game presentation is executed in the specific game state, and pending information corresponding to each of the pending memories related to the judgment information in which the game presentation has not been executed is displayed on a display means (an image display device). 70), the reserved information can be subjected to a presentation operation (shaking, rotating, etc.) when the multiple presentation patterns are temporarily stopped in the game presentation, and when the reserved information is temporarily stopped for the multiple presentation patterns performing a presentation operation and a specific number (e.g., four) of reserved information that is three more than a specific number (e.g., one) is being displayed, if a start signal for the game presentation (e.g., a first special pattern memory designation command, a presentation pattern designation command, a first special pattern variation pattern designation command) is received in which the reserved memory becomes the specific number, the game presentation can be started and the specific number of reserved information can be displayed without displaying the number of reserved information that is one less than the specific number (e.g., three) .

The present invention can increase the interest of players.

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a front view of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a block diagram of the entire gaming machine. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing main processing in a main control board. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing input control processing in the main control board. A diagram showing the first starting hole detection switch input processing on the main control board. A diagram showing the special diagram special electric control processing on the main control board. A diagram showing the types of commands sent from the main control board to the performance control board. A diagram showing the types of commands sent from the main control board to the performance control board. A diagram showing the main processing in the performance control unit. A diagram showing timer interrupt processing in the performance control unit. A diagram showing customer waiting performance processing in the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a demonstration waiting time determination table. A diagram showing a look-ahead type performance processing in the performance control unit. A diagram showing the icon change performance decision process in the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an icon final display mode determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a change scenario determination table. A diagram showing the icon display mode update process in the performance control unit. A figure showing an example of a change pattern determination table for the hold icon. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a one-stage change pattern determination table for the icon. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a two-stage change pattern determination table for the icon. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an icon change pattern determination table for use when power is interrupted. (a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the display mode of the pending icon and the frequency of occurrence of the change effect, (b) is a diagram showing relationship 1 between the type of change effect and the timing of occurrence of the change effect, (c) is a diagram showing relationship 2 between the type of change effect and the timing of occurrence of the change effect, and (d) is a diagram showing the relationship between the icon display mode and the notification sound when an icon is generated (changed). A diagram showing the continuous preview performance decision process in the performance control unit. A figure showing an example of a preview scenario determination table. A diagram showing the continuous preview performance execution processing in the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an alternative warning pattern determination table. A diagram showing the lamp change performance execution process in the performance control unit. A diagram showing the jackpot preview performance decision process in the performance control unit. A figure showing an example of a jackpot prediction determination table. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a main process in a central control unit. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a command reception interrupt process in the central control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a V blank interrupt process in the general control unit. This is timing chart 1 of the change effect when a prize is won. This is timing chart 2 of the change effects that occur when a prize is won. A figure showing an example of a change in presentation when a prize is won. 1 is a timing chart 1 of a normal change pattern 01. 13 is a timing chart 2 of the normal change pattern 01. A figure showing an example of the presentation of normal change pattern 01. This is timing chart 1 for character action change pattern 01. This is timing chart 2 for character action change pattern 01. A figure showing an example of character action change pattern 01. This figure shows the continuation of Figure 42. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing timing chart 1 of pattern action change pattern 01. A figure showing timing chart 2 of pattern action change pattern 01. A figure showing an example of the presentation of pattern action change pattern 01. This figure shows the continuation of Figure 46. This is a timing chart showing when the variable performance starts from the waiting state for customers. This is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which a variable performance starts from a waiting state for customers. This figure shows the continuation of Figure 49. This is a timing chart showing the increase in the number of reserved balls during a variable performance. A figure showing an example of a presentation in which the number of reserved balls increases during a variable presentation. This is a timing chart showing the number of reserved items increasing immediately after decreasing. This figure shows an example of a presentation in which the number of reserved items increases immediately after decreasing. This is a timing chart showing the increase in the number of reserved balls during a specific reach performance. A figure showing an example of a presentation in which the number of reserved balls increases during a specific reach presentation. This is a timing chart showing the increase and decrease in the number of reserved balls before and after the end of a specific game state. A figure showing an example of a presentation in which the number of reserved balls increases or decreases before and after the end of a specific game state. This figure shows the continuation of Figure 58. A diagram showing the initial processing of the reels in the lamp/drive control unit. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an origin return process in a lamp/drive control unit. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an initial operation process in a lamp/drive control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a board role initial operation pattern determination table. A figure showing an example of a frame role initial operation pattern determination table. This figure shows a specific example of a case where there are no recovery abnormalities in various reels after power is turned on. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example in which a second movable member has a return abnormality after power is turned 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example in which a first movable member has a return abnormality after power is turned on; A figure showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in the performance button after power is turned on. This figure shows a specific example of a case where there are no recovery abnormalities in various reels after power is restored. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example in which a second movable member has a return abnormality after power is restored. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example in which a first movable member has a return abnormality after power is restored. A figure showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in the performance button after power is restored. This figure shows a specific example of the state after power is restored when the special pattern is being displayed in a changing state and there is pending memory. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of a case where a power-on command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of a case where a power restoration designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of a case where power-on commands (power-on command, power-restoration command) cannot be normally received when the power is on. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 of a case where power supply to only the main control board is stopped and then resumed. A figure showing a specific example 2 of a case where power supply to only the main control board is stopped and then resumed. A figure showing a specific example 3 of a case where power supply to only the main control board is stopped and then resumed. A figure showing a specific example 4 in which power supply to only the main control board is stopped and then resumed. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a first modified example in which power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped only. A figure showing variant example 2 in which power supply to the main control board is stopped and then resumed. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating a modified example in which the second movable member has a return abnormality after power is turned on. This figure shows an example of the presentation when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and then resumed while the icon change presentation and lamp change presentation are being executed. This figure shows the continuation of Figure 84. This figure shows examples of effects that occur when power supply to a gaming machine is stopped and then resumed while a continuous preview effect, a pending icon change effect, or a lamp change effect is being executed. This figure shows the continuation of Figure 86. 11A and 11B are diagrams showing specific examples of changes in the connection state of various detection means when waiting for customers. A diagram showing the initial processing of the reels in the lamp/drive control unit. This figure shows a specific example of a case where there are no recovery abnormalities in various reels after power is turned on. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example in which a second movable member has a return abnormality after power is turned on; 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example in which a first movable member has a return abnormality after power is turned on; A figure showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in the performance button after power is turned on. This figure shows a specific example of a case where there are no recovery abnormalities in various reels after power is restored. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example in which a second movable member has a return abnormality after power is restored. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example in which a first movable member has a return abnormality after power is restored. A figure showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in the performance button after power is restored. This figure shows a specific example of the state after power is restored when the special pattern is being displayed in a changing state and there is pending memory. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of a case where a power-on command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of a case where a power restoration designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of a case where power-on commands (power-on command, power-restoration command) cannot be normally received when the power is on. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 of a case where only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a second specific example of a case in which power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then resumed. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in which power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then resumed. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then resumed. FIG. 11 is a timing chart of a first specific example when a command cannot be normally received. A figure showing an example of a presentation in specific example 1 when a command cannot be received normally. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing timing charts of specific examples 2 to 4 when a command cannot be normally received. A figure showing an example of a presentation in specific example 2 when a command cannot be received normally. A figure showing a modified example of the presentation example in specific example 2 when the command cannot be received normally. A figure showing an example of a presentation in specific example 3 when a command cannot be received normally. A figure showing a modified example of the presentation example in specific example 3 when the command cannot be received normally. A figure showing an example of a presentation in specific example 4 when a command cannot be received normally. A figure showing a modified example of the presentation example in specific example 4 when the command cannot be received normally. FIG. 13 is a timing chart showing specific examples 5 to 7 when a command cannot be normally received. A figure showing an example of a presentation in specific example 5 when a command cannot be received normally. A figure showing a modified example of the presentation example in specific example 5 when the command cannot be received normally. A figure showing an example of a presentation in specific example 6 when a command cannot be received normally. A figure showing a modified example of the presentation example in specific example 6 when the command cannot be received normally. A figure showing an example of a presentation in specific example 7 when a command cannot be received normally. A figure showing a modified example of the presentation example in specific example 7 when the command cannot be received normally. FIG. 13 is a timing chart of an eighth specific example when a command cannot be normally received. A figure showing an example of a presentation in specific example 8 when a command cannot be received normally. A figure showing a modified example of the presentation example in specific example 8 when the command cannot be received normally. FIG. 13 is a timing chart of a ninth specific example when a command cannot be normally received. A figure showing an example of a presentation in concrete example 9 when a command cannot be received normally. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing specific examples 10 to 12 when a command cannot be normally received. A figure showing an example of a presentation in specific example 10 when a command cannot be received normally. A figure showing an example of a presentation in specific example 11 when a command cannot be received normally. A figure showing an example of a presentation in concrete example 12 when a command cannot be received normally. FIG. 13 is a timing chart showing specific examples 13 to 15 when a command cannot be normally received. A figure showing an example of a presentation in concrete example 13 when a command cannot be received normally. A figure showing an example of a presentation in specific example 14 when a command cannot be received normally. A figure showing an example of a presentation in specific example 15 when a command cannot be received normally. FIG. 23 is a timing chart of a sixteenth specific example when a command cannot be received normally. A figure showing an example of a presentation in concrete example 16 when a command cannot be received normally. FIG. 21 is a timing chart of a seventeenth example when a command cannot be normally received. A figure showing an example of a presentation in concrete example 17 when a command cannot be received normally. FIG. 23 is a timing chart of an eighteenth example when a command cannot be received normally. A figure showing an example of a presentation in concrete example 18 when a command cannot be received normally. A figure showing a time chart of inspection mode 1 of the main control board. A figure showing a time chart of inspection mode 2 of the main control board. A figure showing a time chart of inspection mode 3 of the main control board. A figure showing a time chart of inspection mode 4 of the main control board. A figure showing a time chart of inspection mode 5 of the main control board. A figure showing a timing chart of specific example 1 of image change presentation. A figure showing an example of specific example 1 of image change presentation. A figure showing a timing chart of specific example 2 of image change presentation. A figure showing an example of specific example 2 of image change presentation. A figure showing a timing chart of specific example 3 of image change presentation. A figure showing an example of specific example 3 of image change presentation. A figure showing a timing chart of specific example 4 of image change presentation. A figure showing an example of image change presentation specific example 4. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an image change presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an image change presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an image change presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an image change presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an image change presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an image change presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an image change presentation. A figure showing a timing chart of specific example 1 when conditions are not met in the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a performance when conditions are not met in the performance control unit. A figure showing a timing chart of specific example 2 when conditions are not met in the performance control unit. A figure showing a timing chart of specific example 3 when conditions are not met in the performance control unit. A figure showing a timing chart of specific example 4 when conditions are not met in the performance control unit. A figure showing a timing chart of specific example 5 when conditions are not met in the performance control unit. A figure showing a timing chart of specific example 6 when conditions are not met in the performance control unit. A figure showing a timing chart of specific example 7 when conditions are not met in the performance control unit. A figure showing a timing chart of specific example 8 when conditions are not met in the performance control unit. A figure showing a timing chart of concrete example 9 when conditions are not met in the performance control unit. A figure showing a timing chart of concrete example 10 when conditions are not met in the performance control unit. A figure showing a timing chart of concrete example 11 when conditions are not met in the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a specific example of rendering 1. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a specific example of rendering 1. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the execution ratio of effects using color effects. A diagram showing the execution rate of zone effects. A diagram showing the execution rate of change notification sound effects. A figure showing the execution rate of the pending icon change effect. A diagram showing the execution rate of lamp change effects. A diagram showing the execution rate of the operation performance of the first movable member. A figure showing a modified example of specific example 1 of the rendering. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the execution rate of light guide plate display effects. A figure showing a timing chart of the normal game state in specific example presentation 2. A figure showing the normal game state of specific example presentation 2. A figure showing a timing chart of a specific game state in specific example presentation 2. A figure showing a specific game state of specific example presentation 2. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a specific example of rendering 3. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a specific example of rendering 3. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the relationship of fluctuating time. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an execution ratio of the preparatory operation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an execution ratio of a stop operation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the execution rate of the fluctuation stop pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the execution rate of the fluctuation start pattern. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 of the rendering. A diagram showing the execution rate of the appearance change effect of the performance pattern. A diagram showing the execution rate of the display size change effect of the performance pattern. A diagram showing the execution rate of the display size change effect of the reach effect. A figure showing a timing chart of specific example 5 of the performance. A figure showing specific example 5 of presentation. A figure showing a specific example of presentation 6. A diagram showing the execution rate of notification effects. A diagram showing the execution rate of vibration effects. 1 is a front view showing an example of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is an oblique view showing an example of the back side of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a game control device provided in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a rear view showing the state in which each unit is assembled to the base frame. FIG. 198 is a partially exploded perspective view of FIG. 197 . This is an explanatory diagram of various random numbers obtained in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing in a main control board. 13 is a flowchart showing an initial setting process of the main control board. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process executed by a CPU of a main control board. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start port SW processing executed by a CPU of a main control board. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a gate detection SW process executed by a CPU of a control board. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of special pattern processing executed by the CPU of the main control board. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a customer waiting setting process executed by a CPU of a main control board. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special game determination process executed by a CPU of a main control board. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern selection process executed by a CPU of a main control board. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a fluctuation pattern table. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a process during stoppage executed by a CPU of a main control board. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of auxiliary pattern processing executed by the CPU of the main control board. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a large prize port processing executed by the CPU of the main control board. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of setting the number of rounds/operation pattern. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a game status setting process executed by a CPU of a main control board. A flowchart showing an example of a second starting port opening process executed by the CPU of the main control board. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process executed by a CPU of a performance control board. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a command receiving process executed by a CPU of a performance control board. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance selection process executed by a CPU of a performance control board. This is a flowchart showing an example of processing during the end of a variable performance executed by the CPU of the performance control board. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a winning effect selection process executed by a CPU of the effect control board. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of an ending performance selection process executed by a CPU of a performance control board. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a main board protection case according to an example of the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of a main board protection case including a base. 13 is a side view showing a state in which the main board protection case is attached to the base. FIG. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a main board protection case according to another example of the present embodiment. FIG. 226 is a rear oblique view of the main board protective case of FIG. 225. This is a diagram illustrating the state in which the main board protection case of Figure 225 has been removed from the base. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing modified examples of a position display portion provided on a main board case. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing modified examples of a position display portion provided on a main board case. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing modified examples of a position display portion provided on a main board case. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing a modified example in which an identification mark is formed on a main board case. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing a modified example in which an identification mark is formed on a main board case. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing modified examples of the main board case. 13 is a view of the seal portion and the main ROM as seen from diagonally above and behind. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the structure of a main control board. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the configuration of a printed circuit board used in a main control board. A figure showing a main board case that accommodates the main control board shown in Figures 235 and 236. This is an exploded oblique view of the main board case including the base of the main board case of Figure 216. 13 is a schematic diagram illustrating the procedure for assembling a cutting member, an anti-tamper seal, and a cap to a sealing base portion, focusing on the protruding piece of the upper case piece. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the state immediately before the cutting member, the anti-tamper seal, and the cap are assembled to the sealing base portion 310. FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing a state in which an unsealing seal is adhered to a sealing base portion. FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing a state in which a cap is attached to an unopenable seal. FIG. 13 is a perspective view showing the state in which the cap has been removed and the open-prohibition seal has been broken. FIG. 1A and 1B are a front view and a partially enlarged view of an example of an unopenable seal. A diagram showing the component layout of the dispensing control board in this embodiment. 13 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the dispensing control board protective case. FIG. This is an exploded oblique view of the dispensing control board case. This is an exploded oblique view of the dispensing control board case. 4A and 4B are diagrams for explaining the structure of an image control board. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a configuration of a printed circuit board used in an image control board. 1 is an enlarged view of a portion of a printed wiring board used in an image control board; A front view explaining the configuration of the performance control board protective case. This is an exploded oblique view of the performance control board case. FIG. 13 is an exploded oblique view of the performance control board case. 11 is a diagram for explaining another configuration of the main control board according to the embodiment. FIG. This figure shows the main board case of this embodiment when the main control board described in Figure 255 is stored therein. This is an exploded oblique view including the base of the main board case shown in Figure 255. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating yet another configuration of the main control board according to the present embodiment. This is a front view of the main board case of this embodiment when the main control board described in Figure 258 is stored. This is an exploded oblique view including the base of the main board case shown in Figure 259. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing the display transition of the image display device and the performance display unit when the RWM is cleared. 13 is a diagram showing the display transitions of the image display device, the performance display unit, and the setting display unit when the settings are changed in a case where the gaming machine is equipped with a separate performance display unit and a setting display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the display transitions of the image display device, the performance display unit, and the setting display unit when the settings are changed in a case where the gaming machine is equipped with a separate performance display unit and a setting display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the display transition of the image display device and the performance display unit when the gaming machine is equipped with a performance display unit that also serves as a setting display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the display transitions of the image display device, the performance display unit, and the setting display unit when checking settings in a case where the gaming machine is equipped with a separate performance display unit and a setting display unit. FIG.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 1. Fig. 1 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

The gaming machine 1 is provided with an outer frame 2, a gaming board mounting frame 3 that is rotatably supported relative to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 that is rotatably supported relative to the gaming board mounting frame 3, and a gaming board 5 that has a gaming area 5a formed therein through which gaming balls flow.

The outer frame 2 is made up of a rectangular base frame 2a with a central opening in the front-rear direction, to which a decorative plate 2b is attached at the lower front. The outer frame 2 is fixed to the island equipment of the amusement arcade via fastening members (e.g., nails, fasteners, etc.).

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism 6 at one horizontal end, and is supported rotatably with the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated like a door relative to the outer frame 2, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, making it possible to perform maintenance on various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism 7 at one horizontal end, and is supported rotatably with the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated like a door relative to the game board mounting frame 3, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-to-rear direction is formed in the approximate center near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or acrylic plate) is attached to cover the opening 8 from the rear, making it possible to see the play area 5a through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, there are provided an audio output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having multiple decorative lamps (LEDs), an upper tray 11 for storing multiple game balls such as those paid out from the game ball payout device 100 described below, a lower tray 12 for receiving and storing game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and flow into the overflow ball flow path described below, and a launch operation device 13 that can be operated to launch the game balls.

The audio output devices 9 are provided at two locations spaced apart on the top of the glass frame 4, and are designed to output background music (BGM), sound effects (SE), etc. to create a sound (music, voice) effect. A number of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and lighting effects are created by changing the direction of light irradiation and the color of light emitted by each lamp (LED). The frame lighting devices 10 are also equipped with an alarm LED 10a that is controlled to light up/blink when the glass frame 4 opens or a dispensing abnormality, which will be described later, occurs.

The bottom surface of the storage section 11a of the upper tray 11 for the game balls slopes downward toward the direction (right direction) of the launch operation device 13, and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward slope. When the game balls stored in the storage section 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the ball feed solenoid 11b operates to send the game balls out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3.

In addition, in the central front part of the upper tray 11, a performance button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see Figure 1) are arranged side by side and function as input devices for performing decision operations and selection operations related to various performances described below.

The effect button device 16 is provided with an effect button 17 (not shown) that can be used to perform operations such as decision operations (operation input), an effect button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 2) that detects operations on the effect button 17, and a button drive device 17b (see FIG. 2) for driving the effect button 17, allowing the player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

The performance button 17 is capable of performing a performance light emission by lighting the performance button LED (full color), which is part of the frame lighting device 10 (see Figure 2), in a predetermined light emission mode, and can perform a performance action by moving vertically between a standby position (origin position) located below and a performance position located above by the driving force of a button drive motor, which is part of the button drive device 17b, and/or vibrating in a predetermined vibration mode by the driving force of a button vibration motor, which is part of the button drive device 17b, and is detected to be in the origin position by a button position detection sensor (not shown).

The selection button device 18 is provided with a cross key 19 (not shown) that can be used to perform operations such as selection, and a cross key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 2) that is connected to the cross key 19 and detects operations on the cross key 19, allowing the player to input specified information into the gaming machine 1.

In addition, a lending/return operation unit 20 is provided on the right side of the upper tray 11, which can lend game balls and return storage media such as cards that store the remaining balance. When the lending button (not shown) of the lending/return operation unit 20 is operated, the remaining balance stored in the storage media accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) attached to the gaming machine 1 is subtracted and game balls are lent out, and when the return button (not shown) of the lending/return operation unit 20 is operated, the storage media is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

Between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12, an overflow ball flow path (not shown) is formed to receive game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and guide them to the lower tray 12. In addition, a tray full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 2) is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path to detect when the lower tray 12 is full of game balls, and while the tray full detection switch 32a detects that the lower tray 12 is full, the payout of game balls by the game ball payout device 100 described below is stopped.

The launch operation device 13 is provided with a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a launch handle 15 rotatably mounted on the base 14, a touch sensor 15a (see FIG. 2) that detects whether the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, a launch volume 15b (see FIG. 2) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the launch handle 15, and a handle light-emitting device 15c for illuminating the launch handle 15 in a predetermined manner. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, the ball-feeding solenoid 11b is activated and the game balls are sent out one by one.

The handle light-emitting device 15c constitutes the front part of the launch handle 15 and is formed in a dome shape that bulges forward, with multiple LEDs arranged in an internal space defined by a light-transmitting lens member. The LEDs emit light, making it possible to perform a lighting effect in which the launch handle 15 is illuminated in a specified manner.

The game board mounting frame 3 is provided with a game board mounting section 25 for mounting the game board 5, a launching device 26 for launching game balls toward the game area 5a, a locking mechanism 27 for locking the game board mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 in a closed state, and an opening detection switch 31a for detecting the opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4.

The game board mounting section 25 is formed in a recessed chamber shape that opens to the front at approximately the center near the top of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. At the back of the recessed chamber of the game board mounting section 25, an opening that opens in the front-to-rear direction is provided, and through this opening, various devices and the like provided on the back side of the game board 5 face the rear of the gaming machine 1.

The launching device 26 is provided with a launching member 28 for launching the game ball, a launching solenoid 28b (see FIG. 2) for driving the launching member 28, a launching rail 29 that slopes upward from the launching member 28 toward the lower left end of the game board, and a stopper 30 that stops the game ball A at the launch position, which is the lower end of the slope of the launching rail 29. Then, when the game ball sent out by the ball feed solenoid 11b is received at the launch position, the game ball A is launched toward the game area 5a by the operation of the launching member 28.

The locking mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting part 25, and the front end of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. When a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the game board mounting frame 3 is unlocked and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

At a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, there are provided a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 located on the outside of the inner rail 35, and a guide member 37 that guides the game balls toward the center of the game area 5a. Between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36, there is formed a launched ball guide path 38 that guides the game balls launched by the launching device 26 to the upstream part of the game area 5a. In addition, at the most downstream part of the game area 5a, there is formed an outlet 39 for guiding the game balls that have flowed down outside the game area (the collection part of the game board mounting frame 3).

A decorative frame 40, which is a frame that restricts the entry of game balls into the interior, known as a center case, is provided in the approximate center of the play area 5a, and a presentation space 40a is formed inside the decorative frame 40. A warp device 41 is provided on the side of the decorative frame 40 to guide game balls flowing down the play area 5a into the decorative frame 40, and a stage section 42 is provided at the bottom of the decorative frame 40 to roll the game balls introduced into the decorative frame 40 by the warp device 41 and cause them to flow down below the decorative frame 40.

At the bottom of the game area 5a, there are multiple (four in this embodiment) general winning openings 43 spaced apart, through which game balls can always enter (be entered). When a game ball that has entered (been entered) one of the general winning openings 43 is detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a (see Figure 2), a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls from the game ball payout device 100 (not shown) to the upper tray 11.

On both sides (left and right areas) of the game area 5a, there are provided normal gates 44 (normal start areas) through which the game ball can pass. When a game ball that has passed through the normal gates 44 is detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see Figure 2), a winning lottery for a normal symbol (auxiliary game determination) is held. The winning lottery for a normal symbol will be described later.

At the bottom of the game area 5a, directly below the stage section 42, there is a first start hole 45 (special pattern start area) where game balls can always enter (enter), and when a game ball that has entered (entered) this first start hole 45 is detected by the first start hole detection switch 45a (see Figure 2), a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., three balls) are paid out as prize balls from the game ball payout device 100 to the upper tray 11. In addition to paying out the prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game judgment) for the first special pattern (identification information) is held, which will be described later.

Below the first starting hole 45, there is a variable starting section 46 that changes from a closed state (basic mode) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter (slot) to an open state (special mode) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter (slot) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning the lottery for a normal pattern).

The variable start section 46 is provided with a second start hole 47 (special starting area) through which the game ball can enter (enter), a second start hole detection switch 47a (see FIG. 2) that detects the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 47, a movable member 48 that converts (varies) the second start hole 47 between a closed state and an open state, and a second start hole opening/closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 2) that converts the movable member 48 between an open state and an closed state. When the second start hole 47 is in a closed state, it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter, and when the second start hole 47 is in an open state, it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter (enter).

When a game ball that has entered (entered) the second start hole 47 is detected by the second start hole detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., three balls) are paid out as prize balls from the game ball payout device 100 to the upper tray 11. In addition to paying out the prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game judgment) for the second special symbol (identification information) described below is also held.

Between the first starting hole 45 and the variable starting section 46, a winning hole lamp NR (not shown) is provided to illuminate the first starting hole 45 and the area around the variable starting section 46 in a predetermined manner, and a lighting effect can be created by illuminating the board lighting device 76, which has multiple lamps (full-color LEDs, etc.).

Above the guide member 37 and downstream of the right-side normal gate 44, there is a variable winning section 49 that is converted from a closed state (basic mode) in which the game ball cannot win (enter) to an open state (special mode) in which the game ball can win (enter) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning the jackpot lottery for a special symbol).

The variable winning section 49 is provided with a large winning opening 50 through which game balls can win (enter), a large winning opening detection switch 50a (see FIG. 2) for detecting the entry (entry) of a game ball into the large winning opening 50, an opening/closing member 51 for converting (variable) the large winning opening 50 between a closed state and an open state, and a large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b for converting the opening/closing member 51 between open and closed. When the large winning opening 50 is in a closed state, it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to win, and when the large winning opening 50 is in an open state, it is possible or easy for a game ball to win (enter).

In addition, when a game ball that has entered the large prize opening 50 is detected by the large prize opening detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 15 balls) are paid out from the game ball payout device 100 to the upper tray 11 as prize balls.

On the back side of the game board 5, there is an out-ball flow path that receives and collects game balls that have entered the general prize opening 43, the first start opening 45, the second start opening 47, and the large prize opening 50 and are detected by the general prize opening detection switch 43a, the first start opening detection switch 45a, the second start opening detection switch 47a, and the large prize opening detection switch 50a, as well as game balls that have flowed into the outlet 39, and allows them to flow down, and an out-ball detection switch 52a is provided at the most downstream part of the out-ball flow path. Game balls that flow down this out-ball flow path and are detected by the out-ball detection switch 52a are discharged from the outlet on the back side of the game machine 1 to the outside of the game machine 1 (island equipment).

Outside the play area 5a, there is a main information display device 59 consisting of a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, a normal symbol display 62, a first special symbol reserved display 63, a second special symbol reserved display 64, and a normal symbol reserved display 65, a round number display 66 (see FIG. 2) that displays the number of rounds when a jackpot game (special game mode) described later is executed, a right-hand hit display 67 (see FIG. 2) that prompts the player to shoot the game ball toward the right area of the play area 5a during a jackpot game (special game) or a time-saving game state, and a status confirmation display 68 (see FIG. 2) that shows that the game is set to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode described later.

A winning probability display sticker (not shown) is attached near the main information display device 59. The winning probability display sticker has the winning probability (1/285 to 1/300) and the set value (4 to 1) of the jackpot of the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment printed on it. Note that the location of the winning probability display sticker 200 is just one example, and is not limited to the vicinity of the main information display device 59, but may be on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1.

The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of a jackpot lottery for a first special symbol, which is held on the condition that a gaming ball enters (sinks) the first starting hole 45, the second special symbol display 61 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of a jackpot lottery for a second special symbol, which is held on the condition that a gaming ball enters (sinks) the second starting hole 47, and the normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of a winning lottery for a normal symbol, which is held on the condition that a gaming ball enters (sinks) the normal gate 44.

The jackpot lottery for the first special symbol corresponds to obtaining a random number value for jackpot determination (judgment information) when a gaming ball enters (enters) the first starting hole 45, and comparing the obtained random number value for jackpot determination with the jackpot judgment value to judge whether or not there is a "jackpot". When the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol is held, the first special symbol is displayed in a varying manner on the first special symbol display 60, and after a predetermined time has passed, the first special symbol is displayed as a stationary display indicating the lottery result. In other words, the stationary display of the first special symbol serves as an announcement of the lottery result.

The jackpot lottery for the second special symbol corresponds to obtaining a random number value for jackpot determination (judgment information) when a gaming ball enters (enters) the second starting hole 47, and comparing the obtained random number value for jackpot determination with the jackpot judgment value to judge whether or not there is a "jackpot". When the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol is held, the second special symbol is displayed in a varying manner on the second special symbol display 61, and after a predetermined time has passed, the second special symbol is displayed as a still symbol indicating the lottery result. In other words, the still display of the second special symbol serves as an announcement of the lottery result.

The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are each composed of multiple LEDs, and when each special symbol changes, the LEDs of the corresponding display blink at a predetermined interval or sequence. When a special symbol is displayed stationary, the LEDs light up in a manner that indicates the result of each jackpot lottery (jackpot, loss).

In this embodiment, a "jackpot" refers to a state in which the right to play a jackpot game (special game) has been acquired in a jackpot lottery for the first special symbol (special game judgment) or a jackpot lottery for the second special symbol (special game judgment). A "jackpot game" refers to a game state in which a round game in which the big prize opening 50 is opened in a predetermined manner is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 15 times).

The maximum number of times the jackpot opening 50 can be opened and the maximum opening time for each round of play are preset, but if a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., nine balls) enter the jackpot opening 50 even before the maximum number of times or maximum opening time is reached, one round of play ends. In other words, the "jackpot game (special game)" is a game state that is advantageous for players who are more likely to win prize balls. In this embodiment, it is possible to generate one of several types of jackpot games that differ in the degree of advantage they offer to the player, which will be described in more detail below.

The winning lottery for the normal symbol corresponds to obtaining a random number value for winning judgment when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44, and comparing the obtained random number value for winning judgment with the winning judgment value to determine whether or not there is a "win". When the winning lottery for the normal symbol is performed, the normal symbol is displayed in a varying manner on the normal symbol display 62, and after a predetermined time has passed, the normal symbol is displayed stationarily to indicate the lottery result. In other words, the stationary display of the normal symbol serves as a notification of the lottery result.

The normal symbol display 62 is composed of one or more LEDs, and the LEDs flash at a predetermined interval or sequence when displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner. When displaying a normal symbol in a static manner, the LEDs light up in a manner that indicates the result of the winning lottery (a winning state or a losing state).

In this embodiment, "win" refers to a state in which the right to play a win state (auxiliary game) is acquired in a winning lottery for normal symbols. "Winning game (auxiliary game)" refers to a game state in which the second starting hole 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

The maximum number of times the second start hole 47 can be opened and the maximum opening time during a winning game (auxiliary game) are preset, but if a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., nine balls) enter the second start hole 47 even before the maximum number of times and maximum opening time are reached, the winning game (auxiliary game) ends. In other words, the "winning game (auxiliary game)" is a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed (the conditions for starting the variable display are likely to be met). In this embodiment, multiple types of winning games (auxiliary games) with different degrees of advantage to the player are provided, which will be described in detail later.

The first special symbol reserved indicator 63 is composed of multiple LEDs, and is intended to display the number of rights (first reserved memories) to hold a jackpot lottery for the first special symbol (variable display of the first special symbol) that are stored when a gaming ball enters (enters) the first starting hole 45, and lights up or flashes in a manner that indicates the number of first reserved memories. Note that up to four first reserved memories can be stored, but the number may be more or less than four.

The second special symbol reserved indicator 64 is composed of multiple LEDs, and is intended to display the number of rights (second reserved memories) to hold a jackpot lottery for the second special symbol (variable display of the second special symbol) that are stored when a gaming ball enters (enters) the second starting hole 47, and lights up or flashes in a manner that indicates the number of second reserved memories. Note that up to four second reserved memories can be stored, but the number may be more or less than four.

The normal symbol reserved indicator 65 is composed of multiple LEDs, and is intended to display the number of rights (normal symbol reserved memories) to hold a winning lottery for a normal symbol (variable display of normal symbols) that are stored when a game ball enters (passes) the normal symbol gate 44, and lights up or flashes in a manner that indicates the number of normal symbol reserved memories. Note that up to four normal symbol reserved memories can be stored, but the number may be more or less than four.

The first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured with a seven-segment LED. For example, if a special symbol jackpot lottery is won, a static "7" can be displayed, and if a loss occurs, a static "-" can be displayed, with the light being turned off and the "-" alternating during the variable display. Before the variable display of the special symbol begins, the stopped result of the previous variable display is displayed by the LED being lit, so by starting with the LED being turned off when the variable display begins, it becomes easier to know that the variable display has started.

The round number indicator 66 is composed of multiple LEDs and is intended to display the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) occurs. When a jackpot game starts, the LEDs start to light up in a predetermined manner indicating the number of rounds, the LEDs continue to light up during the jackpot game, and when the jackpot game ends, the LEDs are turned off. For example, if the jackpot game has two rounds, only the fourth LED from the left lights up, and if the jackpot game has sixteen rounds, all LEDs light up.

The right-hit indicator 67 is composed of one LED, and is used to display a right-hit display that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right-side game area (so-called right hit) during a jackpot state (special game state) and during a time-limited game state, and the LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game state) and during the time-limited game state.

The status confirmation indicator 68 is composed of a single LED and is intended to indicate that the setting change mode, which will be described later, or the setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set. When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is entered, the LED starts to light up, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended, the LED goes out. In this way, the status confirmation indicator 68, which indicates that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, is provided on the front (surface) of the gaming machine, making it easy to check whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set.

Note that the installation location of the status check indicator 68 is just an example, and is not limited to the installation location in this embodiment, but may be on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, in this embodiment, the same display mode (illuminated display) is displayed regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but the display may be made so that it is possible to recognize which mode it is set to. For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation indicator 68 may be illuminated, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation indicator 68 may be flashed, or when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation indicator 68 and one of the indicators of the second game information display device 69 may be illuminated, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, only the status confirmation indicator 68 may be illuminated.

In addition, in this embodiment, a status confirmation indicator 68 is provided as a dedicated indicator to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set, but it may be used in combination with another indicator. For example, in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, the main information display device 59 and the second game information display device 69 described below are turned off, so these displays may be used. Specifically, one LED of the display of either the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on, or all LEDs of the main information display device 59 and the second game information display device 69 may be turned on.

At the bottom right inside the play area 5a, there is provided a sub information display device 80 consisting of a sub first change indicator 81, a sub second change indicator 82, a sub first hold indicator 83, a sub second hold indicator 84, a sub normal map change indicator 85, a sub normal map hold indicator 86, and a sub right hit indicator 87 that prompts the player to shoot the game ball toward the right area of the play area 5a (so-called right hit). Note that the sub information display device 80 does not have an indicator such as the above-mentioned status confirmation indicator 68 that indicates that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode described below is set.

The sub-first variable display 81 is for displaying (informing) the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol, and the sub-second variable display 82 is for displaying (informing) the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol, and each is composed of one LED. When the variable display of the corresponding special symbol begins, the LED flashes (variable display) at a specified interval, and when the corresponding special symbol is displayed stationary, the result of the jackpot lottery (lights up in the case of a jackpot, and goes out in the case of a loss) is displayed stationary.

In addition, the sub-first change display 81 and the sub-second change display 82 may be configured to flash while the special pattern is being displayed and to light up or go out when the special pattern is displayed as stopped, so that it is possible to know whether or not the special pattern is being displayed as changed.

The sub-first hold indicator 83 is for displaying the number of first hold memories, and the sub-second hold indicator 84 is for displaying the number of second hold memories, and each is composed of two LEDs, one on the left and one on the right. When the number of hold memories is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the number of hold memories is "1", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off, when the number of hold memories is "2", the left LED is blinking and the right LED is turned on when the number of hold memories is "3", and when the number of hold memories is "4", the left and right LEDs are blinking.

The sub-regular symbol variation display 85 is for displaying (informing) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variation display of the regular symbol starts, the LED blinks (varies) at a specified interval. Then, when the regular symbol is displayed in a static state, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights up in the case of a win, and goes out in the case of a loss) is displayed in a static state.

In addition, the sub-regular pattern change indicator 85 may be configured to flash while displaying the normal pattern change, and to light up or go out when the normal pattern is displayed as stopped, so that it is possible to know whether or not the normal pattern change is being displayed.

The sub-regular map reserved indicator 86 is used to display the number of reserved regular map memories, and is composed of two LEDs lined up on the left and right. When the number of reserved regular map memories is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the number of reserved regular map memories is "1", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off, when the number of reserved regular map memories is "2", the left LED flashes and the right LED is turned on, and when the number of reserved regular map memories is "4", the left and right LEDs flash.

A first image display device 70 (main LCD) consisting of a liquid crystal display is provided at the back of the performance space 40a, a second image display device 71 (sub LCD) consisting of a liquid crystal display with a smaller display area than the first image display device 70 (main LCD) is provided at the bottom of the performance space 40a and in front of the first image display device 70 (main LCD), a first movable member 73 modeled after a character's face is provided at the top of the performance space 40a, and a circular second movable member 74 is provided at the right part of the performance space 40a.

The image display device consisting of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) displays various effects according to the progress of the game. The effects include a customer waiting demo effect that is executed during a customer waiting state (a waiting state where the game is not progressing) in which the special pattern is not displayed in a variable manner, and a variable effect that accompanies the display of a variable performance pattern 70a that is executed during the display of a variable special pattern.

The display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) has three columns of variable display areas, namely a left area, a central area, and a right area, and the variable display of the performance pattern 70a is performed by scrolling the performance pattern 70a displayed in each variable display area vertically (from top to bottom in this embodiment).

The performance pattern 70a is composed of patterns showing numbers from "1" to "9", for example, and the display of the performance pattern 70a changes in response (synchronization) to the display of the special patterns executed by the first special pattern display device 60 and the second special pattern display device 61. That is, the display of the performance pattern 70a starts in response to the start of the display of the special patterns, the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped (oscillating) before the display of the special patterns stops, and the display of the performance pattern 70a stops (still) in response to the display of the special patterns stopping. In addition to the patterns showing numbers, the performance pattern 70a may be provided with patterns showing alphabets such as "A" to "F".

Note that a "temporary stop display" refers to a state in which the performance pattern 70a fluctuates slightly or changes shape slightly, making it appear to the player that the performance pattern 70a is stopped (but is not completely stopped).

When the performance symbol 70a is displayed in a stopped state, the performance symbol 70a stops for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) in a predetermined state (miss state, jackpot state, etc.) that indicates the result of the jackpot lottery. A jackpot state (special result state) is a combination of the same performance symbols such as "777" or a combination of performance symbols with a pattern such as "357", while a miss state is any other state. Note that the state of the variable display of the performance symbol 70a is not limited to this, and it may scroll left and right, or rotate (spin) on the spot.

In addition, while the display of the effect pattern 70a is changing, various effect images and movies such as reach effects, background images, characters, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) and the second image display device 71 (sub-LCD) depending on the result of the jackpot lottery, thereby increasing the player's anticipation of the execution of a jackpot (special game) (hereinafter referred to as the "jackpot winning expectation").

Here, "reach effect" refers to a change pattern that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be played, such as when some of the combinations of effect patterns 70a that indicate a jackpot temporarily stop and other effect patterns 70a change. For example, when a combination of effect patterns 70a with three digits, "777," is set as the combination of effect patterns 70a that indicates a jackpot (jackpot result mode), this refers to a state in which two effect patterns 70a temporarily stop at "7" in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect patterns 70a change in the center area.

In addition, in this embodiment, there are five types of reach effects: "normal reach effect," "SP reach effect," "SPSP reach effect," and "full rotation reach effect."

A "normal reach effect" is a reach effect that is executed in a state where the background image before the normal reach effect is displayed, two effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect pattern 70a fluctuates in the central area to form a reach state.

The "SP reach effect" is a reach effect that is executed after a normal reach effect, in which the effect pattern 70a in the reach state is displayed in a reduced size in the corner of the screen, and a movie (video, animation, etc.) is played that has a stronger effect (higher expectation of a jackpot) than the normal reach effect.

An "SPSP reach effect" is a reach effect that is executed after a normal reach effect or an SP reach effect, and plays a movie (video, animation, etc.) that has a higher effect (higher expectation of a jackpot) than a normal reach effect or an SP reach effect.

The "full rotation reach effect" is a reach effect that changes slowly when all the combinations of multiple performance symbols 70a that indicate a jackpot are in place. In this embodiment, this reach effect is executed only when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery.

In this embodiment, the expected probability of winning a jackpot related to reach effects increases in the following order: normal reach effect < SP reach effect < SPSP reach effect < full rotation reach effect (guaranteed jackpot).

The display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) is provided with a first reserved icon display area 70B for displaying a number of first reserved icons corresponding to the first special pattern reserved number (U1), which is the current number of first reserved memories, a second reserved icon display area 70D for displaying a number of second reserved icons corresponding to the second special pattern reserved number (U2), which is the current number of second reserved memories, and a corresponding icon display area 70C for displaying a corresponding icon corresponding to (related to) the changing display of the special pattern (performance pattern 70a) currently being executed.

The first reserved icon display area 70B is divided into a first display section 70B1, a second display section 70B2, a third display section 70B3, and a fourth display section 70B4 from the side closest to the icon display area 70C, and each display section 70B1 to 70B4 displays a number of first reserved icons corresponding to the number of reserved first special symbols (U1). In other words, the number of first reserved icons increases or decreases in response to an increase or decrease in the number of reserved first special symbols (U1).

Specifically, the first display section 70B1 displays a first hold icon H11 indicating the first hold memory in which the first special symbol variable display is executed first, the second display section 70B2 displays a first hold icon H12 indicating the first hold memory in which the first special symbol variable display is executed second, the third display section 70B3 displays a first hold icon H13 indicating the first hold memory in which the first special symbol variable display is executed third, and the fourth display section 70B4 displays a first hold icon H14 indicating the first hold memory in which the first special symbol variable display is executed fourth.

The second reserved icon display area 70D is divided into a first display section 70D1, a second display section 70D2, a third display section 70D3, and a fourth display section 70D4 from the side closest to the icon display area 70C, and each display section 70D1 to 70D4 displays a number of second reserved icons corresponding to the second special pattern reserved number (U2). In other words, the number of second reserved icons increases or decreases in response to an increase or decrease in the second special pattern reserved number (U2).

Specifically, the first display section 70D1 displays a second hold icon H21 indicating a second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed first, the second display section 70D2 displays a second hold icon H22 indicating a second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed second, the third display section 70D3 displays a second hold icon H23 indicating a second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed third, and the fourth display section 70D4 displays a second hold icon H24 indicating a second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed fourth. Note that in this embodiment, the "first special symbol hold number" may be referred to as the "first hold number" and the "second special symbol hold number" may be referred to as the "second hold number".

In the icon display area 70C, the first reserved icon displayed in the first display section 70B1 of the first reserved icon display area 70B or the second reserved icon displayed in the first display section 70D1 of the second reserved icon display area 70D moves (shifts) in response to the start of the variable display of the special pattern (performance pattern 70a), and the icon TH disappears (is erased) when the variable display of the special pattern (performance pattern 70a) ends. The icon may be erased during the variable display of the special pattern (performance pattern 70a). In this embodiment, the "first reserved icon", "second reserved icon", and "the icon" may be collectively referred to as "icon".

The first movable member 73 can emit light for special effects by lighting the first movable member LED (full color), which is part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a specified light emission mode, and can perform special effects by moving vertically between a standby position (origin position) located above and a performance position located below by the driving force of the first movable member drive motor, which is part of the board drive device 75 (see FIG. 2). The first movable member 73 is detected to be in the origin position by a first position detection sensor (not shown).

The second movable member 74 can emit light for special effects by lighting the second movable member LED (full color), which is part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a specified light emission mode, and can perform special effects by moving diagonally up and down between a standby position (origin position) located in the upper right and a special effect position located in the lower left by the driving force of the second movable member drive motor, which is part of the board drive device 75 (see FIG. 2). The second movable member 74 is detected to be in the origin position by a second position detection sensor (not shown).

The first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are designed so that their performance positions overlap in part, so that the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 do not move simultaneously and therefore do not collide with each other.

In addition, if the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 do not collide with each other, one movable member may be moved to its performance position when it returns to a position that does not overlap with the performance position of the other movable member.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, there are a game ball payout device 100 for paying out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball loans), a game ball storage section (not shown) that stores game balls supplied from island equipment and the like and supplies them to the game ball payout device 100, a main control device 110A (not shown) that incorporates a main control board 110 that provides overall control over the progress of the game, and a control circuit 110B (not shown) that controls the game ball payout device 100 in response to payout control commands from the main control board 110. The gaming machine is equipped with a payout control device 120A (not shown) that incorporates a payout control board 120 that performs payout control, a presentation control device 130A (not shown) that incorporates a presentation control board 130 that controls presentation in response to presentation control commands from the main control board 110, a power supply device 160A (not shown) that incorporates a power supply board 160 that supplies power supply voltage to various control devices, and a game information output terminal board 90 (see Figure 2) for outputting game information (game signal) to the outside of the gaming machine.

The main control device 110A comprises a main control board 110 on whose surface various electronic components are mounted, a board case made of transparent resin for housing the main control board 110 inside, a sealing seal 104 for restricting the opening of the board case, and a transparent resin seal cover member 105 attached to the board case so as to cover the sealing seal 104.

On the front side of the main control board 110, there are mounted a main control unit 110m consisting of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, an RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal to clear the memory contents of the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m or to update a setting value which is the stage of the advantageous degree of the game (differentiating the advantageous degree of the game), a setting key switch 112a for inputting a signal to move to a state in which the setting value can be changed by operating the setting key or to a state in which the setting value can be confirmed, and an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values which allow the actual performance of the gaming machine 1 to be grasped.

The information display 113 is used to display set values and performance information (normal base values, described below), and is configured with four 7-segment displays (113a-113d) with decimal points DP arranged side-by-side. The two 7-segment displays corresponding to the top two digits form an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type of performance information (data type), and the two 7-segment displays corresponding to the bottom two digits form a numeric segment for displaying numeric information indicating the set value and the numerical value of the performance information.

The board case has a recessed lower case member with an open section facing the back side of the main control board 110, and a recessed upper case member with an open section facing the front side of the main control board 110. When the lower case member and the upper case member are closed, a storage space for storing the main control board 110 is formed.

A model name sticker with the model name (model name) of the gaming machine 1 printed on it and a control number sticker with the control number of the main control board 110 printed on it are affixed side by side to the top surface of the upper case member so as not to overlap the information display 113 front to back. In addition, an operating member 108 for pressing (ON) the actuator of the RWM clear switch 111a is loosely fitted in a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 111a. Pressing the operating member 108 turns the RWM clear switch 111a ON.

In addition, an insertion section (not shown) for inserting the setting key into the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a is formed at a position corresponding to the setting key switch 112a. This insertion section has an opening for exposing the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a to the outside, and a cylindrical section extending rearward from the edge of the opening so as to cover the periphery of the setting key switch 112a. When the setting key is inserted into the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a through the opening and turned to the right from the initial position, the setting key switch 112a turns ON and the setting key cannot be removed from the keyhole, and when it is turned to the left and returned to the initial position, the setting key switch 112a turns OFF and the setting key can be removed from the keyhole.

The control number sticker has an opener section for recording the name of the person who opened the main control board 110, and an opening date section for recording the date on which the main control board 110 was opened, side by side, on the surface of a colorless and transparent base sticker.

The opener's entry area has four colored (white) entry areas (first to fourth entry areas) spaced apart vertically, and transparent window areas are provided between each entry area to allow the electronic components mounted on the surface of the main control board 110 to be viewed (visually confirmed).

The opening date entry section has four colored (white) entry areas (first to fourth entry areas) spaced apart vertically, and transparent window areas are provided between each entry area to allow the electronic components mounted on the surface of the main control board 110 to be viewed (visually confirmed).

The first to fourth writing areas of the opener entry section are adjacent to the first to fourth writing areas of the opening date entry section with a gap between them, and transparent window areas are provided between each writing area to allow the electronic components mounted on the surface of the main control board 110 to be visually confirmed.

In addition, a performance display unit consisting of four seven-segment displays and a circuit board may be mounted on the main control board as the information display 113. Even in this case, it is preferable to align them so that they do not overlap each other, so that visibility is not restricted (obstructed) by the model name sticker and the control number sticker.

In addition, rather than mounting the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, and the information display 113 on the main control board 110, at least one of the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, and the information display 113 may be mounted on a dedicated board and connected to the main control board 110 in a board case of the main control board 110 via board-to-board connection.

In addition, the RWM clear switch 111a may not be mounted on the main control board 110 or a dedicated board contained in the board case of the main control board 110, but may be provided on the power supply board 160, on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3, or on the back side of the glass frame 4, as long as the location is such that the player cannot operate it. Even in this case, it is preferable that the signal from the RWM clear switch 111a is input to the main control unit 110m.

In addition, instead of inputting a signal to clear the contents stored in the main RAM 110c or update the setting value by operating the RWM clear switch 111a, a dedicated setting switch that inputs a signal to update the setting value separately from the RWM clear switch 111a may be provided. In this case, the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting switch may be mounted on the main control board 110 or a dedicated board contained in the board case of the main control board 110, or may be provided on the power supply board 160 in a position where it cannot be operated by the player, on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3, or on the back side of the glass frame 4.

In addition, instead of displaying both the performance information and the setting value on the information display 113, another display may be implemented on the main control board 110 or a dedicated board contained in the board case of the main control board 110, and the performance information may be displayed on one of the displays, and the setting value may be displayed on the other display.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to Fig. 2. Fig. 2 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment.

The main control board 110 controls the overall progress of the game (basic operations). The main control board 110 is equipped with a main control unit 110m as a one-chip microcomputer equipped with a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs, and a main RAM 110c (corresponding to a volatile storage means) that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, as well as input and output ports for main control. The main CPU 110a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the programs stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while using the main RAM 110c as a work area, thereby controlling controlled devices (various solenoids and various displays) and sending predetermined commands based on the results of the arithmetic processing to the payout control board 120, the performance control board 130, etc.

Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to allow commands (data) to be communicated in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130 is configured to allow commands (data) to be communicated in only one direction, from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130.

The input port of the main control board 110 is connected to the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the gate detection switch 44a, the first starting hole detection switch 45a, the second starting hole detection switch 47a, the large winning hole detection switch 50a, the out ball detection switch 52a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a, the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, the information display 113, and the payout control board 120. When detection signals from the various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing is performed according to the detection signals.

The output port of the main control board 110 is connected to the second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, the large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, the main information display device 59, the game information output terminal board 90, the payout control board 120, and the performance control board 130. Drive control signals for controlling the various solenoids, display control signals for controlling the various displays, and game information to be notified from the game information output terminal board to the outside of the gaming machine (such as a hall computer) are output via the output port.

The memory area of the main control unit 110m includes a memory area allocated to the main ROM 110b and a memory area allocated to the main RAM 110c.

The memory areas of the main ROM 110b are, in order, a game ROM area in which programs and data related to the progress of the game are stored, an information ROM area in which programs and data related to the performance display of the gaming machine are stored, an unused area of 16 bytes or more in which access is prohibited and in which "0" is stored, a ROM comment area in which data such as the program title and version are stored, a vector table area in which the start address of the timer interrupt processing described below is set, and a HW parameter area in which parameters such as the start address and end address of the access prohibited area are set.

The game ROM area is arranged in the following order: a game program area in which programs related to the game progress are stored; a first unused area in which access is prohibited and in which "0" is stored; a game data area in which data related to the game progress is stored; and a second unused area in which access is prohibited and in which "0" is stored.

The information ROM area is arranged in the following order: an information program area in which programs related to the performance display of the gaming machine are stored, an unused area in which access is prohibited and in which "0" is stored, and an information data area in which data related to the performance display of the gaming machine is stored.

The memory area of the main RAM 110c is arranged in the following order: a game RWM area used as a work area when executing a game program, and an information RWM area used as a work area when executing an information program.

The game RWM area is arranged in the following order: a game work area used by the game program as a work area; a first unused area that is prohibited from being accessed and in which "0" is stored; a game stack area for temporarily saving data being processed by the game program; and a second unused area that is prohibited from being accessed and in which "0" is stored.

The game work area is arranged in the following order: a setting value area for storing setting values, a judgment information area for storing judgment information (checksum, described below) for judging abnormalities in the RWM area, and a game data area for storing game data that changes as the game progresses.

The information RWM area is arranged in the following order: an information work area used by information programs as work, an unused area where access is prohibited and where "0" is stored, and an information stack area where information programs can temporarily save data being processed.

The information work area is arranged, in order, with a performance information area for storing information related to the performance of the gaming machine 1, and an error information area for storing information related to various error judgments.

The following explains the relationship between the game area (game ROM area, game RWM area) that performs processing based on the game program and the information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) that performs processing based on the information program.

When the main CPU 110a performs processing based on a game program, it basically refers to the game data area, and refers to and updates the contents of the game RWM area while using the game RWM area as work. Also, when the main CPU 110a performs processing based on an information program, it basically refers to the information data area, and refers to and updates the contents of the information RWM area while using the information RWM area as work.

However, in processing based on the game program, the contents of the information RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referenced. Also, in processing based on the information program, the contents of the game RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referenced.

When processing based on the information program is performed, the flag register is saved to the game RWM area during processing based on the game program, and then the information program is called to execute processing based on the information program, and the flag register is restored from the game RWM area immediately after processing based on the information program ends and returns to the game program.

In addition, immediately after the information program starts, the stack pointer of the game stack area is saved to the information RWM area, and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set, all registers used in the game program are saved to the information RWM area, and immediately before the information program ends, all registers used in the game program are restored from the information RWM area and the stack pointer of the game stack area is restored.

By doing this, data used by the game program can be protected when performing processing based on the information program, and no inconvenience occurs when returning from the information program to the game program.

The payout control board 120 is a slave control board that controls the payout of game balls based on the payout command received from the main control board 110, and also controls the launch of game balls. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the game ball payout device 100 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launch device 26 to control the launch of game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs calculation processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores a payout program, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and an input port and an output port for payout control. The payout CPU 121a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown) and reads out the payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs calculation processing related to the payout of game balls while using the payout RAM 121c as a work area, controls the game ball payout device 100, and transmits predetermined commands based on the results of the calculation processing to the main control board 110, the performance control board 130, etc.

The input port of the payout control unit 121 is connected to an open detection switch 31a, a tray full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the game ball payout device 100, and a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit, and the output port of the payout control unit 121 is connected to a payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100.

When the payout control unit 121 receives a payout command from the main control board 110, it drives the payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 to control the payout of a predetermined number of game balls, and ends the control of the payout of game balls when the payout detection switch 100a detects that the predetermined number of game balls have been paid out.

The firing control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input port, and an output port (not shown). The input port of the firing control unit 122 is connected to the touch sensor 15a and the firing volume 15b, and the output port of the firing control unit 122 is connected to the ball feed solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b.

When the launch control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15 based on a touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows current to flow to the ball feed solenoid 11b and the launch solenoid 28b, and when it detects a change in the rotation angle of the launch handle 15 based on a detection signal from the launch volume 15b, it drives the ball feed solenoid 11b and drives the launch solenoid 28b to launch the game ball with a launch strength that corresponds to the rotation angle of the launch handle 15.

The launch solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the launch member 28 is directly connected to the rotating shaft. When the rotating shaft rotates, the launch member 28 rotates and launches the game ball A. The operation of the launch solenoid 28b is set to approximately 99.9 (times/minute) based on the frequency based on the output period of the crystal oscillator provided in the launch control unit 122, so the number of game balls launched per minute is approximately 99.9 (pieces/minute). In other words, a game ball is launched approximately every 0.6 seconds.

The presentation control board 130 is a slave control board (slave control means) that controls the presentation related to the game (performed in the gaming machine 1) based on the reception of presentation commands from the main control board 110. The presentation control board 130 is equipped with a sub-CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub-ROM 130b that stores a presentation control program, a presentation control unit 130m that includes a sub-RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, a display/audio control unit 140 that controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), and the audio output device 9 (speaker), a lamp/drive control unit 150 that controls the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the button drive device 17b, the board lighting device 76, and the board drive device 75, and input and output ports for presentation control.

The sub-CPU 130a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the game program stored in the sub-ROM 130b, and performs calculation processing related to the presentation while using the sub-RAM 130c as a work area, thereby controlling (outputting data and commands) the various control units (display/audio control unit 140, lamp/drive control unit 150) to execute various presentations in response to commands received from the main control board 110 and input signals from the presentation button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a.

The input port of the performance control board 130 is connected to the performance button detection switch 17a, the cross key detection switch 19a, and a button position detection sensor (not shown). When the performance button detection switch 17a inputs a performance button detection signal indicating that the performance button 17 has been operated, or when the cross key detection switch 19a inputs a cross key detection signal (up button detection signal, left button detection signal, down button detection signal, right button detection signal) indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated, the performance control board 130 performs processing to execute a performance according to the detection signal.

The display/audio control unit 140 receives commands from the performance control unit 130m and controls the first image display device 70 (main LCD) and the second image display device 71 (sub LCD) to display a specified image, and controls the audio output device 9 to output a specified sound.

The display/audio control unit 140 includes an overall CPU 142 that performs arithmetic processing, an overall ROM 143 that stores an overall control program, an overall control unit 141 that includes an overall RAM 144 that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an image control unit 145 consisting of a VDP (Video Display Processor) as an image processor, a CGROM 146 that stores image data and the like, a VRAM 147 that is provided inside the image control unit 145 and has a frame buffer or the like that temporarily stores drawing data generated from image data, an audio control unit 148 as an audio processor, an audio ROM 149 that stores audio data and the like, and input/output ports, etc.

The general CPU 142 receives an operating clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the display control program stored in the general ROM 143, and performs calculation processing related to the performance while using the general RAM 144 as a work area, thereby controlling the image control unit 145 and the audio control unit 148 to execute various performances in response to the performance instruction commands received from the performance control unit 130m (outputting data and commands).

The general ROM 143 is composed of a mask ROM etc., and stores a display control program for displaying images, a display list generation program for generating a display list consisting of a group of drawing control commands, animation patterns for displaying animations of performance patterns, animation scene information, etc.

This animation pattern is referenced when displaying the animation that constitutes the specific content of the image-based presentation, and the animation pattern is associated with animation scene information and the display order of each animation scene. The animation scene information includes various information such as wait frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transmittance, etc.), drawing method, and duty ratios that serve as brightness parameters for the first image display device 70 (main LCD) and the second image display device 71 (sub LCD).

The image control unit 145 (VDP) is connected to a CGROM 146 in which various image data is stored, and generates drawing data that is the source of a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) based on commands (display list, drawing commands, etc.) from the general control unit 141 (general CPU 142) and the image data stored in the CGROM 146. The image data is material data that represents individual images such as the image (frame) to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), for example, the performance pattern image, the background image that constitutes the background of the performance pattern, the character image, and the dialogue image. On the other hand, the drawing data is composite data that represents the image of the entire frame that is composed of individual images compounded (superimposed).

CGROM 146 is made up of flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and stores compressed image data (sprites, movies) consisting of a collection of pixel information for a specific range of pixels (e.g., 32 x 32 pixels). The pixel information consists of color number information that specifies a color number for each pixel, and an alpha value that indicates the transparency of the image. This CGROM 146 is read out in image data units by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and image processing is performed in units of image data for this frame.

CGROM 146 also stores uncompressed palette data in which color number information that specifies a color number is associated with display color information for actually displaying the color. Note that CGROM 146 may be configured to compress only a portion of the image data, rather than compressing all of it. Movie compression methods may include various well-known compression methods such as MPEG4.

The VRAM 147 is composed of an SRAM that can write or read image data at high speed. This VRAM 143 has a display list storage area that temporarily stores the display list output from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142), a frame buffer area corresponding to the first image display device 70 (main LCD) and the second image display device 71 (sub LCD), etc.

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying images, and further includes a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area alternate between being a "drawing frame buffer" and a "display frame buffer" each time drawing begins.

Therefore, based on instructions (display list) from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142), the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 in the "drawing frame buffer" in the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147, reads the drawing data from the "display frame buffer" in the frame buffer area, generates video signals (RGB signals, etc.) based on the read drawing data, and outputs them to the first image display device 70 (main LCD) and the second image display device 71 (sub LCD) to display various images.

The image control unit 145 (VDP) receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, and divides the operating clock to generate synchronization signals (horizontal and vertical synchronization signals) for synchronizing with the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), which are output to the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal). In this embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 seconds = approximately 33 ms) so that 30 drawings (image displays) are performed per second, but it may be 60 fps (1/60 seconds = approximately 16.6 ms) so that 60 drawings (image displays) are performed per second.

In addition, a general-purpose board 72 that converts image data into a specified image format and outputs it is connected between the image control unit 145 and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). The general-purpose board 72 has a bridge function that converts image data into an image format corresponding to the performance of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) that display the image data, and absorbs differences in resolution, for example, when a 19-inch SXGA (1280 dots x 1080 dots) liquid crystal display device is connected and when a 17-inch XGA (1024 dots x 768 dots) liquid crystal display device is connected.

The audio control unit 148 is connected to the audio output device 9, and controls the audio output device 9 to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE), etc. in accordance with the display of the first image display device 70 (main LCD) and the second image display device 71 (sub LCD) based on various performance data (including commands) sent from the performance control unit 130m.

The lamp/drive control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs calculation processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores the lamp/drive control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp and drive control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs calculation processing related to the performance while using the lamp RAM 150c as a work area, thereby controlling (outputting data and commands) the controlled devices such as various lighting devices and various drive devices to perform a specified performance in accordance with the performance instruction commands received from the performance control unit 130m.

The input/output ports of the lamp/drive control unit are connected to the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the button drive unit 17b, the board lighting device 76, and the sub-information display device 80, and based on various performance data (including commands) sent from the performance control unit 130m (sub-CPU 130a), it controls the lighting of various LEDs in the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the board lighting device 76, and the sub-information display device 80, and controls the driving of drive sources such as the motors and solenoids of the button drive unit 17b and the board drive unit 75.

The power supply board 160 generates the main power supply (operating power supply) required for the operation of the gaming machine from a power supply supplied from outside the gaming machine, and supplies the main power supply to the gaming machine 1 (the main control board 110, the payout control board 120, the performance control board 130, and various electronic components). The power supply board 160 is equipped with a power interruption detection circuit 162 that detects whether a power interruption (power outage) has occurred and outputs a power interruption detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of a power interruption (power outage), and a backup power supply circuit 163 that supplies backup power to the main control board 110 in the event of a power interruption (power outage).

The power supply board 160 also has a power switch that can be operated by an arcade staff member to switch between an ON state that supplies main power to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, presentation control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state that stops the supply. When the power switch is turned ON, the supply of main power begins and the gaming machine 1 starts operating. Note that the supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained even when the power switch is turned OFF.

The power interruption detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, outputs a power interruption detection signal to the main control board 110. More specifically, when the power interruption detection signal goes high, the main CPU 110a enters an operable state, and when the power interruption detection signal goes low, the main CPU 110a enters a stopped state.

The backup power circuit 163 is equipped with a capacitor that stores electricity when the gaming machine is energized, and in the event of a power outage (blackout), the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is supplied to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. This allows the memory contents of the main RAM 110c and the payout RAM 121c to be retained even in the event of a power outage (blackout), and after recovery from the power outage (blackout), the game control state can be restored to the state before the power outage (blackout). In addition, a backup power source may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130.

(Explanation of game state)
Next, the game states when the game progresses will be described. In this embodiment, there are a "low probability game state" and a "high probability game state" as states related to the big win lottery of the special symbol, and there are a "non-time-saving game state" and a "time-saving game state" as states related to the movable member 48 of the second starting hole 47.

In this embodiment, the following three game states are provided.
(1) A low-probability non-time-saving game state which is a "low-probability game state" and a "non-time-saving game state" (2) A low-probability time-saving game state which is a "low-probability game state" and a "time-saving game state" (3) A high-probability time-saving game state which is a "high-probability game state" and a "time-saving game state"

The gaming state when the game is started, i.e., the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1, is set to a "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state", and this gaming state will be referred to as the "normal gaming state" in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the "low-probability time-saving gaming state" and the "high-probability time-saving gaming state" are sometimes referred to as "specific gaming states" because they are gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

In this embodiment, a "low probability game state" refers to a game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is set low at approximately 1/300 in a jackpot lottery for a special symbol, which is held on the condition that a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, when the setting value (of the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery), which is a stage of the advantageous degree of the game, is "1." In contrast, a "high probability game state" refers to a game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is improved compared to a low probability game state, and when the setting value is "1," the probability of winning a jackpot is set high at approximately 1/60.

Specifically, there are four setting values, from "1" to "4." When the setting value is "1," the probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability game state is approximately 1/300, and the probability of winning a jackpot in a high probability game state is approximately 1/60. When the setting value is "2," the probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability game state is approximately 1/295, and the probability of winning a jackpot in a high probability game state is approximately 1/59. When the setting value is "3," the probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability game state is approximately 1/290, and the probability of winning a jackpot in a high probability game state is approximately 1/58. When the setting value is "4," the probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability game state is approximately 1/285, and the probability of winning a jackpot in a high probability game state is approximately 1/57.

Therefore, it is easier to win a jackpot in a "high probability gaming state" than in a "low probability gaming state." Also, the low probability gaming state is changed to the high probability gaming state after the jackpot game described below is completed. Therefore, in this embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high probability gaming state is called a "variable jackpot." Also, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the low probability gaming state is called a "normal jackpot."

In this embodiment, the "non-time-saving game state" refers to a game state in which, in a winning lottery for a normal symbol, which is held on the condition that a gaming ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 44, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is set longer than in the "time-saving game state," and the opening time of the second start hole 47 when a winning lottery is won is likely to be set shorter. For example, when a gaming ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44, a winning lottery for a normal symbol is held, and the normal symbol is displayed fluctuatingly on the normal symbol display 62, but the normal symbol is displayed stationary, for example, 30 seconds after the fluctuating display begins. Then, if the lottery result is a winning lottery, the second start hole 47 is controlled to be open for, for example, 0.2 seconds after the normal symbol is displayed stationary.

In contrast, the "time-saving game state" refers to a game state in which the average fluctuation time of the normal pattern corresponding to the lottery result is set shorter than that of the "non-time-saving game state" in the winning lottery for the normal pattern, which is performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44, and the opening time of the second start hole 47 when a winning lottery is won is set to, for example, 2.5 seconds, longer than that of the "non-time-saving game state". Furthermore, in the "non-time-saving game state", the probability of winning in the winning lottery for the normal pattern is set low, for example, 1/128, and in the "time-saving game state", the probability of winning in the winning lottery for the normal pattern is set high, for example, 127/128. Therefore, in the "time-saving game state", when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, the second start hole 47 is more easily controlled to the open state than in the "non-time-saving game state". As a result, in the "time-saving game state", the player can advantageously proceed with the game without consuming game balls.

In the embodiment, the "time-saving game state" is set to be more favorable than the "non-time-saving game state" in terms of the normal symbol variation time, the opening time of the second start port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery. However, the "time-saving game state" may be set to be more favorable in terms of only one of the normal symbol variation time, the opening time of the second start port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery. In addition, in the non-time-saving game state, the probability of winning in the normal symbol winning lottery may be, for example, 0/128.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot in a high probability game state is 5 times (regardless of the set value) the probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability game state. The probability of determining a jackpot is not limited to 5 times, and may be set to any value up to 10 times, such as 3 times or 8 times.

In addition, in this embodiment, the small prize, which is less advantageous to the player than the big prize, is not won in the big prize lottery, but it may be set so that the small prize is won with a probability of about 1/100, for example. In this case, it is preferable to set the probability of the small prize to be the same regardless of whether the set value is "1" to "4."

In addition, the larger the set value, the more advantageous it is for the player (the higher the probability of winning the jackpot), but conversely, it may be set so that the smaller the set value, the more advantageous it is for the player (the higher the probability of winning the jackpot).

Also, the probability of determining that a jackpot has occurred in a low-probability game state and/or a high-probability game state may be the same for all setting values (1-4), or, for example, the probability of determining that a jackpot has occurred in a low-probability game state and/or a high-probability game state may be the same for two or three setting values (1 and 2, 1-3, etc.).

In addition, in this embodiment, the setting values are set to four levels, from 1 to 4, but are not limited to four levels and may be more or less than four levels.

(Types of jackpot games)
Next, the types of big win games will be described.

In this embodiment, the types of jackpot games that can be won in the jackpot lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 45 include a "first jackpot game," a "second jackpot game," and a "third jackpot game," and the types of jackpot games that can be won in the jackpot lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 47 include a "first jackpot game" and a "second jackpot game."

In the "first jackpot game", the big prize opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, and then closed for 2 seconds. This round game is played up to 10 times. Note that in the round game, if a specified number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) enter the big prize opening 50 before the opening time has elapsed, one round game ends.

After the first jackpot game ends, the game will be set to a high probability time-saving game state until the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) change display 10,000 times. Therefore, based on the probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability game state, the next jackpot is essentially guaranteed.

The "second jackpot game" refers to playing a round game up to 10 times. After the second jackpot game ends, the game is set to a low probability time-saving game state until the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are displayed 100 times.

The "third jackpot" refers to playing four rounds of play. After the third jackpot, the game is set to a high-probability time-saving game state until the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) change display 10,000 times. Therefore, based on the probability of winning a jackpot in the high-probability game state, the next jackpot is essentially guaranteed.

The number of times the display changes (in this embodiment, the above-mentioned 100 times or 10,000 times) for the specific game state (high probability time-saving game state, low probability time-saving game state) that is set after a jackpot game may be referred to as the "high probability number of times" or the "time-saving number of times."

In this embodiment, there are three types of jackpot games, but the number is not limited to three and may be more or less than three. Also, the opening time of the opening/closing member 51 is set to 29.5 seconds for any jackpot game (first jackpot game to third jackpot game), but the opening time does not have to be 29.5 seconds, and may be different depending on the round game.

(Type of winning game)
Next, the types of wins will be described.

In this embodiment, the types of winning games that can be won in the winning lottery based on the passage of the game ball through the normal gate 44 include a "first winning game" and a "second winning game." If the time-saving game state is not in effect when the winning lottery is executed, the winning game is a "first winning game." If the time-saving game state is in effect when the winning lottery is executed, the winning game is a "second winning game."

The "first winning game" refers to the game in which the second starting hole 47 is opened for a maximum of 0.2 seconds. In other words, it is a winning game in which the movable member 48 is opened once.

The "second winning game" refers to a game in which the second starting hole 47 is opened for 2.6 seconds, closed for 1.5 seconds, and then opened again for 2.6 seconds. In other words, this is a winning game in which the movable member 48 is opened twice.

In the first and second winning games, if a specified number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) enter the big winning hole 50 even before the opening time has elapsed, the winning game ends.

In this way, in the "time-saving game state," it is easier for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 47, and the player can play more advantageously without consuming game balls than in the "non-time-saving game state."

Next, we will use a flowchart to explain how the game progresses on gaming machine 1.

(Main processing of the main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 3. Fig. 3 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the main control board 110. This main processing is performed when a system reset, which occurs when a power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, is input to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S1, performs initial CPU settings such as setting the built-in registers in step S2, and performs processing to wait for the startup of other boards in step S3. Specifically, it waits for one second for the payout control board 120 and performance control board 130 to start up so that no commands from the main control board 110 are missed.

In step S4, the main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S5, transmits a launch permission command to the payout control board 120. This causes the payout control unit 121 to carry out processing to permit the launch device 26 to launch game balls.

In step S6, the main CPU 110a determines whether a backup flag indicating that power has been restored has been saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag has been saved, it is assumed that power has been restored and the process proceeds to step S7. If the backup flag has not been saved, it is assumed that power has been turned on for the first time and the process proceeds to step S8.

In step S7, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) for the game RWM area (excluding the setting value area) of the main RAM 110c.

In step S8, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are ON. If a setting change operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S9 to transition to setting change mode, and if a setting change operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S10.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process in step S9. Specifically, it displays a status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 indicating that the setting is being changed or confirmed, displays the current setting value saved in the setting value area of the gaming RWM area on one of the 7-segment LEDs of the information display 113, and transmits a setting change command to the performance control board 130.

Furthermore, each time the RWM clear switch 111a is operated, the set value is changed (updated) within the range of "1" to "4" and the updated set value is displayed on the 7-segment LED. When a setting confirmation operation is performed in which the setting key switch 112a is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, the set value is confirmed and the changed (updated) set value is saved in the set value area, the display of the set value on the information display 113 is terminated, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is terminated, and processing is performed to end the setting change mode.

When the performance control board 130 receives the setting change command, it performs processing to execute a setting change notification to notify the user that the setting value is being changed. Specifically, the image display devices 70, 71 may display a setting change in progress screen indicating that the setting value is being changed, and the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 may be all lit up in a specified light color (e.g., white) throughout the setting change. The audio output device 9 may output a setting change notification sound ("setting change in progress") indicating that the setting is being changed.

In step S10, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it determines whether the checksum saved in the gaming RWM area matches the checksum calculated in step S7. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the gaming RWM area), processing proceeds to step S11. If the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the gaming RWM area), processing proceeds to step S12, assuming that the control state before the power failure cannot be restored normally.

If the backup flag has not been saved, i.e. when the power is turned on for the first time, the checksum will be determined to be abnormal.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the setting value in the setting value area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the setting value in the setting value area is within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S13, and if it is determined that the setting value in the setting value area is not within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S12.

In step S12, the main CPU 110a performs irrecoverable error processing. Specifically, it displays error information "E" indicating an irrecoverable error on the information display 113, sends an irrecoverable error designation command to the performance control board 130 indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred, then sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interruption, clears the output port, and then outputs an irrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an irrecoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, and performs processing to wait until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the performance control board 130 performs processing to execute an irrecoverable error notification.

An "irrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is no longer performed (there is no transition to game control), and it cannot be released unless a setting change process is performed. Therefore, when an irrecoverable error occurs, the error will not be released even if the power switch on the power supply board 160 is turned OFF and then turned ON without a setting change operation; it is necessary to turn the power switch ON while performing a setting change operation. Note that during an irrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from the various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

In the previous version, the "unrecoverable error" was set to not be cleared unless a setting change process was performed, but it may also be set to be cleared when an RWM clear is performed without a setting change process.

An "irrecoverable error notification" is a notification to make the user aware that an irrecoverable error has occurred, and involves displaying an irrecoverable error screen on the image display devices 70, 71 ("This is an irrecoverable error. Please change the settings"), lighting the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 in a specified light color (e.g. red) until the power is turned off, and outputting an irrecoverable error sound ("This is an irrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) from the audio output device 9 indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred until the power is turned off.
In addition, the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the image display devices 70, 71, and the board lighting device 76 may be collectively referred to as the "performance device."

In step S13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If an RWM clear operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S14 to execute RWM clear, and if an RWM clear operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S16.

The main CPU 110a performs an RWM clear process in step S14. Specifically, it performs a process to initialize the game control state (initialize everything except the setting value area of the game RWM area).

In step S15, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on command to the payout control board 120 and the presentation control board 130, indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a low-probability non-time-limited game state as the normal game state), and moves processing to step S21. As a result, the presentation control board 130 performs processing to execute a power-on notification.

The "power-on notification" is a notification to make the player aware that the game control state has been initialized, and involves displaying the initial screen (background image and initial performance pattern "135") when the power is turned on on the image display devices 70, 71, lighting up the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 in a predetermined light color (e.g., red) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 60 seconds), and outputting from the audio output device 9 a power-on notification sound ("RWM has been cleared" + buzzer sound) indicating that the RWM area has been initialized for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds).
In addition, in the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, a display notifying that the RWM has been cleared may be displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the setting key switch 112a is ON. If a setting confirmation operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S17 to transition to setting confirmation mode, and if a setting confirmation operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S18 to return the game control state to the state before the power was turned off.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S17. Specifically, the status confirmation display 68 displays a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed or confirmed, and one of the 7-segment LEDs on the information display 113 displays the current setting value saved in the setting value area of the gaming RWM area, and transmits a setting confirmation command to the performance control board 130.

Furthermore, when a confirmation end operation is performed in which the setting key switch 112a is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, the display of the setting value on the information display 113 is ended, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is ended, and processing is performed to end the setting confirmation mode.

In addition, when the performance control board 130 receives the setting confirmation command, it performs processing to execute a setting confirmation notification to notify that a setting confirmation is being performed. Specifically, a setting confirmation screen indicating that a setting confirmation is being performed may be displayed on the image display devices 70, 71, and the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 may be fully lit in a specified light color (e.g., white) during the setting confirmation. In addition, a setting confirmation notification sound indicating that a setting confirmation is being performed ("The setting value is being confirmed") may be output from the audio output device 9.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a clears (clears to 0) the backup flag and checksum saved in the game RWM area, and sets the game RWM area when power is restored. This returns (restores) the game progress state (control state) to the state before the power was cut off, making it possible to resume play from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S19, the main CPU 110a sends a power restoration command to the presentation control board 130, indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power outage occurred. This causes the presentation control board 130 to perform processing to end the setting confirmation notification, etc., described below, and execute the power restoration notification.

A "power restoration notification" is a notification to make the player aware that the game control state has returned to the state before the power was cut off, and involves displaying the initial screen at the time of power restoration (background image and initial performance pattern "135") on the image display devices 70, 71, lighting up the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 in a predetermined light color (e.g. blue) for a predetermined period of time (e.g. 60 seconds), and outputting a power restoration notification sound ("Power has been restored" + buzzer sound) from the audio output device 9 for a predetermined period of time (e.g. 30 seconds) indicating that power has been restored (from a power outage).
In addition, in notifying the restoration of power, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, a display notifying that the power has been restored may be displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a transmits other commands (such as a special symbol storage command indicating the first special symbol reserved number (U1) and the second special symbol reserved number (U2), and a normal symbol storage command indicating the normal symbol reserved number (G)) to the performance control board 130. This allows the performance control board 130 to grasp the number of special symbols reserved and the number of normal symbols reserved, and also performs processing to display the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the first image display device 70.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the performance control board 130. This allows the performance control board 130 to grasp the current setting value. Note that this setting value designation command may be transmitted to the performance control board 130 before the power-on designation command or power-restoration designation command is transmitted. The setting value designation command may also be transmitted each time the display of the special pattern begins to change, or each time a jackpot game begins.

In step S22, the main CPU 110a starts the CTC (counter timer circuit) to generate a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step S23, allows all interrupts.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for special pattern determination, which are used to determine the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the special pattern, and in step S25, performs an initial value random number update process to update the initial value random number value for jackpot determination, the initial value random number value for special pattern determination, the initial value random number value for hit determination, and the initial value random number value for normal pattern determination.

Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether a power interruption (blackout) has occurred in step S26. Specifically, it determines whether a power interruption detection signal has been input from the power interruption detection circuit of the power supply board 160, and if a power interruption detection signal has not been input, it proceeds to step S24, and if a power interruption detection signal has been input, it proceeds to step S27.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a sets an interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, in step S28, it clears the output port, in step S29, it calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c and saves it in the game RWM area, in step S30, it saves a backup flag in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, in step S31, it prohibits RAM access, and waits until the power supply voltage is completely cut off.

In this way, multiple conditions (operations) are set for setting change operations, making it difficult to change settings, which helps to prevent fraudulent activity and improves the security of the gaming machine.

In addition, by having more conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation than for the RWM clear operation or the setting check operation, it is possible to increase security for the event in which fraudulent activity is most likely to occur (setting changes), and to effectively prevent fraudulent activity.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal, an unrecoverable error process is executed to stop the game from progressing, which prevents the gaming machine from performing unexpected operations that cause trouble for gaming facilities and players, thereby improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

In addition, if the value in the setting value area is not within the appropriate range, in other words, if the previous power outage may have occurred while the settings were being changed, an unrecoverable error process is executed and game progress is halted even if the checksum is normal. This prevents game play from progressing with a setting value that the gaming facility did not intend, making it possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

In addition, when the settings are being changed (in setting change mode) or confirmed (in setting confirmation mode), it is possible to know that the settings are being changed on the front (front side) of the gaming machine 1 by checking the status confirmation display 68, image display devices 70, 71, frame lighting device 10, and board lighting device 76, and on the back (rear side) it is possible to know that the settings are being changed by checking the information display 113. In other words, it is possible to know whether the settings are being changed from either the front (front side) or the back (rear side) of the gaming machine 1.

The conditions for the setting change operation, RWM clear operation, and setting confirmation operation may include that the open detection switch 31a is in the ON state. This increases the number of conditions, making it possible to prevent fraudulent activities and further improve the security of the gaming machine.

In addition, if it is determined that there is no backup flag (this is the first time the power has been turned on) and that no setting change operation has been performed, then if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in step S10, an unrecoverable error process is executed. However, at the point where it is determined that there is no backup flag, the game program may initialize (clear to 0) the game RWM area, save the initial value "1" in the setting value area, and move to step S13.

In addition, if it is determined that there is a backup flag (power has been restored) and that no setting change operation has been performed, if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in the subsequent step S10, an unrecoverable error process is executed. However, at the point in time when it is determined that the checksum is abnormal, the game program may initialize (clear to 0) the game RWM area, save the initial value "1" in the setting value area, and move the process to step S13.

In addition, the power-on command and power restoration command are transmitted together with information indicating the current game status, but a game status command indicating the current game status may be transmitted after the power-on command or power restoration command is transmitted.

In addition, when a power outage occurs or when the power is turned on, the game program calculates a checksum for the game RWM area (excluding the setting value area) of the main RAM 110c, but the information program may also calculate the checksum. In this case, it is recommended that the calculated checksum be saved in the information RWM area.

In addition, when a power outage occurs or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the setting value area) is calculated, but it is also possible to calculate the checksum of the entire RWM area, or to calculate the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area separately, and transition to unrecoverable error processing if either checksum is abnormal.

In addition, a setting change command is sent when the setting change process starts, and a power-on command is sent after the setting change process ends, but it is also possible to send a setting change start command instead of the setting change command, and a setting change end command instead of the power-on command. In this case, the setting change end command may be sent at the end of the setting change process, or after the setting change process ends.

In addition, when settings are changed, the RWM clear process is performed after the settings are changed, but the RWM clear process may be performed before the settings are changed.

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is a flow chart showing the timer interrupt process executed in the main control board 110 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the registers to a stack area, and in step S110, performs time control processing to update various timer counters such as updating the special symbol time counter, updating the special game timer counter such as the opening time of the special electric role, updating the normal symbol time counter, and updating the opening and closing time of the movable member 48. Specifically, it performs processing to subtract 1 from counters such as the special symbol time counter, special game timer counter, normal symbol time counter, start hole opening timer counter, and start hole closing timer counter.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a performs a specific random number update process to update the random number value for determining a jackpot, the random number value for determining a special symbol, the random number value for determining a special symbol variation pattern, the random number value for determining a jackpot, the random number value for determining a normal symbol, and the random number value for determining a normal symbol variation pattern. Specifically, each random number value and the random number counter are updated by incrementing them by +1. If the incremented random number counter value exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (if the random number counter has completed one cycle), the random number counter is reset to 0, and if the random number counter has returned to the initial value for the cycle, the corresponding initial value random number value is set as a new cycle initial value and the random number value is updated.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a performs an initial random number value update process to update the initial random number value for determining a jackpot, the initial random number value for determining a special symbol, the initial random number value for determining a hit, and the initial random number value for determining a normal symbol, in the same manner as in step S30.

In step S200, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been input to various switches such as the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the special winning hole detection switch 50a, the first starting hole detection switch 45a, the second starting hole detection switch 47a, the gate detection switch 44a, and the out ball detection switch 52a, and performs input control processing to set predetermined data if there has been input. This will be described in more detail later with reference to FIG. 5.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol special power control processing to perform special symbol memory determination (such as jackpot determination), special symbol display control, opening/closing control of the jackpot opening 50 (opening/closing member 51), game state control, etc. Details will be described later using FIG. 7.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs normal symbol and normal power control processing to perform normal symbol memory determination (winning determination, etc.), normal symbol display control, and opening/closing control of the second starting hole 47 (movable member 48), etc.

The types of winning and losing normal symbols determined as a result of the normal symbol determination information performed in the normal symbol and normal power control process remain the same regardless of the setting value. This prevents the game from becoming too complicated, allowing players to play with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratios of various winning normal symbols and various losing normal symbols, which are determined as a result of the normal symbol determination information performed in the normal symbol normal power control process, are fixed and do not change depending on the setting value. By doing this, the player's degree of advantage will not change drastically depending on the setting value, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

Next, in step S500, the main CPU 110a performs a payout control process to send a payout status confirmation command to the payout control board 120 to check the payout status of the payout control board 120, and to send a payout number specification command corresponding to each winning port to the payout control board 120 by referring to the prize ball counters (3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter) described below. This causes the payout control board 120 to execute control to pay out prize balls from the game ball payout device 100.

In step S600, the main CPU 110a performs magnetic/radio anomaly determination processing to determine whether a magnetic anomaly or radio wave anomaly has occurred based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and to transmit a magnetic anomaly error designation command or a radio wave anomaly error designation command to the performance control board 130. When the performance control board 130 receives a magnetic anomaly error designation command or a radio wave anomaly error designation command, it performs control to notify the magnetic anomaly error or the radio wave anomaly error.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a performs a data creation process to create data such as external information data (game information) output from the game information output terminal board 90, start opening/closing data output to the second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, large prize opening opening/closing data output to the large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, special pattern display data output to the first special pattern display 60 and the second special pattern display 61, normal pattern display data output to the normal pattern display 62, special pattern reserved display data output to the first special pattern reserved display 63 and the second special pattern reserved display 64, and normal pattern reserved display data output to the normal pattern reserved display 65.

In step S750, the main CPU 110a performs output control processing to execute a port output process for outputting signals such as the external information data, start gate opening/closing data, and large prize gate opening/closing data created in step S700, a display output process for outputting signals such as special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol reserved display data, and normal symbol reserved display data, a payout command transmission process for transmitting commands set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120, and a performance command transmission process for transmitting commands set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the performance control board 130.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs processing when an information program is called. Specifically, after prohibiting interrupts, the flag register is saved to the game RWM area, and processing is performed to call the target information program using the CALL command.

In step S810, the main CPU 110a performs game ball counting processing (information program). Specifically, it performs processing to count the normal payout number, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of game balls into various winning ports (general winning port, large winning port start port) during the normal game state, the normal out number, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a during the normal game state, and the total out number, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a regardless of the game state.

The total number of outs, number of payouts during normal play, and number of outs during normal play are game information that are not affected by changes to the setting value (are unrelated to the setting value), so by counting these, it is possible to calculate performance information that eliminates the influence of the setting value (the normal base value, described below), which can be useful in understanding the performance of gaming machine 1.

In step S830, the main CPU 110a performs a performance information calculation process (information program). Specifically, it calculates the normal base value ((normal payout number ÷ normal out number) × 100) in the current play section, which is divided by the total number of outs, and performs a process of saving the normal base value rounded off to the first decimal place in the first area of the base memory area set in the information RWM area.

The play section is updated every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000, and the base memory area is provided with a first area in which the normal base value for the current play section is stored, a second area for storing the normal base value for the play section one period before, a third area for storing the normal base value for the play section two periods before, and a fourth area for storing the normal base value for the play section three periods before, and the base values for four play sections including the current one are saved in each area.

In step S850, the main CPU 110a performs a performance display data setting process (information program). Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process of setting performance display data for displaying on the information display 113 the normal base values (performance information) for the four play intervals calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base memory area while switching them every five seconds.

In step S870, the main CPU 110a performs a test data creation process (information program). Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process to create test data (test information) to be output to the test equipment used when testing the gaming machine 1.

In step S880, the main CPU 110a performs output control processing (information program). Specifically, it performs display output processing to output signals such as the performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 above to various displays, and processing to output signals such as the test data created in step S870 above.

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs processing for returning to the game program. Specifically, it performs processing to return the flag register from the game RWM area, permit interrupts, and return to the game program.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a and ends this timer interrupt process.

In this way, since timer interrupts are not executed during the setting change process, RWM clear process, and setting confirmation process, the number of payouts and the number of outs are not counted, the performance information of the gaming machine is not calculated, and the performance information of the gaming machine is not displayed, which makes it possible to reduce the control burden on the main control board 110.

In the above, the performance information calculation process is performed in the timer interrupt process of the main control board 110, but it may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. The game ball counting process may also be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. Specifically, it may be performed between step S25 and step S26.

(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 5. Fig. 5 is a flow chart showing the input control process in the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a performs a general prize opening detection switch input process in step S210. In this general prize opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the general prize opening detection switch 43a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the general prize opening 43. If there is no detection signal input from the general prize opening detection switch 43a, the process proceeds to step S220.

When a detection signal is input from the general prize opening detection switch 43a, the prize ball counter for the general prize opening used for prize balls (10 prize ball counter) is updated by adding data indicating 10 prize balls, and the prize ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the prize opening is updated by adding "1" (D←D+1), and then the general prize opening detection switch input process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs a special prize opening detection switch input process in step S220. In this special prize opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the special prize opening detection switch 50a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the special prize opening 50. If there is no detection signal input from the special prize opening detection switch 50a, the process proceeds to step S230.

When a detection signal from the large prize opening detection switch 50a is input, the prize ball counter for the large prize opening (15 prize ball counter) used for prize balls is updated by adding data indicating 15 prize balls, the prize ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the prize opening is updated by adding "1" (D←D+1), and it is determined whether or not a large prize game (special game) is currently in progress. If a large prize game is currently in progress, the round prize counter (C) for counting the game balls that have entered the large prize opening 50 is updated by adding "1" (C←C+1), and the large prize opening detection switch input process is terminated.

If the current game state is not a special game state, the illegal winning ball counter (E), which indicates the number of game balls that have won (entered) a specific winning port (second start port 47, large winning port 50) outside the winning period, is updated by adding "1" (E←E+1), and a determination is made as to whether the value of the illegal winning ball counter (E) is greater than a specified number (e.g., 10 balls), and if the value of the illegal winning ball counter (E) is equal to or less than the specified number, the large winning port detection switch input process is terminated.

If the value of the illegal winning ball counter (E) is greater than the specified number, it is determined that an illegal winning (illegal winning) has occurred in which a game ball wins (enters the ball) outside the winning period, and an illegal winning error designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area. This causes the illegal winning error designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, which then issues an illegal winning error notification to notify the user that an illegal winning has occurred.

Then, external information data (output data) for outputting an illegal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a specified area of the main RAM 110c, the illegal winning ball counter (E) is cleared, and the large winning port detection switch input process is terminated. As a result, an illegal winning signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and an external device can grasp (identify) that an illegal winning has occurred.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first start hole detection switch input process. In this first start hole detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a, i.e., whether the game ball has entered the first start hole 45. This will be described in more detail later with reference to FIG. 6.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second start hole detection switch input process. In this second start hole detection switch input process, processing is performed that is substantially the same as the first start hole detection switch input process shown in FIG. 6, which will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. In this gate detection switch input processing, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 44a, i.e., whether the game ball has passed through the normal gate 44. If a detection signal has not been input from the gate detection switch 44a, the input control processing is terminated.

When a detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, it is determined whether the number of reserved regular symbols, which is the number of reserved regular symbols stored in the reserved regular symbol memory area, is less than 4. If the number of reserved regular symbols is not less than 4, the input control process is terminated.

If the number of reserved regular symbols is less than four, the number is updated by adding "1", regular symbol determination information (random number value for winning determination, random number value for determining regular symbol pattern, random number value for determining regular symbol variation pattern) is obtained, and the available memory units are searched in order starting from the first memory unit in the regular symbol reserved memory area, the obtained regular symbol determination information is stored in the available memory unit, and the input control process is terminated.

(First start port detection switch input processing of the main control board)
The first start hole detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 6. Fig. 6 is a flowchart showing the first start hole detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a. If a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a, the process proceeds to step S230-2. If a detection signal has not been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a, the current first start hole detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 3 prize ball counter used for prize balls by adding data indicating 3 prize balls, and in step S230-3, obtains special symbol determination information (random number value for determining a jackpot, random number value for determining special symbols, random number value for determining reach, random number value for determining special symbol variation pattern).

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first special symbol reserved number (U1) stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area is less than 4. If the first special symbol reserved number (U1) is less than 4, the process proceeds to step S230-5, and if the first special symbol reserved number (U1) is not less than 4, the first start hole detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the first special symbol reserved number (U1) by adding "1" (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, sets a first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the updated first special symbol reserved number (U1) in the performance transmission data storage area. This causes the first special symbol storage designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, making it possible for the performance control board 130 to grasp the first special symbol reserved number.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a searches for available memory units in the first special pattern reserved memory area, starting from the first memory unit, and stores the acquired special pattern determination information in the available memory unit.

As a result, the first reserved memory consisting of special pattern determination information (random number value for determining a jackpot, random number value for determining a special pattern, random number value for determining a reach, and random number value for determining a special pattern change pattern, etc.) is stored in a specified memory section of the first special pattern reserved memory area.

The main CPU 110a performs a first advance judgment process in step S230-8. In this first advance judgment process, a advance judgment table (not shown) is referenced, and the currently acquired special pattern judgment information (first reserved memory) is judged before the special pattern fluctuation display based on the judgment information is performed, and a planned fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern scheduled to be executed, is determined.

In step S230-9, the main CPU 110a sets the first start hole winning designation command corresponding to the expected fluctuation pattern determined in the first advance judgment process in step S230-8 above in the performance transmission data storage area, and ends this first start hole detection switch input process.

This allows the expected variation pattern to be sent to the performance control board 130 as a first start port winning designation command, and the sub-CPU 130a of the performance control board 130 that receives the first start port winning designation command can analyze the first start port winning designation command and execute a pre-reading preview performance that executes a predetermined preview performance over one or more variable displays executed before the start of the variable display of the special pattern corresponding to the first start port winning designation command. The pre-reading preview performance is performed using one or more of the image display device, audio output device 9, frame lighting device 10, first movable member 73, second movable member 74, and board lighting device 76.

In addition, for the second start hole detection switch input processing, the first start hole detection switch 45a, first special symbol reserved memory area, first reserved memory, first special symbol reserved number (U1), first special symbol memory designation command, first advance judgment processing, and first start hole winning designation command can be read as the second start hole detection switch 47a, second special symbol reserved memory area, second reserved memory, second special symbol reserved number (U2), second special symbol memory designation command, second advance judgment processing, and second start hole winning designation command, respectively.

(Special diagram special electric control processing of the main control board)
The special pattern special electric control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 7. Fig. 7 is a flowchart showing the special pattern special electric control process of the main control board 110.

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the special symbol special electric processing data, and in step S302, references the branch destination address from the loaded special symbol special electric processing data. If the special symbol special electric processing data = 0, the process moves to the special symbol memory determination process (step S310). If the special symbol special electric processing data = 1, the process moves to the special symbol change process (step S320). If the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, the process moves to the special symbol stop process (step S330). If the special symbol special electric processing data = 3, the process moves to the jackpot game process (step S340). If the special symbol special electric processing data = 4, the process moves to the jackpot game end process (step S350).

This "special chart special electricity processing data" is set as necessary within each subroutine of the special chart special electricity control processing, as described below, so that the subroutines required for that game are processed appropriately.

In step S310, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol memory determination process to determine whether a jackpot has been won, to determine the type of special symbol to be displayed as a stopped symbol, and to determine the time for which the special symbol will change.

Specifically, first, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second special pattern reserved number (U2) is "1" or more, and if the second special pattern reserved number (U2) is not "1" or more, it determines whether the first special pattern reserved number (U1) is "1" or more, and if the first special pattern reserved number (U1) is not "1" or more (is "0"), it determines whether the customer waiting state determination flag, which is used to determine whether the display of the changing special pattern and the start of a customer waiting state in which a jackpot game is not being played (a waiting state in which a game is not progressing) are "0" or not.

If the customer waiting state determination flag is "0", it is assumed that the customer waiting state has started, and a customer waiting state designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area, and the special pattern special signal processing data is maintained at 0, and this special pattern storage determination process is terminated. If the customer waiting state determination flag is not "0", it is assumed that the customer waiting state has already started, and the special pattern special signal processing data is maintained at 0, and this special pattern storage determination process is terminated.

If the second special symbol reserved number (U2) is "1" or more, "1" is subtracted from the value stored in the second special symbol reserved memory area, and then the various random number values (special symbol determination information) stored in the first memory unit to the fourth memory unit in the second special symbol reserved memory area are shifted to the previous memory unit, and a second special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the second special symbol reserved number (U2) after subtraction is set in the performance transmission data storage area. This causes the second special symbol storage designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, making it possible for the performance control board 130 to grasp the second special symbol reserved number.

Then, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a jackpot game will be executed based on the random number value for determining the special symbol among the various random numbers (special symbol determination information) shifted from the first memory section to the 0th memory section of the second special symbol reserve memory area, the setting value (here, 1 to 4) stored in the setting value area of the game RWM area, and the current probability game state (low probability game state, high probability game state).

On the other hand, if the second special symbol reserved number (U2) is not "1" or more, and the first special symbol reserved number (U1) is "1" or more, "1" is subtracted from the value stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area, and then the various random number values stored in the first memory unit to the fourth memory unit in the first special symbol reserved memory area are shifted to the previous memory unit, and a first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first special symbol reserved number (U1) after subtraction is set in the performance transmission data storage area. This causes the first special symbol storage designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and the performance control board 130 becomes able to grasp the first special symbol reserved number.

Then, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a jackpot game will be executed based on the random number value for determining the special symbol among the various random numbers (special symbol determination information) shifted from the first memory section to the 0th memory section of the first special symbol reserved memory area, the setting value (here, 1 to 4) stored in the setting value area of the game RWM area, and the current probability game state (low probability game state, high probability game state).

Then, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol determination process to determine the type of special symbol to be displayed. Specifically, when a jackpot determination is performed based on the random number value for special symbol determination stored in the 0th memory section of the second special symbol reserved memory area, the jackpot special symbol or the losing special symbol is determined based on the random number value for the jackpot symbol stored in this 0th memory section, and a performance symbol designation command corresponding to the determined special symbol is set in the performance transmission data storage area. This causes the performance symbol designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and the performance control board 130 becomes able to determine the type of special symbol to be displayed.

In addition, when a jackpot determination is made based on the random number value for determining the special symbol stored in the 0th memory section of the first special symbol reserved memory area, a special symbol (a jackpot special symbol, a losing special symbol) is determined based on the random number value for the jackpot symbol stored in this 0th memory section, and a performance symbol designation command corresponding to the determined special symbol is set in the performance transmission data storage area. This causes the performance symbol designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, which makes it possible for the performance control board 130 to determine the type of special symbol to be displayed when it stops.

Next, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process to determine the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. Specifically, when a jackpot determination is made based on the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th memory section of the second special symbol reserved memory area, the special symbol variation pattern is determined based on the reach determination random number value and the special symbol variation random number value stored in this 0th memory section, the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in the special symbol time counter, and a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in the performance transmission data storage area. This causes the variation pattern designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and the performance control board 130 becomes able to grasp the variation pattern of the special symbol.

In addition, when a jackpot determination is made based on the random number value for determining the special symbol stored in the 0th memory section of the first special symbol reserved memory area, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined based on the reach determination random number value and the special symbol fluctuation random number value stored in this 0th memory section, the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is set in the special symbol time counter, and a fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is set in the performance transmission data storage area. This causes the fluctuation pattern designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, making it possible for the performance control board 130 to grasp the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol.

Then, the main CPU 110a sets variable display data in a specified processing area to cause the first special pattern display device 60 or the second special pattern display device 61 to display a variable special pattern (LED flashing).

As a result, when variable display data is set in a specified processing area, data for turning on or off the LED is appropriately created in step S600, and the created data is output in step S700, causing the first special pattern display 60 or the second special pattern display 61 to display a variable special pattern.

Then, the special chart special line processing data is set from 0 to 1, preparing to move to the special pattern change processing subroutine, and the special pattern memory determination process is terminated.

In step S320, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol change processing to determine whether the special symbol change time has elapsed. Specifically, it determines whether the special symbol change time set in step S310 has elapsed (special symbol time counter = 0). If the change time has not elapsed, the special symbol special signal processing data = 1 is maintained and the current special symbol change processing is terminated.

When the variation time has elapsed, the jackpot special symbol or the losing special symbol determined in step S310 above is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61, and the predetermined stop time of the special symbol (0.5 seconds) is set in the special symbol time counter. This notifies the player of the result of the jackpot determination.

Then, the special chart special signal processing data is set from 1 to 2, preparations are made to move to the special pattern stop processing subroutine, and this special pattern change processing ends.

In step S330, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol stop process to determine whether the stop time (0.5 seconds) of the special symbol has elapsed. Specifically, it determines whether the stop time of the special symbol set in step S320 above has elapsed (special symbol time counter = 0). If the stop time has not elapsed, the special symbol special signal processing data = 2 is maintained and the current special symbol stop process is terminated.

When the stop time has elapsed, if the number of time-saving times > 0, the time-saving times counter is updated by subtracting 1, if the number of time-saving times = 0, the time-saving play flag is cleared, if the number of high-probability times > 0, the high-probability times counter is updated by subtracting 1, if the number of high-probability times = 0, the high-probability play flag is cleared.

Then, the main CPU 110a judges whether the special symbol that has been stopped and displayed is a jackpot special symbol. If it is a jackpot special symbol, it clears the time-saving play flag, the high probability play flag, the time-saving play count counter, and the high probability play count counter, and sets the special symbol special electric processing data from 2 to 3, preparing to move to the jackpot play processing subroutine, and ends the current special symbol stop processing.

On the other hand, if it is a losing special symbol, the special symbol special signal processing data is set from 2 to 0, preparations are made to move to the special symbol memory determination process subroutine, and the current special symbol stop process is terminated.

In step S340, the main CPU 110a performs jackpot game processing to execute the first jackpot game, the second jackpot game, or the third jackpot game based on the type of special jackpot pattern (stop pattern data) set in step S310.

Specifically, the opening time of the opening/closing member 51 according to the type of big win game is set in the special game timer counter, and drive data for the big prize opening opening solenoid 51b is output to open the opening/closing member 51. At this time, 1 is added to the number of rounds played (R) memory area.

When a specified number of game balls enter the hole during this opening, or when the opening time of the large prize opening has elapsed (round prize counter (C) = 10, or special game timer counter = 0), the output of drive data for the large prize opening opening solenoid 51b is stopped and the opening/closing member 51 is closed. This ends one round of play. In addition, the counter value of the round prize counter (C) is cleared.

When a predetermined number of rounds of play (in this embodiment, 4 or 16 rounds) have ended, the data stored in the number of rounds of play (R) memory area is cleared, and the special chart special electric processing data is set from 3 to 4, preparing to move to the jackpot play end processing subroutine, and the current jackpot play processing ends.

In step S350, the main CPU 110a determines whether the probability game state is a high probability game state or a low probability game state, and also performs jackpot game end processing to determine whether the game state is a time-saving game state or a non-time-saving game state.

Specifically, based on the type of special jackpot pattern (stop pattern data) set in step S310 above, the high probability play flag is set, the high probability play count is set, the time-saving play flag is set, and the time-saving play count is set. The special pattern special electric processing data is then set from 4 to 0, preparations are made to move to the special pattern memory determination process subroutine, and the jackpot play end process for this time is terminated.

(Explanation of commands related to the production control board)
8 and 9, the types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130 will be described. FIG. 8 and FIG. 9 are diagrams showing the types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130.

The "first special symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved first special symbols (U1), and is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases or decreases, and is sent to the performance control board 130.

The "second special symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved second special symbols (U2), and is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the number of reserved second special symbols (U2) increases or decreases, and is transmitted to the performance control board 130.

In this embodiment, the "first special symbol storage designation command" and the "second special symbol storage designation command" may be collectively referred to as the "special symbol storage designation command."

The "performance symbol designation command" indicates the type (variety) of the special symbol that will be displayed in a stopped state. When various special symbols are determined and the display of the special symbols begins, the command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and is sent to the performance control board 130.

In addition, since the type of special symbol ultimately determines the type of jackpot game and the game state after the jackpot game ends, the performance symbol designation command can be said to indicate the type of jackpot and the game state after the jackpot game ends.

The "first special symbol variation pattern designation command" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, and is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the variation of the special symbol, and is sent to the performance control board 130.

The "second special symbol variation pattern designation command" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 61, and is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the display of the special symbol variation begins on the second special symbol display 61, and is sent to the performance control board 130.

In addition, in this embodiment, the "first special symbol variable pattern designation command" and the "second special symbol variable pattern designation command" may be collectively referred to as the "variation pattern designation command."

The "special symbol confirmation command" indicates that a special symbol has been displayed in a static state, and is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when a special symbol is displayed in a static state on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61, and is sent to the performance control board 130.

The "normal symbol confirmation command" indicates that the normal symbol has been stopped and displayed, and is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 62, and is sent to the performance control board 130.

The "starting hole winning designation command" is used to notify the performance control board 130 of the result of the jackpot determination (lottery) in advance, and is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the game ball wins the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, and is transmitted to the performance control board 130.

The "jackpot opening designation command" indicates that a jackpot game (special game) is about to start, and is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when various jackpot games start, and is sent to the performance control board 130.

The "round designation command" indicates the number of rounds in a jackpot game, and is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when a round of jackpot game starts, and is sent to the performance control board 130.

The "jackpot ending designation command" indicates that the jackpot game is ending, and is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when various jackpot games end, and is sent to the performance control board 130.

The "normal symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved normal symbols (G1), and is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the performance control board 130 when the value stored in the reserved normal symbol number (G1) storage area increases or decreases.

The "normal symbol designation command" indicates the type of normal symbol to be displayed in a stopped state on the normal symbol display 62, and is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when various normal symbols are determined and the variable display of the normal symbols begins, and is then sent to the performance control board 130.

The "regular symbol change designation command" indicates the time for the regular symbol to change on the regular symbol display 62, and is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the display of the regular symbol changes begins, and is sent to the performance control board 130.

The "Winning Opening Designation Command" indicates that a winning game (auxiliary game) is about to start, and is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the winning game starts, and is sent to the performance control board 130.

The "winning ending designation command" indicates that various auxiliary games are ending, and is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the winning game ends, and is sent to the performance control board 130.

The "game state designation command" indicates whether or not the game is in a time-saving game state or a high probability game state, and is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the special symbol starts to change, when the special symbol changes to finish (when the jackpot game starts), and when the jackpot ends, and is sent to the performance control board 130.

The "power-on command" and "power restoration command" indicate whether or not powering on the gaming machine 1 involves initialization of the main RAM 110c. When the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the power-on command or power restoration command corresponding to whether or not the main RAM 110c has been initialized and the game status is sent to the performance control board 130.

The "customer waiting state designation command" indicates that the machine is in a customer waiting state in which the display of special symbols is not changed, and is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the machine is in a customer waiting state, and is sent to the performance control board 130.

The "error designation command" indicates that an error has occurred in the gaming machine 1 and the type of error. When the occurrence of a magnetic or radio wave anomaly is determined in the magnetic/radio wave anomaly determination process described above, when the occurrence of an illegal win is determined in the large prize opening detection switch input process described above, or when the occurrence of an illegal win is determined in the second start opening detection switch input process described above, the "error designation command" is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the performance control board 130.

In addition, when the payout control board 120 detects that the game board mounting frame 3 or glass frame 4 is open, the lower tray 12 is full, or a payout abnormality, the data is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the payout RAM 121c and transmitted to the performance control board 130.

The "error release command" indicates that an error that occurred in the gaming machine 1 has been resolved, and is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c or payout RAM 121c when it is detected that various abnormalities have been resolved, and is sent to the performance control board 130.

The "setting value designation command" indicates the setting value set in the gaming machine 1, and is sent to the performance control board 130 after the gaming machine 1 is turned on, specifically after a power-on designation command or a power-restoration designation command is sent.

(Main processing of the production control section)
Next, the main processing of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 10. Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the performance control unit 130m.

When power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub-CPU 130a, and the sub-CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

In step E10, the sub-CPU 130a sets interrupt inhibition to inhibit timer interrupts, and in step E20, performs initialization processing. Specifically, in response to power-on, the sub-CPU 130a reads the main processing program from the sub-ROM 130b, initializes flags and the like stored in the sub-RAM 130c, and performs processing such as initial settings.

In step E30, the sub-CPU 130a sets an interrupt permission to allow a timer interrupt, and in step E40, performs a sub-random number update process. Specifically, it performs a process to update various random numbers stored in the sub-RAM 130c. Thereafter, the process of step E40 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of the production control unit)
The timer interrupt process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 11. Fig. 11 is a flow chart showing the timer interrupt process executed in the performance control unit 130m at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

In step E100, the sub-CPU 130a saves the information stored in the registers of the sub-CPU 130a to the stack area, and in step E120, performs a timer update process. In this timer update process, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

In step E130, the sub-CPU 130a performs input control processing. Specifically, it determines whether or not there has been input to various switches such as the performance button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, and if there has been input, it performs processing to set predetermined data.

In step E150, the sub-CPU 130a performs command analysis processing. Specifically, it determines whether various commands have been sent from the main control board 110, and if various commands have been sent, it stores the received commands in the receive buffer of the sub-RAM 130c.

The sub-CPU 130a performs setting change/confirmation processing in step E170. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a setting change designation command or a setting confirmation designation command has been received, and if a setting change designation command has been received, the sub-CPU 130a performs processing to execute the setting change notification described above, and if a setting confirmation designation command has been received, the sub-CPU 130a performs processing to execute the setting confirmation notification described above.

The sub-CPU 130a performs power-on processing in step E200. Specifically, it refers to the receive buffer in the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a power-on command has been received, and if so, performs processing to execute a power-on notification. More specifically, it sends a power-on notification command to the display/audio control unit 140, causing the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) to display a power-on screen and causes the audio output device 9 to output a power-on sound.

In step E250, the sub-CPU 130a performs power outage recovery processing. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not a power recovery designation command has been received, and if so, performs processing to execute a power outage recovery notification. In more detail, it sends a power recovery notification command to the display/audio control unit 140, causing the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) to display a power recovery screen, and causes the audio output device 9 to output a power recovery sound. Note that,

In step E300, the sub-CPU 130a performs customer waiting performance processing. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a customer waiting state designation command has been received, and if so, performs processing to perform a customer waiting demo performance after a predetermined time has elapsed. In more detail, it sends a customer waiting performance command to the display/audio control unit 140 to cause the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) to display a customer waiting demo screen, and to output a customer waiting demo sound from the audio output device 9. This will be described in more detail later with reference to FIG. 12.

In step E350, the sub-CPU 130a performs a game status update process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a game status designation command has been received, and if so, performs a process to update the game status information stored in the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E400, the sub-CPU 130a performs a reserved information update process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a special symbol storage command or a normal symbol storage command has been received, and if so, performs a process to update the first special symbol reserved number, the second special symbol reserved number, the normal symbol reserved number, etc. stored in the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E500, the sub-CPU 130a performs pre-reading type performance processing. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a start port winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command has been received, and if so, performs processing related to the icon change performance, continuous preview performance, and lamp change performance as pre-reading type performance. This will be described in more detail later with reference to FIG. 14.

An "icon change effect" is a type of pre-reading preview effect that changes the reserved icon and the display mode of the icon to give the player hope that a jackpot will be played. In this embodiment, an icon change effect for a reserved icon may be referred to as a "reserved icon change effect," and an icon change effect for the icon in question may be referred to as a "respective icon change effect."

The "continuous preview performance" is a type of anticipatory preview performance that makes the player anticipate the execution of a jackpot game by executing a predetermined performance over one or more variable performances.
The "lamp change effect" is a type of anticipatory preview effect that changes the lighting state of the winning port lamp over one or more variable effects, giving the player the expectation that a jackpot game will be executed.

In step E600, the sub-CPU 130a performs special symbol special electric effect processing. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not a special symbol designation command, a special symbol variation pattern designation command, a special symbol determination command, a jackpot opening designation command, a round designation command, and a jackpot ending designation command have been received, and if so, performs processing to execute the effect corresponding to the received command.

In step E800, the sub-CPU 130a performs normal drawing and normal power display processing. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a normal drawing designation command, a normal drawing change designation command, a normal pattern determination command, a winning opening designation command, and a winning ending designation command have been received, and if so, performs processing to execute the display corresponding to the received command.

In step E850, the sub-CPU 130a performs error notification processing. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether an error specification command or an error cancellation specification command has been received, and if so, performs processing to execute an error notification effect corresponding to the received error specification command, or performs processing to end the error notification effect corresponding to the received error cancellation specification command.

In step E900, the sub-CPU 130a performs output control processing. Specifically, it performs processing to output signals such as predetermined data, and to transmit various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150.

In step E950, the sub-CPU 130a restores the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub-CPU 130a and ends this timer interrupt process.

(Customer waiting performance processing by the performance control unit)
The customer waiting performance processing of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 12. Fig. 12 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting performance processing in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E300-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a customer waiting state designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the customer waiting state designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step E300-4. If the customer waiting state designation command has been received, in step E300-2, a demo waiting time determination table (see FIG. 13) is selected to determine the waiting time until the start of the customer waiting demo performance. Details of the demo waiting time determination table will be described later.

In step E300-3, the sub-CPU 130a determines the demo waiting time and sets it in the demo waiting timer. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 13, and determines one demo waiting time from among multiple demo waiting times based on the current game state and the current state.

In step E300-4, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the machine is in demo standby. Specifically, it determines whether or not the demo standby timer is set. If the machine is not in demo standby, it ends the current customer waiting performance process assuming that the customer waiting demo performance will not be executed, and if the machine is in demo standby, in step E300-5, it updates the demo standby timer by -1.

In step E300-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the demo waiting timer = 0. If the demo waiting timer = 0, the sub-CPU 130a ends the current customer waiting performance processing, assuming that the customer waiting demo performance has not yet been executed. If the demo waiting timer = 0, in step E300-7, the sub-CPU 130a sets a customer waiting demo performance command in the transmission buffer, and ends the current customer waiting performance processing. As a result, the customer waiting demo performance command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and a customer waiting demo performance is executed to appeal to the player to play the game.

(Demo waiting time determination table)
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a demo waiting time determination table which is referred to when determining the waiting time until the start of the customer waiting demo performance.

The demo waiting time determination table in FIG. 13 associates the game state, the current state, and the demo waiting time to be selected. Four types of demo waiting times ranging from 30 seconds to 70 seconds are set for the demo waiting time in the normal game state, and four types of demo waiting times ranging from 35 seconds to 75 seconds are set for the demo waiting time in the specific game state.

The first feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that the demo waiting time from when the static display of the performance pattern is displayed on the image display device immediately after power is turned on, the demo waiting time from when the static display of the performance pattern is displayed on the image display device immediately after power is restored, the demo waiting time from when the dynamic display of the performance pattern ends (the dynamic time has passed) and the static display of the performance pattern is displayed, and the demo waiting time from when the static display of the performance pattern is displayed after the customer waiting demo performance ends are different. By doing this, the customer waiting demo performance can be executed at an appropriate time according to the current state, making it possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The second feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that the demo waiting time from when the display of the dynamic effect symbols ends (the dynamic time has passed) and the static effect symbols are displayed is longer than the demo waiting time from when the display of the dynamic effect symbols is statically displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is turned on. By doing this, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demo effect at an appropriate time according to the likelihood that the player is playing, which makes it possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The third feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that the demo waiting time from when the static display of the performance symbols on the image display device immediately after power is restored is longer than the demo waiting time from when the display of the dynamic performance symbols ends (the dynamic time has passed) and the static display of the performance symbols occurs. By doing this, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demo performance at an appropriate time according to the likelihood that the player is playing, which makes it possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The fourth feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that the demo waiting time from when the static display of the performance pattern is displayed on the image display device immediately after power is restored is longer than the demo waiting time from when the static display of the performance pattern is displayed on the image display device immediately after power is turned on. By doing this, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demo performance at an appropriate time according to the likelihood that the player is playing, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The fifth feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that the demo waiting time from when the performance pattern is statically displayed after the customer waiting demo performance ends is the shortest. By doing so, it is possible to effectively increase the appeal of the game to players and improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The sixth feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that the waiting time for each demo in a specific game state (low probability time-saving game state, high probability time-saving game state) is longer than the waiting time for each demo in a normal game state. By doing this, it is possible to execute a customer waiting demo performance at an appropriate time according to the likelihood that the player is playing, which makes it possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

(Preview processing of the performance control unit)
The look-ahead performance processing of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 14. Fig. 14 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead performance processing in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E510, the sub-CPU 130a performs an icon change effect determination process to determine whether or not to execute an icon change effect and the effect mode of the icon change effect. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 15.

In step E520, the sub-CPU 130a performs an icon display mode update process to execute the icon change effect that was determined to be executed in the icon change effect determination process (changing the display mode of the pending icon or the icon that is already displayed). Details will be described later using FIG. 18.

In step E530, the sub-CPU 130a performs a continuous preview performance determination process to determine whether or not to execute a continuous preview performance and the performance mode of the continuous preview performance. Details will be described later using FIG. 24.

In step E540, the sub-CPU 130a performs a continuous preview performance execution process to execute the continuous preview performance that was determined to be executed in the continuous preview performance determination process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 26.

In step E550, the sub-CPU 130a performs lamp change effect execution processing to execute the lamp change effect (lighting up the winning slot lamp NR so that the light emission mode corresponds to the icon whose display mode has changed), and ends this pre-reading effect processing. Details will be described later using FIG. 28.

(Icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit)
The icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 15. Fig. 15 is a flowchart showing the icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m.

In step E510-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a start port winning designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If a start port winning designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E510-2, and if a start port winning designation command has not been received, the process for determining the icon change effect is terminated.

In step E510-2, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the received start-port winning designation command and determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, the type of jackpot game, and the presentation content (expected variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the current time is a period during which an icon change performance can be performed. If the current time is a period during which an icon change performance can be performed, the process proceeds to step E510-4. If the current time is not a period during which an icon change performance can be performed, the process proceeds to step E510-8.

The "period during which the icon change effect can be executed" refers to a period when a jackpot game is not being executed, when an icon change effect is not being executed, or when an icon change effect is not scheduled to be executed. Note that it is also possible to set only one or two of the above three conditions. It is also possible to set a normal game state when the received start port winning designation command is based on winning at the first start port 45, and a specific game state (low-probability time-saving game state, high-probability time-saving game state) when the received start port winning designation command is based on winning at the second start port 47.

In step E510-4, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the preliminary judgment results of the advance reserve (the reserve memory corresponding to the start port winning designation command received earlier) are all normal reach or lower, that is, whether the preliminary judgment results of the advance reserve are all normal fluctuation, shortened fluctuation, or normal reach. If all are normal reach or lower, the process proceeds to step E510-5, and if not all are normal reach or lower, the process proceeds to step E510-8.

In step E510-5, the sub-CPU 130a acquires a random number value for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), and in step E510-6, selects an icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 16) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

In step E510-7, the sub-CPU 130a determines the final icon display mode. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 16, and determines one of the multiple final icon display modes based on the expected variation pattern indicated by the start-gate winning designation command and the selection rate (%) of each final icon display mode.

In step E510-8, the sub-CPU 130a determines the normal icon (CD icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E510-9, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the determined final icon display mode is a display mode (special icon) that executes an icon change performance. If it is a display mode that executes an icon change performance, the process proceeds to step E510-10, and if it is not a display mode that executes an icon change performance, the process proceeds to step E510-13.

In step E510-10, the sub-CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 17) for determining the change scenario of the icon change presentation. Details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from when the reserved icon appears to when it disappears.

In step E510-11, the sub-CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the read-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c corresponding to the reserved memory number counter. Specifically, the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 17 is referenced, and one change scenario is determined from among multiple change scenarios based on the final icon display state, the reserved memory number of special symbols corresponding to the start-gate winning designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario.

In step E510-12, the sub-CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the icon display mode that will be displayed first on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) from the determined change scenario, sets the icon display command for that winning icon in the transmission buffer, and ends this icon change presentation determination process. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and a reserved icon in a display mode that corresponds to the icon display command for the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), or a predetermined sound effect (a first winning sound when displayed as a normal icon, and a second winning sound when displayed as a special icon) is output.

In step E510-13, the sub-CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which no icon change performance is performed, and sets this in the pre-read information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c corresponding to the pending memory number counter.

In step E510-14, the sub-CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer and ends the icon change effect determination process. This causes the icon display command to be sent to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and a pending icon with a display mode corresponding to the icon display command for the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) and a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) is output.

In the icon change effect determination process of this embodiment, the icon change effect (pending icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when all of the preliminary judgment results of the advance hold are normal reach or lower, but the icon change effect may be executed when the preliminary judgment result of the advance hold is that a reach effect will not be performed, and the icon change effect may not be executed when a reach effect will be performed. In this way, no change in the display mode of the pending icon occurs during the change effect corresponding to the advance hold in which a reach effect is performed, and a change in the display mode of the pending icon occurs during the change effect corresponding to the advance hold in which a reach effect is not performed, so that the icon change effect will not hinder the reach effect, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, even if the advance hold pre-determination result includes a reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed, but the icon change effect may be executed more easily (executed at a higher rate) when the advance hold pre-determination result does not include a reach effect than when it includes a reach effect.

(Icon Final Display Mode Determination Table)
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table which is referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

The icon final display mode determination table associates the expected variation pattern indicated by the start gate winning designation command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the selected icon final display mode.

The final icon display mode is set to the CD icon as the normal icon, and the blue character icon, red character icon, and rainbow character icon as special icons that indicate the possibility of a jackpot (a jackpot game being played).

The chances of winning the jackpot for special icons are (CD icon <) Blue character icon < Red character icon < Rainbow character icon, with the Rainbow character icon being the icon that guarantees a jackpot.

The main feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 16 is that the selection rate of the icon final display mode is varied depending on the scheduled fluctuation pattern. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the scheduled fluctuation pattern is an SP reach or SPSP reach, the special icon is selected at a higher rate than when the scheduled fluctuation pattern is a normal fluctuation, shortened fluctuation, or normal reach that does not result in a reach.

In the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 16, the normal icon (CD icon) is not selected as the icon final display mode in the event of a jackpot, but it may be selected instead.

(Change Scenario Decision Table)
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a variation scenario determination table which is referred to when determining a variation scenario.

The change scenario determination table associates the final display mode of the icon, the reserved memory number of special symbols corresponding to the start gate winning designation command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the change scenario to be selected, and for reference, the prior changes in each change scenario and the update mode of the icon in that change are listed.

"Pre-change" refers to a change display (change presentation) that is executed based on special chart determination information stored prior to the special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received start port winning designation command, and "the change in question" refers to a change display (change presentation) that is executed based on the special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received start port winning designation command.

The change scenarios include scenarios (e.g., scenario 01, etc.) in which the display mode of the icon does not change while the pre-change is being performed (the pending icon change performance is not executed) but changes while the change is being performed (the relevant icon change performance is executed), scenarios (e.g., scenario 02, etc.) in which the display mode of the icon changes while the pre-change is being performed (the pending icon change performance is executed) but does not change while the change is being performed (the relevant icon change performance is not executed), and scenarios (e.g., scenario 15, etc.) in which the display mode of the icon changes while the pre-change is being performed and while the change is being performed (the pending icon change performance and the relevant icon change performance are executed).

In the change scenario determination table of this embodiment, a scenario for changing the display mode of the icon is determined regardless of whether or not a reach performance (which may be a reach other than a normal reach) is executed in the pre-variation, but a scenario for changing the display mode of the icon may be determined by a change scenario determination table in which a reach performance that suggests the possibility of a jackpot game being executed in the pre-variation is used as a determination factor. When using such a change scenario determination table, it is preferable to set various scenarios so that the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of a pre-variation in which a reach performance is executed, and the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of a pre-variation in which a reach performance is not executed. In addition, various scenarios may be set so that the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of a pre-variation in which a reach performance is executed and a pre-variation in which a reach performance is not executed, but the display mode of the icon changes at a higher rate during the execution of a pre-variation in which a reach performance is not executed than during the execution of a pre-variation in which a reach performance is executed.

(Icon display mode update process of the production control unit)
The icon display mode update process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 18. Fig. 18 is a flowchart showing the icon display mode update process in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E520-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If a variation pattern designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E520-2; if a variation pattern designation command has not been received, the current icon display mode update process is terminated.

In step E520-2, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the icon change scenario stored in the pre-read information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, and in step E520-3, determines whether or not an icon change scenario is stored. If an icon change scenario is not stored, the process proceeds to step E520-10 assuming that power recovery has occurred, which clears the change scenario from the sub-RAM 130c, and if an icon change scenario is stored, the process proceeds to step E520-4.

In step E520-4, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether there is a reserved icon that will change (update) the display mode in this variable performance. If there is a reserved icon that will change the display mode, the process proceeds to step E520-5. If there is no reserved icon that will change the display mode, the process proceeds to step E520-8.

In step E520-5, the sub-CPU 130a selects a hold icon change pattern determination table (see FIG. 19) for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the hold icon to be changed. Details of the hold icon change pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E520-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines the pending icon change pattern. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the pending icon change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 19, and determines one pending icon change pattern from among multiple pending icon change patterns based on the manner in which the pending icon changes in the current variation performance and the selection rate (%).

In step E520-7, the sub-CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined hold icon change pattern in the transmission buffer. This causes the change effect command to be transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and the display state of the hold icon displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) changes or a specified sound effect (change sound) is output according to the change timing corresponding to the hold icon change pattern and the change stage at the change timing.

In step E520-8, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed (updated). If there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process proceeds to step E520-9. If there is no icon whose display mode is to be changed, the sub-CPU 130a ends the current icon display mode update process.

In step E520-9, the sub-CPU 130a selects, from among a plurality of icon change pattern determination tables for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the icon to be changed, a change pattern determination table (see Figures 20 and 21) for the icon corresponding to the change stage at which the icon will change in the current change performance. Details of the change pattern determination tables for the icon corresponding to the change stage will be described later.

In step E520-10, the sub-CPU 130a selects the icon change pattern determination table (FIG. 22) for when power is interrupted in order to determine whether or not to execute an icon change effect as compensation for an icon change effect that may not have been executed due to the occurrence of power restoration. Details of the icon change pattern determination table for when power is interrupted will be described later.

The sub-CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step E520-11. Specifically, it refers to a change pattern determination table for the selected icon, and determines one icon change pattern from among multiple icon change patterns based on the state of the icon change in the current variation performance and the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern.

In step E520-12, the sub-CPU 130a sets a change performance command corresponding to the determined icon change pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends this icon display mode update process. This causes the change performance command to be transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and the display mode of the icon displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) changes or a specified sound effect (change sound) is output according to the change timing corresponding to the icon change pattern and the change stage at the change timing.

In this way, according to the icon display mode update process shown in FIG. 18, if power is restored while an icon change effect is being performed, the icon change effect may be executed again in the variable effect that begins after power is restored. This reduces the frustration felt when the icon change effect ends due to power being restored, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, according to the icon display mode update process shown in FIG. 18, even if an icon change performance is executed again in a change performance that starts after power is restored, the performance mode of the icon change performance is newly determined based on the current change pattern, so that the performance is not executed from a continuation of the change scenario before power was restored (the stage that was suggested before the power supply was stopped). By doing this, it is possible to execute an icon change performance that conforms to the content of the current change performance, making the game more interesting.

In addition, if power is restored while an icon change effect is being executed, in the change effect that begins after power is restored, the icon change effect may not be executed in the change effect that corresponds to the pending memory (special chart determination information) that precedes the pending memory (special chart determination information) that triggered the execution of the icon change effect, but the icon change effect may be executed in the change effect that corresponds to the pending memory that triggered the execution of the icon change effect.

(Change pattern determination table for hold icon)
FIG. 19 shows a hold icon change pattern determination table that is referenced when determining a hold icon change pattern.

The pending icon change pattern determination table associates the manner in which the pending icon changes in the current change presentation, the selection rate (%) of each pending icon change pattern, and the selected pending icon change pattern, and for reference, the timing at which the pending icon change presentation occurs and the change stage for each pending icon change pattern are also listed.

The reserved icon change patterns include a normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the reserved icon changes with the output of a sound effect when the reserved icon shifts (when the change begins) in response to the disappearance of the icon, a normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the reserved icon changes while changing with the output of a sound effect, a character effect change pattern 01 in which a character appears and an action effect is performed on the icon starting from the character, changing the display mode of the icon, and a pattern effect change pattern 01 in which a change notification pattern indicating that the display mode of the icon will change as a result of the change effect is temporarily displayed and an action effect is performed on the reserved icon starting from the change notification pattern, changing the display mode of the reserved icon.

The timing of the pending icon change effect is classified according to the progress of the change effect, and includes when the change effect starts (change start time), when the change effect is in progress (changing), and when the effect pattern 70a temporarily stops ((temporarily) stopped).

The pending icon change stages are set to 1UP, which changes the display mode of the jackpot winning expectation to one level higher (for example, changing from a CD icon to a blue character icon, or from a blue character icon to a red character icon), and 2UP, which changes the jackpot winning expectation to two levels higher (for example, changing from a CD icon to a red character icon).

The timing for the change effect of the reserved icon to occur is the three mentioned above, but it is not limited to these timings and other timings may be provided. For example, it may occur during the execution of the change effect until a reach is achieved (during the change), during the execution of a normal reach, or during the execution of an SP (SPSP) reach, etc.

(Change pattern determination table for the icon)
Figures 20 and 21 are figures showing a change pattern determination table for the icon which is referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon. Figure 20 is a table which is referred to when the display mode of the icon is changed by one stage, and Figure 21 is a table which is referred to when the display mode of the icon is changed by two stages.

The icon change pattern determination table associates the mode of the icon change in the current change performance, the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, and the icon change pattern that will be selected, and for reference, the timing at which the icon change performance occurs in each icon change pattern and the change stage are also listed.

The icon change patterns include normal change pattern 01, in which the display mode of the reserved icon changes when the change starts accompanied by the output of a sound effect, normal change pattern 02, in which the display mode of the reserved icon changes during the change accompanied by the output of a sound effect, and character action change pattern 01, in which a character appears and an action performance is performed on the icon starting from the character, changing the display mode of the icon.

The timing of the icon change effect is classified according to the progress of the change effect, and includes when the change effect starts (change start time), when the change effect is in progress (changing), and when the effect pattern 70a temporarily stops ((temporarily) stopped).

The icon change stages include 1UP, which changes the probability of winning the jackpot to a display mode that is one level higher (for example, changing from a CD icon to a blue character icon, or changing from a blue character icon to a red character icon), and 2UP, which changes the probability of winning the jackpot to a display mode that is two levels higher (for example, changing from a CD icon to a red character icon, or changing from a blue character icon to a rainbow character icon).

In the change pattern determination table for the icon in this embodiment, the pattern action change pattern 01 cannot be selected, but it may be selected. For example, in a change performance that performs a pseudo consecutive performance, the change notification pattern may be temporarily stopped when the temporary stop display of the performance pattern 70a before the pseudo change is performed.

"Pseudo consecutive performance" refers to a special mode of performance pattern change display in which a re-change display in which all performance patterns 70a temporarily stop and then start changing again is executed once or multiple times within the special pattern change time determined for a winning (ball entry) into one start port (first start port 45, second start port 47) in order to make it look as if the performance pattern change display has been executed multiple times in response to a jackpot determination based on a winning (ball entry) into one start port (first start port 45, second start port 47).

The timing for the icon change effect to occur is the two mentioned above, but is not limited to these timings and other timings may be provided. For example, it may occur during the execution of the change effect until a reach is achieved (during the change), during the execution of a normal reach, or during the execution of an SP (SPSP) reach, etc.

(Table for determining icon change pattern when power is interrupted)
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an icon change pattern determination table for use during power interruption, which is referred to when determining the icon change pattern.

The icon change pattern determination table for use when power is interrupted associates the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command, the final display mode of the icon, the selection rate (%) of the icon change pattern, the final display mode of the selected icon, and the selected icon change pattern, and also lists the timing at which the icon change effect occurs and the change stage for each icon change pattern for reference.

Note that the icon change patterns, the timing at which the icon change effects occur, and the icon change stages are the same as those explained in the icon change pattern determination table described above, so explanations will be omitted here.

(Relationship between the hold icon display mode and the change effect occurrence timing and the change effect occurrence frequency)
Figure 23 (a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the display mode of the pending icon and the occurrence frequency of the change effect occurrence timing.

When the display mode of the reserved icon changes to a blue character icon, the change occurs more frequently when the frame is updated in response to receiving a specific command than when the frame is updated after receiving a command specifying a change pattern.

In addition, when the display mode of the reserved icon changes to a blue character icon, the change effect occurs less frequently at a specified frame update timing after receiving a change pattern designation command than at a frame update timing in response to receiving a specified command.

In other words, it can be said that the display mode of the reserved icon is more likely to change to a blue character icon when the icon change effect is executed at a frame update timing in response to receiving a specified command than when the icon change effect is executed at a specified frame update timing after receiving a change pattern designation command.

On the other hand, when the display mode of the reserved icon changes to a red character icon, the change effect occurs more frequently at a specified frame update timing after receiving a change pattern designation command than at a frame update timing in response to receiving a specified command.

In addition, when the display mode of the reserved icon changes to a red character icon, the change occurs less frequently when the frame is updated in response to receiving a specified command than when the frame is updated after receiving a change pattern designation command.

In other words, it can be said that the display mode of the reserved icon is more likely to change to a red character icon when the icon change effect is executed at a specified frame update timing after receiving a variation pattern designation command than when the icon change effect is executed at a frame update timing in response to receiving a specified command. Note that this specified command refers to the start gate winning designation command and the variation pattern designation command.

Specifically, the change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to receiving a specified command refers to a change effect (change effect at the time of winning) in which the reserved icon is displayed as a special icon when the game ball enters the start hole (first start hole 45, second start hole 47) and the reserved icon is displayed, and normal change pattern 01.
In addition, the change effects that occur at a specified frame update timing after receiving a change pattern designation command are normal change pattern 02, character effect change pattern 01, and design effect change pattern 01.

Because the relationship between the pending icon display mode and the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is as described above, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect in which the icon changes to a red character icon, which has a higher chance of winning a jackpot, occurs more frequently at a specified frame update timing after receiving a change pattern designation command than at a frame update timing in response to receiving a specified command. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the timing of the change effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect of changing to a blue character icon occurs more frequently when the frame is updated in response to the reception of a specified command than when the frame is updated in response to the reception of a change pattern designation command. Therefore, while the icon is unlikely to change to a red character icon, which has a higher chance of winning a jackpot, in the early stages of the change effect, it is likely to change to a blue character icon. This allows the player to focus on the subsequent change effect, making the game more interesting.

(Relationship between the type of change performance, the timing of the change performance, and the frequency of the change performance occurrence 1)
FIG. 23(b) is a diagram showing a relationship 1 between the type of change effect and the timing of the change effect occurrence and the frequency of the change effect occurrence.

When a change effect occurs at the frame update timing in response to receiving a specified command, the change effect of the pending icon occurs more frequently than the change effect of the icon itself.

In addition, when a change effect occurs at the frame update timing in response to receiving a specified command, the icon change effect occurs less frequently than the pending icon change effect.

Since the relationship between the type of change effect, the timing of the change effect, and the frequency of the change effect is as described above, the reserved icon is likely to change early in the change effect, so the player's anticipation of a big win can be maintained for a long period of time, making it possible to increase the interest of the game. Note that this specified command refers to the start gate winning specification command and the change pattern specification command.

(Relationship between the type of change and the timing of change occurrence and the frequency of change occurrence 2)
FIG. 23(c) is a diagram showing the relationship 2 between the type of change effect and the timing of the change effect occurrence and the frequency of the change effect occurrence.

When a change effect occurs at a specified frame update timing after receiving a change pattern designation command, the icon change effect occurs more frequently than the pending icon change effect.

In addition, when a change effect occurs at a specified frame update timing after receiving a change pattern designation command, the frequency of occurrence of a pending icon change effect is lower than that of the icon change effect.

Because the relationship between the type of change effect, the timing of the change effect, and the frequency of the change effect occurrence is as described above, the icon is more likely to change in the later stages of the change effect, so it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game by holding back the player's expectations for a jackpot until the later stages of the change effect.

(Relationship between icon display mode and notification sound when an icon appears (changes))
FIG. 23D is a diagram showing the relationship between the icon display mode and the notification sound when an icon appears (changes).

When a CD icon appears as the reserved icon, a first generation notification sound is output as the notification sound when the icon appears, when a reserved icon or a blue character icon appears as the reserved icon (when it changes to a blue character icon), a second generation notification sound (change notification sound) is output as the notification sound when the icon appears (changes), when a reserved icon or a red character icon appears as the reserved icon (when it changes to a red character icon), a third generation notification sound (change notification sound) is output as the notification sound when the icon appears (changes), and when the icon changes to a rainbow character icon, a fourth generation notification sound (change notification sound) is output as the notification sound when the icon changes.

In this embodiment, a different notification sound is set for each of the multiple icon display modes (four types), but it may be two types: a generation notification sound when the CD icon appears and a change notification sound when it changes to a blue character icon, a red character icon, or a rainbow character icon. Alternatively, no notification sound may be output when the CD icon appears, and a notification sound may be output only when the icon changes to one of the modes. Also, for the rainbow character icon, which is confirmed to be a jackpot, a dedicated change notification sound may be provided, making it three types.

(Continuous preview performance decision process of the performance control unit)
The continuous preview performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 24. Fig. 24 is a flowchart showing the continuous preview performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E530-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not it has received a start port winning designation command from the main control board 110. If it has received a start port winning designation command, it moves to step E530-2, and if it has not received a start port winning designation command, it ends the current continuous preview performance determination process.

In step E530-2, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the received start-port winning designation command and determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, the type of jackpot game, and the presentation content (planned variation pattern).

In step E530-3, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the current period is one in which the continuous preview performance can be executed. If the current period is one in which the continuous preview performance can be executed, the process proceeds to step E530-4. If the current period is not one in which the continuous preview performance can be executed, the process proceeds to step E530-6, assuming that the continuous preview performance will not be executed.

The "period during which the consecutive preview performance can be executed" refers to a period when a jackpot game is not being executed, when the consecutive preview performance is not being executed, or when the consecutive preview performance is not scheduled to be executed. Note that it is also possible to set only one or two of the above three conditions. It is also possible to set a normal gaming state when the received start port winning designation command is based on winning at the first start port 45, and a specific gaming state (low-probability time-saving gaming state, high-probability time-saving gaming state) when the received start port winning designation command is based on winning at the second start port 47.

In step E530-4, the sub-CPU 130a selects a preview scenario determination table (see FIG. 25) for determining the preview scenario of the continuous preview performance. Details of the preview scenario determination table will be described later. This preview scenario indicates the progression of the preview performance across one or more variable performances.

In step E530-5, the sub-CPU 130a determines a preview scenario and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number counter of the sub-RAM 130c, and ends this continuous preview performance determination process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the preview scenario determination table shown in FIG. 25, and determines one preview scenario from among multiple preview scenarios (including non-preview scenarios) based on the reserved memory number of the special pattern corresponding to the start port winning designation command, the type of start port winning designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each preview scenario. The preview scenario determination table will be described in detail later.

In step E530-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines a non-preview scenario in which the consecutive preview performance is not executed, sets this in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number counter in the sub-RAM 130c, and ends this consecutive preview performance determination process.

(Preview scenario decision table)
FIG. 25 shows a preview scenario determination table that is referenced when determining a preview scenario for a continuous preview performance.

The preview scenario determination table associates the number of reserved memories of special symbols corresponding to the start port winning designation command, the expected change pattern indicated by the start port winning designation command, the selection rate (%) of each preview scenario, and the preview scenario to be selected, and for reference, the pre-changes in each preview scenario and the presentation style of the preview performance in that change are listed.

Preview scenarios include non-preview scenarios where an effect image is displayed around the performance pattern 70a when the variation performance begins (e.g., scenario 00), scenarios where an effect image is not displayed around the performance pattern 70a when the pre-variation begins, but an effect image is displayed around the performance pattern 70a when the variation begins (e.g., scenario 01), and scenarios where an effect image is displayed around the performance pattern 70a at the beginning of the pre-variation and at the beginning of the variation (e.g., scenario 02, etc.).

(Continuous preview performance execution process of the performance control unit)
The continuous preview performance execution process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 26. Fig. 26 is a flowchart showing the continuous preview performance execution process in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E540-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If a variation pattern designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E540-2, and if a variation pattern designation command has not been received, the process for executing the current continuous preview performance is terminated.

In step E540-2, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the preview scenario of the continuous preview performance stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, and in step E540-3, determines whether or not a preview scenario is stored. If a preview scenario is stored, the process proceeds to step E540-4, and if a preview scenario is not stored, the process proceeds to step E540-6 assuming that power recovery has occurred, which clears the preview scenario from the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E540-4, the sub-CPU 130a determines a continuous preview pattern (performance mode) according to the preview scenario, and in step E540-5, sets a continuous preview performance command according to the determined continuous preview pattern in the transmission buffer. This causes the continuous preview performance command to be transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and the continuous preview performance is executed according to the continuous preview pattern, and an effect image is displayed around the performance pattern 70a or a specified sound effect is output when the variable performance begins.

In step E540-6, the sub-CPU 130a selects an alternative preview pattern determination table (see FIG. 27) for determining whether or not to execute an alternative preview performance as compensation for the continuous preview performance that may not have been executed due to the occurrence of power restoration, and determines the preview pattern. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the selected alternative preview pattern determination table, and determines one alternative preview pattern from among multiple alternative preview patterns based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command and the selection rate (%) of each alternative preview pattern. Details of the alternative preview pattern determination table will be described later.

The "alternative preview effect" is an effect that compensates for the continuous preview effect that may not be executed due to the occurrence of power restoration (power outage), and is a type of preview effect that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed by displaying one of several mini-characters with different jackpot expectancies on the image display device.

In step E540-7, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the determined alternative preview pattern is one that will execute an alternative preview performance. If it is not one that will execute an alternative preview performance, the current continuous preview performance execution process is terminated as it will not execute an alternative preview performance, and if it is one that will execute an alternative preview performance, an alternative preview performance command corresponding to the alternative preview pattern is set in the transmission buffer and the current continuous preview performance execution process is terminated. As a result, the alternative preview performance command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and an alternative preview performance is executed according to the alternative preview pattern, with a mini character being displayed on the first image display device 70 and/or a predetermined sound effect being output.

In this way, according to the continuous preview performance execution process shown in FIG. 26, if power is restored (power is cut off) while a continuous preview performance is being executed, an alternative preview performance different from the continuous preview performance may be executed in the variable performance that begins after power is restored, without resuming the continuous preview performance. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction that accompanies the end of the continuous preview performance due to the occurrence of power restoration (power cut off), and it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

(Alternative notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 27 shows an alternative warning pattern determination table which is referred to when determining an alternative warning pattern.

The alternative preview pattern determination table associates the type of variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, the selection rate (%) of each alternative preview pattern, and the alternative preview pattern to be selected, and also lists the presentation style for each alternative preview pattern for reference.

The alternative preview patterns include pattern 00, in which no alternative preview performance is performed, pattern 01, in which mini character A is displayed on the image display device, pattern 02, in which mini character B is displayed on the image display device, pattern 03, in which mini character C is displayed on the image display device, and pattern 04, in which mini character D is displayed on the image display device.

The chances of winning the jackpot for mini characters are as follows: Mini character A < Mini character B < Mini character C < Mini character D, with Mini character D being the one guaranteed to win the jackpot.

The first feature of the alternative preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 27 is that an alternative preview pattern in which an alternative preview performance is executed is more likely to be determined for a variation pattern with a high probability of winning a jackpot than for a variation pattern with a low probability of winning a jackpot. By doing this, an alternative preview performance is executed more likely when the consecutive preview performance was executed before the power was restored, which reduces dissatisfaction caused by the end of the consecutive preview performance and makes the game more enjoyable.

The second feature of the alternative preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 27 is that it is easier to determine an alternative preview pattern in which an alternative preview performance is executed when a variable performance corresponding to a hold that triggered the execution of a continuous preview performance is executed than when a variable performance corresponding to a hold that did not trigger the execution of a continuous preview performance prior to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous preview performance is executed. By doing this, it becomes easier to determine which variable performance corresponds to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous preview performance after power is restored, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the variable performance that is executed after the power is restored, it is decided whether or not to execute the jackpot preview performance (dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance) described below, so it is possible to avoid executing the alternative preview performance by increasing the probability of executing the jackpot preview performance more than usual.

Even in this case, it is preferable to make it easier for a jackpot preview performance to be executed when a variable performance corresponding to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous preview performance is executed, compared to when a variable performance corresponding to a hold that did not trigger the execution of the continuous preview performance prior to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous preview performance is executed. In this way, after the power is restored, it becomes easier to know which variable performance corresponds to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous preview performance, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

(Lamp change performance execution process of the performance control unit)
The lamp change performance execution process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 28. Fig. 28 is a flowchart showing the lamp change performance execution process in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E550-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether an icon change scenario is stored in the pre-read information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c. If an icon change scenario is stored, the process proceeds to step E550-2 assuming that an icon change performance will be executed, and if an icon change scenario is not stored, the process proceeds to step E550-6 assuming that power recovery has occurred, which clears the change scenario from the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E550-2, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether it is time for the icon to change. If it is time for the icon to change, the process proceeds to step E550-3. If it is not time for the icon to change, the process for executing the lamp change effect ends.

In step E550-3, the sub-CPU 130a sets a lamp effect command corresponding to the color of the icon after the change in the transmission buffer. This causes the lamp effect command to be sent to the lamp/drive control unit 150, and the lamp change effect is executed by changing the light emission mode (light emission color, lit/blinking) of the winning port lamp NR in response to the color change of the icon.

In step E550-4, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether a lamp changing flag, which indicates that a lamp changing performance is being executed, is set in the sub-RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the current lamp changing performance execution process is terminated, and if the lamp changing flag is not set, the lamp changing flag is set and the current lamp changing performance execution process is terminated.

In step E550-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the lamp changing flag is set in the sub-RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the process proceeds to step E550-7. If the lamp changing flag is not set, the process ends for this lamp change effect execution.

In step E550-7, the sub-CPU 130a clears the lamp change in progress flag set in the sub-RAM 130c, and in step E550-8, sets a lamp performance end command in the transmission buffer and ends the current lamp change performance execution process. This causes the lamp performance command to be sent to the lamp/drive control unit 150, and the lamp change performance that was being executed ends.

In this way, according to the lamp change presentation execution process shown in FIG. 28, the lamp change presentation is executed by changing the light emission mode (light emission color, on/off) of the winning slot lamp NR in response to the change of the icon in the icon change presentation. By doing so, the presentation effect can be enhanced by a synergistic effect with the icon change presentation, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 28, unlike the icon change effect and the continuous preview effect, even if the power is restored while the lamp change effect is being executed, the lamp change effect will not be executed again or an alternative preview effect will not be executed. By doing so, it is possible to ensure the rarity of the lamp change effect while reducing the control burden, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

When power is restored, as in the case of an icon change effect, the lamp change effect may be executed again in the variable effect that begins after power is restored. In this case, it is advisable to execute the lamp change effect so that it corresponds to the icon change effect that begins after power is restored.

In addition, instead of executing a lamp change performance in response to an icon change performance, the final light emission mode of the winning port lamp NR, the light emission scenario from the previous change to the actual change, etc. may be determined by lottery, and then the lamp change performance may be executed.

(Jackpot notice performance determination process of the performance control unit)
The big win notice performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 29. Fig. 29 is a flowchart showing the big win notice performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m, and this process is executed after the variable performance pattern determination process (the process of determining the variable performance pattern based on the variable pattern designation command) in the special chart special electric performance process described above.

In step E650-1, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the variable presentation pattern to be executed in the current variable presentation, and in step E650-2, selects a jackpot notice determination table (see FIG. 30) for determining a notice pattern of a jackpot notice presentation that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed, and determines the notice pattern. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the jackpot notice determination table shown in FIG. 30, and determines one notice pattern from among multiple notice patterns (including non-notice patterns) based on the jackpot lottery result, the type of variable presentation pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each notice pattern. The jackpot notice determination table will be described in detail later.

In step E650-3, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the preview pattern is one that will execute a dialogue preview performance. If the preview pattern is one that will execute a dialogue preview performance, the process proceeds to step E650-4. If the preview pattern is not one that will execute a dialogue preview performance, the process proceeds to step E650-6.

A "dialogue preview effect" is a type of jackpot preview effect in which, in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during an effective period that occurs during a variable effect, a dialogue image suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot is displayed on the image display device and sound corresponding to the dialogue image is output from the audio output device 9. Specifically, a dialogue with a relatively high expectation is displayed when a jackpot game is played (higher likelihood of a jackpot) compared to when a jackpot game is not played, and when a dialogue with a relatively high expectation is displayed, the effect button 17 vibrates for, for example, only one second.

In step E650-4, the sub-CPU 130a selects a dialogue pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the dialogue pattern in the dialogue preview performance, and determines the dialogue pattern. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the dialogue pattern determination table and determines one dialogue pattern from among multiple dialogue patterns based on the jackpot lottery result, the type of variable performance pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each dialogue pattern.

In step E650-5, the sub-CPU 130a sets a dialogue preview performance command corresponding to the dialogue pattern in the transmission buffer. This causes the dialogue preview performance command to be sent to the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and a dialogue preview performance corresponding to the dialogue pattern is executed, causing a dialogue image to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and sound corresponding to the dialogue image to be output from the audio output device 9.

In step E650-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the preview pattern is one that will execute a step-up preview performance. If the preview pattern is one that will execute a step-up preview performance, the process proceeds to step E650-7. If the preview pattern is not one that will execute a step-up preview performance, the process for determining the current jackpot preview performance ends.

The "step-up preview effect" is a type of jackpot preview effect in which step effects are executed in a predetermined order until one of a number of steps from the first step to the final step is reached. Specifically, more step effects are likely to be executed when a jackpot game is played (when the jackpot expectation is high) than when a jackpot game is not played.

In step E650-7, the sub-CPU 130a selects a step-up pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the step-up pattern in the step-up preview performance, and determines the step-up pattern. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the step-up pattern determination table and determines one step-up pattern from among multiple step-up patterns based on the jackpot lottery result, the type of variable performance pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each step-up pattern.

In step E650-8, the sub-CPU 130a sets the step-up preview performance command corresponding to the step-up pattern in the transmission buffer and ends the current jackpot preview performance determination process. This causes the step-up preview performance command to be transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and a step-up preview performance corresponding to the step-up pattern is executed, causing a step image to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and sound effects corresponding to the step image to be output from the audio output device 9.

(Jackpot prediction pattern determination table)
FIG. 30 shows the big win preview effect determination process that is referenced when determining the preview pattern of the big win preview effect.

The jackpot prediction determination table associates the jackpot lottery result, the type of variable presentation pattern, the selection rate (%) of each prediction pattern, and the prediction pattern to be selected.

The preview patterns include a pattern with no preview, a pattern with a dialogue preview effect, and a pattern with a step-up preview effect, and the probability of winning the jackpot is higher when the step-up preview effect is executed than when the dialogue preview effect is executed.

(Main processing of the general control unit)
The main processing of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to Fig. 31. Fig. 31 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the overall control unit 141.

When power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the overall CPU 142, and the overall CPU 142 performs the following main processing.

First, the general CPU 142 sets interrupt inhibition to inhibit timer interrupts in step T1, and performs initialization processing in step T2. Specifically, it reads the main processing program from the general ROM 143, initializes flags and the like stored in the general RAM 144, and performs processing such as initial settings.

In step T3, the overall CPU 142 sets an interrupt permission to allow a timer interrupt, and in step T4, it refers to the receiving buffer of the overall RAM 144 to determine whether or not a performance instruction command has been received from the performance control unit 130m. If no performance instruction command has been received, it moves to step T7. If a performance instruction command has been received, it performs an animation pattern setting process in step T5, which determines and sets an animation pattern from the animation group of the type corresponding to the received performance instruction command.

Examples of performance instruction commands include customer waiting performance commands, icon display commands, change performance commands, variable performance pattern commands, symbol stop pattern commands, opening performance pattern commands, round performance pattern commands, and ending performance pattern commands.

An animation group is a group formed by bundling one or more animation patterns, which are information that specifies (specifies) the type of objects that make up the effect image, the scene (timing) and wait frame (display time) in which the effect image is displayed, target data (sprite image identification number, source address, etc.), parameters (display position of the sprite image, destination address, etc.), drawing method, and information that specifies the image display device that displays the effect image.

Types of animation groups include, for example, a performance pattern group for displaying animations of performance pattern 70a, an icon group for displaying animations of pending icons and the icons, a variable performance group for displaying animations of variable performances such as backgrounds and characters, a preview performance group for displaying animations of previews, etc., and a special game performance group for displaying animations of special game performances.

In step T6, the overall CPU 142 performs a sound setting process to determine and set a sound pattern from the sound group type corresponding to the received performance instruction command, and in step T7, it determines whether or not there is a frame switching flag indicating that it is frame update timing to update the performance image to be displayed on the image display device (to draw a new performance image). If there is no frame switching flag, the process proceeds to step T4, and if there is a frame switching flag, the frame switching flag is cleared in step T8.

In step T9, the overall CPU 142 performs a display list generation and output process to generate a display list composed of a group of drawing control commands and output the generated display list to the image control unit 145 (VDP).

The display list here refers to image shaping information for forming the performance image to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) and the second image display device 71 (sub LCD), and is generated for each frame or for each set of frames (frame update timing). In this embodiment, the display list is generated for each frame.

Specifically, the animation scene information (address) is updated for each animation pattern that has been set in the animation control process described below, and a display list for one frame corresponding to the current frame number is generated in which drawing control commands are set according to the contents of the animation scene information for each animation pattern that has been set. Note that the drawing control commands are set in order from the animation pattern of the animation group with the lowest priority to the animation pattern of the animation group with the highest priority according to the priority (drawing order) set for the animation group to which each animation pattern belongs, but the reverse is also possible.

In step T10, the overall CPU 142 performs drawing command processing to instruct the image control unit 145 (VDP) to draw a performance image based on the display list outputted to the image control unit 145 (VDP). By performing this drawing command processing, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws a performance image based on the display list in a drawing frame buffer, and performs processing to display the performance image drawn in the display frame buffer on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal).

In step T11, the overall CPU 142 performs a sound list generation and output process to generate a sound list consisting of a group of sound control commands and output the generated sound list to the audio control unit 148.

Here, a sound list is audio output information for specifying sounds (BGM, sound effects, etc.) such as audio data and music data to be output from the audio output device 9, and is generated based on the drawing frame when outputting a new sound.

In step T12, the overall CPU 142 performs a sound output command process that instructs the audio control unit 148 to output a sound based on the sound list output. By performing this sound output command process, the audio control unit 148 outputs a sound based on the sound list from the audio output device 9.

Therefore, various sounds are started to be output from the audio output device 9 so as to be synchronized (in sync) with the frame update timing by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and output from the audio output device 9 is ended so as to be synchronized (in sync) with the frame update timing.

Note that the output of various sounds from the audio output device 9 is started so as to be synchronized (in sync) with the frame update timing, but the output of various sounds from the audio output device 9 may be stopped so as not to be synchronized (in sync) with the frame update timing, or vice versa.

In step T13, the overall CPU 142 performs animation control processing to update the animation scene information (address) for each animation pattern that has been set in preparation for creating a display list for the next frame, and then proceeds to step T4, where it repeats the processing from step T4 to step T13 in a loop.

(Command reception interrupt processing of the central control unit)
The command reception interrupt process of the general control unit 141 will be described with reference to Fig. 32. Fig. 32 is a flowchart showing the command reception interrupt process of the general control unit 141, and this process is executed by receiving a performance instruction command transmitted from the performance control unit 130m.

In step T20, the general CPU 142 performs a command reception process to receive the performance instruction command sent from the performance control unit 130m. Specifically, the general CPU 142 performs a process to store the performance instruction command sent from the performance control unit 130m in the reception buffer of the general RAM 144, and then ends this command reception interrupt process.

(V blank interrupt processing of the general control unit)
The V blank interrupt process of the general control unit 141 will be described with reference to Fig. 33. Fig. 33 is a flowchart showing the V blank interrupt process of the general control unit 141, and the V blank interrupt process is executed every time a V blank signal is received (1/30 seconds = about 33 ms) transmitted from the image control unit 145 (VDP) every time the display of one frame of the performance image ends (1/30 seconds = about 33 ms).

In step T30, the overall CPU 142 performs a counter update process to update various counters (scene changeover counter, wait frame counter, frame counter, etc.) by a predetermined number (e.g., add "1"), and in step T31 performs a frame buffer switch command process to instruct the image control unit 145 (VDP) to switch between the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area of the VRAM 147.

As a result, the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" each time the V blank interrupt process is executed every 1/30th of a second (approximately 33 ms).

In step T32, the overall CPU 142 sets a frame switch flag indicating that the drawing (display) frame has been switched, and ends the current V blank interrupt process. This frame switch flag is referenced in step T7, so the processes in steps T8 to T13 are executed each time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

(Timing chart for winning changes)
Figures 34 and 35 are timing charts showing various timings when the display mode of the first reserve icon is displayed (changed to) a blue character icon when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45.

The timing of T1 is the 280th frame after the start of the variable performance, and is the frame update timing during the normal variation period during which the normal variation of the performance pattern 70a occurs. At this timing, drawing of image data b (background image, various variable performance images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer begins, and display of image data a drawn in the second frame buffer begins on the image display device, and the normal variable performance display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is midway through the 280th frame after the start of the variable presentation. At this timing, a start-port entry designation command is sent from the main control board 110 to the presentation control unit 130m based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start port 45.

The timing of T3 is the 281st frame after the start of the fluctuation performance, and is the frame update timing during the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, it has been decided that the display mode of the first reserved icon will be a blue character icon when a win is achieved, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second occurrence notification sound from the audio output device 9 does not begin.

In addition, at the timing of T3, drawing of image data c (background image, various variable performance images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and display of image data b drawn in the first frame buffer is started on the image display device, and the image display device is placed in a state where the normal variable performance display screen b is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the 282nd frame after the start of the variable performance, and is the frame update timing during the normal variable period. At this timing, drawing of image data d (background image, various variable performance images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer begins, display of image data c drawn in the second frame buffer begins on the image display device, the image display device displays the normal variable performance display screen c (displaying a blue character icon), and output of the second occurrence notification sound begins from the audio output device 9. This timing of T4 corresponds to the frame update timing in response to receipt of a specified command.

The timing of T5 is the 283rd frame after the start of the fluctuation performance, and is the frame update timing during the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of image data e (background image, various fluctuation performance images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer begins, display of image data d drawn in the first frame buffer begins on the image display device, the normal fluctuation performance display screen d (displaying a blue character icon) is displayed on the image display device, and output of the second occurrence notification sound from the audio output device 9 continues.

The timing of T6 is the 284th frame after the start of the fluctuation performance, and is the frame update timing during the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of image data f (background image, various fluctuation performance images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer begins, display of image data e drawn in the second frame buffer begins on the image display device, the normal fluctuation performance display screen d (displaying a blue character icon) is displayed on the image display device, and output of the second occurrence notification sound from the audio output device 9 continues.

The timing of T7 is the 296th frame after the start of the fluctuation performance, and is the frame update timing during the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of image data h (background image, fluctuation performance image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer starts, and display of image data g drawn in the second frame buffer starts on the image display device, the image display device displays the normal fluctuation performance display screen g (displaying a blue character icon), and output of the second occurrence notification sound from the audio output device 9 continues.

The timing of T8 is the 297th frame after the start of the fluctuation performance, which is halfway through the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the output of the second generation notification sound that had been output for approximately 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped. In addition, the drawing of image data i (background image, fluctuation performance image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer begins, the display of image data h that was drawn in the first frame buffer begins on the image display device, and the normal fluctuation performance display screen h (displaying a blue character icon) is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T9 is the 298th frame after the start of the variable performance, which is halfway through the normal variable period. At this timing, drawing of image data j (background image, variable performance image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer begins, and display of image data i drawn in the second frame buffer begins on the image display device, with the normal variable performance display screen i (displaying a blue character icon) being displayed on the image display device.

In this way, the output of the second generation alarm sound from the audio output device 9 starts in synchronization with the frame update timing when the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display). This reduces the sense of discomfort felt by the player and makes the game more enjoyable, compared to when the frame update timing for the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second generation alarm sound start out of sync.

In addition, whereas the output of the second generation alert sound was started in accordance with (synchronization with) the frame update timing when the blue character icon was displayed, the erasure of the blue character icon and the cessation of the output of the second generation alert sound are performed at different frame update timings. This means that the output of the second generation alert sound can be halted without being restricted by the timing of the erasure of the blue character icon, making the game more enjoyable.

(Example of a winning effect)
Figure 36 shows an example of a presentation in which the display mode of the first pending icon is changed to a blue character icon when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45.

As shown in FIG. 36(a), when the first hold icon and the second hold icon are not displayed, i.e., when no hold memory is stored, a normal variable effect is being executed in which the display pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner.

Here, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 45, a starting hole entry designation command is sent from the main control board 110 to the presentation control unit 130m, and the icon change presentation determination process is executed, determining that the change scenario is "Scenario 02" (displaying the first reserved icon as a blue character icon when a winning ball is entered).

At this time, as shown in FIG. 36(b), in response to the game ball entering the first starting hole 45, the first hold icon (blue character icon) H11 is displayed in the first display section 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B, and the second occurrence notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36(c), the display of the varying effect symbols 70a stops at a combination (here, "234") indicating a miss, and the icon (CD icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 36(d), the display of the effect pattern 70a begins to change, and the first hold icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display section 70B1 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C.

After that, as shown in FIG. 36(e), the "2" performance pattern 70a is displayed stationary (temporarily stopped) in the variable display areas to the left and right of the performance pattern 70a that was being displayed, while a reach performance is executed in which the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner in the central variable display area.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36(f), the "3" effect pattern 70a stops in the central variable display area, ending the reach effect and the variable display. Now that the variable display has ended, the icon (blue character icon) TH that was displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

Although not shown in the figure, background music, sound effects, etc. are output from the audio output device 9 during the change performance. The same applies to the following Figures 39, 42, 43, 46, and 47.

(Timing chart of normal change pattern 01)
Figures 37 and 38 are timing charts showing various timings when normal change pattern 01 is determined as the pending icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the first pending icon is changed to a blue character icon.

The timing of T1 is the 600th frame after the start of the variable performance, and is the frame update timing during the pattern stop period in which the performance pattern 70a is displayed stopped. At this timing, drawing of image data b (background image, various stop performance images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer begins, and display of image data a that was drawn to the second frame buffer begins on the image display device, and the stop performance display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is midway through the 600th frame after the start of the variation performance. At this timing, the main control board 110 sends a variation pattern designation command to the performance control unit 130m.

The timing of T3 is the 601st frame after the start of the variable performance, and is the frame update timing during the pattern stop period. At this timing, it is decided to execute normal change pattern 01, which changes the first reserved icon to a blue character icon, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second occurrence notification sound from the audio output device 9 is not started.

In addition, at timing T3, drawing of image data c (background image, various variable performance images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and display of image data b drawn in the first frame buffer is started on the image display device, and the stop performance display screen b is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T4 is the first frame after the start of the next variable performance (the timing when the variable performance starts). At this timing, drawing of image data d (background image, various variable performance images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer starts, display of image data c drawn in the second frame buffer starts on the image display device, the image display device shows the normal variable performance display screen c (displaying a blue character icon), and output of the second occurrence notification sound starts from the audio output device 9. This timing of T4 corresponds to the frame update timing in response to receipt of a specified command.

The timing of T5 is the second frame after the start of the variable performance and is the frame update timing during the normal variable period. At this timing, drawing of image data e (background image, various variable performance images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer begins, display of image data d drawn in the first frame buffer begins on the image display device, the image display device displays the normal variable performance display screen d (displaying a blue character icon), and output of the second occurrence notification sound from the audio output device 9 continues.

The timing of T6 is the third frame after the start of the variable performance, and is the frame update timing during the normal variable period. At this timing, drawing of image data f (background image, various variable performance images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer begins, display of image data e drawn in the second frame buffer begins on the image display device, the image display device displays the normal variable performance display screen d (displaying a blue character icon), and output of the second occurrence notification sound from the audio output device 9 continues.

The timing of T7 is the 15th frame after the start of the fluctuation performance, and is the frame update timing during the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of image data h (background image, fluctuation performance image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer begins, and display of image data g drawn in the second frame buffer begins on the image display device, with the normal fluctuation performance display screen g (displaying a blue character icon) displayed on the image display device, and output of the second occurrence notification sound from the audio output device 9 continues.

The timing of T8 is the 16th frame after the start of the fluctuation performance, and is halfway through the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the output of the second generation notification sound that had been output for approximately 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, drawing of image data i (background image, fluctuation performance image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, display of image data h that was drawn in the first frame buffer is started on the image display device, and the normal fluctuation performance display screen h (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T9 is the 17th frame after the start of the variable performance, and is midway through the normal variable period. At this timing, drawing of image data j (background image, variable performance image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer begins, and display of image data i drawn in the second frame buffer begins on the image display device, and the image display device begins to display the normal variable performance display screen i (displaying a blue character icon).

In this way, the output of the second generation alarm sound from the audio output device 9 starts in synchronization with the frame update timing when the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display). This reduces the sense of discomfort felt by the player and makes the game more enjoyable, compared to when the frame update timing for the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second generation alarm sound start out of sync.

In addition, whereas the output of the second generation alert sound was started in accordance with (synchronization with) the frame update timing when the blue character icon was displayed, the erasure of the blue character icon and the cessation of the output of the second generation alert sound are performed at different frame update timings. This means that the output of the second generation alert sound can be halted without being restricted by the timing of the erasure of the blue character icon, making the game more enjoyable.

(Example of normal transformation pattern 01)
Figure 39 shows an example of a presentation in which the display mode of the first reserved icon changes to a blue character icon when the fluctuation starts (shifts) (normal change pattern 01).

As shown in FIG. 39(a), when the first hold icon (CD icon) H11, H12 is displayed in the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2 of the first hold icon display area 70B, a stop display of a performance pattern indicating a miss is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39(b), the display of the effect pattern 70a starts to change, and the first hold icons (CD icons) H11 and H12 displayed in the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2 are shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display section 70B1, respectively.

Here, the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 displayed on the second display section 70B2 is displayed in a blue character icon when it is shifted to the first display section 70B1. In addition, the CD icon is displayed in a blue character icon, and the second occurrence notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 39(c), the display of the variable effect pattern 70a stops at a combination (here, "164") indicating a miss, and the icon (CD icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39(d), the display of the effect pattern 70a begins to change, and the first hold icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display section 70B1 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C.

After that, as shown in FIG. 39(e), the "2" performance pattern 70a is displayed stationary (temporarily stopped) in the variable display areas to the left and right of the performance pattern 70a that was being displayed in a variable manner, while a reach performance is executed in which the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner in the central variable display area.

Then, as shown in FIG. 39(f), the "3" effect pattern 70a stops in the central variable display area, ending the reach effect and the variable display. Now that the variable display has ended, the icon (blue character icon) TH that was displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

(Timing chart for character action change pattern 01)
Figures 40 and 41 are timing charts showing various timings when character action change pattern 01 is determined as the icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the icon TH is changed to a red character icon.

The timing of T1 is the first frame after the start of the variable performance (the timing when the variable performance starts), and is the frame update timing of the start of the normal variable period during which the normal fluctuation of the performance pattern 70a occurs. At this timing, drawing of image data b (background image, various variable performance images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer begins, display of image data a that was drawn to the second frame buffer begins on the image display device, and the normal variable performance display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the 61st frame after the start of the variable performance, and is the frame update timing during the normal variable period. At this timing, the performance control unit 130m has decided to execute the character action change pattern 01, which changes the display mode of the icon TH to a red character icon, but no characters are displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 does not start outputting the third occurrence notification sound.

In addition, at the timing of T2, drawing of image data d (background image, various variable performance images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) into the second frame buffer is started, and display of image data c drawn into the first frame buffer is started on the image display device, and the image display device is now in a state where the normal variable performance display screen c is displayed.

The timing of T3 is the 62nd frame after the start of the variable performance, and is the frame update timing during the normal variable period. At this timing, drawing of image data e (background image, various variable performance images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) to the first frame buffer starts, and display of image data d drawn in the second frame buffer starts on the image display device, and the normal variable performance display screen d (character display) is displayed on the image display device, but output of the third occurrence notification sound does not start from the audio output device 9.

The timing of T4 is the 63rd frame after the start of the fluctuation performance, and is the frame update timing during the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of image data f (background image, various fluctuation performance images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) to the second frame buffer begins, and display of image data e drawn in the first frame buffer begins on the image display device, and the normal fluctuation performance display screen e (character display) is displayed on the image display device, but the third occurrence notification sound from the audio output device 9 continues to be non-output.

The timing of T5 is the 64th frame after the start of the fluctuation performance, and is the frame update timing during the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of image data g (background image, various fluctuation performance images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) to the first frame buffer begins, and display of image data f drawn in the second frame buffer begins on the image display device, and the normal fluctuation performance display screen f (character display) is displayed on the image display device, but the third occurrence notification sound from the audio output device 9 continues to be non-output.

The timing of T6 is the 91st frame after the start of the fluctuation performance, and is the frame update timing during the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of image data h (background image, various fluctuation performance images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer starts, and display of image data g drawn in the second frame buffer starts on the image display device, and the normal fluctuation performance display screen g (character display) is displayed on the image display device, but the third occurrence notification sound from the audio output device 9 continues to be non-output.

The timing of T7 is the 92nd frame after the start of the fluctuation performance, and is the frame update timing during the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of image data i (background image, various fluctuation performance images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer begins, display of image data h drawn in the first frame buffer begins on the image display device, the normal fluctuation performance display screen h (displaying a red character icon) is displayed on the image display device, and output of the third occurrence notification sound begins from the audio output device 9. This timing of T7 corresponds to the specified frame update timing after receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command.

The timing of T8 is the 106th frame after the start of the variable performance, and is the frame update timing during the normal variable period. At this timing, the sound output device 9 continues to output the third generation notification sound, the drawing of image data j (background image, variable performance image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer begins, the display of image data i drawn in the second frame buffer begins on the image display device, and the normal variable performance display screen i (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T9 is the 107th frame after the start of the fluctuation performance, which is halfway through the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the output of the third occurrence notification sound that had been output for approximately 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, the drawing of image data k (background image, fluctuation performance image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, the display of image data j that was drawn in the first frame buffer is started on the image display device, and the normal fluctuation performance display screen j (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T10 is the 108th frame after the start of the variable performance, which is halfway through the normal variable period. At this timing, drawing of image data l (background image, variable performance image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer begins, and display of image data k drawn in the second frame buffer begins on the image display device, with the normal variable performance display screen k (displaying a red character icon) being displayed on the image display device.

In this way, the output of the third generation alert sound from the audio output device 9 starts in synchronization with the frame update timing when the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display). This reduces the sense of discomfort felt by the player and makes the game more enjoyable, compared to when the frame update timing for the display of the red character icon and the output of the third generation alert sound start out of sync.

In addition, while the output of the third generation alert sound was started in accordance with (synchronization with) the frame update timing at which the red character icon was displayed, the erasure of the red character icon and the cessation of the output of the third generation alert sound are performed at different frame update timings, so the output of the third generation alert sound can be halted without being restricted by the timing of the erasure of the red character icon, making the game more interesting.

(Example of character action change pattern 01)
42 and 43 are diagrams showing an example of a presentation in which the display mode of the icon TH changes to a red character icon during a variation presentation (character action change pattern 01).

As shown in FIG. 42(a), when the first hold icon and the second hold icon are not displayed, i.e., when no hold memory is stored, a normal variable effect is executed in which the display pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner.

After that, as shown in FIG. 42(b), the character C1 is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 42(c), the character C1 blows a kiss, sending a heart H towards the icon (CD icon) TH.

When the heart H hits the icon TH, as shown in FIG. 42(d), the display mode of the icon TH changes from a CD icon to a red character icon, and the third generation notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43(a), the "2" performance pattern 70a is displayed stationary (temporarily stopped) in the variable display areas to the left and right of the performance pattern 70a that was being displayed in a variable manner, while a reach performance is executed in which the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner in the central variable display area.

When the game progresses to SP Reach, an effect begins in which friendly character C2 and enemy character C3 face off against each other, as shown in FIG. 43(b). When the game progresses to SP Reach, effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the screen, and first hold icon display area 70B and second hold icon display area 70D are erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43(c), ally character C2 defeats enemy character C3, suggesting a big win, and the changing display of effect pattern 70a stops and appears in a combination (here, "222") indicating a big win.

Then, as shown in FIG. 43(d), the performance pattern 70a returns from the reduced display to its original size and is displayed stationary in the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). At this point, since the variable display has ended, the icon (red character icon) TH that was displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

(Timing chart of pattern action change pattern 01)
Figures 44 and 45 are timing charts showing various timings when pattern action change pattern 01 is determined as the pending icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the first pending icon is changed to a red character icon.

The timing of T1 is the first frame after the start of the variable performance (the timing when the variable performance starts), and is the frame update timing of the start of the normal variable period during which the normal fluctuation of the performance pattern 70a occurs. At this timing, drawing of image data b (background image, various variable performance images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer begins, display of image data a that was drawn to the second frame buffer begins on the image display device, and the normal variable performance display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the 299th frame after the start of the fluctuation performance, and is the frame update timing during the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, it is decided to execute character action change pattern 01, which changes the display mode of the first pending icon to a red character icon, but no change pattern or the like is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the third occurrence notification sound is not started from the audio output device 9.

In addition, at the timing of T2, drawing of image data d (background image, various stop performance images, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and display of image data c drawn to the first frame buffer is started on the image display device, and the image display device is in a state where the normal changing performance display screen c is displayed.

The timing of T3 is the 300th frame after the start of the variable performance, and is the frame update timing of the pattern temporary stop period during which the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. At this timing, drawing of image data e (background image, various stop performance images, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) to the first frame buffer starts, and display of image data d drawn in the second frame buffer starts on the image display device, and the image display device displays the temporary stop performance display screen d (changing pattern display), but output of the third occurrence notification sound from the audio output device 9 does not start.

The timing of T4 is the 301st frame after the start of the variable performance, and is the frame update timing during the temporary pattern stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data f (background image, various stop performance images, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) to the second frame buffer starts, and display of image data e drawn in the first frame buffer starts on the image display device, and the temporary stop performance display screen e (changing pattern display) is displayed on the image display device, but the third occurrence notification sound from the audio output device 9 continues to be non-output.

The timing of T5 is the 302nd frame after the start of the variable performance, and is the frame update timing during the temporary pattern stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data g (background image, various stop performance images, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) to the first frame buffer starts, and display of image data f drawn in the second frame buffer starts on the image display device, and the temporary stop performance display screen f (changing pattern display) is displayed on the image display device, but the third occurrence notification sound from the audio output device 9 continues to be non-output.

The timing of T6 is the 330th frame after the start of the variable performance, and is the frame update timing during the temporary pattern stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data h (background image, various stop performance images, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) to the first frame buffer starts, and display of image data g drawn in the second frame buffer starts on the image display device, and the temporary stop performance display screen g (changing pattern display) is displayed on the image display device, but the third occurrence notification sound from the audio output device 9 continues to be non-output.

The timing of T7 is the 331st frame after the start of the variable performance, and is the frame update timing during the temporary pattern stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data i (background image, various stop performance images, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) to the second frame buffer begins, display of image data h drawn in the first frame buffer begins on the image display device, the image display device displays the temporary stop performance display screen h (displaying changing patterns and red character icons), and output of the third occurrence notification sound begins from the audio output device 9. This timing of T7 corresponds to the specified frame update timing after receiving the variable pattern designation command.

The timing of T8 is the 345th frame after the start of the variable performance, and is the frame update timing during the temporary pattern stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data j (background image, stop performance image, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern image, etc.) to the first frame buffer starts, and display of image data i drawn in the second frame buffer starts on the image display device, and the image display device displays the temporary stop performance display screen i (displaying the changing pattern and red character icon), and the output of the third occurrence notification sound from the audio output device 9 continues.

The timing of T9 is the 346th frame after the start of the variable performance, and is midway through the temporary pattern stop period. At this timing, the output of the third generation notification sound that had been output for approximately 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, drawing of image data k (background image, stop performance image, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern image, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, display of image data j that was drawn in the first frame buffer is started on the image display device, and the image display device is now in a state where the temporary stop performance display screen j (displaying the changing pattern and red character icon) is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the 347th frame after the start of the variable performance, and is midway through the temporary pattern stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data l (background image, variable performance image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer begins, and display of image data k drawn in the second frame buffer begins on the image display device, with the temporary stop performance display screen k (displaying the variable pattern and red character icon) displayed on the image display device.

In this way, the output of the third generation alert sound from the audio output device 9 starts in synchronization with the frame update timing when the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display). This reduces the sense of discomfort felt by the player and makes the game more enjoyable, compared to when the frame update timing for the display of the red character icon and the output of the third generation alert sound start out of sync.

In addition, while the output of the third generation alert sound was started in accordance with (synchronization with) the frame update timing at which the red character icon was displayed, the erasure of the red character icon and the cessation of the output of the third generation alert sound are performed at different frame update timings, so the output of the third generation alert sound can be halted without being restricted by the timing of the erasure of the red character icon, making the game more interesting.

(Example of pattern change pattern 01)
Figures 46 and 47 are figures showing an example of a performance in which the display mode of the reserved icon changes to a red character icon while the performance pattern 70a is stopped (temporarily stopped) (pattern action change pattern 01).

As shown in FIG. 46(a), when the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in the first display section 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B, a normal change performance is being executed to change and display the performance pattern 70a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 46(b), the left variable display area displays "2", the right variable display area displays "3", and the central variable display area displays "change" as a stop display (temporary stop display) of the performance pattern 70a, while a lightning-like effect appears from the stop display (temporary stop display) of the change pattern in the central variable display area toward the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 of the first display unit 70B1, and when it hits, the display mode of the first hold icon H11 changes from the CD icon to a red character icon, and the third occurrence notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46(c), the display of the effect pattern 70a begins to change, and the first hold icon (red character icon) H11 in the first display section 70B1 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C.

After that, as shown in FIG. 47(a), the "2" performance pattern 70a is displayed stationary (temporarily stopped) in the variable display areas to the left and right of the performance pattern 70a that was being displayed in a variable manner, while a reach performance is executed in which the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner in the central variable display area.

When the game progresses to SP Reach, as shown in FIG. 47(b), a performance begins in which friendly character C2 and enemy character C3 face off against each other. When the game progresses to SP Reach, the performance pattern 70a is reduced in size and displayed in the upper left, and the first reserved icon display area 70B and the second reserved icon display area 70D are erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 47(c), ally character C2 defeats enemy character C3, suggesting a big win, and the effect pattern 70a that was being displayed in a variable manner is displayed as a combination (here, "222") indicating a big win.

Then, as shown in FIG. 47(d), the performance pattern 70a returns from the reduced display to its original size and is displayed stationary in the center of the first image display device 70 (main LCD). At this point, since the variable display has ended, the icon (red character icon) TH that was displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

As described above, in this embodiment, the change presentation may be executed at a frame update timing in response to the presentation control unit 130m receiving a specified command (a start port winning designation command or a change pattern designation command), or at a specified frame update timing after the presentation control unit 130m receives a change pattern designation command. This increases the variety of change presentations, making it possible to improve the entertainment value of the game.

In this embodiment, the icon change presentation is configured to determine the final display mode and scenario when the presentation control unit 130m receives the start gate winning designation command, but is not limited to this method of determination. For example, each time a timing arrives at which the display mode of an icon (the icon in question, the reserved icon) can be changed, it may be determined whether or not to change the display mode. Also, only the final display mode may be determined when the presentation control unit 130m receives the start gate winning designation command, and the manner in which the display mode will change may be determined each time a timing arrives at which the display mode of an icon (the icon in question, the reserved icon) can be changed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display forms of the icons (the icon in question, the reserved icon) are four types: a CD icon as a normal icon, and a blue character icon, a red character icon, and a rainbow character icon as special icons, but this is not limited to four types and may be more or less.

For example, a special icon (flashing CD icon) may be provided that has a lower chance of winning a jackpot than the blue character icon and suggests that there is a possibility that the icon will change to a special icon. When providing such a special icon, it is desirable to prevent the icon from changing to a special icon in normal change pattern 02, character action change pattern 01, and pattern action change pattern 01 (change effects that occur at a specified frame update timing after receiving a change pattern designation command) because the icon has a lower chance of winning a jackpot than the blue character icon. By doing this, the icon will not change to a special icon in normal change pattern 02, character action change pattern 01, and pattern action change pattern 01 (change effects that occur at a specified frame update timing after receiving a change pattern designation command), which are likely to change to a display mode with a high chance of winning a jackpot, so that the variety of icon display modes can be increased while preventing players from becoming disappointed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition to the four types of icons in this embodiment, the above-mentioned special icon and green character icon may be provided. In this case, the probability of winning the jackpot for the icon (the icon in question, the reserved icon) may be set to increase in the following order: (CD icon <) flashing CD icon < blue character icon < green character icon < red character icon < rainbow character icon.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the character C1 or the change pattern is displayed in the character effect change pattern 01 or the pattern effect change pattern 01, the display mode of the icon (the icon, the reserved icon) is always changed, but it is also possible to provide a case where the character C1 or the change pattern is displayed but not changed (so-called false performance). When providing such a false performance, it is preferable that the false performance for the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the pattern effect change pattern 01 (the change performance that occurs at a specified frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command) is executed at a higher rate than the false performance for the winning change performance and the normal change pattern 01 (the change performance that occurs at a frame update timing in response to receiving a specified command), or that only the false performance for the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the pattern effect change pattern 01 (the change performance that occurs at a specified frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command) can be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the icon change effect is not executed multiple times during one change effect, but it may be executed multiple times. In this case, since the winning change effect and normal change pattern 01 (a change effect that occurs at a frame update timing in response to receipt of a specified command) only occur once during a change effect, normal change pattern 02, character effect change pattern 01, and design effect change pattern 01 (a change effect that occurs at a specified frame update timing after receipt of a change pattern designation command) can be executed multiple times. By doing this, the display mode of the icon (the icon in question, the reserved icon) may change multiple times during one change effect, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the execution timing of the change effects (winning change effects and normal change pattern 01) that occur at the frame update timing in response to the reception of a specified command is set to a frame update timing that is two frames after the number of frames in which the specified command (starting gate winning designation command or variation pattern designation command) is received, but it is not limited to two frames later, and can be one frame later or several frames later as long as it is not extremely late after the reception of the specified command.

In addition, in this embodiment, the icon change pattern is not provided with the pattern action change pattern 01, but it may be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, when "Normal Change Pattern 01" is executed, the change performance is executed at the frame update timing in response to the reception of a change pattern designation command, but this is not limited to this timing, and for example, the change performance may be executed at the frame update timing in response to the reception of a special pattern storage designation command or a designation command.

In addition, in this embodiment, when "Normal Change Pattern 02", "Character Effect Change Pattern 01", and "Pattern Effect Change Pattern 01" are executed, the change performance is executed at a specified frame update timing after the change pattern designation command is received, but this timing is not limited, and the change performance may be executed at a specified frame update timing after another specified command is received.

In addition, in this embodiment, when an icon (the icon in question, the reserved icon) changes, an icon occurrence (change) notification sound is output as a performance to notify that the icon (the icon in question, the reserved icon) has changed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a performance, and in addition to outputting the icon occurrence (change) notification sound, the board lighting device 76 and/or the frame lighting device 10 may be used to light up a lamp in the same color as the display mode of the changed icon (the icon in question, the reserved icon). In this case, as with the output of the icon occurrence (change) notification sound, the lamp of the board lighting device 76 and/or the frame lighting device 10 may start to light up in accordance with (synchronization with) the frame update timing at which the changed icon (the icon in question, the reserved icon) is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the timing at which the lamp light emission ends may be set to end after a predetermined time has elapsed, or may be set to end in accordance with (synchronization with) the frame update timing at which the icon (the icon in question, the reserved icon) is erased.

In addition, in this embodiment, the icon and the hold icon are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD), but they may also be displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub LCD).

In addition, in this embodiment, the execution of the icon change effect is not restricted depending on the game state, but the execution of the icon change effect may be restricted depending on the game state. For example, in the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the winning change effect and the normal change pattern 01 (the change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of a specified command) can be executed, but the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the pattern action change pattern 01 (the change effect that occurs at the specified frame update timing after the reception of the change pattern designation command) may not be executed. In this way, since the first specific game state and the second specific game state are set to have a short change time, the execution of the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the pattern action change pattern 01 (the change effect that occurs at the specified frame update timing after the reception of the change pattern designation command) executed during the change is restricted, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game without impairing the playability of the first specific game state and the second specific game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the icon change effect changes the display mode (shape and color) of the reserved icon or the icon itself, but is not limited to such changes, and the display mode of the reserved icon or the icon itself may not be changed (remaining as a CD icon), and a color effect indicating the expected probability of winning a jackpot may be displayed around the reserved icon or the icon, or a character indicating the expected probability of winning a jackpot may be displayed around (near) the reserved icon or the icon, or a text image suggesting the planned effect (for example, "SP" or "pseudo consecutive") may be displayed around (near) the reserved icon or the icon.

In addition, in this embodiment, the change scenario is determined regardless of whether or not a jackpot has been won, but it may be determined by referring to whether or not a jackpot has been won. Specifically, one change scenario may be determined from among multiple change scenarios based on the final icon display state, the current number of reserved items, whether or not a jackpot has been won, and the selection rate (%).

In this way, when determining the change scenario by referring to whether or not a jackpot has been won, if a jackpot has been won and the icon changes to a red character, the selection rate (%) can be set so that the change scenario in which the icon changes to a red character upon winning is more likely to be selected when the current reserved number is "3" or "4" than when it is "1" or "2."
In other words, when a jackpot is won and the icon changes to a red character, the selection rate (%) of the change scenario in which the icon changes to a red character upon winning is less likely to be selected when the current reserved number is "1" or "2" than when the number is "3" or "4."
In addition, when the jackpot is not won, i.e., when the winning jackpot is lost and the icon changes to a red character icon, the selection rate (%) can be set to make the change scenario in which the icon changes to a red character icon upon winning less likely to be selected than when the jackpot is won and the icon changes to a red character icon.

In addition, in this embodiment, the reserved icon change pattern is determined regardless of the current number of reserved balls or whether the jackpot has been won or lost, but it may be determined by referring to the current number of reserved balls or whether the jackpot has been won or lost. Specifically, one reserved icon change pattern may be determined from among multiple reserved icon change patterns based on the mode of reserved icon change in the current variable performance, the current number of reserved balls, whether the jackpot has been won or lost, and the selection rate (%).

In this way, when determining the reserved icon change pattern by referring to the current reserved number and the outcome of the jackpot, if a jackpot is won and the icon changes to a red character icon, the selection rate (%) can be set so that "normal change pattern 01" is more likely to be selected as the reserved icon change pattern when the current reserved number is "3" or "4" than when it is "1" or "2".
In other words, when a jackpot is won and the icon changes to a red character icon, the selection rate (%) of "Normal Change Pattern 01" as the reserved icon change pattern is less likely to be selected when the current reserved number is "1" or "2" than when it is "3" or "4."
In addition, when the jackpot is not won, that is, when the winning is lost and the icon changes to a red character icon, the selection rate (%) can be set to make it less likely that the reserved icon change pattern "normal change pattern 01" will be selected than when the jackpot is won and the icon changes to a red character icon.

As described above, when the icon changes to red during a winning change effect and in normal change pattern 01 (a change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to receiving a specified command), the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher when the current reserved number is "3" or "4" than when it is "1" or "2," making the game more interesting.

(Modification of the first embodiment)
Hereinafter, the modified example of the first embodiment will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

The modified example of the first embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that, for example, as shown in FIG. 49(a), a special pattern display area for displaying a special pattern TZ that changes in response to the changing display of the special pattern is provided in the lower right corner of the display section of the first image display device 70.

It also differs from the first embodiment in that a first reserved number display area 70E for displaying a first reserved number indicating the current reserved number of first special symbols (U1) and a second reserved number display area 70F for displaying a second reserved number indicating the current reserved number of second special symbols (U2) are provided at the left end of the display section of the first image display device 70.

The first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number displayed in the second pending number display area 70F correspond to the first pending information, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B and the second pending icon displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D correspond to the second pending information, and the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C corresponds to the execution information.

(Example of when a variable performance starts from a waiting state)
A specific example of when a variable performance starts from a customer waiting state will be described using Figures 48 to 50. Figure 38 is a timing chart of when a variable performance starts from a customer waiting state, and Figures 49(a) to (f) and Figures 50(g) to (k) are diagrams showing examples of performance corresponding to Figure 48(a) to (k).

First, timing T0 is the 0th frame after the customer waiting state begins. At this timing, the waiting time (30 seconds) begins to be subtracted to start the customer waiting demo performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(a), the first image display device 70 displays the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ in a stopped state. In addition, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F display "0", and the reserved icon and the icon TH are not displayed.

The timing of T1 is when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (fourth frame from the start of the waiting state). At this timing, the first reserved number is displayed as an increment without animation, and the first reserved icon is displayed as an increment without animation (completed in one frame), and the output of the first occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon occurs, begins.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1," and the first reserved icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in normal size in the first display section 70B1. In addition, the first occurrence notification sound (beep) is output from the audio output device 9.

The timing of T2 is the timing (5th frame from the start of the waiting state) when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) decreases from "1" to "0" and the normal change pattern change performance (display of the special symbol change) begins. At this timing, the display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ change, the non-animated decrease display of the first reserved number, and the animated change of the first reserved icon to that icon (display of the decrease) begin.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(c), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0," and the first reserved icon (CD icon) H11 displayed in the first display section 70B1 starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C. In addition, the performance pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size without being scrolled (updated to another performance pattern), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

The timing of T3 is the 10th frame after the start of the output of the first generated alarm sound (the 14th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the output of the first generated alarm sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(d), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 continues to move (shift) to the icon display area 70C, and the reduced display of the performance pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T4 is the 20th frame from the start of the display (decrease display) of the change to the first hold icon (25th frame from the start of the waiting state for customers). At this timing, the display of the change to the first hold icon ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(e), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon H11 that has moved from the first display unit 70B1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and becomes the icon TH, and the reduced display of the performance pattern 70a stops.

The timing of T5 is the 40th frame after the start of the variable performance (45th frame after the start of the waiting state for customers). At this timing, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(f), in the first image display device 70, following scrolling (downward movement) of the performance pattern 70a in the left variable display area, scrolling (downward movement) of the performance pattern 70a in the central variable display area begins.

The timing of T6 is the 50th frame after the start of the variable performance (55th frame after the start of the waiting state for customers). At this timing, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(g), in the first image display device 70, following scrolling (downward movement) of the performance pattern 70a in the central variable display area, scrolling (downward movement) of the performance pattern 70a in the right variable display area begins, resulting in a state in which the performance pattern 70a is scrolling in all variable display areas.

The timing of T7 is the 225th frame after the start of the variable performance (230th frame after the start of the waiting state for customers). At this timing, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(h), in the first image display device 70, the "3" display pattern 70a is temporarily stopped (is in a swinging state) in the left variable display area, while the display pattern 70a continues to scroll in the center and right variable display areas.

The timing of T8 is the 255th frame after the start of the variable performance (260th frame after the start of the waiting state for customers). At this timing, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(i), in the first image display device 70, the "5" display pattern 70a is temporarily stopped (is in a swinging state) in the right-hand variable display area, while the scrolling of the display pattern 70a continues in the central variable display area.

The timing of T9 is the 285th frame after the start of the variable performance (the 290th frame after the start of the waiting state for customers). At this timing, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(j), on the first image display device 70, the "6" display pattern 70a is temporarily stopped (in a swinging state) in the central variable display area, and a combination of display patterns 70a indicating a loss is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the 300th frame after the start of the variable performance (the 305th frame after the start of the waiting state for customers). At this timing, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a and the variable display of the special pattern TZ end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(k), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped in the left, center, and right variable display areas is displayed as stopped, and the special pattern TZ is displayed as stopped in the same combination "365" as the effect pattern 70a. In addition, the icon TH that was displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, if the number of reserved special symbols increases (changes from "0" to "1") while customers are waiting, the non-animated display of the increase in the reserved numbers and reserved icons ends in the shortest possible period (time) of one frame, so that the game can immediately transition to a variable presentation (a decrease in the reserved numbers and a change to the reserved icon) to avoid any dragging, making the game more interesting.

In addition, the notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the display of the reserved numbers and reserved icons continues until a later (frame update) timing than the end (frame update) timing of the display of the reserved numbers and reserved icons, so the player can be sure that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, if the number of reserved special symbols decreases (changing from "1" to "0"), the reserved number is displayed as a non-animated decrease, and the reserved icon is animated to change to the corresponding icon, ensuring that the player is aware that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, the timing when the display of the reserved number decreasing is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing when the display of the reserved icon changing to the corresponding icon is completed (frame update), so while the number of reserved special symbols is changed, it is easier for the player to understand that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased due to the reserved numbers, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect pattern does not scroll (does not update to the next effect pattern) until the pending icon has completed changing to the corresponding icon, and the effect pattern starts scrolling (updating to the next effect pattern) when the display due to the pending icon change is completed (frame update), making it easier to understand the progress of the game, in which the changing effect starts after the pending memory is reduced, and making the game more interesting.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols increases (changing from "0" to "1") while waiting for customers, the display of the increase in the reserved icon may not be displayed non-animated, but may be displayed with an animation spanning multiple frames (e.g., five frames) so that it continues longer than the display of the increase in the reserved numbers. This makes it easier for players to grasp the increase in the reserved special symbols, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, rather than starting the display of the pending numbers decreasing and the display of the pending icon changing to the corresponding icon (decrease display) at the same timing (frame update), either may start first as long as the timing when the display of the pending numbers decreasing is completed (frame update) is earlier. In this way, it is possible to increase the freedom of display control while allowing the player to know at an early stage that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, instead of starting the scrolling of the performance pattern (updating to the next performance pattern) when the display due to the change in the pending icon is completed (frame update) (start is delayed more than usual), the scrolling of the performance pattern (updating to the next performance pattern) may be started a little before the display due to the change in the pending icon is completed (frame update).

(Example of when the number of reserved items increases during a variable performance)
A specific example of an increase in the reserved number during a variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 51 to 52. Figure 51 is a timing chart showing an increase in the reserved number during a variable performance, and Figures 52(a) to (c) are diagrams showing examples of performance corresponding to Figure 51(a) to (c).

First, the timing of T1 is the 50th frame after the start of the normal variation pattern. At this timing, the variation display of the performance pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52(a), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are scrolled (moved downward) on the first image display device 70. Also, "0" is displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F, and the icon (CD icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (the 60th frame from the start of the variable presentation). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first reserved number and the animated increase display of the first reserved icon begin, and the output of the first occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon occurs, begins.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52(b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1," and the first reserved icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in a very small size in the first display section 70B1 and begins to be enlarged. In addition, the first occurrence notification sound (beep) is output from the audio output device 9.

The timing of T3 is the 10th frame after the increase in the number of first pending icons starts (the 70th frame after the start of the variable presentation). At this timing, the increase in the number of first pending icons ends and the output of the first occurrence notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52(c), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 is stopped and the icon is displayed at normal size.

In this way, when the number of reserved special symbols increases, the reserved numbers are displayed as an increase without animation, and the reserved icons are displayed as an increase with animation, so the player can be sure that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the timing at which the display of the reserved numbers is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing at which the display of the reserved icons is completed (frame update), so while the number of reserved special symbols changes, it is easier for the player to understand that the number of reserved special symbols has increased due to the reserved numbers, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of reserved special symbols increases while a variable performance is being performed, the reserved icon is displayed for a longer period of time compared to when the number of reserved special symbols increases while waiting for customers, so the player can be sure that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, the notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the display of the reserved numbers and the reserved icons increasing ends in synchronization with the timing when the display of the reserved icons ending (frame update), so it is possible to effectively convey the increase in the number of reserved special symbols, making the game more interesting.

In addition, the period (10 frames) for the display of the pending icon increasing is shorter than the period (20 frames) for the display of the pending icon changing to the corresponding icon, so the start of the changing performance can be emphasized, making the game more interesting.

In addition, rather than starting the display of the increase in the reserved numbers and the display of the reserved icons at the same time (frame update), either one may be started first as long as the timing when the display of the increase in the reserved numbers is completed (frame update) is earlier. In this way, it is possible to increase the freedom of display control while allowing the player to understand at an early stage that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, making the game more interesting.

In addition, the period for which the reserved icon is displayed to increase may be longer than the period for which the reserved icon is displayed to change to the icon in question, rather than being shorter. In this way, the increase in the number of reserved special symbols can be emphasized, making the game more interesting.

In addition, rather than making the period during which the pending icon increases shorter than the period during which the pending icon changes to the icon in question, the two periods may be the same length.

(Example of when the number of pending orders increases immediately after decreasing)
53 to 54, a specific example of when the reserved number increases immediately after it is decreased will be described. Fig. 53 is a timing chart showing when the reserved number increases immediately after it is decreased, and Fig. 54 (a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of performances corresponding to Fig. 53 (a) to (f).

First, the timing of T0 is the timing that is the fifth frame after the static display of the performance pattern 70a. At this timing, the static display of the performance pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(a), the first image display device 70 displays the "4", "6", and "8" performance symbols 70a, which indicate a miss, and the special symbol TZ in a stopped state. Also, the first hold number display area 70E displays "2", and the second hold number display area 70F displays "0". Furthermore, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display section 70B1, and the second display section 70B2 displays the first hold icon (CD icon) H12, with the icon TH not being displayed.

The timing of T1 is the timing when the change performance (change display of the special symbol) due to the normal change pattern starts (the 20th frame after the display of the performance symbol 70a is stopped). At this timing, the change display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the non-animated decrease display of the first reserved number, the animated change display of the first reserved icon to the corresponding icon, and the animated decrease display of the first reserved icon start.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1". In addition, the first reserved icon (CD icon) H11 displayed in the first display unit 70B1 starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C, and the first reserved icon (CD icon) H12 displayed in the second display unit 70B2 starts to move (shift) toward the first display unit 70B1. Furthermore, the performance pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size without being scrolled (updated to another performance pattern), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 30th frame after the display of the performance symbol 70a is stopped). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first reserved number begins, but because the display by changing the first reserved icon and the decrease display are in progress, the increase display of the first reserved icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon occurs, are put on hold.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(c), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2," and the reduced display of the performance pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the 20th frame after the display of the change in the first hold icon and the start of the decrease display (40th frame after the stop display of the performance pattern 70a). At this timing, the display of the change in the first hold icon and the decrease display end. In addition, the animation of the increase in the first hold icon that has been waiting starts, and the output of the first occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon occurs, starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(d), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon H11 that has moved from the first display unit 70B1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and becomes the icon TH, and the first hold icon H12 that has moved from the second display unit 70B2 is positioned at the center of the first display unit 70B1, and the reduced display of the performance pattern 70a stops. In addition, the first hold icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed in a very small size on the second display unit 70B2 and begins to be enlarged, and the sound output device 9 begins to output the first occurrence notification sound (beep).

The timing of T4 is the 5th frame after the first pending icon starts to be displayed in increasing numbers (45th frame after the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a stopped state). At this timing, the display of the first pending icon in increasing numbers and the output of the first occurrence notification sound continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(e), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed in a small size on the second display section 70B2 and continues to be enlarged, while the output of the first occurrence notification sound (beep) from the audio output device 9 continues. In addition, scrolling (moving downwards) of the performance pattern 70a in the variable display area on the left side begins.

The timing of T5 is the 10th frame after the increasing display of the first hold icon starts (the 50th frame after the display of the performance pattern 70a is stopped). At this timing, the increasing display of the first hold icon ends and the output of the first occurrence notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(f), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed in the first display unit 70B1 ends and the icon is displayed in normal size. Also, scrolling (moving downward) of the performance pattern 70a in the central variable display area begins.

In this way, if the number of reserved special symbols increases while the reserved icon is changing to the corresponding icon and the reserved icon is decreasing, the display of the increase in the reserved numbers will begin even before the display of this change and the decrease are completed (frame update), so the player can recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased even while the display of the reserved icon is changing and the decrease are being displayed, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, if the number of reserved special symbols increases while the reserved icon is being changed and the reserved icon is being decreased, the display of the increased reserved icon and the output of the generated notification sound are put on hold (limited), and when the display of the changed reserved icon and the decrease in the reserved icon are completed (frame update), the display of the increased reserved icon and the output of the generated notification sound are started, so that it is possible to prevent the change in the reserved special symbol number from becoming difficult to grasp, and to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, instead of outputting the occurrence notification sound in synchronization with the increase in the reserved icon, which is executed after the increase in the reserved number, the occurrence notification sound may be output in synchronization with the increase in the reserved number.

In addition, rather than starting the display of the pending icon increase and the output of the notification sound when the display of the pending icon change and the display of the decrease are completed (frame update) (which is delayed from normal), the display of the pending icon increase and the output of the notification sound may be started a little before the display of the pending icon change and the display of the decrease are completed (frame update). By doing this, it is possible to prevent the progress of the reserved number of special symbols from becoming difficult to grasp, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, even if the number of reserved special symbols increases while the reserved icons are being displayed in an increasing manner, the display of the increased reserved icons and the output of the occurrence notification sound are put on hold (restricted) in the same way as when the display is due to a change in the reserved icons or when the display is during a decrease, while the display of the increased reserved numbers is started, and when the display of the increased reserved icons is completed (frame update), the display of the increased reserved icons and the output of the occurrence notification sound are started.

(Specific example of when the number of reserved balls increases during a specific reach performance)
A specific example of an increase in the reserved number during a specific reach effect will be described with reference to Figures 55 to 56. Figure 55 is a timing chart showing an increase in the reserved number during a specific reach effect, and Figures 56(a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to Figure 55(a) to (f).

First, the timing of T1 is the 400th frame after the start of the SP reach variation pattern. At this timing, the normal reach variation that is executed before the SP reach variation and the variation display of the special symbol TZ continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(a), in the first image display device 70, the "7" display pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, while the variable display of the display pattern 70a continues in the central variable display area. In addition, a "1" is displayed in the first hold number display area 70E, and a "0" is displayed in the second hold number display area 70F. Furthermore, the first display section 70B1 displays the first hold icon (CD icon) H11, and the icon (CD icon) TH is also displayed.

The timing of T2 is the 90th frame from the start of the normal reach effect (430 frames from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development effect to develop into the SP reach effect begins.

Specifically, on the first image display device 70, the "7" display pattern 70a that is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the display pattern 70a that is scrolling in the central variable display area, begin to move to the top left of the screen and shrink.

The timing of T3 is the 15th frame after the start of the development performance (445th frame after the start of the variable performance). At this timing, the development performance to develop into the SP reach performance continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(b), in the first image display device 70, the "7" display pattern 70a that is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the display pattern 70a that is scrolling in the central variable display area are displayed near the top left of the screen and are displayed in a size smaller than the normal size.

The timing of T4 is the 30th frame after the start of the development performance (460th frame after the start of the variable performance). At this timing, the development performance ends and the SP reach performance begins.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(c), in the first image display device 70, the performance pattern 70a in the left, center, and right variable display area is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left of the screen, and a showdown performance begins in the center of the screen in which ally character C2 and enemy character C3 face off against each other. In addition, the reserved icons (only the first reserved icon in this case) displayed in the reserved icon display area (first reserved icon display area 70B, second reserved icon display area 70D) become hidden together with the reserved icon display area, leaving only the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, the special pattern TZ becomes a "7" pattern, the same as the performance pattern 70a, and a reach state is reached.

The timing of T5 is when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (820 frames after the variable performance begins). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first reserved number begins, but because the SP reach performance (confrontation performance) is in progress, there is no increase display of the first reserved icon at this timing, and no output of the occurrence notification sound that is the notification sound when the icon occurs.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(d), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2," and the final performance of the showdown performance (the deciding performance to notify whether or not a jackpot has been won) is executed.

The timing of T6 is the 420th frame after the start of the SP reach effect (showdown effect) (880th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result of the final effect (decisive effect) of the showdown effect is derived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(e), the first image display device 70 displays an effect in which friendly character C2 wins over enemy character C3, and the effect pattern 70a displayed in a reduced size at the top left of the screen temporarily stops (becomes oscillating) on a combination ("777") indicating a jackpot.

The timing of T7 is the 450th frame after the start of the SP reach performance (confrontation performance) (910th frame after the start of the variable performance). At this timing, the SP reach performance (confrontation performance) ends, and the first hold icon is displayed as a non-animated return and an increase.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(f), in the first image display device 70, the performance pattern 70a that was displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the screen is enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen and temporarily stopped (in a swinging state). In addition, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is redisplayed on the first display section 70B1, and the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed in normal size on the second display section 70B2.

Finally, the effect pattern 70a that had been temporarily stopped in the left, center, and right variable display areas is stopped, and the special pattern TZ is stopped in the same combination "777" as the effect pattern 70a. Also, the icon TH that was displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, if the number of reserved special symbols increases while a specific effect (SP reach effect) is being played, the display of the increased reserved numbers will begin even before the specific effect ends (frame update), making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of reserved special symbols increases during the execution of a specific effect (SP reach effect), the display of the increased number of reserved icons is put on hold (limited), and when the specific effect ends (the reduced-sized missing or big win effect symbols are enlarged) (frame update), the display of the increased number of reserved icons begins, preventing the progress of the reserved special symbol number from becoming difficult to grasp and making the game more interesting.

In addition, when the display of the reserved icons starts to increase when a specific effect (SP reach effect) ends, the display of the reserved icons is performed using a non-animated method that is completed in one frame, so even if there is an extreme discrepancy between the timing when the reserved special pattern number increases and the timing when the display of the reserved icons is increased, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of discomfort and increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, when the display of the reserved icons starts to increase when a special effect (SP reach effect) ends, no notification sound is output, making it difficult for the player to mistakenly believe that the number of reserved special symbols has increased when the special effect ends due to the notification sound, making the game more interesting.

Even if the number of reserved special symbols increases by multiple times during the execution of a specific effect (SP reach effect), the display of the reserved numbers will be increased while the display of the reserved icons will be put on hold (limited), and when the specific effect ends (frame update), the display of the increased reserved icons will be increased all at once in one frame.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols increases during the execution of a specific effect (SP reach effect), rather than not outputting the occurrence notification sound, the occurrence notification sound may be output in synchronization with the display of the increase in the reserved numbers.

In addition, although an SP reach effect has been given as an example of a specific effect, the specific effect may also include an SPSP reach effect or a full rotation reach effect.

(Specific examples of when the number of reserved balls increases or decreases before and after the end of a specific game state)
Specific examples of the increase and decrease of the reserved number before and after the end of a specific game state will be described using Figures 57 to 59. Figure 57 is a timing chart showing the increase and decrease of the reserved number before and after the end of a specific game state, and Figures 58(a) to (f) and Figures 59(g) to (i) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to Figure 57(a) to (i).

First, the timing of T1 is the timing that is 400 frames after the start of the last (100th) variable presentation in the specific game state. At this timing, the variable display of the presentation pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(a), a "1" is displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, and a "4" is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F. The first reserved icon display area 70B is also erased, and the second reserved icons (CD icons) H21-H24 are displayed in the first display section 70D1-fourth display section 70D4 of the second reserved icon display area 70D, respectively, with the icon TH being displayed. Furthermore, the number of variable effects that can be executed in a specific game state (here, "0 remaining") is displayed at the top of the screen, and a right-hit image MU is displayed at the top right of the screen, encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right area of the game area 5a.

The timing of T2 is when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (415 frames after the variable presentation starts). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first reserved number starts, but because the first reserved icon display area 70B has been erased, there is no increase display of the first reserved icon, and no output of the occurrence notification sound that is the notification sound when the icon occurs.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2," while the scrolling of the performance pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the 430th frame after the start of the variable performance. At this timing, the performance patterns 70a that were being displayed in the variable display areas on the left, center, and right simultaneously temporarily stop.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(c), in the first image display device 70, the "285" display pattern 70a is temporarily stopped (in a swinging state) in the left, center, and right variable display areas, and a combination of display patterns 70a indicating a loss is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the 15th frame after the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped (445th frame after the variable effect starts). At this timing, the result display starts, which shows the results of the game during the specified advantageous period (the period during which the jackpot game and the specific game state continue).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(d), the background image HG goes dark on the first image display device 70, and the words "Special Time Ended," indicating the end of the special game state, and "Jackpot x 1," the number of jackpot games executed during the specified advantageous period, are displayed. In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the screen.

The timing of T5 is the 15th frame after the result display starts (460th frame after the variable performance starts). At this timing, the result display continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(e), the first image display device 70 additionally displays the words "TOTAL 1200pt," indicating the number of game balls acquired (paid out) during a specified advantageous period.

The timing of T6 is the 30th frame after the result display starts (475th frame after the start of the variable display). At this timing, the variable display of the display pattern 70a and the variable display of the special pattern TZ end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(f), in the first image display device 70, the performance symbol 70a that was temporarily stopped at the upper left of the screen moves to the center of the screen and is displayed as stopped, and the special symbol TZ is displayed as stopped with the same combination "285" as the performance symbol 70a. In addition, the icon TH that was displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

The timing of T7 is the timing when the last (100th) variable performance in the specific game state ends and the first variable performance in the normal game state starts (490 frames from the start of the variable performance). At this timing, the display of the variable performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ, the non-animated decrease of the second reserved number, the animated change of the second reserved icon to the icon, the animated decrease of the second reserved icon, the non-animated return of the first reserved icon, and the non-animated increase of the first reserved icon start.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59(g), in the first image display device 70, the second reserved number displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3," the second reserved icon (CD icon) H21 displayed in the first display unit 70D1 starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C, and the second reserved icons (CD icons) H22 to H24 displayed in the second display unit 70D2 to the fourth display unit 70D4 start to move (shift) toward the adjacent display unit.

The first hold icon display area returns, and the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed again on the first display section 70B1, while the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed in normal size on the second display section 70B2. Furthermore, the performance pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size without being scrolled (updated to another performance pattern), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll. Also, a left-hit image HU is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen, encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the left area of the game area 5a.

The timing of T8 is the 20th frame after the display of the change in the second pending icon and the start of the decrease display (510 frames after the start of the previous change performance). At this timing, the display of the change in the second pending icon and the decrease display end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59(h), in the first image display device 70, the second hold icon H21 that has moved from the first display unit 70D1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and becomes the icon TH, while the second hold icons H22 to H24 that have moved from the second display unit 70D2 to the fourth display unit 70D4 are positioned at the centers of the adjacent display units, and the reduced display of the performance pattern 70a stops.

The timing of T9 is the 10th frame after the display due to the change in the second hold icon and the end of the decrease display (520 frames from the start of the previous variable effect). At this timing, the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59(i), in the first image display device 70, following scrolling of the performance pattern 70a in the variable display area on the left side, scrolling (movement downward) of the performance pattern 70a in the variable display area in the center begins.

In this way, when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases during a specific game state, the display of the first reserved icon is put on hold (limited), while the display of the first reserved number begins to increase, so that the player can recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased even while a specific performance is being performed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases during a specific game state, the display of the first reserved icon starts to increase when the specific game state (the last variable performance in that state) ends (frame update). Therefore, even if you miss the display of the increase in the first reserved number that was executed before that, you can recognize that the number of reserved first special symbols has increased, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when the display of the first reserved icon starts to increase at the timing when the specific game state (the final variable performance in that state) ends, the display of the reserved icons is performed in a non-animated manner that is completed in one frame, so even if there is an extreme discrepancy between the timing when the reserved number of special patterns increases and the timing when the display of the reserved icons is increased, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of discomfort and increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the display of the reserved icons starts to increase when the specific game state (the final variable performance in that state) ends, the notification sound is not output, so it is difficult to mistakenly believe that the number of reserved special symbols has increased when the specific game state ends due to the notification sound, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the presentation pattern does not scroll (does not update to the next presentation pattern) until the display of the pending icon is completed by changing to the relevant icon, and the scrolling of the presentation pattern (updating to the next presentation pattern) begins at the timing when the display of the pending icon is completed by changing (frame update), making it easier to grasp the progress of the presentation during the changing presentation, and making the game more interesting.

Even if the number of reserved first special symbols increases by multiple times during a specific game state, the display of the reserved numbers is increased while the display of the reserved icons is put on hold (restricted), and when the specific game state (the last variable performance in the specific game state) ends (frame update), the display of the increased reserved icons is all displayed together in one frame.

In addition, when the number of reserved first special symbols increases during a specific game state, rather than not outputting the generation notification sound, the generation notification sound may be output in synchronization with the display of the increase in the reserved numbers.

In this embodiment, the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are set (displayed) in the normal game state, but it is also possible to set (display) only the first hold icon display area 70B without setting (displaying) the second hold icon display area 70D.

In addition, in this embodiment, the icon display area 70C is set (displayed) regardless of whether a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect) is being executed during the variable effect, but the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during the execution of a specific effect, or the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C from the middle of the execution of a specific effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F are set (displayed) on the first image display device 70, but they may be set (displayed) on the second image display device 71, or on a dedicated display device different from the image display device (e.g., a 7-segment LED, dot matrix, dedicated LED, etc.). When set on a dedicated LED, it is preferable to display the reserved number of special symbols by the lighting color or lighting/flashing mode of the LED.

(Initial processing of lamp/drive control unit)
The role initial processing of the lamp/drive control unit 150 will be described with reference to Fig. 60. Fig. 60 is a flowchart showing the role initial processing of the lamp/drive control unit 150, and this processing is executed within a timer interrupt processing executed at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) in the lamp/drive control unit 150.

In step R101, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) has been received from the main control board 110. If a power-on command has been received, the process proceeds to step R102; if a power-on command has not been received, the process proceeds to step R103.

In step R102, the lamp CPU 150a sets the initial processing number, which is updated during each process of the reel initial processing, to "1" to execute the origin return process for the reels (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, and performance button 17).

In step R103, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the initial processing number is "1". If the initial processing number is not "1", the process proceeds to step R105 without executing the origin return process for the reel. If the initial processing number is "1", the process proceeds to step R104, where it executes the origin return process and ends the current reel initial processing. Specifically, it performs processes such as executing the return operation of the reel (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) to the origin position based on the input signal from the position detection sensor and setting the initial processing number to "2". The origin return process will be described in detail later.

In step R105, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the initial processing number is "2". If the initial processing number is not "2", the current reel initial processing is terminated without executing the initial operation processing of the reel, and if the initial processing number is "2", the initial operation processing is performed and the current reel initial processing is terminated. Specifically, the initial operation and initial light emission are performed to check whether the reel is operating normally, and the initial processing number is set to "0". Details of the initial operation processing will be described later.

In this way, according to the reel initial processing shown in FIG. 60, the origin return processing for returning the various reels to their origin positions and the initial operation processing for performing the initial operations and initial light emission of the various reels are not executed at the same time. By doing this, the return operations of the various reels to their origin positions and the initial operations and initial light emission of the various reels are not mixed, and it becomes possible to check the return operations separately from the initial operations and initial light emission.

In addition, according to the reel initial processing shown in FIG. 60, the origin return processing is executed before the initial operation processing. By doing this, the various reels start their initial operation from their origin positions, making it easier to determine whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the various reels.

(Origin return process of lamp/drive control unit)
The origin return process of the lamp/drive control unit 150 will be described with reference to Fig. 61. Fig. 61 is a flowchart showing the origin return process in the lamp/drive control unit 150.

In step R105-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board role processing number, which indicates the progress of the origin return status of the board role (first movable member 73, second movable member 74), is "0". If the board role processing number is not "0", the process proceeds to step R105-3. If the board role processing number is "0", in step R105-2, the first movable member 73 is set as the drive target to be returned to the origin, and the process proceeds to step R105-5.

In step R105-3, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board role processing number is "1." If the board role processing number is not "1," the process proceeds to step R105-12. If the board role processing number is "1," the process proceeds to step R105-4, where the second movable member 74 is set as the drive target to be returned to the origin, and the process proceeds to step R105-5.

In step R105-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the movable member to be driven is in the origin position (standby position). Specifically, it determines the input signal from the position detection sensor that detects that each movable member is in the origin position. If the movable member to be driven is not in the origin position, the process proceeds to step R105-6, and if the movable member to be driven is in the origin position, the process proceeds to step R105-11.

In step R105-6, the lamp CPU 150a drives the drive motor to move the movable member to be driven so that the movable member to be driven returns to the origin position, and in step R105-7, updates by +1 the board role object abnormality determination timer to determine the occurrence of a return abnormality in which the movable member does not return to the origin position within a specified time.

In step R105-8, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the updated board role abnormality determination timer is at its upper limit (e.g., 5 seconds). If the board role abnormality determination timer is at its upper limit, it assumes that a return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven and proceeds to step R105-9. If the board role abnormality determination timer is not at its upper limit, it proceeds to step R105-12.

In step R105-9, the lamp CPU 150a sets in the lamp RAM 150c return abnormality information (first movable member return abnormality information, second movable member return abnormality information) indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven, and in step R105-10, clears the board role abnormality determination timer.

In step R105-11, the lamp CPU 150a updates the board role processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board role processing number is "0", the board role processing number is updated to "1" to drive the second movable member 74, and if the board role processing number is "1", the board role processing number is updated to "2" to end the process of returning the board role (first movable member, second movable member) to the origin.

In step R105-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the frame role processing number, which indicates the progress of the origin return status of the frame role (performance button 17), is "0". If the frame role processing number is "0", the process proceeds to step R105-13, and if the board role processing number is not "0", the process proceeds to step R105-20.

In step R105-13, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the performance button 17 is in the origin position (standby position). Specifically, it determines the input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that the performance button 17 is in the origin position. If the performance button 17 is not in the origin position, it moves the process to step R105-14, and if the performance button 17 is in the origin position, it moves the process to step R105-19.

In step R105-14, the lamp CPU 150a drives the effect button drive motor to move the effect button 17 so that the effect button 17 returns to its original position, and in step R105-15, updates by +1 the frame role object abnormality determination timer to determine the occurrence of a return abnormality in which the effect button 17 does not return to its original position within a specified time.

In step R105-16, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the updated frame role object abnormality determination timer is at its upper limit (e.g., 5 seconds). If the frame role object abnormality determination timer is at its upper limit, it assumes that a return abnormality has occurred in the performance button 17 and proceeds to step R105-17. If the frame role object abnormality determination timer is not at its upper limit, it ends the current origin return process.

In step R105-17, the lamp CPU 150a sets recovery abnormality information indicating that a recovery abnormality has occurred in the performance button 17 in the lamp RAM 150c, and in step R105-18, clears the frame role object abnormality determination timer.

In step R105-19, the lamp CPU 150a updates the frame role processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame role processing number is "0", the board role processing number is updated to "1" to end the process of returning the frame role (performance button 17) to its origin.

In step R105-20, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board role processing number and the frame role processing number satisfy the termination condition. Specifically, it determines whether the board role processing number is "2" and the frame role processing number is "1". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R105-21, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current origin return process is terminated.

In step R105-21, the lamp CPU 150a clears the board role processing number and the frame role processing number, and in step R105-22, it sets the above-mentioned initial processing number to "2" to execute the initial operation processing of the role, and ends this return to origin process.

In this way, according to the origin return process shown in Fig. 61, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are not returned to the origin position at the same time (at the same time), but are returned to the origin position in a predetermined order (first movable member 73 → second movable member 74). By doing so, it becomes easier to check whether the various board parts have returned to their origin positions. Also,
In the case where the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in contact with each other in a manner that makes it difficult to separate them, it is possible to prevent the two movable members from exerting load on each other, thereby making it possible to prevent the inconvenience of both movable members being damaged at the same time.

In addition, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 61, the return operation of the board role (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) to the origin position and the return operation of the frame role (performance button 17) to the origin position can be executed simultaneously (at the same time). By doing so, the time required for the return operation of the various roles can be shortened, and it becomes possible to smoothly transition to the initial operation of the various roles to be executed next.

In addition, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 61, an upper limit is set on the time for each reel to return to its origin position. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as the return motion of various reels never finishing. This makes it possible to avoid situations where various reels are performing a return motion during a variable performance, preventing the performance from being performed, and prevents a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 61, when both the return operation of the board role (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) to the origin position and the return operation of the frame role (performance button 17) to the origin position are completed, a process is performed to transition to the initial operation process. By doing this, the return operation of the various roles to their origin positions and the initial operation of the various roles are no longer performed simultaneously, making it possible to check the return operation and initial operation of the various roles separately.

The first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are returned to the origin position in a predetermined order (first movable member 73 → second movable member 74), but they may start returning to the origin position at the same time. In this way, the time required for the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 can be shortened, and it becomes possible to smoothly transition to the initial operation of the various parts that will be executed next.

(Initial Operation Processing of Lamp/Drive Control Unit)
The initial operation process of the lamp/drive control unit 150 will be described with reference to Fig. 62. Fig. 62 is a flowchart showing the initial operation process of the lamp/drive control unit 150.

In step R107-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board feature processing number, which indicates the transition of the initial operation status of the board feature, is "0". If the board feature processing number is "0", the process proceeds to step R107-2, and if the board feature processing number is not "0", the process proceeds to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not return abnormality information for the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has been set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information has not been set, the process proceeds to step R107-4, assuming that the initial operation and initial light emission of the board role will be performed. If the return abnormality information has been set, in step R107-3, the board role processing number is set to "2", assuming that the initial operation of the board role will not be performed, and the process proceeds to step R107-7.

In step R107-4, the lamp CPU 150a selects a board role initial operation pattern determination table (see FIG. 63) for determining the initial operation pattern of the board role. Details of the board role initial operation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the board role (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, it refers to the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63, and determines one initial operation pattern from among multiple initial operation patterns based on the type of power-on command and the presence or absence of return abnormality information.

In step R107-6, the lamp CPU 150a updates the board feature processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board feature processing number is "0", the board feature processing number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the board feature.

In step R107-7, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board role processing number is "1". If the board role processing number is not "1", the process proceeds to step R107-11. If the board role processing number is "1", in step R107-8, the initial operation of the board role is executed according to the initial operation pattern of the board role set in the lamp RAM 150c.

In step R107-9, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not all steps of the initial operation of the board role have been completed. If all steps of the initial operation of the board role have not been completed, the process proceeds to step R107-11. If all steps of the initial operation of the board role have been completed, the board role processing number is updated by +1 in step R107-10. Specifically, if the board role processing number is "1", the board role processing number is updated to "2" to end the process of initializing the board role.

In step R107-11, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the frame role processing number, which indicates the transition of the initial operating status of the frame role (performance button 17), is "0." If the frame role processing number is "0," the process proceeds to step R107-12, and if the frame role processing number is not "0," the process proceeds to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not return abnormality information for the effect button 17 has been set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information has not been set, the process moves to step R107-14, assuming that the frame role object will perform its initial operation. If the return abnormality information has been set, in step R107-13, the frame role object processing number is set to "2", assuming that the frame role object will not perform its initial operation, and the process moves to step R107-17.

In step R107-14, the lamp CPU 150a selects a frame role initial operation pattern determination table (see FIG. 64) for determining the initial operation pattern of the frame role. Details of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the frame role object (performance button 17) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, it refers to the frame role object initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 and determines one initial operation pattern from among multiple initial operation patterns based on the type of power-on command.

In step R107-16, the lamp CPU 150a updates the frame role object processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame role object processing number is "0", the frame role object processing number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the frame role object.

In step R107-17, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the frame role processing number is "1". If the frame role processing number is not "1", the process proceeds to step R107-21. If the frame role processing number is "1", in step R107-18, the initial operation of the frame role is executed according to the initial operation pattern of the frame role set in the lamp RAM 150c.

In step R107-19, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not all steps of the initial operation of the frame role have been completed. If all steps of the initial operation of the frame role have not been completed, the process proceeds to step R107-21. If all steps of the initial operation of the frame role have been completed, the frame role processing number is updated by +1 in step R107-20. Specifically, if the frame role processing number is "1", the frame role processing number is updated to "2" to end the process of initializing the frame role.

In step R107-21, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board role processing number and the frame role processing number satisfy the termination condition. Specifically, it determines whether the board role processing number is "2" and the frame role processing number is "2". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R107-22, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current initial operation process is terminated.

In step R107-22, the lamp CPU 150a clears the board role processing number and the frame role processing number, and in step R107-23, it clears the initial processing number described above, and ends this initial operation processing.

In this way, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 62, the initial operation of the board role (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the initial operation of the frame role (performance button 17) can be executed simultaneously (at the same time). By doing so, the time required for the initial operation of each role can be shortened, and it is possible to prevent the performance operation of each role during play from being hindered.

In addition, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 62, if there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 that constitute the board role, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is not executed. In this way, it is possible to prevent the movable member having a return abnormality from being completely broken or damaged by forcibly performing the initial operation.

In addition, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 62, if there is a recovery abnormality in the effect button 17 that constitutes the frame role object, the initial operation of the effect button 17 is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as a complete breakdown or damage to the effect button 17 caused by forcibly initializing the effect button 17 that is experiencing a recovery abnormality.

In addition, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 62, even if the initial operation of the board part where a return abnormality has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the frame part where a return abnormality has not occurred is executed, and even if the initial operation of the frame part where a return abnormality has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the board part where a return abnormality has not occurred is executed. By doing this, it is possible to check whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the part where a return abnormality has not occurred.

In addition, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 62, the initial operation process ends when both the initial operation of the board role (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the initial operation of the frame role (performance button 17) have been completed. By doing this, a situation will not occur where it is unclear whether the initial operation or the performance operation is being performed, such as when one of the board role and the frame role is performing an initial operation while the other is performing a performance operation.

(Table for determining initial operation pattern of board role)
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a board role initial operation pattern determination table which is referred to when determining the initial operation pattern of the board role (first movable member 73, second movable member 74).

The initial operation pattern determination table for the board role-playing device associates the type of command when the power is turned on, the presence or absence of recovery abnormality information, and the initial operation pattern to be selected, and for reference, the operating mode at the time of the initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are also listed.

The initial operation patterns include patterns 01-03, which are determined when a power-on command is received, patterns 04-06, which are determined when a first power restoration command is received, indicating that the machine is waiting for customers, and patterns 07-09, which are determined when a second power restoration command is received, indicating that a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, or a third power restoration command is received, indicating that a jackpot is being played.

The "initial operation pattern 01" is determined when there are no return abnormalities in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and the first movable member 73 operates in the order of small descent → return to origin → large descent → return to origin, and then the second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement → return to origin, and during that period the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up (emit light) blue and white.
The "initial operation pattern 02" is determined when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73, in which the first movable member 73 does not operate and the second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement → return to the origin, and during that period the second movable member LED lights up (emits light) blue and white.
The "initial operation pattern 03" is determined when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member 74, and after the first movable member 73 operates in the order of small descent → return to origin → large descent → return to origin, the second movable member 74 does not operate, and during that period the first movable member LED lights up (emits light) blue and white.

"Initial operation pattern 04" is determined when there is no recovery abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and is the same as initial operation pattern 01 except that the second movable member LED lights up (emits) only blue.
"Initial operation pattern 05" is determined when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73, and is the same as initial operation pattern 02 except that the second movable member LED lights up (emits light) only in blue.
“Initial operation pattern 06” is determined when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member 74, and is ultimately the same as initial operation pattern 03 since the second movable member LED does not light up in blue.

"Initial operation pattern 07" is determined when there is no recovery abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and is the same as initial operation pattern 01 or initial operation pattern 04 except that the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned off.
"Initial operation pattern 08" is determined when there is a return abnormality in first movable member 73, and is the same as initial operation pattern 02 or initial operation pattern 05 except that second movable member 74 is turned off.
"Initial operation pattern 09" is determined when there is a return abnormality in second movable member 74, and is the same as initial operation pattern 03 or initial operation pattern 06 except that first movable member 73 is turned off.

Note that the color of the first movable member LED is not specified in initial operation pattern 02, initial operation pattern 05, and initial operation pattern 08. This is because the first movable member LED flashes red to indicate an abnormality in the return of the first movable member 73.

In addition, the color of the second movable member LED is not specified in initial operation pattern 03, initial operation pattern 06, and initial operation pattern 09. This is because the second movable member LED flashes red to indicate an abnormality when the second movable member 74 returns to its original position.

The first feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 63 is that the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of the board role (first movable member, second movable member) is the same when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110 and when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. This makes it possible to properly check whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the board role, regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored.

The same initial action means that at least the movement pattern of the board parts in each step is the same, and the action time in each step may be the same or different.

In addition, the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, or the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of both the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be different. In this way, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

In addition, when the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and/or the second movable member 74 is made different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, an operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is turned on may be executed by the initial operation when the power is restored, or an operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is restored may be executed by the initial operation when the power is turned on. In this way, it becomes easier to know whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The second feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 63 is that the light emission pattern of the initial light emitted during the initial operation of the board role (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting state. This makes it possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The third feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 63 is that while the light emission pattern of the first movable member LED is the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting for customers state, the light emission pattern of the second movable member LED is different. This makes it possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power being turned on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power being restored (the game control state is restored).

The light emission pattern of the first movable member LED is the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting state, while the light emission pattern of the second movable member LED is different. Conversely, the light emission pattern of the first movable member LED may be different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting state, while the light emission pattern of the second movable member LED may be the same.

In addition, both the light emission pattern of the first movable member LED and the light emission pattern of the second movable member LED may be different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting state. This makes it easier to understand whether the initial operation is due to power being turned on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power being restored (the game control state is restored).

The fourth feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the light emission pattern of the initial light emitted during the initial operation of the board role (first movable member, second movable member) is different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored during the variable display of special symbols or when a jackpot game is played. This makes it possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power being turned on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power being restored (the game control state is restored).

The fifth feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the initial light emission pattern during the initial operation of the board role (first movable member, second movable member) is different when power is restored to the waiting state and when power is restored during the display of special symbols or during a jackpot game. By doing this, it is possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power restoration to the waiting state, or during the display of special symbols or during a jackpot game.

When the power is restored during the changing display of the special symbols or during a jackpot game, both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned off, but the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED may be lit in the same illumination mode as when the power is restored to return to the waiting state.

The sixth feature of the board role object initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that, regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored, if there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and no return abnormality in the second movable member 74, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is not performed and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is performed, and if there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and no return abnormality in the second movable member 74, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is performed and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is not performed. In this way, it is possible to perform an appropriate initial operation depending on whether there is a return abnormality or not.

(Frame role initial operation pattern determination table)
FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a frame role initial operation pattern determination table which is referred to when determining the initial operation pattern of the frame role (performance button 17).

The frame role initial operation pattern determination table associates the type of command when the power is turned on with the initial operation pattern to be selected, and for reference, the operating mode at the time of the initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are listed.

"Initial operation pattern 01" is determined when a power-on command is received, and the effect button 17 operates in the following order: large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin → intermittent vibration, and during that period the effect button LED lights up (emits light) in the following order: red → green → blue.
"Initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first power restoration designation command, indicating that the machine is waiting for customers, is received, and the effect button operates in the following order: large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin, and during that period the effect button lights up (illuminates) blue.
"Initial operation pattern 03" is determined when a second power restoration command indicating that a special pattern is being displayed in a changing manner or a third power restoration command indicating that a jackpot is being played is received, and the effect button operates in the following order: big rise & continuous vibration → return to origin, and during that period the effect button LED is turned off.

The duration of the continuous vibration of the effect button 17 (2 seconds) and the duration of the intermittent vibration (2 seconds) are different from the duration during which the effect button 17 vibrates during an operation effect executed by operating the effect button 17 during an effective period that occurs while a variable effect is being executed (1-second vibration during the effective period for a jackpot prediction that gives the expectation of a jackpot, and 5-second vibration during the effective period for a final effect that notifies the player of whether or not a jackpot has been won).

The first feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 64 is that the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of the frame role (performance button 17) is different when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110 and when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. This makes it easy to know whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The second feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 64 is that the initial operation of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is set to an operation that is not included in the initial operation of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. This makes it easier to understand whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The initial operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the performance button 17 may be the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. In this way, it is possible to properly check whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame device, regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored.

The third feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 64 is that the light emission pattern of the initial light emitted during the initial operation of the frame role (performance button 17) is different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. This makes it possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power being turned on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power being restored (the game control state is restored).

The fourth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 64 is that the light emission pattern of the initial light emitted during the initial operation of the board role (first movable member, second movable member) is different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored during the variable display of special symbols or when the power is restored during a jackpot game. This makes it possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power being turned on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power being restored (the game control state is restored).

The LED on the effect button is set to turn off when the power is restored while the special symbol is changing or during a jackpot game, but the LED on the effect button may be set to light up in the same illumination mode as when the power is restored to return to the waiting state.

The fifth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 64 is that the number of colors emitted in the initial light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is different from the number of colors emitted in the initial light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is restored. This makes it easier to know whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

Note that the number of colors emitted by the initial light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is greater than the number of colors emitted by the initial light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is restored, but this may be reversed.

The sixth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 64 is that the color of the light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is turned on includes a color of light that is not included in the color of light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is restored. This makes it easier to know whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The color of the light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is restored may include a color that is not included in the color of the light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is turned on.

The seventh feature of the frame role object initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the time during which the effect button 17 vibrates when the power is turned on or when the power is restored is different from the time during which the effect button 17 vibrates during an operation effect that is executed by operating the effect button 17 during an effective period that occurs while a variable effect is being executed. By doing this, it is possible to understand that the vibration is during the initial operation of the effect button 17.

The eighth feature of the frame role object initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the initial vibration of the button vibration motor, which does not detect whether it is at the origin position, is executed by overlapping with the initial operation of the effect button 17, which does detect whether it is at the origin position. In this way, it is possible to simultaneously check the operation of the effect button 17 and the button vibration motor, thereby shortening the time required for operation check.

(Example of when there is no recovery error in various parts after power is turned on)
Figure 65 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is no recovery abnormality in the various parts (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) after power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c.

Note that there are two types of power-on that involve initializing the main RAM 110c: power-on that initializes the main RAM 110c after a setting change process is performed, and power-on that initializes the main RAM 110c without performing a setting change process. Here, we will explain the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing a setting change process.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen with the words "Loading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 begin to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the effect pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends, the return operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission, and the performance button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends, and they turn on (light up in white) while waiting for customers, and at the timing T8, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the state becomes silent.

At the timing of T9, when a first special symbol storage command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T10, when a change start command (performance symbol designation command, change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81 starts displaying the changes, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example of when the second movable member has a return abnormality after power is turned on)
66 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a return abnormality in the second movable member 74 after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, a case will be described where power-on results in initialization of the main RAM 110c without performing a setting change process.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen with the words "Loading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 begin to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the effect pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends, the return operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the origin return process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the second movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as an initial emission, and the performance button LED lights up in the order red → green → blue as an initial emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation process ends without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white).

At the timing of T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, when a first special pattern storage designation command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved indicator 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T9, when a change start command (performance symbol designation command, change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, the sub-first variable display 81 starts displaying the variables, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while varying, and the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example of when the first movable member has a return abnormality after power is turned on)
67 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, a case will be described where power-on results in initialization of the main RAM 110c without performing a setting change process.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen with the words "Loading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 begin to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the effect pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T3, when a recovery abnormality occurs in the first movable member 73 and the recovery operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends, the first movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the recovery abnormality, and the recovery operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the second movable member LED and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the performance button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, and the initial light emission of the second movable member LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white).

At the timing of T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, when a first special pattern storage designation command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved indicator 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T9, when a change start command (performance symbol designation command, change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, the sub-first variable display 81 starts displaying the variables, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while varying, and the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Example of when the performance button does not return to normal after power is turned on)
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in the performance button 17 after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen with the words "Loading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 begin to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the effect pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At timing T3, when the recovery operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends while a recovery abnormality has occurred in the performance button 17, the performance button LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the recovery abnormality, and the recovery operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the performance button 17 is not started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are lit alternately in blue and white as initial illumination.

At time T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at time T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends and they are lit (white light) while waiting for customers, and at time T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the state becomes silent.

At the timing of T8, when a first special symbol storage command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T9, when a change start command (performance symbol designation command, change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the performance button LED ends, the sub-first change indicator 81 starts displaying changes, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

In the specific example shown in Figures 65 to 68, the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing a setting change process has been described. However, in the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after a setting change has been performed, the initial screen is displayed, and then the performance control board 130 receives a setting change command, causing a setting change screen to be displayed. After that, the performance control board 130 receives a power-on command, causing the first standby screen to be displayed, and the return and initial operations of the various parts (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) to begin. Note that the first standby screen may also be displayed upon receiving a setting value designation command.

(Example of when no abnormality occurs in various parts after power is restored)
Figure 69 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there are no recovery abnormalities in the various parts (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) after power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen with the words "Loading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command for waiting customers sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the second standby screen in which the effect pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 remains silent.

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends, the return operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial emission, the second movable member LED lights up blue as the initial emission, and the performance button LED lights up blue as the initial emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends and they turn on (light up in white) while waiting for customers.

At the timing of T8, when a first special symbol storage command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T9, when a change start command (performance symbol designation command, change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81 starts displaying the changes, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after power is restored)
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen with the words "Loading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command for waiting customers sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the second standby screen in which the effect pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 remains silent.

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends, the return operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the origin return process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the second movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as an initial emission, and the performance button LED lights up blue as an initial emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation process ends without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white).

At the timing of T7, when a first special symbol storage command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T8, when a change start command (performance designation command, change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance design 70a and special pattern TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, the sub-first variable display 81 starts displaying the variables, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while varying, and the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after power is restored)
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen with the words "Loading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command for waiting customers sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the second standby screen in which the effect pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 remains silent.

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T3, when a recovery abnormality occurs in the first movable member 73 and the recovery operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends, the first movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the recovery abnormality, and the recovery operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the second movable member LED and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the performance button LED light up blue as the initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends without the initial operation of the first movable member 73 being executed, and the initial light emission of the second movable member LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white).

At the timing of T7, when a first special symbol storage command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T8, when a change start command (performance designation command, change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance design 70a and special pattern TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, the sub-first variable display 81 starts displaying the variables, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while varying, and the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Example of when the performance button has a recovery error after power is restored)
FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in the performance button 17 after power is turned on without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen with the words "Loading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command for waiting customers sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the second standby screen in which the effect pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 remains silent.

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At timing T3, when the recovery operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends while a recovery abnormality has occurred in the performance button 17, the performance button LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the recovery abnormality, and the recovery operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the performance button 17 is not started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the second movable member LED lights up blue as the initial light emission.

At time T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins, and at time T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends, turning on (white) when waiting for customers.

At the timing of T7, when a first special symbol storage command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T8, when a change start command (performance designation command, change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance design 70a and special pattern TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the performance button LED ends, the sub-first change indicator 81 starts displaying changes, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Example of when the state after power recovery is that the special pattern is changing and there is a reserved memory)
Figure 73 shows a specific example of the state after power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c when the special pattern is changing (missing change display) and there is pending memory.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen with the words "Loading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command for when the special chart is changing, sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, a recovery screen including the text "Please resume play" is displayed on the image display device, and the audio output device 9 remains silent.

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number = 3, second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the image display device displays a recovery screen, so the reserved numbers are not displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E or the second reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "3", and the sub-second reserved indicator 84 changes to a display mode showing "0".

At the timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends, the return operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At time T5, the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends, at time T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins, and at time T7, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends and the initial operation process ends, with the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remaining in an off state.

When a special symbol determination command is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and a stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in which the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the stop sound "Bang ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At this time, three first hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in a state in which it is possible to display a background image or other presentation image (the pedestal image is displayed), but the icons are not displayed.

At the timing of T9, when a change start command (performance symbol designation command, change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "2", and the change performance (display of the performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81 starts displaying the changes, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "2."

In addition, if the state after power is restored is during the special pattern changing display (missing change display) and there is no hold memory, the basic flow of operations from timing T1 to timing T8 described above is the same, except that at timing T2, the sub-1 hold display 83 displays "0", and at timing T9, a customer waiting state designation command is received and the change performance does not start.

(Example of when the power-on command is not received correctly when the power is turned on)
74 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on command is not normally received when the power is turned on. Here, a case where the power is turned on with the main RAM 110c initialized without performing a setting change process will be described.

Examples of cases in which the power-on command cannot be received normally include the first case in which power is being supplied to the performance control board 130, but power (main power and backup power) is not being supplied to the main control board 110 because the power line is broken or the power line connector is not connected (including a half-inserted state), the second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130 is broken, and the third case in which the connector of the command communication line is not connected (including a half-inserted state). Here, the first case will be explained.

When the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, power is not supplied to the main control board 110, but power supply to the performance control board 130 begins. At this time, an initial screen displaying the words "Loading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device, and after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the performance control board 130 enters a control state in which it can execute a performance in response to a command.

At the timing of T2, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, a process is performed to initialize the game control state, and a power-on command is sent. Then, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on command, even though the control state is such that it is possible to execute a performance according to the command, a return-to-origin process is initiated, and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 begin to return to their original positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the effect pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state. In addition, the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends, the return operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission, and the performance button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends and they turn on while waiting for customers (lights up in white). After that, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the state becomes silent.

Incidentally, the first standby screen was displayed when the performance control board 130 received the power-on command, but rather than displaying the first standby screen immediately, the first standby screen may be displayed after displaying a dark display screen, which is a type of initial screen, for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output when the dark display screen starts to be displayed, or when the first standby screen starts to be displayed.

(Example of when the power restoration command is not received properly when the power is turned on)
FIG. 75 shows a specific example of a case where the power restoration command is not normally received when the power is turned on.

Examples of cases in which the power restoration command cannot be received normally include the first case in which power is being supplied to the performance control board 130, but the main control board 110 is not being supplied with power (only main power) because the power line is broken or the power line connector is not connected (including a half-inserted state), the second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130 is broken, and the third case in which the connector of the command communication line is not connected (including a half-inserted state). Here, the first case will be explained.

When the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, power is not supplied to the main control board 110, but power supply to the performance control board 130 begins. At this time, an initial screen displaying the words "Loading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device, and after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the performance control board 130 enters a control state in which it can execute a performance in response to a command.

At the timing of T2, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing is performed to restore the game control state, and a power restoration command for when waiting for customers is sent. Then, when the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command, a return to origin process is started, and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 begin to return to their original positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the second standby screen in which the effect pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state. Also, the audio output device 9 goes into a silent state.

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends, the return operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial emission, the second movable member LED lights up blue as the initial emission, and the performance button LED lights up blue as the initial emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends and they turn on (light up in white) while waiting for customers.

Incidentally, the second standby screen was displayed when the performance control board 130 received the power restoration command, but rather than displaying the second standby screen immediately, the second standby screen may be displayed after displaying a dark display screen as a type of initial screen for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output when the dark display screen starts to be displayed, or when the second standby screen starts to be displayed.

In addition, the audio output device 9 is set to a silent state when a power restoration command is received, but it may be set to output an alarm (alarm, etc.) to indicate (make it possible to understand) that the power has been turned ON. In this case, the alarm may be the same as that issued when a power-on command is received, or it may be a different alarm.

(Example of when the power-on command cannot be received properly when the power is on)
FIG. 76 shows a specific example of a case where power-on commands (power-on command, power-restoration command) cannot be received normally when the power is on.

Cases in which commands cannot be received normally when the power is on include the first case where power is being supplied to the performance control board 130 but not to the main control board 110, the second case where the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130 is broken, and the third case where the connector on the command communication line is not connected (including a half-inserted state), but here we will explain the third case.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON, power supply to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130 begins. At this time, an initial screen with the words "Loading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, if the performance control board 130 does not receive the power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) sent from the main control board 110 and receives a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0), the image display device will maintain the initial screen displayed, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and performance button LED will remain off.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T3, when a first special symbol storage command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the initial screen remains displayed on the image display device, but the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T4, when a change start command (performance symbol designation command, change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device momentarily displays the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped (static) state, and then the change performance (display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ changing, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81 starts displaying the changes, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example 1 when power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
Figure 77 shows a specific example 1 of a case in which power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then resumed while the system is waiting for customers (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130) after the origin return processing and initial operation processing have already been completed.

Examples of cases where power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted include cases where the power lines (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 are disconnected and then come into contact due to an external factor, and cases where the connectors of the power lines (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 are disconnected (including a half-inserted state) and then become connected.

Here, we will explain the case where the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed (main power supply, backup power supply) during a customer waiting state (including when a customer waiting demo performance is being performed), which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute performances in response to commands.

At the timing of T1, the machine is in a customer waiting state after the various reels have already completed their return operations, initial operations, and the output of the initialization notification sound. The image display device displays the second standby screen or customer waiting demo performance screen, in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and performance button LED are lit while the machine is waiting for customers.

In addition, if the timing of T1 is the customer waiting state after the end of the variable performance executed after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various reels are finished, the image display device will display a waiting screen in which the miss performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed), or a customer waiting demo performance screen.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the second waiting screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general map change indicator 85, sub general map hold indicator 86) also maintains the displayed contents.

Even if only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, if the demo waiting time has elapsed while the standby screen is being displayed (after receiving a customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether the variable performance has ended or not, or after the previous customer waiting demo performance has ended), the customer waiting demo performance will start.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power) to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is initialized and the game control state is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second waiting screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub normal map change indicator 85, and sub normal map hold indicator 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 begin to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state instead of the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends, the return operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission, and the performance button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At time T7, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at time T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At the timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends, and they turn on (light up in white) while waiting for customers, and at the timing T10, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the state becomes silent.

In addition, even if the power supply (including backup power) to the main control board 110 is stopped and restarted during a control state in which the performance control board can execute a performance according to a command, such as during the execution of a variable performance (miss variable performance) after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various roles have already been completed, or during the execution of a jackpot performance (opening performance, round performance, ending performance), the screen displayed on the image display device until the power-on command is received at timing T4 is the variable performance screen (miss variable performance screen, jackpot variable performance screen) or the jackpot performance screen (opening performance screen, round game performance screen, ending performance screen), the screen is the same as when the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and restarted during a customer waiting state, and the return operation or initial operation of various roles (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) is performed, and the initialization notification sound is output from the audio output device 9, etc.

In addition, if there is a return abnormality in any of the various reels, the initial operation of the various reels or the light (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode will be performed in the same manner as in the specific examples shown in Figures 66, 67, and 68.

(Specific example 2 when power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
Figure 78 shows a specific example 2 of a case in which power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then resumed while the system is waiting for customers (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130) after the origin return processing and initial operation processing have already been completed.

Here, we will explain the case where the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of main power is resumed while the supply of backup power continues during a customer waiting state (including when a customer waiting demo performance is being performed), which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance in response to a command.

At the timing of T1, the machine is in a customer waiting state after the various reels have already completed their return operations, initial operations, and the output of the initialization notification sound. The image display device displays the second standby screen or customer waiting demo performance screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and performance button LED are lit while the machine is waiting for customers.

In addition, when the machine is in a waiting state for customers after the end of the variable performance that was performed after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various reels have ended, the image display device will display a standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a indicating a miss and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, or a customer waiting demo performance screen.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the standby screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general map change indicator 85, sub general map hold indicator 86) also maintains the display contents.

Even if the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped, if the demo waiting time has elapsed while the standby screen is being displayed (after a customer waiting state designation command is received regardless of whether or not the variable performance has ended, or after the previous customer waiting demo performance has ended), the customer waiting demo performance will start.

When the power supply (main power) to the main control board 110 is resumed at the timing of T3, processing is performed to restore the game control state without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device maintains the standby screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub normal map change indicator 85, sub normal map hold indicator 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command for when waiting for customers sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays a second standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen, and the audio output device 9 is muted.

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends, the return operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED alternately lights up blue and white as the initial emission, the second movable member LED lights up blue as the initial emission, and the performance button LED lights up blue as the initial emission.

At time T7, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at time T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends and they turn on (light up in white) while waiting for customers.

If there is a return abnormality in any of the various reels, the initial operation of the various reels or the light (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode will be performed in the same manner as in the specific examples shown in Figures 70, 71, and 72.

(Specific example 3 when power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
Figure 79 shows a specific example 3 of a case where power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed during the execution of a variable performance (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130) after the origin return processing and initial operation processing have already been completed.

Here, we will explain the case where the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of main power is resumed while the supply of backup power continues during the execution of a variable performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance in response to a command.

At the timing of T1, the change performance is being performed, the change performance screen is displayed on the image display device, and change performance sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) are output from the audio output device 9. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing. In addition, a change display is being performed on the sub-first change display 81, and the reserved number "1" is displayed on the sub-first reserve display 83.

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the display of the variable performance screen, and the sub-information display device 80 (sub-first variable display 81, sub-second variable display 82, sub-first hold display 83, sub-second hold display 84, sub-general map variable display 85, sub-general map hold display 86) also maintains the display contents.

When the power supply (main power) to the main control board 110 is resumed at the timing of T3, processing is performed to restore the game control state without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device maintains the display state of the variable performance screen, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub normal map variable display 85, sub normal map hold display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command for when the special chart is changing, sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned off, the image display device displays a recovery screen including the text "Please resume play", and the audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general map change indicator 85, sub general map hold indicator 86) maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends, the return operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED alternately lights up blue and white as the initial emission, the second movable member LED lights up blue as the initial emission, and the performance button LED lights up blue as the initial emission.

At time T7, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED goes out, and at time T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends and they are turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the performance control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command sent from the main control board 110, a confirmation display is made for a loss in the variable performance. At this time, the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and a stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in which the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the audio output device 9 outputs a stop sound "Bang ♪". In addition, the first reserved number display area 70E displays "1", and the second reserved number display area 70F displays "0". In addition, the sub first variable display 81 displays a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating a loss.

If the result of this variable performance is a jackpot, when the performance control board 130 receives a special symbol confirmation command, a confirmation display of the variable performance jackpot is performed. At this time, the image display device displays a confirmation screen in which the performance symbol 70a, such as "777", which is the jackpot performance symbol, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the sub-first variable display 81 displays a jackpot that indicates a jackpot.

At the timing of T11, when a change start command (performance symbol designation command, change pattern designation command) sent from the main control board 110 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81 starts displaying the changes, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

Note that at timing T6, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED go into their initial light emission state when power is restored, but by making them go into a special light emission state different from the initial light emission state when the lights are turned off or when power is restored, it may be possible to make it clear that a power restoration command has been received during the variable performance.

In addition, if there is a return abnormality in any of the various reels, the initial operation of the various reels or the light (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode will be performed in the same manner as in the specific examples shown in Figures 70, 71, and 72.

In addition, even if the execution time of the variable performance recognized by the performance control board 130 has elapsed before the special pattern confirmation command is received, the performance pattern 70a will not be displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped, and the variable display on the sub-1 variable display device and the sub-2 variable display device will not end.

(Specific example 4 when power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
Figure 80 shows specific example 4 of a case where power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then resumed during the execution of a jackpot presentation (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the presentation control board 130) after the origin return processing and initial operation processing have already been completed.

Here, we will explain the case where the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of main power is resumed while the supply of backup power continues during the execution of a jackpot performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance in response to a command.

At the timing of T1, the big win effect (here, the first round effect) is being executed, and the image display device displays a big win effect (round effect) screen. In the upper right corner of the screen, a right-hit display image MG indicating a right hit is displayed, and in the lower right corner of the screen,
The special big win symbol TZ ("777") is displayed in a stopped (static) state. In addition, "1" is displayed as the reserved number in the first reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the reserved number in the second reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a jackpot performance sound (BGM, SE, etc.), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, the sub-first variable display 81 displays (lights up) the jackpot.

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the big win presentation screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub normal map change indicator 85, sub normal map hold indicator 86) also maintains the display contents.

When the power supply (main power) to the main control board 110 is resumed at the timing of T3, processing is performed to restore the game control state without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the big win presentation screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub normal map change indicator 85, sub normal map hold indicator 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command for the jackpot sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned off, the image display device displays a recovery screen for when a jackpot is in progress, including the text "Please resume play (jackpot in progress)," and the audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub normal map change indicator 85, sub normal map hold indicator 86) maintains the display contents.

In addition, instead of displaying the recovery screen for when a jackpot occurs, the same recovery screen as that displayed when power supply (main power only) to the main control board 110 is stopped during the variable performance shown in FIG. 79 may be displayed.

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends, the return operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED alternately lights up blue and white as the initial emission, the second movable member LED lights up blue as the initial emission, and the performance button LED lights up blue as the initial emission.

At time T7, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED goes out, and at time T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends and they are turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the performance control board 130 receives the round designation command for the second opening (second round) sent from the main control board 110, the big win performance (round performance) is resumed. At this time, the image display device displays a special big win performance (round performance) screen instead of the normal big win performance screen, and the special big win symbol TZ ("777") is not displayed.

The first reserved number display area 70E displays the reserved number "1," and the second reserved number display area 70F displays the reserved number "0." Furthermore, the audio output device 9 outputs a jackpot performance sound (BGM, SE, etc.), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit during the jackpot.

After that, when the performance control board 130 receives a round designation command for the third opening (third round) sent from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the normal jackpot performance (round performance) screen instead of the special jackpot performance (round performance) screen.

Note that if the performance control board 130 receives an ending designation command, rather than a round designation command while the special big win performance screen is being displayed, the normal ending performance screen will be displayed.

In addition, when a round designation command is received while a special jackpot presentation screen is being displayed, instead of switching to a normal jackpot presentation screen, the special jackpot presentation screen may be continued until the presentation control board 130 receives an ending designation command, or the special jackpot presentation screen may be continued until the presentation control board 130 receives a customer waiting state designation command or a fluctuation start command after the jackpot game has ended.

In addition, at the timing of T6, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED go into their initial light emission mode when power is restored, but by making them into a special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode when the lights are turned off or when power is restored, it may be possible to make it possible to know that a power restoration command has been received during the variable performance.

In addition, if there is a return abnormality in any of the various reels, the initial operation of the various reels or the light (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode will be performed in the same manner as in the specific examples shown in Figures 70, 71, and 72.

In addition, in Figures 77 to 80, when a power-on command or a power-restoration command is received, the various parts (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are reset, but it is also possible to perform the initial operation of the various parts without performing the reset operation.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in Figures 65 to 80, when the game control state is initialized, a first initial performance pattern ("135") is displayed in which the identification characters (numbers, letters, etc.) in the multiple performance patterns 70a form a first combination, and when the game control state is restored, a second initial performance pattern ("753") is displayed in which the identification characters in the multiple performance patterns 70a form a second combination. By doing this, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the game control state has been initialized or restored.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 65 to 80, when the game control state is restored, it is possible to display a specific display suggesting the resumption of power supply before displaying the performance pattern 70a on the image display device, and the display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device when the state is restored to waiting for customers (only displaying the initial screen) is different from the display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device during the variable display of special patterns and after restoration to no reserved memory/reserved memory (displaying the initial screen + recovery screen). By doing this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when the stopped power supply is resumed and the game control state is restored.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 65 to 80, it is possible to display the number of reserved memories in the reserved icon display area (first reserved icon display area 70B, second reserved icon display area 70D) and the sub-reserved indicators (first sub-reserved indicator 83, second sub-reserved indicator 84), and when the power supply that was stopped while there are reserved memories is resumed and the game control state is restored, the reserved icon display area does not display the reserved memories when the image display device is displaying a specific display (display of the recovery screen) suggesting the resumption of power supply, but the sub-reserved indicator can display the reserved memories. By doing this, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the game control state is restored, it is possible to know the number of reserved memories before the specific display ends, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 65 to 80, when the power supply that was stopped during the customer waiting demo performance is resumed and the game control state is restored, the customer waiting demo performance screen is not displayed again, but the second standby screen is displayed in a state in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, is stopped (statically displayed). By doing so, it is not necessary to be aware of whether the state before the power supply was stopped was during the customer waiting demo performance or not, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control when the game control state is restored after the power supply is resumed.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 65 to 80, when the power supply that was stopped during a variation performance is resumed and the game control state is restored, the sub-variable display (sub-first variable display 81, sub-second variable display 82) is configured not to perform a variable display (blinking display) during the variable display of the special pattern, even if the variable display of the special pattern is being executed (the recovery screen is displayed). By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the game control state is restored after the power supply is resumed.

In addition, when the game control state is restored and the special symbol variable display is being executed (the recovery screen is displayed), the sub variable display (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82) may display a variable display (blinking display). In this way, it becomes easier to understand that the special symbol variable display is being executed when the game control state is restored.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 65 to 80, the sub-reserve indicators (sub-first reserve indicator 83, sub-second reserve indicator 84) are configured to display the number of reserved balls from the time when the recovery screen is displayed on the image display device (before the sub-variable indicator displays a variable display and when the special symbol storage designation command is received). By doing this, the player can immediately grasp the number of reserved balls after the game control state is restored, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

When the sub-variation indicators (sub-first variation indicator 81, sub-second variation indicator 82) are performing a variation display (flashing display) while the recovery screen is displayed on the image display device, the sub-reservation indicators (sub-first reservation indicator 83, sub-second reservation indicator 84) may be configured to display the number of reserved balls in accordance with the start of this variation display. In this way, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the special pattern variation display is being performed when the game control state is restored, and the number of reserved balls at that time.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 65 to 80, when power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the return operation of the various reels is performed at the same timing as when power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, that is, from the timing when the performance pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device (the timing when the initial screen ends). By doing this, the control for the return operation of the various reels does not become complicated, and it is possible to reduce the processing load for the return operation of the various reels.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 65 to 80, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c or when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the light-emitting parts of the various parts (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) are turned off during the recovery operation of the various parts. This makes it possible to distinguish from the initial operation of the various parts and to know that the recovery operation is in progress.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 65 to 80, if any of the various reels have a return abnormality, the light-emitting part of the reel that has the return abnormality will flash red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the user of the abnormality. By doing this, it becomes possible to identify the reel that has the return abnormality.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 65 to 80, when an abnormality is notified by flashing the light-emitting part of a reel that has a return abnormality in red, the abnormality notification continues until the next variable performance starts. By doing this, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the reel that has a return abnormality.

If a reel has a return abnormality, a return operation may be performed to return the reel that had the return abnormality to its original position when the next variable performance begins. Also, if an abnormality is notified by causing the light-emitting part of the reel that had the return abnormality to flash red, the abnormality notification may be cancelled when the performance button 17 is operated.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 65 to 80, when the power supply that was stopped during the waiting state is resumed and the game control state is restored, the initial operation of the various roles (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) is performed from the timing after the performance pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device (the timing when the performance pattern 70a is displayed if the recovery operation is completed immediately), but when the power supply that was stopped during the variable display of the special pattern is resumed and the game control state is restored, the initial operation of the various roles is performed from the timing before the performance pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device (while the recovery screen is displayed). By doing so, it is possible to perform the initial operation of the various roles at an appropriate timing depending on the state when the power supply occurs.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 65 to 80, in the case of power-on involving initialization of the main RAM 110c or power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c, the initial operation is performed for the board role (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) after the sub-reserve indicator (first sub-reserve indicator 83, second sub-reserve indicator 84) has become a display mode showing the number of reserved items when the recovery screen is displayed on the image display device (during the display of the changing special pattern and before the display of the performance pattern 70a). By doing so, the initial operation of the board role can be performed after the player has grasped the number of reserved items (future progress of the game), making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 65 to 80, in the case of power-on involving initialization of the main RAM 110c or power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c, the frame role (effect button 17) is configured to perform its initial operation after the sub-reserve indicators (sub-first reserve indicator 83, sub-second reserve indicator 84) have switched to a display mode showing the number of reserved items when the recovery screen is displayed on the image display device (during the display of the changing special patterns and before the display of the performance pattern 70a). By doing this, the frame role can perform its initial operation after the player has grasped the number of reserved items (future game progress), making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 65 to 80, when power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the initial operation of the various reels is performed at the same timing as when power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, that is, from the timing after the performance pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device (the timing when the performance pattern 70a is displayed if the return operation is completed immediately). By doing so, the control for the initial operation of the various reels does not become complicated, and it is possible to reduce the processing load for the initial operation of the various reels.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 65 to 80, even if the stop screen is displayed after the recovery screen is displayed, the sound of the effect pattern 70a stopping is output. This makes it easier for the player to understand that the variable effect that was being executed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, if the stop screen is displayed after the recovery screen is displayed, the stopping sound of the performance pattern 70a may not be output.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 65 to 80, if the power-on commands (power-on command, power-restoration command) cannot be received, the initial screen is simply displayed and the recovery operations, initial operations, and initial light emission of the various parts are not performed. By doing this, it is possible to grasp that an abnormality has occurred in which the power-on commands cannot be received.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 65 to 80, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) cannot be received, if the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to the command and receives a special symbol storage command from the main control board 110 based on the winning of a gaming ball into the starting hole, a winning sound is output. By doing this, it is possible to accurately notify the user that a gaming ball has won into the starting hole even when the initial screen is displayed.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 65 to 80, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) cannot be received, if the performance control board 130 receives a fluctuation start command from the main control board 110 while in a control state in which it is possible to execute a performance according to the command, the fluctuation performance is executed without displaying the standby screen. By doing this, the start of the fluctuation performance is executed without delay, making it possible to execute the fluctuation performance from start to finish within the range of the fluctuation time of the special pattern.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 65 to 80, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) cannot be received, if the performance control board 130 receives a change start command from the main control board 110 while in a control state in which it is possible to execute a performance according to the command, the change performance will be executed without executing the return operations or initial operations of the various reels. By doing this, it is possible to execute a performance using various reels without being hindered by the return operations or initial operations during the execution of a change performance.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 65 to 80, even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to a command, such as when it is waiting for customers after the return operations and initial operations (including initial light emission) of various props have already been completed, if a power-on command or power restoration command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by stopping and then restarting the power supply to the main control board 110, the return operations and initial operations (including initial light emission) of various props are executed again. By doing so, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the performance control means.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 65 to 80, even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance after the return operation of various reels and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have already been completed, if a power-on command or a power restoration command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by stopping and then restarting the power supply to the main control board 110, the return operation of various reels and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are executed again. By doing so, since the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a mismatch between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the mismatch, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the performance control means.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 65 to 80, even if the return operation and initial operation (including initial light emission) of various reels have already been completed during a jackpot game, if a power-on command or power-restoration command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by stopping and then restarting the power supply to the main control board 110 alone, the return operation and initial operation (including initial light emission) of various reels are executed again. By doing this, commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the performance control means.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 65 to 80, even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to a command, such as when it is waiting for customers after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished, if a power-on command is received from the main control board 110, such as when the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the initialization notification sound is output again. By doing this, commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the performance control means.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 65 to 80, even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished, if the power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then resumed, and a power-on command is received from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. By doing this, commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the performance control means.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 65 to 80, even if the presentation control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute presentations according to commands, such as during a jackpot game (opening presentation, round presentation, ending presentation) after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. By doing this, commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the presentation control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the presentation control means.

When a power-on command is received again from the main control board 110, the audio output device 9 may simply output an initialization notification sound rather than performing the recovery operations and initial operations (including initial light emission) of the various parts.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 65 to 80, even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to a command, such as when it is waiting for customers after the return operations of various props and the initial operations (including initial light emission) have already been completed, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on command is received again from the main control board 110, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and if a power restoration command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing this, commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the performance control means.

Even if the presentation control board 130 is in a control state where it can execute presentations according to commands, such as during a variable presentation after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished or during a jackpot game, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on command is received again from the main control board 110, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing this, commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the presentation control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the presentation control means.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 65 to 80, even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance after the return operation of various parts and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have already ended, if a power restoration command is received from the main control board 110, such as when the power supply (main power) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the return screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing this, commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the performance control means.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 65 to 80, even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to a command, such as during a big win performance after the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have already ended, if a power restoration command is received from the main control board 110, such as by restarting the power supply (main power) to the main control board 110 after it has stopped, the initial screen is not displayed and a recovery screen for the big win is displayed. By doing this, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the performance control means.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 65 to 80, even if the presentation control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute presentations according to commands, such as during a variable presentation after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished or during a big win game, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on command is received again from the main control board 110, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and if a power restoration command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing this, commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the presentation control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the presentation control means.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 65 to 80, in a control state (waiting for customers, variable presentation, big win presentation) in which the presentation control board 130 can execute presentations in response to commands, even if the power supply to the main control board 130 is stopped while the power supply to the presentation control board 130 continues, the previous display screen can continue to be displayed. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 65 to 80, during a control state (waiting for customers, variable presentation, big win presentation) in which the presentation control board 130 can execute presentations in response to commands, even if the power supply to the main control board 130 is stopped while the power supply to the presentation control board 130 is continuing and then the power supply is resumed, the previous display screen can continue to be displayed. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, and to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

(Variation 1 when power supply to the main control board is stopped and then resumed)
Figure 81 shows variant example 1, in which power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then resumed while the machine is waiting for customers (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130) after the origin return process and initial operation process have already been completed.

Here, we will explain the case where the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is resumed after only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped during the customer waiting state, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute performances in response to commands.

At the timing of T1, the machine is in a state of waiting for customers after the return operations, initial operations, and output of the initialization notification sound of various reels have already been completed, and the image display device displays the second standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and performance button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, if the timing of T1 is the waiting state for customers after the end of the variable performance executed after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various roles have ended, the image display device will display a waiting screen in which the miss performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the second waiting screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general map change indicator 85, sub general map hold indicator 86) also maintains the display contents.

Even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, if the demo waiting time has elapsed while the waiting screen is displayed (after receiving a customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether the variable performance has ended or not, or after the previous customer waiting demo performance has ended), the customer waiting demo performance will start.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the image display device displays an initial screen including the words "Loading" instead of the second standby screen, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and performance button LED are turned off.

At this time, the sub information display devices 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general map change indicator 85, and sub general map hold indicator 86) are hidden.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 begin to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain off, and instead of the initial screen, the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the effect pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends, the return operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, starting the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial illumination, and the performance button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial illumination.

At time T7, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at time T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At the timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends, and they turn on (light up in white) while waiting for customers, and at the timing T10, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the state becomes silent.

In addition, even if the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the execution of a customer waiting demo performance after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various roles have already been completed, during the execution of a variable performance (miss variable performance, jackpot variable performance), or during the execution of a jackpot performance (opening, round play, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device at timing T3 is the customer waiting demo performance screen, the variable performance screen (miss variable performance screen, jackpot variable performance screen), or the jackpot performance screen (opening performance screen, round play performance screen, ending performance screen), but is basically the same as the example shown in FIG. 77.

(Variation 2 when power supply to the main control board is stopped and then resumed)
Figure 82 shows variant example 2, in which power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then resumed while the system is waiting for customers (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130) after the origin return process and initial operation process have already been completed.

Here, we will explain the case where the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of main power is resumed while the supply of backup power continues during the waiting for customers state, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute performances in response to commands.

At the timing of T1, if the machine is in a customer waiting state after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various reels have already been completed, the image display device displays the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while the machine is waiting for customers.

In addition, when the machine is in a waiting state for customers after the end of the variable performance that was performed after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various reels have ended, the image display device will display a standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a indicating a miss and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, or a customer waiting demo performance screen.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the standby screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general map change indicator 85, sub general map hold indicator 86) also maintains the display contents.

Even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, if the demo waiting time has elapsed while the standby screen is being displayed (after a customer waiting state designation command is received regardless of whether or not the variable performance has ended, or after the previous customer waiting demo performance has ended), the customer waiting demo performance will start.

When power supply to the main control board 110 resumes at the timing of T3, processing is performed to restore the game control state without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device displays an initial screen containing the words "Loading", and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and effect button LED are turned off.

At this time, the sub information display devices 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general map change indicator 85, and sub general map hold indicator 86) are hidden.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command for when waiting for customers sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the second standby screen in place of the initial screen, in which the effect pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state.

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends, the return operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED alternately lights up blue and white as the initial emission, the second movable member LED lights up blue as the initial emission, and the performance button LED lights up blue as the initial emission.

At time T7, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at time T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends and they turn on (light up in white) while waiting for customers.

In addition, even if the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the customer waiting demo performance after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various roles have already been completed, during the execution of the variable performance (miss variable performance, jackpot variable performance), or during the execution of the jackpot performance (opening, round play, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device at the timing of T3 is the customer waiting demo performance screen, the variable performance screen (miss variable performance screen, jackpot variable performance screen), or the jackpot performance screen (opening performance screen, round play performance screen, ending performance screen), it will be basically the same as the examples shown in Figures 78 to 80.

In addition, in Figures 81 and 82, when a power-on command or a power-restoration command is received, the various parts (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) are reset, but it is also possible to perform the initial operation of the various parts without performing the reset operation.

In this way, according to the modified example shown in Figures 81 to 82, when the power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then resumed, the standby screen on which the performance pattern 70a is displayed is switched to an initial screen that is different from the standby screen. By doing this, it becomes possible to know that the power supply to the main control board 110 has been stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

In addition, according to the modified example shown in Figures 81 and 82, if the power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then resumed, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned off while the initial screen is being displayed. This makes it easier to know that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (that there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

In addition, instead of starting the initial operation of the various reels when the initial screen is switched to the standby screen, the initial operation of the various reels may be started when the initial screen is switched to or between the time when the initial screen is switched to the standby screen.

In addition, rather than switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the standby screen may be switched to the initial screen when a power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) is received. In this case, the initial operation of the various reels may be started at the timing when the standby screen is switched to the initial screen, or at any time between when the initial screen is switched to the standby screen, or the initial operation of the various reels may be started at the timing when the initial screen is switched to the standby screen.

In addition, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen, the standby screen may be switched to a non-display state and then the initial screen may be displayed. In this case, the initial operation of the various reels may be started from the timing of switching from the non-display state to the initial screen, or from the timing between switching from the initial screen to the standby screen, or the initial operation of the various reels may be started when switching from the initial screen to the standby screen.

(Modification when the second movable member has a return abnormality after power is turned on)
FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a modified example in which there is a return abnormality in the second movable member 74 after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen with the words "Loading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 begin to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the effect pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends, the return operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the origin return process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED flash red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the performance button LED lights up in the order red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and the initial operation process ends without the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 being executed.

At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T7, when a first special pattern storage designation command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T8, when a change start command (performance pattern designation command, change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ changing, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends, the sub-first variable indicator 81 starts displaying the variables, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while varying, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

In addition, even if there is a recovery abnormality in the first movable member 73 when the power is turned on, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED will flash red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the recovery abnormality, and the initial operation process will end without executing the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74.

Even when the power is restored, if there is a recovery abnormality in the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED will flash red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the recovery abnormality, and the initial operation process will end without the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 being performed.

In this way, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 83, if there is a return abnormality in either the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the initial operation is not performed not only for the movable member with the return abnormality, but also for the movable members without the return abnormality. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as one movable member colliding with the other movable member and breaking down. It is also possible to prevent the movable member (particularly the movable member without a return abnormality) from ceasing to operate during the execution of a game (variable performance, jackpot game), making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 83, if there is a recovery abnormality in either the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED will flash red to notify of the recovery abnormality. This makes it easier to grasp that there is an abnormality in the movable members, compared to when only the movable member LED provided on the one movable member with the recovery abnormality flashes red.

In addition, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 83, even if there is a return abnormality in either the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the initial operation is performed for the performance button 17 that is not at risk of colliding with the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74. In this way, it is possible to check the operation of the performance button 17 and to grasp the abnormality in the performance button 17.

In addition, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 83, even if there is a recovery abnormality in either the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the performance button LED provided on the performance button 17 will emit an initial light without flashing red to notify of a recovery abnormality. This makes it easier to know that there is no recovery abnormality in the performance button 17.

In addition, if there is a recovery abnormality in the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the initial operation process may be terminated without executing the initial operation for the performance button 17 as well. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED may be made to flash red to notify the occurrence of a recovery abnormality.

In addition, if there is a recovery abnormality in the performance button 17, the initial operation process may be terminated without executing the initial operation for the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED may be made to flash red to notify the occurrence of a recovery abnormality.

(Example of the presentation when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and then resumed during the execution of the icon change presentation and the lamp change presentation)
84 and 85 are diagrams showing examples of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped and then resumed during execution of the effect.

As shown in FIG. 84(a), when the first hold icon (CD icon) is displayed in the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2 of the first hold icon display area 70B, the "728" miss effect pattern 70a is displayed in a stopped state.

After that, when the variable performance in which the SPSP reach performance is executed starts, as shown in FIG. 84(b), the variable display of the performance pattern 70a starts, and the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed in the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display section 70B1, respectively.

Here, the icon change effect is started by changing the display mode of the icon that is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C to a red character icon, and accordingly, the prize winning lamp NR changes from an off state to a flashing red state, starting the lamp change effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 84(c), the "3" performance pattern 70a is displayed stationary (temporarily stopped) in the variable display areas to the left and right of the performance pattern 70a that was being displayed, while a reach performance (normal reach) is executed in which the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner in the central variable display area.

When the game progresses to an SP reach, as shown in FIG. 84(d), the SP reach performance starts, the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the screen, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are erased together with the hold icons.

After that, when the game progresses to an SPSP reach, as shown in FIG. 84(e), the SPSP reach performance starts, and the icon display area 70C in which the icon is displayed is erased together with the icon. At this time, the winning slot lamp NR does not go out with the disappearance of the icon, and the lamp change performance of the winning slot lamp NR continues.

When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, the image display device goes dark and the winning slot lamp NR goes out, as shown in Figure 84 (f).

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. 85(g), the image display device displays an initial screen including the words "Loading", but the prize slot lamp NR remains off.

When the presentation control board 130 receives the second power restoration command sent from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. 85(h), the image display device displays a recovery screen containing the text "Please resume play" for the duration of the SPSP reach presentation (including the execution period of the promotion presentation in which the temporarily stopped jackpot presentation pattern is promoted to a jackpot presentation pattern of higher value to the player), but the prize winning port lamp NR remains off.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach performance, which is a miss, ends (the performance control board 130 receives the special pattern confirmation command indicating a miss), as shown in Figure 85 (i), the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power recovery, is not displayed temporarily stopped (shaking and changing), and a stop screen (second standby screen) is displayed in which the special pattern TZ is displayed stopped (still displayed), and the changing performance ends without resuming the lamp change performance.

At this time, the first display section 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B displays the same CD icon as before the power supply was stopped, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, but a rectangular area image is displayed, ensuring that the display space (display area) of the icon is available for displaying a background image or other presentation image.

After that, when the next variable performance starts, as shown in FIG. 85(j), the display of the performance pattern 70a starts to change, and the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed in the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display section 70B1, respectively.

On the other hand, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect which results in a jackpot ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special pattern confirmation command indicating a jackpot), as shown in FIG. 85(k), instead of a temporary stop display (swaying fluctuation/swinging display) of the effect pattern 70a, a stop screen is displayed in which the "777" jackpot effect pattern 70a (a combination of effect patterns different from the reach combination of the "3↓3" effect pattern which formed the reach state before the power was cut off) indicating the type of jackpot game this time (here, the first jackpot game) and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the variable effect ends without the lamp change effect resuming on the winning port lamp NR.

In addition to the variable performance in which the SPSP reach performance is executed, other variable performances (variable performance in which normal variation is executed, variable performance in which shortened variation is executed, variable performance in which normal reach performance is executed, variable performance in which SP reach performance is executed) will also be executed. When the power supply that was stopped during execution is resumed and the execution period of the performance ends, the performance pattern 70a will not be temporarily stopped (swaying variation/swinging display) and the missing performance pattern 70a of "753" or the jackpot performance pattern that is the same or a different combination of performance patterns as the reach combination of the performance patterns that formed the reach state before the power was cut off will be displayed as a stopped display (static display).

In addition, regardless of whether the game control state of the special pattern TZ is initialized or restored, and whether the subsequent state is a normal game state or a specific game state (low-probability time-saving game state, high-probability time-saving game state), the special pattern TZ will be displayed in the same display mode (shape, design) and in a stopped (static) display with numbers that are the same combination as the performance pattern 70a.

After that, when the opening of the jackpot game starts, as shown in FIG. 85(l), the image display device starts an opening performance including information indicating the type of jackpot game ("MAX jackpot" indicating that it is the first jackpot game), and the first pending icon display area 70B, the second pending icon display area 70D, and the icon display area 70C are erased together with the icons.

The winning slot lamp NR remains off while the initial screen and/or the return screen are displayed, but the winning slot lamp NR may be lit in a lighting mode (e.g. white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change presentation (does not indicate the likelihood of winning a jackpot).

In this way, according to the presentation example shown in Figures 84 to 85, when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the variable presentation in which the presentation pattern 70a is temporarily stopped (swaying and fluctuating) and then stopped is resumed and the game control state is restored, if the special pattern fluctuation time has passed and a special pattern confirmation command (if the special pattern confirmation command is missed and thereafter the game transitions to a customer waiting state, a customer waiting state designation command) is received, the presentation pattern 70a is not temporarily stopped (swaying and fluctuating/oscillating display) and the presentation pattern 70a is displayed as stopped (still display). By doing this, it is possible to let the player know that the variable presentation that was being executed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in Figures 84 to 85, when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the losing variable presentation is resumed and the game control state is restored, the presentation pattern 70a is displayed (still displayed) as a still image, and not the normal losing presentation pattern, but the combination of presentation patterns that are the initial patterns at the time of power restoration is displayed (still displayed). By doing so, it is possible to avoid the need for cumbersome processing such as determining the presentation patterns to be displayed (still displayed) by lottery, and it is possible to know that the power has been restored and the game control state has been restored, and that the variable presentation that was being executed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in Figures 84 to 85, if the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the jackpot variable presentation is resumed and the game control state is restored, and the presentation pattern is displayed as a still image (static image), the combination of jackpot presentation patterns is displayed as a still image (static image). By doing this, it is possible to understand that the power supply has been restored, which restores the game control state, and that the variable presentation that was being executed at the time the power supply was stopped was the jackpot variable presentation.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 84 to 85, when a combination of jackpot presentation symbols is displayed (still displayed) after the game control state is restored, it is possible to display (still display) a combination of jackpot presentation symbols different from the reach combination of presentation symbols that formed the reach state before the power supply was stopped. By doing this, there is no need to be aware of the jackpot presentation symbols that were scheduled to be displayed (still displayed) before the power supply was stopped, making it possible to reduce the processing load related to display control after the power supply is resumed.

In addition, according to the example of the effects shown in Figures 84 to 85, if the variable effect being executed at the time the power supply was stopped includes the execution period of the promotion effect described above, after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, the big win effect pattern is displayed as still (static display) without executing the promotion effect. By doing this, no unnecessary effects are performed before the effect pattern is displayed as still (static display), so the player can immediately understand that the variable effect being executed at the time the power supply was stopped was a big win variable effect.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 84 and 85, the display mode (type of display screen, display order of display screen) of the image display device after the power supply is resumed is the same in the case where the power supply that was stopped during the execution of a miss variation presentation is resumed and the game control state is restored, and in the case where the power supply that was stopped during the execution of a jackpot variation presentation is resumed and the game control state is restored. In this way, simple display control can be performed without being aware of whether a miss variation presentation or a jackpot variation presentation was being executed, making it possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is resumed.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in Figures 84 to 85, after the power supply is resumed and the game control state is restored, the special symbol TZ is displayed in the same display mode as before the power supply was stopped, and is displayed stationary (statically) with the numbers that form the same combination as the presentation symbol 70a. This makes it easier to understand that the variable presentation that was being performed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in Figures 84 to 85, if the power supply that was stopped while the icon was being displayed is resumed and the game control state is restored, from the time the display of the recovery screen ends until the next variable presentation (scrolling of the presentation pattern 70a) begins, a rectangular area image is displayed in the icon display area 70C, ensuring that the display space (display area) of the icon is in a state in which a presentation image such as a background image can be displayed, but the icon is not displayed. By doing this, the player can understand that the variable presentation that was being performed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in Figures 84 to 85, if the power supply that was stopped while the reserved icon was displayed is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, a rectangular area image is displayed in the reserved icon display area from the time the display of the recovery screen ends until the next variable presentation starts, so that the display space (display area) of the reserved icon is secured in a state in which a presentation image such as a background image can be displayed, and the reserved icon is displayed. By doing this, even if the power supply is stopped, it is possible to know that the reserved variable presentation has not disappeared, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the example of the effects shown in Figures 84 to 85, if the power supply that was stopped during the variable effect (storage of special chart determination information that changes the winning slot lamp NR to a lighting color (blue, red, rainbow) that has a high expectation of winning a jackpot) corresponding to the icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change effect is resumed and the game control state is restored, the lamp change effect is not resumed and the winning slot lamp NR is set to a notification mode (off or white light) that does not indicate the expectation of winning a jackpot. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is resumed, while avoiding a situation in which the player is confused by the lamp change effect being resumed even though the variable effect has not been executed.

After the execution period of the jackpot variable performance ends, a stopped screen is displayed with the jackpot performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ frozen, but a second standby screen may be displayed with the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ frozen (static display), just like when a loss occurs.

After the execution period of the jackpot variable presentation ends, a stop screen is displayed in which the jackpot presentation pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state, but an opening presentation for the jackpot game may be started without displaying the stop screen and without displaying the jackpot presentation pattern 70a. Also, in the opening presentation, information indicating the type of jackpot game may be displayed, or the jackpot special pattern TZ of "777" may be displayed, or the special pattern TZ of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, may be displayed.

In addition, after the execution period of the miss variation effect has ended, the effect pattern 70a, which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ may be displayed, and after the execution period of the jackpot variation effect has ended, the opening effect of the jackpot game may be started without displaying the stopped screen in which the jackpot effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state.

In addition, if it is possible to execute a specific effect in which the effect pattern 70a in the reach state is not displayed during the variable effect, and which incites as to whether or not a jackpot game will be played (leading to the expectation that a jackpot game will be played), then after the power supply that was stopped during the execution of that specific effect is resumed and the control state is restored, if it is a miss, the effect pattern 70a, which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, may be displayed in a stopped state (static display), and if it is a jackpot, the jackpot effect pattern 70a may be displayed in a stopped state (static display).

In addition, when a combination of jackpot performance symbols is displayed in a static manner (still display) after the game control state is restored, one of a plurality of combinations of jackpot performance symbols corresponding to the type of jackpot game to be executed thereafter may be displayed in a static manner.

In this case, for example, the combination of jackpot effect symbols suggesting the execution of the first jackpot game is "333" and "777", the combination of jackpot effect symbols suggesting the execution of the second jackpot game is "222", "444", "666", and "888", and the combination of jackpot effect symbols suggesting the execution of the third jackpot game is "111", "555", and "999".

If the reach combination before the power supply was stopped was "1↓1", which constitutes part of the combination of jackpot performance symbols that suggests the execution of a third jackpot game, then if the jackpot game to be executed afterwards is the first jackpot game, either "333" or "777" (a combination of jackpot performance symbols different from the reach combination of the performance symbols that formed the reach state) will be displayed as a static display, and if the jackpot game to be executed afterwards is the third jackpot game, either "111", "555", or "999" (a combination of jackpot performance symbols that is the same as or different from the reach combination of the performance symbols that formed the reach state) will be displayed as a static display.

In addition, after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, the special pattern TZ may be displayed as a static display (static display) with numbers that are a different combination from the performance pattern 70a, rather than a static display (static display) with numbers that are the same combination as the performance pattern 70a.

In addition, if the normal game state and customer waiting state are in effect after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are displayed as still (static), whereas if the specific game state (low probability time-shortened game state, high probability time-shortened game state) and customer waiting state are in effect after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, the performance pattern 70a may not be displayed as still (static), and the special pattern TZ may be displayed as still (static).

(Examples of effects when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and then resumed during the execution of a continuous preview effect, a reserved icon change effect, and a lamp change effect)
Figures 86 and 87 are diagrams showing examples of the presentation when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and then resumed during the execution of a continuous preview presentation, a pending icon change presentation, and a lamp change presentation.

As shown in FIG. 86(a), when the first hold icon (CD icon) is displayed in the first display section 70B1, the second display section 70B2, and the third display section 70B3 of the first hold icon display area 70B, the "728" miss display pattern 70a is displayed in a stopped state.

After that, when the pre-variation variation performance starts, as shown in FIG. 86(b), the display of the variation of the performance pattern 70a starts, and the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed in the first display section 70B1, the second display section 70B2, and the third display section 70B3 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C, the first display section 70B1, and the second display section 70B2, respectively.

Here, the first of the consecutive preview performances is started by the effect image EF being displayed around the performance pattern 70a which is starting to change display, and the display mode of the first reserved icon (final icon display mode = red character icon) which is shifted and displayed on the second display section 70B2 is changed to a blue character icon, starting the reserved icon change performance, and accordingly the winning slot lamp NR changes from an off state to a flashing blue state, starting the lamp change performance.

After that, as shown in FIG. 86(c), the effect image EF displayed around the effect symbol 70a is erased, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling at high speed. Then, after the change time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 86(d), the effect symbol 70a indicating a miss is temporarily stopped, and then the miss effect symbol 70a of "259" and the special symbol TZ are stopped.

After that, when the pre-variation effect starts, as shown in FIG. 86(e), the display of the variation of the performance pattern 70a starts, and the first hold icon displayed in the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2 shifts and is displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display section 70B1, respectively.

At this point, the effect image EF is displayed around the performance pattern 70a that is starting the changing display, and the second consecutive preview performance begins, while the pending icon change performance and the lamp change performance continue.

Then, as shown in FIG. 86(f), the effect image EF displayed around the effect symbol 70a is erased, and the effect symbol 70a begins to scroll at high speed. If the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off at this point, as shown in FIG. 86(g), the image display device becomes invisible, and the winning slot lamp NR goes out.

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. 86(h), the image display device displays an initial screen including the words "Loading", but the winning slot lamp NR remains off without resuming the lamp change presentation.

Then, when the performance control board 130 receives the second power restoration command sent from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. 87(i), the image display device displays a recovery screen containing the text "Please resume play" for the duration of the execution of the pre-change, but the winning slot lamp NR remains off.

After that, when the execution period of the pre-change ends (the performance control board 130 receives the special pattern confirmation command indicating a miss), as shown in Figure 87 (j), the performance pattern 70a is not temporarily stopped (swaying) and a stop screen is displayed in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power recovery, and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the pre-change ends without resuming the lamp change performance.

At this time, the first display section 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B displays a CD icon, not the blue character icon that was there before the power supply was stopped, and the icon display area 70C does not display the icon, but a rectangular area image is displayed, ensuring that the display space (display area) for the icon is available for displaying a background image or other presentation image.

After that, when the variable performance in which the SPSP reach performance is executed starts, as shown in FIG. 87 (k), the variable display of the performance pattern 70a starts, and the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed in the first display section 70B1 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C.

If the newly executed lottery for the icon change effect is won, the icon that is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C will change to a blue character icon in response to the result, and the icon change effect will begin. On the other hand, since no new lottery is executed for the lamp change effect, the prize slot lamp NR will remain off and the lamp change effect will not resume.

In addition, if the player wins the lottery for an alternative preview performance that will be performed when the power supply is resumed, a mini character MCB will be displayed on the image display device according to the result, and the alternative preview performance will be executed by moving the mini character MCB out of the frame.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87(l), the lines spoken by ally A are displayed in a line window displayed on the image display device, and the voice output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the lines, "Your chance has come!", thereby executing a line preview performance.

Then, as shown in FIG. 87(m), the "3" performance pattern 70a is displayed stationary (temporarily stopped) in the variable display areas to the left and right of the performance pattern 70a that was being displayed, while a reach performance (normal reach) is executed in which the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner in the central variable display area.

After that, when it progresses to SP Reach, as shown in FIG. 87(n), the SP Reach performance starts, the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the screen, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are erased.

When the game progresses to an SPSP reach, the SPSP reach performance starts, as shown in FIG. 87(o), and the icon display area 70C is erased together with the icon.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect which results in a jackpot ends (the effect control board 130 receives the special pattern confirmation command which indicates a jackpot), as shown in FIG. 87(p), the jackpot effect pattern 70a of "333" which indicates the type of jackpot game this time (here, the first jackpot game) and the special pattern TZ are temporarily stopped (shaking and fluctuating) and then stopped, and the fluctuating effect ends.

The winning slot lamp NR remains off while the initial screen and/or the return screen are displayed, but the winning slot lamp NR may be lit in a lighting mode (e.g. white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change presentation (does not indicate the likelihood of winning a jackpot).

In addition, if the special pattern confirmation command cannot be received during the changing performance (temporarily stopped display (swaying change) of the performance pattern 70a), the performance pattern 70a that is temporarily stopped (swaying change) will continue to be temporarily stopped (swaying change) without being displayed as stopped.

In this way, according to the example of the performance shown in Figures 86 to 87, if the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the consecutive preview performance is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to execute an alternative preview performance different from the consecutive preview performance without resuming the consecutive preview performance in the variable performance corresponding to the special chart determination information stored at the time of restoration. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction caused by the end of the consecutive preview performance due to the stop of the power supply, and it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 86 to 87, if the power supply that was stopped while a reserved icon that is displayed as a special icon (including cases where the display mode has not changed to the final display mode and cases where the display mode has changed to the final display mode) is resumed and the game control state is restored, the reserved icon that was displayed as a special icon is displayed as a normal icon. By doing this, there is no need to be aware of the display mode of the reserved icon when the power supply was stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to display control after the power supply is resumed.

In addition, according to the example of the presentation shown in Figures 86 to 87, if the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the icon change presentation is resumed and the game control state is restored, the pending icon change presentation is not executed in the variable presentation corresponding to the special chart determination information stored at the time of restoration, but the icon change presentation can be executed again. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction caused by the icon change presentation ending due to the power supply being stopped, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the example of the effects shown in Figures 86 to 87, even if the icon change effect corresponding to the special chart determination information stored at the time of recovery is being executed again, it will not be executed from the stage indicated before the power supply was stopped. By doing this, it is possible to execute an icon change effect that conforms to the content of the current change effect, making the game more interesting.

In addition, according to the example of the effects shown in Figures 86 to 87, even if the power supply that was stopped during the variable effect (storage of special chart determination information that changes the winning slot lamp NR to a lighting color (blue, red, rainbow) that has a high expectation of winning a jackpot) corresponding to the reserved icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change effect is resumed and the game control state is restored, the lamp change effect is not resumed and the winning slot lamp NR is set to a notification mode (off or white light) that does not indicate the expectation of winning a jackpot. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is resumed, while avoiding a situation in which the player is confused by the lamp change effect being resumed even though the variable effect has not been executed.

(Specific examples of when the connection state of various detection means changes)
88(a) and 88(b) are diagrams showing specific examples of when the connection states of various detection means change while waiting for customers.

Here, the wiring from the first start port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a is combined into one connector, and this connector is connected to the connector on the main control board 110.

First, FIG. 88(a) will be described.
Figure 88 (a) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection state of the first starting port detection switch 45a changes while waiting for customers.

At the timing of T1, it is assumed that the first start port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110. At this time, the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state.

At timing T2, for example, if the connector connected to the main control board 110 becomes half-inserted and only the first start port detection switch 45a becomes disconnected, the main control board 110 detects the occurrence of a connection error, and the performance control board 130 issues a connection error notification.

At this time, the image display device displays an error notification image EG containing the words "Connection error detected," indicating that a connection error has occurred, and the audio output device 9 outputs a connection error notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "Connection error."

At the timing of T3, when the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released from the half-inserted state and the first start port detection switch 45a returns to the connected state, the main control board 110 detects that the connection error has been cleared, but the connection error notification continues until the gaming machine 1 is powered off.

Next, FIG. 88(b) will be described.
Figure 88 (b) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection states of the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a change while waiting for customers.

At the timing of T1, it is assumed that the first start port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110. At this time, the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state.

At timing T2, for example, if the connector connected to the main control board 110 becomes half-inserted and the first start port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a become disconnected, the main control board 110 detects the occurrence of a magnetic error, a radio wave error, and a connection error, and the performance control board 130 issues a magnetic error alert, a radio wave error alert, and a connection error alert.

At this time, the image display device displays an error notification image EG including the text "Magnetic error detected" indicating the occurrence of a magnetic error, the text "Radio wave error detected" indicating the occurrence of a radio wave error, and the text "Connection error detected" indicating the occurrence of a connection error, and the audio output device 9 outputs a magnetic error notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "Magnetic error."

At the timing of T3, when the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released from the half-inserted state and the magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and the first start hole detection switch 45a return to a connected state, the main control board 110 detects that the magnetic error, radio wave error, and connection error have been eliminated, but various error notifications continue until the gaming machine 1 is powered off.

In addition, if the signal line for command communication between the main control board 110 and the dispensing control board 120 changes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the main control board 110 will not detect the occurrence of a connection error and will not issue an error notification.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in Figure 88, an error is notified when a specific detection means (start port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) that detects a specific event (start winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) connected to the main control board 110 changes from a connected state to a disconnected state. In this way, the occurrence of an abnormality (connector half-inserted, broken wire, fraudulent activity) can be detected and a quick response can be made.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 88, even if a specific detection means (starting hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) that detects a specific event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) returns from a disconnected state to a connected state, error notification of magnetic errors and radio wave errors continues until the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of fraudulent acts against the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 88, no error notification is issued even if the payout control board 120 changes from a connected state to a disconnected state. By doing so, it is possible to allow the game to continue as is in cases where the possibility of fraudulent activity is low, and it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, even if power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started while certain detection means (start hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) connected to the main control board 110 are in a disconnected state, various error notifications (connection error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification in the same notification format as FIG. 88) may be made while the initial screen is being displayed or after the initial screen has ended (when the first standby screen or second standby screen starts to be displayed).

In this case, the error alert (magnetic error alert, radio wave error alert) continues even if the magnetic detection sensor 53a or the radio wave detection sensor 54a changes from an unconnected state to a connected state, but the connection error alert may be cancelled when the first start hole detection switch 45a changes from an unconnected state to a connected state. In this way, it is possible to continue playing the game as is in cases where the possibility of fraud is low, and to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, radio error alarm sounds related to radio errors that have a lower priority (importance) than magnetic errors, and connection error alarm sounds related to connection errors that have a lower priority (importance) than radio errors, are not output if they occur simultaneously with a magnetic error, but the alarm sounds related to the errors that have occurred may be output in sequence.

In addition, for magnetic error alerts, radio wave error alerts, and connection error alerts, an error alert sound may be output without displaying the error alert image EG, or the error alert image EG may be displayed without outputting the error alert sound.

Second Embodiment
Hereinafter, the second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Initial processing of lamp/drive control unit)
The role initial processing of the lamp/drive control unit 150 will be described with reference to Fig. 89. Fig. 89 is a flowchart showing the role initial processing of the lamp/drive control unit 150.
In this embodiment, the same processes as the initial process of the reel in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and their explanations are omitted, and different processes are explained.

In step R101A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not there is a power ON flag that is set in the lamp RAM 150c when power supply starts. If there is no power ON flag, the process proceeds to step R102A. If there is a power ON flag, the power ON flag is cleared in step R101B.

In step R102A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) sent from the main control board 110 has been received. If a power-on command has been received, the process proceeds to step R102B. If a power-on command has not been received, the process proceeds to step R104.

In step R102B, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the power was turned on. If the predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds after the previous power was turned on, during which recovery operations and initial operations should be completed) has elapsed, the process proceeds to step R103; if the predetermined time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step R104.

In step R103, the lamp CPU 150a sets the initial processing number, which is updated during each process of the reel initial processing, to "1" to execute the origin return process for the reels (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, and performance button 17).

In this way, according to the modified example of the reel initialization process shown in FIG. 89, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started, the return operation and initial operation of the various reels are started. By doing so, it is not necessary to be aware of whether the game control state is being initialized or restored, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the return operation and initial operation of the various reels after the power supply is started.

In addition, according to a modified example of the reel initialization process shown in FIG. 89, when a power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) is received a predetermined period of time (e.g., 60 seconds) after the start of power supply to the gaming machine 1, the recovery and initial operations of the various reels are performed again. By doing this, it becomes possible to know that the main control board 110 has not started up normally and the power-on command has been sent later than usual (an abnormality has occurred in the power line from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110).

When a power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) is received, the recovery operations and initial operations of various devices may be performed regardless of the time that has elapsed since power supply to the gaming machine 1 was started. In this way, it is not necessary to be aware of the time that has elapsed since power supply to the gaming machine 1 was started, and it is possible to simplify the processing when a power-on command is received.

(Example of when there is no recovery error in various parts after power is turned on)
Figure 90 shows a specific example of a case where there is no recovery abnormality in the various parts (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) after power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c.

Note that there are two types of power-on that involve initializing the main RAM 110c: power-on that initializes the main RAM 110c after a setting change process is performed, and power-on that initializes the main RAM 110c without performing a setting change process. Here, we will explain the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing a setting change process.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the image display device displays a dark initial screen as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general change indicator 85 are in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process ends, and the initial operation process starts, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 begins.

Furthermore, when the performance control board 130 receives a power-on command sent from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED changes to alternately light up red and white, and the light emission mode of the performance button LED changes to light up in the order red → green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is being cleared".

Furthermore, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing T4, the initial operation of the performance button 17 ends, and at the timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit (white) while waiting for customers. At the timing of T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the machine enters a silent state.

At the timing of T8, when a first special symbol storage command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T9, when a change start command (performance symbol designation command, change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81 starts displaying the changes, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example of when the second movable member has a return abnormality after power is turned on)
91 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a return abnormality in the second movable member 74 after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, a case will be described where power-on results in initialization of the main RAM 110c without performing a setting change process.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the image display device displays a dark initial screen as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general change indicator 85 remain in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T3, when the origin return process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started. In addition, the second movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality.

Furthermore, when the performance control board 130 receives a power-on command sent from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes to alternately light up red and white, and the performance button LED lights up in the order red → green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is being cleared".

Furthermore, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At timing T4, the initial operation of the performance button 17 ends, and at timing T5, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, and the initial operation process ends without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74.

At timing T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the device enters a silent state.

At the timing of T7, when a first special symbol storage command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T8, when a change start command (performance designation command, change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance design 70a and special pattern TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, the sub-first variable display 81 starts displaying the variables, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while varying, and the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example of when the first movable member has a return abnormality after power is turned on)
92 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, a case will be described where power-on results in initialization of the main RAM 110c without performing a setting change process.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the image display device displays a dark initial screen as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general change indicator 85 remain in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the recovery operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends while a recovery abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the recovery operation of the second movable member 74 starts. At this time, the first movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a recovery abnormality.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the performance button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the performance control board 130 receives a power-on command sent from the main control board 110 as a command when the power is turned on, the light emission mode of the second movable member LED changes to alternately light up red and white, and the light emission mode of the performance button LED changes to light up in the order red → green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is being cleared".

Furthermore, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At timing T4, the initial operation of the performance button 17 ends, and at timing T5, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, and the initial operation process ends without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73.

At the timing of T7, when a first special symbol storage command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T8, when a change start command (performance designation command, change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance design 70a and special pattern TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, the sub-first variable display 81 starts displaying the variables, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while varying, and the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Example of when the performance button does not return to normal after power is turned on)
93 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a return abnormality in the performance button 17 after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, a case where power-on causes the main RAM 110c to be initialized without performing a setting change process will be described.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the image display device displays a dark initial screen as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general change indicator 85 remain in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the recovery operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends while a recovery abnormality has occurred in the performance button 17, the recovery operation of the second movable member 74 starts. At this time, the performance button LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a recovery abnormality.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the performance button 17 is not started.

Furthermore, when the performance control board 130 receives a power-on command sent from the main control board 110, the light emission state of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED changes to alternately light up red and white.

At this time, the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is being cleared".

Furthermore, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At timing T4, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At time T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED turn on (light white) while waiting for customers. At time T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the device becomes silent.

At the timing of T7, when a first special symbol storage command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T8, when a change start command (performance designation command, change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance design 70a and special pattern TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the performance button LED ends, the sub-first change indicator 81 starts displaying changes, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

In the specific example shown in Figures 90 to 93, the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing a setting change process has been described. However, in the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after a setting change has been performed, a dark screen (initial screen) is displayed, and then a setting change specification command is received by the performance control board 130, causing a setting change screen to be displayed. After that, a power-on specification command is received by the performance control board 130, causing the first standby screen to be displayed, and the return and initial operations of the various parts (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) are started. In addition, the first standby screen may be displayed by receiving a setting value specification command.

(Example of when no abnormality occurs in various parts after power is restored)
Figure 94 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there are no recovery abnormalities in the various parts (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) after power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the image display device displays a dark initial screen as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general change indicator 85 are in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process ends, and the initial operation process starts, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 begins.

Furthermore, when the performance control board 130 receives the first power restoration command as a power-on command sent from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes to alternately light up blue and white, and the light emission mode of the second movable member LED and the performance button LED changes to light up blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the second standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state.

Furthermore, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing T4, the initial operation of the performance button 17 ends, and at the timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At timing T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit (white) while waiting for customers.

At the timing of T7, when a first special symbol storage command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T8, when a change start command (performance designation command, change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance design 70a and special pattern TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81 starts displaying the changes, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after power is restored)
FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the image display device displays a dark initial screen as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general change indicator 85 remain in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T3, when the origin return process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality.

Furthermore, when the performance control board 130 receives a power restoration command for when customers are waiting, sent from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes to alternate between blue and white, and the light emission mode of the performance button LED changes to light blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the second standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state.

Furthermore, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing T4, the initial operation of the performance button 17 ends, and at the timing T5, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, and the initial operation process ends without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, and the first movable member LED and the performance button LED turn on (white light) while waiting for customers.

At the timing of T6, when a first special symbol storage command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T7, when a change start command (performance designation command, change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance design 70a and special pattern TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, the sub-first variable display 81 starts displaying the variables, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while varying, and the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after power is restored)
FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the image display device displays a dark initial screen as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off.
In addition, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general change indicator 85 maintain a hidden state.

At the timing of T2, when the recovery operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends while a recovery abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the recovery operation of the second movable member 74 starts. At this time, the first movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a recovery abnormality, and the second movable member LED and the performance button LED remain off.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the performance button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the performance control board 130 receives a power restoration command for when waiting for customers sent from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the second movable member LED and the performance button LED changes to light up blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the second standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state.

Furthermore, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At timing T4, the initial operation of the performance button 17 ends, and at timing T5, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, and the initial operation process ends without the initial operation of the first movable member 73 being executed, and the first movable member LED and the performance button LED turn on (white) while waiting for customers.

At the timing of T6, when a first special symbol storage command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T7, when a change start command (performance symbol designation command, change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, the sub-first variable display 81 starts displaying the variables, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while varying, and the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Example of when the performance button has a recovery error after power is restored)
Figure 97 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in the performance button 17 after power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the image display device displays a dark initial screen as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general change indicator 85 remain in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the recovery operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends while a recovery abnormality has occurred in the performance button 17, the recovery operation of the second movable member 74 starts. At this time, the performance button LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a recovery abnormality, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED remain in an off state.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the performance button 17 is not started.

Furthermore, when the performance control board 130 receives a power restoration command sent from the main control board 110 for when customers are waiting, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes to alternately light up in blue and white, and the light emission mode of the second movable member LED changes to light up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the second standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state.

Furthermore, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At timing T4, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED turn on (white light) while waiting for customers.

At the timing of T6, when a first special symbol storage command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T7, when a change start command (performance designation command, change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance design 70a and special pattern TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the performance button LED ends, the sub-first change indicator 81 starts displaying changes, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Example of when the state after power recovery is that the special pattern is changing and there is a reserved memory)
Figure 98 shows a specific example of the state after power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c when the special pattern is changing (missing change display) and there is reserved memory.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the image display device displays a dark initial screen as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general change indicator 85 are in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process ends, and the initial operation process starts, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 begins.

Furthermore, when the performance control board 130 receives a power restoration command for when the special chart is changing, transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission state of the first movable member LED changes to alternate between blue and white, and the light emission state of the second movable member LED and the performance button LED changes to light blue. At this time, the image display device displays a recovery screen including the text "Please resume play," and the audio output device 9 remains silent.

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number = 3, second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the image display device displays a recovery screen, so the reserved numbers are not displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E or the second reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular map change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "3", and the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84 and the sub-regular map reserve indicator 86 change to a display mode showing "0".

At the timing T4, the initial operation of the performance button 17 ends, and at the timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At timing T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned off.

When a special pattern determination command is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T7, the image display device displays the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and a stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in which the special pattern TZ is displayed in a stopped state (static display), and a stop sound is output from the audio output device 9.

At this time, three first hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in a state in which it is possible to display a background image or other presentation image (the pedestal image is displayed), but the icons are not displayed.

At the timing of T8, when a change start command (performance designation command, change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "2", and the change performance (display of the performance design 70a and special pattern TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81 starts displaying the changes, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "2."

(Example of when the power-on command is not received correctly when the power is turned on)
FIG. 99 shows a specific example of a case where the power-on command is not normally received when the power is turned on.

Examples of cases in which the power-on command cannot be received normally include the first case in which power is being supplied to the performance control board 130, but power (main power and backup power) is not being supplied to the main control board 110 because the power line is broken or the power line connector is not connected (including a half-inserted state), the second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130 is broken, and the third case in which the connector of the command communication line is not connected (including a half-inserted state). Here, the first case will be explained.

When the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at timing T1, no power is supplied to the main control board 110. When power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the image display device displays a dark initial screen as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, the sub-regular map change indicator 85, and the sub-regular map hold indicator 86 are in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T3, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started, at the timing of T4, the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, at the timing of T5, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started, at the timing of T6, the initial operation process is completed, and the performance control board 130 enters a control state in which it can execute a performance according to a command.

At the timing of T7, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, a process is performed to initialize the control state of the game, and a power-on command is sent. Then, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on command, even though the control state is such that it is possible to execute a performance according to the command, a return-to-origin process is initiated, and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 begin to return to their original positions.

At this time, the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is being cleared".

After that, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, starting the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up alternately in red and white as initial illumination, and the performance button LED lights up in the order red → green → blue as initial illumination.

At timing T9, the initial operation of the performance button 17 ends, and at timing T10, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At the timing of T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, the initial illumination of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED ends and they turn on while waiting for customers (lights up in white). After that, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the machine enters a silent state.

Incidentally, the first standby screen was displayed when the performance control board 130 received the power-on command, but rather than displaying the first standby screen immediately, the first standby screen may be displayed after displaying a dark display screen, which is a type of initial screen, for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output when the dark display screen starts to be displayed, or when the first standby screen starts to be displayed.

(Example of when the power restoration command is not received properly when the power is turned on)
FIG. 100 shows a specific example of a case where the power restoration command is not normally received when the power is turned on.

Examples of cases in which the power restoration command cannot be received normally include the first case in which power is being supplied to the performance control board 130, but the main control board 110 is not being supplied with power (only main power) because the power line is broken or the power line connector is not connected (including a half-inserted state), the second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130 is broken, and the third case in which the connector of the command communication line is not connected (including a half-inserted state). Here, the first case will be explained.

Note that the timing from T1 to T7 is the same as the timing from T1 to T7 in Figure 99, so we will omit the explanation here and only explain the timing from T7 onwards.

At the timing of T7, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing is performed to restore the control state of the game, and a power restoration command is sent. Then, when the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command, even though the control state is such that it is possible to execute the performance according to the command, a return to origin process is initiated, and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 begin to return to their original positions.

At this time, the image display device displays the "753" performance pattern 70a, which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the second standby screen in which the special pattern TZ is displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 remains silent.

After that, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the second movable member LED and the performance button LED light up in blue as the initial light emission.

At timing T9, the initial operation of the performance button 17 ends, and at timing T10, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At timing T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the initial illumination of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED ends and they turn on (lights up in white) while waiting for customers.

In the example, the second standby screen was displayed when the performance control board 130 received the power restoration command, but instead of displaying the second standby screen immediately, it may be configured to display a dark display screen, which is a type of initial screen, for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.5 seconds), and then display the second standby screen.

In addition, the audio output device 9 is set to a silent state when a power restoration command is received, but it may be set to output an alarm (alarm, etc.) for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) to indicate (make it possible to understand) that the power has been turned ON. In this case, the alarm may be the same as the alarm that was output when the power-on command was received, or it may be a different alarm.

In addition, in Figures 99 to 100, when a power-on command or a power-restoration command is received, the various parts (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) are reset, but it is also possible to perform the initial operation of the various parts without performing the reset operation.

(Example of when the power-on command cannot be received properly when the power is on)
FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where power-on commands (power-on command, power-restoration command) cannot be received normally when the power is turned on.

The power restoration command cannot be received normally if power is not being supplied to the main control board 110, if the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130 is broken, or if the connector on the command communication line is not connected (including a half-inserted state), etc.

Note that the timing from T1 to T5 is the same as the timing from T1 to T5 in Figure 99, so we will omit the explanation here and only explain the timing from T5 onwards.

At the timing of T5, if the performance control board 130 does not receive the first power restoration command as a power-on command sent from the main control board 110, but receives a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0), the image display device will maintain the initial screen displayed.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the display state of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED changes to an off state.

At the timing of T7, when a first special symbol storage command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the initial screen remains displayed on the image display device, but the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T8, when a change start command (performance symbol designation command, change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device momentarily displays the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the second standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped (static) state, and then the change performance (display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ changing, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81 starts displaying the changes, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example 1 when power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
Figure 102 shows a specific example 1 of a case in which power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then resumed while the system is waiting for customers (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130) after the origin return processing and initial operation processing have already been completed.

Examples of cases where power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted include cases where the power lines (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 are disconnected and then come into contact due to an external factor, and cases where the connectors of the power lines (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 are disconnected (including a half-inserted state) and then become connected.

Here, we will explain the case where the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed (main power supply, backup power supply) during a customer waiting state (including when a customer waiting demo performance is being performed), which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute performances in response to commands.

At the timing of T1, the various reels have already completed their return operations and initial operations and are in a state of waiting for customers. The image display device displays the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen, in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and performance button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the second waiting screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general map change indicator 85, sub general map hold indicator 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second waiting screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general map change indicator 85, sub general map hold indicator 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on command sent from the main control board 110 as a power-on command, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in red and white as initial illumination, the effect button LED lights up in white as initial illumination, the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the effect pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return to origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started.

At timing T7, the initial operation of the performance button 17 ends, and at timing T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At the timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends, and they turn on (light up in white) while waiting for customers, and at the timing T10, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the state becomes silent.

In addition, even if the power supply (including backup power) to the main control board 110 is stopped and restarted during a control state in which the performance control board can execute a performance according to a command, such as during the execution of a variable performance (miss variable performance) after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various roles have already been completed, or during the execution of a jackpot performance (opening performance, round performance, ending performance), the screen displayed on the image display device until the power-on command is received at timing T4 is the variable performance screen (miss variable performance screen, jackpot variable performance screen) or the jackpot performance screen (opening performance screen, round game performance screen, ending performance screen), the screen is the same as when the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and restarted during a customer waiting state, and the return operation or initial operation of various roles (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) is performed, and the initialization notification sound is output from the audio output device 9, etc.

In addition, if there is an abnormality in any of the various reels, the initial operation of the various reels or the light (flashing red) will be emitted in an abnormality notification mode, as in the specific examples shown in Figures 91, 92, and 93.

(Specific example 2 when power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
Figure 103 shows a specific example 2 of a case in which power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then resumed while the system is waiting for customers (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130) after the origin return processing and initial operation processing have already been completed.

Here, we will explain the case where the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of main power is resumed while the supply of backup power continues during a customer waiting state (including when a customer waiting demo performance is being performed), which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance in response to a command.

At the timing of T1, if the machine is in a customer waiting state after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various reels have already been completed, the image display device displays the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while the machine is waiting for customers.

In addition, when the machine is in a waiting state for customers after the end of the variable performance that was performed after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various reels have ended, the image display device will display a standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a indicating a miss and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, or a customer waiting demo performance screen.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the standby screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general map change indicator 85, sub general map hold indicator 86) also maintains the display contents.

When the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed at the timing of T3, processing is performed to restore the game control state. At this time, the image display device maintains the standby screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub normal map change indicator 85, sub normal map hold indicator 86) also maintains the display contents.

Even if the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped, if the demo waiting time has elapsed while the standby screen is being displayed (after a customer waiting state designation command is received regardless of whether or not the variable performance has ended, or after the previous customer waiting demo performance has ended), the customer waiting demo performance will start.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives a power restoration command sent from the main control board 110 as a power-on command, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 begin to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as an initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as an initial light emission, the performance button LED lights up in white as an initial light emission, and the image display device displays a second standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen.

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reserved number "0" is displayed in both the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process ends, and the initial operation process starts, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 begins.

At timing T7, the initial operation of the performance button 17 ends, and at timing T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED ends and they turn on (light up in white) while waiting for customers.

If there is a recovery abnormality in any of the various reels, the initial operation or initial light emission of the various reels will be performed in the same manner as in the specific examples shown in Figures 95, 96, or 97.

(Specific example 3 when power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
Figure 104 shows a specific example 3 of a case where power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed during the execution of a variable performance (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130) after the origin return processing and initial operation processing have already been completed.

Here, we will explain the case where the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of main power is resumed while the supply of backup power continues during the execution of a variable performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance in response to a command.

At the timing of T1, the change performance is being performed, the change performance screen is displayed on the image display device, and change performance sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) are output from the audio output device 9. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing. In addition, a change display is being performed on the sub-first change display 81, and the reserved number "1" is displayed on the sub-first reserve display 83.

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the display of the variable performance screen, and the sub-information display device 80 (sub-first variable display 81, sub-second variable display 82, sub-first hold display 83, sub-second hold display 84, sub-general map variable display 85, sub-general map hold display 86) also maintains the display contents.

When the power supply (main power) to the main control board 110 is resumed at the timing of T3, processing is performed to restore the game control state without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device maintains the display state of the variable performance screen, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub normal map variable display 85, sub normal map hold display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command for when the special chart is changing, sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as its initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up blue as its initial light emission, the performance button LED lights up white as its initial light emission, the image display device displays a recovery screen including the text "Please resume play", the audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general map change indicator 85, sub general map hold indicator 86) maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return to origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started.

At timing T7, the initial operation of the performance button 17 ends, and at timing T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At the timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED ends and they are turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the performance control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command sent from the main control board 110, a confirmation display is made for a loss in the variable performance. At this time, the image display device displays a stopped screen in which the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and a stopping sound is output from the audio output device 9. In addition, the first reserved number display area 70E displays "1", and the second reserved number display area 70F displays "0". In addition, the sub first variable display 81 displays a loss (non-display) indicating a loss.

If the result of this variable performance is a jackpot, when the performance control board 130 receives a special symbol confirmation command, a confirmation display of the variable performance jackpot is performed. At this time, the image display device displays a stopped screen in which the performance symbol 70a, such as "777", which is a jackpot performance symbol, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the sub-first variable display 81 displays a jackpot indicating a jackpot, and the audio output device 9 outputs a stop sound.

At the timing of T11, when a change start command (performance symbol designation command, change pattern designation command) sent from the main control board 110 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81 starts displaying the changes, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

Note that at the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED go into their initial light emission mode when power is restored, but by making them go into a special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode when the lights are turned off or when power is restored, it may be possible to know that a power restoration command has been received during the change performance.

In addition, if there is a return abnormality in any of the various reels, the initial operation of the various reels or the light (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode will be performed in the same manner as in the specific examples shown in Figures 95, 96, and 97.

In addition, even if the execution time of the variable performance recognized by the performance control board 130 has elapsed before the special pattern confirmation command is received, the performance pattern 70a will not be displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped, and the variable display on the sub-1 variable display device and the sub-2 variable display device will not end.

(Specific example 4 when power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
Figure 105 shows a specific example 4 of a case where power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then resumed during the execution of a jackpot presentation (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the presentation control board 130) after the origin return processing and initial operation processing have already been completed.

Here, we will explain the case where the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of main power is resumed while the supply of backup power continues during the execution of a jackpot performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance in response to a command.

At the timing of T1, the big win performance (here, the first round performance) is being executed, the big win performance (round performance) screen is displayed on the image display device, and the big win special symbol TZ ("777") is displayed in a stopped (static) state. In addition, "1" is displayed as the reserved number in the first reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the reserved number in the second reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a jackpot performance sound (BGM, SE, etc.), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, the sub-first variable display 81 displays (lights up) the jackpot.

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the big win presentation screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub normal map change indicator 85, sub normal map hold indicator 86) also maintains the display contents.

When the power supply (main power) to the main control board 110 is resumed at the timing of T3, processing is performed to restore the game control state without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the big win presentation screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub normal map change indicator 85, sub normal map hold indicator 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command for the jackpot sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as an initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as an initial light emission, the performance button LED lights up in white as an initial light emission, the image display device displays a recovery screen for use during a jackpot including the text "Please resume play (during a jackpot)", and the audio output device 9 becomes silent. In addition, the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub normal map change indicator 85, sub normal map hold indicator 86) maintains the display contents.

In addition, instead of displaying the recovery screen for when a jackpot occurs, the same recovery screen as that displayed when power supply (main power only) to the main control board 110 is stopped during the variable performance shown in FIG. 104 may be displayed.

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return to origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started.

At timing T7, the initial operation of the performance button 17 ends, and at timing T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At the timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED ends and they are turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the performance control board 130 receives the round designation command for the second opening (second round) sent from the main control board 110, the big win performance (round performance) is resumed. At this time, the image display device displays a special big win performance (round performance) screen instead of the normal big win performance screen, and the special big win symbol TZ ("777") is not displayed.

The first reserved number display area 70E displays the reserved number "1," and the second reserved number display area 70F displays the reserved number "0." Furthermore, the audio output device 9 outputs a jackpot performance sound (BGM, SE, etc.), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit during the jackpot.

After that, when the performance control board 130 receives a round designation command for the third opening (third round) sent from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the normal jackpot performance (round performance) screen instead of the special jackpot performance (round performance) screen.

Note that if the performance control board 130 receives an ending designation command, rather than a round designation command while the special big win performance screen is being displayed, the normal ending performance screen will be displayed.

In addition, when a round designation command is received while a special jackpot presentation screen is being displayed, instead of switching to a normal jackpot presentation screen, the special jackpot presentation screen may be continued until the presentation control board 130 receives an ending designation command, or the special jackpot presentation screen may be continued until the presentation control board 130 receives a customer waiting state designation command or a fluctuation start command after the jackpot game has ended.

In addition, at the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are in their initial light-emitting state when power is restored, but by making them in a special light-emitting state different from the initial light-emitting state when the lights are turned off or when power is restored, it may be possible to know that a power restoration command has been received during the change performance.

In addition, if there is a return abnormality in any of the various reels, the initial operation of the various reels or the light (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode will be performed in the same manner as in the specific examples shown in Figures 95, 96, and 97.

In addition, in Figures 102 to 105, when a power-on command or a power-restoration command is received, the various parts (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) are reset, but it is also possible to perform the initial operation of the various parts without performing the reset operation.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in Figures 90 to 105, when the game control state is initialized, a first initial performance pattern ("135") is displayed in which the identification characters (numbers, letters, etc.) in the multiple performance patterns 70a form a first combination, and when the game control state is restored, a second initial performance pattern ("753") is displayed in which the identification characters in the multiple performance patterns 70a form a second combination. By doing this, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the game control state has been initialized or restored.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 90 to 105, when the game control state is restored, it is possible to display a specific display suggesting the resumption of power supply before displaying the performance pattern 70a on the image display device, and the display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device when the state is restored to waiting for customers (only displaying the initial screen) is different from the display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device during the variable display of special patterns and after restoration to no reserved memory/reserved memory (displaying the initial screen + recovery screen). By doing this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when the stopped power supply is resumed and the game control state is restored.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 90 to 105, it is possible to display the number of reserved memories in the reserved icon display area (first reserved icon display area 70B, second reserved icon display area 70D) and the sub-reserved indicators (first sub-reserved indicator 83, second sub-reserved indicator 84), and when the power supply that was stopped while there are reserved memories is resumed and the game control state is restored, the reserved icon display area does not display the reserved memories when the image display device is displaying a specific display (display of the recovery screen) suggesting the resumption of power supply, but the sub-reserved indicator can display the reserved memories. By doing this, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the game control state is restored, it is possible to know the number of reserved memories before the specific display ends, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 90 to 105, when the power supply that was stopped during the customer waiting demo performance is resumed and the game control state is restored, the customer waiting demo performance screen is not displayed again, but the second standby screen is displayed in a state in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, is stopped (statically displayed). By doing so, it is not necessary to be aware of whether the state before the power supply was stopped was during the customer waiting demo performance or not, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control when the game control state is restored after the power supply is resumed.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 90 to 105, when the power supply that was stopped during a variation performance is resumed and the game control state is restored, the sub-variable display (sub-first variable display 81, sub-second variable display 82) is configured not to perform a variable display (blinking display) during the variable display of the special pattern, even if the variable display of the special pattern is being executed (the recovery screen is displayed). By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the game control state is restored after the power supply is resumed.

In addition, when the game control state is restored and the special symbol variable display is being executed (the recovery screen is displayed), the sub variable display (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82) may display a variable display (blinking display). In this way, it becomes easier to understand that the special symbol variable display is being executed when the game control state is restored.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 90 to 105, the sub-reserve indicators (sub-first reserve indicator 83, sub-second reserve indicator 84) are configured to display the number of reserved balls from the time when the recovery screen is displayed on the image display device (before the sub-variable indicator displays a variable display and when the special symbol storage designation command is received). By doing this, the player can immediately grasp the number of reserved balls after the game control state is restored, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

When the sub-variation indicators (sub-first variation indicator 81, sub-second variation indicator 82) are performing a variation display (flashing display) while the recovery screen is displayed on the image display device, the sub-reservation indicators (sub-first reservation indicator 83, sub-second reservation indicator 84) may be configured to display the number of reserved balls in accordance with the start of this variation display. In this way, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the special pattern variation display is being performed when the game control state is restored, and the number of reserved balls at that time.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 90 to 105, when power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the return operation of the various reels is performed at the same timing as when power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (the timing when the initial screen is displayed). By doing this, the control for the return operation of the various reels does not become complicated, and it is possible to reduce the processing load for the return operation of the various reels.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 90 to 105, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c or when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the light-emitting parts of the various parts (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) are turned off during the recovery operation of the various parts. This makes it possible to distinguish from the initial operation of the various parts and to know that the recovery operation is in progress.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 90 to 105, if any of the various reels has a return abnormality, the light-emitting part of the reel with the return abnormality will flash red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the user of the abnormality. By doing this, it becomes possible to identify the reel with the return abnormality.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 90 to 105, when an abnormality is notified by flashing the light-emitting part of a reel that has a return abnormality in red, the abnormality notification continues until the next variable performance starts. By doing this, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the reel that has a return abnormality.

If a reel has a return abnormality, a return operation may be performed to return the reel that had a return abnormality to its original position when the next variable performance begins. Also, if an abnormality is notified by causing the light-emitting part of the reel that had a return abnormality to flash red, the abnormality notification may be cancelled when the performance button 17 is operated.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 90 to 105, when power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the initial operation of the various reels is performed at the same timing as when power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (the timing when the initial screen is displayed). By doing this, the control related to the initial operation of the various reels does not become complicated, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the initial operation of the various reels.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 90 to 105, the board parts (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) are configured to perform an initial operation before the sub-hold indicators (sub-first hold indicator 83, sub-second hold indicator 84) change to a display mode showing the number of holds (a recovery screen is displayed on the image display device) when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c or when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. This makes it easier to avoid inconveniences such as the progress of the presentation being hindered by the initial operation of the board parts, and makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 90 to 105, the frame role (performance button 17) is configured to perform an initial operation before the sub-hold indicators (sub-first hold indicator 83, sub-second hold indicator 84) change to a display mode showing the number of holds (a recovery screen is displayed on the image display device) when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c or when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. This makes it easier to avoid inconveniences such as the progress of the performance being hindered by the initial operation of the frame role, and makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 90 to 105, even if the stop screen is displayed after the recovery screen is displayed, the sound of the effect pattern 70a stopping is output. This makes it easier for the player to understand that the variable effect that was being executed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, if the stop screen is displayed after the recovery screen is displayed, the stopping sound of the performance pattern 70a may not be output.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 90 to 105, even if the power-on commands (power-on command, power-restoration command) cannot be received, the recovery operations, initial operations, and initial light emission of various parts are executed, and the initial screen continues to be displayed. By doing this, it becomes possible to grasp that an abnormality has occurred in which the power-on commands cannot be received.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 90 to 105, even if the initial screen continues to be displayed because the power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) cannot be received, if the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to the command and receives a special symbol storage command from the main control board 110 based on the winning of a gaming ball into the starting hole, a winning sound is output. By doing this, it is possible to accurately notify the user that a gaming ball has won into the starting hole even when the initial screen is displayed.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 90 to 105, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) cannot be received, if the performance control board 130 receives a fluctuation start command from the main control board 110 after entering a control state in which it can execute a performance according to the command, the fluctuation performance is executed without displaying the standby screen. By doing this, the start of the fluctuation performance is executed without delay, making it possible to execute the fluctuation performance from start to finish within the range of the fluctuation time of the special pattern.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 90 to 105, even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to a command, such as when it is waiting for customers after the return operations and initial operations (including initial light emission) of various props have already been completed, if a power-on command or power restoration command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by stopping and then restarting the power supply to the main control board 110 alone, the return operations and initial operations (initial light emission) of various props are executed again. By doing this, commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if there is a mismatch between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the mismatch.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 90 to 105, even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance after the return operations of various reels and the initial operations (including initial light emission) have already been completed, if a power-on command or power restoration command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by stopping and then restarting the power supply to the main control board 110 alone, the return operations of various reels and the initial operations (initial light emission) are executed again. By doing this, commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if there is a mismatch between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the mismatch.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 90 to 105, even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to a command, such as during a jackpot game after the return operations and initial operations (including initial light emission) of various reels have already been completed, if a power-on command or power restoration command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by stopping and then restarting the power supply to the main control board 110 alone, the return operations and initial operations (including initial light emission) of various reels are executed again. By doing this, commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if there is a mismatch between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the mismatch.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 90 to 105, even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to a command, such as when it is waiting for customers after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished, if the power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on command is received from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. By doing this, commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if there is a mismatch between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the mismatch.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 90 to 105, even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished, if the power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on command is received from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. By doing this, commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if there is a mismatch between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the mismatch.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 90 to 105, even if the presentation control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute presentations according to commands, such as during a jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished, if the power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. By doing this, commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so that even if there is a mismatch between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the presentation control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the mismatch.

When a power-on command is received again from the main control board 110, the audio output device 9 may simply output an initialization notification sound, rather than executing the recovery operations, initial operations, and initial light emission of the various parts.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 90 to 105, even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to a command, such as when the return operation of various props and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have already been completed and the board is waiting for customers, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on command is received again from the main control board 110, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and if a power restoration command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing this, commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if there is a mismatch between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the mismatch.

Even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state where it can execute a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance or a jackpot performance after the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have already ended, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on command is received again from the main control board 110, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing this, commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if there is a mismatch between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the mismatch.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 90 to 105, even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state where it can execute a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance after the return operation of various parts and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have already ended, if a power restoration command is received from the main control board 110, such as when only the power supply (main power) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the return screen is displayed instead of the initial screen. By doing this, commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if there is a mismatch between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the mismatch.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 90 to 105, even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to a command, such as during a jackpot performance after the return operations of various roles and the initial operations (including initial light emission) have already been completed, if a power restoration command is received from the main control board 110, such as by restarting the power supply (main power) to the main control board 110 after it has been stopped, the initial screen is not displayed, and a return screen for the jackpot is displayed. By doing this, commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if there is a mismatch between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the mismatch.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 90 to 105, even if the presentation control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute presentations according to commands, such as during a variable presentation after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished or during a big win game, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on command is received again from the main control board 110, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and if a power restoration command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing this, commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if there is a mismatch between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the presentation control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the mismatch.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 90 to 105, during a control state (waiting for customers, variable presentation, big win presentation) in which the presentation control board 130 can execute presentations in response to commands, even if the power supply to the main control board 130 is stopped while the power supply to the presentation control board 130 continues, the previous display screen can continue to be displayed. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 90 to 105, during a control state (waiting for customers, variable presentation, big win presentation) in which the presentation control board 130 can execute presentations in response to commands, even if the power supply to the main control board 130 is stopped while the power supply to the presentation control board 130 continues and then the power supply is resumed, the previous display screen can continue to be displayed. By doing this, the player will not feel uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Note that the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute performance in response to a command are the waiting state for customers, variable performance, and jackpot performance, but the state in which the performance control board 130 is waiting for a command from the main control board 110 after startup (for example, while the initial screen is being displayed) may also be included in the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute performance in response to a command.

In this embodiment, the performance pattern 70a is composed only of the numbers "1" to "9" (identification characters), but it may be composed of numbers (identification characters) + characters (decorative parts), in which case it is good to have a different character for each number, such as "1" and character A, and "2" and character B. Also, in the normal game state, the performance pattern 70a may be displayed as numbers + characters, and in a specific game state (low-probability time-saving game state, high-probability time-saving game state), the performance pattern 70a may be displayed as only numbers or numbers + characters smaller than in the normal game state.

In addition, three types of presentation modes in the normal game state, A to C, may be provided, and at least one of the number design and character design of the presentation pattern 70a may be different for each presentation mode. Two types of presentation modes in the high-probability time-saving game state, D to E, may be provided, and at least one of the number design and character design of the presentation pattern 70a may be different for each presentation mode. Furthermore, two types of presentation modes in the low-probability time-saving game state, F to G, may be provided, and at least one of the number design and character design of the presentation pattern 70a may be different for each presentation mode.

In this case, when the power supply is stopped during normal gameplay in one of presentation modes A to C, and then the power supply is resumed and the game control state is restored, presentation mode A is always set, and after the initial screen or the return screen has finished displaying, the presentation pattern 70a corresponding to presentation mode A is displayed still, without oscillating. On the other hand, when the game control state is initialized, presentation mode A is always set, and after the initial screen has finished displaying, the presentation pattern 70a corresponding to presentation mode A is displayed still, without oscillating.

When the power supply is stopped during high-probability time-saving gameplay in one of presentation modes D to E, and then the power supply is resumed and the game control state is restored, presentation mode D is always set, and the presentation pattern 70a corresponding to presentation mode D is displayed still without oscillating after the display of the initial screen or the recovery screen has ended. On the other hand, when the game control state is initialized, presentation mode A is always set, and the presentation pattern 70a corresponding to presentation mode A is displayed still without oscillating after the display of the initial screen has ended.

Furthermore, when the power supply is stopped during low-probability time-saving gameplay in any of presentation modes F to G, and then the power supply is resumed and the game control state is restored, presentation mode F is always set, and the presentation pattern 70a corresponding to presentation mode F is displayed statically without oscillating after the display of the initial screen or the recovery screen has ended. On the other hand, when the game control state is initialized, presentation mode A is always set, and the presentation pattern 70a corresponding to presentation mode A is displayed statically without oscillating after the display of the initial screen has ended.

In addition, when the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size during an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect in normal game mode, the effect pattern 70a may be changed to numbers only, and when the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect ends and the effect pattern 70a is displayed as a temporary stop (oscillating display), the effect pattern 70a may be returned to numbers + characters.

In this case, when the power supply is stopped during an SP reach or SPSP reach in the normal game state, that is, when the performance pattern 70a has been changed to numbers only, and then the power supply is resumed and the game control state is restored, the number + character performance pattern 70a will be displayed statically without oscillating after the display of the recovery screen has ended. On the other hand, when the game control state is initialized, the number + character performance pattern 70a will be displayed statically without oscillating after the display of the initial screen has ended.

Furthermore, during an SP reach or SPSP reach in a specific game state (low-probability time-saving game state, high-probability time-saving game state), that is, when the power supply is stopped while the performance pattern 70a is only numbers, and then the power supply is resumed and the game control state is restored, the performance pattern 70a consisting of only numbers will be displayed statically without oscillating after the display of the recovery screen has ended. On the other hand, when the game control state is initialized, the performance pattern 70a consisting of numbers + characters will be displayed statically without oscillating after the display of the initial screen has ended.

<Contents of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment 1>
In a conventional gaming machine, when a starting condition is satisfied, judgment information on whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player is acquired and the judgment information is stored. Then, when the judgment condition is satisfied, the stored judgment information is judged, and a variable performance according to the result of the judgment is executed, and when the variable performance results in a special result, the special game is executed. Among such gaming machines, there are some that display a reserved image corresponding to unjudged judgment information (for example, see JP 2015-33530 A). In addition, the gaming machine improves the interest of the game by changing a normal reserved image to a reserved image of a display mode that suggests the possibility that the variable performance will result in a special result. However, the above gaming machine still has room for improvement in order to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control unit 130m) that controls the performance of the game based on a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means is equipped with a judgment means (main CPU 110a) that judges whether or not to play a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a reservation means (main RAM 110c) that can reserve the right of the judgment, the slave control means is equipped with an image display means (display/audio control unit 140) that displays a reserved image (reserved icon) corresponding to the reserved right on a display means (first image display device 70), and a performance execution means (display/audio control unit 140) that causes the performance means (audio output device 9) to execute a predetermined notification performance (icon generation (change) notification sound) during the progress of the game, and the image display means displays the display image (reserved icon) corresponding to the reserved right on a display means (first image display device 70) and ... a predetermined frame update timing. The display means is configured to update the image displayed, and is capable of performing a change effect (icon change effect) that changes the reserved image to a special reserved image indicating the possibility of performing the special game or not, and the change effect includes a first change effect (a winning change effect) that is executed at a frame update timing in response to reception of a command (a starting gate winning designation command) that indicates the occurrence of the right transmitted from the main control means, and a second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character action change pattern 01, and pattern action change pattern 01) that is executed at a predetermined frame update timing after reception of a command (a variation pattern designation command) that indicates the result of the judgment transmitted from the main control means, and the effect execution means starts the notification effect at the frame update timing at which the first change effect starts, and ends the notification effect at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a secondary control means (presentation control unit 130m) that controls the presentation of the game based on a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means includes a judgment means (main CPU 110a) that judges whether or not to play a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, a reservation means (main RAM 110c) that can reserve the right to make the judgment, Based on the result of the judgment, the slave control means includes an image display means (display/audio control unit 140) for displaying a reserved image (reserved icon) corresponding to the reserved right on a display means (first image display device 70), and a performance execution means (display/audio control unit 140) for causing a performance means (audio output device 9) to execute a predetermined notification performance (icon generation (change) notification sound) during the progress of the game. The image display means displays a predetermined frame. The image displayed on the display means is updated at each frame update timing, and a change effect (icon change effect) can be performed to change the reserved image to a special reserved image indicating the possibility of performing the special game or not. The change effect includes a first change effect (normal change pattern 01) that is executed at a frame update timing corresponding to reception of a command (change pattern designation command) indicating the start of the variable display of the pattern transmitted from the main control means, and a second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character effect change pattern 01, and pattern effect change pattern 01) that is executed at a predetermined frame update timing after reception of a command (change pattern designation command) indicating the result of the judgment transmitted from the main control means, and the effect execution means starts the notification effect at the frame update timing when the first change effect starts, and ends the notification effect at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing when the first change effect ends. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a secondary control means (presentation control unit 130m) that controls the presentation of the game based on a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means includes a judgment means (main CPU 110a) that judges whether or not to play a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, a reservation means (main RAM 110c) that can reserve the right to make the judgment, and a variable display control means (variable display control means) that displays the patterns in a variable manner and then stops the display of the patterns based on the result of the judgment. The sub control means includes an image display means (display/audio control unit 140) for displaying on a display means (first image display device 70) a pre-judgment reserved image (reserved icon) corresponding to the reserved right and a post-judgment reserved image (reserved icon) corresponding to the right after the judgment has been made on the right, and an effect execution means (display/audio control unit 140) for causing an effect execution means (audio output device 9) to execute a predetermined notification effect (icon generation (change) notification sound) during the progress of the game, and the image display means displays the pre-judgment reserved image (reserved icon) corresponding to the reserved right and a post-judgment reserved image (reserved icon) corresponding to the right after the judgment has been made on the right on the display means (first image display device 70) and an effect execution means (display/audio control unit 140) for causing an effect execution means (audio output device 9) to execute a predetermined notification effect (icon generation (change) notification sound) during the progress of the game, and The display means is configured to update an image to be displayed, and is capable of performing a change effect (icon change effect) that changes the pre-judgment pending image or the post-judgment pending image to a pre-judgment special pending image or a post-judgment special pending image indicating the possibility of performing the special game or not, and the change effect includes a first change effect (normal change pattern 01) that is executed at a frame update timing corresponding to a command (variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control means when the variable display of the pattern starts, and a second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character effect change pattern 01, and pattern effect change pattern 01) that is executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving a command (variation pattern designation command) that indicates the result of the judgment transmitted from the main control means, and the effect execution means starts the notification effect at the frame update timing at which the first change effect starts and ends the notification effect at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends, so that the rate at which the second change effect is executed is higher when the image is changed to the post-judgment special pending image than when the image is changed to the pre-judgment special pending image. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game and a slave control means (performance control unit 130m) that controls the performance of the game based on a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means is equipped with a judgment means (main CPU 110a) that judges whether or not to play a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a reservation means (main RAM 110c) that can reserve a predetermined number of the judgment rights, and the slave control means is equipped with a display means (first image display 110b) that displays a reserved image (reserved icon) corresponding to the reserved right. The game device includes an image display means (display/audio control unit 140) for displaying an image on a display device 70, and an effect execution means (display/audio control unit 140) for causing an effect execution means (audio output device 9) to execute a predetermined notification effect (icon generation (change) notification sound) during the progress of a game, the image display means is configured to update an image to be displayed on the display means at each predetermined frame update timing, and is capable of performing a change effect (icon change effect) for changing the reserved image to a special reserved image indicating the possibility of playing the special game or not, and the change effect is performed in response to a command transmitted from the main control means when the number of reserved rights changes. The display mode of the special reserved image includes a first change effect (a change effect at the time of winning, a normal change pattern 01) executed at a frame update timing according to (a start port winning designation command, a change pattern designation command, a special symbol storage designation command), and a second change effect (a normal change pattern 02, a character action change pattern 01, and a symbol action change pattern 01) executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving a command (a change pattern designation command) indicating the result of the judgment transmitted from the main control means, and the display mode of the special reserved image includes a first display mode (blue character icon) and a second display mode (a blue character icon) which indicates a possibility of playing the special game more than the first display mode. and a second display mode (red character icon) having a higher probability of winning, the effect execution means starts the notification effect at the frame update timing when the first change effect starts, and ends the notification effect at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing when the first change effect ends, the effect is more likely to change to the second display mode when the second change effect is executed than when the first change effect is executed, and when changing to the second display mode in the first change effect, the possibility of playing the special game is higher when the number of reserved rights is a second number greater than the first number than when the number is a first number. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

Note that "special reserve images" and "pre-determination special reserve images" include images that have a different shape or color from the normal reserve icon, images that display a color effect around the reserve icon indicating the likelihood of winning a jackpot, images that display a character around (near) the reserve icon indicating the likelihood of winning a jackpot, and images that display a text image suggesting the upcoming performance (such as "SP" or "pseudo consecutive") around (near) the reserve icon.

In addition, "special reserved images after determination" include images that have a different shape or color from the normal icon, images that display a color effect around the icon indicating the likelihood of winning a jackpot, images that display a character around (near) the icon indicating the likelihood of winning a jackpot, and images that display a text image suggesting the upcoming performance (for example, "SP" or "pseudo consecutive") around (near) the icon.

In addition, the "first display mode" includes a special icon (flashing CD icon), a blue character icon, and a green character icon, etc.
In addition, the "second display mode" includes a red character icon and a rainbow character icon, etc.

In addition, "post-judgment pending image" and "post-judgment special pending image" include images that are displayed from the start of the variable performance until it ends, images that are displayed only for a specified period after the start of the variable performance, and images that are erased for a specific period during the variable performance (SP reach, SPSP reach, etc.).

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 2>
In conventional gaming machines, judgment information acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition is stored as a reserved memory, and based on the judgment information, it is judged whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and a variable performance is executed based on the judgment result. Among such gaming machines, there are some that allow the player to grasp the progress of the game by increasing or decreasing the reserved image corresponding to each reserved memory, or by displaying an execution image corresponding to the reserved memory in which the variable performance has been executed (for example, see JP 2017-018225 A). However, the gaming machine described in the above Patent Document 1 has a problem that it is difficult to immediately grasp the number of reserved memories when the number of reserved memories changes.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control board 130) for controlling the performance of the game based on a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means is equipped with a judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a game ball into a starting hole), and a storage means capable of storing the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and the slave control means is equipped with a variable performance execution means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the judgment on an image display means (image display device), and a storage means for storing the number of the reserved memories. and an information display means capable of displaying first pending information (pending number) indicating the number of pending memories and second pending information (pending icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, the image display means updates the display image at each predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms), the information display means is capable of displaying the first pending information reduced and the second pending information reduced when the number of pending memories is reduced, and the frame update timing at which the display of the first pending information reduced (updating to the pending number subtracted by 1) is completed is earlier than the frame update timing at which the display of the second pending information reduced (moving to the center of the adjacent display section in the pending icon display area) is completed. This makes it easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control board 130) that controls the performance of the game based on a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means is equipped with a judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a game ball into a starting hole), and a storage means capable of storing the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and the slave control means is equipped with a variable performance execution means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the judgment on an image display means (image display device), first reserved information (reserved number) indicating the number of the reserved memories, and a storage means capable of storing the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory. and an information display means capable of displaying second reserved information (reserved icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the memories, the image display means updating a display image at each predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms), the information display means being capable of displaying a reduction in the first reserved information and a change display that changes the second reserved information in which the variable performance has started to execution information (the icon) when the number of reserved memories decreases, the frame update timing at which the reduction display of the first reserved information (updating to the reserved number subtracted by 1) is completed is earlier than the frame update timing at which the change display of the second reserved information to the execution information (movement from the reserved icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. This makes it easier to grasp the number of reserved memories.

◆A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control board 130) for controlling the performance of the game based on a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means is equipped with a judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a game ball into a starting hole), and a storage means capable of storing the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and the slave control means is equipped with a variable performance execution means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the judgment on an image display means (image display device), and a first reserved information (reserved number) indicating the number of the reserved memories and an identifier corresponding to each of the reserved memories. and an information display means capable of displaying the second pending information (pending icon) indicating the number of pending messages, the image display means updating the display image at each predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms), the information display means being capable of executing a display of a decrease in the first pending information and a display of a decrease in the second pending information when the number of pending messages decreases, and being capable of executing a display of an increase in the first pending information and a display of an increase in the second pending information when the number of pending messages increases, and if the number of pending messages increases while the display of a decrease in the second pending information is being displayed, the display of an increase in the first pending information (updating to a pending number incremented by 1) is started even before the frame update timing at which the display of a decrease in the second pending information (moving to the center of the adjacent display section in the pending icon display area) is completed. This makes it easier to grasp the number of pending messages.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control board 130) for controlling the performance of the game based on a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means is equipped with a judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a game ball into a starting hole), and a storage means capable of storing the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and the slave control means is equipped with a variable performance execution means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the judgment on an image display means (image display device), first reserved information (reserved number) indicating the number of the reserved memories, and second reserved information (reserved icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the reserved memories. and an information display means capable of displaying the above, the image display means updates the display image at each predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms), the information display means is capable of executing a display of a decrease in the first pending information and a display of a change in which the second pending information for which the variable display has started is changed to execution information (the icon) when the number of pending memories decreases, and is capable of executing a display of an increase in the first pending information and a display of an increase in the second pending information when the number of pending memories increases, and if the number of pending memories increases during the display of a change in the second pending information, the display of an increase in the first pending information (updating to a pending number increased by 1) is started even before the frame update timing at which the display of a decrease in the second pending information (movement from the pending icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. This makes it easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control board 130) for controlling the performance of the game based on a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means is equipped with a judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a game ball into a starting hole), and a storage means capable of storing the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and the slave control means is equipped with a variable performance execution means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the judgment on an image display means (image display device), a first reserved information (reserved number) indicating the number of the reserved memories, and a previous reserved information (reserved number) indicating the number of the reserved memories. and an information display means capable of displaying second pending information (pending icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, the image display means updates the display image at each predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms), the information display means is capable of executing an increase display of the first pending information and an increase display of the second pending information when the number of the pending memories increases, and when the number of the pending memories increases during the execution of the variable performance, the frame update timing at which the increase display of the first pending information (updating to the pending number incremented by 1) is completed is earlier than the frame update timing at which the increase display of the second pending information (expansion of the pending icon additionally displayed in the pending icon display area to normal size) is completed. This makes it easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control board 130) for controlling the performance of the game based on a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means is equipped with a judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a game ball into a starting hole), and a storage means capable of storing the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and the slave control means is equipped with a variable performance execution means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the judgment on an image display means (image display device), first reserved information (reserved number) indicating the number of the reserved memories, and a storage means capable of storing the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory. and an information display means capable of displaying second reserved information (reserved icon) indicating the corresponding identifier, and the variable performance execution means is capable of executing a specific performance (SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, full rotation reach performance) that anticipates the execution of the special game during the execution of the variable performance, and the information display means is capable of displaying an increase in the first reserved information and an increase in the second reserved information when the number of reserved memories increases, and if the number of reserved memories increases during the execution of the specific performance, the increase in the first reserved information (updating the reserved number to one) is executed, but the increase in the second reserved information is not executed until a predetermined condition is met (the specific performance ends, and the losing performance pattern or big win performance pattern that was displayed in a reduced size is displayed in an enlarged size). This makes it easier to grasp the number of reserved memories.

◆As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control board 130) for controlling the performance of the game based on a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means is equipped with a judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to a player based on judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a game ball into a starting hole), a storage means capable of storing the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a gaming state control means capable of controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the slave control means is equipped with a variable performance execution means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the judgment on an image display means (image display device), and a first reserved information indicating the number of the reserved memories. and an information display means capable of displaying the first reserved information (reserved number) and second reserved information (reserved icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the reserved memories, and the information display means is capable of displaying an increase in the first reserved information and an increase in the second reserved information when the number of reserved memories increases, and the storage means stores the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (entry of a game ball into the first start hole) as the first reserved memory, and stores the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition (entry of a game ball into the second start hole) as the second reserved memory, and when the number of the first reserved memories increases in the specific game state, the increase in the first reserved information (updating to the reserved number incremented by 1) is executed, but the increase in the second reserved information is not executed until a predetermined condition is established (the final variable performance in the specific game state ends, and the normal game state is restored). In this way, it is easier to grasp the number of reserved memories.

(Content 3 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the acquired determination information, and to execute the special game according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that initializes the game control state after the start of power supply or restores the state before the power supply is stopped (see, for example, JP 2017-189604 A). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem in that it is difficult to grasp whether the game control state has been initialized or restored.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine capable of playing a game includes movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, presentation button 17) that can operate (move, emit light) in a predetermined manner, initial processing means (main control board 110) that can initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restore it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that can perform the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable presentation means after the start of power supply and perform the presentation operation (presentation operation, presentation light emission) of the movable presentation means while the game is being played, and the presentation control means is configured to differ in the operation mode (operation mode, light emission mode, etc.) of the initial operation when the control state of the game is initialized from when the control state of the game is restored. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or restored.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine capable of playing a game is provided with an operation means (effect button 17) that can be operated by a player and can emit light in a predetermined manner, an initial processing means (main control board 110) that can initialize the game control state after power supply starts or restore it to the state before power supply is stopped, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) that can perform initial illumination of the operation means after power supply starts and effect illumination of the operation means while a game is being played, and the effect control means is configured to differ in the illumination mode (e.g., illumination mode) of the initial illumination when the game control state is initialized from when the game control state is restored. This makes it easier to know whether the game control state has been initialized or restored.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine capable of playing a game includes movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate in a predetermined manner and emit light in a predetermined manner, an initial processing means (main control board 110) that can initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restore it to the state before the power supply is stopped, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that can perform the initial operation and initial light emission of the movable performance means after the start of power supply and perform the performance operation and light emission of the movable performance means while the game is being played. The performance control means has the same operation mode (operation mode such as the number of steps and the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the movable performance means when the control state of the game is initialized and when the control state of the game is restored, but the light emission mode (light emission mode, etc.) of the initial light emission of the movable performance means is different. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or restored.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine capable of playing a game is provided with movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that is capable of operating in a predetermined manner and emitting light in a predetermined manner, an initial processing means (main control board 110) that is capable of initializing the control state of the game after power supply starts or restoring it to the state before power supply is stopped, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that is capable of performing initial illumination of the movable performance means after power supply starts and of performing illumination of the movable performance means while a game is being played, the movable performance means including a first movable performance means (first movable member 73) and a second movable performance means (second movable member 74), and the performance control means is configured to make at least a portion of the illumination pattern of the initial illumination of the first movable performance means the same when the control state of the game is initialized and when the control state of the game is restored, but to make the illumination pattern of the initial illumination of the second movable performance means different. This makes it easier to know whether the game control state has been initialized or restored.

◆As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on determination information (special symbol determination information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition, an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a variable table of multiple performance symbols displayed on a display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. The game control device includes a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of performing a variable presentation accompanied by a display, and the plurality of presentation patterns includes identification characters (numbers, letters, etc.) that allow each of the presentation patterns to be identified, and the presentation control means sets the identification characters in the plurality of presentation patterns displayed on the display means to a first combination (e.g., "135") when the game control state is initialized, and sets the identification characters in the plurality of presentation patterns displayed on the display means to a second combination (e.g., "753") when the game control state is restored. This makes it easier to know whether the game control state has been initialized or restored.

(Content 4 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional gaming machines, the game control state is generally initialized after the start of power supply or restored to the state before the power supply is stopped. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that performs an initial operation of a movable performance means after the start of power supply (for example, see JP 2016-187648 A). However, the gaming machine described in the above patent document has a problem that the movable performance means may not be able to perform a suitable initial operation.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine capable of playing a game includes a movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between a first position (origin position) and a second position (position toward the center of the first image display device 70), an initial processing means (main control board 110) that can initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restore it to the state before the power supply is stopped, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that can perform the initial operation of the movable presentation means after the start of power supply and perform the presentation operation of the movable presentation means while the game is being played. If the movable presentation means is in the second position at the start of power supply (power supply restoration) when the control state of the game is restored, the presentation control means performs the return operation of the movable presentation means to the first position and then performs the initial operation. By doing so, it is possible to perform an appropriate initial operation for the movable presentation means.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine capable of playing a game includes a movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between a first position (origin position) and a second position (position toward the center of the first image display device 70), an initial processing means (main control board 110) that can initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restore it to the state before the power supply is stopped, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that can perform the initial operation of the movable presentation means after the start of power supply and perform the presentation operation of the movable presentation means while playing a game. When the movable presentation means is in the second position at the start of power supply (power supply restoration) when the control state of the game is restored, the presentation control means performs the return operation of the movable presentation means to the first position, and performs the initial operation when the movable presentation means returns to the first position, but does not perform the initial operation when it does not return to the first position. By doing so, it is possible to perform an appropriate initial operation for the movable presentation means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) operable between a first position (origin position) and a second position (position toward the center of the first image display device 70), an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 13) capable of performing the initial operation of the movable presentation means after the start of power supply and performing the presentation operation of the movable presentation means while the game is being played. 0), the movable presentation means includes a first movable presentation means (first movable member 73) and a second movable presentation means (second movable member 74), and the presentation control means performs an operation of returning the first movable presentation means to the first position if the first movable presentation means is in the second position and the second movable presentation means is in the first position when the power supply starts (power restoration) at which the control state of the game is restored, and performs the initial operation of the second movable presentation means without performing the initial operation of the first movable presentation means if the first movable presentation means does not return to the first position. In this way, it is possible to perform an appropriate initial operation for the movable presentation means.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, which comprises a movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) operable between a first position (origin position) and a second position (position closer to the center of the first image display device 70), an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a presentation control means capable of performing an initial operation of the movable presentation means after the start of power supply and performing a presentation operation of the movable presentation means while a game is being played. (Performance control board 130), the movable performance means includes a first movable performance means (first movable member 73) and a second movable performance means (second movable member 74), and the performance control means performs an operation of returning the first movable performance means to the first position if the first movable performance means is in the second position and the second movable performance means is in the first position when the power supply starts (power restoration) at which the control state of the game is restored, and does not perform the initial operation of the second movable performance means if the first movable performance means does not return to the first position. In this way, it is possible to perform an appropriate initial operation for the movable performance means.

◆As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, there is provided a movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) operable between a first position (origin position) and a second position (position closer to the center of the first image display device 70), an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable presentation means after the start of power supply and performing a presentation operation of the movable presentation means while a game is being played. ), the movable presentation means includes a first movable presentation means (first movable member 73) and a second movable presentation means (second movable member 74), and the presentation control means performs an operation of returning the first movable presentation means to the first position if the first movable presentation means is in the second position and the second movable presentation means is in the first position when the power supply starts (power-on) at which the control state of the game is initialized, and performs the initial operation of the second movable presentation means without performing the initial operation of the first movable presentation means if the first movable presentation means does not return to the first position. In this way, it is possible to perform an appropriate initial operation for the movable presentation means.

◆As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine capable of playing a game is provided with movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) operable between a first position (origin position) and a second position (position closer to the center of the first image display device 70), initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of performing the initial operation of the movable presentation means after the start of power supply and performing the presentation operation of the movable presentation means while the game is being played, The movable presentation means includes a first movable presentation means (first movable member 73) and a second movable presentation means (second movable member 74) whose second position overlaps with the second position of the first movable presentation means, and the presentation control means performs an operation of returning the first movable presentation means to the first position if the first movable presentation means is in the second position and the second movable presentation means is in the first position when the power supply starts (power is turned on) to initialize the control state of the game, and does not perform the initial operation of the second movable presentation means if the first movable presentation means does not return to the first position. In this way, it is possible to perform an appropriate initial operation for the movable presentation means.

(Content 5 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the acquired judgment information, and to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a performance pattern displayed on a display means according to the result of the judgment. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restores it to the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, see JP 2017-189604 A). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the power supply that was stopped during the variable performance is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, and there is a problem that the interest in the game may decrease.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on determination information (special pattern determination information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition, an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a display means (image display device) for displaying a performance pattern according to the determination result of the determination means. The device is equipped with a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of performing a variable presentation accompanied by a variable display, and in the variable presentation, the variable presentation pattern can be displayed as a swaying display (temporary stop display) and then a still display (stop display), and when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the variable presentation in which the presentation pattern is swayed is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the presentation control means can display the presentation pattern as a still display on the display means without swaying at a specified timing (when a special pattern determination command is received, when a customer waiting command is received). In this way, the player can understand that the variable presentation that was being executed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on determination information (special pattern determination information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a gaming ball into a starting hole), an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a display means (image display device) capable of changing a plurality of performance patterns displayed according to the determination result of the determination means. The game device is equipped with a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of performing a variable presentation accompanied by a dynamic display, and the variable presentation includes a reach variable presentation in which a reach state is formed and displayed by some of the presentation patterns to execute a reach presentation, and when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the reach presentation is resumed and the game control state is restored, the presentation control means is capable of displaying a combination of the presentation patterns in a static state on the display means, which is different from the reach combination of the presentation patterns that formed and displayed the reach state at a specified timing (when a special pattern determination command is received, when a customer waiting command is received). In this way, the player can understand that the variable presentation that was being executed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

(Content 6 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the acquired judgment information, and to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a performance pattern displayed on a display means according to the result of the judgment. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or restores it to the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, see JP 2017-189604 A). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game may decrease.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine capable of playing a game is provided with a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing judgment information (special pattern judgment information) acquired when an acquisition condition is satisfied (entry of a gaming ball into a starting hole) as reserved memory, a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on the judgment information, an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or for restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of performing a variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a presentation pattern displayed on a display means (image display device) according to the judgment result of the judgment means. The states include a customer waiting state in which the variable performance is not executed, a first state in which the variable performance is executed when there is no reserved memory, and a second state in which the variable performance is executed when there is reserved memory, and the performance control means is capable of performing a specific display (such as displaying an initial screen) before displaying the performance pattern on the display means when the control state of the game is restored, and the display mode of the specific display (only displaying the initial screen) when the power supply stopped in the customer waiting state is resumed and the game is restored to the customer waiting state is different from the display mode of the specific display (displaying the initial screen + recovery screen) when the power supply stopped in the first state or the second state is resumed and the game is restored to the first state or the second state. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when the stopped power supply is resumed and the game control state is restored.

(Content 7 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the acquired judgment information, and to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a performance pattern displayed on a display means according to the result of the judgment. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that performs a customer waiting performance on a display means when a player is not playing a game (for example, see JP 2018-064835 A). However, the gaming machine described in the above patent document has a problem that the customer waiting performance is not executed at an appropriate time according to the state of the gaming machine.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on determination information (special chart determination information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a gaming ball into a starting hole), an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a display means (image display device) that displays a display according to the determination result of the determination means. and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance involving a variable display of a performance pattern displayed on the display means, the performance control means being capable of performing a customer waiting performance (customer waiting demo performance) on the display means when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the performance pattern is statically displayed on the display means, and it is possible to make the period until the customer waiting performance is performed different between a case where the performance pattern is statically displayed after the variable performance time has elapsed and a case where the performance pattern is statically displayed after the control state is initialized or after the control state is restored. In this way, the customer waiting performance can be performed at an appropriate time according to the state of the gaming machine, making it possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

(Content 8 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the acquired judgment information, and to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a performance pattern displayed on a display means according to the result of the judgment. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays execution information corresponding to the judgment information during the execution of the variable performance on a display means (for example, see JP 2018-064835 A). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, and there is a problem that the interest in the game may decrease.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on determination information (special pattern determination information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a gaming ball into a starting hole), an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or for restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of performing a variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a presentation pattern displayed on a display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means, When the control state of the game is restored, the control means can perform a specific display (such as displaying an initial screen) before displaying the performance pattern on the display means, and can display execution information (the icon) corresponding to the judgment information during the variable performance in a specified display area (the icon display area 70C) of the display means. When the power supply that was stopped while the execution information was being displayed is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the specified display area is secured in a predetermined state (a state in which a performance image such as a background image can be displayed) from the end of the specific display to the start of the next variable display, but the execution information is not displayed in the specified display area. In this way, the player can understand that the variable performance that was being performed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

(Content 9 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the acquired judgment information, and to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a performance pattern displayed on a display means according to the result of the judgment. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a pre-reading notice performance over a plurality of variable performances based on the advance judgment result of the judgment information (for example, see JP 2017-143904 A). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that the interest in the game may decrease when the power supply that was stopped during the pre-reading notice performance is resumed and the control state of the game is restored.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired when an acquisition condition is met (a gaming ball enters a starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on the judgment information, a pre-judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging the judgment information before the judgment by the judgment means, an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the game control state after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and The game device is provided with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of the performance pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the judgment result of the judgment means, and the performance control means is capable of performing a predetermined look-ahead notice performance (continuous notice performance) over a plurality of the variable performances based on the judgment result of the advance judgment means, and when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the look-ahead notice performance is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the look-ahead notice performance is not resumed, and a notice performance different from the look-ahead notice performance (for example, an alternative notice performance) can be performed in the variable performance that is executed next to the variable performance where the power supply was stopped. In this way, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction caused by the end of the continuous notice performance due to the power supply being stopped, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Content 10 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the acquired judgment information, and to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a performance pattern displayed on a display means according to the result of the judgment. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a specific performance that gradually suggests the expectation of the execution of a special game over a plurality of variable performances (for example, see JP 2017-143904 A). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that the interest in the game may decrease when the power supply that was stopped during the specific performance is resumed and the control state of the game is restored.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired when an acquisition condition is met (a game ball enters a starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on the judgment information, a pre-judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging the judgment information before the judgment by the judgment means, an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the game control state after the start of power supply or for restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a pre-judgment means (main control board 110) capable of determining the judgment information before the judgment by the judgment means, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of performing a variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of the presentation pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the judgment result of the judgment means. The presentation control means is capable of performing a specific presentation (e.g., an icon change presentation) that gradually indicates the expectation of the special game being executed over a number of the variable presentations. If the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the specific presentation is resumed and the game control state is restored, the specific presentation can be executed in the variable presentation executed next to the variable presentation where the power supply was stopped, but is not executed from the continuation of the stage that was indicated before the power supply was stopped. In this way, an icon change presentation that conforms to the content of the current variable presentation can be executed, making the game more interesting.

(Content 11 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the acquired judgment information, and to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a performance pattern displayed on a display means according to the result of the judgment. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a specific performance in which the display mode of the identification information displayed corresponding to each of the judgment information for which the execution of the variable performance has not been completed is gradually changed (for example, see JP 2018-061728 A). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, when the power supply that was stopped during the variable performance is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, there is a risk that the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is resumed will be high.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing judgment information (special pattern judgment information) acquired when an acquisition condition is satisfied (entry of a game ball into a starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on the judgment information, a pre-judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging the judgment information before the judgment by the judgment means, an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 13) capable of performing a variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a presentation pattern displayed on a display means (image display device) according to the judgment result of the judgment means. 0), the presentation control means is capable of displaying identification information (the icon, the reserved icon) corresponding to each of the judgment information in which the execution of the variable presentation has not been completed and the judgment information in which the variable presentation has not been started, and is capable of executing a specific presentation (e.g., an icon change presentation) that suggests the expectation of the special game being executed by gradually changing the display mode of the identification information, and the display mode includes a first stage mode (e.g., a CD icon), a second stage mode (e.g., a blue character icon), and a third stage mode (a red character icon), and when the power supply that has been stopped during the display of the identification information that changes to the third stage mode is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the identification information that was displayed in the second stage mode is displayed in the first stage mode. By doing so, it is not necessary to be aware of the display mode of the reserved icon when the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is resumed.

(Content 12 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the acquired judgment information, and to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a performance pattern displayed on a display means according to the result of the judgment. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays the number of reserved memories, which is judgment information for which judgment has not been executed, in a display area (for example, see JP 2018-061728 A). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, it takes time to grasp the number of reserved memories, which may reduce the interest of the game.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing judgment information (special pattern judgment information) acquired when an acquisition condition is satisfied (entry of a gaming ball into a starting hole) as reserved memory, a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on the judgment information, an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or for restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a presentation control means ( The display device includes a performance control board 130, and when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display (such as displaying an initial screen) can be performed before the performance pattern is displayed on the display means, and a reservation display showing the number of reserved memories can be performed in each of the first display area (sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84) and the second display area (first reservation icon display area 70B, second reservation icon display area 70D) different from the first display area, and when the power supply that was stopped while there was a reserved memory is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the reservation display is not performed in the second display area during the execution of the specific display, but the reservation display can be performed in the first display area. By doing so, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the number of reserved memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, making it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(Content 13 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the acquired determination information, and to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a performance pattern displayed on a display means according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a performance that suggests the expectation of the special game being executed (for example, see JP 2017-143904 A). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that the interest in the game may decrease when the power supply that was stopped during the performance that suggests the expectation of the special game being executed is resumed and the control state of the game is restored.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, there is provided a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired when an acquisition condition is met (a gaming ball entering a starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on the judgment information, a pre-judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging the judgment information prior to the judgment means, and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the game control state after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped. The game machine includes a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of the performance pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the judgment result of the judgment means, and a light-emitting means (winning port lamp NR) that can be changed to one of a plurality of notification modes, and the performance control means is capable of performing a change performance (lamp change performance) that indicates the expectation of the special game being executed by changing the light-emitting means to a specific notification mode, and when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the change performance is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the light-emitting means is set to a notification mode (white light or off) different from the specific notification mode. In this way, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is resumed, while avoiding a situation in which the player is confused by the lamp change performance being resumed even though the variable performance is not being executed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Content 14 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Conventional gaming machines generally include a main control means capable of controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means capable of controlling presentations in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there are gaming machines that include movable presentation means that can be operated in a predetermined manner (see, for example, JP 2016-187648 A). However, such gaming machines do not take into consideration the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the presentation control means are misaligned.

◇As a first configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, is equipped with movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) that can operate (move, emit light) in a predetermined manner, and the performance control means is capable of executing the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable performance means and the performance operation (performance operation, performance light emission) of the movable performance means, and is capable of executing the initial operation when a predetermined signal (power-on command, power-restore command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (waiting for customers state, variable performance, big win performance) in which the performance according to the signal can be executed. In this way, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, is equipped with movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) that can be operated (operated, illuminated) in a predetermined manner, and the performance control means is capable of executing the initial operation (initial operation, initial illumination) of the movable performance means and the performance operation (performance operation, performance illumination) of the movable performance means, and is capable of executing a customer waiting performance in a waiting state (waiting for customers state) in which a game is not progressing, and is capable of executing the initial operation when a predetermined signal (power-on command, power restoration command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the execution of the customer waiting performance. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means is equipped with movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) that can be operated (moved, illuminated) in a predetermined manner, and the performance control means is capable of executing the initial operation (initial operation, initial illumination) of the movable performance means and the performance operation (performance operation, performance illumination) of the movable performance means, and is capable of executing a variable performance to notify the player whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and is capable of executing the initial operation when a predetermined signal (power-on command, power-restore command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the execution of the variable performance. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling the presentation in accordance with a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the gaming machine is equipped with movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, presentation button 17) that can operate (move, emit light) in a predetermined manner, and the presentation control means is capable of executing the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable presentation means and the presentation operation (presentation operation, presentation light emission) of the movable presentation means, and is capable of executing special game presentations (jackpot presentation, opening presentation, round presentation, ending presentation) during the execution of a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and is capable of executing the initial operation when a predetermined signal (power-on command, power-restoration command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the execution of the special game presentation. By doing this, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentations in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means, is equipped with movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate in a predetermined manner and emit light in a predetermined light-emitting manner, and initial processing means (main control board 110) that can initialize the control state of a game after the start of power supply or restore it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and the presentation control means performs the initial operation and initial light emission of the movable presentation means. It is possible to perform the initial operation of the movable performance means, and to execute the performance operation and the performance light emission of the movable performance means. When the game control state is initialized and when the game control state is restored, the operation mode of the initial operation of the movable performance means (the number of steps, the operation mode of each step, etc.) is the same, but the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the movable performance means (light emission color, light emission pattern, etc.) is different, and when a predetermined signal (power-on command, power-restore command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state in which a performance corresponding to the signal can be executed (waiting for customers, variable performance, big win performance), the initial operation of the movable performance means can be executed. In this way, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentation in response to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, comprising: presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, presentation button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) capable of operating (moving, emitting light, outputting sound, displaying images) in a predetermined manner; a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a game ball into a starting hole); and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and the presentation control means controls the initial operation of the presentation means (initial operation, initial light emission, alarm sound output, initial screen display), It is possible to execute the performance operation (performance operation, performance light emission, performance sound output, performance image display) of the movable performance means, and depending on the judgment result of the judgment means, it is possible to execute a variable performance involving a variable display of the performance pattern displayed on the display means (image display device), and in the variable performance, the variable display can be displayed in a swaying manner (temporary stop display) and then in a still state (stop display), and when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the variable performance in which the performance pattern is swayed is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the performance control means can display the performance pattern in a still state on the display means without swaying at a specified timing (when a special pattern confirmation command is received, when a customer waiting command is received), and when a specified signal (power on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which it is possible to execute a performance according to the signal, it is possible to execute the initial operation. By doing this, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly coordinate the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentations in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means, the presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, presentation button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) that can operate (operate, emit light, output sound, display images) in a predetermined manner, and a control circuit that holds judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired when an acquisition condition is met (a game ball entering the starting hole), The device is equipped with a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information as a memory, a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on the determination information, and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or for restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and the presentation control means is capable of executing the initial operation of the presentation means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the presentation operation of the presentation means (presentation operation, presentation light emission, presentation sound output, presentation image display). and according to a judgment result of the judgment means, it is possible to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a performance pattern displayed on a display means (image display device), and the state of the gaming machine includes a customer waiting state in which the variable performance is not executed, a first state which is a period during which the variable performance is executed in a state in which the reserved memory is not present, and a second state which is a period during which the variable performance is executed in a state in which the reserved memory is present, and when a control state of a game is restored, the performance control means is capable of performing a specific display (display of an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the performance pattern on the display means, and in the customer waiting state The display mode of the specific display (only display of the initial screen) when the power supply stopped during the first state or the second state is resumed and the state is restored to the waiting state is different from the display mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen + the recovery screen) when the power supply stopped during the first state or the second state is resumed and the state is restored to the first state or the second state, and when a predetermined signal (power-on command, power-restore command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state in which a performance corresponding to the signal can be executed (waiting-for-customers state, variable performance, big win performance), the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As an eighth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance in response to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) that can operate (operate, emit light, output sound, display images) in a predetermined manner, and a display control means (control board 130) that controls the performance when an acquisition condition is met (start The present invention is provided with a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing judgment information (special game judgment information) acquired by a game ball entering a moving opening as a reserved memory, a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is to be executed based on the judgment information, and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or for restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and the presentation control means controls the initial operation (initial It is possible to execute a variable performance involving a variable display of a performance pattern displayed on a display means (image display device) according to a judgment result of the judgment means, and when a predetermined period has elapsed after the performance pattern is statically displayed on the display means, it is possible to execute a customer waiting performance (customer waiting demo performance) on the display means, and it is possible to make the period until the customer waiting performance is executed different between a case where the performance pattern is statically displayed after the variable performance time has elapsed and a case where the performance pattern is statically displayed after the control state is initialized or after the control state is restored, and it is possible to execute the initial operation when a predetermined signal (power on command, power restoration command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state in which a performance corresponding to the signal can be executed (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance). By doing this, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly coordinate the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a ninth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentations in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means, the presenting means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, presentation button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) that can be operated (movement, light emission, sound output, image display) in a predetermined manner, and ...movement, light emission, sound output, image display) that can be operated (movement, light emission, image display) in response to the establishment of an acquisition condition (the entry of a player to a starting hole) The game device is provided with a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing judgment information (special game judgment information) acquired by a game ball entering the game as a reserved memory, a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on the judgment information, and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or for restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and the presentation control means controls the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission, report It is possible to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a performance pattern displayed on a display means (image display device) according to a judgment result of the judgment means, and it is possible to execute a predetermined look-ahead notice performance (continuous notice performance) over a plurality of the variable performances based on the judgment result of the advance judgment means, and if the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the look-ahead notice performance is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to execute a notice performance different from the look-ahead notice performance (for example, an alternative notice performance) in the variable performance executed next to the variable performance where the power supply was stopped, without resuming the look-ahead notice performance, and it is possible to execute the initial operation when a predetermined signal (power-on command, power-restoration command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (waiting for customers state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which a performance according to the signal can be executed. By doing this, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a tenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentations in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means, the presenter includes presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, presentation button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) that can be operated (movement, light emission, sound output, image display) in a predetermined manner, and a display means (a display means) that displays a display when an acquisition condition is met (starting port The game machine is equipped with a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired by a game ball entering a special game area (a game area where a game ball has entered a special game area) as a reserved memory, a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not a special game (a big win game) advantageous to a player is to be executed based on the judgment information, and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or for restoring the state to the state before the power supply was stopped, and the presentation control means controls the initial operation (initial operation, initial It is possible to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a performance pattern displayed on a display means (image display device) according to a judgment result of the judgment means, and it is possible to execute a specific performance (for example, an icon change performance) which indicates the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed step by step over a plurality of the variable performances, and if the power supply which was stopped during the execution of the specific performance is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the specific performance can be executed in the variable performance executed next to the variable performance in which the power supply was stopped, but the performance is not executed from the continuation of the stage which was suggested before the power supply was stopped, and it is possible to execute the initial operation when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state in which a performance corresponding to the signal can be executed (a customer waiting state, a variable performance, a big win performance) By doing this, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly coordinate the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentation in response to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, further comprising: a light-emitting means (winning port lamp NR) that can be changed to any of a plurality of notification modes; presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, presentation button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) that can operate (operate, emit light, output sound, display image) in a predetermined mode; a storage means (main control board 110) that can store judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a game ball into the starting port) as reserved memory; a judgment means (main control board 110) that can judge whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the judgment information; and a control state of the game is initialized after the start of power supply, or and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state before the power supply was stopped, wherein the presentation control means is capable of executing initial operations of the presentation means (initial action, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and presentation operations of the presentation means (presentation action, presentation light emission, presentation sound output, presentation image display), and is capable of executing a change presentation (lamp change presentation) indicating the expectation that the special game will be executed by changing the light-emitting means to a specific notification mode, and when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the change presentation is resumed and the game control state is restored, the light-emitting means is controlled to a notification mode (white light on or off) different from the specific notification mode, and when a predetermined signal (power on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (waiting for customers state, variable presentation, jackpot presentation) in which a presentation corresponding to the signal can be executed, the initial operation can be executed. By doing this, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, is equipped with a sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game performance sounds (BGM, SE, etc.), and the performance control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the audio output means, and is capable of outputting the predetermined notification sound when a predetermined signal (power-on command, power recovery command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (waiting for customers state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which a performance according to the signal can be executed. In this way, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, is equipped with a sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game performance sounds (BGM, SE, etc.), and the performance control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the audio output means, and is capable of executing a customer waiting performance in a waiting state (customer waiting state) in which a game is not progressing, and is capable of outputting the predetermined notification sound when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the execution of the customer waiting performance. In this way, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a 14th configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, is equipped with a sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game performance sounds (BGM, SE, etc.), and the performance control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the audio output means, and is capable of executing a variable performance to notify the player whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and is capable of outputting the predetermined notification sound when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the execution of the variable performance. In this way, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a 15th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentation in response to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the gaming machine is equipped with a sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game presentation sounds (BGM, SE, etc.), and the presentation control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, and is capable of executing special game presentations (jackpot presentation, opening presentation, round presentation, ending presentation) during the execution of a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and is capable of outputting the predetermined notification sound when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the execution of the special game presentation. By doing this, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

(Content 15 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Conventional gaming machines generally include a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and a presentation control means for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a display means capable of displaying presentation images (see, for example, JP 2016-187648 A). However, such gaming machines do not take into consideration the case where the power supply to the main control means is stopped while the power supply to the presentation control means is continuing.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentations in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means is equipped with a display means (image display device 70, 71) capable of displaying presentation images (variable presentations, big win presentations, etc.), and the presentation control means is capable of displaying a game standby screen (a still display screen of presentation patterns) on the display means in a standby state (waiting for customers) in which the game is not progressing, and if the power supply to the main control means is stopped while the game standby screen is being displayed, it is possible to continue displaying the game standby screen. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, and to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 16)
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to have a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means. Some of these gaming machines execute an abnormality notification based on an input signal from a predetermined detection means (see, for example, JP 2017-113441 A). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a possibility that an abnormality notification is not performed appropriately.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine capable of playing games is provided with detection means (starting hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.), and control means (main control board 110 and/or performance control board 130) for performing predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means, and if the control means and the detection means are in a disconnected state (connector loose, disconnection, etc.) when power supply to the gaming machine is started, it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality alert (disconnection alert, magnetic abnormality alert, radio wave abnormality alert, etc.). By doing so, it is possible to appropriately alert the abnormality.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine capable of playing a game is provided with a detection means (starting hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.), and a control means (main control board 110 and/or performance control board 130) for performing a predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means, and when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, if the control means and the detection means are in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed, and if the control means and the detection means become connected during the execution of the predetermined abnormality notification, the execution of the predetermined abnormality notification is continued for a predetermined period (30 seconds have passed, until the power is turned off, etc.). In this way, it is possible to properly perform an abnormality notification.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine capable of playing games is provided with detection means (starting hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) that detects a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.), and control means (main control board 110 and/or performance control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means, and if the control means and the detection means become disconnected (connector coming loose, wire breakage, etc.) while power is being supplied to the gaming machine, it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality alert (wire breakage alert, magnetic abnormality alert, radio wave abnormality alert, etc.). By doing so, it is possible to appropriately issue an abnormality alert.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine capable of playing games is provided with a detection means (starting hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) that detects a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.), and a control means (main control board 110 and/or performance control board 130) that performs a predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means, and if the control means and the detection means become disconnected (connector coming loose, disconnection, etc.) while power is being supplied to the gaming machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed, and if the control means and the detection means become connected while the predetermined abnormality notification is being executed, the execution of the predetermined abnormality notification is continued for a predetermined period (after 30 seconds, until the power is turned off, etc.). In this way, it is possible to properly execute an abnormality notification.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is not limited to being a pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used in reel-type gaming machines (so-called slot machines). Furthermore, it can also be used in jan-ball gaming machines and arrange-ball gaming machines.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment transitions to a high probability gaming state for a predetermined number of times after all jackpot games have ended, but the gaming machine may also transition to a high probability gaming state for a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game has ended if the gaming ball passes through a specific area during a specific round of jackpot games.

Also, the gaming machine may transition to a high probability gaming state after all jackpot games have ended, and if a player wins a drop lottery that is executed at the start of the variable display of special symbols in the high probability gaming state, the gaming machine may end the high probability gaming state and return to the normal gaming state.

In addition, if the type of the special jackpot pattern is a normal pattern, the game machine may transition to a low probability game state after the end of the jackpot game, and if the type of the special jackpot pattern is a specific pattern, the game machine may transition to a high probability game state that continues until the next jackpot game after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol are not executed simultaneously (in parallel), and the display of the second special symbol is executed with priority, but the gaming machine may be configured so that the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel).

Furthermore, the embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include the meaning equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

(If the production control unit cannot receive commands properly)
Next, a case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described. When the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally, for example, a communication abnormality such as failure to receive a command due to a disconnection, partial disconnection, or connector loss of the command line connecting the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130, or an abnormal reception of a command due to a command garbled by noise or partial disconnection, etc., is considered. In the following description, a predetermined state in which the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally is represented by "x" in the figure. Then, during a predetermined period from when a predetermined state in which a command cannot be received normally occurs for the first time until a command can be received normally, one or more commands of the same type and/or different types may not be received normally. In addition, commands are represented as "cd" in the figure.

The performance pattern 70a displayed on the first image display device 70 in the normal game state is composed of a decorative portion consisting of a rectangular base image, a character image CG consisting of a specified character, a bar-shaped image SG that is part of the character, and a pattern effect image ZE that decorates the background of the character, and an identification portion consisting of a hexagonal base image and a number portion (identification character). The performance pattern 70a displayed on the first image display device 70 in the specific game state is composed only of an identification portion consisting of a number portion (identification character).

In addition, in the normal game state, the background images corresponding to each of the presentation modes A to C are scrolled left and right (reciprocating motion). In addition, in the specific game state, the background images corresponding to each of the presentation modes D to E are scrolled left and right (reciprocating motion).

If a connector of a specific detection sensor (start port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) becomes unplugged, an abnormality (error notification) is immediately issued. In contrast, if a command abnormality occurs due to a connector being unplugged on the command line that communicates between the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130, no abnormality notification is issued.

The following specific example describes a case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally in normal game mode, but even if the game mode is a specific game mode (time-saving game mode, special bonus game mode), the basic flow is the same as in normal game mode.

Specifically, the first reserved number, the first special symbol memory designation command, the first special symbol, the first special symbol display 60, the first special symbol reserved indicator 63, the sub-first variable indicator 81, the sub-first reserved indicator 83, the first reserved number display area 70E, the first reserved icon display area 70B, the first lamp symbol, and the first start port 45 can be read as the second reserved number, the second special symbol memory designation command, the second special symbol, the second special symbol display 61, the second special symbol reserved indicator 64, the sub-second variable indicator 82, the sub-second reserved indicator 84, the second reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp symbol, and the second start port 47.

(Example 1 of when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 1 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described with reference to Fig. 106 and Fig. 107. Fig. 106 is a timing chart showing the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally, and Fig. 107(a) to (j) are performance examples corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart of Fig. 106.

First, at the timing of P0, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first special symbol variable display begins on the first special symbol display 60. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, while the BGM is output during the change, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number (number information) displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". Furthermore, the two reserved icons H1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the change display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the special pattern (referred to as the first lamp pattern when particularly distinguished) on the sub-first change indicator 81 begins, but the performance pattern 70a begins scrolling after a preparatory operation.

The first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays the first reserved number U1 (reserved memory) stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m by turning on, off, or blinking the LED. The change in the first lamp symbol is displayed by blinking the LED of the sub-first change indicator 81. The sub-first reserved indicator 83 displays the first reserved number U1 (reserved memory) stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m by turning on, off, or blinking the LED.

Next, at the timing of P1, a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, and the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 changes from "1" to "2". When the performance control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting hole winning designation command (pre-reading designation command)) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold display 83 changes from "1" to "2". Furthermore, one hold icon T12 is additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B2 as a 10-frame animation (displayed so that it gradually gets larger from a very small size) (see FIG. 107(a)).

After that, at timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("285"). At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance action). Also, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performance action) (see Figure 107 (b)).

Then, at the timing of P3, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing is performed to end the changing performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing state ("248") (see FIG. 107(c)), and the first lamp pattern in the sub-first variable display 81 stops in a losing state (for example, off).

Next, at timing P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the variable display of the first special symbol begins on the first special symbol display 60. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". Furthermore, the two reserved icons H1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable indicator 81 starts changing. Also, the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as part of the decorative part moving and the whole or part expanding and contracting as in this embodiment (see FIG. 107(d)).

After that, at timing P5, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the shift display of the reserved icon T1 is completed, the background image continues to scroll and the performance pattern 70a scrolls at high speed. At this time, the display of the performance pattern 70a has started to change, so the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performing) (see FIG. 107(e)).

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("164"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swaying (swaying display) to move up and down the predetermined stopping position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swaying motion (performance action). Also, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation motion (performance action) of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 107(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon H1 and the icon TH continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 are extended, and the output of the BGM during the change is maintained accordingly (see FIG. 107(f)). In addition to the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly swaying (swinging display) up and down the predetermined stopping position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a are performing a swaying motion (performance action).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the variable display of the first special symbol begins on the first special symbol display unit 60. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display unit 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes from "1" to "0". Furthermore, one hold icon H1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation and displayed as the icon TH. Also, all of the performance patterns 70a, including the performance patterns 70a that are shifted from the stop position, are displayed at the stop position (instantly derived display) (see FIG. 107(g)).

Then, while the changing display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first hold display 83 continues, the changing display of the performance pattern 70a begins, and the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after preparatory operations such as part of the decorative part moving and the whole or part expanding and contracting as in this embodiment (see Figure 107 (g)).

Then, at the timing of P9, the background image continues to scroll, and the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed. At this time, the display of the effect pattern 70a has started to change, so the icon is rotating (performs) (see FIG. 107(h)).

Next, at timing P10, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("365"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swaying (swaying display) up and down from the predetermined stopping position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swaying motion (performance action). Also, the icon TH continues to rotate (performance action) (see Figure 107 (i)).

After that, at the timing of P11, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 are extended, and the output of the BGM during the change is maintained accordingly (see FIG. 107(i)). In addition to the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly swaying (swinging display) up and down the predetermined stopping position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a are performing a swaying motion (performance action).

At this time, even if the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m is "0" and the stop time of the special pattern has elapsed (even if a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the change in P8), the temporarily stopped display of the performance pattern 70a continues (see FIG. 107(j)). Furthermore, the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern may be made to continue to change. In addition to the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly swaying (swinging display) to move up and down the predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swaying motion (performance action). In this way, even if a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the change in P8, the customer waiting demo performance (predetermined performance) is not being performed in the first image display device 70.

When the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m is "0", the predetermined performance executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the change in the performance pattern 70a (special pattern) is not limited to a customer waiting demo performance, but may be an adjustment guide performance such as adjusting the volume or brightness of the image display device, a guide performance regarding game operation, or other performance. In this case, a performance other than the customer waiting demo performance may be executed before the customer waiting demo performance is executed. In this way, the predetermined performance includes a performance that is executed until the next change performance of the performance pattern 70a that is temporarily or permanently stopped starts. Note that the predetermined performance is not limited to being executed by a customer waiting command (customer waiting state designation command), but may also be executed by other commands, a timer time, etc.

In this way, according to the specific example 1 shown in Figures 106 to 107, if a certain state occurs in which a command is not received normally in the performance control unit 130m while the performance pattern 70a is being changed, the performance pattern 70a whose change performance has ended can be displayed in a swaying state, and the swaying state of the performance pattern 70a is continued even after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change performance, so that the customer waiting demo performance is not executed. This makes it easy to tell that there has been an abnormality, avoids damaging the player's interests, and makes it possible to prevent a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

After that, since the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m is "0", it transitions to a customer waiting state (a waiting state for playing). At this time, when the performance control unit 130m receives a customer waiting command (a customer waiting state designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m, the performance control unit 130m performs processing to end the variable performance.

In this case, all of the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be displayed in a previous variable performance) including the performance symbol 70a that is out of position are displayed (actually stopped) at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined missing state ("248"), and the first lamp symbol is actually stopped in a missing state (for example, turned off).

In addition, if at the timing of P7 the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 are unable to successfully receive the performance command sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, the same processing will be carried out as in the case where the performance control unit 130m is unable to successfully receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m.

(Example 2 of when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 2 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described with reference to Fig. 108 and Fig. 109. Fig. 108 is a timing chart showing the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally, and Fig. 109(a) to (i) are performance examples corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of Fig. 108.

First, at the timing of P0, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the display of the first special symbol begins to change. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol change pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing is performed to start the change performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Furthermore, the four reserved icons T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable indicator 81 starts, but the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after a preparatory operation such as a part of the decorative part moving or the whole or part expanding and contracting as in this embodiment.

Next, at the timing of P1, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4" due to the game ball winning in the first starting hole 45. At this time, when the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "4", the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting hole winning designation command (pre-reading designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "4". In addition, in the specific example 2, a pre-reading performance (advance notification) that the expectation of a jackpot is high in advance is executed based on the first reserved memory due to the winning at the timing of P1. In the following explanation, the reserved memory that is the basis of the pre-reading performance may be called the target reserved memory.

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold display 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one hold icon T1 is additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B as a 10-frame animation (displayed so that it gradually becomes larger from a very small size) (see FIG. 109(a)).

After that, at timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("285"). At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance action). Also, the reserved icon T and the icon TH are rotating (performance action) (see FIG. 109(b)).

Then, at the timing of P3, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing is performed to end the changing performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing pattern ("248") (see FIG. 109(c)), and the first lamp pattern stops in a losing pattern (e.g., off).

Next, at the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the variable first special symbol. Also, when the first reserved number U1 shown by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3", the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m, and the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Also, the four reserved icons T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern starts to change, and after a preparatory operation, scrolling starts (see FIG. 109(d)).

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the reserved icon T1 is completed, the look-ahead zone performance (normal zone performance) begins. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the word "ZONE" scrolls left and right is displayed, and zone BGM is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the performance pattern 70a has begun, so that the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are performing a rotating motion (performance motion) (see FIG. 109(e)).

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("164"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swaying (swaying display) to move up and down the predetermined stopping position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swaying motion (performance action). Also, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation motion (performance action) of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 109 (f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern are extended, and the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern continue. The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly wobbles (wobbles) up and down the predetermined stop position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a wobbly motion (performance motion). In addition, the zone performance (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained, and the look-ahead zone performance continues (see FIG. 109 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m will remain at "3", and processing to start the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 109(g) will be maintained, except that the display of the first reserved number U1 on the first special symbol reserved display 63 will change to "2".

Then, at the timing of P9, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 109(g) is maintained, except that the first reserved number U1 on the first special symbol reserved display 63 displays "2".

Next, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes directly from "3" to "1" without passing through "3" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first reserved indicator 83 changes directly from "3" to "1" without passing through "2". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icons T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are erased in one frame of non-animation, and all performance patterns 70a including the performance patterns 70a that are out of alignment with the stopping position (performance patterns 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in past variable performances) are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stopping position (see FIG. 109 (h)). In this way, when the difference between the first reserved number U1 recognized by the main control unit 110m and the first reserved number U1 recognized by the performance control unit 130m is "2", the reserved icon T13 is erased from the first reserved icon display area 70B3 without shifting from the first reserved icon display area 70B3 to 70B2. At this time, the look-ahead zone performance and the scrolling of the background image continue.

The two necessary pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are then shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one being displayed as the icon TH. Then, the display of the effect pattern 70a begins to change while the pre-reading zone effect, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern continue to change, and the effect pattern 70a starts to scroll after a preparatory operation (see FIG. 109 (h)).

When deleting surplus reserved icons T1 and shifting in the required reserved icons T1, the surplus reserved icons T1 may be left as they are and the required reserved icons T1 may be shifted in.

After that, at the timing of P11, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the shift display of the pending icon T1 has been completed, the performance pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the look-ahead zone performance and the scrolling of the background image continue. At this time, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a has begun, so the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating (performance operation) (see FIG. 109 (i)). Here, in specific example 2, the performance control unit 130m successfully receives a command before the target pending memory is consumed, and at this time, it is possible to continue executing the look-ahead performance based on the target pending memory.

After that, if the performance control unit 130m is able to normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the normal zone performance (display of the pre-reading zone background, display of a blue zone image, output of zone BGM) will be executed according to the preview scenario even in the variable performance (subject to the pre-reading performance) executed during the variable display of the special pattern where the first reserved number U1 becomes "0" (see Figure 109 (i)), and the pre-reading zone performance will end when the performance pattern 70a stops.

As in the modified example shown in FIG. 109-1, if the performance control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the normal zone performance (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) may not be continued in accordance with the preview scenario based on the variable performance (subject of the look-ahead performance) executed during the variable display of the special pattern where the first reserved number U1 becomes "0", and the look-ahead zone performance may be ended. If the look-ahead zone performance is not continued, the look-ahead zone performance is erased at the timing of P10, and changed to a performance mode with a lower expectation of a jackpot than the look-ahead performance, such as the mode A background.

(Example 3 of when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 3 of a case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described with reference to Fig. 108 and Fig. 110. Fig. 108 is a timing chart showing a case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally, and Fig. 110(a) to (i) are performance examples corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of Fig. 108.

Note that specific example 3 in FIG. 110 differs from specific example 2 in FIG. 109 in that it executes a look-ahead effect effect instead of a look-ahead zone effect as a look-ahead preview effect, and also executes an icon change effect. Therefore, a description of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the differences will be described.

At the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 shown by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Also, the four reserved icons T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the display of the change in the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern begins, and the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after preparatory operations such as part of the decorative part moving and the whole or part expanding and contracting as in this embodiment (see FIG. 110(d)).

The display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern starts to change, and a pre-reading effect is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed at the bottom behind the effect pattern 70a (see FIG. 110(d)), and an effect sound is output.

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the reserved icon T1 is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect performance is temporarily stopped, and the icon change performance is started. Specifically, the third reserved icon T13 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B3 changes to a blue character icon and a change sound is output. At this time, the background image continues to scroll and the display of the performance pattern 70a has started to change, so that the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are performing a rotating motion (performance motion) (see FIG. 110(e)).

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("164"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swaying (swaying display) to move up and down the predetermined stopping position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swaying motion (performance action). Also, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation motion (performance action) of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 110(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern are extended, and the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern continue. The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly wobbles (wobbles) up and down the predetermined stop position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a wobbly motion (performance motion). Also, the reserved icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained, and the icon change performance continues (see FIG. 110 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the variable first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start commands (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m will remain at "3", and processing to start the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the look-ahead effect presentation (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effects) continues, and the state of FIG. 110(g) is maintained, except that the first reserved number U1 displayed on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 is "2."

Then, at the timing of P9, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the change performance will not be performed. At this time, the look-ahead effect performance (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) is not executed, and the state of FIG. 110(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reserved number U1 on the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2".

Note that at the timings of P8 and P9, the look-ahead effect performance (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effects) may be continued.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes directly from "3" to "1" without passing through "3" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first reserved indicator 83 changes directly from "3" to "1" without passing through "2". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icons T13 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B3 are erased in one frame of non-animation, and all performance patterns 70a including the performance patterns 70a that are out of alignment with the stopping position (performance patterns 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stopping position (see FIG. 110(h)). In this way, when the difference between the first hold number U1 recognized by the main control unit 110m and the first hold number U1 recognized by the performance control unit 130m is "2", the hold icon T13 is erased from the first hold icon display area 70B3 without shifting from the first hold icon display area 70B3 to 70B2.

Then, the two reserved icons T1 required and displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, while the variable display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern continues, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a starts, and a look-ahead effect performance is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed at the bottom behind the performance pattern 70a in accordance with the preview scenario, and an effect sound effect is output. Then, the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation (see FIG. 110(h)). In this way, the reserved icon T1 that has become a blue character icon is maintained, and the icon change performance continues, and the look-ahead effect performance (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) and the scrolling of the background image continue to be executed.

After that, at the timing of P11, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the shift display of the reserved icon T1 is completed, the effect image EF is erased and the look-ahead effect performance is temporarily stopped, and the icon change performance is executed, causing the performance pattern 70a to scroll at high speed. Specifically, the first reserved icon T11 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B1 changes to a red character icon in accordance with the change scenario, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the performance pattern 70a has started, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating (performance) (see FIG. 110(i)).

After that, if the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the look-ahead effect performance (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) and icon change performance (icon change performance) are executed even in the change performance (subject to the expectation level suggestion by the look-ahead preview performance) executed during the changing display of the special pattern where the first reserved number U1 becomes "0". Then, the look-ahead effect performance ends when the performance pattern 70a scrolls at high speed, and the icon is erased and the icon change performance ends when the performance pattern 70a is displayed stationary. Here, in specific example 3, the performance control unit 130m normally receives a command before the target reserved memory is consumed, and at this time, it is possible to continue executing the look-ahead performance based on the target reserved memory.

As shown in the modified example in FIG. 110-1, if the performance control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the icon change performance and the look-ahead effect performance (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) may not be continued according to the preview scenario based on the change performance (subject to the expectation level suggested by the look-ahead performance) executed during the variable display of the special pattern in which the first reserved number U1 becomes "0", and the look-ahead performance may be ended. If the look-ahead performance is not continued, the look-ahead effect performance is erased at the timing of P10 and changed to a performance mode with a lower expectation level for a jackpot than the look-ahead effect performance, such as only the mode A background. In addition, the reserved icon T1 that was changed to a character by the icon change performance is changed to the normal mode (CD), which is a performance mode with a lower expectation level for a jackpot.

(Example 4 of when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 4 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described with reference to Fig. 108 and Fig. 111. Fig. 108 is a timing chart showing the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally, and Fig. 111(a) to (i) are performance examples corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of Fig. 108.

Specific example 4 in FIG. 111 differs from specific example 3 in FIG. 110 in that an icon change effect as a look-ahead preview effect is executed by the first image display device 70, and an effect (movement effect and light emission effect) is executed by the first movable member 73 as a look-ahead preview effect, so a description of the common parts will be omitted here and only the differences will be described. Specific example 3 also allows for a look-ahead effect effect to be executed, but as this is similar to specific example 2, a description of this will be omitted.

Next, at the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Also, the four reserved icons T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the display of the change in the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern begins, and the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after preparatory operations such as part of the decorative part moving and the whole or part of it expanding and contracting as in this embodiment (see FIG. 111 (d)).

In addition, the display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern begins, and the performance by the first movable member 73 is executed as a look-ahead notice performance. Specifically, in a state where the expectation of a big win is high (for example, a large movement or a state similar to a big win), the first movable member 73 installed on the upper side of the first image display device 70 operates and the first movable member 73 emits light (see FIG. 111 (d)). Note that the look-ahead notice performance by the first movable member 73 can be executed during a part of each of the multiple variable performances of the performance pattern 70a during the period before the reach performance of the performance pattern 70a. A partial period of the variable performance refers to a period from the start of the variable performance to the stop (temporary or permanent stop) of the variable performance, during which the predictive performance can be executed at various times, such as executing a predictive performance in which the first movable member 73 moves a predetermined number of times at the start of the variable performance, executing a predictive performance in which the first movable member 73 moves a predetermined number of times during the variable performance, or executing a predictive performance in which the first movable member 73 moves a predetermined number of times at the end of the variable performance. In this specific example, the predictive performance executed during a partial period of the variable performance period is scheduled to be executed in two or more variable performances.

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the reserved icon T1 is completed, the icon change performance starts. Specifically, the third reserved icon T13 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B3 changes to a blue character icon and a change sound is output. At this time, the background image continues to scroll and the display of the performance pattern 70a has started to change, so the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performance operation) (see FIG. 111 (e)). In addition, the first movable member 73 continues to perform the pre-reading preview performance.

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("164"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swaying (swaying display) to move up and down the predetermined stopping position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swaying motion (performance action). Also, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation motion (performance action) of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 111 (f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern are extended, and the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern continue. The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly wobbles (wobbles) up and down the predetermined stop position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a wobbly motion (performance motion). Also, the reserved icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained, and the icon change performance continues (see FIG. 111 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and processing to start the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the first movable member 73 does not execute the pre-reading notice performance, and the state of FIG. 111(g) is maintained, except that the first reserved number U1 displayed on the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2".

Then, at the timing of P9, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 111(g) is maintained, except that the first reserved number U1 on the first special symbol reserved display 63 displays "2".

In addition, at the timings of P8 and P9, the pre-reading preview performance (the performance of the movement of the first movable member 73 and the light emission performance) may be continuously executed by the movement of the first movable member 73.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes directly from "3" to "1" without passing through "3" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first reserved indicator 83 changes directly from "3" to "1" without passing through "2". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icons T3 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B3 are erased in one frame of non-animation, and all performance patterns 70a including the performance patterns 70a that are out of alignment with the stopping position (performance patterns 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in past variable performances) are displayed at the stopping position (instantaneous derived display).
In this way, when the difference between the first reserved number U1 recognized by the main control unit 110m and the first reserved number U1 recognized by the performance control unit 130m is "2", the reserved icon T13 is erased from the first reserved icon display area 70B3 without shifting the display from the first reserved icon display area 70B3 to 70B2.

The two reserved icons T1 required and displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. The display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern continues, and the display of the performance pattern 70a starts to change, and the first movable member 73 executes a look-ahead preview performance. Specifically, the first movable member 73 performs an action performance and a light emission performance according to the preview scenario, and sound effects are output. The performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory action (see FIG. 111 (h)). In this way, the reserved icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained, and the icon change performance continues, and the look-ahead preview performance and background image scrolling by the operation of the first movable member 73 continue to be executed.

After that, at the timing of P11, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the shift display of the reserved icon T1 is completed, the pre-reading preview performance by the first movable member 73 is temporarily stopped, and the icon change performance is executed, causing the performance pattern 70a to scroll at high speed. Specifically, the first reserved icon displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B1 changes to a red character icon in accordance with the change scenario, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the performance pattern 70a has started, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating (performance) (see FIG. 111 (i)).

After that, if the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the first movable member 73 will execute the look-ahead preview performance and the icon change performance (the icon change performance) even in the variable performance (the subject of the expectation level suggestion by the look-ahead preview performance) executed during the variable display of the special pattern where the first reserved number U1 becomes "0". Then, the look-ahead preview performance ends when the performance pattern 70a scrolls at high speed, and the icon TH is erased when the performance pattern 70a is displayed stationary, and the icon change performance ends. Here, in specific example 4, the performance control unit 130m normally receives the command before the target reserved memory is consumed, and at this time, it is possible to continue executing the look-ahead performance based on the target reserved memory.

As shown in the modified example in FIG. 111-1, when the performance control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the icon change performance or the look-ahead preview performance (the action performance or the light emission performance of the first movable member 73) may not be continuously executed according to the preview scenario based on the change performance (the subject of the expectation level suggestion by the look-ahead performance) executed during the variable display of the special pattern in which the first reserved number U1 becomes "0", and the look-ahead performance may be ended. If the look-ahead performance is not continuously executed, the execution of the look-ahead preview performance is stopped at the timing of P10, and the performance mode is changed to a performance mode with a lower expectation of a jackpot than the look-ahead preview performance, such as only the mode A background. In addition, the reserved icon T1 that has been changed to a character by the icon change performance is changed to a normal mode (CD), which is a performance mode with a lower expectation of a jackpot. Furthermore, the look-ahead performance by the first movable member 73, etc. is not executed.

According to specific examples 2 to 4 shown in Figures 108 to 111, even if the performance control unit 130m is able to successfully receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m at the timings of P7 to P9, but the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 are unable to successfully receive the performance commands sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of these commands, the same processing will be carried out as in the case where the performance control unit 130m is unable to successfully receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m.

According to specific examples 2 to 4 shown in Figures 108 to 111, we have explained the case where the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1" at timing P10. However, if the first reserved number U1 changes from "4" to "2", or if the first reserved number U1 changes from "2" to "0", in other words, if the discrepancy between the reserved number known by the main control unit 110m and the reserved number known by the performance control unit 130m is "2", the basic flow will be the same as that explained above.

In specific examples 2 to 4 shown in Figures 108 to 111, a predetermined state occurs at the timing of P7 where the first command cannot be received normally, and the predetermined state continues for a predetermined period of time up until the timing of P10. In this way, in specific examples 2 to 4, the variable performance of the performance pattern 70a is not executed during the predetermined period. Also, during the predetermined period, the performance pattern 70a whose variable performance has ended can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, and the performance pattern 70a can be maintained in a temporarily stopped state.

In this way, according to specific examples 2 to 4 shown in Figures 108 to 111, when a specific number (e.g., three) of reserved icons (first reserved information) that is two more than the predetermined number (e.g., one) is displayed in the reserved icon display area, if the performance control unit 130m receives a start command for the variable display in which the reserved number becomes the predetermined number, the necessary reserved icons (e.g., the first and second reserved icons) are shifted and displayed without shifting the surplus reserved icons (e.g., the third reserved icon) out of the specific number of reserved icons. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the reserved number, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to specific examples 2 to 4 shown in Figures 108 to 111, when a specific number (e.g., three) of reserved icons (first reserved information) that is two more than a predetermined number (e.g., one) is displayed in the reserved icon display area, if the performance control unit 130m receives a start command for the variable display in which the reserved number becomes the predetermined number, the performance control unit 130m displays a number of reserved icons that is one less than the specific number before displaying the predetermined number of reserved icons. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. It also reduces the discomfort felt when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the reserved number, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to specific examples 2 to 4 shown in Figures 108 to 111, when the sub-first hold indicator 83 or the first hold number display area 70E is displaying a specific number (e.g., three) that is two more than the predetermined number (e.g., one), if the performance control unit 130m receives a start command for the display to change so that the hold number becomes the predetermined number, the predetermined number is displayed without displaying a hold number that is one less than the specific number. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, since the accurate hold number is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly inform the player of the hold number.

(Example 5 of when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 5 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described with reference to Fig. 112 and Fig. 113. Fig. 112 is a timing chart showing the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally, and Fig. 113(a) to (i) are performance examples corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of Fig. 112.

First, at the timing of P0, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the display of the first special symbol begins to change. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol change pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing is performed to start the change performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Furthermore, the four reserved icons T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable indicator 81 starts, but the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after a preparatory operation such as a part of the decorative part moving or the whole or part expanding and contracting as in this embodiment.

Next, at the timing of P1, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4" due to the winning of the game ball in the first starting hole 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 changes from "3" to "4". When the performance control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting hole winning designation command (pre-reading designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "4". In the specific example 5, a pre-reading performance (advance notification) is executed in advance to indicate a high expectation of a jackpot based on the reserved memory due to the winning at the timing of P1. In the following explanation, the reserved memory that is the basis of the pre-reading performance may be referred to as the target reserved memory.

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one hold icon T14 is additionally displayed (gradually increasing from a tiny size) in the first hold icon display area 70B4 as a 10-frame animation (see FIG. 113(a)).

After that, at timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("285"). At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance action). In addition, the reserved icons T1 to T4 and the icon TH are rotating (performance action) (see Figure 113 (b)).

Then, at the timing of P3, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing is performed to end the changing performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing pattern ("248") (see FIG. 113(c)), and the first lamp pattern stops in a losing pattern (e.g., off).

Next, at the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Also, the four reserved icons T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern starts to change, and the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after a preparatory operation (see FIG. 113(d)).

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the reserved icon T1 is completed, the look-ahead zone performance (normal zone performance) begins. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the word "ZONE" scrolls left and right is displayed, and zone BGM is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the performance pattern 70a has begun, so that the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are performing a rotating motion (performance motion) (see FIG. 113(e)).

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("164"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swaying (swaying display) to move up and down the predetermined stopping position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swaying motion (performance action). Also, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation motion (performance action) of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 113 (f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern are extended, and the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern continue. The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly wobbles (wobbles) up and down the predetermined stop position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a wobbly motion (performance motion). In addition, the zone performance (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained, and the look-ahead zone performance continues (see FIG. 113 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m will remain at "3", and processing to start the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 113(g) will be maintained, except that the display of the first reserved number U1 on the first special symbol reserved display 63 will change to "2".

Then, at the timing of P9, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 113(g) is maintained, except that the first reserved number U1 on the first special symbol reserved display 63 displays "2".

Next, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the variable display of the first special symbol begins. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m will remain at "3", and processing to start the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 113(g) will be maintained, except that the display of the first reserved number U1 in the first special symbol reserved display 63 will change to "1".

Then, at the timing of P11, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. If the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 113(g) is maintained, except that the first reserved number U1 displayed on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 is "1". Note that at the timings of P7 to P11, the look-ahead zone performance and the scrolling of the background image continue.

Next, at the timing of P12, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the first special symbol display 60 starts to display the first special symbol in a variable manner. When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes directly from "3" to "0" without passing through "3" to "2" and "1" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes directly from "3" to "0" without passing through "2" and "1". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icons T13 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B3 and the surplus reserved icons T12 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B2 are erased in one frame of non-animation, and all the performance patterns 70a including the performance patterns 70a that are out of alignment with the stopping position (the performance patterns 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stopping position (see FIG. 113 (h)). In this way, when the difference between the first hold number U1 recognized by the main control unit 110m and the first hold number U1 recognized by the performance control unit 130m is "3", the hold icon T13 is erased from the first hold icon display area 70B3 without shifting its display from the first hold icon display area 70B3 to 70B2. Also, the hold icon T12 is erased from the first hold icon display area 70B2 without shifting its display from the first hold icon display area 70B2 to 70B1. At this time, the look-ahead zone performance and the scrolling of the background image continue.

Then, one of the necessary pending icons T11 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B1 is shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the display of the transition of the performance pattern 70a starts while the transition of the look-ahead zone performance, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern continues, and the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after a preparatory operation (see FIG. 113 (h)).

When deleting surplus reserved icons T1 and shifting in the required reserved icons T1, the surplus reserved icons T1 may remain as they are and the required reserved icons T1 may be shifted in.

After that, at the timing of P13, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the shift display of the pending icon T1 has been completed, the performance pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the look-ahead zone performance and the scrolling of the background image continue. At this time, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a has begun, so the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating (performance operation) (see FIG. 113 (i)). Here, in specific example 5, the performance control unit 130m successfully receives a command before the target pending memory is consumed, and at this time, it is possible to continue executing the look-ahead performance based on the target pending memory.

After that, if the performance control unit 130m is able to normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the normal zone performance (display of the pre-reading zone background, display of a blue zone image, output of zone BGM) will be executed according to the preview scenario even in the variable performance (subject to the pre-reading performance) executed during the variable display of the special pattern where the first reserved number U1 becomes "0" (see Figure 113 (i)), and the pre-reading zone performance will end when the performance pattern 70a stops.

As in the modified example shown in FIG. 113-1, if the performance control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P13, the normal zone performance (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) may not be continued in accordance with the preview scenario based on the variable performance (subject of the look-ahead performance) executed during the variable display of the special pattern where the first reserved number U1 becomes "0", and the look-ahead zone performance may be ended. If the look-ahead zone performance is not continued, the look-ahead zone performance is erased at the timing of P13, and changed to a performance mode with a lower expectation of a jackpot than the look-ahead performance, such as the mode A background.

(Example 6 of when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A specific example 6 of a case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described with reference to Fig. 112 and Fig. 114. Fig. 112 is a timing chart showing a case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally, and Fig. 114 (a) to (i) are performance examples corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of Fig. 112.

Note that specific example 6 in FIG. 114 differs from specific example 5 in FIG. 113 in that a look-ahead effect effect is executed instead of a look-ahead zone effect as a look-ahead preview effect, and an icon change effect is executed. Therefore, a description of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the differences will be described.

At the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 shown by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Also, the four reserved icons T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern starts to change, and the performance pattern 70a starts to scroll after preparatory operations such as part of the decorative part moving and the whole or part of it expanding and contracting as in this embodiment (see FIG. 114(d)).

The display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern starts to change, and a pre-reading effect is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed at the bottom behind the effect pattern 70a (see FIG. 114(d)), and an effect sound is output.

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the reserved icon T1 is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect performance is temporarily stopped, and the icon change performance is started. Specifically, the third reserved icon T13 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B3 changes to a blue character icon and a change sound is output. At this time, the background image continues to scroll and the display of the performance pattern 70a has started to change, so that the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are performing a rotating motion (performance motion) (see FIG. 114 (e)).

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("164"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swaying (swaying display) to move up and down the predetermined stopping position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swaying motion (performance action). Also, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation motion (performance action) of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 114 (f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern are extended, and the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern continue. The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly wobbles (wobbles) up and down the predetermined stop position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a wobbly motion (performance motion). Also, the reserved icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained, and the icon change performance continues (see FIG. 114 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the variable first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start commands (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m will remain at "3", and processing to start the variable performance will not be performed. Therefore, the look-ahead effect presentation (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) is not executed, and the state of FIG. 114(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special pattern reserved indicator 63 becomes "2."

Then, at the timing of P9, when the time for the special pattern to change has elapsed, the first special pattern is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special pattern display 60. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special pattern confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 114(g) is maintained, except that the first reserved number U1 on the first special pattern reserved display 63 displays "2".

Next, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the variable display of the first special symbol begins. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m will remain at "3", and processing to start the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 114(g) will be maintained, except that the display of the first reserved number U1 in the first special symbol reserved display 63 will change to "1".

Then, at the timing of P11, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 114(g) is maintained, except that the first reserved number U1 displayed on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 is "1".

Note that, at timings P8 to P11, the look-ahead effect performance (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effects) may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P12, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes directly from "3" to "0" without passing through "3" to "2" and "1" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first reserved indicator 83 changes directly from "3" to "0" without passing through "2" and "1". Furthermore, the two surplus reserved icons T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are erased in one frame of non-animation, and all performance patterns 70a including the performance patterns 70a that are out of alignment with the stopping position (performance patterns 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stopping position (see FIG. 114 (h)). In this way, when the difference between the first hold number U1 recognized by the main control unit 110m and the first hold number U1 recognized by the performance control unit 130m is "3", the hold icon T13 is erased from the first hold icon display area 70B3 without shifting from the first hold icon display area 70B3 to 70B2. Also, the hold icon T12 is erased from the first hold icon display area 70B2 without shifting from the first hold icon display area 70B2 to 70B1.

Then, the necessary number of reserved icons T11 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B1 are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern continues, and the display of the performance pattern 70a starts to change, and a look-ahead effect performance is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed at the bottom behind the performance pattern 70a in accordance with the preview scenario, and an effect sound effect is output. Then, the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation (see FIG. 114 (h)). In this way, the reserved icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change performance continues, and the look-ahead effect performance (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) and the scrolling of the background image continue to be executed.

When a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the reserved icon T1 has been completed, at timing P13, the effect image EF is erased and the look-ahead effect performance is temporarily stopped, and the icon change performance is executed, causing the performance pattern 70a to scroll at high speed. Specifically, the first reserved icon T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B1 changes to a red character icon in accordance with the change scenario, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the display of the performance pattern 70a has started to change, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating (performance) (see FIG. 114(i)).

After that, if the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the look-ahead effect performance (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) and icon change performance (icon change performance) are executed even in the change performance (subject to the expectation level suggestion by the look-ahead preview performance) executed during the changing display of the special pattern where the first reserved number U1 becomes "0". Then, the look-ahead effect performance ends when the performance pattern 70a scrolls at high speed, and the icon is erased and the icon change performance ends when the performance pattern 70a is displayed stationary. Here, in specific example 6, the performance control unit 130m normally receives a command before the target reserved memory is consumed, and at this time, it is possible to continue executing the look-ahead performance based on the target reserved memory.

As shown in the modified example in FIG. 114-1, if the performance control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the icon change performance and the look-ahead effect performance (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) may not be continued according to the preview scenario based on the change performance (subject to the expectation level suggested by the look-ahead performance) executed during the variable display of the special pattern in which the first reserved number U1 becomes "0", and the look-ahead performance may be ended. If the look-ahead performance is not continued, at the timing of P12, the look-ahead effect performance (if displayed) is erased and changed to a performance mode with a lower expectation level for a jackpot than the look-ahead effect performance, such as only the mode A background. In addition, the reserved icon T1 that was changed to a character by the icon change performance is changed to the normal mode (CD), which is a performance mode with a lower expectation level for a jackpot.

(Example 7 of when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A specific example 7 of a case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described with reference to Fig. 112 and Fig. 115. Fig. 112 is a timing chart showing a case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally, and Fig. 115 (a) to (i) are performance examples corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of Fig. 112.

Note that specific example 7 in FIG. 115 differs from specific example 6 in FIG. 115 in that an icon change effect as a look-ahead preview effect is executed by the first image display device 70, and an effect of the first movable member 73 (movement effect and light emission effect) as a look-ahead preview effect is executed, so an explanation of the common parts will be omitted here and only the differences will be explained. Note that in specific example 7, a look-ahead effect effect can also be executed, but as this is similar to specific example 6, an explanation will be omitted.

At the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner. Also, the first reserved number U1 shown by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Also, the four reserved icons T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the display of the change in the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern begins, and the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after preparatory operations such as part of the decorative part moving and the whole or part expanding and contracting as in this embodiment (see FIG. 115(d)).

In addition, the display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern begins to change, and the first movable member 73 performs a moving performance as a look-ahead preview performance. Specifically, in a state where there is a high expectation of a big win (for example, a large movement or a state similar to a big win), the first movable member 73 installed on the upper side of the first image display device 70 operates (see FIG. 115(d)), and the first movable member 73 emits light. In addition, a predetermined sound effect is output. Note that the look-ahead preview performance by the first movable member 73 can be performed during a portion of each of the multiple changing performances of the performance pattern 70a during the period before the reach performance of the performance pattern 70a.

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the reserved icon T1 is completed, the icon change performance starts. Specifically, the third reserved icon T13 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B3 changes to a blue character icon and a change sound is output. At this time, the background image continues to scroll and the display of the performance pattern 70a has started to change, so the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performance operation) (see FIG. 115(e)). In addition, the first movable member 73 continues to perform the pre-reading preview performance.

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("164"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swaying (swaying display) to move up and down the predetermined stopping position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swaying motion (performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation motion (performance action) of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 115(f)). At this time, the first movable member 73 may continue to execute the pre-reading preview performance.

Next, at the timing of P7, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern are extended, and the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern continue. The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly wobbles (wobbles) up and down the predetermined stop position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a wobbly motion (performance motion). Also, the reserved icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained, and the icon change performance continues (see FIG. 115 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and processing to start the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the first movable member 73 does not execute the pre-reading notice performance, and the state of FIG. 115(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reserved number U1 on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes to "2".

Then, at the timing of P9, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 115(g) is maintained, except that the first reserved number U1 on the first special symbol reserved display 63 is displayed as "2".

Next, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the variable display of the first special symbol begins. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 changes from "2" to "1". If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m will remain at "3", and processing to start the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 115(g) will be maintained, except that the display of the first reserved number U1 in the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 will change to "1".

Then, at the timing of P11, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 115(g) is maintained, except that the first reserved number U1 displayed on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 is "1".

Note that, at the timings of P8 to P11, the first movable member 73 may continue to perform the pre-reading preview performance (movement performance and light emission performance of the first movable member 73).

Next, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes directly from "3" to "0" without passing through "3" to "2" and "1" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes directly from "3" to "0" without passing through "2" and "1". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icons T13 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B3 are erased in one frame of non-animation, and the surplus reserved icons T12 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B2 are erased in one frame of non-animation. All performance patterns 70a including the performance patterns 70a that are out of alignment with the stopping position (performance patterns 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stopping position (see FIG. 115 (h)). In this way, when the difference between the first hold number U1 recognized by the main control unit 110m and the first hold number U1 recognized by the performance control unit 130m is "3", the hold icon T13 is erased from the first hold icon display area 70B3 without shifting from the first hold icon display area 70B3 to 70B2. Also, the hold icon T12 is erased from the first hold icon display area 70B2 without shifting from the first hold icon display area 70B2 to 70B1.

The necessary number of reserved icons T11 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B1 are then shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first icon being displayed as the icon TH. The display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern continues as the display of the performance pattern 70a begins to change, and the first movable member 73 executes a look-ahead preview performance. Specifically, the first movable member 73 performs a motion performance according to the preview scenario, and sound effects are output. The performance pattern 70a then starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation (see FIG. 115(h)). In this way, the reserved icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change performance continues, while the first movable member 73 continues to perform the look-ahead preview performance and the scrolling of the background image.

After that, at the timing of P13, the pre-reading preview performance by the first movable member 73 is temporarily stopped, the icon change performance is executed, and the performance pattern 70a scrolls at high speed. Specifically, the first reserved icon displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B1 changes to a red character icon in accordance with the change scenario, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the changing display of the performance pattern 70a has started, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performance operation) (see FIG. 115(i)).

After that, if the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the first movable member 73 executes the look-ahead preview performance and the icon change performance (the icon change performance) even in the change performance (the subject of the expectation level suggestion by the look-ahead preview performance) executed during the changing display of the special pattern where the first reserved number becomes "0". Then, the look-ahead preview performance ends when the performance pattern 70a scrolls at high speed, and the icon TH is erased and the icon change performance ends when the performance pattern 70a is displayed stationary. Here, in specific example 7, the performance control unit 130m normally receives a command before the target reserved memory is consumed, and at this time, it is possible to continue executing the look-ahead performance based on the target reserved memory.

As shown in the modified example in FIG. 115-1, if the performance control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the icon change performance or the look-ahead preview performance (the action performance and light emission performance of the first movable member 73) may not be continued according to the preview scenario based on the change performance (the subject of the expectation level suggestion by the look-ahead performance) executed during the variable display of the special pattern in which the first reserved number U1 becomes "0", and the look-ahead performance may be ended. If the look-ahead performance is not continued, the execution of the look-ahead preview performance is stopped at the timing of P12, and the performance mode is changed to one with a lower expectation of a jackpot than the look-ahead preview performance, such as only the mode A background. In addition, the reserved icon T1 that was changed to a character by the icon change performance is changed to the normal mode (CD), which is a performance mode with a lower expectation of a jackpot.

According to the concrete examples 5 to 7 shown in FIG. 112 to FIG. 115, at the timings of P7 to P9, the performance control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of these commands,
If the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 are unable to properly receive the performance commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the same processing will be carried out as when the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m.

According to specific examples 5 to 7 shown in Figures 112 to 115, we have explained the case where the first reserved number stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0" at timing P10. However, if the first reserved number changes from "4" to "1", that is, if the difference between the reserved number known by the main control unit 110m and the reserved number known by the performance control unit 130m is "3", the basic flow will be the same as that explained above.

In specific examples 5 to 7 shown in Figures 112 to 115, a predetermined state occurs at the timing of P7 where the first command cannot be received normally, and the predetermined state continues for a predetermined period of time up until the timing of P12. In this way, in specific examples 5 to 7, the variable performance of the performance pattern 70a is not executed during the predetermined period. Also, during the predetermined period, the performance pattern 70a whose variable performance has ended can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, and the performance pattern 70a can be maintained in a temporarily stopped state.

Thus, according to specific examples 5 to 7 shown in Figures 112 to 115, when a specific number (e.g., four) of reserved icons (first reserved information) that is three more than a predetermined number (e.g., one) is displayed in the reserved icon display area, if the performance control unit 130m receives a start command for the variable display in which the reserved number becomes the predetermined number, the predetermined number of reserved icons is displayed without displaying a number of reserved icons that is one less than the specific number. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. It also reduces the sense of discomfort felt when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the reserved number, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to specific examples 5 to 7 shown in Figures 112 to 115, when a specific number (e.g., four) of reserved icons (first reserved information) that is three more than a predetermined number (e.g., one) is displayed in the reserved icon display area, if the performance control unit 130m receives a start command for the variable display in which the reserved number becomes the predetermined number, the reserved icon that is two less than the specific number is displayed without displaying the reserved icon that is one less than the specific number, and then the predetermined number of reserved icons is displayed. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. It also reduces the discomfort felt when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the reserved number, making it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to specific examples 5 to 7 shown in Figures 112 to 115, when the sub-first hold indicator 83 or the first hold number display area 70E is displaying a specific number (e.g., four) that is three more than the specified number (e.g., one), if the performance control unit 130m receives a start command for the display to change so that the hold number becomes the specified number, the specified number of hold numbers will be displayed without displaying hold numbers that are one or two less than the specific number. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, since the accurate hold number is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly inform the player of the hold number.

(Example 8 of when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 8 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described with reference to Fig. 116 and Fig. 117. Fig. 116 is timing chart 4 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally, and Fig. 115(a) to (h) are performance examples corresponding to (a) to (h) in timing chart 4 of Fig. 114.

Note that, since Specific Example 8 in Figure 117 is similar to Specific Example 5 in Figure 112 up to the timings P0 to P11, the explanation is omitted.

At the timing of P12, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the variable display of the first special symbol begins. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 changes from "1" to "0". If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m will remain at "3", and processing to start the variable performance will not be performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 117(g) will be displayed.

Next, at the timing of P13, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 117(g) will be maintained.

At this time, even if the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m is "0" and the stop time of the special pattern has elapsed (even if a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the change of P12), the temporarily stopped display of the performance pattern 70a continues (see FIG. 117 (h)). Furthermore, the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern may continue to change. The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly sways (swinging display) up and down the predetermined stop position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swaying motion (performance action). Also, the pre-reading performance continues to be executed. In this way, even if a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the change of P12, the customer waiting demo performance is not performed on the first image display device 70.

Thus, according to specific example 8 shown in Figures 116 to 117, if a specified state occurs in which the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive a command while the performance pattern 70a is being changed, the performance pattern 70a whose change performance has ended can be displayed in a swaying state, and the swaying state of the performance pattern 70a is continued even after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change performance, so that the customer waiting demo performance is not executed. This makes it easy to tell that there has been an abnormality, avoids damaging the player's interests, and makes it possible to prevent a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

As shown in FIG. 117-1, since the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m is "0", it may be configured to transition to a customer waiting state (a waiting state for playing). When the performance control unit 130m receives a customer waiting command (a customer waiting state designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs processing to end the variable performance.

In this case, all of the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be displayed in a previous variable performance) including the performance symbol 70a that is out of position are displayed (actually stopped) at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined missing state ("248"), and the first lamp symbol is actually stopped in a missing state (for example, turned off).

Here, when the performance control unit 130m receives a customer waiting command (customer waiting state designation command), the performance pattern 70a may be stopped for real, rather than continuing to display the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a. In this case, all performance patterns 70a (performance patterns 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in a past variable performance), including the performance pattern 70a that is out of position, are displayed (stopped) at the stop position, the special pattern TZ stops for real in a predetermined losing pattern ("248"), and the first lamp pattern stops for real in a losing pattern (off). Even in this case, the customer waiting demo performance is not performed in the first image display device 70.

In this way, according to the modified example of specific example 8 shown in FIG. 117-1, if the performance control unit 130m normally receives a customer waiting state designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance symbols 70a, all performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in a previous variable performance), including the performance symbols 70a that are out of position from the predetermined stop position, are displayed (actually stopped) at the stop position. This makes it possible to inform the player that the variable performance has ended (transitioned to a customer waiting state), which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, if the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m at the timings of P7, P11, and P13, but the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 are unable to successfully receive the performance command sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, the same processing will be performed as when the performance control unit 130m is unable to successfully receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m.

Here, we have explained the case where, at the timing of P14, the performance control unit 130m receives a customer waiting state designation command when the first reserved number stored (knowledged) is "3", but the basic flow is the same as that explained above even if the performance control unit 130m receives a customer waiting state designation command when the first reserved number is "4", "2", or "1".

(Example 9: When the Production Control Unit Cannot Receive Commands Normally)
A specific example 9 of a case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described with reference to Fig. 118 and Fig. 119. Fig. 118 is a timing chart showing a case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally, and Fig. 119(a) to (h) are performance examples corresponding to (a) to (h) in the timing chart of Fig. 118.

Note that specific example 8 in FIG. 117 and specific example 9 in FIG. 119 differ in that the command received at timing P14 is an opening designation command, so we will not explain the common parts here and will only explain the differences.

At timing P14, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the jackpot game (special game) begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and processing is performed to start the opening performance of the jackpot game.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first reserved number display area 70E remains at "3", the performance pattern 70a, the reserved icon T1 displayed in the icon display area, and the icon TH are erased, and the icon change performance and the look-ahead zone performance end. In addition, the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing pattern ("248"), the first lamp pattern stops in a losing pattern (e.g., off), and an opening performance image is displayed (see FIG. 119 (h)).

After that, during or after the jackpot game (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), if the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the first special symbol storage command from the main control unit 110m, the first reserved number U1 displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first reserved number display area 70E is updated to the number according to the command with one frame of non-animation (see FIG. 119(j)). Note that FIG. 119(j) shows the case where the reserved number of the start command is "1". At this time, regardless of the combination of the performance patterns 70a based on which the jackpot is obtained, the specified (same) performance pattern 70a is displayed. For example, whether the performance pattern 70a is a combination of "777" or "222", the performance pattern 70a of "135" is displayed in the same combination as shown in FIG. 119(j). This allows smooth coordination between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Note that if the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m at the timings P7 to P13, but the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 are unable to successfully receive the performance commands sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of these commands, the same processing will be carried out as in the case where the performance control unit 130m is unable to successfully receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m.

Here, we have explained the case where an opening designation command is received at the timing of P14 when the first reserved number stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m is "3", but the basic flow is the same as that explained above even if an opening designation command is received when the first reserved number is "4", "2", or "1".

In this way, according to specific example 9 shown in Figures 118 to 119, if the performance control unit 130m normally receives an opening designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a, the opening performance image for the jackpot game is displayed without displaying (actually stopping) all performance patterns 70a (performance patterns 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in past variable performances), including performance patterns 70a that are deviated from the predetermined stop position, at the stop position. Therefore, the opening performance is no longer hindered by the performance patterns, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Example 10 of when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 10 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described with reference to Fig. 120 and Fig. 121. Fig. 120 is a timing chart showing the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally, and Fig. 121(a) to (i) are performance examples corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of Fig. 120.

First, at the timing of P0, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the display of the first special symbol begins to change. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol change pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing is performed to start the change performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Furthermore, the four reserved icons T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable indicator 81 starts, but the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after a preparatory operation such as a part of the decorative part moving or the whole or part expanding and contracting as in this embodiment.

Next, at the timing of P1, the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, and the first reserved number stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4." When the performance control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting hole winning designation command (pre-reading designation command)) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m increases from "3" to "4."

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold display 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one hold icon T14 is additionally displayed (gradually increasing from a very small size) in the first hold icon display area 70B4 as a 10-frame animation (see FIG. 121(a)).

In specific example 10, a pre-reading effect (advance notification) is executed to indicate a high probability of a jackpot based on the first reserved memory corresponding to the reserved icon T12 in FIG. 121(a). Specifically, the background image changes to a pre-reading zone background, a blue zone image is displayed in which the word "ZONE" scrolls left and right, and a pre-reading zone effect (normal zone effect) is executed in which zone BGM is output. At this time, the background image continues to scroll and the display of the effect pattern 70a has started to change, so that the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (effect) (see FIG. 121(a)).

After that, at timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("285"). At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance action). Also, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performance action) (see FIG. 121 (b)).

Then, at the timing of P3, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing is performed to end the changing performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing pattern ("248") (see FIG. 121(c)), and the first lamp pattern stops in a losing pattern (e.g., off).

Next, at the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Also, the four reserved icons T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after a preparatory operation (see FIG. 121 (d)).

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("164"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swaying (swaying display) to move up and down the predetermined stopping position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swaying motion (performance action). Also, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation motion (performance action) of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 121 (f)).

At timings P0 to P6, the look-ahead zone presentation (normal zone presentation) is continuously executed. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the word "ZONE" scrolls left and right is displayed, and zone BGM is output. At this time, while the background image continues to scroll and the presentation pattern 70a is performing a variable presentation, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (presentation operation).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern are extended, and the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern continue. The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly wobbles (wobbles) up and down the predetermined stop position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a wobbly motion (performance motion). In addition, the zone performance (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained, and the look-ahead zone performance continues (see FIG. 121 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m will remain at "3", and processing to start the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 121(g) will be maintained, except that the display of the first reserved number U1 on the first special symbol reserved display 63 will change to "2".

Then, at the timing of P9, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 121(g) is maintained, except that the first reserved number U1 on the first special symbol reserved display 63 displays "2".

Next, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes directly from "3" to "1" without passing through "3" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first reserved indicator 83 changes directly from "3" to "1" without passing through "2". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icons T13 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B3 are erased in one frame of non-animation, and all performance patterns 70a including the performance patterns 70a that are out of alignment with the stopping position (performance patterns 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stopping position (see FIG. 121 (h)). In this way, when the difference between the first hold number U1 recognized by the main control unit 110m and the first hold number U1 recognized by the performance control unit 130m is "2", the hold icon T13 is erased from the first hold icon display area 70B3 without shifting from the first hold icon display area 70B3 to 70B2.

The two necessary pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are then shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one being displayed as the icon TH. Also, the pre-reading zone performance, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern are not continued, and the performance pattern 70a starts to change, and the performance pattern 70a starts to scroll after a preparatory operation (see FIG. 121 (h)).

When deleting surplus reserved icons T1 and shifting in the required reserved icons T1, the surplus reserved icons T1 may be left as they are and the required reserved icons T1 may be shifted in.

At the timing of P10, if the performance control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the normal zone performance (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) will not be continued according to the preview scenario based on the variable performance (target of the look-ahead performance) executed during the variable display of the special pattern in which the first reserved number U1 becomes "0". Specifically, at the timing of P10, the look-ahead zone performance is erased and changed to a performance mode with a lower expectation of a jackpot than the look-ahead performance, such as the mode A background (see FIG. 121 (h)). Thus, in the specific example 10, after the target reserved memory is consumed, the performance control unit 130m normally receives a command, and at this time, the look-ahead performance based on the target reserved memory is not continued, or is changed to a performance with a lower expectation of a jackpot than the look-ahead performance that was previously executed, or the look-ahead performance is erased.

After that, at timing P11, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the shift display of the reserved icon T1 was completed, the performance pattern 70a begins to scroll at high speed. At this time, the display of the performance pattern 70a has started to change, so the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performing) (see FIG. 121(i)).

In addition, at the timing of P10, if the performance control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the normal zone performance (display of the pre-reading zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) may be continued according to the preview scenario based on the variable performance (subject of the pre-reading performance) executed during the variable display of the special pattern where the first reserved number U1 becomes "0".

(Example 11 of when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 11 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described with reference to Fig. 120 and Fig. 122. Fig. 120 is a timing chart showing the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally, and Fig. 122(a) to (i) are performance examples corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of Fig. 120.

Note that specific example 10 in FIG. 121 and specific example 11 in FIG. 122 differ in that a look-ahead effect effect is executed instead of a look-ahead zone effect as a look-ahead preview effect, and an icon change effect is executed, so we will omit an explanation of the common parts here and only explain the differences.

In specific example 10, a pre-reading effect (advance notification) is executed to indicate that there is a high probability of a jackpot, based on the reserved memory corresponding to reserved icon T12 in FIG. 121(a). In specific example 11, a pre-reading effect effect and an icon change effect are executed as the pre-reading effect. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed at the bottom behind the effect pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. In addition, an icon change effect is executed in which reserved icon T1 changes to a blue character icon.

At the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner. Also, the first reserved number U1 shown by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Also, the four reserved icons T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as part of the decorative part moving or the whole or part of it expanding and contracting as in this embodiment (see FIG. 122 (d)).

The display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern starts to change, and a pre-reading effect is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed at the bottom behind the effect pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. The icon change effect in which the reserved icon T1 changes to a blue character icon continues to be executed. The effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after a preparatory operation (see FIG. 122(d)). At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the display of the effect pattern 70a starts to change, so that the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (a performance operation) (see FIG. 122(e)).

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("164"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swaying (swaying display) to move up and down the predetermined stopping position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swaying motion (performance action). Also, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation motion (performance action) of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 122 (f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern are extended, and the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern continue. The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly wobbles (wobbles) up and down the predetermined stop position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a wobbly motion (performance motion). Also, the reserved icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained, and the icon change performance continues (see FIG. 122 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the variable first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start commands (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m will remain at "3", and processing to start the variable performance will not be performed. Therefore, the look-ahead effect performance (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) is not executed, and the state of FIG. 122(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special pattern reserved indicator 63 becomes "2."

Then, at the timing of P9, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 122(g) is maintained, except that the first reserved number U1 on the first special symbol reserved display 63 displays "2".

Note that at the timings of P8 and P9, the look-ahead effect performance (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effects) may be continued.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes directly from "3" to "1" without passing through "3" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first reserved indicator 83 changes directly from "3" to "1" without passing through "2". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icons T3 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B3 are erased in one frame of non-animation, and all performance patterns 70a including the performance patterns 70a that are out of alignment with the stopping position (performance patterns 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stopping position (see FIG. 122 (h)). In this way, when the difference between the first hold number U1 recognized by the main control unit 110m and the first hold number U1 recognized by the performance control unit 130m is "2", the hold icon T3 is erased from the first hold icon display area 70B3 without shifting from the first hold icon display area 70B3 to 70B2.

Then, the necessary two reserved icons T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B1, 70B2 are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern continues, and the display of the performance pattern 70a starts to change. Then, the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after a preparatory operation (see FIG. 122(h)).

After that, at timing P11, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the shifting display of the icons was completed, the performance pattern 70a begins to scroll at high speed. At this time, the display of the performance pattern 70a has started to change, so the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performing) (see FIG. 122(i)).

At the timing of P10, if the performance control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the pre-reading effect performance (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) and the icon change performance (reserved icon change performance and the icon change performance) are not continuously executed according to the preview scenario based on the change performance (target of pre-reading performance) executed during the variable display of the special pattern in which the first reserved number U1 becomes "0". Specifically, at the timing of P10, the pre-reading effect performance is not executed, and the performance mode is changed to a performance mode with a lower expectation of a jackpot than the pre-reading performance, such as a mode A background (see FIG. 122 (h)). Also, the reserved icon T1 that was a blue character icon becomes the reserved icon T1 of a normal CD image. In this way, in the specific example 11, after the target reserved memory is consumed, the performance control unit 130m normally receives a command, and at this time, the pre-reading performance based on the target reserved memory is not continuously executed, or is changed to a performance with a lower expectation of a jackpot than the previously executed pre-reading performance, or the pre-reading performance is erased.

In addition, if the performance control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the look-ahead effect performance (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) and icon change performance (pending icon change performance and the icon change performance) may be continuously executed in accordance with the preview scenario based on the change performance (subject of the look-ahead performance) executed during the changing display of the special pattern where the first pending number U1 becomes "0".

(Specific example 12 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 12 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described with reference to Fig. 120 and Fig. 123. Fig. 120 is a timing chart showing the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally, and Fig. 123 (a) to (i) are performance examples corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of Fig. 108.

Note that specific example 12 in FIG. 123 differs from specific example 11 in FIG. 122 in that a pre-reading performance (movement performance or issuance performance) is executed by the first movable member 73 as a pre-reading preview performance, so a description of the common parts will be omitted here and only the differences will be described.

In specific example 12, a pre-reading effect (advance notification) is executed to indicate a high expectation of a jackpot based on the reserved memory corresponding to reserved icon T12 in FIG. 123(a). In specific example 12, an effect using the first movable member 73 and an icon change effect are executed as pre-reading effects. Specifically, an action effect in which the first movable member 73 performs a predetermined action and an illumination effect in which the first movable member 73 emits light are executed, and sound effects are output. In addition, an icon change effect is executed in which reserved icon T1 changes to a blue character icon or a red character icon.

At the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner. Also, the first reserved number U1 shown by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Also, the four reserved icons T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after a preparatory operation (see FIG. 123(d)).

The display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern begins, and the first movable member 73 performs a moving performance as a look-ahead preview performance. Specifically, in a state where the expectation of a big win is high (for example, a large movement or a state similar to a big win), the first movable member 73 installed on the upper side of the first image display device 70 operates and emits light. Also, a sound effect is output. Then, the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation (see FIG. 123(d)). Note that the look-ahead preview performance by the operation of the first movable member 73 can be performed during a part of each of the multiple changing performances of the performance pattern 70a during the period before the reach performance of the performance pattern 70a.

In addition, the first hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B1 changes to a blue character icon, and the blue character icon performs a predetermined action. At this time, the background image continues to scroll, and the display of the effect pattern 70a has begun to change, so the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are performing a rotational action (effect) (see FIG. 123(e)). In addition, the first movable member 73 continues to perform the pre-reading preview effect.

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("164"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swaying (swaying display) to move up and down the predetermined stopping position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swaying motion (performance action). Also, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation motion (performance action) of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 123 (f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern are extended. The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly wobbles (wobbles) up and down the predetermined stop position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a wobbly motion (performance motion). Also, the reserved icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change performance continues (see FIG. 123 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and processing to start the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the pre-reading notice performance by the operation of the first movable member 73 is not performed, and the state of FIG. 123(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reserved number U1 on the first special symbol reserved display 63 becomes "2".

Then, at the timing of P9, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 123(g) is maintained, except that the first reserved number U1 on the first special symbol reserved display 63 displays "2".

In addition, at the timings of P8 and P9, the first movable member 73 may continue to perform the pre-reading preview performance (movement performance and light emission performance of the first movable member 73).

Next, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes directly from "3" to "1" without passing through "3" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first reserved indicator 83 changes directly from "3" to "1" without passing through "2". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icons T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are erased in one frame of non-animation, and all performance patterns 70a including the performance patterns 70a that are out of alignment with the stopping position (performance patterns 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in past variable performances) are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stopping position (see FIG. 123 (h)). In this way, when the difference between the first hold number U1 recognized by the main control unit 110m and the first hold number U1 recognized by the performance control unit 130m is "2", the hold icon T1 is erased from the first hold icon display area 70B without being shifted in the first hold icon display area 70B.

The two necessary pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are then shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one being displayed as the icon TH. The display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern continues, while the display of the changes in the performance pattern 70a begins. The performance pattern 70a then begins scrolling after a preparatory operation (see FIG. 123 (h)).

After that, at timing P11, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the shifting display of the icons was completed, the performance pattern 70a begins to scroll at high speed. At this time, the display of the performance pattern 70a has started to change, so the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performing) (see FIG. 123(i)).

At the timing of P10, if the performance control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the first movable member 73 will not continue to perform the look-ahead notice performance and the icon change performance (reserved icon change performance and the icon change performance) according to the notice scenario based on the change performance (target of the look-ahead performance) executed during the variable display of the special pattern in which the first reserved number U1 becomes "0". Specifically, at the timing of P10, the look-ahead notice performance by the first movable member 73 is not executed, and the first movable member 73 stops at the standby position, and the performance mode is changed to one with a lower expectation of a jackpot than the look-ahead performance, so that the light is turned off or illuminated in a more subdued manner than the look-ahead notice performance (see FIG. 123 (h)). In addition, the reserved icon T1, which had been a blue character icon, becomes the reserved icon T1 of a normal CD image. Thus, in specific example 11, the command is normally received by the performance control unit 130m after the target pending memory is consumed, and at this time, the pre-reading performance based on the target pending memory is not continued, or is changed to a performance with a lower expectation of a jackpot than the previously executed pre-reading performance, or the pre-reading performance is erased.

In addition, if the performance control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the first movable member 73 may continue to execute the look-ahead preview performance and the icon change performance (pending icon change performance and the icon change performance) in accordance with the preview scenario based on the change performance (subject of the look-ahead performance) executed during the changing display of the special pattern in which the first pending number U1 becomes "0".

According to specific examples 10 to 12 shown in Figures 120 to 123, even if the performance control unit 130m is able to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m at the timings of P7 to P9, but the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 are unable to normally receive the performance commands sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of these commands, the same processing will be performed as when the performance control unit 130m is unable to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m.

According to specific examples 10 to 12 shown in Figures 120 to 123, the case where the first reserved number stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1" at timing P10 has been described. However, if the first reserved number changes from "4" to "2", or if the first reserved number changes from "2" to "0", in other words, if the discrepancy between the reserved number known by the main control unit 110m and the reserved number known by the performance control unit 130m is "2", the basic flow will be the same as that described above.

In specific examples 10 to 12 shown in Figures 120 to 123, a predetermined state occurs at the timing of P7 where the first command cannot be received normally, and the predetermined state continues for a predetermined period of time up until the timing of P10. In this way, in specific examples 10 to 12, the variable performance of the performance pattern 70a is not executed during the predetermined period. Also, during the predetermined period, the performance pattern 70a whose variable performance has ended can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, and the performance pattern 70a can be maintained in a temporarily stopped state.

In this way, according to specific examples 10 to 12 shown in Figs. 120 to 123, when a specific number (e.g., three) of reserved icons (first reserved information) that is two more than the predetermined number (e.g., one) is displayed in the reserved icon display area, if the performance control unit 130m receives a start command for the variable display in which the reserved number becomes the predetermined number, the necessary reserved icons (e.g., the first and second reserved icons) are shifted and displayed without shifting the surplus reserved icons (e.g., the third reserved icon) out of the specific number of reserved icons. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the reserved number, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to specific examples 10 to 12 shown in Figures 120 to 123, when a specific number (e.g., three) of reserved icons (first reserved information) that is two more than a predetermined number (e.g., one) is displayed in the reserved icon display area, if the performance control unit 130m receives a start command for the variable display in which the reserved number becomes the predetermined number, the performance control unit 130m displays a number of reserved icons that is one less than the specific number before displaying the predetermined number of reserved icons. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. It also reduces the discomfort felt when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the reserved number, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to specific examples 10 to 12 shown in Figures 120 to 123, when the sub-first hold indicator 83 or the first hold number display area 70E is displaying a specific number (e.g., three) that is two more than the predetermined number (e.g., one), if the performance control unit 130m receives a start command for the display to change so that the hold number becomes the predetermined number, the predetermined number is displayed without displaying a hold number that is one less than the specific number. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, since the accurate hold number is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly inform the player of the hold number.

(Specific example 13 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 13 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described with reference to Fig. 124 and Fig. 125. Fig. 124 is a timing chart showing the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally, and Fig. 125(a) to (i) are performance examples corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of Fig. 124.

First, at the timing of P0, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the display of the first special symbol begins to change. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol change pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing is performed to start the change performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Furthermore, the four reserved icons T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable indicator 81 starts, but the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after a preparatory operation such as a part of the decorative part moving or the whole or part expanding and contracting as in this embodiment.

Next, at the timing of P1, a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, and the first reserved number stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 changes from "3" to "4". When the performance control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting hole winning designation command (pre-reading designation command)) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one hold icon T14 is additionally displayed (gradually increasing from a tiny size) in the first hold icon display area 70B4 as a 10-frame animation (see FIG. 125(a)).

In specific example 13, a pre-reading effect (advance notification) is executed to indicate a high probability of a jackpot based on the first reserved memory corresponding to the reserved icon T12 in FIG. 125(a). Specifically, the background image changes to a pre-reading zone background, a blue zone image is displayed in which the word "ZONE" scrolls left and right, and a pre-reading zone effect (normal zone effect) is executed in which zone BGM is output. At this time, the background image continues to scroll and the display of the effect pattern 70a has started to change, so that the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (effect) (see FIG. 125(a)).

After that, at timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("285"). At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). Also, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performance motion) (see FIG. 125(b)).

Then, at the timing of P3, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing is performed to end the changing performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing pattern ("248") (see FIG. 125(c)), and the first lamp pattern stops in a losing pattern (e.g., off).

Next, at the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Also, the four reserved icons T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern starts to change, and the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after a preparatory operation (see FIG. 125(d)).

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("164"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swaying (swaying display) to move up and down the predetermined stopping position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swaying motion (performance action). Also, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation motion (performance action) of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 125 (f)).

At timings P0 to P6, the look-ahead zone presentation (normal zone presentation) is continuously executed. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the word "ZONE" scrolls left and right is displayed, and zone BGM is output. At this time, while the background image continues to scroll and the presentation pattern 70a is performing a variable presentation, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (presentation operation).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern are extended, and the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern continue. The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly wobbles (wobbles) up and down the predetermined stop position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a wobbly motion (performance motion). In addition, the zone performance (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained, and the look-ahead zone performance continues (see FIG. 125 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m will remain at "3", and processing to start the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 125(g) will be maintained, except that the display of the first reserved number U1 on the first special symbol reserved display 63 will change to "2".

Then, at the timing of P9, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 125(g) is maintained, except that the first reserved number U1 on the first special symbol reserved display 63 is displayed as "2".

After that, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m will remain at "3", and processing to start the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the display of the first reserved number U1 on the first special symbol reserved display 63 will be "1".
The state of FIG. 125(g) is maintained, except that

Then, at the timing of P11, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 125(g) is maintained, except that the first reserved number U1 on the first special symbol reserved display 63 displays "1".

Next, at the timing of P12, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes directly from "3" to "0" without passing through "3" to "2" and "1" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first reserved indicator 83 changes directly from "3" to "0" without passing through "2" and "1". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icons T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are erased in one frame of non-animation, and all performance patterns 70a including the performance patterns 70a that are out of alignment with the stopping position (performance patterns 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in past variable performances) are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stopping position (see FIG. 125 (h)). In this way, when the difference between the first hold number U1 recognized by the main control unit 110m and the first hold number U1 recognized by the performance control unit 130m is "3", the surplus hold icons T1 are erased from the first hold icon display area 70B without being shifted in the first hold icon display area 70B.

Then, one of the necessary pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the display of the performance pattern 70a changes while the pre-reading zone performance, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern continue to change, and the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after a preparatory operation (see FIG. 125 (h)).

When deleting surplus reserved icons T1 and shifting in the required reserved icons T1, the surplus reserved icons T1 may be left as they are and the required reserved icons T1 may be shifted in.

At the timing of P13, if the performance control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the normal zone performance (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) will not be continued according to the preview scenario based on the variable performance (target of the look-ahead performance) executed during the variable display of the special pattern in which the first reserved number U1 becomes "0". Specifically, at the timing of P13, the look-ahead zone performance is erased and changed to a performance mode with a lower expectation of a jackpot than the look-ahead performance, such as the mode A background (see FIG. 125 (h)). Thus, in the specific example 13, after the target reserved memory is consumed, the performance control unit 130m normally receives a command, and at this time, the look-ahead performance based on the target reserved memory is not continued, or is changed to a performance with a lower expectation of a jackpot than the look-ahead performance that was previously executed, or the look-ahead performance is erased.

After that, at the timing of P13, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the shift display of the reserved icon T1 was completed, the performance pattern 70a begins to scroll at high speed. At this time, the display of the performance pattern 70a has started to change, so the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performing) (see FIG. 125(i)).

In addition, at the timing of P13, if the performance control unit 130m can successfully receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the normal zone performance (display of the pre-reading zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) may be continued in accordance with the preview scenario based on the variable performance (subject of the pre-reading performance) executed during the variable display of the special pattern where the first reserved number U1 becomes "0".

(Specific example 14 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 14 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described with reference to Fig. 124 and Fig. 126. Fig. 124 is a timing chart showing the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally, and Fig. 126(a)-(i) are performance examples corresponding to (a)-(i) in the timing chart of Fig. 124.

Note that specific example 13 in FIG. 125 and specific example 14 in FIG. 126 differ in that a look-ahead effect effect is executed instead of a look-ahead zone effect as a look-ahead preview effect, and an icon change effect is executed, so we will omit an explanation of the common parts here and only explain the differences.

In specific example 13, a pre-reading effect (advance notification) is executed to indicate a high probability of a jackpot based on the reserved memory corresponding to reserved icon T12 in FIG. 125(a). In specific example 14, a pre-reading effect effect and an icon change effect are executed as the pre-reading effect. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed at the bottom behind the effect pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Also, an icon change effect is executed in which reserved icon T1 changes to a blue character icon.

At the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner. Also, the first reserved number U1 shown by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Also, the four reserved icons T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after a preparatory operation (see FIG. 126 (d)).

The display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern starts to change, and a look-ahead effect is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed at the bottom behind the effect pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. The icon change effect in which the reserved icon T1 changes to a blue character icon continues (see FIG. 126(d)). At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the display of the effect pattern 70a starts to change, so that the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (a performance action) (see FIG. 126(e)).

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("164"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swaying (swaying display) to move up and down the predetermined stopping position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swaying motion (performance action). Also, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation motion (performance action) of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 126 (f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern are extended, and the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern continue. The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly wobbles (wobbles) up and down the predetermined stop position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a wobbly motion (performance motion). Also, the reserved icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained, and the icon change performance continues (see FIG. 126 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the variable first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start commands (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m will remain at "3", and processing to start the variable performance will not be performed. Therefore, the look-ahead effect performance (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) is not executed, and the state of FIG. 126(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special pattern reserved indicator 63 becomes "2."

Then, at the timing of P9, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 126(g) is maintained, except that the first reserved number U1 on the first special symbol reserved display 63 is displayed as "2".

After that, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the variable first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start commands (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m will remain at "3", and processing to start the variable performance will not be performed. Therefore, the look-ahead effect presentation (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) is not executed, and the state of FIG. 126(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special pattern reserved indicator 63 becomes "1."

Then, at the timing of P11, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 126(g) is maintained, except that the first reserved number U1 on the first special symbol reserved display 63 is displayed as "1".

Note that at the timings of P8 and P11, the look-ahead effect performance (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effects) may be continued.

Next, at the timing of P12, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes directly from "3" to "0" without passing through "3" to "2" and "1" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first reserved indicator 83 changes directly from "3" to "0" without passing through "2" and "1". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icons T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B3 are erased in one frame of non-animation, and all performance patterns 70a including the performance patterns 70a that are out of alignment with the stopping position (performance patterns 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stopping position (see FIG. 126 (h)). In this way, when the difference between the first hold number U1 recognized by the main control unit 110m and the first hold number U1 recognized by the performance control unit 130m is "3", the surplus hold icons T1 are erased from the first hold icon display area 70B without being shifted in the first hold icon display area 70B.

Then, one of the necessary pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the display of the changing effect pattern 70a starts while the display of the changing special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern continues. Then, the display of the changing effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after a preparatory operation (see FIG. 126 (h)).

After that, at timing P13, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the shifting display of the icons was completed, the performance pattern 70a begins to scroll at high speed. At this time, the display of the performance pattern 70a has started to change, so the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performing) (see FIG. 126(i)).

At the timing of P13, if the performance control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the pre-reading effect performance (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) and the icon change performance (reserved icon change performance and the icon change performance) are not continuously executed according to the preview scenario based on the change performance (target of the pre-reading performance) executed during the variable display of the special pattern in which the first reserved number U1 becomes "0". Specifically, at the timing of P13, the pre-reading effect performance is not executed, and the performance mode is changed to one with a lower expectation of a jackpot than the pre-reading performance, such as the mode A background (see FIG. 126 (h)). Also, the reserved icon T1 that was a blue character icon becomes the reserved icon T1 of a normal CD image. In this way, in the specific example 14, after the target reserved memory is consumed, the performance control unit 130m normally receives a command, and at this time, the pre-reading performance based on the target reserved memory is not continuously executed, or is changed to a performance with a lower expectation of a jackpot than the previously executed pre-reading performance, or the pre-reading performance is erased.

In addition, at the timing of P13, if the performance control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the look-ahead effect performance (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) and icon change performance (pending icon change performance and the icon change performance) may be continuously executed in accordance with the preview scenario based on the change performance (subject of the look-ahead performance) executed during the changing display of the special pattern where the first pending number U1 becomes "0".

(Specific example 15 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 15 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described with reference to Fig. 124 and Fig. 127. Fig. 124 is a timing chart showing the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally, and Fig. 127(a)-(i) are performance examples corresponding to (a)-(i) in the timing chart of Fig. 108.

Specific example 15 in FIG. 127 differs from specific example 14 in FIG. 126 in that a look-ahead performance (movement performance or light emission performance) is executed by the first movable member 73 as a look-ahead preview performance, so a description of the common parts will be omitted here and only the differences will be described. Specific example 15 also allows for a look-ahead effect performance, but as this is similar to specific example 14, a description thereof will be omitted.

In specific example 15, a pre-reading effect (advance notification) is executed to indicate a high probability of a jackpot based on the reserved memory corresponding to reserved icon T12 in FIG. 127(a). In specific example 15, an effect using the first movable member 73 and an icon change effect are executed as pre-reading effects. Specifically, an action effect in which the first movable member 73 performs a predetermined action and an illumination effect in which the first movable member 73 emits light are executed, and sound effects are output. In addition, an icon change effect is executed in which reserved icon T1 changes to a blue character icon or a red character icon.

At the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner. Also, the first reserved number U1 shown by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Also, the four reserved icons T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after a preparatory operation (see FIG. 127(d)).

The display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern begins, and the first movable member 73 performs a moving performance as a look-ahead preview performance. Specifically, in a state where the expectation of a big win is high (for example, a large movement or a state similar to a big win), the first movable member 73 installed on the upper side of the first image display device 70 operates (see FIG. 127(d)), and the first movable member 73 emits light. Also, sound effects are output. Note that the look-ahead preview performance by the operation of the first movable member 73 can be performed continuously for a portion of each of the multiple changing performances of the performance pattern 70a during the period before the reach performance of the performance pattern 70a.

In addition, the first hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B1 changes to a blue character icon, and the blue character icon performs a predetermined action. At this time, the background image continues to scroll, and the display of the effect pattern 70a has begun to change, so the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are performing a rotational action (effect) (see FIG. 127(e)). In addition, the first movable member 73 continues to perform the pre-reading preview effect.

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("164"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swaying (swaying display) to move up and down the predetermined stopping position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swaying motion (performance action). Also, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation motion (performance action) of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 127(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern are extended. The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly wobbles (wobbles) up and down the predetermined stop position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a wobbly motion (performance motion). Also, the reserved icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change performance continues (see FIG. 127 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and processing to start the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the pre-reading notice performance by the operation of the first movable member 73 is not performed, and the state of FIG. 127(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reserved number U1 on the first special symbol reserved display 63 becomes "2".

Then, at the timing of P9, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 127(g) is maintained, except that the first reserved number U1 on the first special symbol reserved display 63 is displayed as "2".

After that, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and processing to start the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the pre-reading notice performance by the operation of the first movable member 73 is not performed, and the state of FIG. 127(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reserved number U1 on the first special symbol reserved display 63 becomes "1".

Then, at the timing of P11, when the time for the special pattern to change has elapsed, the first special pattern is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special pattern display 60. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special pattern confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 127(g) is maintained, except that the first reserved number U1 on the first special pattern reserved display 63 displays "1".

In addition, at the timings of P8 and P11, the first movable member 73 may continue to perform the pre-reading preview performance (movement performance and light emission performance of the first movable member 73).

Next, at the timing of P12, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes directly from "3" to "0" without passing through "3" to "2" and "1" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first reserved indicator 83 changes directly from "3" to "0" without passing through "2" and "1". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icons T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are erased in one frame of non-animation, and all performance patterns 70a including the performance patterns 70a that are out of alignment with the stopping position (performance patterns 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stopping position (see FIG. 127 (h)). In this way, when the difference between the first hold number U1 recognized by the main control unit 110m and the first hold number U1 recognized by the performance control unit 130m is "3", the surplus hold icons T1 are erased from the first hold icon display area 70B without being shifted in the first hold icon display area 70B.

Then, one of the necessary pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the display of the changing effect pattern 70a starts while the display of the changing special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern continues. Then, the display of the changing effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after a preparatory operation (see FIG. 127 (h)).

After that, at timing P13, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the shifting display of the icons was completed, the performance pattern 70a begins to scroll at high speed. At this time, the display of the performance pattern 70a has started to change, so the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performing) (see FIG. 127(i)).

At the timing of P13, if the performance control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the first movable member 73 will not continue to perform the look-ahead notice performance and the icon change performance (reserved icon change performance and the icon change performance) according to the notice scenario based on the change performance (target of the look-ahead performance) executed during the variable display of the special pattern in which the first reserved number U1 becomes "0". Specifically, at the timing of P12, the look-ahead notice performance by the first movable member 73 is not executed, and the first movable member 73 stops at the standby position, and the performance mode is changed to one with a lower expectation of a jackpot than the look-ahead performance, so that the light is turned off or illuminated in a more subdued manner than the look-ahead notice performance (see FIG. 127 (h)). In addition, the reserved icon T1, which had been a blue character icon, becomes the reserved icon T1 of a normal CD image. Thus, in specific example 14, the command is normally received by the performance control unit 130m after the target pending memory is consumed, and at this time, the pre-reading performance based on the target pending memory is not continued, or is changed to a performance with a lower expectation of a jackpot than the previously executed pre-reading performance, or the pre-reading performance is erased.

In addition, at the timing of P13, if the performance control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the first movable member 73 may continue to execute the look-ahead preview performance and the icon change performance (pending icon change performance and the icon change performance) in accordance with the preview scenario based on the change performance (subject of the look-ahead performance) executed during the changing display of the special pattern in which the first pending number U1 becomes "0".

According to specific examples 13 to 15 shown in Figures 124 to 127, even if the performance control unit 130m is able to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m at the timings of P7 to P11, but the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 are unable to normally receive the performance commands sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of these commands, the same processing will be performed as when the performance control unit 130m is unable to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m.

According to specific examples 13 to 15 shown in Figures 124 to 127, we have explained the case where the first reserved number stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0" at timing P12. However, if the first reserved number changes from "4" to "1", that is, if the difference between the reserved number known by the main control unit 110m and the reserved number known by the performance control unit 130m is "3", the basic flow will be the same as that explained above.

In specific examples 13 to 15 shown in Figures 124 to 127, a predetermined state occurs at the timing of P7 where the first command cannot be received normally, and the predetermined state continues for a predetermined period of time up until the timing of P12. In this way, in specific examples 13 to 15, the variable performance of the performance pattern 70a is not executed during the predetermined period. Also, during the predetermined period, the performance pattern 70a whose variable performance has ended can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, and the performance pattern 70a can be maintained in a temporarily stopped state.

In this way, according to specific examples 13 to 15 shown in Figs. 124 to 127, when a specific number (e.g., three) of reserved icons (first reserved information) that is two more than the predetermined number (e.g., one) is displayed in the reserved icon display area, if the performance control unit 130m receives a start command for the variable display in which the reserved number becomes the predetermined number, the necessary reserved icons (e.g., the first and second reserved icons) are shifted and displayed without shifting the surplus reserved icons (e.g., the third reserved icon) out of the specific number of reserved icons. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the reserved number, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to specific examples 13 to 15 shown in Figures 124 to 127, when a specific number (e.g., three) of reserved icons (first reserved information) that is two more than a predetermined number (e.g., one) is displayed in the reserved icon display area, if the performance control unit 130m receives a start command for the variable display in which the reserved number becomes the predetermined number, the performance control unit 130m displays a number of reserved icons that is one less than the specific number before displaying the predetermined number of reserved icons. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. It also reduces the sense of discomfort felt when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the reserved number, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to specific examples 13 to 15 shown in Figures 124 to 127, when the sub-first hold indicator 83 or the first hold number display area 70E is displaying a specific number (e.g., three) that is two more than the predetermined number (e.g., one), if the performance control unit 130m receives a start command for the display to change so that the hold number becomes the predetermined number, the predetermined number is displayed without displaying a hold number that is one less than the specific number. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, since the accurate hold number is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly inform the player of the hold number.

(Specific example 16 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 16 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described with reference to Fig. 128 and Fig. 129. Fig. 128 is a timing chart showing the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally, and Fig. 129(a)-(j) are performance examples corresponding to (a)-(j) in the timing chart 6 of Fig. 128.

First, at the timing of P0, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the display of the first special symbol begins to change. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol change pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1", and processing is performed to start the change performance.

At this time, while the BGM is output during the change, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". Furthermore, the two reserved icons T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B1 are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the display of the first lamp pattern changes begins in the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub-first change indicator 81, but the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after a preparatory operation.

Next, at the timing of P1, when the icon shift display is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and icon change effect begin. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the word "ZONE" scrolls left and right is displayed, and zone BGM is output. Also, the first reserved icon displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B changes to a blue character icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the performance pattern 70a has begun, so the reserved icon and the icon in question are rotating (performance operation) (see FIG. 129(a)).

Then, at the timing of P2, the first reserved number stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2" as a result of the game ball winning in the first starting hole 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 changes from "1" to "2". If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting hole winning designation command (pre-reading designation command)) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, no processing is performed to update the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m, and it remains at "1" (see FIG. 129(b)).

After that, at timing P3, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("164"). At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swinging display) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a swing (performance operation). Also, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH (performance operation) continue (see Figure 129 (c)).

Next, at the timing of P4, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. If the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern are extended. In addition, the zone performance (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained and the look-ahead zone performance continues, and the blue character icon is maintained and the icon change performance continues (see FIG. 129 (d)).

After that, at the timing of P5, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the variable display of the first special symbol begins. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "1", that is, processing is performed to start the variable performance without changing the first reserved number U1.

At this time, the first hold number displayed on the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "1" with one frame of non-animation, and the second hold icon T1 (CD icon) is additionally displayed with one frame of non-animation in the first hold icon display area 70B (displayed in normal size from the beginning). In addition, all performance patterns 70a (performance patterns 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in past variable performances), including the performance pattern 70a that is shifted from the stopping position, are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stopping position (see Figure 129 (e)).

The two necessary pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are then shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one being displayed as the icon TH. Then, the display of the changing effect pattern 70a begins while the changing display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern continues, and the display pattern 70a begins scrolling after a preparatory operation (see FIG. 129(e)).

After that, at the timing of P6, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) begins. Specifically, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red character icon and a change sound is output. At this time, the background image continues to scroll and the display of the effect pattern 70a has started to change, so the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (effect) (see FIG. 129(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable performance (the end of the SP reach performance), the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a reach miss state ("161"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swaying (swaying display) to move up and down the predetermined stopping position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swaying motion (performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation motion (performance action) of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see Figure 129 (g)).

Then, at the timing of P8, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. At this timing, when the performance control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m, processing is performed to end the changing performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing pattern ("248"), and the first lamp pattern stops in a losing pattern (off) (see FIG. 129 (h)).

After that, at the timing of P9, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the variable display of the first special symbol begins. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first hold number U1 displayed on the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation, and one hold icon T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B shifts toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation and is displayed as the icon TH. In addition, the display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern begins to change, and the performance pattern 70a begins to scroll after a preparatory operation (see FIG. 129 (i)).

Next, at the timing of P10, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the icon change effect begins. Specifically, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first pending memory for which the effect control unit 130m was unable to properly receive the winning command) changes to a blue character icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, the background image continues to scroll, and the display of the effect pattern 70a has started to change, so that the icon TH is rotating (effect operation) (see FIG. 129(j)).

After that, if the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon TH is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a stops being displayed, and the icon change performance ends.

In addition, if the performance control unit 130m is able to successfully receive the commands (award winning command, stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m at the timings of P2 to P4, but the display/audio control unit 140 and lamp/drive control unit 150 are unable to successfully receive the performance commands sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of these commands, the same processing will be carried out as when the performance control unit 130m is unable to successfully receive the commands (award winning command, stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m.

Here, we have explained the case where the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "1" at timing P5, but the basic flow will be the same as that explained above if the first reserved number U1 changes from "0" to "0", if the first reserved number U1 changes from "2" to "2", if the first reserved number U1 changes from "3" to "3", in other words, if the reserved number stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m and the reserved number stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m are the same.

In this way, according to specific example 16 shown in Figures 128 to 129, when a predetermined number (e.g., one) of reserved icons (first reserved information) is displayed in the reserved icon display area 70C, if the performance control unit 130m receives a start command for variable display that causes the reserved number to reach the predetermined number, the performance control unit 130m displays a number of reserved icons that is one more than the predetermined number (e.g., two), and then shifts the display of these reserved icons to display the predetermined number of reserved icons. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. It also reduces the sense of discomfort felt when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the reserved number, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to specific example 16 shown in Figures 128 to 129, when the sub-first hold display 83 or the first hold number display area 70E is displaying a predetermined number (e.g., 1) of reserved numbers, if the performance control unit 130m receives a start command for the display to change so that the reserved number becomes the predetermined number, the reserved number is displayed as the predetermined number, without displaying a number that is one more than the predetermined number (e.g., 2). This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, since the accurate reserved number is displayed instantly, it is possible to quickly inform the player of the reserved number.

In addition, according to specific example 16 shown in Figures 128 to 129, if the performance control unit 130m receives a start command for the variable display that causes the reserved number to become "0" while the reserved icon (first reserved information) is not displayed in the reserved icon display area 70C but the icon is displayed, the reserved icon is displayed with one more than "0" (for example, one), and then the reserved icon is shifted to the non-display state. This allows the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m to work together smoothly. It also reduces the discomfort felt when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the reserved number, making it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 128 to 129, when the sub-first hold indicator 83 or the first hold number display area 70E is displaying a hold number of "0", if the performance control unit 130m receives a command to start the variable display that changes the hold number to "0", the hold number is displayed (maintained) as "0" without displaying a hold number that is one more than "0" (for example, 1). This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, since the accurate hold number is displayed instantly, it is possible to quickly inform the player of the hold number.

(Example 17 of when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A specific example 17 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described with reference to Fig. 130 and Fig. 131. Fig. 130 is a timing chart showing the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally, and Fig. 131(a) to (f) are performance examples corresponding to (a) to (f) in the timing chart of Fig. 130.

First, at the timing of P0, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the display of the first special symbol begins to change. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol change pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1", and processing is performed to start the change performance.

At this time, the first hold number displayed on the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the first hold number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" with one frame of non-animation, and the two hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one being displayed as the icon TH. Also, the display of the performance pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and first lamp pattern starts to change, but the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after a preparatory operation.

Next, at the timing of P1, when the shift display of the reserved icon T1 is completed, the look-ahead zone performance (normal zone performance) and the icon change performance are started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the word "ZONE" scrolls left and right is displayed, and zone BGM is output. Also, the first reserved icon T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B changes to a blue character icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the performance pattern 70a has started, so the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating (performance operation) (see FIG. 131(a)).

Then, at the timing of P2, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2" as a result of the game ball winning in the first starting hole 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 changes from "1" to "2". If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting hole winning designation command (pre-reading designation command)) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, no processing is performed to update the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m, and it remains at "1" (see FIG. 131(b)).

After that, at the timing of P3, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3" as a result of the game ball winning in the first starting hole 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 changes from "2" to "3". If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting hole winning designation command (pre-reading designation command)) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, no processing is performed to update the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m, and it remains at "1" (see FIG. 131(b)).

Next, at the timing of P4, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4" as a result of the game ball winning in the first starting hole 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 changes from "3" to "4". If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting hole winning designation command (pre-reading designation command)) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, no processing is performed to update the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m, and it remains at "1" (see FIG. 131(b)).

Then, at timing P5, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("164"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swaying (swaying display) to move up and down the predetermined stopping position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swaying motion (performance action). Also, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation motion (performance action) of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see Figure 131 (c)).

After that, at the timing of P6, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. If the performance control unit 130m does not properly receive the stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern are extended. In addition, the zone performance (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained and the look-ahead zone performance continues, and the blue character icon is maintained and the icon change performance continues (see FIG. 131 (d)).

After that, at the timing of P7, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the variable display of the first special symbol begins. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "3", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first hold number displayed on the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" with one frame of non-animation, and hold icons T1 (CD icons) are additionally displayed (displayed at normal size from the beginning) in the second to fourth positions in the first hold icon display area 70B with one frame of non-animation. In addition, all performance patterns 70a (performance patterns 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in past variable performances), including performance patterns 70a that are out of alignment with the stopping position, are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stopping position (see Figure 131 (e)).

The necessary number of four reserved icons T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are then shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one being displayed as the icon TH. Then, the display of the changing effect pattern 70a begins while the changing display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern continues, and the display pattern 70a begins scrolling after a preparatory operation (see FIG. 131(e)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the shift display of the reserved icon T1 is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C is changed to a red character icon and a change sound is output. At this time, the background image continues to scroll and the display of the effect pattern 70a has started to change, so that the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (effect action) (see FIG. 131(f)).

After that, if the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon TH is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a stops being displayed, and the icon change performance ends.

In addition, if the performance control unit 130m is able to successfully receive the commands (award winning command, stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m at the timings P2 to P6, but the display/audio control unit 140 and lamp/drive control unit 150 are unable to successfully receive the performance commands sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of these commands, the same processing will be carried out as in the case where the performance control unit 130m is unable to successfully receive the commands (award winning command, stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m.

Here, we have explained the case where the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "3" at the timing of P7, but the basic flow will be the same as that explained above if the first reserved number U1 changes from "1" to "2", if the first reserved number U1 changes from "0" to "2", if the first reserved number U1 changes from "0" to "1", in other words, if the reserved number stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m is greater than the reserved number stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m.

In this way, according to specific example 17 shown in Figures 130 to 131, when a predetermined number (e.g., one) of reserved icons (first reserved information) is displayed in the reserved icon display area, if the performance control unit 130m receives a start command for variable display in which the reserved number becomes a specific number (e.g., two) that is greater than the predetermined number, the performance control unit 130m displays a number of reserved icons that is one more than the specific number (e.g., three), and then shifts the display of these reserved icons to display the specific number of reserved icons. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. It also reduces the discomfort felt when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the reserved number, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to specific example 17 shown in Figures 130 to 131, when the sub-first hold indicator 83 or the first hold number display area 70E is displaying a predetermined number (e.g., 1) of reserved numbers, if the performance control unit 130m receives a start command for the display to change to a specific number (e.g., 2) that is greater than the predetermined number, the reserved number is displayed as the specific number, without displaying a reserved number that is one more than the specific number (e.g., 3). This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, since the accurate reserved number is displayed instantly, it is possible to quickly inform the player of the reserved number.

In addition, according to specific example 17 shown in Figures 130 to 131, if the performance control unit 130m receives a start command for the variable display in which the number of reserved items becomes a predetermined number (e.g., 1) while the reserved icon (first reserved information) is not displayed in the reserved icon display area, the performance control unit 130m displays a number of reserved icons that is one more than the predetermined number (e.g., 2) and then shifts the display of these reserved icons to display the predetermined number of reserved icons. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. It also reduces the discomfort felt when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reserved items, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to specific example 17 shown in Figures 130 to 131, when the sub-first hold indicator 83 or the first hold number display area 70E is displaying a hold number of "0", if the performance control unit 130m receives a command to start the variable display that causes the hold number to become a predetermined number (for example, 1), the hold number is displayed as the predetermined number, without displaying a hold number that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, 2). This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, since the accurate hold number is displayed instantly, it is possible to quickly inform the player of the hold number.

According to the specific example described above, if the performance control unit 130m cannot properly receive the stop command while the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the temporary stop period of the performance symbol 70a, the period during which the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol change, and the period during which the BGM is output during the change are extended (continued) longer than normal. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of periods during which no performance is being performed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example described above, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon and the icon in question continue during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a. This makes it possible to prevent the performance pattern 70a from becoming extremely motionless and boring during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example described above, the look-ahead preview performance (icon change performance, look-ahead zone performance) continues (is executed) even during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a. Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally, the look-ahead preview performance will not end, and it is possible to increase the interest of the player by avoiding inconveniences that may increase the player's dissatisfaction.

In addition, according to the specific example described above, even if the look-ahead preview performance (icon change performance, look-ahead zone performance) is continued (executed) during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a, the preview mode of the look-ahead preview performance (icon type, zone performance type) does not change during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a. Therefore, there is no abnormality in the progress of the look-ahead preview performance, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game by avoiding inconveniences that may increase the player's dissatisfaction.

In addition, according to the specific example described above, if the performance control unit 130m successfully receives a start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display is started after all performance patterns 70a (performance patterns 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable display), including the performance patterns 70a that are shifted from the predetermined stop position, are displayed at the stop position (instantly derived and displayed). Therefore, the appearance at the start of the variable display can be made better than when the variable display starts with the performance patterns 70a shifted from the stop position, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example described above, if the performance control unit 130m normally receives a start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the lamp pattern are not stopped and continue to change. This eliminates the need for complicated processing to stop the special pattern TZ and the lamp pattern, making it possible to reduce the control load. Even if the performance pattern 70a is displayed at the stop position (instantaneous derived display), the special pattern TZ and the lamp pattern can inform the player that a changing performance is in progress, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example described above, if the performance control unit 130m successfully receives a start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a, the icon is erased in a shorter time (one frame of non-animation) than the normal time (10 frames of animation when a stop command is received). This makes it difficult for a newly executed variable performance to be hindered by the erasure of the icon, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Also, according to the specific example described above, if the performance control unit 130m receives a start command normally during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a during which the look-ahead preview performance (icon change performance, look-ahead zone performance) continues (is executed), the look-ahead preview performance can also be executed in the newly executed variable performance. Therefore, even if a communication abnormality occurs that prevents the performance control unit 130m from receiving the command normally, the look-ahead preview performance will not end, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game by avoiding inconveniences that may increase the player's dissatisfaction.

Also, according to the specific example described above, if the performance control unit 130m receives a start command normally during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a during which the look-ahead preview performance (icon change performance, look-ahead zone performance) continues (is executed), it is possible to execute a performance whose content corresponds to the scenario of the look-ahead preview performance in the newly executed variable performance. Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally, there will be no abnormality in the progress of the look-ahead preview performance, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game by avoiding inconveniences that may increase the player's dissatisfaction.

(Specific example 18 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 18 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described with reference to Fig. 132 and Fig. 133. Fig. 132 is a timing chart showing the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally, and Fig. 133(a) to (j) are performance examples corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart of Fig. 132.

First, at the timing of P0, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the display of the first special symbol begins to change. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol change pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1", and processing is performed to start the change performance.

At this time, the first hold number U1 displayed on the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the first hold number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the two hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one being displayed as the icon TH. Also, the display of the performance pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and first lamp pattern begins to change, but the performance pattern 70a begins to scroll after a preparatory operation.

Next, at timing P1, the shifting display of the reserved icon is completed. At this time, the background image continues to scroll and the display of the performance pattern 70a has started to change, so the reserved icon and the icon in question are rotating (performing).

Then, at the timing of P2, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2" as a result of the game ball entering the first starting hole 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 changes from "1" to "2". If the performance control unit 130m cannot properly receive the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting hole winning designation command (pre-reading designation command)) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, no processing is performed to update the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m, and it will remain at "1".

At this time, since the winning command to set the first reserved number U1 to "2" has not been received, the first reserved number U1 displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first reserved number display area 70E remains at "1", and the reserved icon T1 is not displayed in the second position corresponding to the first reserved number "2" in the first reserved icon display area 70B (see Figure 133 (a)).

After that, at the timing of P3, a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, and the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3". At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 changes from "2" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting hole winning designation command (pre-reading designation command)) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "3".

At this time, the first hold number U1 displayed on the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and no hold icon T1 is displayed in the second position of the first hold number U1 corresponding to "2" in the first hold icon display area 70B where the winning command was not received, and one hold icon T1 is additionally displayed (gradually increasing from a tiny size) as a 10-frame animation in the third position corresponding to "3" in the first hold number U1 (see FIG. 133(b)).

Next, at timing P4, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("814"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swaying (swaying display) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swaying motion (performance action). In addition, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating (performance action) (see Figure 133 (c)).

Then, at the timing of P5, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. When the performance control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing is performed to end the changing performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing pattern ("248"), and the first lamp pattern stops in a losing pattern (e.g., off) (see FIG. 133(d)).

After that, at the timing of P6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the variable display of the first special symbol begins. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "2", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" with one frame of non-animation, and the second reserved icon T1 corresponding to the first reserved number "2" in the first reserved icon display area 70B for which the winning command could not be received is additionally displayed as one frame of non-animation (displayed in normal size from the beginning), and the three displayed reserved icons T1 are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, with the first one being displayed as the icon TH. Also, the display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern starts to change, and the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after a preparatory operation (see FIG. 133(e)).

After that, at the timing of P7, the shift display of the reserved icon T1 is completed. At this time, the background image continues to scroll and the display of the performance pattern 70a has started to change, so the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performing) (see FIG. 133(f)).

Next, at timing P8, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("225"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swaying (swaying display) to move up and down the predetermined stopping position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swaying motion (performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation motion (performance action) of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see Figure 133 (g)).

Then, at the timing of P9, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. If the performance control unit 130m successfully receives a stop command (special symbol determination command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing is performed to end the changing performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing pattern ("248"), and the first lamp pattern stops in a losing pattern (e.g., off) (see FIG. 133 (h)).

After that, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the variable display of the first special symbol begins. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance pattern designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first hold number U1 displayed on the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the first hold number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the two hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one being displayed as the icon TH. Also, the display of the performance pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and first lamp pattern begins to change, and the performance pattern 70a begins to scroll after a preparatory operation (see FIG. 133 (i)).

Next, at the timing of P11, when the shift display of the reserved icon T1 is completed, the icon change performance begins. Specifically, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first reserved memory for which the performance control unit 130m was unable to properly receive the winning command) changes to a blue character icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, the background image continues to scroll, and the display of the performance pattern 70a has started to change, so that the icon Th is rotating (performance operation) (see FIG. 133(j)).

After that, if the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon TH is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a stops being displayed, and the icon change performance ends.

In addition, if at the timing of P2, the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the command (a command when a prize is won) sent from the main control unit 110m, but the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 are unable to successfully receive the performance command sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, the same processing will be carried out as when the performance control unit 130m is unable to successfully receive the command (a command when a prize is won) sent from the main control unit 110m.

Here, we have explained the case where, at the timing of P3, when the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m is "1", a winning command is received that sets the first reserved number to "3". However, the basic flow is also the same as that described above when the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m is "1" and a winning command is received that sets the first reserved number U1 to "4", or when the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m is "0" and a winning command is received that sets the first reserved number U1 to any of "2", "3", or "4".

In this way, according to specific example 18 shown in Figures 132 to 133, when the reserved icon (first reserved information) is not displayed in the area (e.g., the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (e.g., two) of the reserved icon display area, if the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the reserved number becomes a specific number (e.g., three) that is one more than the predetermined number, the reserved icon is not displayed in the area (e.g., the second) corresponding to the predetermined number of the reserved icon display area, but is displayed in the area (e.g., the third) corresponding to the specific number of the reserved icon display area. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. It also makes it possible to prevent the player from recognizing the incorrect reserved number, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to specific example 18 shown in Figures 132 to 133, when the sub-first reserve display 83 or the first reserve number display area 70E is displaying a reserve number that is one less (e.g., one) than a predetermined number (e.g., two), if the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command that causes the reserve number to become a specific number (e.g., three) that is one more than the predetermined number, the specific number of reserved numbers is displayed without displaying the predetermined number of reserved numbers. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, since the accurate reserved number is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly inform the player of the reserved number.

In this way, according to the specific example 18 shown in Figures 132 to 133, when the reserved icon (first reserved information) is not displayed in the area (e.g., the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (e.g., two) of the reserved icon display area, if the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the reserved number becomes a specific number (e.g., four) that is several times more than the predetermined number, the reserved icon is not displayed in the area (e.g., the second) corresponding to the predetermined number of the reserved icon display area, but in the area (e.g., the third) corresponding to the number one less than the specific number, but is displayed in the area (e.g., the fourth) corresponding to the specific number of the reserved icon display area. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. It is also possible to prevent the player from recognizing the incorrect reserved number, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to specific example 18 shown in Figures 132 to 133, when the sub-first reserve display 83 or the first reserve number display area 70E is displaying a reserved number that is one less (e.g., one) than a predetermined number (e.g., two), if the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command that causes the reserved number to become a specific number (e.g., four) that is several times more than the predetermined number, the reserved number is displayed as the specific number, without displaying the reserved number that is one less than the predetermined number. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, since the accurate reserved number is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly inform the player of the reserved number.

In addition, according to the specific example 18 shown in Figures 132 to 133, when the performance control unit 130m receives a start command that causes the reserved number to become the predetermined number while the reserved icon is not displayed in the area (e.g., the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (e.g., two) among the reserved icon display areas and the reserved icon is displayed in the area (e.g., the third) corresponding to a specific number (e.g., three) that is one more than the predetermined number, the reserved icon is additionally displayed in the area (e.g., the second) among the reserved icon display areas corresponding to the predetermined number to display the specific number of reserved icons, and then the reserved icons are shifted to display the predetermined number of reserved icons. This allows the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m to cooperate smoothly. In addition, it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the reserved number, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example 18 shown in FIG. 132 to FIG. 133, when the performance control unit 130m receives a start command that causes the reserved number to be one less than the specific number while the reserved icon is not displayed in the reserved icon display area (e.g., the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (e.g., two) and the area corresponding to a number one more than the predetermined number (e.g., three) and the reserved icon display area corresponding to a specific number (e.g., four) that is several times more than the predetermined number, the reserved icon is additionally displayed in the reserved icon display area (e.g., the second) and the area corresponding to a number one more than the predetermined number (e.g., three) to display the specific number of reserved icons, and then the reserved icons are shifted to display the reserved icons in the number one less than the specific number. This allows the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m to cooperate smoothly. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the reserved number, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to specific example 18 shown in Figures 132 to 133, for an icon corresponding to a first reserved memory for which the performance control unit 130m was unable to properly receive a winning command, the icon change performance is not executed while the icon is displayed as a reserved icon, but the icon change performance can be executed while the icon is displayed. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of the icon change performance not being executed because the winning command was not properly received, thereby making the game more interesting.

In the specific example described above, when the main control board 110 has a predetermined number (four or three) of reserved memories, and an abnormality occurs in the performance control board 130 due to an abnormal or non-received command, the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (first display) continues to display a decreasing number of reserved memories even during the abnormality. Then, after the abnormality occurs, when the main control board 110 has a specific number (a number two or more fewer than the main control board 110) that is less than the predetermined number (four or three) in the reserved memories, and the performance control board 130 receives a command normally, the first image display device 70 (second display) does not display a reserved display that gradually decreases from the predetermined number to the specific number (for example, the reserved icon goes from four to two or one, or from three to one).
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, it is easy to know that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's profits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the specific example described above, the hold display (display of the number of holds, hold icon) makes it possible to perform a pre-reading performance (advance notification) that increases the expectation of a jackpot in advance, and when an abnormality occurs in the performance control board 130 due to an abnormal or non-received command while the hold display is executing the pre-reading performance, the hold display can continue to be executed until the command is received normally.
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the player's attention and prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, a pre-reading effect (advance warning) is made possible by using a background display (for example, a background image different from that normally used, such as a pre-reading zone background) to increase the expectation of a jackpot in advance, and when an abnormality occurs in the effect control board 130 due to an abnormal or non-received command while a pre-reading effect using the background display is being executed, the pre-reading effect using the background display can be continued until the command is received normally.
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the player's attention and prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, it is possible to perform a pre-reading effect (advance warning) that increases the expectation of a jackpot in advance by using text display (for example, a caption or text such as "ZONE"), and when an abnormality occurs in the effect control board 130 due to an abnormal reception or non-reception of a command while the pre-reading effect using text display is being executed, it is possible to continue executing the pre-reading effect using text display until the command is received normally.
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the player's attention and prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, the expectation level display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF) makes it possible to perform a pre-reading performance (advance warning) that increases the expectation level of a jackpot in advance, and when an abnormality occurs in the performance control board 130 due to an abnormal or non-received command while the pre-reading performance based on the expectation level display is being executed, it is possible to continue executing the pre-reading performance based on the expectation level display until the command is received normally.
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the player's attention and prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, there is a pre-reading effect (for example, board or frame devices such as the first movable member 70, motions such as vibration or light emission of the operation buttons, chance eyes of the same color in the performance pattern, etc.) that can be executed during a portion of each of the multiple variable performances in the period before the reach, as a pre-notification to increase the expectation of a jackpot in advance, and when an abnormality occurs in the performance control board 130 due to erroneous or non-reception of a command while the pre-reading effect is being executed, it is possible to continue executing the pre-reading effect until the command is received normally.
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the player's attention and prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, it is possible to perform a pre-reading performance (advance notification) to increase the expectation of a jackpot in advance, and if an abnormality occurs in the performance control board 130 due to erroneous or non-reception of a command while the pre-reading performance is being executed, and there is a jackpot in the pending memory that the performance control board 130 had missed, the pre-reading performance can continue to be executed by the pending display until the command is received normally, and a designated jackpot opening can be opened.
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the player's attention and prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, there is a pre-reading effect (for example, board or frame devices such as the first movable member 70, movements such as vibration or light emission of the operation buttons, chance eyes of the same color in the performance pattern, etc.) that can be executed during a portion of each of the multiple variable performances in the period before the reach, as a pre-notification to increase the expectation of a jackpot in advance, and after an abnormality occurs in the performance control board 130 due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command during the execution of the pre-reading effect, if the command is received normally, the pre-reading effect that was scheduled to be executed consecutively will not be executed again.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, it is easy to know that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's profits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the specific example described above, there is a pre-reading effect (for example, a board role or frame role such as the first movable member 70, motion such as vibration or light emission of the operation button, chance eyes of the same color in the performance pattern, etc.) that can be executed in a part of each of the multiple variable performances in the period before the reach as a pre-notification to increase the expectation of a big hit in advance. After an abnormality occurs in the performance control board 130 due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command during the execution of consecutive pre-reading effects spanning multiple pattern changes based on the first reserved memory, if a command corresponding to the second reserved memory stored after the first reserved memory is normally received, the pre-reading effects that were scheduled to be executed consecutively based on the predetermined reserved memory are not executed from the next.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, it is easy to know that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's profits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the specific example described above, when the main control board 110 has a predetermined number (four or three) of reserved memories and an abnormality occurs in the performance control board 130 due to an abnormal or non-received command, the first special symbol reserved display 63 continues to display a decrease in the reserved number (first display) even during the abnormality. Then, after the abnormality occurs, when the main control board 110 has a specific number (a number two or more fewer than the main control board 110) of reserved memories that is less than the predetermined number (four or three) and the performance control board 130 receives a command normally, the reserved display (second display, for example, the reserved icon changes from four to two or one, or from three to one) that gradually decreases from the predetermined number to the specific number is not displayed in the reserved number display area 70B, 70D of the first image display device 70. In response to this, the hold number display area 70F, 70E of the first image display device 70 does not display a hold display (third display, for example, hold numbers) that gradually decreases from a predetermined number to a specific number, but instead changes to a hold display of a specific number.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, it is easy to know that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's profits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs in the performance control board 130 due to erroneous or non-received reception of a command, the performance pattern 70a whose changing performance has ended can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state (oscillating state), and even if a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the changing performance of the performance pattern 70a, the temporarily stopped state (oscillating state) of the performance pattern 70a is continued, and the customer waiting demo performance is not executed.
Therefore, it becomes easy to know that an abnormality has occurred, and it is possible to prevent the player's profit from being damaged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs in the performance control board 130 due to erroneous reception or non-reception of a command, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the performance pattern 70a. Then, after an abnormality occurs in the performance control board 130 due to erroneous reception or non-reception of a command during the execution of a look-ahead performance based on the first reserved memory, when a command corresponding to the second reserved memory stored after the first reserved memory is normally received, the normally received variable display of the performance pattern 70a does not continue the look-ahead performance (advance notification) that was scheduled to be executed consecutively for the first reserved memory, or changes the look-ahead performance to a display with a low expectation, or erases the look-ahead performance.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, it is easy to know that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's profits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned specific example, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command in the performance control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the performance pattern 70a. Then, after an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command in the performance control board 130 during the execution of a look-ahead performance by a background display (for example, a background image different from that normally used, such as a look-ahead zone background) based on the first reserved memory, when a command corresponding to a second reserved memory stored after the first reserved memory is normally received, in the normally received variable display of the performance pattern 70a, the look-ahead performance (advance notification) by the background display that was scheduled to be executed consecutively for the first reserved memory is not continued, or the look-ahead performance is changed to a display with a low expectation, or the look-ahead performance is erased.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, it is easy to know that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's profits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned specific example, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command in the performance control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the performance pattern 70a. Then, after an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command in the performance control board 130 during the execution of a pre-reading performance by character display (for example, a caption or character such as "ZONE") based on the first reserved memory, when a command corresponding to the second reserved memory stored after the first reserved memory is normally received, in the normally received variable display of the performance pattern 70a, the pre-reading performance (advance notification) by character display that was scheduled to be executed consecutively for the first reserved memory is not continued, or the pre-reading performance is changed to a display with a low expectation, or the pre-reading performance is erased.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, it is easy to know that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's profits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned specific example, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command in the performance control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the performance pattern 70a. Then, after an abnormality occurs in the performance control board 130 due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command during the execution of a look-ahead performance by the expectation display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF) based on the first reserved memory, when a command corresponding to the second reserved memory stored after the first reserved memory is normally received, in the normally received variable display of the performance pattern 70a, the look-ahead performance (advance notification) by the expectation display that was scheduled to be executed consecutively for the first reserved memory is not continued, or the look-ahead performance is changed to a display with a low expectation, or the look-ahead performance is erased.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, it is easy to know that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's profits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned specific example, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command in the performance control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the performance pattern 70a. As a pre-notification to increase the expectation of a big win in advance, there are pre-reading performances (for example, board role objects or frame role objects such as the first movable member 70, operation such as vibration or light emission of the operation button, chance eyes of the same color of the performance pattern, etc.) that can be executed in a part of each variable performance in a plurality of variable performances in a period before the reach. Then, based on the first pending memory, if an abnormality occurs in the performance control board 130 due to erroneous reception or non-reception of a command during the execution of a look-ahead performance which is executed during a portion of each of the multiple variable performances in the period before the reach based on the first pending memory, and then a command corresponding to the second pending memory stored after the first pending memory is normally received, the normally received variable display of the performance pattern 70a does not continue with the look-ahead performance (advance notification) which was scheduled to be executed consecutively for the first pending memory, or changes the look-ahead performance to a display with a lower expectation level, or erases the look-ahead performance.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, it is easy to know that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's profits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In addition, when an abnormality occurs in the performance control board 130 due to erroneous or non-reception of a command, and a command (reserved memory) that the performance control board 130 has missed contains a jackpot, if a command corresponding to the jackpot reserved memory or a reserved memory stored after the jackpot reserved memory is normally received, the changing display of the normally received performance pattern 70a may not continue with the look-ahead performance (advance notification) based on the expectation level display that was scheduled to be executed continuously for the first reserved memory, or the look-ahead performance may be changed to a display with a lower expectation level, or the look-ahead performance may be erased.
In this case, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, it is easy to know that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's profits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs in the performance control board 130 due to erroneous reception or non-reception of a command, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the performance pattern 70a. Then, after an abnormality occurs in the performance control board 130 due to erroneous reception or non-reception of a command during the execution of a look-ahead performance based on the first reserved memory, when a command corresponding to the first reserved memory or the second reserved memory stored before the first reserved memory is normally received, the normally received variable display of the performance pattern 70a makes it possible to continue to execute the look-ahead performance (advance notification) that was scheduled to be executed consecutively for the first reserved memory.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's profits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs due to erroneous reception or non-reception of a command in the performance control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the performance pattern 70a. Then, after an abnormality occurs in the performance control board 130 due to erroneous reception or non-reception of a command during the execution of a look-ahead performance based on the first reserved memory, when a command corresponding to the first reserved memory or the second reserved memory stored before the first reserved memory is normally received, the normally received variable display of the performance pattern 70a does not continue to execute the look-ahead performance (advance notification) that was scheduled to be executed continuously for the first reserved memory.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reserved balls. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned specific example, when an abnormality occurs in the performance control board 130 due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the performance pattern 70a. Then, after an abnormality occurs in the performance control board 130 due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command during the execution of a pre-reading performance by a background display (for example, a background image different from that normally used, such as a pre-reading zone background) based on the first reserved memory, when a command corresponding to the first reserved memory or a second reserved memory stored before the first reserved memory is normally received, the normally received variable display of the performance pattern 70a can continue to execute the pre-reading performance (advance notification) by the background display that was scheduled to be executed consecutively for the first reserved memory.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's profits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned specific example, when an abnormality occurs in the performance control board 130 due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the performance pattern 70a. Then, after an abnormality occurs in the performance control board 130 due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command during the execution of a pre-reading performance by a background display (for example, a background image different from that normally used, such as a pre-reading zone background) based on the first reserved memory, when a command corresponding to the first reserved memory or a second reserved memory stored before the first reserved memory is normally received, the normally received variable display of the performance pattern 70a does not continue to execute the pre-reading performance (advance notification) by the background display that was scheduled to be executed consecutively for the first reserved memory.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reserved balls. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned specific example, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command in the performance control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the performance pattern 70a. Then, after an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command in the performance control board 130 during the execution of a pre-reading performance by character display (for example, a caption or character such as "ZONE") based on the first reserved memory, when a command corresponding to the first reserved memory or the second reserved memory stored before the first reserved memory is normally received, the normally received variable display of the performance pattern 70a can continue to execute the pre-reading performance (advance notification) by character display that was scheduled to be executed consecutively for the first reserved memory.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's profits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned specific example, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command in the performance control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the performance pattern 70a. Then, after an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command in the performance control board 130 during the execution of a pre-reading performance by character display (for example, a caption or character such as "ZONE") based on the first reserved memory, when a command corresponding to the first reserved memory or the second reserved memory stored before the first reserved memory is normally received, the normally received variable display of the performance pattern 70a does not continue to execute the pre-reading performance (advance notification) by character display that was scheduled to be executed consecutively for the first reserved memory.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reserved balls. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned specific example, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command in the performance control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the performance pattern 70a. Then, after an abnormality occurs in the performance control board 130 due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command during the execution of a look-ahead performance by the expectation degree display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF) based on the first reserved memory, when a command corresponding to the first reserved memory or the second reserved memory stored before the first reserved memory is normally received, the normally received variable display of the performance pattern 70a can continue to execute the look-ahead performance (advance notification) by the expectation degree display that was scheduled to be executed consecutively for the first reserved memory.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's profits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned specific example, when an abnormality occurs in the performance control board 130 due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the performance pattern 70a. Then, after an abnormality occurs in the performance control board 130 due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command during the execution of a look-ahead performance by the expectation degree display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF) based on the first reserved memory, when a command corresponding to the first reserved memory or the second reserved memory stored before the first reserved memory is normally received, the normally received variable display of the performance pattern 70a does not continue to execute the look-ahead performance (advance notification) by the expectation degree display that was scheduled to be executed continuously for the first reserved memory.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reserved balls. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned specific example, as a pre-reading performance (advance notification) to increase the expectation of a jackpot in advance, for example, a reserve display (display of the number of reserves, a reserve icon), a background display (for example, a background image different from that normally used, such as a pre-reading zone background), a character display (for example, a caption or character such as "ZONE"), an expectation display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF), a board role or frame role such as the first movable member 70, an operation such as vibration or light emission of an operation button, a chance eye of the same color of a performance pattern, etc. can be combined and executed. When an abnormality occurs in the performance control board 130 due to an abnormal reception or non-reception of a command during the execution of multiple pre-reading performances, the first pre-reading performance (for example, a reserve display) of the multiple pre-reading performances can be continuously executed until the command is normally received, while the second pre-reading performance (for example, a background display or a performance of the first movable member 70) of the multiple pre-reading performances is not continuously executed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's profits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned specific example, as a pre-reading performance (advance notification) to increase the expectation of a jackpot in advance, for example, a reserve display (display of the number of reserves, a reserve icon), a background display (for example, a background image different from that normally used, such as a pre-reading zone background), a character display (for example, a caption or character such as "ZONE"), an expectation display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF), a board role or frame role such as the first movable member 70, an operation such as vibration or light emission of an operation button, a chance eye of the same color of a performance pattern, etc. can be combined and executed. When an abnormality occurs in the performance control board 130 due to an abnormal reception or non-reception of a command during the execution of multiple pre-reading performances, the first pre-reading performance (for example, a reserve display) of the multiple pre-reading performances can be continuously executed until the command is normally received, while the second pre-reading performance (for example, a background display or a performance of the first movable member 70) of the multiple pre-reading performances is not continuously executed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's profits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned specific example, as a pre-reading performance (pre-notification) to increase the expectation of a big win in advance, for example, a reserved display (display of the reserved number, reserved icon), a background display (for example, a background image different from that normally used, such as a pre-reading zone background), a character display (for example, a caption or character such as "ZONE"), an expectation display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF), a board role or frame role such as the first movable member 70, an operation such as vibration or light emission of an operation button, a chance eye of the same color of a performance pattern, etc. can be combined and executed. When an abnormality occurs in the performance control board 130 due to an abnormal reception or non-reception of a command during the execution of the multiple pre-reading performances, the first pre-reading performance (for example, reserved display) executed using the first image display device 70 can be continuously executed among the multiple pre-reading performances until the command is normally received, while the second pre-reading performance (for example, the operation performance of the first movable member 70, etc.) among the multiple pre-reading performances is not continuously executed among the multiple pre-reading performances.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's profits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned specific example, as a pre-reading performance (advance notification) to increase the expectation of a jackpot in advance, for example, a reserve display (display of the number of reserves, a reserve icon), a background display (for example, a background image different from that normally used, such as a pre-reading zone background), a character display (for example, a caption or character such as "ZONE"), an expectation display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF), a board role or frame role such as the first movable member 70, an operation such as vibration or light emission of an operation button, a chance eye of the same color of a performance pattern, etc. can be combined and executed. After an abnormality occurs in the performance control board 130 due to an abnormal reception or non-reception of a command during the execution of multiple pre-reading performances, if a command is normally received, the first pre-reading performance (for example, a reserve display) of the multiple pre-reading performances can be continuously executed, while the second pre-reading performance (for example, a background display or a performance of the first movable member 70) of the multiple pre-reading performances is not continuously executed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's profits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned specific example, as a pre-reading performance (pre-notification) to increase the expectation of a big win in advance, for example, a reserved display (display of the reserved number, reserved icon), a background display (for example, a background image different from that normally used, such as a pre-reading zone background), a character display (for example, a caption or character such as "ZONE"), an expectation display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF), a board role or frame role such as the first movable member 70, an operation such as vibration or light emission of an operation button, a chance eye of the same color of a performance pattern, etc. can be combined and executed. When an abnormality occurs in the performance control board 130 due to an abnormal reception or non-reception of a command during the execution of the multiple pre-reading performances, and then the command is normally received, the first pre-reading performance (for example, reserved display) executed using the first image display device 70 among the multiple pre-reading performances can be continuously executed, while the second pre-reading performance (for example, the operation performance of the first movable member 70, etc.) among the multiple pre-reading performances executed using a device other than the first image display device 70 is not continuously executed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's profits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned specific example, when the performance control board 130 receives an abnormal or non-received stop command (special pattern determination command) while there is a reserved memory, the performance of the performance pattern 70a in the first image display device 70 does not start, and the performance pattern 70a that has stopped changing is temporarily stopped in a swinging state. At this time, even if the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the display of the reserved icon T1 corresponding to the reserved memory continues, and the operation performance of the identification part (number) and the effect (EF) associated with the character that constitutes the performance pattern 70a is executed.
Therefore, even if the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, it is possible to maintain the player's interest and prevent a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

In the specific example described above, if the performance control board 130 receives an abnormal or non-received stop command (special pattern determination command) while there is a reserved memory, the performance of the performance pattern 70a in the first image display device 70 does not start, and the performance pattern 70a that has stopped changing is temporarily stopped in a swinging state. At this time, even if the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the display of the reserved icon T1 corresponding to the reserved memory continues, and the action performance of a part of the decoration (for example, a bar-shaped image SG) associated with the character that constitutes the performance pattern 70a is executed.
Therefore, even if the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, it is possible to maintain the player's interest and prevent a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

In the above-mentioned specific example, when the performance control board 130 receives an abnormality or does not receive a stop command (special pattern determination command) while there is a reserved memory, the performance of the performance pattern 70a in the first image display device 70 does not start, and the performance pattern 70a that has stopped changing is temporarily stopped in a swinging state. At this time, even if the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the display of the reserved icon T corresponding to the reserved memory continues, and the operation performance of the reserved icon T is executed.
Therefore, even if the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, it is possible to maintain the player's interest and prevent a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

When the number of reserved items stored in the main control board 110 is less than the number of reserved items stored in the performance control board 130 by two or more, the number of reserved items displayed on the liquid crystal display (first image display device, second image display device) is not gradually reduced by the number of reserved items that differs, but is instead rewritten to a number of reserved items corresponding to the number of reserved items in the command input from the main control board 110 main.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reserved balls. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Examples of advance notifications (pre-reading effects) that increase the likelihood of hitting a jackpot include, for example, changes in reserved status, display of characters for reserved status changes, changes in text display for reserved status changes, text display (captions) suggesting a transition to a mode consisting of multiple types, changes in background color, changes in background, return of characters that have appeared, appearance of new characters, indication of expectation levels in multiple types (colors, effects, characters, etc.), and effects that perform predetermined effects (button vibrations, movement of frame/board parts, effects, lightning, text display, specific sounds, lighting of predetermined lamps) in a first period from the start of the fluctuation (before the reach) with multiple fluctuation effects, all of which may be executed in parallel.

If the performance control board 130 receives the next or subsequent stop command normally after passing through a state in which the stop command has been received abnormally or not at all, the performance pattern 70a will be displayed as still (full stop) and display processing will be executed according to the command.

Even if the performance control board 130 abnormally receives or does not receive a stop command, it is sufficient to display a background image corresponding to each of the multiple performance modes. In this case, the hold, pseudo, group preview, etc. are displayed in a common display format (shape and color) in the multiple performance modes, but the expectation level may differ depending on the performance mode. For example, the operation images of the operation buttons, the operation images of the operation means such as levers, the display of the light guide plate, the title display, etc. are displayed in a format that differs in the expectation level for a jackpot depending on the performance mode.

If the performance control board 130 receives the next command normally after an abnormal or non-received stop command during a look-ahead performance, the look-ahead performance will continue to be displayed in the abnormal or non-received state, but if the next command is received normally, the previous look-ahead performance may not be continued.

If the performance control board 130 receives the next command normally after an abnormal or non-received stop command during a look-ahead performance, the look-ahead performance will continue to be displayed in the abnormal or non-received state, but if the next command is received normally, a new performance (including, for example, a change in the icon at that time) may be executed.

If the performance control board 130 receives the next command normally after an abnormal or non-received stop command during a look-ahead performance, the look-ahead performance will continue to be displayed in the abnormal or non-received state, but if the next command is received normally, it may be possible to change the display mode to one with a lower expectation than the previous look-ahead performance (for example, changing the hold display from a blue icon to a plain display).

If the performance control board 130 receives the next command normally after an abnormal or non-received stop command has been received during a look-ahead performance that changes the background display (mode, stage), the look-ahead performance that changes the background display (mode, stage) may be continued to be displayed in the abnormal or non-received state.

If the performance control board 130 receives the next command normally after an abnormal or non-received state of the stop command during a look-ahead performance in which text display (e.g., captions) is displayed, the look-ahead performance in which text display (captions) is displayed may continue to be displayed in the abnormal or non-received state.

If the performance control board 130 receives the next command normally after an abnormal or non-received stop command has been received during a look-ahead performance that displays an expected value display (color change, effect, hold), the look-ahead performance that displays an expected value display (color change, effect, hold) may be continued in the abnormal or non-received state.

When a command of the performance control board 130 is missed, it is not limited to displaying a part of the multiple performance patterns 70a after the variable performance has ended in a temporary stop state (swaying state), but it is also possible to display a part of the multiple performance patterns 70a after the variable performance has ended in a temporary stop state (swaying state) and display the remaining part of the multiple performance patterns 70a in a permanent stop state (static state). For example, when a command of the performance control board 130 is missed, it is possible to change it appropriately, such as permanently stopping the two left and right performance patterns 70a while temporarily stopping the central performance pattern 70a, or temporarily stopping the two left and right performance patterns 70a while permanently stopping the central performance pattern 70a.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance pattern 70a is configured to swing up and down as a temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, but the performance pattern 70a may also be configured to expand and contract. In this case, when a start command is received during the temporary stop, if the performance pattern 70a is shifted in the direction of shrinking from the stop position (smaller than the normal size) or if it is shifted in the direction of expanding (larger than the normal size), it should be displayed at the stop position in the normal size.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance pattern 70a is made to sway up and down as a temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, but the performance pattern 70a may not sway, and may instead sway so that the decorative parts and number parts extend beyond the base image. In this case, when a start command is received during the temporary stop, if the decorative parts or number parts are shifted in a direction that causes them to extend beyond the base image, it is preferable to make them fit within the base image and display them at the stop position.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a specific game state (time-saving game state, special probability game state), the performance pattern 70a is composed only of a number portion (identification character), so the decorative portion does not flicker (performance action) when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. However, the performance pattern 70a may be composed of a number portion (identification character) and a decorative portion consisting of a pattern effect image, so that the pattern effect image flickers (performance action) when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped.

When a command of the performance control board 130 is missed, a performance may be executed in which the identification unit (number) constituting the performance pattern 70a whose variable performance has ended operates. In this case, it is not limited to executing an action performance on some of the multiple performance patterns 70a whose variable performance has ended, but it is also possible to execute an action performance on some of the multiple performance patterns 70a whose variable performance has ended, while not executing an action performance on the remaining parts of the multiple performance patterns 70a.

When a command of the performance control board 130 is missed, it is advisable to execute a performance in which an effect (e.g., a pattern effect image ZE that decorates the background of the character) associated with the character (e.g., character image CG) that constitutes the performance pattern 70a for which the variable performance has ended operates. In this case, it is not limited to executing an action performance on some of the multiple performance patterns 70a for which the variable performance has ended, but it is also possible to execute an action performance on some of the multiple performance patterns 70a for which the variable performance has ended, while not executing an action performance on the remaining parts of the multiple performance patterns 70a.

When a command of the performance control board 130 is missed, it is advisable to execute a performance in which the decoration (e.g., a bar-shaped image SG that is part of a character) associated with the character (e.g., a character image CG) that constitutes the performance pattern 70a whose variable performance has ended moves. In this case, it is not limited to executing a motion performance on some of the multiple performance patterns 70a whose variable performance has ended, but it is also possible to execute a motion performance on some of the multiple performance patterns 70a whose variable performance has ended, while not executing a motion performance on the remaining parts of the multiple performance patterns 70a.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the decorative part are made to sway (performance operation), but it is also possible to make only one of the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE sway (performance operation).

When a command from the performance control board 130 is missed, it is a good idea to execute a performance in which a hold display (e.g., a hold icon) is activated.

When a command from the performance control board 130 is missed, it is a good idea to execute a performance in which a hold display (e.g., a hold icon) is activated.

When there is a missed command from the performance control board 130, it is advisable to continue varying the special pattern TZ.

After a command is missed by the performance control board 130, when the performance pattern 70a starts to change based on a normal command, the numerical information of the performance pattern 70a and the numerical information of the special pattern TZ may be different.

In addition, in this embodiment, no mention is made of the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 76 during the extension of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, but during the extension of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, at least one of the multiple light-emitting parts that make up the frame lighting device 10 may be in the same state as during the temporary stop before the extension (a light-emitting state with lower brightness than during fluctuation, a light-emitting state with less change and movement than during fluctuation), and at least one of the multiple light-emitting parts that make up the board lighting device 76 may be in the same light-emitting state as during the temporary stop before the extension (a light-emitting state with lower brightness than during fluctuation, a light-emitting state with less change and movement than during fluctuation, or turned off). In this case, when the next start command is received, the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 76 will change (switch) to a light-emitting state that corresponds to the state of fluctuation.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance pattern 70a in a losing mode stops, the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), but it may also be stopped in a losing mode that is the same number as the performance pattern 70a. In addition, when the performance pattern 70a in a jackpot mode stops, the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined jackpot mode ("333"), but it may also be stopped in a jackpot mode that is the same number as the performance pattern 70a.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m while the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the display of the special symbol TZ and the variation of the lamp symbol continues, but it is also possible to instantaneously derive and display the variation as with the performance symbol 70a and then start the display. In this case, for the special symbol TZ, it is preferable to display the special symbol TZ that is deviated from the predetermined stop position at the stop position.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a start command or a customer waiting state designation command is received while the icon TH is displayed, the icon TH is erased with one frame of non-animation, but this need only be shorter than the 10 frames required for erasing the icon TH upon receiving a stop command, the 20 frames required for shifting the display of the hold icon T, and the 10 frames required for additional display of the hold icon, and may be erased with, for example, five frames of animation.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a start command is received while a number of reserved icons greater than the number of reserved icons is displayed, the excess reserved icons T1 are erased with one frame of non-animation; however, any number of frames may be shorter than the 10 frames required to erase the icon T1 upon receiving a stop command, the 20 frames required to shift the display of the reserved icon HI, and the 10 frames required to display an additional reserved icon, and may be erased with, for example, five frames of animation.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance control unit 130m receives a start command that sets the reserved number to a predetermined number, if an inconsistency occurs due to a command abnormality between the reserved number notified by the main control unit 110m and the reserved number stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m (an abnormality in which the numbers are the same, or an abnormality in which there is a deviation in the increasing direction), the performance control unit 130m displays one reserved icon more than the predetermined number, and then displays the predetermined number of reserved icons; however, it is also possible to display the predetermined number of reserved icons as is without displaying one reserved icon more than the predetermined number.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance control unit 130m receives a start command that sets the reserved number to a specified number, if an inconsistency occurs due to a command abnormality between the reserved number notified by the main control unit 110m and the reserved number stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m (an abnormality in which the numbers are the same, or an abnormality in which there is a deviation in the increasing direction), the icon is displayed during the variable performance that is executed in response to receiving the start command, but it is also possible not to display the icon during the variable performance that is executed in response to receiving the start command.

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal icon is a CD icon regardless of the type of presentation mode, but the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon may be different depending on the type of presentation mode or game state. In this case, the special icon may be a character icon regardless of the type of presentation mode, or the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon may be different depending on the type of presentation mode or game state.

In addition, when the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon is made different depending on the type of presentation mode or game state, the operation mode (mode of presentation operation) during the variable presentation may be made different depending on the form of the normal icon. Furthermore, when the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon is made different depending on the type of presentation mode or game state, the operation mode (mode of presentation operation) during the variable presentation may be made different depending on the form of the special icon.

In addition, in this embodiment, only the special icon was displayed as a result of the icon change effect, but a special icon suggesting a change to a special icon (displayed during the process of changing to a special icon) or a specific icon suggesting that a specific reach effect (for example, an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect) will be executed may be provided. In this case, it is advisable to make the shape of the special icon or specific icon and the mode of the performance operation different from the shape of the normal icon or special icon and the mode of the performance operation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the reserved icon is displayed when both the reserved number designation command and the look-ahead designation command as the winning command are received successfully, but it is also possible to display the reserved icon when the reserved number designation command is received but the look-ahead designation command is not received successfully, and not to display the reserved icon when the reserved number designation command is not received successfully but the look-ahead designation command is received successfully, or vice versa. Note that when only one of the reserved number designation command and the look-ahead designation command is received and the reserved icon is displayed, the icon change effect for this reserved icon may not be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the player cannot change the presentation mode by operating the presentation button 17, but it may be possible to change the presentation mode by operating the presentation button 17. In this case, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the presentation pattern 70a based on a command abnormality in which the presentation control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, the operation to change the presentation mode is not accepted, in other words, the change of the presentation mode based on the operation of the presentation button 17 is restricted.

In addition, in this embodiment, the reserved icon change effect is executed without operating the effect button 17, but the reserved icon may be displayed as a button icon that prompts the operation of the effect button 17, and an operation change effect may be executed in which the button icon is changed to any of the normal icon, special icon, and specific icon in response to the operation of the effect button 17 while the button icon that activates the effect button 17 is displayed. In this case, the operation change effect may change the effect button 17 from the first operation mode (non-vibration, non-protruding state in the standby position) to the second operation mode (vibration, protruding state in the effect position) at a predetermined rate. In this case, it is preferable that the rate at which the effect button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the above-mentioned dialogue preview effect or deciding effect is higher than the rate at which the effect button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the operation change effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the only operation unit for performing the operation effects (dialogue preview effect, deciding effect) was the effect button 17, but an operation unit such as an effect lever may be provided separately from the effect button 17, and, for example, an operation promotion effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 or the effect lever may be executed during an effective period that occurs during the SP reach effect, and the operation effect (decisive effect, etc.) may be executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 or the effect lever. In this case, the operation promotion effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 may be executed at a lower rate (or may be executed less frequently) in the deciding effect in the SP reach effect that can only be executed in a specific game state (time-saving game state, special probability game state) than when an SP reach effect that can only be executed in the normal game state is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, during the execution period of the reach performance, an operation notice performance is not executed to indicate the expectation of a jackpot game being executed in response to the operation of the activated performance button 17, but an operation notice performance may be executed during the first half of the reach performance (e.g., during a normal reach) and the second half (e.g., during a SP reach performance). In this case, it is preferable to make the performance button 17 enter the second operation mode (vibration, movement to the performance position) more frequently in the operation notice performance executed during the second half of the reach performance than in the operation notice performance executed during the first half of the reach performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, the expectation of the notice in the jackpot notice performance is not linked to the operation of the movable member, but the expectation of the notice in the jackpot notice performance may be linked to the operation of the movable member. In this case, it is preferable that the movable member is more likely to operate (is easier to operate) when a notice performance with a high expectation of a jackpot is executed during the execution of the variable performance than when a notice performance with a low expectation of a jackpot is executed.

In this embodiment, the first image display device 70 displays the hold icon T1 (T2) in the hold icon display area 70B (70C) as the hold memory, and the hold number display area 70E (70F) displays the hold number. In this way, the hold icon display area 70B (70C) displays the hold number by the number of hold icons T1 (T2) displayed, and the hold number display area 70E (70F) displays the hold number by the numerical information of the hold number. The hold icon T1 (T2) is not limited to a single picture, figure, letter, or symbol as in the "CD" shape of this embodiment, but can be a combination of multiple pictures, figures, letters, symbols, etc., or effects (effect production) or decorations can be attached to the main parts such as pictures, figures, letters, and symbols, and can be configured as appropriate.

The display of the number of reserved balls in the reserved icon change effect is not limited to the reserved icon itself changing, but may be altered to appear to be changing due to the actions of other characters or effects such as props. Note that the timing of changes in the reserved icon change effect is not limited to the specific example described above.

As an example of a pre-reading effect (advance notification) using text display, the word "ZONE" is scrolled left and right, but the text display is not limited to a meaningful string of characters, and can be a symbol, picture, diagram, or a combination of these. Also, there may be multiple text displays, and different text displays may be selected depending on the level of expectation. The text display is not limited to scrolling left and right, and any suitable mode that attracts the player's attention can be adopted, such as zooming in and out, panning, or tilting.

As an example of a look-ahead performance (advance notification) using the expectation display, a color effect has been given, using a blue effect image EF as an example, but it is not limited to color effects, and any other appropriate display can be used, such as a light-emitting effect such as a halo, or an action effect such as being sucked in like a black hole or wind blowing. Furthermore, the expectation display is not limited to being displayed in conjunction with the performance pattern 70a or on the performance pattern 70a itself, but may be displayed in the background or other ways. Furthermore, the expectation display is not limited to being displayed on the first image display device 70, but may be displayed by the light emitted by the role, light-emitting device, or winning device such as the starting gate of the game board, or the role and light-emitting device of the game frame.

The look-ahead effect (advance notification) using the expectation level display may be an effect that is executed only before the reach is reached, or an effect that is executed after the reach is reached. Furthermore, when the expectation level display is executed after the reach is reached, it may be displayed continuously in the manner before the reach is reached, or it may be changed so that it is displayed in a manner different from the manner before the reach is reached.

The predictive performance (advance notification) may proceed according to the drawn scenario, either through variable performance or at an appropriate timing, but a lottery may also be held for each variable performance to determine whether or not progress will occur and whether or not there should be a change in the expectation level, and the performance may proceed according to the results of the lottery.

Examples of typical effects include the pattern effect image ZE that decorates the background of the character, and the color effect exemplified by the blue effect image EF, but other than color effects, other appropriate displays can be used, such as a light-emitting effect such as a halo, or action effects such as being sucked in like a black hole or wind blowing.

In this embodiment, a specific example has been described in which the icon TH is not displayed when the performance control unit 130m returns to a specified state in which the command cannot be received normally after the command is received normally. However, for example, when the command is received normally and the command returns, the icon TH may be displayed and then erased.

As with the aforementioned performance control unit 130m, if the first special pattern reserve display unit 63 is unable to receive a command (signal) normally from the main control unit 110m, a certain state may occur in which the number of reserved balls displayed by the first special pattern reserve display unit 63 differs from the number of reserved balls grasped (stored) by the performance control unit 130m.
That is, the first special symbol reserved display 63 (first display means) can execute a first shift display in which the reserved memory is reduced by one in sequence each time a variable performance starts, and when a command (signal) for a specific number of reserved memories (for example, 2) that is two or more less than the predetermined number is received from the main control unit 110m in a state in which there is a predetermined number of reserved memories (for example, 4), a second shift display can be executed in which the reserved memories are reduced from a predetermined number to a specific number in a reduction manner different from the first shift display (a manner in which the reserved memories are reduced directly from 4 to 2 without passing through 3). In contrast, the first image display device 70 (second display means) controlled by the performance control unit 130m can display the reserved memories being reduced by one in sequence each time a variable performance of the performance pattern 70a ends, regardless of whether the first shift display or the second shift display is executed.
This allows the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m to cooperate smoothly. It also reduces the discomfort felt when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reserved balls. This makes it possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In a specific example, the reserved memory stored (understood) by the performance control unit can be displayed in multiple locations. In this embodiment, the reserved icon display area 70B (70
The reserved memory is displayed in two places, the reserved number display area 70D) and the reserved number display area 70E (70F). For example,
The pending memory may be displayed on each of the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, or in multiple locations on the second image display device 71.

In a specific example, in the reserved icon display area 70B (70D), a first shift display can be executed in which the reserved memory is reduced by one in sequence each time a variable performance is started. This first shift display is displayed such that the reserved icon T1 (T2) is shifted to the next one by one each time a variable performance is started. Also, in a state in which, for example, four reserved icons T1 (T2) are displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B (70D), if the performance control unit 130m receives a command corresponding to, for example, two reserved memories, the reserved icon T1 (T2) is not displayed in the same manner as the first shift display in which the reserved icon T1 (T2) is shifted from four to three and reduced to three, and then shifted from three to two, but a second shift display is performed in which the fourth reserved icon T1 (T2) disappears and then the reserved icon is shifted from three to two. In contrast, in the reserved number display area 70E (70F), which displays reserved memories by reserved numbers (number information), the reserved numbers are displayed to be reduced by one in sequence each time a variable performance is started. When the reserved number display area 70E (70F) displays, for example, the reserved number "4," if the performance control unit 130m receives a command corresponding to, for example, two reserved memories (when the second shift display is executed), the display does not decrease the reserved numbers one by one in order, but instead displays a third shift display that displays the reserved number "2" corresponding to, for example, two reserved memories, starting from the reserved number "4."

As a look-ahead effect (advance notification), it is possible to suggest that there is a high expectation for the special game based on the undetermined reserved memory by executing related effects during a portion of each of multiple variable effects. Examples of "related effects" include effects that use the action or light emitted by the role-playing device on the game frame or game board, actions such as vibration or light emitted by the operation button, and chance eyes of the same color on the performance pattern 70a. Even if the same effect is executed in each variable effect, the content of the effect may differ for each variable effect, for example, by executing a different effect that increases the expectation as the variable effect is repeated.

When a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the first image display device 70 does not increase or decrease despite the reserved memory increasing or decreasing in the main control unit 110m, the related presentation of the look-ahead presentation (advance notification) may or may not be continued. In such a case, by continuing to execute the related presentation, it is possible to attract the interest of the player. Also, by not continuing to execute the related presentation, it is possible to maintain the consistency of the presentation.

For example, when a predetermined state is resolved and normality is restored based on a pending memory stored after the target memory, it is possible to prevent the look-ahead performance based on the target pending memory from being executed as a continuation of the related performance. Also, the related performance of the look-ahead performance based on the target pending memory (for example, a large movement performance of the first movable member 73) may be changed to another related performance with a lower expectation than the related performance (for example, a small movement performance of the first movable member 73). Furthermore, the related performance of the look-ahead performance based on the target pending memory may be erased.

For example, when the predetermined state is resolved and normality is restored based on the pending memory stored before the target memory, a look-ahead performance based on the pending target memory can be executed from the continuation of the related performance. In this case, the player's sense of anticipation can be increased by continuing the look-ahead performance.

For example, when the predetermined state is resolved and normality is restored based on the pending memory stored before the target memory, it is possible to prevent the pre-reading performance based on the pending target memory from being executed as a continuation of the related performance. In this case, the consistency of the performance can be maintained.

(Main control board 130 inspection mode)
For example, in a conventional gaming machine such as that disclosed in JP 2018-118109 A, a drive source for converting a large prize opening and a starting opening from a closed state to an open state is operated by the control of a main control board. However, in conventional gaming machines, when replacing game boards in a gaming parlor or replacing game boards constituting the front side of a game board, it is not easy to generate an operation trigger for the drive source operated by the control of the main control board, and it is difficult to check the operation of these drive sources.
Therefore, the gaming machine 1 shown in Figures 134 to 138 has drive sources (large prize opening SOL, start opening SOL, V distribution SOL) whose operation is controlled by the main control board 110 as a result of play, and the main control board 110 is configured to initially operate the drive sources in a predetermined manner in a pre-start state before transitioning to a playable state in which the game is controlled after power supply is started.
This allows the special electric device, the normal electric device, and the distribution mechanism inside the large prize opening to be operated for a certain period of time limited to the state before the start of play (pre-start state) and their operation to be checked, making it possible to more reliably check installation and inspection after part replacement.

As shown in Figure 134, if a setting change device is installed, a certain period of time after the setting change or setting confirmation is completed is considered to be the pre-start state. In this case, there is a state of preparing to clear the RWM.

As shown in FIG. 135, if the setting change device is not installed, the power is turned on while pressing the RWM clear switch 111a, and the pre-start state is maintained for a certain period of time after pressing the RWM clear switch 111a again. In this case, there is no RWM clear preparation.

As shown in FIG. 136, if the setting change device is not installed, the pre-start state lasts for a certain period of time after the power is turned on while pressing the RWM clear switch 111a. In this case, after the transition to the pre-start state, for example, 7 seconds have elapsed, each solenoid of the mechanism that affects the game result may be turned ON (for example, 0.512 seconds) and OFF (for example, 0.512 seconds) three times, and then the game may be transitioned to a playable state.

As shown in Figure 137, if a setting change device is installed, the pre-start state is when settings are being changed or settings are being confirmed.

As shown in FIG. 138, if the setting change device is not installed, the period from when the power is turned on while pressing the RWM clear switch 111a until the RWM clear switch 111a is pressed again is considered to be the pre-start state. In this case, it is advisable to repeatedly turn on (e.g., 0.512 seconds) and off (e.g., 0.512 seconds) each solenoid of the mechanism that will affect the game result when it transitions to the pre-start state until the RWM clear switch 111a is pressed to transition to a playable state. Note that in this case, there is a state in which RWM clear is being prepared.

During the pre-start state described above, the following are invalid: the payout of prize balls when a game ball enters a winning slot, the operation of the special symbol display device or the special electric device when a game ball enters a starting slot, and the operation of the normal symbol display device or the normal electric device when a game ball passes through a gate or enters a winning slot. In contrast, during the pre-start state, the launch permission signal is output immediately after the power is turned on, so the launch of game balls is not invalid. Also, in the pre-start state, it is recommended that the performance display monitor be turned off (not displayed).

During the pre-start state described above, the payout of the prize balls backed up on the payout board is not invalidated. Also, while the large prize opening is open in the pre-start state, the open signal is not output from the game information output terminal board. When transitioning to a playable state, a power-on/power-restore command should be sent, and the initial operation of the gimmick (gimmick) should be performed after transitioning to a playable state. And while the large prize opening solenoid is operating in the pre-start state, the large prize opening LED, etc. should not be illuminated as it would be during a jackpot.

The performance display monitor should be fully lit for, say, five seconds after the inspection mode ends, and then display the base value. It should also stop firing in "non-power-recovery" states (pre-start state, unrecoverable error state).

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control unit 130m) that controls the performance of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control means. The main control means (main control unit 110m) can store a reserved memory based on the establishment of a start condition (entry of a game ball into the start hole 45, 47), and can control the reserved memory to be displayed on the first display means (special symbol reserved display unit 63, 64), and can execute a judgment of whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory. The slave control means (performance control unit 130m) can control the reserved memory to be displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and can execute a variable performance of the performance pattern (70a) on the second display means, and can control the second display means (first image display device 72, second image display device 73) to display the reserved memory. The first image display device 70, the second image display device 71) can execute a first shift display (e.g., from 4 to 3) that reduces the reserved memories one by one in sequence each time the variable performance is started, and when a predetermined number (e.g., 4) of reserved memories is displayed and the slave control means receives a signal of a specific number (e.g., 2) of reserved memories that is two or more less than the predetermined number from the master control means, the slave control means can execute a second shift display (e.g., from 4 to 2) that reduces the reserved memories from the predetermined number to the specific number in a reduction manner different from the first shift display (e.g., from 4 to 3), and the first display means (special pattern reserved indicators 63, 64) is characterized in that it can display the reserved memories one by one in sequence each time the judgment is completed, regardless of whether the first shift display (e.g., from 4 to 3) or the second shift display (e.g., from 4 to 2) is executed.

◆The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control unit 130m) that controls the performance of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a start condition (entry of a game ball into the start hole 45, 47), and is capable of controlling the reserved memory to be displayed on a first display means (special pattern reserved display 63, 64), and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the slave control means (performance control The slave control means (performance control unit 130m) is capable of controlling the reserved memories to be displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) and is capable of executing a variable performance of performance symbols on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). The second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is capable of executing a first shift display (e.g., from 4 to 3) that sequentially reduces the reserved memories by one each time the variable performance is started. In a state where a predetermined number (e.g., 4) of reserved memories are displayed, the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) is capable of controlling the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) to display a specific number (e.g., from 4 to 3) that is two or more less than the predetermined number (e.g., 4). When a signal of reserved memory of a predetermined number (e.g., 2) is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), a second shift display (e.g., from 4 to 2) can be executed to reduce the reserved memory from the predetermined number (e.g., 4) to the specific number (e.g., 2) in a reduction manner different from the first shift display (e.g., from 4 to 3), and a pre-notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined reserved memory can be executed by the reserved memory (e.g., icon change presentation) displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the first display means (special symbol reserved display devices 63, 64) displays the predetermined number (e.g., 4 During the period in which the reserved memories are displayed to decrease by one from the predetermined number (e.g., 4) to the specific number (e.g., 2), the advance notification can be continued even if the reserved memories displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) are in a predetermined state in which they do not decrease from the predetermined number (e.g., 4) to the specific number (e.g., 2), and the first display means (special pattern reserved display devices 63, 64) is characterized in that it is possible to display the reserved memories to decrease by one each time the judgment is completed, regardless of whether the first shift display (e.g., from 4 to 3) or the second shift display (e.g., from 4 to 2) is executed.

◆The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control unit 130m) that controls the performance of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition (entry of a game ball into the starting hole 45, 47), and is capable of controlling the reserved memory to be displayed on a first display means (special pattern reserved display 63, 64), and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) is capable of controlling the reserved memories to be displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) and is capable of executing a variable performance of performance symbols on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is capable of executing a first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3) in which the reserved memories are sequentially decreased by one each time the variable performance is started, and in a state in which a predetermined number (for example, 4) of reserved memories is displayed, the slave control means (performance control unit 130m ... When a signal of reserved memory of a predetermined number (e.g., 2) is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), a second shift display (e.g., from 4 to 2) can be executed to reduce the reserved memories from the predetermined number (e.g., 4) to the specific number (e.g., 2) in a reduction manner different from the first shift display (e.g., from 4 to 3), and an advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined reserved memories can be executed by a background display (e.g., a change to a look-ahead zone background) displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the first display means (special symbol reserved display devices 63, 64) can display the predetermined number (e.g., During the period in which the reserved memories are displayed to decrease by one from the predetermined number (e.g., 4) to the specific number (e.g., 2), the advance notification can be continued even if the reserved memories displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) are in a predetermined state in which they do not decrease from the predetermined number (e.g., 4) to the specific number (e.g., 2), and the first display means (special pattern reserved display devices 63, 64) is characterized in that it is possible to display the reserved memories to decrease by one in order each time the judgment is completed, regardless of whether the first shift display (e.g., from 4 to 3) or the second shift display (e.g., from 4 to 2) is executed.

◆The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control unit 130m) that controls the performance of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a start condition (entry of a game ball into the start hole 45, 47), and is capable of controlling the reserved memory to be displayed on a first display means (special pattern reserved display 63, 64), and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the slave control means (performance control The slave control means (performance control unit 130m) is capable of controlling the reserved memories to be displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) and is capable of executing a variable performance of performance symbols on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). The second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is capable of executing a first shift display (e.g., from 4 to 3) that sequentially reduces the reserved memories by one each time the variable performance is started. In a state where a predetermined number (e.g., 4) of reserved memories is displayed, the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) is capable of controlling the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) to display a specific number (e.g., When a signal of reserved memory of a predetermined number (e.g., 2) is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), a second shift display (e.g., from 4 to 2) can be executed to reduce the reserved memory from the predetermined number (e.g., 4) to the specific number (e.g., 2) in a reduction manner different from the first shift display (e.g., from 4 to 3), and an advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined reserved memory can be executed by a character display (e.g., a "ZONE" caption) displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the first display means (special symbol reserved display devices 63, 64) can display the predetermined number (e.g., During the period in which the reserved memories are displayed to decrease by one from the predetermined number (e.g., 4) to the specific number (e.g., 2), the advance notification can be continued even if the reserved memories displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) are in a predetermined state in which they do not decrease from the predetermined number (e.g., 4) to the specific number (e.g., 2), and the first display means (special pattern reserved display devices 63, 64) is characterized in that it is possible to display the reserved memories to decrease by one in order each time the judgment is completed, regardless of whether the first shift display (e.g., from 4 to 3) or the second shift display (e.g., from 4 to 2) is executed.

◆The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control unit 130m) that controls the performance of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition (entry of a game ball into the starting hole 45, 47), and is capable of controlling the reserved memory to be displayed on the first display means (special pattern reserved display 63, 64), and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the slave control means The control means (performance control section 130m) is capable of controlling to display the reserved memory on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and is capable of executing a performance of varying the performance symbols on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). Advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined reserved memory can be executed by an expectation display (for example, a pre-reading effect performance). The second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is capable of executing a first shift display (for example, a first shift display from four to five) that sequentially decreases the reserved memory by one each time the varying performance is started. In a state where a predetermined number (for example, 4) of reserved memories are displayed, when the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) receives a signal of a specific number (for example, 2) of reserved memories that is two or more less than the predetermined number (for example, 4) from the master control means (master control unit 110m), a second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2) that reduces the reserved memories from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2) in a reduction manner different from the first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3) can be executed, and the first display means (special symbol reserved display units 63, 64) reduces the reserved memories from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2). The advance notification can be continued even if the reserved memory displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is in a predetermined state where the reserved memory is not reduced from the predetermined number (e.g., 4) to the specific number (e.g., 2) during the period in which the reserved memory is displayed to be reduced by one at a time (e.g., 2), and the first display means (special pattern reserved display device 63, 64) is characterized in that it can display the reserved memory being reduced by one in order each time the judgment is completed, regardless of whether the first shift display (e.g., from 4 to 3) or the second shift display (e.g., from 4 to 2) is executed.

◆The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control unit 130m) that controls the performance of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition (entry of a game ball into the starting hole 45, 47) and is capable of controlling the reserved memory to be displayed on the first display means (special pattern reserved display 63, 64), and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) is The reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the second display means (the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71), and the second display means (the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71) can execute a variable performance of the performance pattern, and a related performance (e.g., a motion performance of the first movable member 73) can be executed during a part of each variable performance in a plurality of the variable performances, thereby executing a pre-notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined reserved memory, and the second display means (the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71) displays a first shift display (e.g., a display of four pieces) that sequentially decreases the reserved memory by one each time the variable performance is started. In a state where a predetermined number (e.g., 4) of reserved memories is displayed, when the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) receives a signal of a specific number (e.g., 2) of reserved memories that is two or more less than the predetermined number (e.g., 4) from the master control means (master control unit 110m), a second shift display (e.g., from 4 to 2) that reduces the reserved memories from the predetermined number (e.g., 4) to the specific number (e.g., 2) in a reduction manner different from the first shift display (e.g., from 4 to 3), the first display means (special symbol reserved display units 63, 64) is capable of displaying a second shift display (e.g., from 4 to 2) that reduces the reserved memories from the predetermined number (e.g., 4) to the specific number (e.g., 2) in a reduction manner different from the first shift display (e.g., from 4 to 3), Regardless of whether one of the four or two reserved memories is executed, the reserved memories can be displayed decreased by one in order each time the judgment is completed, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) is characterized in that when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memories displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) do not increase or decrease despite the reserved memories increasing or decreasing on the first display means (special pattern reserved display devices 63, 64), and the predetermined state is resolved based on a reserved memory stored after the target reserved memory that was the subject of the advance notification, the advance notification is not executed from the continuation of the related performance (for example, the operation performance of the first movable member 73).

◆The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) that controls the performance of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition (entry of a gaming ball into the starting hole 45, 47), and is capable of controlling the reserved memory to be displayed on a first display means (special pattern reserved display 63, 64), and advantageously displays a winning combination based on the reserved memory. The slave control means (performance control unit 130m) is capable of executing a judgment as to whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot), and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) is capable of controlling the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) to display the reserved memory, and is capable of executing a variable performance of the performance pattern (70a) on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is capable of executing a first shift display (for example, from four to five) that sequentially decreases the reserved memory by one each time the variable performance is started. In a state where a predetermined number (e.g., 4) of reserved memories is displayed, when the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) receives a signal of a specific number (e.g., 2) of reserved memories that is 2 or more less than the predetermined number (e.g., 4) from the master control means (master control unit 110m), a second shift display (e.g., from 4 to 2) can be executed to reduce the reserved memories from the predetermined number (e.g., 4) to the specific number (e.g., 2) in a reduction manner different from the first shift display, and the number of reserved memories can be displayed by numerical information. When the second shift display is executed, the number information is not displayed to be decreased one by one in sequence, but a third shift display (e.g., from 4 to 2) can be executed to display the number information corresponding to the specific number (e.g., 2) of reserved memories, and the first display means (special symbol reserved display 63, 64) is characterized in that it is capable of displaying the number information to be decreased one by one in sequence each time the judgment is completed, regardless of whether the first shift display (e.g., from 4 to 3) or the second shift display (e.g., from 4 to 2) is executed.

◆The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control unit 130m) that controls the performance of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a start condition (entry of a game ball into the start hole 45, 47), and is capable of controlling the reserved memory to be displayed on the first display means (special pattern reserved display 63, 64), and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) 30m) can be controlled to display the reserved memory on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) and can execute a variable performance of the performance symbols on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). The second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute a predetermined performance (e.g., a customer waiting demo performance) when there is no reserved memory after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, and can execute a first shift display (e.g., from 4 to 3) that reduces the reserved memory by one in sequence each time the variable performance is started, and displays a predetermined number of reserved memories (e.g., 4). In this state, when the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) receives a signal of a specific number (e.g., 2) of reserved memories that is two or more less than the predetermined number (e.g., 4) from the master control means (master control unit 110m), a second shift display (e.g., from 4 to 2) can be executed to reduce the reserved memories from the predetermined number (e.g., 4) to the specific number (e.g., 2) in a reduction manner different from the first shift display (e.g., from 4 to 3), and the first display means (special symbol reserved display units 63, 64) can display the reserved memories to be reduced one by one from the predetermined number (e.g., 4) to the specific number (e.g., 2) in a period during which the reserved memories are displayed to be reduced one by one from the predetermined number (e.g., 4) to the specific number (e.g., 2). When the reserved memory displayed on the (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is in a predetermined state where it has not decreased from the predetermined number (e.g., 4) to the specific number (e.g., 2), the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stopped state, and the predetermined performance (e.g., customer waiting demo performance) is not executed even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable performance started, and the first display means (special pattern reserved display 63, 64) is characterized in that it can display the reserved memory decreased by one in order each time the judgment is completed, regardless of whether the first shift display (e.g., from 4 to 3) or the second shift display (e.g., from 4 to 2) is executed.

◆The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control unit 130m) that controls the performance of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition (entry of a game ball into the starting hole 45, 47) and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) that is advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) is capable of controlling the reserved memory to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) and is capable of executing a variable performance of the performance pattern (70a) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the expectation of the special game based on the undetermined reserved memory is high. It is possible to execute an advance notification (for example, background display, text display, expectation display, etc.) suggesting that an advance notification will be issued, and when a predetermined state occurs in which the pending memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite an increase or decrease in the pending memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m), the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continued, and when the predetermined state is resolved based on a pending memory stored after the target pending memory that was the subject of the advance notification, it performs one of the following: not continuing to execute the advance notification based on the target pending memory, changing the advance notification based on the target pending memory to another advance notification with a lower expectation than the advance notification, and erasing the advance notification based on the target pending memory.

◆The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control unit 130m) that controls the performance of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition (entry of a game ball into the starting hole 45, 47) and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) that is advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) is capable of controlling the reserved memory to be displayed on a display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) and is capable of executing a variable performance of the performance pattern (70a) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and is capable of issuing an advance warning suggesting that there is a high expectation for the special game based on an undetermined reserved memory, on the display means. This can be executed by a background display (e.g., a look-ahead zone background) displayed on the means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite the reserved memory increasing or decreasing in the main control means (main control unit 110m), the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stopped state, while the advance notification can be continued, and when the predetermined state is resolved based on a reserved memory stored after the target reserved memory that was the subject of the advance notification, one of the following is performed: the advance notification based on the target reserved memory is not continued, the advance notification based on the target reserved memory is changed to another advance notification with a lower expectation than the advance notification, and the advance notification based on the target reserved memory is erased.

◆The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control unit 130m) that controls the performance of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition (entry of a game ball into the starting hole 45, 47) and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) that is advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) is capable of controlling the reserved memory to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) and is capable of executing a variable performance of the performance pattern (70a) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), suggesting a high expectation for the special game based on the undetermined reserved memory. The advance warning can be executed by a text display (e.g., a "ZONE" caption) displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means does not increase or decrease despite the reserved memory increasing or decreasing in the main control means (main control unit 110m), the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance warning can be continued, and when the predetermined state is resolved based on a reserved memory stored after the target reserved memory that was the subject of the advance warning, one of the following is performed: the advance warning based on the target reserved memory is not continued, the advance warning based on the target reserved memory is changed to another advance warning with a lower expectation than the advance warning, and the advance warning based on the target reserved memory is erased.

◆The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control unit 130m) that controls the performance of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition (entry of a game ball into the starting hole 45, 47) and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) that is advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) is capable of controlling the reserved memory to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) and is capable of executing a variable performance of the performance pattern (70a) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and there is a high expectation for the special game based on the undetermined reserved memory. The advance notification, which suggests that a certain event will occur, can be executed by displaying the expectation level (e.g., a look-ahead effect), and when a certain state occurs in which the pending memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite an increase or decrease in the pending memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m), the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continued, and when the certain state is resolved based on a pending memory stored after the target pending memory that was the subject of the advance notification, one of the following is performed: the advance notification based on the target pending memory is not continued, the advance notification based on the target pending memory is changed to another advance notification with a lower expectation level than the advance notification, and the advance notification based on the target pending memory is erased.

◆The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control unit 130m) that controls the performance of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition (entry of a game ball into the starting hole 45, 47) and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) is capable of controlling the reserved memory to be displayed on a display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) and is capable of executing a variable performance of the performance pattern (70a) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and by executing a related performance (for example, the operation of the first movable member 73) during a portion of each variable performance in a plurality of the variable performances, the special game based on the undetermined reserved memory is executed. It is possible to execute a pre-notification indicating high expectations for the game, and when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite the increase or decrease in the reserved memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m), the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the pre-notification can be continuously executed, and when the predetermined state is resolved based on a reserved memory stored after the target reserved memory that was the subject of the pre-notification, the pre-notification based on the target reserved memory is not executed from a continuation of the related performance (e.g., the operation of the first movable member 73), the related performance (e.g., the operation of the first movable member 73) of the pre-notification based on the target reserved memory is changed to another related performance with a lower expectation than the related performance, and the related performance of the pre-notification based on the target reserved memory is erased.

◆The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control unit 130m) that controls the performance of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition (entry of a game ball into the starting hole 45, 47) and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) that is advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) is capable of controlling the reserved memory to be displayed on a display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) that is advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) is capable of controlling the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) to display the reserved memory, ... The display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute a variable performance of the performance pattern (70a), and can execute a pre-notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation display) suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined reserved memory. When a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite the reserved memory increasing or decreasing in the main control means (main control unit 110m), the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the pre-notification can be continuously executed, and based on the reserved memory stored after the target reserved memory that was the subject of the pre-notification, and returning from the predetermined state, one of the following is performed: not continuing to execute the advance notification based on the target pending memory, changing the advance notification based on the target pending memory to another advance notification having a lower expectation level than the advance notification based on the target pending memory, and erasing the advance notification based on the target pending memory; and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is capable of executing a first shift display (e.g., from four to three) in which the number of pending memories is sequentially decreased by one each time the variable performance is started, and when the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) has a predetermined number (e.g., four) of pending memories, the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) When a signal for a specific number (e.g., 2) of reserved memories that is two or more less than a fixed number (e.g., 4) is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), a second shift display (e.g., from 4 to 2) can be executed to reduce the number of reserved memories from the specified number (e.g., 4) to the specific number (e.g., 2) in a reduction manner different from the first shift display (e.g., from 4 to 3), the number of reserved memories can be displayed using numerical information, and when the second shift display is executed, a third shift display (e.g., from 4 to 2) can be executed to display the numerical information corresponding to the specific number (e.g., 2) of reserved memories, rather than displaying the numerical information to be reduced one by one in order.

◆The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a secondary control means (presentation control unit 130m) that controls the presentation of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition (entry of a gaming ball into the starting hole 45, 47), and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, The slave control means (performance control unit 130m) is capable of controlling the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) to display the reserved memory, and is also capable of executing a variable performance of the performance pattern (70a) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and is capable of executing a pre-notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation display) suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined reserved memory, and when there is no reserved memory after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, The display means can execute a predetermined performance (e.g., a customer waiting demo performance), and when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite the reserved memory increasing or decreasing in the main control means (main control unit 110m), the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continued, and when the predetermined state occurs, the performance pattern can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, and the predetermined performance (e.g., a customer waiting demo performance) is not executed even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable performance began, and when the predetermined state is resolved based on a reserved memory stored after the target reserved memory that was the subject of the advance notification, the advance notification based on the target reserved memory is not continued, the advance notification based on the target reserved memory is changed to another advance notification with a lower expectation than the advance notification, and the advance notification based on the target reserved memory is erased.

◆The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control unit 130m) that controls the performance of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition (entry of a game ball into a starting hole 45, 47) and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) that is advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) is capable of controlling the reserved memory to be displayed on a display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) and is capable of controlling the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 72) to display the reserved memory. 1) can execute a variable effect of the effect pattern (70a), can execute a pre-notification (e.g., background display, text display, expectation display) that suggests high expectations for the special game based on undetermined reserved memory, can display the effect pattern in a temporarily stopped state when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite an increase or decrease in the reserved memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m), while continuing to execute the pre-notification, and can continue to execute the pre-notification based on the target reserved memory when the predetermined state is resolved based on the reserved memory prior to the target reserved memory that was the subject of the pre-notification.

◆The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control unit 130m) that controls the performance of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition (entry of a game ball into the starting hole 45, 47) and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) that is advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) is capable of controlling the reserved memory to be displayed on a display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) and is capable of controlling the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute a variable effect of the effect pattern (70a), and can execute a pre-notification (for example, background display, text display, expectation display) that suggests a high expectation for the special game based on undetermined reserved memory, and when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite an increase or decrease in the reserved memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m), the effect pattern can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the pre-notification can be continued, and when the predetermined state is resolved based on the reserved memory prior to the target reserved memory that was the subject of the pre-notification, the pre-notification based on the target reserved memory is not continued.

◆The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control unit 130m) that controls the performance of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition (entry of a game ball into the starting hole 45, 47) and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) that is advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) is capable of controlling the reserved memory to be displayed on a display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) and is capable of controlling the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) to display a performance pattern (7 0a) can be executed, and an advance notification suggesting a high expectation for the special game based on undetermined reserved memory can be executed by a background display (e.g., a look-ahead zone background) displayed on the display means, and when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite an increase or decrease in the reserved memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m), the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be executed continuously, and when the predetermined state is resolved based on the reserved memory prior to the target reserved memory that was the subject of the advance notification, the advance notification based on the target reserved memory can be executed continuously.

◆The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control unit 130m) that controls the performance of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition (entry of a game ball into a starting hole 45, 47) and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) is capable of controlling the reserved memory to be displayed on a display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) and is capable of controlling the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) to display a performance pattern ( 70a), and a pre-notification indicating high expectations for the special game based on undetermined reserved memory can be executed by a background display (e.g., a look-ahead zone background) displayed on the display means; when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite an increase or decrease in the reserved memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m), the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the pre-notification can be continued; and when the predetermined state is resolved based on the reserved memory prior to the target reserved memory that was the subject of the pre-notification, the pre-notification based on the target reserved memory is not continued.

◆The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control unit 130m) that controls the performance of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition (entry of a game ball into the starting hole 45, 47) and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) that is advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) is capable of controlling the reserved memory to be displayed on a display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) and is capable of controlling the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) to display a performance pattern (70 a) variable presentation, and a pre-notification indicating high expectations for the special game based on undetermined reserved memory can be executed by displaying text (e.g., a "ZONE" caption) on the display means, and when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite an increase or decrease in the reserved memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m), the presentation pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the pre-notification can be continued, and when the predetermined state is resolved based on the reserved memory prior to the target reserved memory that was the subject of the pre-notification, the pre-notification based on the target reserved memory can be continued.

◆The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control unit 130m) that controls the performance of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition (entry of a game ball into the starting hole 45, 47) and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) that is advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) is capable of controlling the reserved memory to be displayed on a display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) and is capable of controlling the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) to display a performance pattern (7 0a) can be executed, and an advance notification suggesting a high expectation for the special game based on undetermined reserved memory can be executed by displaying text (for example, a "ZONE" caption) on the display means, and when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite an increase or decrease in the reserved memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m), the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be executed continuously, and when the predetermined state is resolved based on the reserved memory prior to the target reserved memory that was the subject of the advance notification, the advance notification based on the target reserved memory is not executed continuously.

◆The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control unit 130m) that controls the performance of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition (entry of a game ball into the starting hole 45, 47) and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) is capable of controlling the reserved memory to be displayed on a display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) is capable of controlling the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) to display the reserved memory ... the special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, It is possible to execute a variable effect of the pattern (70a), and an advance notification suggesting a high expectation for the special game based on undetermined reserved memory can be executed by displaying the expectation level (for example, a look-ahead effect effect), and when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite an increase or decrease in the reserved memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m), the effect pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continued, and when the predetermined state is resolved based on the reserved memory prior to the target reserved memory that was the subject of the advance notification, the advance notification based on the target reserved memory can be continued.

◆The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control unit 130m) that controls the performance of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition (entry of a game ball into the starting hole 45, 47) and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) that is advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) is capable of controlling the reserved memory to be displayed on a display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) that is advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) is capable of controlling the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) to display the reserved memory, ... the special game (jackpot) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute a variable presentation of the displayed pattern (70a), and to execute an advance notification suggesting a high expectation for the special game based on undetermined reserved memory by displaying the expectation level (for example, a look-ahead effect presentation), and when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite an increase or decrease in the reserved memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m), the presentation pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and when the predetermined state is resolved based on the reserved memory prior to the target reserved memory that was the subject of the advance notification, the advance notification based on the target reserved memory is not continuously executed.

◆The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control unit 130m) that controls the performance of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition (entry of a game ball into the starting hole 45, 47) and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) that is advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) is capable of controlling the reserved memory to be displayed on a display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) and is capable of executing a variable performance of the performance pattern (70a) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and is capable of issuing a first advance notice (e.g. It is possible to execute a second advance notification that suggests a high expectation for the special game based on the undetermined reserved memory by executing a related performance (for example, a movement performance of the first movable member 73) during a portion of each of the multiple variable performances, and when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite the increase or decrease in the reserved memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m), the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stopped state, while the second advance notification can be continuously executed, and when the predetermined state is resolved based on the reserved memory before the target reserved memory that was the subject of the advance notification, the second advance notification based on the target reserved memory can be executed from the continuation of the related performance (for example, the movement performance of the first movable member 73).

◆The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control unit 130m) that controls the performance of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition (entry of a game ball into the starting hole 45, 47) and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) that is advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) is capable of controlling the reserved memory to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) and is capable of executing a variable performance of the performance pattern (70a) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and is capable of executing a first advance notification (e.g. It is possible to execute a second advance notification that suggests that there is a high expectation for the special game based on the undetermined reserved memory by executing a related performance (for example, a movement performance of the first movable member 73) during a portion of each of the multiple variable performances, and when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite the increase or decrease in the reserved memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m), the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stopped state, while the second advance notification can be continuously executed, and when the predetermined state is resolved based on the reserved memory prior to the target reserved memory that was the subject of the advance notification, the second advance notification based on the target reserved memory is not executed from the continuation of the related performance (for example, the movement performance of the first movable member 73).

◆The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control unit 130m) that controls the performance of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). The main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition (entry of a game ball into the starting hole 45, 47), and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) that is advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) displays the reserved memory on a display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). ), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute a variable performance of the performance symbols, and can execute a pre-notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation display, etc.) suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined reserved memory, and when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite the increase or decrease of the reserved memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m), the performance symbols (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the pre-notification can be continuously executed. When the predetermined state is resolved based on a pending memory prior to the target pending memory that was the subject of the advance notification, the advance notification based on the target pending memory (e.g., background display, character display, expectation level display, etc.) can be continued, and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute a first shift display (e.g., from 4 to 3) that sequentially reduces the pending memories by one each time the variable performance is started, and when the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) has a predetermined number (e.g., 4) of pending memories, the slave control means (performance control unit 130m ... When a signal for a specific number (e.g., 2) of reserved memories that is two or more fewer than the predetermined number (e.g., 4) is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), a second shift display (e.g., from 4 to 2) can be executed to reduce the number of reserved memories from the predetermined number (e.g., 4) to the specific number (e.g., 2) in a reduction manner different from the first shift display, the number of reserved memories can be displayed using numerical information, and when the second shift display is executed, a third shift display (4 to 2) can be executed to display the numerical information corresponding to the specific number (e.g., 2) of reserved memories, rather than displaying the numerical information to be reduced one by one in order.

◆The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control unit 130m) that controls the performance of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). The main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition (entry of a game ball into the starting hole 45, 47), and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) that is advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) displays the reserved memory on a display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 7 1), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute a variable effect of the effect symbols, and can execute a pre-notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation display, etc.) suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined reserved memory, and when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite the increase or decrease in the reserved memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m), the effect symbols (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the pre-notification is continued. When the predetermined state is resolved based on a pending memory prior to the target pending memory that was the subject of the advance notification, the advance notification based on the target pending memory (e.g., background display, character display, expectation level display, etc.) is not continuously executed, and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is capable of executing a first shift display (e.g., from 4 to 3) that sequentially reduces the pending memory by one each time the variable performance is started, and when the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) has a predetermined number (e.g., 4) of pending memories, the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) is capable of executing a first shift display (e.g., from 4 to 3) that sequentially reduces the pending memories ... When a signal for a specific number (e.g., 2) of reserved memories that is two or more fewer than the predetermined number (e.g., 4) is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), a second shift display (e.g., from 4 to 2) can be executed to reduce the number of reserved memories from the predetermined number (e.g., 4) to the specific number (e.g., 2) in a reduction manner different from the first shift display, the number of reserved memories can be displayed using numerical information, and when the second shift display is executed, a third shift display (4 to 2) can be executed to display the numerical information corresponding to the specific number (e.g., 2) of reserved memories, rather than displaying the numerical information to be reduced one by one in order.

◆The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control unit 130m) that controls the performance of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition (entry of a game ball into the starting hole 45, 47) and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) that is advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) is capable of controlling the reserved memory to be displayed on a display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) and is capable of executing a variable performance of the performance pattern (70a) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and is capable of executing a variable performance of the performance pattern (70a) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and is capable of executing a variable performance of the special game (jackpot) based on an undetermined reserved memory. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a pre-notification indicating high expectations for the game, and when there is no reserved memory after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, it is possible to execute a predetermined performance (e.g., a customer waiting demo performance) on the display means, and when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means does not increase or decrease despite the reserved memory increasing or decreasing in the main control means (main control unit 110m), it is possible to display the performance pattern (70a) in a temporarily stopped state, while continuing to execute the pre-notification, and when the predetermined state occurs, it is possible to not execute the predetermined performance (e.g., a customer waiting demo performance) even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, and when the predetermined state is resolved based on the reserved memory before the target reserved memory that was the subject of the pre-notification, it is possible to continue to execute the pre-notification based on the target reserved memory.

◆The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control unit 130m) that controls the performance of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition (entry of a game ball into the starting hole 45, 47) and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) that is advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) is capable of controlling the reserved memory to be displayed on a display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) and is capable of executing a variable performance of the performance pattern (70a) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and is capable of executing a variable performance of the performance pattern (70a) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and is capable of executing a variable performance of the special game (jackpot) based on an undetermined reserved memory. It is possible to execute a pre-notification indicating that there is a high expectation for another game, and when there is no reserved memory after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, it is possible to execute a predetermined performance (e.g., a customer waiting demo performance) on the display means, and when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means does not increase or decrease despite the reserved memory increasing or decreasing in the main control means (main control unit 110m), it is possible to display the performance pattern (70a) in a temporarily stopped state, while it is possible to continue executing the pre-notification, and when the predetermined state occurs, it is possible to not execute the predetermined performance (e.g., a customer waiting demo performance) even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, and when the predetermined state is resolved based on the reserved memory before the target reserved memory that was the subject of the pre-notification, it is not possible to continue executing the pre-notification based on the target reserved memory.

◆The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a secondary control means (presentation control unit 130m) that controls the presentation of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition (entry of a game ball into the starting hole 45, 47), and is also capable of determining whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory. The slave control means (performance control unit 130m) is capable of controlling the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) to display the reserved memory, and is capable of executing a variable performance of the performance pattern (70a) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). In a state where the reserved memory is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the master control means (master control unit 110m) is capable of executing a variable performance of the performance pattern (70a). When a predetermined state occurs in which the number of reserved memories is different from the number of reserved memories grasped by the slave control means (performance control unit 130m), the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, and when the predetermined state occurs, the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) continues to display the reserved memories and can execute an effect performance (e.g., a pattern effect image ZE) in the performance pattern (70a) while displaying the performance pattern (70a) in a temporarily stopped state, and a predetermined number (e.g., When the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) receives a signal (command) for a specific number (e.g., 2) of reserved memories that is two or more less than the predetermined number (e.g., 4) from the master control means (master control unit 110m) while displaying reserved memories of 100 (e.g., 4), the slave control means displays the predetermined number (e.g., 2) of reserved memories without performing a display performance that gradually reduces the number of reserved memories by the number of times (e.g., 2 times) that corresponds to the difference between the specific number (e.g., 4) and the predetermined number (e.g., 2).

◆The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a sub control means (presentation control unit 130m) that controls the presentation of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition (entry of a game ball into the starting hole 45, 47), and judges whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) that is advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory. The slave control means (performance control unit 130m) is capable of controlling the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) to display the reserved memory, and is capable of executing a variable performance of the performance pattern (70a) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). In a state in which the reserved memory is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the master control means (master control unit 110m) transmits a signal indicating the number of reserved memories. When a predetermined state occurs in which the number of reserved memories grasped by the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) differs from the number of reserved memories grasped by the slave control means (performance control unit 130m), the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, and when the predetermined state occurs, the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) continues to display the reserved memories and is capable of executing a motion performance of at least a part (e.g., a bar-shaped image SG) of the decorative part of the performance pattern (70a) while displaying the performance pattern (70a) in a temporarily stopped state, and When the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) receives a signal (command) for a specific number (e.g., 2) of reserved memories that is 2 or more less than the predetermined number (e.g., 4) from the master control means (master control unit 110m) while displaying a number of reserved memories (e.g., 4), the slave control means displays the predetermined number (e.g., 2) of reserved memories without performing a display performance that gradually reduces the number of reserved memories by the number of times (e.g., 2 times) that corresponds to the difference between the specific number (e.g., 4) and the predetermined number (e.g., 2).

◆The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a secondary control means (presentation control unit 130m) that controls the presentation of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m), The main control means (main control unit 110m) can store a reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition (entry of a game ball into the starting hole 45, 47) and can execute a judgment as to whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory. The slave control means (performance control unit 130m) can control the reserved memory to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) and can execute a variable performance of the performance pattern (70a) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). In a state in which the reserved memory is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), a predetermined state occurs in which the number of reserved memories in the signal transmitted from the main control means (main control unit 110m) is different from the number of reserved memories grasped by the slave control means (performance control unit 130m). When the predetermined state occurs, the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can display the performance pattern (70a) in a temporarily stopped state, and can continue to display the reserved memory while displaying the performance pattern (70a) in a temporarily stopped state, and can execute the effect performance of the reserved memory. When a predetermined number (e.g., 4) of reserved memories are displayed, if the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) receives a signal (command) for a specific number (e.g., 2) of reserved memories that is 2 or more less than the predetermined number (e.g., 4) from the master control means (master control unit 110m), the display performance that gradually reduces the number of reserved memories is not performed for the number of times that the specific number (e.g., 4) differs from the predetermined number (e.g., 2), but the predetermined number (e.g., 2) of reserved memories is displayed.

(Image change effects)
In the image display device consisting of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), various effects can be displayed according to the progress of the game. The effects include a customer waiting demo effect executed during a customer waiting state (a waiting state in which the game is not in progress) in which the special symbol is not displayed, and a change effect accompanied by a change display of the effect symbol 70a executed during the special symbol is displayed. In addition, as the effect display, an image change effect can be executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 and/or the screen of the second image display device 71, in which an image corresponding to the entire screen and/or a part of the screen is changed by one or a combination of reduction, enlargement, deformation, rotation, etc. The image change effect can be said to be an effect that makes the screen itself appear to be moving in a pseudo manner, such as shaking, depending on the image displayed on the screen. The image change effect can be executed at any timing (for example, during the execution period of the change effect, during the execution period of the jackpot game, or during the execution period of the customer waiting demo effect).

In the following explanation, the change display of the screen in which an image change performance is being performed is referred to as "SV display" in the figures, and the normal screen display in which an image change performance is not being performed is referred to as "normal display." In an image change performance, a first image (e.g., performance pattern 70a or background image HG, etc.: Fig. 140(a)) displayed on the screen in normal display can be changed to a second image (e.g., reduced performance pattern 70a or reduced background image HG, etc.: Fig. 140(c)) displayed on the screen in change display by changing the first image. It can also be said that the second image in the change display can be recognized as being common and/or related to the first image in normal display due to its shape, information, etc.

The image change presentation can be executed at an appropriate timing during the execution period of the variable presentation or the like. The image change presentation may be executed, for example, in synchronization with the start of the variable presentation, in the middle of the execution period of the variable presentation, or in synchronization with the end of the variable presentation. In addition, the image change presentation can be triggered by various conditions, such as an external factor such as a game ball entering a winning slot or the operation of the presentation button device 16, or an internal factor such as the selection of a predetermined game state or the selection of a predetermined presentation pattern such as a look-ahead presentation.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is configured so that the image change presentation in the image display devices 70, 71 can be executed in coordination with the light emission presentation by the board lighting device 76 and/or the frame lighting device 10. Also, the image change presentation in the image display devices 70, 71 may be configured so that it can be executed in coordination with the operation of the movable role pieces (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) in addition to or instead of the light emission presentation by the board lighting device 76 and/or the frame lighting device 10. Furthermore, the image change presentation in the image display devices 70, 71 may be configured so that it can be executed in coordination with the sound output of the sound output device 9.

(First movable part - movement)
The first movable member 73, which is a movable part, can perform a performance action of moving up and down between a standby position (origin position) located above and a performance position located below by the driving force of a first movable member driving motor that is a part of the board driving device 75 (see FIG. 2). The first movable member 73 can be detected to be at the origin position by a first position detection sensor (not shown). Here, in the first mode in which the first movable member 73 of the embodiment is stopped at the standby position, it does not overlap with the screen of the first image display device 70 or the degree of overlap is small. Also, as the first movable member 73 descends from the standby position to the performance position, the degree of overlap with the screen increases. The first movable member 73 is configured to be changeable from the first mode to a second mode in which a predetermined performance action is performed, such as vibrating widely over the entire area between the standby position and the performance position, or vibrating finely in a part of the range between the standby position and the performance position.

(First movable part - first light emitting area)
The first movable member 73 can perform a performance light emission by lighting the first movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode. The first movable member 73 is provided with one or more first light emitting areas HK1, and the first light emitting area HK1 can perform a performance light emission independently of other parts of the board lighting device 76. The first light emitting area HK1 can change the light emission state between a first state in which the first movable member LED is turned on, blinked, or color changed, and a second state in which the first movable member LED is turned off and no performance light emission is performed. When the first light emitting area HK1 is in the second state in which it is turned off, the whole or a part of the first movable member 73 becomes dark, and when the first light emitting area HK1 is in the first state in which it is turned on, the first movable member 73 becomes brighter than when the first light emitting area HK1 is in the second state. In the embodiment, the first movable member LED is turned off in the second state, but the first movable member LED may be made to emit a darker light in the second state than in the second state, for example, the hue may be darker than in the first state, the brightness may be lower than in the first state, the saturation may be lower than in the first state, etc. Also, the range of the first light-emitting region HK1 may be changed by switching the first movable member LED to be turned on or off, etc.

(Second movable part - movement)
The second movable member 74, which is a movable part, can perform a performance action of moving diagonally up and down between a standby position (origin position) located in the upper right and a performance position located in the lower left by the driving force of a second movable member driving motor, which is a part of the board driving device 75 (see FIG. 2). The second movable member 74 can be detected to be in the origin position by a second position detection sensor (not shown). Here, the first movable member 74 of the embodiment does not overlap with the screen of the first image display device 70 or the degree of overlap is small in the first mode stopped at the standby position. Also, as the second movable member 74 moves diagonally downward from the standby position to the performance position, the degree of overlap with the screen increases. The second movable member 74 is configured to be changeable from the first mode to a second mode in which a predetermined performance action is performed, such as vibrating widely over the entire area between the standby position and the performance position, or vibrating finely in a part of the range between the standby position and the performance position.

(Second movable part - first light emitting area)
The second movable member 74 can perform a performance light emission by lighting the second movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode. The second movable member 74 is provided with one or more first light emitting areas HK1, and the first light emitting area HK1 can perform a performance light emission independently of other parts of the board lighting device 76. The first light emitting area HK1 can change the light emission state between a first state in which the second movable member LED is turned on, blinked, or color changed, and a second state in which the second movable member LED is turned off and no performance light emission is performed. When the first light emitting area HK1 is in the second state in which the first light emitting area HK1 is turned off, the whole or a part of the second movable member 74 becomes dark, and when the first light emitting area HK1 is in the first state in which the first light emitting area HK1 is turned on, the second movable member 74 becomes brighter than when the first light emitting area HK1 is in the second state. In the embodiment, the second movable member LED is turned off in the second state, but the second movable member LED may be made to emit light with a darker effect in the second state than in the first state, for example, the hue may be darker than in the first state, the brightness may be lower than in the first state, or the saturation may be lower than in the first state, etc. Also, the range of the first light-emitting region HK1 may be changed by switching the second movable member LED to be turned on or off, etc.

In the embodiment, the performance action is that the movable parts (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) move forward and backward in the second mode, but the performance action may be performed by one or a combination of forward and backward movement, rotation, swinging, deformation, etc.

(Second Light Emitting Region)
The gaming machine 1 is provided with a second light-emitting area HK2 provided in at least one area different from the movable role (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) as a part of the board lighting device 76 and/or the frame lighting device 10. The area of the board lighting device 76 that becomes the second light-emitting area HK2 may be, for example, the decorative frame 40, the area between the first starting hole 45 and the variable starting part 46 (a winning hole lamp NR for illuminating the periphery of the first starting hole 45 and the variable starting part 46 in a predetermined manner), a role attached to the game board 5 such as the general winning hole 43 and the large winning hole 50, or the game board 5 itself. In addition, the area of the frame lighting device 10 that becomes the second light-emitting area HK2 may be, for example, the glass frame 4. In addition, areas other than the movable role, such as the handle light-emitting device 15c and the performance button device 16, may function as the second light-emitting area HK2. Here, the second light-emitting region HK2 is provided in a plurality of locations, and in the embodiment, the decorative frame 40, the area between the first starting hole 45 and the variable starting portion 46 (a prize-winning hole lamp NR for illuminating the periphery of the first starting hole 45 and the variable starting portion 46 in a predetermined manner), and the frame lighting device 10 provided in the glass frame 4 function as the second light-emitting region HK2. The second light-emitting region HK2 may be provided in a plurality of locations, for example, by dividing it into different members such as the decorative frame 40 and the prize-winning hole, or may be provided in a single member such as within the decorative frame 40.

The second light-emitting region HK2 can perform a performance light emission by lighting the LED (full color) in a predetermined light emission mode. The second light-emitting region HK2 can perform a performance light emission independently of the first light-emitting region HK1 and other second light-emitting regions. The first light-emitting region HK2 can change its light-emitting state between a first state in which the LED is turned on, blinked, or changes color, and a second state in which the LED is turned off and no performance light emission is performed. In the embodiment, when the second light-emitting region HK2 is in the second state in which the second light-emitting region HK2 is turned off, the entire or part of the periphery of the screen of the first image display device 70 becomes dark, and when the second light-emitting region HK2 is in the first state in which the second light-emitting region HK2 is turned on, the periphery of the screen becomes brighter than when the first light-emitting region HK2 is in the second state. In the embodiment, the LED is turned off in the second state, but the LED may be darker in the performance light emission in the second state than in the first state, for example, the hue may be darker than in the first state, the brightness may be lower than in the first state, or the saturation may be lower than in the first state. The range of the second light-emitting region HK2 may also be changed by switching the LEDs on and off, etc.

(Example 1 of image change effects)
Next, a specific example 1 of an image change effect performed in conjunction with the light emission effect using the first light emitting area HK1 and/or the second light emitting area HK2 will be described. Fig. 139 is a timing chart of specific example 1 showing the relationship between the operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the light emission effect of the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2, the audio output of the audio output device 10, and the image change effect on the screen of the first image display device 70. Fig. 140 shows an example of the effect when the image change effect of specific example 1 is performed.

At the timing of T0, a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of the performance pattern 70a executed during the variable display of the special pattern is executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 140 (a)). At this time, the icon TH is displayed in the icon display area 70C provided at the bottom of the screen, and the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m is displayed as a reserved icon T1 in the first reserved icon display area 70B at the bottom of the screen. In addition, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m is displayed as the first reserved number in the first reserved number display area 70E provided on the left side of the screen. Furthermore, in the special pattern display area provided at the bottom right of the screen, a special pattern TZ that is displayed in response to the variable display of the special pattern (performance pattern 70a) is displayed in a variable manner. And on the screen, behind the variable-displayed performance pattern 70a, a background image HG is displayed, and the performance is displayed so that the background image HG performs a predetermined operation such as scrolling. In this way, "normal display" is being performed on the screen at timing T0.

At the time T0, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in the first state in which they are stopped at the standby position. In addition, the first light-emitting area HK1 of the first movable member 73, the first light-emitting area HK1 of the second movable member 74, the second light-emitting area HK2 of the decorative frame 40, the second light-emitting area HK2 consisting of the winning hole lamp NR, and the second light-emitting area HK2 consisting of the frame lighting device 10 are all in the first state in which they are performing light emission for performance. Furthermore, the sound output device 9 performs a performance using sound (music, voice) by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. Note that while the change notification sound described below is being output, the sound performance may be continued or interrupted.

When an image change performance is executed at the timing of T1, the first light-emitting region HK1 of the first movable member 73 and the first light-emitting region HK1 of the second movable member 74 change from the first state to the second state in which they are turned off in synchronization with the start of the transition from the normal display to the change display (see FIG. 140 (b)). At this time, the second light-emitting region HK1 of the decorative frame 40 and the second light-emitting region HK2 consisting of the winning hole lamp NR change from the first state to the second state in which they are turned off in synchronization with the start of the transition to the change display (synchronized). In addition, the second light-emitting region HK2 consisting of the frame lighting device 10 is kept in the first state regardless of the other second light-emitting regions HK2 changing in conjunction with the first light-emitting region HK1. Furthermore, in synchronization with the start of the transition to the change display (synchronized), the first movable member 73 transitions from the standby position to the second state in which it can perform an action performance from the first state. At this time, the second movable member 74 is kept in the first state in which it stops at the standby position. Furthermore, in synchronization with the start of the transition to the change display, a change notification sound, such as a "beep," is output from the audio output device 9.

The timing of T1 is a frame update timing (start frame update timing) during the normal change period during which the normal change of the performance pattern 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the change performance starts. At this frame update timing, the image data (background image, various change performance images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the change display that had been started to be drawn in the frame buffer prior to the timing of T1 is started to be displayed on the first image display device 70, and the display of the change display is started on the screen of the first image display device 70. In specific example 1, in accordance with (synchronized with) the start frame update timing of the change display, the first light-emitting area HK1 and the second light-emitting area HK1 start to change from the first state to the second state, and the first movable member 73 starts to change from the first state to the second state, and the sound output device 9 starts to output a change notification sound. In this way, in specific example 1, the change of the first light-emitting area HK1 and the second light-emitting area HK2, the operation of the first movable member 73, and the output of the change notification sound start at the same time as the image change performance starts on the screen.

As shown in FIG. 140(b), when transitioning from normal display to change display, the performance pattern 70a, background image HG, icon TH, and hold icon T1 all shrink together, and a frame image GG appears to appear from outside the screen. The change display is configured so that the frame image GG surrounds the outer periphery of the image, and the inside of the frame image GG appears to be a cut-out part (or all) of the normal display. When transitioning from normal display to change display, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special pattern TZ displayed in the special pattern display area do not shrink together with the performance pattern 70a, but are displayed in the same position as the normal display.

As shown in FIG. 140(c), an image change effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH, the reserved icon T1, and the frame image GG in the change display are displayed so as to sway together. In the specific example 1, the first light-emitting area HK1 and the second light-emitting area HK2, which were in the second state at the beginning of the execution period of the image change effect, are set to switch to the first state in the middle of the execution period of the image change effect (see FIG. 140(d)). In the specific example 1, the change notification sound is output from the start of the execution of the image change effect to the middle, and then the output is stopped. Here, in the specific example 1, the timing of switching the first light-emitting area HK1 and the second light-emitting area HK2 from the second state to the first state in the middle of the execution period of the image change effect (timing T3) is matched (synchronized), but the switching timing may be shifted. In the specific example 1, the first light-emitting area HK1 and the second light-emitting area HK2 are illuminated in the first state in the subsequent image change effect.

When the image change effect is being executed, on the screen, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special pattern TZ displayed in the special pattern display area are outside the range in which the change display changes, so that the changing change display does not overlap with the reserved number and special pattern TZ. In addition, the changing effect of the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ is displayed to continue, and the reserved icon T1 and reserved number are also displayed to increase in accordance with the winning of game balls, etc.

In synchronization with the start of the return from the change display to the normal display at the timing of T4, the first movable member 73 in the second state is returned to the first state (see FIG. 140(e)). The timing of T4 is a frame update timing (return frame update timing) during the normal change period during which the normal change of the performance pattern 70a occurs, and is a specified frame after the change performance starts. At this frame update timing, the first image display device 70 starts displaying image data related to the returning change display (background image, various change performance images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.). In specific example 1, in synchronization with the return frame update timing of the change display, the change of the first movable member 73 from the second state to the first state starts.

As shown in FIG. 140(e), when transitioning from change display to normal display, the performance pattern 70a, background image HG, icon TH, and reserved icon T1 change so as to enlarge together, and the frame image GG is displayed as if it has disappeared off the screen. When transitioning from change display to normal display, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special pattern TZ displayed in the special pattern display area do not change so as to enlarge together with the performance pattern 70a, but are displayed in the same position.

In synchronization with the start of normal display at timing T5, the first movable member 73 in the second state stops at the standby position and returns to the first state (see FIG. 140(f)). Timing T5 is a frame update timing (end frame update timing) during the normal fluctuation period during which normal fluctuation of the performance pattern 70a occurs, and is a specified frame after the fluctuation performance begins. At this frame update timing, display of image data related to the normal display (background image, various variable performance images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) on the first image display device 70 begins. In specific example 1, the change of the first movable member 73 from the second state to the first state is completed in synchronization with the end frame update timing.

Specific example 1 is configured to be able to execute a light emitting effect that changes from a first state to a second state by linking at least one of the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2 when an image change effect is performed. In this way, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the change display on the screen, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game. In particular, by changing from a relatively bright first state to a second state that is darker than the first state when an image change effect is performed, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the change display executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 without directing the player's attention to the area around the screen of the first image display device 70, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

Specific example 1 is capable of displaying the special symbol TZ and reserved numbers on the screen of the first image display device 70 together with the performance symbol 70a, reserved icon T1, background image HG, etc. Furthermore, in the image change performance, the special symbol TZ and reserved numbers can be displayed in the same position regardless of whether the performance symbol 70a, reserved icon T1, and background image HG are normally displayed or changed. In this way, even when the image change performance is executed, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the necessary information, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player if the information displayed in the same position (third image) has the same content as the information that changes in the image change performance (first image and second image).

Specific example 1 can display the special symbol TZ and reserved numbers on the screen of the first image display device 70 together with the performance symbol 70a, the reserved icon T1, the background image HG, etc. In the image change performance, the visibility of the performance symbol 70a, the reserved icon T1, and the background image HG changes between when they are displayed in a changing state and when they are displayed normally. In contrast, the special symbol TZ and reserved numbers can be displayed so that their visibility does not change whether they are displayed in a changing state or when they are displayed in a changing state. In this way, even when an image change performance is executed, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the necessary information, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information (third image) that does not change visibility is the same as the information (first image and second image) that changes in the image change performance.

Specific example 1 is capable of displaying a frame image GG that changes in conjunction with the change from normal display to change display of the performance pattern 70a, the reserved icon T1, and the background image HG on the screen of the first image display device 70 when the image change performance is executed. In this way, when the image change performance is executed, the change display can be made to attract the player's attention, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, by making the frame image GG, which is not displayed in the normal display, appear in the change display, the change display can be made to attract the player's attention more, and the interest of the game can be improved. Note that the frame image GG may be in the same image (image layer) as the performance pattern 70a, the reserved icon T1, and the background image HG, or may be set as a different image (different image layer) from these and expressed to change together with the performance pattern 70a, the reserved icon T1, and the background image HG.

Specific example 1 changes the first light-emitting area HK1 and/or the second light-emitting area HK2 to the second state in synchronization with the start of the image change presentation. In this way, the change display can attract the player's attention when the image change presentation starts to be performed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Specific example 1 changes the first movable member 73 to the second state and outputs a change notification sound in synchronization with the start of the image change presentation. By doing this, the change display can attract the player's attention when the image change presentation starts to be executed, and the excitement of the game can be increased.

Specific example 1 changes the first movable member 73 to the first state in synchronization with the end of the image change presentation. By doing this, the change from the change display to the normal display when the image change presentation ends can attract the player's attention, making the game more interesting.

(Example 2 of image change effects)
Next, a specific example 2 of an image change presentation executed in conjunction with the light emission using the first light emitting area HK1 and/or the second light emitting area HK2 will be described. Fig. 141 is a timing chart of specific example 2 showing the relationship between the operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the light emission of the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2, the audio output of the audio output device 10, and the image change presentation on the screen of the first image display device 70. Fig. 142 shows an example of the presentation when the image change presentation of specific example 2 is executed.

At the timing of T0, the variable performance accompanied by the variable display of the performance pattern 70a executed during the variable display of the special pattern is executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 142 (a)). At this time, the icon TH is displayed in the icon display area 70C provided at the bottom of the screen, and the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m is displayed as a reserved icon T1 in the first reserved icon display area 70B at the bottom of the screen. In addition, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m is displayed as the first reserved number in the first reserved number display area 70E provided on the left side of the screen. Furthermore, in the special pattern display area provided at the bottom right of the screen, the special pattern TZ, which is displayed in a variable manner in response to the variable display of the special pattern (performance pattern 70a), is displayed in a variable manner. And on the screen, behind the variable-displayed performance pattern 70a, the background image HG is displayed, and the performance is displayed so that the background image HG performs a predetermined operation such as scrolling. In this way, "normal display" is being performed on the screen at timing T0.

At the time T0, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in the first state in which they are stopped at the standby position. In addition, the first light-emitting area HK1 of the first movable member 73, the first light-emitting area HK1 of the second movable member 74, the second light-emitting area HK2 of the decorative frame 40, the second light-emitting area HK2 consisting of the winning hole lamp NR, and the second light-emitting area HK2 consisting of the frame lighting device 10 are all in the first state in which they are performing light emission for performance. Furthermore, the sound output device 9 performs a performance using sound (music, voice) by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. Note that while the change notification sound described below is being output, the sound performance may be continued or interrupted.

When an image change performance is executed at the timing of T1, the first light-emitting area HK1 of the first movable member 73 and the first light-emitting area HK1 of the second movable member 74 change from the first state to the second state in which they are turned off in synchronization with the start of the transition from the normal display to the change display (see FIG. 142 (b)). At this time, the second light-emitting area HK1 of the decorative frame 40 and the second light-emitting area HK2 consisting of the winning hole lamp NR change from the first state to the second state in which they are turned off in synchronization with the start of the transition to the change display. In addition, the second light-emitting area HK2 consisting of the frame lighting device 10 also changes from the first state in which the performance is emitted to the second state in which they are turned off. Furthermore, in synchronization with the start of the transition to the change display, the first movable member 73 transitions from the standby position to the second state in which the operation can be performed from the first state. At this time, the second movable member 74 is kept in the first state in which it stops at the standby position. Furthermore, in synchronization with the start of the transition to the change display, a change notification sound, such as a "beep", is output from the audio output device 9.

The timing of T1 is a frame update timing (start frame update timing) during the normal change period during which the normal change of the performance pattern 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the change performance starts. At this frame update timing, the image data (background image, various change performance images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the change display that had been started to be drawn in the frame buffer prior to the timing of T1 is started to be displayed on the first image display device 70, and the display of the change display is started on the screen of the first image display device 70. In the specific example 2, in accordance with (synchronized with) the start frame update timing of the change display, the first light-emitting area HK1 and the second light-emitting area HK1 start to change from the first state to the second state, and the first movable member 73 starts to change from the first state to the second state, and the sound output device 9 starts to output a change notification sound. In this way, in the specific example 2, the change of the first light-emitting area HK1 and the second light-emitting area HK2, the operation of the first movable member 73, and the output of the change notification sound start at the same time as the image change performance starts on the screen.

As shown in FIG. 142(b), when transitioning from normal display to change display, the performance pattern 70a, background image HG, icon TH, and hold icon T1 all shrink together, and a frame image GG appears to appear from outside the screen. The change display is configured so that the frame image GG surrounds the outer periphery of the image, and the inside of the frame image GG appears to be a cut-out part (or all) of the normal display. When transitioning from normal display to change display, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special pattern TZ displayed in the special pattern display area do not shrink together with the performance pattern 70a, but are displayed in the same position as the normal display.

As shown in FIG. 142(c), an image change performance is executed in which the performance pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH, the reserved icon T1, and the frame image GG in the change display are displayed so as to sway together. In specific example 2, a part of the first light-emitting area HK1 (first movable member 73) and a part of the second light-emitting area HK2 (decorative frame 40), which were in the second state at the beginning of the execution period of the image change performance, are set to switch to the first state in the middle of the execution period of the image change performance (see FIG. 142(d)). In specific example 2, the remaining part of the first light-emitting area HK1 (second movable member 74) and the remaining part of the second light-emitting area HK2 (winning hole lamp NR, frame lighting device 10) are set to be maintained in the second state throughout the execution period of the image change performance (see FIG. 142(d)). In specific example 2, the change notification sound is output from the start to the end of the execution of the image change performance, and then the output is stopped. Here, in specific example 2, the first light-emitting area HK1 and the second light-emitting area HK2 are switched from the second state to the first state in the middle of the execution period of the image change performance (at the timing of T3) in unison (synchronized), but the switching timing may be shifted.

When the image change effect is being executed, on the screen, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special pattern TZ displayed in the special pattern display area are outside the range in which the change display changes, so that the changing change display does not overlap with the reserved number and special pattern TZ. In addition, the changing effect of the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ is displayed to continue, and the reserved icon T1 and reserved number are also displayed to increase in accordance with the winning of game balls, etc.

The first movable member 73 in the second state is returned to the first state, later than the start of the return from the change display to the normal display at the timing of T4 (see FIG. 142 (e)). The timing of T4 is a frame update timing (return frame update timing) during the normal change period during which the normal change of the performance pattern 70a occurs, and is a specified frame after the change performance starts. At this frame update timing, the first image display device 70 starts displaying image data related to the returning change display (background image, various change performance images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.). In specific example 2, the change of the first movable member 73 from the second state to the first state starts later than the return frame update timing of the change display.

As shown in FIG. 142(e), when transitioning from change display to normal display, the performance pattern 70a, background image HG, icon TH, and reserved icon T1 change so as to enlarge together, and the frame image GG is displayed as if it has disappeared off the screen. When transitioning from change display to normal display, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special pattern TZ displayed in the special pattern display area do not change so as to enlarge together with the performance pattern 70a, but are displayed in the same position.

At a timing later than the start of normal display (end of change display) at the timing of T5, the first movable member 73 in the second state stops at the standby position and returns to the first state (see FIG. 142 (f)). At a timing later than the start of normal display (end of change display) at the timing of T5, the first light-emitting area HK1 (second movable member 74) and the second light-emitting area HK2 (winning hole lamp NR, frame lighting device 10) in the second state return to the first state and the performance light emission is executed. The timing of T5 is a frame update timing (end frame update timing) during the normal change period in which the normal change of the performance pattern 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the start of the change performance. At this frame update timing, the display of image data related to the normal display (background image, various change performance images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) on the first image display device 70 begins. In specific example 2, the change of the first movable member 73 from the second state to the first state is completed at a timing that is offset from the end frame update timing, and the light emitting areas HK1 and HK2 return to the first state.

Specific example 2 is configured to link at least one of the first light-emitting area HK1 and the second light-emitting area HK2 to execute a light-emitting effect that changes from a first state to a second state when an image change effect is performed. In this way, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the image change effect, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. In particular, by changing from a relatively bright first state to a second state that is darker than the first state when an image change effect is performed, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the change display executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 without directing the player's attention to the area around the screen of the first image display device 70, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Specific example 2 is capable of displaying the special symbol TZ and reserved numbers on the screen of the first image display device 70 together with the performance symbol 70a, the reserved icon T1, the background image HG, etc. Furthermore, in the image change performance, the special symbol TZ and reserved numbers can be displayed in the same position regardless of whether the performance symbol 70a, the reserved icon T1, and the background image HG are normally displayed or changed. In this way, even when the image change performance is executed, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the necessary information, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player if the information displayed in the same position (third image) has the same content as the information that changes in the image change performance (first image and second image).

Specific example 2 can display the special symbol TZ and reserved numbers on the screen of the first image display device 70 together with the performance symbol 70a, the reserved icon T1, the background image HG, etc. In the image change performance, the visibility changes between the change display in which the performance symbol 70a, the reserved icon T1, and the background image HG are displayed in a changing manner and the normal display. In contrast, in the embodiment, the visibility of the special symbol TZ and reserved numbers can be displayed without changing in either the normal display or the changing display. In this way, even when the image change performance is executed, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the necessary information, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information (third image) that does not change the visibility is the same as the information (first image and second image) that changes in the image change performance.

Specific example 2 is capable of displaying a frame image GG that changes in conjunction with the change from normal display to change display of the performance pattern 70a, the reserved icon T1, and the background image HG on the screen of the first image display device 70 when the image change performance is executed. In this way, when the image change performance is executed, the change display can be made to attract the player's attention, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, by making the frame image GG, which is not displayed in the normal display, appear in the change display, the change display can be made to attract the player's attention more, and the interest of the game can be improved. Note that the frame image GG may be in the same image (image layer) as the performance pattern 70a, the reserved icon T1, and the background image HG, or may be set as a different image (different image layer) from these and expressed to change together with the performance pattern 70a, the reserved icon T1, and the background image HG.

Specific example 2 changes the first light-emitting area HK1 and/or the second light-emitting area HK2 to the second state in synchronization with the start of the image change presentation. In this way, the change display can attract the player's attention when the image change presentation starts to be performed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Specific example 2 changes the first movable member 73 to the second state and outputs a change notification sound in synchronization with the start of the image change presentation. In this way, the change display can attract the player's attention when the image change presentation starts to be executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Specific example 2 shifts the first movable member 73 to the first state at a time that coincides with the end of the image change presentation. By doing so, the change display can attract the player's attention when the image change presentation ends, making the game more interesting.

Specific example 2 executes the change of the first light-emitting area HK1 and/or the second light-emitting area HK2 to the second state at a time that is offset from the end of the image change presentation. In this way, the change from the change display to the normal display when the image change presentation ends can attract the player's attention, increasing the player's interest in the game.

(Example 3 of image change effects)
Next, a specific example 3 of an image change performance executed in conjunction with the performance light emission using the first light emitting area HK1 and/or the second light emitting area HK2 will be described. Fig. 143 is a timing chart of specific example 3 showing the relationship between the operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the performance light emission of the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2, the audio output of the audio output device 10, and the image change performance on the screen of the first image display device 70. Fig. 144 shows an example of the performance when the image change performance of specific example 3 is executed.

At the timing of T0, the variable performance accompanied by the variable display of the performance pattern 70a executed during the variable display of the special pattern is executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 144 (a)). At this time, the icon TH is displayed in the icon display area 70C provided at the bottom of the screen, and the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m is displayed as a reserved icon T1 in the first reserved icon display area 70B at the bottom of the screen. In addition, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m is displayed as the first reserved number in the first reserved number display area 70E provided on the left side of the screen. Furthermore, the special pattern TZ, which is displayed in response to the variable display of the special pattern (performance pattern 70a), is displayed in a variable manner in the special pattern display area provided at the bottom right of the screen. And, on the screen, behind the variable-displayed performance pattern 70a, the background image HG is displayed, and the performance is displayed so that the background image HG performs a predetermined operation such as scrolling. In this way, "normal display" is being performed on the screen at timing T0.

At the timing of T0, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in the first state in which they are stopped at the standby position. In addition, the first light-emitting area HK1 of the first movable member 73, the first light-emitting area HK1 of the second movable member 74, the second light-emitting area HK2 of the decorative frame 40, the second light-emitting area HK2 consisting of the winning hole lamp NR, and the second light-emitting area HK2 consisting of the frame lighting device 10 are all in the first state in which they are performing light emission for performance. Furthermore, the sound output device 9 performs a performance using sound (music, voice) by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. Note that while the change notification sound described below is being output, the sound performance may be continued or interrupted.

In the third specific example, at the timing T1a before T1 when the image change performance is started, the first light-emitting area HK1 (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the second light-emitting area HK2 (decorative frame 40, winning slot lamp NR, frame lighting device 10) change from the first state to the second state in which they are turned off (see FIG. 144 (a)). Then, at the timing T1, when the image change performance is executed, the first light-emitting area HK1 of the second movable member 74 and the second light-emitting area HK2 of the frame lighting device 10 change from the second state to the first state in synchronization with the start of the transition to the change display, and perform the performance light emission (see FIG. 144 (b)). At this time, in synchronization with the start of the transition to the change display, the second movable member 74 transitions from the first state in which it is in the standby position to the second state in which it can perform the operation performance. The first movable member 73 is kept in the first state in which it stops at the standby position. In addition, in synchronization with the start of the transition to the change display, a change notification sound such as a "ping" is output from the audio output device 9. The first light-emitting area HK1 of the first movable member 73, the decorative frame 40, and the second light-emitting area HK1 of the winning slot lamp NR are maintained in the second state throughout the execution period of the image change presentation.

The timing of T1 is a frame update timing (start frame update timing) during the normal change period during which the normal change of the performance pattern 70a is performed, and is a specified frame after the change performance starts. At this frame update timing, the image data (background image, various change performance images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the change display that had started to be drawn in the frame buffer prior to the timing of T1 starts to be displayed on the first image display device 70, and the display of the change display starts on the screen of the first image display device 70. In specific example 3, the change of the first light-emitting area HK1 and the second light-emitting area HK1 from the first state to the second state starts with a shift from the start frame update timing of the change display. In conjunction with (synchronized with) the start frame update timing of the change display, the change of the second movable member 74 from the first state to the second state starts, and the output of the change notification sound from the audio output device 9 starts.

As shown in FIG. 144(b), when transitioning from normal display to change display, the performance pattern 70a, background image HG, icon TH, and pending icon T1 all shrink together, and a frame image GG appears to appear from outside the screen. The change display is configured so that the frame image GG surrounds the outer periphery of the image, and the inside of the frame image GG appears to be a cut-out part (or all) of the normal display. When transitioning from normal display to change display, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the special pattern TZ displayed in the special pattern display area do not shrink together with the performance pattern 70a, but are displayed in the same position as the normal display.

As shown in FIG. 144(c), an image change effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a, background image HG, icon TH, pending icon T1, and frame image GG in the change display are displayed as if they are swaying together. In specific example 3, the first light-emitting area HK1 and the second light-emitting area HK2, which were in the second state when the image change effect started to be executed, are set to switch to the first state (see FIG. 144(d)). Also, in specific example 3, the change notification sound is output from the start of the image change effect to halfway through, and then the output is stopped.

When the image change effect is being executed, on the screen, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special pattern TZ displayed in the special pattern display area are outside the range in which the change display changes, so that the changing change display does not overlap with the reserved number and special pattern TZ. In addition, the changing effect of the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ is displayed to continue, and the reserved icon T1 and reserved number are also displayed to increase in accordance with the winning of game balls, etc.

In synchronization with the start of the return from the change display to the normal display at the timing of T4, the second movable member 74 in the second state is returned to the first state (see FIG. 144(e)). The timing of T4 is a frame update timing (return frame update timing) during the normal change period during which the normal change of the performance pattern 70a occurs, and is a specified frame after the change performance starts. At this frame update timing, the first image display device 70 starts displaying image data related to the returning change display (background image, various change performance images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.). In specific example 3, in synchronization with the return frame update timing of the change display, the second movable member 74 starts changing from the second state to the first state.

As shown in FIG. 144(e), when transitioning from change display to normal display, the performance pattern 70a, background image HG, icon TH, and reserved icon T1 change so as to enlarge together, and the frame image GG is displayed as if it has disappeared off the screen. When transitioning from change display to normal display, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special pattern TZ displayed in the special pattern display area do not change so as to enlarge together with the performance pattern 70a, but are displayed in the same position.

In synchronization with the start of normal display at timing T5, the second movable member 74 in the second state stops at the standby position and returns to the first state (see FIG. 144(f)). Timing T5 is a frame update timing (end frame update timing) during the normal fluctuation period during which normal fluctuation of the performance pattern 70a occurs, and is a specified frame after the fluctuation performance begins. At this frame update timing, display of image data related to the normal display (background image, various variable performance images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) on the first image display device 70 begins. In specific example 3, in synchronization with the end frame update timing, the change of the second movable member 74 from the second state to the first state is completed.

Specific example 3 is configured to be able to execute a light-emitting effect that changes from a first state to a second state by linking at least one of the first light-emitting area HK1 and the second light-emitting area HK2 when an image change effect is performed. In this way, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the change display, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game. In particular, by changing from a relatively bright first state to a second state that is darker than the first state when an image change effect is performed, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the image change effect executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 without directing the player's attention to the area around the screen of the first image display device 70, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

Specific example 3 is capable of displaying the special symbol TZ and reserved numbers on the screen of the first image display device 70 together with the performance symbol 70a, reserved icon T1, background image HG, etc. Furthermore, in the image change performance, the special symbol TZ and reserved numbers can be displayed in the same position regardless of whether the performance symbol 70a, reserved icon T1, and background image HG are normally displayed or changed. In this way, even when the image change performance is executed, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the necessary information, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player if the information displayed in the same position (third image) has the same content as the information that changes in the image change performance (first image and second image).

Specific example 3 is capable of displaying the special symbol TZ and reserved numbers on the screen of the first image display device 70 together with the performance symbol 70a, reserved icon T1, background image HG, etc. In the image change performance, the visibility of the performance symbol 70a, reserved icon T1, and background image HG changes between normal display and change display. In contrast, the special symbol TZ and reserved numbers can be displayed so that their visibility does not change whether they are in normal display or change display. In this way, even when an image change performance is executed, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the necessary information, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information (third image) that does not change visibility is the same as the information (first image and second image) that changes in the image change performance.

Specific example 3 is capable of displaying a frame image GG on the screen of the first image display device 70 when an image change effect is executed, which changes in conjunction with the change from normal display to change display of the effect pattern 70a, the reserved icon T1, and the background image HG. In this way, when an image change effect is executed, the change display can be made to attract the player's attention, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, by making the frame image GG, which is not displayed in the normal display, appear in the change display, the change display can be made to attract the player's attention more, and the interest of the game can be improved. Note that the frame image GG may be in the same image (image layer) as the effect pattern 70a, the reserved icon T1, and the background image HG, or may be set as a different image (different image layer) from these and expressed to change together with the effect pattern 70a, the reserved icon T1, and the background image HG.

Specific example 3 executes the change of the first light-emitting area HK1 and/or the second light-emitting area HK2 to the second state at a time that is offset from the start of the image change presentation. In this way, the change display can be made to attract the player's attention when the image change presentation begins to be executed, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Specific example 3 shifts the second movable member 74 to the second state and outputs a change notification sound at the same time as the start of the image change presentation. In this way, the change display can attract the player's attention when the image change presentation starts, making the game more interesting.

Specific example 3 changes the second movable member 74 to the first state in synchronization with the end of the image change presentation. By doing this, the change from the change display to the normal display when the image change presentation ends can attract the player's attention, making the game more interesting.

Specific example 3 changes the first light-emitting area HK1 and/or the second light-emitting area HK2 to the second state shortly before the start of the image change presentation, and changes the first light-emitting area HK1 and/or the second light-emitting area HK2 to the first state in synchronization with the start of the image change presentation. In this way, when the image change presentation starts, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the excitement of the game can be increased. In addition, the movable members 73, 74 may be changed to the second state shortly before the start of the image change presentation, and the movable members 73, 74 may be returned to the first state in synchronization with the start of the image change presentation or after the start of the image change presentation.

(Example 4 of image change effects)
Next, a specific example 4 of an image change presentation executed in conjunction with the light emission using the first light emitting area HK1 and/or the second light emitting area HK2 will be described. Fig. 145 is a timing chart of specific example 4 showing the relationship between the operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the light emission of the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2, the audio output of the audio output device 10, and the image change presentation on the screen of the first image display device 70. Fig. 146 shows an example of the presentation when the image change presentation of specific example 4 is executed.

At the timing of T0, the variable performance accompanied by the variable display of the performance pattern 70a executed during the variable display of the special pattern is executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 146 (a)). At this time, the icon TH is displayed in the icon display area 70C provided at the bottom of the screen, and the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m is displayed as a reserved icon T1 in the first reserved icon display area 70B at the bottom of the screen. In addition, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m is displayed as the first reserved number in the first reserved number display area 70E provided on the left side of the screen. Furthermore, the special pattern TZ, which is displayed in response to the variable display of the special pattern (performance pattern 70a), is displayed in a variable manner in the special pattern display area provided at the bottom right of the screen. And, on the screen, behind the variable-displayed performance pattern 70a, the background image HG is displayed, and the performance is displayed so that the background image HG performs a predetermined operation such as scrolling. In this way, normal display is performed on the screen at timing T0.

At the timing of T0, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in the first state in which they are stopped at the standby position. In addition, the first light-emitting area HK1 of the first movable member 73, the first light-emitting area HK1 of the second movable member 74, the second light-emitting area HK2 of the decorative frame 40, the second light-emitting area HK2 consisting of the winning hole lamp NR, and the second light-emitting area HK2 consisting of the frame lighting device 10 are all in the first state in which they are performing light emission for performance. Furthermore, the sound output device 9 performs a performance using sound (music, voice) by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. Note that while the change notification sound described below is being output, the sound performance may be continued or interrupted.

In specific example 4, at a timing T1a before T1 when the image change performance is started, the first light-emitting area HK1 (first movable member 73) and the second light-emitting area HK2 (decorative frame 40, frame lighting device 10) change from the first state to a second state in which they are turned off (see FIG. 146 (a)). At this time, the first light-emitting area HK1 (second movable member 74) and the second light-emitting area HK2 (winning hole lamp NR) remain in the first state. At a timing T1a before T1 when the image change performance is started, the first movable member 73 starts to change from the first state to the second state. Then, at the timing T1 when the image change performance is executed, a change notification sound such as a "beep" is output from the audio output device 9 in synchronization with the start of the transition to the change display. At a timing T1b, which is later than T1 when the image change effect is started, the first light-emitting area HK1 of the second movable member 74 and the second light-emitting area HK2 of the winning slot lamp NR change from the first state to the second state. Also, at a timing T1b, the second movable member 74 transitions from the first state in which it is in the standby position to the second state in which it can perform an action effect.

The timing of T1 is a frame update timing (start frame update timing) during the normal change period during which the normal change of the performance pattern 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the change performance starts. At this frame update timing, the image data (background image, various change performance images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the change display that had been started to be drawn in the frame buffer prior to the timing of T1 is started to be displayed on the first image display device 70, and the display of the change display is started on the screen of the first image display device 70. In specific example 4, the change of the first light-emitting area HK1 and the second light-emitting area HK1 from the first state to the second state is started with a shift from the start frame update timing of the change display. Also, the change of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 from the first state to the second state is started with a shift from the start frame update timing of the change display. In response to this, the output of the change notification sound from the audio output device 9 is started in accordance with (synchronized with) the start frame update timing of the change display.

As shown in FIG. 146(b), when transitioning from normal display to change display, the performance pattern 70a, background image HG, icon TH, and hold icon T1 all shrink together, and a frame image GG appears to appear from outside the screen. The change display is configured so that the frame image GG surrounds the outer periphery of the image, and the inside of the frame image GG appears to be a cut-out part (or all) of the normal display. When transitioning from normal display to change display, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special pattern TZ displayed in the special pattern display area do not shrink together with the performance pattern 70a, but are displayed in the same position as the normal display.

As shown in FIG. 146(c), an image change effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a, background image HG, icon TH, pending icon T1, and frame image GG in the change display are displayed so that they sway together. Also, in specific example 4, the change notification sound is output from the start of the image change effect until halfway through, and then the output is stopped.

When the image change effect is being executed, on the screen, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special pattern TZ displayed in the special pattern display area are outside the range in which the change display changes, so that the changing change display does not overlap with the reserved number and special pattern TZ. In addition, the changing effect of the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ is displayed to continue, and the reserved icon T1 and reserved number are also displayed to increase in accordance with the winning of game balls, etc.

The first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 in the second state are returned to the first state in synchronization with, or delayed from, the start of the return from the change display to the normal display at the timing of T4. The timing of T4 is a frame update timing (return frame update timing) during the normal change period during which the normal change of the performance pattern 70a occurs, and is a specified frame after the change performance starts. At this frame update timing, display of image data (background image, various change performance images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the returning change display begins on the first image display device 70.

As shown in FIG. 146(e), when transitioning from change display to normal display, the performance pattern 70a, background image HG, icon TH, and reserved icon T1 change so as to enlarge together, and the frame image GG is displayed as if it has disappeared off the screen. When transitioning from change display to normal display, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special pattern TZ displayed in the special pattern display area do not change so as to enlarge together with the performance pattern 70a, but are displayed in the same position.

In specific example 4, at the timing T5a before T5 when the image change performance ends, the first light-emitting area HK1 (first movable member 73) and the second light-emitting area HK2 (decorative frame 40, frame lighting device 10) change from the second state to the first state, and the performance light emission is executed. At this time, the first light-emitting area HK1 (second movable member 74) and the second light-emitting area HK2 (winning hole lamp NR) remain in the second state. Also, before the timing T5a before T5 when the image change performance starts to be executed, the first movable member 73 starts to change from the second state to the first state, and at the timing T5a, the first movable member 73 returns to the first state and stops. At this time, the second movable member 74 remains in the second state. Then, at the timing T5, the change display returns to the normal display, and the image change performance ends.

At a timing T5b after T5 when the image change performance ends, the first light-emitting area HK1 (second movable member 74) and the second light-emitting area HK2 (winning port lamp NR) change from the second state to the first state, and the light emission performance is executed. Also, at a timing before T5 when the image change performance starts, the second movable member 74 starts to change from the second state to the first state, and at a timing of T5b, the first movable member 74 returns to the first state and stops. The return of the movable members 73 and 74 to the first state may start after the image change performance ends, or in conjunction with (synchronized with) the end of the image change performance.

Specific example 4 is configured to be able to execute a light-emitting effect that changes from a first state to a second state by linking at least one of the first light-emitting area HK1 and the second light-emitting area HK2 when an image change effect is performed. In this way, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the change display, and to increase the interest of the game. In particular, by changing from a relatively bright first state to a second state that is darker than the first state when an image change effect is performed, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the image change effect executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 without directing the player's attention to the area around the screen of the first image display device 70, and to increase the interest of the game.

Specific example 4 is capable of displaying the special symbol TZ and reserved numbers on the screen of the first image display device 70 together with the performance symbol 70a, reserved icon T1, background image HG, etc. Furthermore, in the image change performance, the special symbol TZ and reserved numbers can be displayed in the same position regardless of whether the performance symbol 70a, reserved icon T1, and background image HG are normally displayed or changed. In this way, even when the image change performance is executed, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the necessary information, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player if the information displayed in the same position (third image) has the same content as the information that changes in the image change performance (first image and second image).

Specific example 4 can display the special symbol TZ and reserved numbers on the screen of the first image display device 70 together with the performance symbol 70a, the reserved icon T1, the background image HG, etc. In the image change performance, the visibility of the performance symbol 70a, the reserved icon T1, and the background image HG changes between the change display and the normal display. In contrast, the special symbol TZ and reserved numbers can be displayed so that their visibility does not change whether they are in the change display or the normal display. In this way, even when the image change performance is executed, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the necessary information, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information (third image) that does not change visibility is the same as the information (first image and second image) that changes in the image change performance.

Specific example 4 is capable of displaying a frame image GG on the screen of the first image display device 70, which changes in conjunction with the change from the normal display of the performance pattern 70a, the reserved icon T1, and the background image HG to the change display when the image change performance is executed. In this way, when the image change performance is executed, the change display can be made to attract the player's attention, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, by making the frame image GG, which is not displayed in the normal display, appear in the change display, the change display can be made to attract the player's attention more, and the interest of the game can be improved. Note that the frame image GG may be in the same image (image layer) as the performance pattern 70a, the reserved icon T1, and the background image HG, or may be set as a different image (different image layer) from these and expressed to change together with the performance pattern 70a, the reserved icon T1, and the background image HG.

Specific example 4 executes the change of the first light-emitting area HK1 and/or the second light-emitting area HK2 to the second state at a time that is offset from the start of the image change presentation. In this way, the change display can be made to attract the player's attention when the image change presentation begins to be executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the fourth specific example, the change of the movable members 73 and 74 to the second state and the output of the change notification sound are executed at a time lag with the start of the image change presentation. In this way, the change display can be made to attract the player's attention when the image change presentation starts to be executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In specific example 4, the change of movable members 73, 74 to the first state is completed at a time that is offset from the end of the image change presentation. In this way, the change from the change display to the normal display when the image change presentation is completed can attract the player's attention, and the excitement of the game can be increased.

Specific example 4 returns the first light-emitting area HK1 and/or the second light-emitting area HK2 to the first state at a time that is different from the end of the image change presentation. In this way, the change from the change display to the normal display when the image change presentation ends can attract the player's attention, improving the enjoyment of the game.

As shown in Figures 147 and 148, in an image change presentation, an effect EF that decorates the change display may be displayed together with the change display. The effect EF may be either a moving image or a fixed image, and may change in accordance with the change display or may not change. Furthermore, the effect EF may be displayed superimposed in front of the change display (Figure 147(a)), behind the change display (Figure 147(b)), or so as not to overlap with the change display (Figure 148).

When an effect EF is displayed together with the change display in an image change presentation, the effect EF may be displayed in a shape or color that corresponds to the expectation of a big win. For example, when the expectation is low, a blue effect EF may be displayed (Figure 148 (a)), and when the expectation is high, a red effect EF may be displayed. Note that the expectation display using the effect EF may be changed during the period of the image change presentation.

In the image change presentation, a presentation may be performed in coordination with a light guide plate or other presentation means. Also, a presentation may be performed on the screen of the second image display device 71 in coordination with the image change presentation performed on the screen of the first image display device 70. For example, the first light-emitting area HK1 and the second light-emitting area HK2 may be set to the second state, and the screen of the second image display device 71 may be darkened in coordination with a presentation in which the periphery of the screen of the first image display device 70 is made relatively dark.

In an image change performance, a predetermined image such as the performance pattern 70a or the hold icon may not be included in the change display, and the performance pattern 70a or the hold icon may be displayed in the same manner as the normal display, for example, by fixedly displaying them in the same position as the normal display (Fig. 149 (a)). In an image change performance, a predetermined image such as the hold icon may not be included in the change display, and the hold icon may be erased or displayed so that it is not visible during the execution period of the image change performance (Fig. 149 (b)). Note that in an image change performance, a predetermined image such as the performance pattern 70a or the hold icon included in the change display may be displayed in the same manner as the normal display, for example, by fixedly displaying them in the same position as the normal display.

Information displayed on the screen, such as system information IF1, such as characters guiding the player to hit right, included in the normal display (Fig. 150(a)), and game information IF2, such as characters indicating the number of time-saving rounds after the end of a jackpot game, may be displayed as follows in an image display presentation. For example, in an image change presentation, system information IF1 may not be included in the change display, and system information IF1 may be displayed in the same manner as in the normal display, such as by being fixedly displayed in the same position as in the normal display (Fig. 150(b)). Also, in an image change presentation, game information IF2 may be included in the change display (Fig. 150(b)). In this case, an image showing the same information as game information IF2 reduced in the change display may be enlarged and displayed superimposed on the change display.

In the image change presentation, an effect EF may be displayed that associates the movable members 73, 74 in the second state that performs the presentation action with the change display (Fig. 151(a)). In the image change presentation, the action presentation and/or effect EF of the movable members 73, 74 in the second state may be linked with the change in the change display, for example, by the second movable member 74 pushing or pulling the change display, thereby changing its position (Fig. 151(b) and (c)).

Image change effects can be performed at various times in conjunction with other effects. For example, image change effects can be performed during consecutive look-ahead effects.

The start or end of the image change performance (the start of shrinking the normally displayed image or the return of the changed image to the normal display) may be associated with the operation of the operating means such as the button operation of the performance button device 16. For example, when the image change performance becomes executable, a button image may be displayed on the screen to guide the button operation, and when the button operation is performed, the image change performance may be started. If the button image is used in common for a plurality of performance modes, the amount of data can be compressed. Also, when a predetermined condition (e.g., long press or repeated tap) is met by the operation of the operating means such as the button operation of the performance button device 16, the change display, or the effect EF or image displayed together with the change display may be changed (e.g., the glass may be broken). At this time, the change display, or the effect EF or image displayed together with the change display may be changed (e.g., the glass may be gradually broken) each time a predetermined condition (e.g., long press or repeated tap) is met by the operation of the operating means.

The image change effect may be selectable from a plurality of patterns. For example, a plurality of patterns may be set, such as an image change effect having a change display in which the effect pattern 70a and the background image HG change together, or an image change effect having a change display in which the effect pattern 70a is not included and the background image HG changes.

The change display may be a single image or a combination of separate images that move in unison. For example, an image larger than the displayable area of the screen may be formed so that the frame image GG is not visible in the normal display (Fig. 152(a)), and the frame image GG may be displayed on the screen by changing to a change display that is smaller than the displayable area of the screen (Fig. 152(b)). The change display may be rotated or swung (Fig. 152(c)), deformed, for example, so that it is stretched horizontally (Fig. 152(d)), stretched, for example, by tilting (Fig. 152(e)), or reduced or enlarged. When the image change performance ends, the change display may be changed so that it is enlarged beyond the displayable area of the screen (Figs. 153(a) and (b)). When the image change performance ends and the change display is switched from the change display to the normal display, a switching performance may be inserted, such as a whiteout that displays a white image for a moment (Fig. 153(c)). After that, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing state ("285") (Fig. 153 (d)). At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings) up and down at the predetermined stop position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging action (performance action). In addition, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating (performance action). Then, when the special pattern fluctuation time has passed, the first special pattern is stopped and displayed in a losing state on the first special pattern display 60. In addition, the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a is stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is stopped in a predetermined losing state (Fig. 153 (e)).

In the image change presentation, the display presentation of the change display is executed in accordance with the frame update timing. At this time, other presentations other than the change display (sound effects, light emission, operation of props) can be executed in accordance with the change in the change display. Alternatively, the other presentations may be executed at a timing that is out of sync with the change in the change display. Then, when returning from a state in which the change display is changing to a normal display where no change occurs, the end timing of the other presentations other than the change display (sound effects, light emission, operation of props) executed in accordance with the change display can be made earlier or later than, or the same as, the end timing of the change in the change display.

When the image change performance starts (when the change display shrinks), multiple performances (sound, image, lighting device, movable prop operation) may start at the same frame update timing, and when the image change performance ends (when the change display expands), multiple performances (sound, image, lighting device, movable prop operation) may not start at the same frame update timing.

In the image change performance, a predetermined image (e.g., performance pattern 70a or background image HG, etc.) that was in the normal position in the normal display shrinks toward the back of the screen and changes to the change position, and the predetermined image that was in the change position in the change display expands from the back of the screen toward the front and returns to the normal position, returning to the normal display. Here, in the image change performance, it is preferable to make the start period during which the predetermined image changes from the normal position to the change position longer than the return period during which the predetermined image changes from the change position to the normal position. In other words, it is preferable to make the number of frames when the change display shrinks at the start of the image change performance (start period) greater than the number of frames when the change display expands at the end of the image change performance (return period). In this way, by increasing the number of frames at the start of the image change performance, it is easy for the player to understand, and the image change performance can be attracted to the image change performance, improving the interest of the game. In addition, by reducing the number of frames at the end of the image change performance, the transition to the normal display can be made quickly, leading to interest in the next change performance. Here, with regard to the operation of the movable members 73, 74 and the changes in the light-emitting areas HK1, HK2 that are executed in conjunction with the shrinking and enlarging changes of the specified image in the image change performance, it is advisable to make those executed in conjunction with the start period longer than those executed in conjunction with the return period.

Although specific examples of operating the movable members 73, 74 in the image change performance have been described above, it is not necessary to operate the movable members 73, 74, and the movable parts 73, 74 may be stopped during the execution of the image change performance.

(When conditions are not met in the production control unit)
Next, a case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally and the specified conditions are not met in the performance control unit 130m will be described. When the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally, for example, a communication abnormality such as a failure to receive a command due to a disconnection, partial disconnection, or connector loss of the command line connecting the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130, or an abnormal reception of a command due to a command garbled by noise or partial disconnection, can be considered. In the following description, a case where the performance control unit 130m can receive a command normally is represented by "◯" in the figure, and a case where a specified state occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally is represented by "×" in the figure. Then, during a specified period from when a specified state occurs in which a command cannot be received normally for the first time until a command can be received normally, one or more commands of the same type and/or different types may not be received normally. In addition, the command is represented as "cd" in the figure.

The performance pattern 70a displayed on the first image display device 70 in the normal game state is composed of a decorative portion consisting of a rectangular base image, a character image CG consisting of a specified character, a bar-shaped image SG that is part of the character, and a pattern effect image ZE that decorates the background of the character, and an identification portion consisting of a hexagonal base image and a number portion (identification character). Also, the performance pattern 70a displayed on the first image display device 70 in the specific game state is composed only of an identification portion consisting of a number portion (identification character).

In the normal game state, the background images corresponding to each of the presentation modes A to C scroll left and right (reciprocating motion). In the specific game state, the background images corresponding to each of the presentation modes D to E scroll left and right (reciprocating motion).

In addition, if the connector of a specific detection sensor (start port detection switch 45a, 47a, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) becomes unplugged, an abnormality (error notification) is immediately issued. In contrast, if there is a command abnormality due to a connector being unplugged on the command line that communicates between the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130, no abnormality notification is issued.

The following specific example describes a case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally in the normal game state, but even if the game state is a specific game state (time-saving game state, special chance game state), the basic flow is the same as in the normal game state.

Specifically, the first reserved number, the first special symbol memory designation command, the first special symbol, the first special symbol display 60, the first special symbol reserved indicator 63, the sub-first variable indicator 81, the sub-first reserved indicator 83, the first reserved number display area 70E, the first reserved icon display area 70B, the first lamp symbol, and the first start port 45 can be read as the second reserved number, the second special symbol memory designation command, the second special symbol, the second special symbol display 61, the second special symbol reserved indicator 64, the sub-second variable indicator 82, the sub-second reserved indicator 84, the second reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp symbol, and the second start port 47.

(Example 1 when conditions are not met in the production control unit)
154 and 155, a specific example 1 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally and the predetermined conditions are not met in the performance control unit 130m will be described. Fig. 154 is a timing chart of the case where the predetermined conditions are not met in the performance control unit 130m, and Fig. 155 is a performance example corresponding to the timing chart of Fig. 154.

At timing P1, the first special pattern display 60 starts displaying the changes in the first special pattern, and when the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the game state designation command, performance pattern designation command, and change pattern designation command as start commands sent from the main control unit 110m, the performance pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and the one-lamp pattern change display on the sub first change display 81 start displaying (see FIG. 155(a)).

At timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("285"). At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance action). In addition, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performance action) (see FIG. 155(b)).

At the timing of P3, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol determination command, abbreviated to pattern determination cd in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing to end the changing performance is performed. At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined losing state ("285") (see FIG. 155(c)), and the first lamp symbol on the sub first changing display 81 stops in a losing state (for example, off).

At timing P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the variation of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance symbol designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the one-lamp symbol on the sub first variation display 81 start displaying the variation. Note that the performance symbol 70a starts scrolling after a preparatory operation such as a part of the decorative part moving or the whole or part expanding and contracting as in this embodiment (see FIG. 155(d)). After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variation display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating (performance) (see FIG. 155(e)).

At timing P5, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("164"). At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swinging display) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a swing (performance operation). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH (performance operation) continue (see Figure 155 (f)).

At the timing of P6, when the time for the special pattern to change has elapsed, the first special pattern is stopped and displayed in a losing state on the first special pattern display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special pattern confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the change performance will not be performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon H1 and the icon TH continue, the period of the provisional stop of the performance pattern 70a, the change display of the special pattern TZ, and the change display of the first lamp pattern on the sub first change display 81 are extended, and the output of the BGM during the change is maintained accordingly (see FIG. 155(f)). The provisionally stopped performance pattern 70a slightly sways (swings) up and down the predetermined stop position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the performance pattern 70a perform a swaying motion (performance motion).

At the timing of P7, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the variation of the first special symbol. At this time, if the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the performance symbol designation command and the variation pattern designation command, the variation display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the 1 lamp symbol on the sub-first variation display 81 does not start. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon H1 and the icon TH continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance symbol 70a, the variation display of the special symbol TZ, and the variation display of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variation display 81 are extended, and the output of the BGM during the variation is maintained accordingly (see FIG. 155(f)). The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a sways slightly (swaying display) up and down from a predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a also perform a swaying motion (performance movement).

At timing P8, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the varying display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 60, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the varying display of the special pattern TZ, and the varying display of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first varying display device 81 are extended (see Figure 155 (f)).

At the timing of P9, when the time for the special pattern to change has elapsed, the first special pattern is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special pattern display 60. When the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special pattern confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing is performed to end the changing performance. At this time, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing state (see FIG. 155(g)), and the first lamp pattern on the sub first changing display 81 stops in a losing state (e.g., off).

At the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the variation of the first special symbol. At this time, if the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command and the variation pattern designation command as the start command sent from the main control unit 110m, but the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the performance symbol designation command, the variation display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the 1 lamp symbol on the sub-first variation display 81 does not start. At this time, the performance symbol 70a stops at the stop position, the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined missing state, and the state in which the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variation display 81 stops in a missing state (e.g., off) continues (see FIG. 155(g)).

At timing P11, even if a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the varying display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 60, the period of the main stop of the performance pattern 70a, the main stop of the varying display of the special pattern TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first varying display device 81 are extended (see Figure 155 (g)).

At the timing of P12, when the time for the special pattern to change has elapsed, the first special pattern is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special pattern display 60. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special pattern confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the period of the main stop of the performance pattern 70a, the main stop of the display of the special pattern TZ change, and the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first change display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155 (g)).

At the timing of P13, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the variation of the first special symbol. At this time, if the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command and the performance symbol designation command as the start command sent from the main control unit 110m, but the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the variation pattern designation command, the variation display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the 1 lamp symbol on the sub-first variation display 81 does not start. At this time, the performance symbol 70a stops at the stop position, the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined missing state, and the state in which the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variation display 81 stops in a missing state (e.g., off) continues (see FIG. 155(g)).

At timing P14, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the varying display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 60, the period of the main stop of the performance pattern 70a, the main stop of the varying display of the special pattern TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first varying display device 81 are extended (see Figure 155 (g)).

At the timing of P15, when the time for the special pattern to change has elapsed, the first special pattern is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special pattern display 60. If the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special pattern confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the period of the main stop of the performance pattern 70a, the main stop of the display of the special pattern TZ change, and the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first change display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155 (g)).

At the timing of P16, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the variation of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance symbol designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variation of the 1 lamp symbol on the sub first variation display 81 start to be displayed. Note that the performance symbol 70a starts to scroll after a preparatory operation such as a part of the decorative part moving or the whole or part of it expanding and contracting as in this embodiment (see FIG. 155 (h)). After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variation display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating (performance operation) (see FIG. 155 (i)).

In addition, if the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the command sent from the main control unit 110m, but the display/audio control unit 140 and lamp/drive control unit 150 are unable to successfully receive the performance command sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, the same processing will be carried out as in the case where the performance control unit 130m is unable to successfully receive the command (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m.

In specific example 1, in the presentation control unit 130m, if the first condition for specifying the game state (game state specification command), the second condition for specifying the presentation pattern 70a (presentation pattern specification command) and the third condition for specifying the presentation pattern of the presentation pattern (variation pattern specification command) are met (successful reception), the presentation pattern 70a begins to vary, and if the fourth condition for stopping the variation of the presentation pattern 70a (special pattern determination command) is not met (missed out), the presentation pattern 70a sways and varies based on the second condition (presentation pattern specification command). In response to this, in the performance control unit 130m, if the first condition for specifying the game state (game state specification command) is met (normal reception), but at least one of the second condition for specifying the performance pattern 70a (performance pattern specification command) and the third condition for specifying the performance pattern of the performance pattern (variation pattern specification command) is not met (missed out), the variation of the performance pattern 70a will not begin (regardless of whether the fourth condition (special pattern determination command) is satisfied (normal reception) or absent). By doing this, it is easy to determine that a malfunction has occurred in the performance control unit 130m, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(Specific example 2 when conditions are not met in the production control unit)
155 and 156, a specific example 2 will be described in which the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally and a predetermined condition is not met in the performance control unit 130m. Fig. 156 is a timing chart in which a predetermined condition is not met in the performance control unit 130m, and specific example 2 will be described with reference to the performance example in Fig. 155.

At timing P1, when the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the game state designation command, performance symbol designation command, and variation pattern designation command sent as start commands from the main control unit 110m, the display of the variations of the performance symbol 70a, special symbol TZ, and 1 lamp symbol on the sub first variation display 81 begins (see FIG. 155(a)). At this time, the display of the variations of the first special symbol begins on the first special symbol display 60.

At timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("285"). At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance action). In addition, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performance action) (see FIG. 155(b)).

At the timing of P3, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol determination command, abbreviated to pattern determination cd in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing to end the changing performance is performed. At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined losing state ("285") (see FIG. 155(c)), and the first lamp symbol on the sub first changing display 81 stops in a losing state (for example, turned off).

At timing P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the variation of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, performance symbol designation command, and variation pattern designation command as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the one-lamp symbol on the sub first variation display 81 start displaying the variation. Note that the performance symbol 70a starts scrolling after a preparatory operation such as a part of the decorative part moving or the whole or part expanding and contracting as in this embodiment (see FIG. 155(d)). After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variation display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating (performance) (see FIG. 155(e)).

At timing P5, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("164"). At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swinging display) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a swing (performance operation). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH (performance operation) continue (see Figure 155 (f)).

At the timing of P6, when the time for the special pattern to change has elapsed, the first special pattern is stopped and displayed in a losing state on the first special pattern display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special pattern confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the change performance will not be performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon H1 and the icon TH continue, the period of the provisional stop of the performance pattern 70a, the change display of the special pattern TZ, and the change display of the first lamp pattern on the sub first change display 81 are extended, and the output of the BGM during the change is maintained accordingly (see FIG. 155(f)). The provisionally stopped performance pattern 70a slightly sways (swings) up and down the predetermined stop position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the performance pattern 70a perform a swaying motion (performance motion).

At the timing of P7, when the stop time of the special pattern has elapsed, the first special pattern display 60 starts displaying the variation of the first special pattern. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, while the performance control unit 130m normally receives the performance pattern designation command and the variation pattern designation command, the display of the variation of the performance pattern 70a starts, and the display of the variation of the special pattern TZ and the one lamp pattern on the sub first variation display 81 continues. Note that the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as the operation of a part of the decorative part or the whole or part of the decorative part expanding and contracting as in this embodiment (see FIG. 155 (h)). After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the performance pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the scrolling of the background image continues. At this time, the display of the performance pattern 70a has started to change, so the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performing) (see FIG. 155(i)). At this time, the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a may be displayed as is, or it may be stopped permanently (for a moment), erased, or rewritten before the display of the performance pattern 70a starts to change.

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state. At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings) up and down the predetermined stop position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the performance pattern 70a swing (performance operation). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (performance operation) of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 155(f)).

At the timing of P9, when the time for the special pattern to change has elapsed, the first special pattern is stopped and displayed in a losing state on the first special pattern display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special pattern confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the change performance will not be performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon H1 and the icon TH continue, the period of the provisional stop of the performance pattern 70a, the change display of the special pattern TZ, and the change display of the first lamp pattern on the sub first change display 81 are extended, and the output of the BGM during the change is maintained accordingly (see FIG. 155(f)). The provisionally stopped performance pattern 70a slightly wobbles (wobbles) up and down the predetermined stop position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the performance pattern 70a are also performing a wobbly motion (performance motion).

At the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special pattern has elapsed, the first special pattern display 60 starts displaying the variation of the first special pattern. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance pattern designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the display of the variation of the performance pattern 70a starts, and the display of the variation of the special pattern TZ and the one-lamp pattern on the sub first variation display 81 continues. Note that the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after a preparatory operation such as a part of the decorative part moving or the whole or part of the decorative part moving and shrinking as in this embodiment (see FIG. 155 (h)). After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the performance pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the display of the variation of the performance pattern 70a has started, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating (performance) (see FIG. 155 (i)). At this time, the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a may be displayed as is, but it may also be stopped permanently (for a moment), erased, or rewritten before the display of the performance pattern 70a begins to change.

At timing P11, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing mode. At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performance motion) (see FIG. 155 (f)).

At the timing of P12, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol determination command, abbreviated to pattern determination cd in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing is performed to end the changing performance. At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined losing state (see FIG. 155(g)), and the first lamp symbol on the sub first changing display 81 stops in a losing state (for example, off).

At timing P13, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the variation of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance symbol designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variation of the 1 lamp symbol on the sub first variation display 81 start displaying. Note that the performance symbol 70a starts scrolling after a preparatory operation such as a part of the decorative part moving or the whole or part expanding and contracting as in this embodiment (see FIG. 155 (h)). After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variation display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating (performance operation) (see FIG. 155 (i)).

In addition, if the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the command sent from the main control unit 110m, but the display/audio control unit 140 and lamp/drive control unit 150 are unable to successfully receive the performance command sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, the same processing will be carried out as in the case where the performance control unit 130m is unable to successfully receive the command (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m.

In the specific example 2, in the performance control unit 130m, when the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the second condition (performance designation command) regarding the performance pattern 70a, and the third condition (change pattern designation command) regarding the performance pattern (change pattern) of the performance pattern 70a are satisfied, the first state is entered in which the change performance starts, and when the fourth condition (special pattern determination command) regarding the stop of the change of the performance pattern 70a is lacking, the second state is entered in which the change performance can be executed with the performance pattern 70a determined based on the second condition. In contrast, in the performance control unit 130m, when the first condition (game state designation command) is lacking but the second condition (performance designation command) and the third condition (change pattern designation command) are satisfied, the same change performance as the first state is entered in the state where it is possible to execute the same change performance as the second state, and when the fourth condition (special pattern determination command) is lacking, the same change performance as the second state is entered in the state where it is possible to execute. By doing so, it is easy to know that a malfunction has occurred in the performance control unit 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Specific example 2 is a configuration in which, when the performance control unit 130m satisfies a predetermined condition (performance pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) related to the performance pattern 70a, the variation performance of the performance pattern 70a is started regardless of whether the conditions related to the game state (game state designation command) are satisfied or not, and when the conditions related to the stopping of the variation of the performance pattern 70a (special pattern determination command) are not satisfied, the swing variation can be executed with the performance pattern 70a determined based on the predetermined condition (performance pattern designation command). By doing this, it is easy to know that a malfunction has occurred in the performance control unit 130m, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(Specific example 3 when conditions are not met in the production control unit)
155 and 157, a specific example 3 will be described in which the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally and a predetermined condition is not met in the performance control unit 130m. Fig. 157 is a timing chart in which a predetermined condition is not met in the performance control unit 130m, and specific example 3 will be described with reference to the performance example in Fig. 155.

At timing P1, when the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the game state designation command, performance symbol designation command, and variation pattern designation command sent from the main control unit 110m as start commands, the display of the performance symbol 70a, special symbol TZ, and the one-lamp symbol variation on the sub-first variation display 81 begins (see FIG. 155(a)). At this time, the display of the variation of the first special symbol begins on the first special symbol display 60.

At timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("285"). At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance action). In addition, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performance action) (see FIG. 155(b)).

At the timing of P3, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol determination command, abbreviated to pattern determination cd in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing to end the changing performance is performed. At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined losing state ("285") (see FIG. 155(c)), and the first lamp symbol on the sub first changing display 81 stops in a losing state (for example, off).

At timing P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the variation of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, performance symbol designation command, and variation pattern designation command as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the one-lamp symbol on the sub first variation display 81 start displaying the variation. Note that the performance symbol 70a starts scrolling after a preparatory operation such as a part of the decorative part moving or the whole or part expanding and contracting as in this embodiment (see FIG. 155(d)). After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variation display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating (performance) (see FIG. 155(e)).

At timing P5, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("164"). At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swinging display) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a swing (performance operation). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH (performance operation) continue (see Figure 155 (f)).

At the timing of P6, when the time for the special pattern to change has elapsed, the first special pattern is stopped and displayed in a losing state on the first special pattern display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special pattern confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the change performance will not be performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon H1 and the icon TH continue, the period of the provisional stop of the performance pattern 70a, the change display of the special pattern TZ, and the change display of the first lamp pattern on the sub first change display 81 are extended, and the output of the BGM during the change is maintained accordingly (see FIG. 155(f)). In addition to the provisionally stopped performance pattern 70a slightly shaking (swinging display) up and down the predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the performance pattern 70a are performing a shaking motion (performance motion).

At the timing of P7, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the variation of the first special symbol. At this time, if the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive any of the game state designation command, performance symbol designation command, and variation pattern designation command as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variation display of the 1 lamp symbol on the sub-first variation display 81 do not start. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon H1 and the icon TH continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance symbol 70a, the variation display of the special symbol TZ, and the variation display of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variation display 81 are extended, and the output of the BGM during the variation is maintained accordingly (see FIG. 155(f)). The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a sways slightly (swaying display) up and down from a predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a also perform a swaying motion (performance movement).

At timing P8, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the varying display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 60, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the varying display of the special pattern TZ, and the varying display of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first varying display device 81 are extended (see Figure 155 (f)).

At the timing of P9, when the time for the special pattern to change has elapsed, the first special pattern is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special pattern display 60. When the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special pattern confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing is performed to end the changing performance. At this time, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing state (see FIG. 155(g)), and the first lamp pattern on the sub first changing display 81 stops in a losing state (e.g., off).

At the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the variation of the first special symbol. At this time, if the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command and the performance symbol designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the performance control unit 130m normally receives the variation pattern designation command, the variation display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the 1 lamp symbol on the sub-first variation display 81 does not start. At this time, the performance symbol 70a stops at the stop position, the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined missing state, and the state in which the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variation display 81 stops in a missing state (e.g., off) continues (see FIG. 155(g)).

At timing P11, even if a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the varying display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 60, the period of the main stop of the performance pattern 70a, the main stop of the varying display of the special pattern TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first varying display device 81 are extended (see Figure 155 (g)).

At the timing of P12, when the time for the special pattern to change has elapsed, the first special pattern is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special pattern display 60. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special pattern confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the period of the main stop of the performance pattern 70a, the main stop of the display of the special pattern TZ change, and the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first change display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155 (g)).

At the timing of P13, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the variation of the first special symbol. At this time, if the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command and the variation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, while the performance control unit 130m normally receives the performance symbol designation command, the variation display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the 1 lamp symbol on the sub-first variation display 81 does not start. At this time, the performance symbol 70a stops at the stop position, the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined missing mode, and the state in which the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variation display 81 stops in a missing mode (e.g., off) continues (see FIG. 155(g)).

At timing P14, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the varying display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 60, the period of the main stop of the performance pattern 70a, the main stop of the varying display of the special pattern TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first varying display device 81 are extended (see Figure 155 (g)).

At the timing of P15, when the time for the special pattern to change has elapsed, the first special pattern is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special pattern display 60. If the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special pattern confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the period of the main stop of the performance pattern 70a, the main stop of the display of the special pattern TZ change, and the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first change display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155 (g)).

At the timing of P16, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the variation of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance symbol designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variation of the 1 lamp symbol on the sub first variation display 81 start to be displayed. Note that the performance symbol 70a starts to scroll after a preparatory operation such as a part of the decorative part moving or the whole or part of it expanding and contracting as in this embodiment (see FIG. 155 (h)). After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variation display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating (performance operation) (see FIG. 155 (i)).

In addition, if the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the command sent from the main control unit 110m, but the display/audio control unit 140 and lamp/drive control unit 150 are unable to successfully receive the performance command sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, the same processing will be carried out as in the case where the performance control unit 130m is unable to successfully receive the command (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m.

In the third example, in the performance control unit 130m, when the first condition (game state designation command), the second condition (designation command) regarding the performance pattern 70a, and the third condition (change pattern designation command) regarding the performance pattern (change pattern) of the performance pattern 70a are satisfied, the performance control unit 130m starts the change performance of the performance pattern 70a, and when the fourth condition (special pattern determination command) regarding the stop of the change of the performance pattern 70a is not satisfied, the swing change can be executed with the performance pattern 70a determined based on the second condition (performance pattern designation command). On the other hand, in the performance control unit 130m, when the first condition (game state designation command) is not satisfied and at least one of the second condition (performance pattern designation command) and the third condition (change pattern designation command) is not satisfied, the performance control unit 130m can control not to start the change performance of the performance pattern 70a. By doing so, it is easy to know that a malfunction has occurred in the performance control unit 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Specific example 4 when conditions are not met in the production control unit)
155 and 158, a specific example 4 will be described in which the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally and a predetermined condition is not met in the performance control unit 130m. Fig. 158 is a timing chart in which a predetermined condition is not met in the performance control unit 130m, and specific example 4 will be described with reference to the performance example in Fig. 155.

At the timing of P1, when the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the game state designation command, performance symbol designation command, and variation pattern designation command sent as start commands from the main control unit 110m, the display of the variations of the performance symbol 70a, special symbol TZ, and 1 lamp symbol on the sub first variation display 81 begins (see FIG. 155(a)). At this time, the display of the variations of the first special symbol begins on the first special symbol display 60.

At timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("285"). At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance action). In addition, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performance action) (see FIG. 155(b)).

At the timing of P3, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol determination command, abbreviated to pattern determination cd in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing to end the changing performance is performed. At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined losing state ("285") (see FIG. 155(c)), and the first lamp symbol on the sub first changing display 81 stops in a losing state (for example, off).

At timing P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, if the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command as the start command sent from the main control unit 110m, but does not normally receive the performance symbol designation command and the variable pattern designation command, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the 1 lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 does not start, and the period of the main stop of the performance symbol 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At timing P5, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the varying display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 60, the stop period of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first varying display device 81 is extended (see Figure 155 (c)).

At the timing of P6, when the time for the special pattern to change has elapsed, the first special pattern is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special pattern display 60. Even if the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special pattern confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the change performance has not started, so the period of the main stop of the performance pattern 70a, the main stop of the change display of the special pattern TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first change display 81 are extended (see Figure 155 (c)).

At the timing of P7, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol. At this time, if the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command and the change pattern designation command as start commands sent from the main control unit 110m, but the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the performance symbol designation command, the display of the one lamp symbol on the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first change display 81 does not start. As a result, the period of the main stop of the performance symbol 70a, the main stop of the display of the special symbol TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first change display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At timing P8, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the varying display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 60, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the varying display of the special pattern TZ, and the varying display of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first varying display device 81 are extended (see Figure 155 (c)).

At the timing of P9, when the time for the special pattern to change has elapsed, the first special pattern is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special pattern display 60. Even if the performance control unit 130m is unable to normally receive the stop command (special pattern confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the change performance has not started, so the period of the main stop of the performance pattern 70a, the main stop of the change display of the special pattern TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first change display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

At the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol. At this time, if the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command and performance symbol designation command as start commands sent from the main control unit 110m, but the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the change pattern designation command, the display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the one lamp symbol on the sub-first change display 81 does not start. As a result, the period of the main stop of the performance symbol 70a, the main stop of the display of the special symbol TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first change display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At timing P11, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the varying display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 60, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the varying display of the special pattern TZ, and the varying display of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first varying display device 81 are extended (see Figure 155 (c)).

At the timing of P12, when the time for the special pattern to change has elapsed, the first special pattern is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special pattern display 60. Even if the performance control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special pattern confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the change performance has not started, so the period of the main stop of the performance pattern 70a, the main stop of the change display of the special pattern TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first change display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P13, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the variation of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive the game state designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, while the performance control unit 130m normally receives the performance symbol designation command and the variation pattern designation command, the variation display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the one lamp symbol on the sub first variation display 81 starts. Note that the performance symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as the operation of a part of the decorative part or the whole or part of the decorative part expanding and contracting as in this embodiment (see FIG. 155(d)). After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a is scrolled at high speed while the scrolling of the background image continues. At this time, since the variation display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating (performance operation) (see FIG. 155(e)).

At timing P14, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("164"). At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performance motion) (see FIG. 155(f)).

At the timing of P15, when the time for the special pattern to change has elapsed, the first special pattern is stopped and displayed in a losing state on the first special pattern display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special pattern confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the change performance will not be performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon H1 and the icon TH continue, the period of the provisional stop of the performance pattern 70a, the change display of the special pattern TZ, and the change display of the first lamp pattern on the sub first change display 81 are extended, and the output of the BGM during the change is maintained accordingly (see FIG. 155(f)). The provisionally stopped performance pattern 70a slightly wobbles (wobbles) up and down the predetermined stop position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the performance pattern 70a perform a wobbly motion (performance motion).

At the timing of P16, when the stop time of the special pattern has elapsed, the first special pattern display 60 starts displaying the variation of the first special pattern. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance pattern designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the variation display of the 1 lamp pattern on the sub first variation display 81 start. Note that the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as the operation of a part of the decorative part or the whole or part of the decorative part expanding and contracting as in this embodiment (see FIG. 155 (h)). After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the performance pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the scrolling of the background image continues. At this time, since the variation display of the performance pattern 70a has started, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating (performance operation) (see FIG. 155 (i)). At this time, the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a may be displayed as is, but it may also be stopped permanently (for a moment), erased, or rewritten before the display of the performance pattern 70a begins to change.

From page 17 onwards, it is as described above.

In addition, if the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the command sent from the main control unit 110m, but the display/audio control unit 140 and lamp/drive control unit 150 are unable to successfully receive the performance command sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, the same processing will be carried out as in the case where the performance control unit 130m is unable to successfully receive the command (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m.

In the fourth specific example, when the first condition (game state designation command) related to the game state is satisfied in the performance control unit 130m, but at least one of the second condition (performance pattern designation command) related to the performance pattern 70a and the third condition (change pattern designation command) related to the performance pattern (change pattern) of the performance pattern 70a is lacking, the performance control unit 130m can control not to start the change performance. In contrast, when the first condition (game state designation command) is lacking but the second condition (performance pattern designation command) and the third condition (change pattern designation command) are satisfied in the performance control unit 130m, the change of the performance pattern can be started, and when the fourth condition (special pattern determination command) is lacking, the swing change can be performed with the performance pattern 70a determined based on the second condition (performance pattern designation command). In this way, it is easy to know that a malfunction has occurred in the performance control unit 130m, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Specific example 5 when conditions are not met in the production control unit)
155 and 159, a specific example 1 will be described in which the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally and a predetermined condition is not met in the performance control unit 130m. Fig. 159 is a timing chart in which a predetermined condition is not met in the performance control unit 130m, and a specific example 5 will be described with reference to the performance example in Fig. 155.

At the timing of P1, when the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the game state designation command, performance symbol designation command, and variation pattern designation command sent as start commands from the main control unit 110m, the display of the variations of the performance symbol 70a, special symbol TZ, and 1 lamp symbol on the sub first variation display 81 begins (see FIG. 155(a)). At this time, the display of the variations of the first special symbol begins on the first special symbol display 60.

At timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("285"). At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance action). In addition, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performance action) (see FIG. 155(b)).

At the timing of P3, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol determination command, abbreviated to pattern determination cd in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing to end the changing performance is performed. At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined losing state ("285") (see FIG. 155(c)), and the first lamp symbol on the sub first changing display 81 stops in a losing state (for example, off).

At timing P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, if the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command as the start command sent from the main control unit 110m, but does not normally receive the performance symbol designation command and the variable pattern designation command, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the 1 lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 does not start, and the period of the main stop of the performance symbol 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At timing P5, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the varying display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 60, the stop period of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first varying display device 81 is extended (see Figure 155 (c)).

At the timing of P6, when the time for the special pattern to change has elapsed, the first special pattern is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special pattern display 60. Even if the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special pattern confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the change performance has not started, so the period of the main stop of the performance pattern 70a, the main stop of the change display of the special pattern TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first change display 81 are extended (see Figure 155 (c)).

At timing P7, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the variable display of the first special symbol starts on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, if the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command and the variable pattern designation command as start commands sent from the main control unit 110m, but does not normally receive the performance symbol designation command, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the 1 lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 does not start, and the period of the main stop of the performance symbol 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At timing P8, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the varying display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 60, the stop period of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first varying display device 81 is extended (see Figure 155 (c)).

At the timing of P9, when the time for the special pattern to change has elapsed, the first special pattern is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special pattern display 60. Even if the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop command (special pattern confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the change performance has not started, so the period of the main stop of the performance pattern 70a, the main stop of the change display of the special pattern TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first change display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

At timing P10, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, if the game state designation command and the performance symbol designation command as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m are normally received by the performance control unit 130m, but the variable pattern designation command is not normally received by the performance control unit 130m, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the 1 lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 is not started, and the period of the main stop of the performance symbol 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At timing P11, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the varying display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 60, the stop period of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first varying display device 81 is extended (see Figure 155 (c)).

At the timing of P12, when the time for the special pattern to change has elapsed, the first special pattern is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special pattern display 60. Even if the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special pattern confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the change performance has not started, so the period of the main stop of the performance pattern 70a, the main stop of the change display of the special pattern TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first change display 81 are extended (see Figure 155 (c)).

At timing P13, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, if the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive any of the game state designation command, performance symbol designation command, and variable pattern designation command as start commands sent from the main control unit 110m, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the 1 lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 is not started, and the period of the main stop of the performance symbol 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At timing P14, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the varying display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 60, the stop period of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first varying display device 81 is extended (see Figure 155 (c)).

At the timing of P15, when the time for the special pattern to change has elapsed, the first special pattern is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special pattern display 60. Even if the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special pattern confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the change performance has not started, so the period of the main stop of the performance pattern 70a, the main stop of the change display of the special pattern TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first change display 81 are extended (see Figure 155 (c)).

At the timing of P16, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the variable display of the first special symbol starts on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the game state designation command and the performance symbol designation command as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m are not normally received by the performance control unit 130m, but the variable pattern designation command is normally received by the performance control unit 130m, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the 1 lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 does not start, and the period of the main stop of the performance symbol 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At timing P17, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the varying display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 60, the stop period of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first varying display device 81 is extended (see Figure 155 (c)).

At the timing of P18, when the time for the special pattern to change has elapsed, the first special pattern is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special pattern display 60. Even if the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop command (special pattern confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the change performance has not started, so the period of the main stop of the performance pattern 70a, the main stop of the change display of the special pattern TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first change display 81 are extended (see Figure 155 (c)).

At the timing of P19, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the variable display of the first special symbol starts on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive the game state designation command and the variable pattern designation command as the start command sent from the main control unit 110m, but the performance control unit 130m normally receives the performance symbol designation command, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the 1 lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 does not start, and the period of the main stop of the performance symbol 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At timing P20, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the varying display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 60, the stop period of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first varying display device 81 is extended (see Figure 155 (c)).

At the timing of P21, when the time for the special pattern to change has elapsed, the first special pattern is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special pattern display 60. Even if the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special pattern confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the change performance has not started, so the period of the main stop of the performance pattern 70a, the main stop of the change display of the special pattern TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first change display 81 are extended (see Figure 155 (c)).

At the timing of P22, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the variation of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance symbol designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variation of the 1 lamp symbol on the sub first variation display 81 start to be displayed. Note that the performance symbol 70a starts to scroll after a preparatory operation such as a part of the decorative part moving or the whole or part of it expanding and contracting as in this embodiment (see FIG. 155 (h)). After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variation display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating (performance operation) (see FIG. 155 (i)).

In addition, if the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the command sent from the main control unit 110m, but the display/audio control unit 140 and lamp/drive control unit 150 are unable to successfully receive the performance command sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, the same processing will be carried out as in the case where the performance control unit 130m is unable to successfully receive the command (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m.

Specific example 5 is that in the presentation control unit 130m, when a predetermined condition (presentation pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) related to the presentation pattern 70a is lacking, the presentation control unit 130m can be controlled so as not to start a variable presentation, regardless of whether the conditions related to the game state (game state designation command) and the conditions related to stopping the variation of the presentation pattern 70a (special pattern determination command) are satisfied or not. In this way, it is easy to determine that a malfunction has occurred in the presentation control unit 130m, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(Specific example 6 when conditions are not met in the production control unit)
155 and 160, a specific example 6 will be described in which the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally and a predetermined condition is not met in the performance control unit 130m. Fig. 160 is a timing chart in which a predetermined condition is not met in the performance control unit 130m, and specific example 6 will be described with reference to the performance example in Fig. 155.

At timing P1, when the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the game state designation command, performance symbol designation command, and variation pattern designation command sent from the main control unit 110m as start commands, the display of the performance symbol 70a, special symbol TZ, and the one-lamp symbol variation on the sub-first variation display 81 begins (see FIG. 155(a)). At this time, the display of the variation of the first special symbol begins on the first special symbol display 60.

At timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("285"). At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance action). In addition, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performance action) (see FIG. 155(b)).

At the timing of P3, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol determination command, abbreviated to pattern determination cd in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing to end the changing performance is performed. At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined losing state ("285") (see FIG. 155(c)), and the first lamp symbol on the sub first changing display 81 stops in a losing state (for example, turned off).

At timing P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the variation of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, while the performance control unit 130m normally receives the performance symbol designation command and the variation pattern designation command, the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variation of the 1 lamp symbol on the sub first variation display 81 start to be displayed. Note that the performance symbol 70a starts to scroll after a preparatory operation such as a part of the decorative part moving or the whole or part of the decorative part moving and expanding/reducing as in this embodiment (see FIG. 155(d)). After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variation display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating (performance operation) (see FIG. 155(e)).

At timing P5, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("164"). At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swinging display) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a swing (performance operation). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH (performance operation) continue (see Figure 155 (f)).

At the timing of P6, when the time for the special pattern to change has elapsed, the first special pattern is stopped and displayed in a losing state on the first special pattern display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special pattern confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the change performance will not be performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon H1 and the icon TH continue, the period of the provisional stop of the performance pattern 70a, the change display of the special pattern TZ, and the change display of the first lamp pattern on the sub first change display 81 are extended, and the output of the BGM during the change is maintained accordingly (see FIG. 155(f)). In addition to the provisionally stopped performance pattern 70a slightly shaking (swinging display) up and down the predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the performance pattern 70a are performing a shaking motion (performance motion).

At the timing of P7, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the variation of the first special symbol. At this time, if the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive any of the game state designation command, performance symbol designation command, and variation pattern designation command as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variation display of the 1 lamp symbol on the sub-first variation display 81 do not start. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon H1 and the icon TH continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance symbol 70a, the variation display of the special symbol TZ, and the variation display of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variation display 81 are extended, and the output of the BGM during the variation is maintained accordingly (see FIG. 155(f)). The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a sways slightly (swaying display) up and down from a predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a also perform a swaying motion (performance movement).

At timing P8, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the varying display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 60, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the varying display of the special pattern TZ, and the varying display of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first varying display device 81 are extended (see Figure 155 (f)).

At the timing of P9, when the time for the special pattern to change has elapsed, the first special pattern is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special pattern display 60. When the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special pattern confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing is performed to end the changing performance. At this time, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing state (see FIG. 155(g)), and the first lamp pattern on the sub first changing display 81 stops in a losing state (e.g., off).

At the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the variation of the first special symbol. At this time, if the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command and the performance symbol designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the performance control unit 130m normally receives the variation pattern designation command, the variation display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the 1 lamp symbol on the sub-first variation display 81 does not start. At this time, the performance symbol 70a stops at the stop position, the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined missing state, and the state in which the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variation display 81 stops in a missing state (e.g., off) continues (see FIG. 155(g)).

At timing P11, even if a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the varying display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 60, the period of the main stop of the performance pattern 70a, the main stop of the varying display of the special pattern TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first varying display device 81 are extended (see Figure 155 (g)).

At the timing of P12, when the time for the special pattern to change has elapsed, the first special pattern is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special pattern display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special pattern confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the change performance has not started, so the period of the main stop of the performance pattern 70a, the main stop of the change display of the special pattern TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first change display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155 (g)).

At the timing of P13, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the variation of the first special symbol. At this time, if the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command and the variation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, while the performance control unit 130m normally receives the performance symbol designation command, the variation display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the 1 lamp symbol on the sub-first variation display 81 does not start. At this time, the performance symbol 70a stops at the stop position, the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined missing mode, and the state in which the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variation display 81 stops in a missing mode (e.g., off) continues (see FIG. 155(g)).

At timing P14, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the varying display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 60, the period of the main stop of the performance pattern 70a, the main stop of the varying display of the special pattern TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first varying display device 81 are extended (see Figure 155 (g)).

At the timing of P15, when the time for the special pattern to change has elapsed, the first special pattern is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special pattern display 60. If the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special pattern confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the period of the main stop of the performance pattern 70a, the main stop of the display of the special pattern TZ change, and the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first change display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155 (g)).

At the timing of P16, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the variation of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance symbol designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variation of the 1 lamp symbol on the sub first variation display 81 start to be displayed. Note that the performance symbol 70a starts to scroll after a preparatory operation such as a part of the decorative part moving or the whole or part of it expanding and contracting as in this embodiment (see FIG. 155 (h)). After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variation display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating (performance operation) (see FIG. 155 (i)).

In addition, if the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the command sent from the main control unit 110m, but the display/audio control unit 140 and lamp/drive control unit 150 are unable to successfully receive the performance command sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, the same processing will be carried out as in the case where the performance control unit 130m is unable to successfully receive the command (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m.

In the sixth specific example, when the first condition (game state designation command) related to the game state is not satisfied in the performance control unit 130m, but the second condition (performance pattern designation command) related to the performance pattern 70a and the third condition (change pattern designation command) related to the performance pattern (change pattern) of the performance pattern 70a are satisfied, the change performance can be started, and when the fourth condition (special pattern determination command) related to the stop of the change of the performance pattern 70a is not satisfied, the swing change can be executed with the performance pattern 70a determined based on the second condition (performance pattern designation command). On the other hand, when the first condition (game state designation command) is not satisfied and at least one of the second condition (performance pattern designation command) and the third condition (change pattern designation command) is not satisfied in the performance control unit 130m, the change performance can be controlled not to be started. By doing so, it is easy to know that a malfunction has occurred in the performance control unit 130m, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Specific example 7 when conditions are not met in the production control unit)
161, a specific example 7 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally and the predetermined conditions are not met in the performance control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 161 is a timing chart of the case where the predetermined conditions are not met in the performance control unit 130m.

At timing P1, the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the game state designation command (game state A), performance symbol designation command, and change pattern designation command as start commands sent from the main control unit 110m, the performance pattern 70a, special symbol TZ, and the one-lamp symbol on the sub first change display 81 start to be displayed. The performance control unit 130m determines the internal state to be game state A based on the game state designation command that designates game state A. The performance control unit 130m also stores the reception history of the game state designation commands.

At timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing mode. At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance action). In addition, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performance action).

At the timing of P3, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol determination command, abbreviated to pattern determination cd in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing is performed to end the changing performance. At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined losing state, and the first lamp symbol stops in a losing state (for example, off) on the sub-first changing display 81.

At the timing P4, when the stop time of the special pattern has elapsed, the variable display of the first special pattern is started on the first special pattern display 60. At this time, when the game state designation command (game state A), the performance pattern designation command, and the variable pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m are normally received by the performance control unit 130m, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the one lamp pattern on the sub first variable display 81 is started. In this case, the performance control unit 130m maintains the internal state as the game state A, since the game state designation command that designates the game state A received at the timing P4 is the same command as the reception history of the previous game state designation command (game state A) (at the timing P1). Note that the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as the operation of a part of the decoration part or the whole or part of the decoration part expanding and contracting as in this embodiment (see FIG. 155 (d)). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the background image continues to scroll, and the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed. At this time, the display of the effect pattern 70a has started to change, so the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performative).

At timing P5, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing mode. At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swinging display) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation motion (performance action) of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue.

At the timing of P6, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing is performed to end the changing performance. At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined losing state, and the first lamp symbol stops in a losing state (for example, off) on the sub-first changing display 81.

At the timing of P7, when the stop time of the special pattern has elapsed, the first special pattern display 60 starts displaying the variation of the first special pattern. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command (game state B), the performance pattern designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the variation display of the 1 lamp pattern on the sub first variation display 81 start to be displayed. In this case, the performance control unit 130m switches the internal state to the game state B since the game state designation command that designates the game state A received at the timing of P7 is not the same command as the reception history of the previous game state designation command (game state A) (at the timing of P4). Note that the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as the operation of a part of the decoration part or the whole or part of the decoration part expanding and contracting as in this embodiment (see FIG. 155 (d)). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the background image continues to scroll, and the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed. At this time, the display of the effect pattern 70a has started to change, so the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performative).

At timing P8, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing mode. At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swinging display) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation motion (performance action) of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue.

At the timing of P9, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing is performed to end the changing performance. At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined losing state, and the first lamp symbol stops in a losing state (for example, off) on the sub-first changing display 81.

At the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command (game state A) as a start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, while the performance control unit 130m normally receives the performance pattern designation command and the variable pattern designation command, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the one lamp pattern on the sub first variable display 81 is started. In this case, the performance control unit 130m remains in game state B without switching the internal state to game state A, although the game state designation command designating game state A that could not be received at the timing of P10 is not the same command as the reception history of the previous game state designation command (game state B) (at the timing of P7). In addition, the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after preparatory operations such as part of the decorative part moving and the whole or part expanding and contracting as in this embodiment (see FIG. 155(d)). After a predetermined time has passed, the performance pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, the display of the changing performance pattern 70a has started, so the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performance operation).

At timing P11, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing mode. At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swinging display) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation motion (performance action) of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue.

At the timing of P12, when the special pattern change time has elapsed, the first special pattern is stopped and displayed in a losing state on the first special pattern display 60. When the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special pattern confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing is performed to end the change performance. At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing state, and the first lamp pattern stops in a losing state (for example, off) on the sub-first change display 81.

At the timing of P13, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the variation of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command (game state A) and the performance pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, while the performance control unit 130m normally receives the variation pattern designation command, the display of the variation of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the one lamp pattern on the sub first variation display 81 does not start, and the stopped state of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern continues. In this case, the performance control unit 130m remains in game state B without switching the internal state to game state A, although the game state designation command that could not be received at the timing of P10 is not the same command as the game state designation command (game state B) in the reception history last time (timing of P7).

At the timing of P15 after P14, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. Even if the performance control unit 130m successfully receives a stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the changing performance has not started, so the performance pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the 1 lamp symbol on the sub first changing display 81 remain stopped and do not change.

At the timing of P16, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the variation of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command (game state A) and the variation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, while the performance control unit 130m normally receives the performance pattern designation command, the display of the variation of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the one lamp pattern on the sub first variation display 81 does not start, and the stopped state of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern continues. In this case, the performance control unit 130m remains in the game state B without switching the internal state to the game state A, although the game state designation command that could not be received at the timing of P10 is not the same command as the game state designation command (game state B) in the reception history last time (timing of P7).

At the timing of P18 after P17, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. Even if the performance control unit 130m successfully receives a stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the changing performance has not started, so the performance pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the 1 lamp symbol on the sub first changing display 81 remain stopped and do not change.

If, at the timing when the first special symbol display 60 starts to display the variation, the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command (game state A) as a start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive at least one of the performance pattern designation command and the variation pattern designation command, the variation display of the one lamp pattern on the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub first variation display 81 will not start. In this case, if the game state of the game state designation command received at this timing is a command with the same content as the game state designation command in the previous reception history, the performance control unit 130m will remain in the previous game state without switching the internal state. On the other hand, if the game state of the game state designation command received at this timing is not a command with the same content as the game state designation command in the previous reception history, the performance control unit 130m switches the internal state to the game state determined based on the current game state designation command.

In addition, if the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the command sent from the main control unit 110m, but the display/audio control unit 140 and lamp/drive control unit 150 are unable to successfully receive the performance command sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, the same processing will be carried out as in the case where the performance control unit 130m is unable to successfully receive the command (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m.

In specific example 7, when the first condition (game state designation command) for designating the game state is satisfied (normal reception) in the performance control unit 130m, if the game state determined based on the first condition (game state designation command) is the same as the first condition (game state designation command) previously specified, the game state grasped by the performance control unit 130m is not changed. On the other hand, if the game state determined based on the first condition (game state designation command) is a game state different from the first condition (game state designation command) previously specified, the game state grasped by the sub is changed to the game state determined based on the first condition (game state designation command). In addition, when the first condition (game state designation command) for designating the game state is not satisfied (missed out) in the performance control unit 130m, the game state is not changed regardless of other conditions (the second condition (special pattern designation command) for designating the performance pattern and the third condition (performance pattern designation command) for designating the performance pattern). This makes it easier to tell if a problem has occurred in the performance control unit 130m, and prevents a decline in interest in the game.

(Specific example 8 when conditions are not met in the production control unit)
162, a specific example 8 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally and the predetermined conditions are not met in the performance control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 162 is a timing chart of the case where the predetermined conditions are not met in the performance control unit 130m.

As shown in FIG. 162(a), at the timing of P1, the first special symbol variable display is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the game state designation command, the performance symbol designation command (winning symbol), and the variable pattern designation command (winning performance) as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m are normally received by the performance control unit 130m, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the 1 lamp pattern on the sub first variable display 81 is started. In this case, if the performance symbol 70a determined based on the performance symbol designation command is a winning one, and the variable pattern determined based on the variable pattern designation command is a winning one, the variable performance is started.

At timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing mode. At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance action). In addition, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performance action).

At the timing of P3, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol determination command, abbreviated to pattern determination cd in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing to end the changing performance is performed. At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined losing state, and the first lamp symbol stops in a losing state (for example, off) on the sub-first changing display 81.

At timing P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol. At this time, if the performance control unit 130m receives the game state designation command, performance symbol designation command (winning symbol), and change pattern designation command (losing performance) as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the display of the change of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the one lamp symbol on the sub-first change display 81 does not start, and the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first change display 81 are kept in a stopped state. In this way, if the performance symbol 70a determined based on the performance symbol designation command is a winning one, while the change pattern determined based on the change pattern designation command is a losing one, the change performance does not start.

As shown in FIG. 162(b), at the timing of P1, the first special symbol variable display is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the game state designation command, the performance symbol designation command (losing symbol), and the variable pattern designation command (losing performance) as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m are normally received by the performance control unit 130m, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the 1 lamp symbol on the sub first variable display 81 is started. In this case, if the performance symbol 70a determined based on the performance symbol designation command is a losing one, and the variable pattern determined based on the variable pattern designation command is a losing one, the variable performance is started.

At timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing mode. At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performance motion).

At the timing of P3, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol determination command, abbreviated to pattern determination cd in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing to end the changing performance is performed. At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined losing state, and the first lamp symbol stops in a losing state (for example, off) on the sub-first changing display 81.

At timing P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol. At this time, if the performance control unit 130m receives the game state designation command, performance symbol designation command (losing symbol), and change pattern designation command (winning performance) as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the display of the change of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the one lamp symbol on the sub-first change display 81 does not start, and the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first change display 81 are kept in a stopped state. In this way, if the performance symbol 70a determined based on the performance symbol designation command is a losing one, while the change pattern determined based on the change pattern designation command is a winning one, the change performance does not start.

In addition, if the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the command sent from the main control unit 110m, but the display/audio control unit 140 and lamp/drive control unit 150 are unable to successfully receive the performance command sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, the same processing will be carried out as in the case where the performance control unit 130m is unable to successfully receive the command (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m.

In specific example 8, in the performance control unit 130m, when the performance pattern 70a determined based on the second condition (performance pattern designation command) regarding the designation of the performance pattern 70a is a winning one, and the change pattern determined based on the third condition (change pattern designation command) regarding the designation of the performance pattern (change pattern) of the performance pattern 70a is a winning one, the performance pattern 70a can be started to change. Similarly, in the performance control unit 130m, when the performance pattern 70a determined based on the second condition (performance pattern designation command) regarding the designation of the performance pattern 70a is a losing one, and the change pattern determined based on the third condition (change pattern designation command) regarding the designation of the performance pattern of the performance pattern 70a is a losing one, the performance pattern 70a can be started to change. In response to this, in the presentation control unit 130m, (even when the first condition for specifying the game state (game state designation command), the second condition for specifying the presentation pattern 70a (presentation pattern designation command), and the third condition for specifying the presentation pattern of the presentation pattern 70a (variation pattern designation command) are met (received), if the winning or losing result of the presentation pattern 70a determined based on the second condition for specifying the presentation pattern 70a (presentation pattern designation command) differs from the variation pattern determined based on the third condition for specifying the presentation pattern of the presentation pattern 70a (variation pattern designation command) does not start varying the presentation pattern 70a. By doing this, it is easy to determine that a malfunction has occurred in the presentation control unit 130m, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(Specific example 9 when conditions are not met in the production control unit)
A specific example 9 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally and a predetermined condition is not met in the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 163. Fig. 163 is a timing chart of the case where a predetermined condition is not met in the performance control unit 130m.

As shown in FIG. 163(a), at the timing of P1, the first special symbol variable display is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the game state designation command, the performance symbol designation command (for the first special symbol), and the variable pattern designation command (for the first special symbol) as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m are normally received by the performance control unit 130m, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the 1 lamp symbol on the sub first variable display 81 is started. In this case, if the performance symbol 70a determined based on the performance symbol designation command is for the first special symbol, and the variable pattern determined based on the variable pattern designation command is for the first special symbol, the variable performance is started.

At timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing mode. At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance action). In addition, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performance action).

At the timing of P3, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol determination command, abbreviated to pattern determination cd in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing to end the changing performance is performed. At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined losing state, and the first lamp symbol stops in a losing state (for example, off) on the sub-first changing display 81.

At timing P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol. At this time, if the performance control unit 130m receives the game state designation command, the performance symbol designation command (for the first special symbol), and the change pattern designation command (for the second special symbol) as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the display of the change of the one-lamp symbol on the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first change display 81 does not start, and the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first change display 81 are kept in a stopped state. In this way, if the performance symbol 70a determined based on the performance symbol designation command is for the first special symbol, while the change pattern determined based on the change pattern designation command is for the second special symbol, the change performance does not start.

As shown in FIG. 163(b), at the timing of P1, the first special symbol variable display is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the game state designation command, the performance symbol designation command (for the second special symbol), and the variable pattern designation command (for the second special symbol) as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m are normally received by the performance control unit 130m, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the 1 lamp symbol on the sub first variable display 81 is started. In this case, if the performance symbol 70a determined based on the performance symbol designation command is for the second special symbol, and the variable pattern determined based on the variable pattern designation command is for the second special symbol, the variable performance is started.

At timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing mode. At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance action). In addition, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performance action).

At the timing of P3, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol determination command, abbreviated to pattern determination cd in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing is performed to end the changing performance. At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined losing state, and the first lamp symbol stops in a losing state (for example, off) on the sub-first changing display 81.

At timing P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol. At this time, if the performance control unit 130m receives the game state designation command, the performance symbol designation command (for the second special symbol), and the change pattern designation command (for the first special symbol) as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the display of the change of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the one lamp symbol on the sub-first change display 81 does not start, and the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first change display 81 are kept in a stopped state. In this way, if the performance symbol 70a determined based on the performance symbol designation command is for the second special symbol, while the change pattern determined based on the change pattern designation command is for the first special symbol, the change performance does not start.

In addition, if the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the command sent from the main control unit 110m, but the display/audio control unit 140 and lamp/drive control unit 150 are unable to successfully receive the performance command sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, the same processing will be carried out as in the case where the performance control unit 130m is unable to successfully receive the command (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m.

In specific example 9, in the performance control unit 130m, when the second condition (performance pattern designation command) for designating the performance pattern 70a is selected under a predetermined winning condition (for the first special pattern or the second special pattern) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) for designating the performance pattern of the performance pattern is selected under a predetermined winning condition (for the first special pattern or the second special pattern), the performance pattern 70a can begin to change. In contrast, in the performance control unit 130m, (even when the first condition (game state designation command), the second condition (designation command) for designating the performance pattern 70a, and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) for designating the performance pattern 70a are satisfied (normally received),) if the second condition (designation command) for designating the performance pattern 70a is selected under a predetermined winning condition (for the first special pattern or the second special pattern), while the third condition (variation pattern designation command) for designating the performance pattern of the performance pattern 70a is selected under a winning condition (for the second special pattern or the first special pattern) different from the predetermined winning condition (for the first special pattern or the second special pattern), the variation of the performance pattern is not started. By doing this, it is easy to know that a malfunction has occurred in the performance control unit 130m, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

As mentioned above, the condition for executing a specified control in the performance control unit 130m is exemplified as a command sent from the main control unit 110m, but this is not limited to this, and other events such as the passage of time or the operation of an operation button may also be used as the condition.

As shown in FIG. 164, even when the conditions are not met in the performance control unit 130m (such as the above-mentioned specific examples 1 to 9), if a predetermined signal (power-on command, power-restore command, etc.) is received from the main control unit 110m, the above-mentioned initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the performance button 17, etc. can be executed. Specifically, even if the conditions are not met in the performance control unit 130m, during the period when the performance pattern 70a is fluctuating, when the fluctuating performance pattern 70a is displayed on the screen, if the performance control unit 130m normally receives a predetermined signal from the main control unit 110m, the initial operation of the movable role objects such as the first movable member 73 is executed. Also, during the period when the conditions are not met in the performance control unit 130m and the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, when the swaying and fluctuating performance pattern 70a is displayed on the screen, the initial operation of the movable role objects such as the first movable member 73 is executed. Furthermore, during the period when the conditions are not met in the performance control unit 130m and the performance pattern 70a is stopped, if the performance control unit 130m normally receives a predetermined signal from the main control unit 110m, the initial operation of the movable role such as the first movable member 73 is executed while the stopped performance pattern 70a is displayed on the screen. Thus, in the embodiment, regardless of the conditions that are met (or not met) in the performance control unit 130m, if the initial operation conditions based on the predetermined signal from the main control unit 110m are met, the initial operation is executed regardless of the display mode of the performance pattern 70a. Note that in specific example 10, the relationship between the conditions that are met (or not met) in the performance control unit 130m and the performance pattern 70a is the same as in specific example 1, so the explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 165, even when the conditions are not met in the performance control unit 130m (such as the above-mentioned specific examples 1 to 10), if the detection means (start port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) that detects a predetermined event (start winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) and the main control means 110 become disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) during power supply to the gaming machine 1, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed. This abnormality notification can be executed for a predetermined period. Specifically, even if the conditions are not met in the performance control unit 130m, if the performance pattern 70a fluctuates during the period when the non-connection state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) occurs, a predetermined abnormality notification is executed. Also, if the conditions are not met in the performance control unit 130m and the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped during the period when the non-connection state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) occurs, a predetermined abnormality notification is executed. Furthermore, if the performance control unit 130m is not satisfied and the performance pattern 70a is stopped, and the non-connected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) is reached, a predetermined abnormality notification is executed. In this manner, in the embodiment, regardless of the conditions satisfied (or not satisfied) in the performance control unit 130m, if the abnormality notification conditions for the non-connected state are met, the abnormality notification is executed regardless of the display mode of the performance pattern 70a. At this time, the abnormality notification may be performed by overlapping the performance pattern 70a that is in a fluctuating, temporarily stopped, or fully stopped state in the image display device 70, 71, or in an area overlapping with the performance pattern 70a, and the image of the performance pattern 70a, etc. may be erased to perform the abnormality notification, and the abnormality notification can be executed using the image display device 70, 71 in various ways. In specific example 11, the relationship between the conditions satisfied (or not satisfied) in the performance control unit 130m and the performance pattern 70a is the same as in specific example 1, so the explanation will be omitted.

When the conditions are not met in the performance control unit 130m, other events, actions, performances, operations, notifications, etc. described in this embodiment may be executed in combination.

<Contents I of the invention described in this embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, when a start condition is satisfied, judgment information on whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player is acquired and the judgment information is stored. Then, when the judgment condition is satisfied, the stored judgment information is judged, and a variable performance according to the result of the judgment is executed, and when the variable performance results in a special result, the special game is executed. As such a gaming machine, there is a gaming machine that performs a display performance in which the display area of the image display device is transformed and the image being displayed in the display area is also transformed (for example, JP 2017-196126 A). However, there is still room for improvement in the above gaming machine in order to improve the interest of the game.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of this embodiment, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is equipped with a movable role (movable member 73, 74) that can be changed between a first state (stopped at a standby position) and a second state (presentation operation), a first light-emitting area (HK1) that is provided on the movable role (73, 74) and can change its light-emitting state between a first state (presentation light-emitting state) where the role is illuminated and a second state (e.g., off), a second light-emitting area (HK2) that is provided on at least one of a plurality of parts different from the movable role (73, 74) and can change its light-emitting state between a first state (presentation light-emitting state) where the role is illuminated and a second state (e.g., off), and a display means (70, 71) that can execute a predetermined variable performance, and has a plurality of the second light-emitting areas (HK2), and in the variable performance, the display means The display means (image display devices 70, 71) can change between a first image (e.g., normal display performance pattern 70a, etc.) displayed on the screen and a second image (e.g., changing display performance pattern 70a) that changes from the first image to be displayed on the screen, and when the variable performance in which the image changes to the second image (e.g., changing display performance pattern 70a) is performed, a light-emitting performance in which the first light-emitting area (HK1) and at least one of the second light-emitting areas (HK2) are linked to change to the second state (e.g., off) can be executed, and a third image (e.g., special pattern TZ) can be displayed on the screen of the display means (image display devices 70, 71) together with the first image, and the third image (e.g., special pattern TZ) can be displayed in the same position regardless of whether the image is the first image or the second image.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of this embodiment, the gaming machine is provided with a movable role (movable members 73, 74) that can be changed between a first state (stopped at a standby position) and a second state (presentation operation), a first light-emitting area (HK1) that is provided on the movable role (73, 74) and can change its light-emitting state between a first state (presentation light-emitting state) and a second state (e.g., off), a second light-emitting area (HK2) that is provided on at least one of a plurality of parts different from the movable role (movable members 73, 74) and can change its light-emitting state between a first state (presentation light-emitting state) and a second state (e.g., off), and a display means (image display device 70, 71) that can execute a predetermined variable presentation, and has a plurality of the second light-emitting areas (HK2), and in the variable presentation, a first image (e.g., a normal display presentation pattern 70a, etc.) that is displayed on the screen of the display means (image display device 70, 71), and and a second image (e.g., a change display performance pattern 70a) which changes and is displayed on the screen, and when the variable performance of changing to the second image (e.g., the change display performance pattern 70a) is performed, a light emitting performance of changing to the second state (e.g., off) can be executed by linking at least one of the first light emitting area (HK1) and the second light emitting area (HK2), and a third image (e.g., a special pattern TZ) can be displayed together with the first image (e.g., the normal display performance pattern 70a, etc.) on the screen of the display means (image display device 70, 71), and while the ease of visibility of the first image (e.g., the normal display performance pattern 70a, etc.) is changed when the first image (e.g., the normal display performance pattern 70a, etc.) is changed to the second image (e.g., the change display performance pattern 70a), the ease of visibility of the third image (e.g., the special pattern TZ) can be displayed without changing whether it is the first image or the second image.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of this embodiment, the gaming machine is provided with a movable role (movable members 73, 74) that can be changed between a first state (stopped at a standby position) and a second state (presentation operation), a first light-emitting area (HK1) that is provided on the movable role (73, 74) and can change its light-emitting state between a first state (presentation light-emitting state) in which light is emitted and a second state (e.g., off), a second light-emitting area (HK2) that is provided on at least one of a plurality of parts different from the movable role (movable members 73, 74) and can change its light-emitting state between a first state (presentation light-emitting state) in which light is emitted and a second state (e.g., off), and a display means (image display device 70, 71) that can execute a predetermined variable performance, and the gaming machine has a plurality of second light-emitting areas (HK2), and in the variable performance, the display means (image The display device (70, 71) can change between a first image (e.g., normal display performance pattern 70a, etc.) and a second image (e.g., changing display performance pattern 70a) that is displayed on the screen by changing the first image, and when the change performance in which the second image (e.g., changing display performance pattern 70a) is performed, a light-emitting performance that changes to the second state (e.g., off) can be executed by linking at least one of the first light-emitting area (HK1) and the second light-emitting area (HK2), and a third image (e.g., frame image GG) that changes in conjunction with the change from the first image (e.g., normal display performance pattern 70a, etc.) to the second image (e.g., changing display performance pattern 70a) can be displayed on the screen of the display means (image display device 70, 71).

<Contents of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment II>
In a conventional gaming machine, when a starting condition is satisfied, judgment information on whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player is acquired, and the judgment information is stored. Then, when the judgment condition is satisfied, the stored judgment information is judged, and a variable performance according to the result of the judgment is executed, and when the variable performance results in a special result, a special game is executed. As such a gaming machine, there is one equipped with a main control board that controls the progress of the game, and a sub-control board that controls the performance of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control board (for example, JP 2019-033816 A). However, the above gaming machine does not take into consideration the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means are misaligned, and there is still room for improvement in order to improve the interest of the game.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of this embodiment, the gaming machine (1) is equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentations in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and is equipped with movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, presentation button 17) that can be operated in a predetermined manner, and the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) controls the movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, presentation button 17). When a predetermined signal (power-on command, power-restoration command, etc.) is received from the main control means (main control board 110) during a control state (waiting for customers, variable performance, big win performance) in which a performance corresponding to the signal can be executed, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) and the performance operation (performance operation, performance light emission) of the movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) can be executed. The display means (image display devices 70, 71) can execute a variable performance of the performance pattern (70a). When the first condition (game state designation command), the second condition (performance pattern designation command) regarding the performance pattern (70a), and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the performance pattern (70a) are satisfied in the performance control means (performance control board 130), the variable performance can be started, and when the fourth condition (special pattern determination command) regarding the stop of the variation of the performance pattern (70a) is not satisfied, the swing variation can be executed with the performance pattern (70a) determined based on the second condition (performance pattern designation command). When the first condition (game state designation command) is satisfied but at least one of the second condition (performance pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is not satisfied in the performance control means (performance control board 130), the variable performance can be controlled not to be started.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of this embodiment, the gaming machine (1) is equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling the presentation in response to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and is equipped with movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, presentation button 17) that can be operated in a predetermined manner, and the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) controls the movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, presentation button 17) in a predetermined manner. The display means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, display button 17) can perform an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) and a performance operation (performance operation, performance light emission) of the movable performance means. When a predetermined signal (power-on command, power-restoration command, etc.) is received from the main control means (main control board 110) during a control state (waiting for customers state, variable performance, big win performance) in which a performance corresponding to the signal can be executed, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, and the display means (image display devices 70, 71) can perform an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) and a performance operation (performance operation, performance light emission) of the movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) can perform an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17). In the presentation control means (presentation control board 130), when a first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, a second condition (presentation pattern designation command) regarding the presentation pattern (70a), and a third condition (change pattern designation command) regarding the presentation pattern of the presentation pattern (70a) are satisfied, the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) enters a first state in which the change presentation is started, and when a fourth condition (special pattern determination command) regarding the stop of the change of the presentation pattern (70a) is not satisfied, the second condition (presentation pattern designation command) is not satisfied. The second state is characterized in that the swing fluctuation can be performed with the performance pattern (70a) determined based on the game state designation command, and in the performance control means (performance control board 130), if the first condition (game state designation command) is lacking but the second condition (performance pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the state is a state in which a variable performance can be started as in the first state, and if the fourth condition (special pattern determination command) is lacking, the state is a state in which a swing fluctuation can be performed as in the second state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of this embodiment, the gaming machine (1) is equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentations in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and is equipped with movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, presentation button 17) that can be operated in a predetermined manner, and the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) is capable of executing initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, presentation button 17) and presentation operation (presentation operation, presentation light emission) of the movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, presentation button 17), and during a control state (waiting for customers state, variable presentation, jackpot presentation) in which a presentation in response to the signal can be executed, When a predetermined signal (power-on command, power-restore command, etc.) is received from the main control means (main control board 110), the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, and the display means (image display devices 70, 71) can execute a variable performance of the performance pattern (70a). When a predetermined condition (performance pattern designation command, variable pattern designation command) related to the performance pattern (70a) is satisfied in the performance control means (performance control board 130), the variable performance can be started regardless of whether the condition related to the game state (game state designation command) is satisfied or not, and when the condition (special pattern determination command) related to the stop of the variation of the performance pattern (70a) is not satisfied, the swing variation can be executed with the performance pattern (70a) determined based on the predetermined condition (performance pattern designation command, variable pattern designation command).

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of this embodiment, the gaming machine (1) is equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentations in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and is equipped with movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, presentation button 17) that can be operated in a predetermined manner, and the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) controls the movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, presentation button 17). When a predetermined signal (power-on command, power-restoration command, etc.) is received from the main control means (main control board 110) during a control state (waiting for customers, variable performance, big win performance) in which a performance corresponding to the signal can be executed, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the performance button 17) and the performance operation (performance operation, performance light emission) of the movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, and the performance button 17) can be executed, The display means (image display device 70, 71) can execute a variable performance of the performance pattern (70a). When the first condition (game state designation command), the second condition (performance pattern designation command) regarding the performance pattern (70a) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the performance pattern (70a) are satisfied in the performance control means (performance control board 130), the variable performance is started, and when the fourth condition (special pattern determination command) regarding the stop of the variation of the performance pattern (70a) is not satisfied, the swing variation can be executed with the performance pattern (70a) determined based on the second condition. When the first condition (game state designation command) is not satisfied and at least one of the second condition (performance pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is not satisfied in the performance control means (performance control board 130), the variable performance is not started.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of this embodiment, the gaming machine (1) is equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentations in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and is equipped with movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, presentation button 17) that can be operated in a predetermined manner, and the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) controls the movable presentation means (first movable member 7 3, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the second movable member 74, the performance button 17 and the performance operation (performance operation, performance light emission) of the movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) can be executed, and when a predetermined signal (power-on command, power-recovery command, etc.) is received from the main control means (main control board 110) during a control state (waiting for customers, variable performance, big win performance) in which a performance corresponding to the signal can be executed, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) is executed. The display means (image display devices 70, 71) can execute a variable performance of the performance pattern (70a). In the performance control means (performance control board 130), when the first condition (game state designation command) related to the game state is satisfied but at least one of the second condition (performance pattern designation command) related to the performance pattern (70a) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) related to the performance pattern of the performance pattern is lacking, the performance control means (performance control board 130) can control not to start the variable performance when the first condition (game state designation command) is lacking but the second condition (performance pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the performance control means (performance control board 130) starts the variation of the performance pattern (70a), and when the fourth condition (special pattern determination command) related to the stop of the variation of the performance pattern (70a) is lacking, the swing variation can be executed with the performance pattern (70a) determined based on the second condition (performance pattern designation command).

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of this embodiment, the gaming machine (1) is equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentations in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and is equipped with movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, presentation button 17) that can be operated in a predetermined manner, and the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) is capable of executing the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, presentation button 17) and the presentation operation (presentation operation, presentation light emission) of the movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, presentation button 17), and executes a presentation in response to the signal. When a predetermined signal (power-on command, power-restoration command, etc.) is received from the main control means (main control board 110) during a control state (waiting for customers, variable performance, big win performance) in which the above is possible, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, and the display means (image display devices 70, 71) can execute a variable performance of the performance pattern (70a), and when the performance control means (performance control board 130) lacks a predetermined condition (performance pattern designation command, variable pattern designation command) related to the performance pattern (70a), it is capable of control not to start the variable performance regardless of whether the condition related to the game state (game state designation command) and the condition related to the stop of the variation of the performance pattern (70a) (special pattern determination command) are satisfied or not.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of this embodiment, the gaming machine (1) is equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentations in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and is equipped with movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, presentation button 17) that can be operated in a predetermined manner, and the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) is When a predetermined signal (power-on command, power-recovery command, etc.) is received from the main control means (main control board 110) during a control state (waiting for customers, variable performance, big win performance) in which a performance corresponding to the signal can be executed, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) and the performance operation (performance operation, performance light emission) of the movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) can be executed. The display means (image display devices 70, 71) can execute a variable performance of the performance pattern (70a). In the performance control means (performance control board 130), when the first condition (game state designation command) related to the game state is not met but the second condition (performance pattern designation command) related to the performance pattern (70a) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) related to the performance pattern of the performance pattern (70a) are satisfied, the variable performance is started, and when the fourth condition (special pattern determination command) related to the stop of the variation of the performance pattern (70a) is not met, the swing variation can be executed with the performance pattern determined based on the second condition (performance pattern designation command). In the performance control means (performance control board 130), when the first condition (game state designation command) is not met and at least one of the second condition (performance pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is not met, the variable performance is not started.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of this embodiment, the gaming machine (1) is equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentations in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and is equipped with a sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting presentation sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) for the game, and the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) is equipped with the sound output means A predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power-restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply can be output from the sound output device 9, and when a predetermined signal (power-on command, power-restoration command, etc.) is received from the main control means (main control board 110) during a control state (waiting for customers, variable performance, big win performance) in which a performance corresponding to the signal (command, etc.) can be executed, the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power-restoration notification sound, etc.) can be output, and a display means (image display The device 70, 71 is capable of executing a variable performance of the performance pattern (70a), and the performance control means (performance control board 130) is capable of starting the variable performance when the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the second condition (performance pattern designation command) regarding the performance pattern (70a), and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the performance pattern of the performance pattern (70a) are satisfied, and when the fourth condition (special pattern determination command) regarding the stop of the variation of the performance pattern (70a) is not satisfied, the swing variation can be executed with the performance pattern (70a) determined based on the second condition (performance pattern designation command), and the performance control means (performance control board 130) is capable of controlling not to start the variable performance when the first condition (game state designation command) is satisfied but at least one of the second condition (performance pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is not satisfied.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of this embodiment, the gaming machine (1) is equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentations in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and is equipped with a sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting presentation sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) for the game, and the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) is supplied with power from the sound output means (audio output device 9). When a predetermined signal (power-on command, power-restore command, etc.) is received from the main control means (main control board 110) during a control state (waiting for customers state, variable performance, big win performance) in which a performance corresponding to the signal (command, etc.) can be executed, the predetermined alarm sound (power-on alarm sound, power-restore alarm sound, etc.) can be output, and a variable performance of the performance pattern (70a) can be executed on the display means (image display devices 70, 71). In the presentation control means (presentation control board 130), when a first condition (play state designation command), a second condition (presentation pattern designation command) related to the presentation pattern (70a), and a third condition (variation pattern designation command) related to the presentation pattern of the presentation pattern (70a) are satisfied, the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) enters a first state in which the variable presentation is started, and when a fourth condition (special pattern determination command) related to the stop of variation of the presentation pattern (70a) is lacking, the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) enters a second state in which swing variation can be executed with the presentation pattern (70a) determined based on the second condition (presentation pattern designation command), and when the first condition (play state designation command) is lacking but the second condition (presentation pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) enters a state in which a variable presentation is started in the same manner as the first state, and when the fourth condition (special pattern determination command) is lacking, the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) enters a state in which swing variation can be executed in the same manner as the second state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of this embodiment, the gaming machine (1) is equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentations in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and is equipped with a sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting presentation sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) for the game, and the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the audio output means (audio output device 9), and during a control state (waiting for customers state, variable presentation, jackpot presentation) in which a presentation in response to the signal (command, etc.) can be executed, a predetermined signal (power-on designation) is output from the main control means (main control board 110). When a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) is received, the display means (image display devices 70, 71) can output the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.), and the display means (performance control board 130) can execute a variable presentation of the performance pattern (70a), and when the predetermined conditions (performance pattern specification command, variable pattern specification command) related to the performance pattern (70a) are satisfied in the performance control means (performance control board 130), the variable presentation can be started regardless of whether the conditions related to the game state (game state specification command) are satisfied or not, and when the conditions (special pattern determination command) related to the stopping of the variation of the performance pattern (70a) are not satisfied, the swing variation can be executed with the performance pattern (70a) determined based on the predetermined conditions (performance pattern specification command, variable pattern specification command).

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of this embodiment, the gaming machine (1) is equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentations in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and is equipped with a sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting presentation sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) for the game, and the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the audio output means (audio output device 9), and when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means (main control board 110) during a control state (waiting for customers state, variable presentation, jackpot presentation) in which a presentation in response to the signal (command, etc.) can be executed, the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) can be output, and a display The means (image display devices 70, 71) can execute a variable performance of the performance pattern (70a), and the performance control means (performance control board 130) can start the variable performance when a first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, a second condition (performance pattern designation command) regarding the performance pattern (70a), and a third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the performance pattern of the performance pattern (70a) are satisfied, and when a fourth condition (special pattern determination command) regarding the stop of the variation of the performance pattern (70a) is not satisfied, a swing variation can be executed with the performance pattern (70a) determined based on the second condition, and the performance control means (performance control board 130) can be controlled not to start the variable performance when the first condition (game state designation command) is not satisfied and at least one of the second condition (performance pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is not satisfied.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of this embodiment, the gaming machine (1) is equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentation in response to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and is equipped with a sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting presentation sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) for the game, and the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) is equipped with the sound output means (audio A predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply can be output from the output device 9), and when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means (main control board 110) during a control state (waiting for customers state, variable presentation, big win presentation) in which a presentation corresponding to the signal (command, etc.) can be executed, the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) can be output, and a display means (image display device 70, 71, the variable performance of the performance pattern (70a) can be executed, and in the performance control means (performance control board 130), when the first condition (game state designation command) related to the game state is satisfied but at least one of the second condition (performance pattern designation command) related to the performance pattern (70a) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) related to the performance pattern of the performance pattern is lacking, the performance control means (performance control board 130) can control not to start the variable performance when the first condition (game state designation command) is lacking but the second condition (performance pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the variation of the performance pattern (70a) is started, and when the fourth condition (special pattern determination command) related to the stop of the variation of the performance pattern (70a) is lacking, the swing variation can be executed with the performance pattern (70a) determined based on the second condition (performance pattern designation command).

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of this embodiment, the gaming machine (1) is equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentations in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and is equipped with a sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game presentation sounds (BGM, SE, etc.), and the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the audio output means (audio output device 9), and during a control state (waiting for customers state, variable presentation, jackpot presentation) in which a presentation in response to the signal (command, etc.) can be executed, When a predetermined signal (power-on command, power-restoration command, etc.) is received from the main control means (main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power-restoration notification sound, etc.) can be output, and the display means (image display devices 70, 71) can execute a variable presentation of the presentation pattern (70a), and when the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) lacks a predetermined condition (presentation pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) related to the presentation pattern (70a), it can be controlled not to start the variable presentation, regardless of whether the condition related to the game state (game state designation command) and the condition related to the halt of the variation of the presentation pattern (70a) (special pattern determination command) are satisfied or not.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of this embodiment, the gaming machine (1) is equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentations in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and is equipped with a sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting presentation sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) for the game, and the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) outputs a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound,
When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means (main control board 110) during a control state (waiting for customers state, variable presentation, big win presentation) in which a presentation corresponding to the signal (command, etc.) can be executed, the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) can be output, and a variable presentation of the presentation pattern (70a) can be executed in the display means (image display devices 70, 71). In the presentation control means (presentation control board 130), although a first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is lacking, a second condition (presentation pattern designation command) regarding the presentation pattern (70a) can be executed. ) and a third condition (variation pattern designation command) related to the presentation pattern of the presentation pattern (70a), the variable presentation is started, and when a fourth condition (special pattern determination command) related to stopping the variation of the presentation pattern (70a) is lacking, a swing variation can be executed with the presentation pattern determined based on the second condition (presentation pattern designation command), and in the presentation control means (presentation control board 130), when the first condition (game state designation command) is lacking and at least one of the second condition (presentation pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is lacking, the variable presentation can be controlled not to be started.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of this embodiment, in a gaming machine (1) capable of executing a game, the gaming machine (1) is provided with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentations in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and a detection means (starting hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and /or the performance control means (performance control board) is capable of executing a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when power supply to the gaming machine is started, if the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the performance control means (performance control board) and the detection means (starting hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined abnormality alert (disconnection alert, magnetic abnormality alert, radio wave abnormality alert The presentation control means (presentation control board 130) is capable of executing a variable presentation of a presentation pattern (70a) on a display means (image display devices 70, 71), and when the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) satisfies a first condition (game state designation command), a second condition (presentation pattern designation command) on the presentation pattern (70a), and a third condition (variation pattern designation command) on the presentation pattern (70a), the variable presentation is started and the presentation pattern (70a) is displayed. a) is characterized in that if the fourth condition (special pattern determination command) for stopping the fluctuation is not met, the fluctuation can be performed with the performance pattern (70a) determined based on the second condition (performance pattern designation command), and in the performance control means (performance control board 130), if the first condition (game state designation command) is satisfied but at least one of the second condition (performance pattern designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) is not met, the fluctuation performance can be controlled not to start.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of this embodiment, in a gaming machine (1) capable of executing a game, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance in response to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and a detection means (starting hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio wave, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the performance control means (performance control The main control means (main control board 110) and/or the performance control means (performance control board) can execute a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (start hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when power supply to the gaming machine is started, if the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the performance control means (performance control board) and the detection means (start hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a disconnected state (connector coming loose, wire breakage, etc.), a predetermined abnormality alert (wire breakage alert, magnetic abnormality alert, radio wave abnormality alert, etc.) can be executed, and the performance control means (performance control board 130) can execute a predetermined abnormality alert (wire breakage alert, magnetic abnormality alert, radio wave abnormality alert, etc.), ...) based on an input signal from the detection means (start hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.). ) is capable of executing a variable presentation of a presentation pattern (70a) on a display means (image display device 70, 71, and in the presentation control means (presentation control board 130), when a first condition (game state designation command) regarding a game state, a second condition (presentation pattern designation command) regarding the presentation pattern (70a), and a third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the presentation pattern of the presentation pattern (70a) are satisfied, the first state is entered for starting the variable presentation, and when a fourth condition (special pattern determination command) regarding the stop of the variation of the presentation pattern (70a) is not satisfied, the previous state is entered. The second state is reached in which a swing fluctuation can be executed with the presentation pattern (70a) determined based on the second condition (presentation pattern designation command), and in the presentation control means (presentation control board 130), if the first condition (game state designation command) is lacking but the second condition (presentation pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the state is reached in which a variable presentation can be started as in the first state, and if the fourth condition (special pattern determination command) is lacking, the state is reached in which a swing fluctuation can be executed as in the second state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of this embodiment, in a gaming machine (1) capable of executing a game, the gaming machine (1) is provided with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentation in response to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and a detection means (start hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) for detecting a predetermined event (start winning, magnetism, radio wave, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the presentation control means (presentation control board) are capable of executing a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (start hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when power supply to the gaming machine is started, the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the presentation control means (presentation control board) and the detection means (start hole detection switch When the display means (image display devices 70, 71) is not connected to the display unit (switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed, and the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) can execute a variable presentation of the presentation pattern (70a) on the display means (image display devices 70, 71). When the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) satisfies a predetermined condition (presentation pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) related to the presentation pattern (70a), it starts the variable presentation regardless of whether the condition related to the game state (game state designation command) is satisfied or not, and when the condition (special pattern determination command) related to the stop of the variation of the presentation pattern (70a) is not satisfied, it can execute a swing variation with the presentation pattern (70a) determined based on the predetermined condition (presentation pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command).

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of this embodiment, in a gaming machine (1) capable of executing a game, the gaming machine (1) is provided with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentations in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and a detection means (starting hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110 ) and/or the performance control means (performance control board) can execute a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (start hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when power supply to the gaming machine is started, if the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the performance control means (performance control board) and the detection means (start hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification , radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) is capable of performing a variable presentation of the presentation pattern (70a) on the display means (image display devices 70, 71), and when the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) satisfies a first condition (game state designation command), a second condition (presentation pattern designation command) on the presentation pattern (70a), and a third condition (variation pattern designation command) on the presentation pattern of the presentation pattern (70a), starts the variable presentation, When the fourth condition (special pattern determination command) for stopping the fluctuation of the performance pattern (70a) is not met, the swing fluctuation can be performed with the performance pattern (70a) determined based on the second condition, and the performance control means (performance control board 130) is capable of controlling the fluctuation performance not to start when the first condition (game state designation command) is not met and at least one of the second condition (performance pattern designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) is not met.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of this embodiment, in a gaming machine (1) capable of executing a game, the gaming machine (1) is provided with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentations in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and a detection means (starting hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and/or The performance control means (performance control board) can execute a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (start hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when power supply to the gaming machine is started, if the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the performance control means (performance control board) and the detection means (start hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) is executed. The presentation control means (presentation control board 130) is capable of executing a variable presentation of the presentation pattern (70a) on the display means (image display devices 70, 71). In the presentation control means (presentation control board 130), when a first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is satisfied but at least one of a second condition (presentation pattern designation command) regarding the presentation pattern (70a) and a third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the presentation pattern of the presentation pattern is lacking, the presentation control means controls not to start the variable presentation. It is possible, and the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) is characterized in that, when the first condition (game state designation command) is lacking but the second condition (presentation pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the presentation control means starts changing the presentation pattern (70a), and when the fourth condition (special pattern determination command) regarding the halt of the variation of the presentation pattern (70a) is lacking, the swing variation can be performed with the presentation pattern (70a) determined based on the second condition (presentation pattern designation command).

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of this embodiment, in a gaming machine (1) capable of executing a game, the gaming machine (1) is provided with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentation in response to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and a detection means (start hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) for detecting a predetermined event (start winning, magnetism, radio wave, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the presentation control means (presentation control board) can execute a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (start hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when power supply to the gaming machine is started, ... When the presentation control means (presentation control board) and the detection means (starting hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a disconnected state (connector coming loose, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined abnormality alert (disconnection alert, magnetic abnormality alert, radio wave abnormality alert, etc.) can be executed, and the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) can execute a variable presentation of the presentation pattern (70a) on the display means (image display devices 70, 71), and when the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) is lacking in a predetermined condition (presentation pattern designation command, change pattern designation command) related to the presentation pattern (70a), it is capable of control so as not to start the variable presentation, regardless of whether the condition related to the game state (game state designation command) and the condition related to the stop of the change of the presentation pattern (70a) (special pattern determination command) are satisfied or not.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of this embodiment, in a gaming machine (1) capable of executing a game, the gaming machine (1) is provided with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentations in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and a detection means (starting hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and /Or the performance control means (performance control board) can execute a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when power supply to the gaming machine is started, if the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the performance control means (performance control board) and the detection means (starting hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification The presentation control means (presentation control board 130) is capable of executing a variable presentation of the presentation pattern (70a) on the display means (image display devices 70, 71), and when the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is lacking in the presentation control means (presentation control board 130), but the second condition (presentation pattern designation command) regarding the presentation pattern (70a) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the presentation pattern of the presentation pattern (70a) are satisfied, the variable presentation is started, and the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) is capable of executing a variable presentation of the presentation pattern (70a) on the display means (image display devices 70, 71). When the fourth condition (special pattern determination command) for stopping the variation of the output pattern (70a) is lacking, the swing variation can be performed with the performance pattern determined based on the second condition (performance pattern designation command), and the performance control means (performance control board 130) is capable of controlling not to start the variation performance when the first condition (game state designation command) is lacking and at least one of the second condition (performance pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is lacking.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of this embodiment, in a gaming machine (1) capable of executing a game, the gaming machine (1) is provided with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentations in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and a detection means (starting hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and /Or the performance control means (performance control board 130) can execute a predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means (start hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (start hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) during power supply to the gaming machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) is executed. The presentation control means (presentation control board 130) is capable of executing a variable presentation of the presentation pattern (70a) on the display means (image display devices 70, 71), and when the first condition (game state designation command), the second condition (presentation pattern designation command) on the presentation pattern (70a) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) on the presentation pattern (70a) are satisfied in the presentation control means (presentation control board 130), the variable presentation is started, and the presentation pattern (70a) When the fourth condition (special symbol determination command) for stopping the fluctuation is not met, the fluctuation can be performed with the performance symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition (performance symbol designation command), and the performance control means (performance control board 130) is capable of controlling the fluctuation performance not to start when the first condition (game state designation command) is satisfied but at least one of the second condition (performance symbol designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) is not met.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of this embodiment, in a gaming machine (1) capable of executing a game, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentations in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and a detection means (starting hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the presentation control means (presentation control The main control means (main control board 110) can execute predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means (start hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and if the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (start hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) become disconnected (connector coming loose, wire breakage, etc.) while power is being supplied to the gaming machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (wire breakage notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed. The presentation control means (presentation control board 130) is a display The means (image display devices 70, 71) can execute a variable performance of the performance symbol (70a), and in the performance control means (performance control board 130), when a first condition (game state designation command), a second condition (performance symbol designation command) regarding the performance symbol (70a), and a third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the performance pattern of the performance symbol (70a) are satisfied, the first state is entered for starting the variable performance, and when a fourth condition (special symbol determination command) regarding the stop of the variation of the performance symbol (70a) is not satisfied, the second state is entered. The second state is reached in which swing fluctuation can be performed with the performance pattern (70a) determined based on a condition (performance pattern designation command), and in the performance control means (performance control board 130), if the first condition (game state designation command) is lacking but the second condition (performance pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the state is reached in which a variable performance can be started as in the first state, and if the fourth condition (special pattern determination command) is lacking, the state is reached in which swing fluctuation can be performed as in the second state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of this embodiment, in a gaming machine (1) capable of executing a game, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentation in response to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and a detection means (start hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) for detecting a predetermined event (start winning, magnetism, radio wave, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) can execute a predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means (start hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and while power is being supplied to the gaming machine, the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (start hole detection switch, magnetic detection When the display means (image display devices 70, 71) is disconnected from the display unit (sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) (connector coming loose, wire breaking, etc.), a predetermined abnormality alert (wire break alert, magnetic abnormality alert, radio wave abnormality alert, etc.) can be executed, and the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) can execute a variable presentation of the presentation pattern (70a) on the display means (image display devices 70, 71). When the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) satisfies a predetermined condition (presentation pattern designation command, variable pattern designation command) related to the presentation pattern (70a), it starts the variable presentation regardless of whether the condition related to the game state (game state designation command) is satisfied or not, and when the condition (special pattern determination command) related to the stop of the variation of the presentation pattern (70a) is not satisfied, it can execute a swing variation with the presentation pattern (70a) determined based on the predetermined condition (presentation pattern designation command, variable pattern designation command).

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of this embodiment, in a gaming machine (1) capable of executing a game, the gaming machine (1) is provided with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentations in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and a detection means (starting hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110 ) and/or the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) can execute predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means (start hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and if the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (start hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) become disconnected (connector disconnected, wire broken, etc.) while power is being supplied to the gaming machine, a predetermined abnormality alert (wire break alert, magnetic abnormality alert, radio wave abnormality alert, The presentation control means (presentation control board 130) can execute a variable presentation of the presentation pattern (70a) on the display means (image display device 70, 71). When the first condition (game state designation command), the second condition (presentation pattern designation command) on the presentation pattern (70a) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) on the presentation pattern of the presentation pattern (70a) are satisfied in the presentation control means (presentation control board 130), the variable presentation can be started, and when the fourth condition (special pattern determination command) on the stop of the variation of the presentation pattern (70a) is not satisfied, the swing variation can be executed with the presentation pattern (70a) determined based on the second condition. When the first condition (game state designation command) is not satisfied and at least one of the second condition (presentation pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is not satisfied in the presentation control means (presentation control board 130), the variable presentation can be controlled not to be started.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of this embodiment, in a gaming machine (1) capable of executing a game, the gaming machine (1) is provided with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentations in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and a detection means (start port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) for detecting a predetermined event (start winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and/or The performance control means (performance control board 130) can execute predetermined controls (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on input signals from the detection means (start hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and if the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (start hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) become disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) while power is being supplied to the gaming machine, a predetermined abnormality alert (disconnection alert, magnetic abnormality alert, radio wave abnormality alert, etc.) can be executed. The presentation control means (presentation control board 130) is capable of executing a variable presentation of the presentation pattern (70a) on the display means (image display devices 70, 71), and when the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is satisfied in the presentation control means (presentation control board 130), at least one of the second condition (presentation pattern designation command) regarding the presentation pattern (70a) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the presentation pattern of the presentation pattern is insufficient, the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) is capable of controlling not to start the variable presentation. In the presentation control means (presentation control board 130), when the first condition (game state designation command) is lacking but the second condition (presentation symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the presentation control means starts changing the presentation symbol (70a), and when the fourth condition (special symbol determination command) for stopping the variation of the presentation symbol (70a) is lacking, the swing variation can be performed with the presentation symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition (presentation symbol designation command).

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of this embodiment, in a gaming machine (1) capable of executing a game, the gaming machine (1) is provided with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentation in response to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and a detection means (start hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) for detecting a predetermined event (start winning, magnetism, radio wave, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) can execute a predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means (start hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor ... When the control board 110) and the detection means (starting hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are disconnected (connector coming loose, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined abnormality alert (disconnection alert, magnetic abnormality alert, radio wave abnormality alert, etc.) can be executed, and the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) can execute a variable presentation of the presentation pattern (70a) on the display means (image display devices 70, 71), and when the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) is lacking in a predetermined condition (presentation pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) related to the presentation pattern (70a), it is capable of control so as not to start the variable presentation, regardless of whether the condition related to the game state (game state designation command) and the condition related to the stop of the variation of the presentation pattern (70a) (special pattern determination command) are satisfied or not.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of this embodiment, in a gaming machine (1) capable of executing a game, the gaming machine (1) is provided with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentations in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and a detection means (starting hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and/ Alternatively, the performance control means (performance control board 130) can execute a predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means (start hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (start hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) while power is being supplied to the gaming machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) is executed. The presentation control means (presentation control board 130) is capable of executing a variable presentation of the presentation pattern (70a) on the display means (image display device 70, 71), and when the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is lacking in the presentation control means (presentation control board 130), but the second condition (presentation pattern designation command) regarding the presentation pattern (70a) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the presentation pattern of the presentation pattern (70a) are satisfied, the variable presentation is started, and when the fourth condition (special pattern determination command) regarding the stop of the variation of the presentation pattern (70a) is lacking, the swing variation can be executed with the presentation pattern determined based on the second condition (presentation pattern designation command), and when the first condition (game state designation command) is lacking and at least one of the second condition (presentation pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is lacking in the presentation control means (presentation control board 130), the variable presentation can be controlled not to be started.

(About time-saving game mode)
The above-mentioned "low-probability time-saving game state" may be set as a "low-probability time-saving game state triggered by a specified number of changes" triggered by the execution of a specified number of changes of special symbols in a low-probability game state, in addition to or instead of the "low-probability time-saving game state after a jackpot" executed after the end of a jackpot game. The "low-probability time-saving game state triggered by a specified number of changes" is executed after a specified number of symbol changes, for example, 1000 times, in a low-probability game state including a low-probability time-saving game state, and can be executed in combination with a time-saving entry effect such as counting down the number of changes until the time-saving occurs in addition to an effect such as whether or not there is a jackpot.

In addition to or instead of the "low-probability time-saving game state after a jackpot" and/or the "low-probability time-saving game state based on a specific symbol combination," the "low-probability time-saving game state based on a specific symbol combination" may be set as a "low-probability time-saving game state based on a specific symbol combination" triggered by the display of a predetermined combination of special symbols in a low-probability game state. The "low-probability time-saving game state based on a specific symbol combination" can be executed in a low-probability state by combining effects such as whether or not a jackpot has occurred, which are executed after the display of specific symbols such as "1, 2, 3" or "7, 8, 7," in addition to effects such as whether or not the time-saving game state will occur, and other effects that enter the time-saving game state.

(Entering the starting hole)
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, when a gaming ball is shot through the left region of the gaming area 5a, it is possible to win a prize in the second start port 47 that opens as a result of a winning lottery for a normal pattern held on the condition that the gaming ball has passed through the first start port 45 or the normal gate 44. In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, when a gaming ball is shot through the right region of the gaming area 5a, it is possible to win a prize in the second start port 47 that opens as a result of a winning lottery for a normal pattern held on the condition that the gaming ball has passed through the first start port 45 or the normal gate 44.

In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, a ball is more likely to pass through the normal gate 44 if it is shot into the right area of the play area 5a than if it is shot into the left area of the play area 5a. Therefore, in the "time-saving play state" (specific play state) in which the second start hole 47 is more easily controlled to an open state when the game ball passes through the normal gate 44 than in the "non-time-saving play state," the game machine 1 of the embodiment allows the player to play more advantageously without consuming game balls by shooting the game ball into the right area of the play area 5a and aiming for it to enter the second start hole 47, compared to shooting the game ball into the left area of the play area 5a.

In the embodiment of the gaming machine 1, the entrance of the warp device 41 opens on the left side of the decorative frame 41, and a first start port 45 through which the gaming ball can always enter (enter) is provided directly below the stage section 42 along which the gaming ball guided by the warp device 41 rolls. Therefore, in the "non-time-saving gaming state" (normal gaming state) in which the second start port 47 is less easily controlled to be in an open state than in the "time-saving gaming state" when the gaming ball passes through the normal map gate 44, the player can play more advantageously without consuming gaming balls by shooting the gaming ball into the left area of the gaming area 5a and aiming for it to enter the first start port 45 than by shooting the gaming ball into the right area of the gaming area 5a.

In this way, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is designed so that whether the ball is shot into the left or right area of the playing area 5a creates an advantage or disadvantage for the player, and it is advisable to switch the area of the playing area 5a into which the ball is shot depending on the playing status. In other words, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment requires the player to progress through the game with the aim of winning the starting hole 45, 47 according to the playing status. However, because whether the ball is shot into the right or left area of the playing area 5a is left to the player's firing operation, there is a risk that the player will play the game aiming to win the wrong starting hole 45, 47.

In addition, even if the gaming machine is designed to shoot the gaming ball into the same area of the gaming area 5a (for example, the left area) in both the "non-time-saving gaming state" and the "time-saving gaming state," the player may still be in danger of playing the game with the aim of winning in the wrong starting hole 45, 47, since whether the ball is shot to the right or left side of the gaming area 5a is left to the player's firing operation.

(Example of Production 1)
166 and 167 are diagrams showing a specific example 1 of the expectation level display, the reserved icon change effect, the lamp change effect, the notification sound effect, the movable member operation effect, and the continuous notice effect by these. Note that various effects that make you expect the execution of a big win game are sometimes called winning suggestion effects.

As shown in FIG. 166(a), when the first hold icon (CD icon) is displayed in the first display section 70B1, the second display section 70B2, and the third display section 70B3 of the first hold icon display area 70B, the "728" miss display pattern 70a is displayed in a stopped state.

After that, when the variable performance starts, as shown in FIG. 166(b), the display of the performance pattern 70a starts to change, and the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed in the first display section 70B1, the second display section 70B2, and the third display section 70B3 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C, the first display section 70B1, and the second display section 70B2, respectively.

Here, a blue effect image EF is displayed around the performance pattern 70a that starts to change, thereby starting the first performance of the continuous preview performance, and the display mode of the first reserved icon shifted and displayed on the second display unit 70B2 changes to a blue character icon, thereby starting the reserved icon change performance, and the winning slot lamp NR changes from an off state to a flashing blue state, thereby starting the lamp change performance. In addition, an operation performance in which the first movable member 73 operates in a weak operation mode in which it moves in an up-down direction is executed for a predetermined period of time. Note that the operation performance in the weak operation mode of the first movable member 73 starts at a timing before the performance pattern 70a starts to change, and is stopped before the performance pattern 70 scrolls at high speed (for example, before the preparation operation).

After that, as shown in FIG. 166(c), the effect image EF displayed around the effect pattern 70a is erased, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling at high speed. At this time, the operation effect of the first movable member 73 is stopped. Also, the zone effect (normal zone effect) starts in the first image display device 70. Specifically, the background image changes to zone background A, a blue zone image in which the letters "ZONE" scroll left and right is displayed, and zone BGM is output. Then, after the change time has passed, as shown in FIG. 166(d), the effect pattern 70a indicating a miss is temporarily stopped, and then the miss effect pattern 70a of "259" and the special pattern TZ are stopped.

After that, when the variable performance starts, as shown in FIG. 166(e), the display of the variable performance pattern 70a starts, and the first hold icon displayed in the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display section 70B1, respectively.

At this point, the effect image EF is displayed around the performance pattern 70a that starts the changing display, and the second consecutive preview performance begins, while the pending icon change performance, the lamp change performance, and the zone performance continue. In addition, an operation performance in which the first movable member 73 operates in a weak operation mode in which it moves in a vertical vibrational manner is executed for a predetermined period of time.

Then, as shown in FIG. 166(f), the effect image EF displayed around the effect symbol 70a is erased, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling at high speed. At this time, the operation effect of the first movable member 73 stops. Then, after the variation time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 166(g), the effect symbol 70a indicating a loss is temporarily stopped, and then the loss effect symbol 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped.

After that, when the change performance that will cause the change begins, as shown in FIG. 166 (h), the display of the change in the performance pattern 70a begins, and the first hold icon displayed in the first display section 70B1 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the performance pattern 70a that starts the variable display, and the third performance of the continuous preview performance starts, but the effect image EF is displayed in red, which has a higher expectation of a big win than blue. In addition, the pattern effect image ZE is displayed in a color that has a higher expectation of a big win than before. The reserved icon change performance is also continuously displayed. In addition, the winning port lamp NR changes from a blue light to a red flashing state, and a lamp change performance that has a higher expectation of a big win than blue light is executed. In addition, an operation performance is executed in which the first movable member 73 operates in a strong operation mode, moving significantly from the upper side of the first image display device 70 to the front side of the first image display device. At this time, an operation performance is executed in which the second movable member 74 operates in a weak operation mode, moving so as to vibrate diagonally, for a predetermined period of time. In this way, the advance notification executed in the variable display is displayed with a higher expectation of a big win than the previous one executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 167(i), the effect image EF displayed around the effect pattern 70a is erased, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling at high speed. At this time, the operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is stopped. The zone effect is switched to zone background B, which is a display that indicates a higher expectation of a jackpot than zone background A.

As shown in FIG. 167(j), a mini character MCB is displayed on the first image display device 70, and an effect that builds anticipation is executed, for example, by the mini character MCB moving across the screen.

After that, as shown in FIG. 167(k), for example, the line uttered by the ally, "CHANCE!", is displayed in the line window displayed on the first image display device 70, and a voice corresponding to the line, "Your chance has come!", is displayed from the audio output device 9, thereby executing a line preview performance.

Then, as shown in FIG. 167(l), the "3" performance pattern 70a is displayed stationary (temporarily stopped) in the variable display areas to the left and right of the performance pattern 70a that was being displayed, while a reach performance (normal reach) is executed in which the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a variable display area in the center. At this time, the display mode of the first reserved icon that is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red character icon, thereby executing a reserved icon change performance that offers a higher expectation of a jackpot game than a blue character icon. Furthermore, the winning port lamp NR changes from being lit red to being illuminated in multiple colors (rainbow colors), thereby executing a lamp change performance that offers a higher expectation of a jackpot than a red light.

After that, when it progresses to SP Reach, as shown in FIG. 167(m), the SP Reach performance starts, the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the screen, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are erased. The reduced performance pattern 70a changes from a normal display mode consisting of a rectangular base image, a character image CG consisting of a specified character, a bar-shaped image SG that is part of the character, a decorative section consisting of a pattern effect image ZE that decorates the background of the character, and an identification section consisting of a hexagonal base image and a number section (identification character), to a simple reduced display mode consisting of only the identification section.

When the game progresses to an SPSP reach, the SPSP reach performance starts, as shown in FIG. 167(n), and the icon display area 70C is erased together with the icon.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect which results in a jackpot ends (the effect control board 130 receives the special pattern confirmation command which indicates a jackpot), as shown in FIG. 167(o), the jackpot effect pattern 70a of "333" which indicates the type of jackpot game this time (here, the first jackpot game) and the special pattern TZ are temporarily stopped (shaking and fluctuating) and then stopped, and the fluctuating effect ends.

Note that while the SP and/or SPSP reach is being displayed, the winning port lamp NR remains off, but the lamp change presentation may continue, or the winning port lamp NR may be lit in a lighting mode (e.g. white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change presentation (does not indicate the likelihood of winning a jackpot).

(Expectation level display)
As shown in Fig. 166 and Fig. 167, in the variable display of the performance pattern 70a, it is possible to execute a so-called expectation display such as a color effect such as an effect image EF or a pattern effect image ZE, which makes the player expect a big win game. As shown in Fig. 168, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the expectation display by the color effect than the variable display of the performance pattern 70a based on the first start condition established by the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole 45 executed in the normal game state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the special 1 variable display). In other words, the expectation display by the color effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variable display when a left hit is performed in the specific game state than when a so-called left hit is performed in which a game ball is shot toward the left area of the game area 5a in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 168, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the expectation display by color effect than the variable display of the performance pattern 70a based on the second start condition established by the entry of the game ball into the second winning port 47 executed in the specific game state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the special 2 variable display). (Execution rate a3 < execution rate a4). In other words, the expectation display by color effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variable display when a left hit is performed in the specific game state than when a so-called right hit is performed in the specific game state, in which the game ball is shot toward the right area of the game area 5a.

By having such an execution rate of the expectation display, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. This leads the player to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the interest of the game can be increased.

The indication of the expectation level is not limited to color effects, but may be text or decorations superimposed on images such as background images or performance designs, or placed around the images, as long as the differences in content and color create anticipation of a jackpot game.

The number of types and contents of the presentation patterns in FIG. 168 may be the same or different. Here, the number of types of expectation indications by color effects may be fewer in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal game state. Also, the number of types of expectation indications by color effects may be fewer in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state.

For example, if the execution rate of presentation pattern A32 when a special 1 variation display is made in a specific game state is "0" (or presentation pattern A32 is not set), the expectation display of presentation pattern A12 can be executed when a special 1 variation display is made in a normal game state, but the expectation display of presentation pattern A32 corresponding to (or the same as) presentation pattern A12 will not be executed. In this case, when executing a special 1 variation display executed in a normal game state, it is possible to execute an expectation display of a presentation mode that cannot be executed in a special 1 variation display executed in a specific game state.

For example, if the execution rate of presentation pattern A32 when special 1 variation display in a specific game state is "0" (or presentation pattern A32 is not set), the expectation display of presentation pattern A42 can be executed when special 2 variation display in the specific game state, but the expectation display of presentation pattern A32 corresponding to (or the same as) presentation pattern A42 will not be executed. In this case, when executing the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the expectation display of a presentation mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state.

In this way, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to allow the game ball to enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be guided to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

(Zone Production)
As shown in Fig. 166 and Fig. 167, in the variable display of the performance pattern 70a, a zone effect accompanied by a scene change of the background image can be executed. The zone effect creates anticipation of the execution of a big win game for a predetermined period of time, and can be executed at the timing of either a predetermined variable display period based on the determination of one starting condition or a predetermined variable display period based on the determination of multiple starting conditions.

As shown in FIG. 169, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution rate of the zone effect is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state (execution rate b3 < execution rate b1). In other words, the zone effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variable display when a left hit is performed in the specific game state than when a so-called left hit is performed in which the game ball is shot toward the left area of the game area 5a in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 169, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution rate of the zone effect is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state (execution rate b3 < execution rate b4). In other words, the zone effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variable display when a left hit is performed in the specific game state than when a so-called right hit is performed in which the game ball is shot toward the right area of the game area 5a in the specific game state.

By having such an execution ratio of the zone effects, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. This leads the player to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the interest of the game can be increased.

The number of types and contents of the presentation patterns in FIG. 169 may be the same or different. Here, the number of types of zone presentation may be made smaller for the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than for the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state. Also, the number of types of zone presentation may be made smaller for the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than for the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state.

For example, if the execution rate of presentation pattern B32 when a special 1 variation display is made in a specific game state is "0" (or presentation pattern B32 is not set), the zone presentation of presentation pattern B12 can be executed when a special 1 variation display is made in a normal game state, but the zone presentation of presentation pattern B32 corresponding to (or the same as) presentation pattern B12 will not be executed. In this case, when executing a special 1 variation display executed in a normal game state, it is possible to execute a zone presentation of a presentation mode that cannot be executed in a special 1 variation display executed in a specific game state.

For example, if the execution rate of presentation pattern B32 when a special 1 variation display is made in a specific game state is "0" (or presentation pattern B32 is not set), then the zone presentation of presentation pattern B42 can be executed when a special 2 variation display is made in a specific game state, but the zone presentation of presentation pattern B32 that corresponds to (or is the same as) presentation pattern B42 will not be executed. In this case, when executing a special 2 variation display that is executed in a specific game state, it is possible to execute a zone presentation of a presentation mode that cannot be executed in a special 1 variation display that is executed in a specific game state.

The zone presentation is not limited to being performed across multiple variable displays, but may be performed in one variable display. Furthermore, when it is possible to execute a winning suggestion presentation such as a zone presentation that spans a predetermined number of variable displays, the special 1 variable display in the specific game state may be more likely to have a shorter number of times (including 0 times) than the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. In other words, it can be said that a winning suggestion presentation such as a zone presentation that has a pattern spanning a shorter number of variable displays is more likely to be executed in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state.

In the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state, it is possible to execute scene changes such as background changes, captions that appear on the screen, and pattern decorative changes that change to the performance pattern 70a for zone performance, but in the special 1 change display in the specific game state, it is also possible to restrict the execution of scene changes such as background changes, captions that appear on the screen, and pattern decorative changes that change to the performance pattern 70a for zone performance, etc.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, just as in the normal game state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. This can lead the player to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

(Notification sound production)
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, when a CD icon is generated as a reserved icon, a first generation notification sound is output as a notification sound when the icon is generated. Also, as shown in FIG. 166(b), when a reserved icon and a blue character icon are generated (changed to), a second generation notification sound (first change notification sound) is output as a notification sound when the icon is generated (changed). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 167(l), when a reserved icon and a red character icon are generated (changed to), a third generation notification sound (second change notification sound) is output as a notification sound when the icon is generated (changed). Furthermore, when the icon is changed to a rainbow character icon, a fourth generation notification sound (third change notification sound) is set to be output as a notification sound when the icon is changed.

In this embodiment, a different notification sound is set for each of the multiple icon display modes (four types), but it may be two types: a generation notification sound when the CD icon appears and a change notification sound when it changes to a blue character icon, a red character icon, or a rainbow character icon. Alternatively, no notification sound may be output when the CD icon appears, and a notification sound may be output only when the icon changes to one of the modes. Also, for the rainbow character icon, which is confirmed to be a jackpot, a dedicated change notification sound may be provided, making it three types.

As shown in FIG. 170, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the change notification sound effect than the special 1 variation display executed in the normal game state (execution rate c3 < execution rate c1). In other words, the change notification sound effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variation display when a left hit is performed in the specific game state than when a so-called left hit is performed in which the game ball is shot toward the left area of the game area 5a in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 170, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the change notification sound effect than the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state (execution rate c3 < execution rate c4). In other words, the change notification sound effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 figure variation display when a left hit is performed in the specific game state than when a so-called right hit is performed in the specific game state, which shoots the game ball toward the right area of the game area 5a.

By having such a rate of execution of the change notification sound effect, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. This can lead the player to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the interest of the game can be increased.

Here, the number of types of change notification sound effects may be made smaller for the special 1 change display executed in the specific game state than for the special 1 change display executed in the normal game state. Also, the number of types of change notification sound effects may be made smaller for the special 1 change display executed in the specific game state than for the special 2 change display executed in the specific game state.

The change notification sound effect can be performed not only when the reserved icon changes, but also when a win is won, or when a change starts or stops, etc.

For example, if the execution rate of a specific change notification sound when a special 1 change display is made in a specific game state is "0" (or a specific change notification sound is not set), a notification sound performance using a specified change notification sound can be executed when a special 1 change display is made in a normal game state, but a notification sound performance using a specific change notification sound that corresponds to (or is the same as) the specified change notification sound will not be executed. In this case, when executing a special 1 change display executed in a normal game state, it is possible to execute a notification sound performance of a performance mode that cannot be executed in a special 1 change display executed in a specific game state.

For example, if the execution rate of a specific change notification sound when a special 1 change display is made in a specific game state is "0" (or a specific change notification sound is not set), a notification sound performance using a specified change notification sound can be executed when a special 2 change display is made in a specific game state, but a notification sound performance using a specific change notification sound that corresponds to (or is the same as) the specified change notification sound will not be executed. In this case, when executing a special 2 change display executed in a specific game state, it is possible to execute a notification sound performance of a performance mode that cannot be executed in a special 1 change display executed in a specific game state.

In this way, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to allow the game ball to enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be led to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

The notification sound effects are not limited to being associated with changes in the reserved (relevant) icon, but can also be associated with various conditions, such as when the game ball enters the starting hole, when a deciding effect (confirmation effect) such as "kyun" is executed, when a buried operation button appears such as "gyuuin", the operation sound of movable members 73 and 74, the start of change sound and return sound when multiple movable members combine to form a specific design, and the completion sound when a specific design is created.

When an alarm sound effect can be executed in association with a specified condition, the rate at which the specified condition is executed may be the same or lower for the special 1 change display in the specific game state than for the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state, and the rate at which the alarm sound effect is executed may be lower.

In the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state, for example, it is possible to execute a presentation using a confirmed notification sound among the notification sound presentations, but in the special 1 change display in the specific game state, it may be possible to restrict the execution of a presentation using a confirmed notification sound. Note that this is not limited to the confirmed notification sound, but can also be done in the same way with the various notification sound presentations mentioned above. In other words, in the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state, it is possible to execute a presentation using a predetermined notification sound among the notification sound presentations, but in the special 1 change display in the specific game state, it is possible to restrict the execution of a presentation using a predetermined notification sound.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be led to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

(Pending icon change effect)
As shown in Fig. 166 and Fig. 167, in the variable display of the performance pattern 70a, the shape and color of the reserved icon are changed to execute a reserved icon performance that makes the player expect a big win game. The change of the reserved icon in this embodiment makes the player expect a big win game to be executed for a predetermined period of time, and can be executed at any timing of a predetermined variable display period based on the determination of one starting condition, or a predetermined variable display period based on the determination of multiple starting conditions.

As shown in FIG. 171, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution rate of the reserved icon change effect is smaller in the special 1 change display executed in the specific game state than in the special 1 change display executed in the normal game state (execution rate d3 < execution rate d1). In other words, the reserved icon change effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 change display when a left hit is performed in the specific game state than when a so-called left hit is performed in which the game ball is shot toward the left area of the game area 5a in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 171, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution rate of the reserved icon change effect is smaller in the special 1 change display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 change display executed in the specific game state (execution rate d3 < execution rate d4). In other words, the reserved icon change effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 change display when a left hit is performed in the specific game state than when a so-called right hit is performed in the specific game state, which shoots the game ball toward the right area of the game area 5a.

By setting such an execution rate of the reserved icon change effect, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. This can lead the player to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the excitement of the game can be increased.

The number of types and contents of the presentation patterns in FIG. 171 may be the same or different. Here, the number of types of reserved icon change presentation may be made smaller for the special 1 change display executed in the specific game state than for the special 1 change display executed in the normal game state. Also, the number of types of reserved icon change presentation may be made smaller for the special 1 change display executed in the specific game state than for the special 2 change display executed in the specific game state.

The pending icon change effect is not limited to a change in color of the pending icon (including the present icon) or a change in the appearance of the icon itself, but may also be a change in the icon itself or the effect associated with the icon, such as an effect or character associated with the icon. In addition, the pending icon effect is not limited to a change from a round CD icon to a character icon as in the embodiment, but may also be a change in shape to a triangle, square, etc.

For example, if the execution rate of presentation pattern D32 when a special 1 change display is made in a specific game state is "0" (or presentation pattern D32 is not set), the reserved icon change presentation of presentation pattern D12 can be executed when a special 1 change display is made in a normal game state, but the zone presentation of presentation pattern D32 corresponding to (or the same as) presentation pattern D12 will not be executed. In this case, when executing a special 1 change display executed in a normal game state, it is possible to execute a reserved icon change presentation of a presentation mode that cannot be executed in a special 1 change display executed in a specific game state.

For example, if the execution rate of presentation pattern D32 when special 1 change display is performed in a specific game state is "0" (or presentation pattern D32 is not set), the reserved icon change presentation of presentation pattern D42 can be executed when special 2 change display is performed in the specific game state, but the reserved icon change presentation of presentation pattern D32 corresponding to (or the same as) presentation pattern D42 will not be executed. In this case, when executing the special 2 change display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute a reserved icon change presentation of a presentation mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 change display executed in the specific game state.

The number of types of reserved icons that can be displayed may be smaller in the special 1 change display in the specific game state than in the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. Also, in the reserved icon change presentation, the CD icon may change gradually from blue to red to rainbow, etc., or the CD icon may change selectively to blue, red, or rainbow. The number of types of display modes that can be changed from the current display mode of the reserved icon may be smaller in the special 1 change display in the specific game state than in the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state.

In the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state, for example, a reserved icon change effect can be executed, but in the special 1 change display in the specific game state, the execution of the reserved icon change effect may be restricted. In the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state, for example, a change effect performed when changing the reserved icon change can be executed, but in the special 1 change display in the specific game state, the execution of the change effect may be restricted. Note that even if the reserved icon effect is not executed, icon decorations displayed in association with the reserved icon, such as the base on which the reserved icon is placed or a frame surrounding the reserved icon, may be displayed.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be guided to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

(Lamp change effect)
As shown in Figures 166 and 167, by changing the light emission mode of the winning port lamp NR across one or more variable displays, it is possible to execute a lamp change effect, which is a type of pre-reading preview effect that gives the player the expectation that a jackpot game will be played.

As shown in FIG. 172, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution rate of the lamp change effect is smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal game state (execution rate e3 < execution rate e1). In other words, the lamp icon change effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variation display when a left hit is performed in the specific game state than when a so-called left hit is performed in which the game ball is shot toward the left area of the game area 5a in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 172, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution rate of the lamp change effect is smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state (execution rate e3 < execution rate e4). In other words, the lamp change effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variation display when a left hit is performed in the specific game state than when a so-called right hit is performed in which the game ball is shot toward the right area of the game area 5a in the specific game state.

By having such an execution rate of the lamp change effect, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. This can lead the player to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the excitement of the game can be increased.

The number of types and contents of the presentation patterns in FIG. 172 may be the same or different. Here, the number of types of lamp change presentation may be made smaller for the special 1 change display executed in the specific game state than for the special 1 change display executed in the normal game state. Also, the number of types of lamp change presentation may be made smaller for the special 1 change display executed in the specific game state than for the special 2 change display executed in the specific game state.

The lamp change effect is not limited to the winning hole lamp NR, but may be performed in conjunction with other lighting devices, such as the movable members 73, 74, the decorative frame 40, the game board 5, and the frame lighting device 10 of the glass frame 4, in addition to the winning hole lamp NR.

For example, if the execution rate of presentation pattern E32 when a special 1 variation display is made in a specific game state is "0" (or presentation pattern E32 is not set), the lamp change presentation of presentation pattern E12 can be executed when a special 1 variation display is made in a normal game state, but the lamp change presentation of presentation pattern E32 corresponding to (or the same as) presentation pattern E12 will not be executed. In this case, when executing a special 1 variation display executed in a normal game state, it is possible to execute a lamp change presentation of a presentation type that cannot be executed in a special 1 variation display executed in a specific game state.

For example, if the execution rate of presentation pattern E32 when a special 1 variation display is made in a specific game state is "0" (or presentation pattern E32 is not set), the lamp change presentation of presentation pattern E42 can be executed when a special 2 variation display is made in a specific game state, but the lamp change presentation of presentation pattern E32 that corresponds to (or is the same as) presentation pattern E42 will not be executed. In this case, when executing a special 2 variation display executed in a specific game state, it is possible to execute a lamp change presentation of a presentation mode that cannot be executed in a special 1 variation display executed in a specific game state.

The special 1 change display in the specific game state may have fewer types of lamp change effects than the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. Also, the lamp change effect may change gradually from no light → blue → red → rainbow, etc., or may change selectively from no light to blue, red, or rainbow. The special 1 change display in the specific game state may have fewer types of light emission modes to which the current light emission mode can be changed than the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state.

In the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state, for example, a specific pattern of lamp change effects can be executed, but in the special 1 change display in the specific game state, the execution of the specific pattern of lamp change effects may be restricted.

The lighting (lighting patterns) that make up the lamp change performance can be associated with various conditions, such as a change in the reserved (relevant) icon, when the game ball enters the starting hole, when a deciding performance (confirmation performance) such as "kyun" is executed, the button change sound when a buried operation button appears such as "gyuuin", the operating sound of movable members 73 and 74, the start of change sound and return sound when multiple movable members combine to form a specific design, and the completion sound when a specific design is created.

When a lamp change presentation can be executed in association with a specified condition, the rate at which the specified condition is executed may be the same or lower for the special 1 change display in the specific game state than for the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state, and the rate at which the lamp change presentation is executed may be lower.

In the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state, for example, among the lamp change effects, it is possible to execute effects using, for example, the winning hole lamp NR and the board lighting device (frame lighting device), but in the special 1 change display in the specific game state, it is possible to execute effects using, for example, the board lighting device and the frame lighting device, while restricting the execution of effects using the winning hole lamp NR. In other words, in the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state, it is possible to execute effects using a specified part (area, component unit, etc.) among the lamp change effects, but in the special 1 change display in the specific game state, it is possible to restrict the execution of effects using a specified part.

The lamp change presentation or the pattern selected in the lamp change presentation may change with timing (e.g., when a prize is won, when the fluctuation starts, when the fluctuation stops, how many times in a row it occurs, when the movable member starts/stops/decides to operate, the vibration or operation of the operation button, etc.). In the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state, the lamp change presentation can be executed at a predetermined timing, for example, when a prize is won, and at a specific timing when the movable member operates, but in the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific game state, the execution of the lamp change presentation at the predetermined timing and the specific timing may be restricted.

The execution period of the lamp change presentation (predetermined pattern of lamp change presentation) performed in the special 1 change display in a specific game state may be shorter than the execution period of the lamp change presentation (predetermined pattern of lamp change presentation) performed in the special 1 change display in a normal game state or in the special 2 change display in a specific game state.

The number of types of parts (areas, components, etc.) that emit light in the light-emitting performance (lamp change performance) performed in the special 1 change display of the specific game state may be smaller than the number of types of parts (areas, components, etc.) that emit light in the light-emitting performance (lamp change performance) performed in the special 1 change display of the specific game state. Also, the range of light emitted in the light-emitting performance (lamp change performance) performed in the special 1 change display of the specific game state may be smaller than the range of light emitted in the light-emitting performance (lamp change performance) performed in the special 1 change display of the normal game state or the special 2 change display of the specific game state. Here, the light-emitting performance may be such that the number of lights emitted by the LEDs arranged side by side changes, so that the number of lights emitted or the light-emitting range changes stepwise, or the light-emitting mode may change by overlapping a light guide plate or the like with an image display device or a board lighting device.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be guided to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

(Operation of movable parts)
As shown in Figures 166 and 167, by operating the first movable member 73 in an operation mode including a weak operation mode and a strong operation mode which operates more significantly (more noticeable) than the weak operation mode, it is possible to produce an operation presentation that makes the player anticipate a jackpot game being played.

As shown in FIG. 173, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the weak operation mode of the operation presentation by the first movable member 73 than the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state (execution rate f31 < execution rate f11). In other words, it is more difficult to execute the operation presentation in the weak operation mode in the special 1 variable display when a left hit is performed in the specific game state than when a so-called left hit is performed in which the game ball is shot toward the left area of the game area 5a in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 173, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the weak operation mode of the operation presentation by the first movable member 73 (execution rate f31 < execution rate f41) than the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state. In other words, it is more difficult to execute the operation presentation in the weak operation mode in the special 1 variable display when a left hit is performed in the specific game state than when a so-called right hit is performed in the specific game state, which shoots the game ball toward the right area of the game area 5a.

By having such an execution ratio of the operation effects, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be guided to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

The execution rate of the strong activation mode in the activation presentation may be smaller, the same, or larger than that of the weak activation mode. Also, for the strong activation mode, the relationship between winning at the start holes 45, 47 and the game state may be the same as that of the weak activation mode, or it may be reversed from that of the weak activation mode, and the execution rate may be the same.

Here, the number of types of operational presentation patterns may be made smaller for the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than for the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state. Also, the number of types of operational presentation patterns may be made smaller for the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than for the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state.

In this embodiment, the operation of the first movable member 73 has been described, but the operation of other movable parts, such as the second movable member 74, may be the same as that of the first movable member 73. In this case, the first movable member 73 and the other movable parts may be linked (associated) to operate.

For example, if the execution rate of the operation presentation of a specific operation mode when a special 1 variation display is made in a specific game state is "0" (or a specific operation mode is not set), an operation presentation according to a predetermined operation mode can be executed when a special 1 variation display is made in a normal game state, but an operation presentation of a specific operation mode corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined operation mode will not be executed. In this case, when executing a special 1 variation display executed in a normal game state, an operation presentation of a presentation mode that cannot be executed in a special 1 variation display executed in a specific game state can be executed.

For example, if the execution rate of the operation presentation of a specific operation mode when a special 1 variation display is made in a specific game state is "0" (or a specific operation mode is not set), an operation presentation according to a predetermined operation mode can be executed when a special 2 variation display is made in a specific game state, but an operation presentation of a specific operation mode corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined operation mode will not be executed. In this case, when executing a special 2 variation display executed in a specific game state, an operation presentation of a presentation mode that cannot be executed in a special 1 variation display executed in a specific game state can be executed.

Activation effects can be executed at various times, such as when the fluctuation starts, when the effect develops, when a reach occurs, when a trigger occurs, and when a deciding effect (confirming effect) occurs. In the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state, weak and strong activation activation effects can be executed at a predetermined timing, such as when the fluctuation starts, and at a specific timing, such as a deciding effect, but in the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific game state, it may be possible to restrict the execution of strong activation at a predetermined timing, while allowing strong activation to be executed at a specific timing. In this way, differences may be made in the activation mode and whether or not the activation effect can be executed depending on the timing.

The operation performance can be performed in association with the light-emitting performance by the light-emitting means such as LEDs provided on the movable member. In this case, the light-emitting performance can select a light-emitting pattern, a light-emitting color, a light-emitting range, etc., such as a mode in which the expectation level differs stepwise, such as blue light emission → red light emission → rainbow light emission. In the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, it is possible to execute an operation performance of a predetermined light-emitting mode, for example, blue light emission, and a specific light-emitting mode, for example, rainbow light emission, but in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state, it is possible to restrict the execution of the operation performance in the predetermined light-emitting mode, while it is possible to execute an operation performance in the specific light-emitting mode. In other words, in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, it is possible to execute a predetermined light-emitting mode, for example, blue light emission, and a specific light-emitting mode, for example, rainbow light emission, in the operation performance, but in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state, it is possible to restrict the execution of the light-emitting mode in the operation performance, while it is possible to execute a light-emitting mode of the specific light-emitting mode. Also, if there are predetermined light emission patterns that can be executed during weak activation and predetermined light emission patterns that can be executed during strong activation, the execution rate of the predetermined light emission patterns may be smaller for the special 1 variable display in the specific game state than for the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be guided to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

(Display presentation by display means different from the first image display device)
As shown in FIG. 174, a light guide plate display performance, which is a kind of pre-reading notice performance that makes a player expect a big win game to be executed, can be executed by displaying a light guide plate image DG over one or more variable displays on a light guide plate provided in front of the first image display device 70. For example, as shown in FIG. 174(a), in the first consecutive notice performance, for example, a light guide plate image DG imitating a character is displayed at the start of the variable display, as shown in FIG. 174(b), in the second consecutive notice performance, for example, a light guide plate image DG imitating a character with a pose different from that of the first performance is displayed at the start of the variable display, as shown in FIG. 174(c), in the third consecutive notice performance, for example, a light guide plate image DG imitating a character with the same pose as the second performance but with a different color (red character or rainbow character) is displayed at the start of the variable display. The timing of the light guide plate display performance is not limited to the start of the variable display, and may be during the variable display or at the end of the variable display, and the timing of the light guide plate display performances executed consecutively may be different.

As shown in FIG. 174-1, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state has a smaller execution rate of the light guide plate display effect than the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state (execution rate g3 < execution rate g1). In other words, the light guide plate display effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variable display when a left hit is performed in the specific gaming state than when a so-called left hit is performed in which the gaming ball is shot toward the left area of the gaming area 5a in the normal gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 174-1, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the light guide plate display effect is executed less frequently in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state (execution rate g3 < execution rate g4). In other words, the light guide plate display effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variable display when a left hit is performed in the specific game state than when a so-called right hit is performed in which the game ball is shot toward the right area of the game area 5a in the specific game state.

By using such a light guide plate display performance execution ratio, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to allow the game ball to enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be guided to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the interest of the game can be increased.

Here, the number of different patterns of the light guide plate display presentation may be made smaller for the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than for the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state. Also, the number of different patterns of the light guide plate display presentation may be made smaller for the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than for the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state.

In this embodiment, the display performance of the light guide plate has been described, but the display performance performed by a display means other than the first image display device 71, such as the second image display device 71 or a 3D filter, may be the same as the light guide plate display performance or may have a different execution ratio. In this case, the light guide plate display performance and the other display performance may be executed in a linked (associated) manner.

For example, if the execution rate of presentation pattern G32 when a special 1 variation display is made in a specific game state is "0" (or presentation pattern G32 is not set), the light guide plate display presentation of presentation pattern G12 can be executed when a special 1 variation display is made in a normal game state, but the light guide plate display presentation of presentation pattern G32 corresponding to (or the same as) presentation pattern G12 will not be executed. In this case, when executing a special 1 variation display executed in a normal game state, it is possible to execute a light guide plate display presentation of a presentation mode that cannot be executed in a special 1 variation display executed in a specific game state.

For example, if the execution rate of presentation pattern G32 when a special 1 variation display is made in a specific game state is "0" (or presentation pattern G32 is not set), the light guide plate change presentation of presentation pattern G42 can be executed when a special 2 variation display is made in a specific game state, but the light guide plate change presentation of presentation pattern G32 that corresponds to (or is the same as) presentation pattern G42 will not be executed. In this case, when executing a special 2 variation display executed in a specific game state, it is possible to execute a light guide plate change presentation of a presentation mode that cannot be executed in a special 1 variation display executed in a specific game state.

The light guide plate display effect can be executed at various times, such as when the fluctuation starts, when the effect develops, when a reach occurs, when a push occurs, and when a deciding effect (confirming effect) occurs. In the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state, the light guide plate display effect can be executed at a predetermined timing, such as when the fluctuation starts, and at a specific timing, such as a deciding effect, but in the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific game state, it may be possible to restrict the execution of the light guide plate display effect at the predetermined timing, while allowing the light guide plate display effect to be executed at the specific timing. In this way, differences may be made in the display mode and whether or not the light guide plate display effect can be executed depending on the timing.

The light guide plate display performance can be executed in association with other winning suggestion performances, such as an operation performance by a movable member. In this case, the light guide plate display performance can select a light emitting pattern, a light emitting color, a light emitting range, etc., such as a mode in which the expectation level differs stepwise, such as blue light emission → red light emission → rainbow light emission. In the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, the light guide plate display performance of a predetermined display mode, for example, blue light emission, and a specific display mode, for example, rainbow light emission, can be executed with other winning suggestion performances, such as operation performances, but in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state, it is possible to restrict the execution of other winning suggestion performances in the predetermined display mode, while it is possible to execute other winning suggestion performances in the specific display mode. In other words, in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, it is possible to execute a predetermined display mode, for example, blue light emission, and a specific display mode, for example, rainbow light emission, together with the operation performance, but in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state, it is possible to restrict the execution of the light emitting performance of the operation performance and the predetermined display mode, while it is possible to execute a specific display mode together with the operation performance. Also, if there is a predetermined display pattern (executable during weak activation) and a predetermined display pattern (executable during strong activation), the execution rate of the predetermined display pattern may be smaller for the special 1 variable display in the specific game state than for the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be guided to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

Display effects other than the first image display device 71 are not limited to light guide plates, but may also be sub-LCDs provided on the game board, such as the second image display device, or sub-LCDs provided on the frame, and display effects may be created by combining these display means including the light guide plate.

(Continuous preview performance)
As shown in Fig. 166, Fig. 167 and Fig. 174, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is capable of executing a continuous notice effect, which is a kind of pre-reading notice effect that makes the player expect that a big win game will be executed by executing a predetermined effect over one or more variable displays. In this embodiment, color effects, zone effects, change notification sound effects, reserved icon change effects, lamp change effects, display effects using light guide panels, etc. are executed in a linked (associated) manner.

Accordingly, according to Figs. 169 to 173 and 174-1, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the rate at which the continuous preview effect is executed is smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal game state. In other words, the continuous preview effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variation display when a left hit is performed in the specific game state than when a so-called left hit is performed in which the game ball is shot toward the left area of the game area 5a in the normal game state.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the rate at which the continuous preview effect is executed is smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state. In other words, the continuous preview effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variation display when a left hit is performed in the specific game state than when a right hit is performed in the specific game state, which shoots the game ball toward the right area of the game area 5a.

By having such an execution rate of the consecutive preview performance, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. This can lead the player to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the fun of playing can be increased.

Here, the number of types of continuous preview performance patterns may be made smaller for the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than for the special 1 variation display executed in the normal game state. Also, the number of types of continuous preview performance patterns may be made smaller for the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than for the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state.

The continuous preview effects may include not only linked effects that are performed consecutively or in conjunction with each other in multiple variable displays, but also development effects (development teasing effects, step-up (SU) type effects, etc.) in which the expectation of a big win increases in a gradual or continuous manner as the number of variable displays increases or as a specified condition such as the passage of time progresses. Note that the development effects may also be change effects such as countdowns and timer effects, in which the mode (display mode or content) changes when a specified condition (such as the passage of time) is met.

Selection effects that suggest different results depending on the selected option, such as roulette effects and effects in which the number of decorations increases when a player reaches a certain point; pre-reading suggestive text, LCD conversation/cut-in notices, and development roulette effects that indirectly predict the occurrence of events that lead to a big win, such as pre-reading and reaching a certain point; content suggestive effects that suggest the content of the event that will be executed after the effect, such as big win type suggestive effects (XX bonus); operation suggestive effects such as button long press guidance effects on image display devices and rapid-fire effects (gauge accumulates while long-pressed, button vibrates for each level reached); operation of movable parts (including dedicated movable parts and parts with other functions such as light guide plates) (weak pre-reading (suggestion) operation, strong pre-reading (suggestion) operation, suggestion, development, deciding effect), and operation effects such as vibration of operation buttons, and other advance notification effects may also be executed at a rate based on the relationship between the game state and the start conditions described above.

For example, if the execution rate of the continuous preview performance of a specific performance mode when the special 1 variation display in a specific game state is "0" (or a specific operation mode is not set), a continuous preview performance of a specific performance mode that corresponds to (or is the same as) the specific performance mode can be executed when the special 1 variation display is executed in the normal game state, but the continuous preview performance of the performance mode that is not executable in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state can be executed.

For example, if the execution rate of the continuous preview performance of a specific performance mode when the special 1 variation display in a specific game state is "0" (or a specific operation mode is not set), a continuous preview performance of a specific performance mode that corresponds to (or is the same as) the specific performance mode can be executed when the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, but the continuous preview performance of the specific performance mode corresponding to (or the same as) the specific performance mode will not be executed. In this case, when executing the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute a continuous preview performance of a performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state.

In this way, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to allow the game ball to enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be led to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

In the special 1 variable display in the normal game state, the light-emitting effect of the special 1 start port 45 can be executed at the timing of the game ball entering the first winning port 45 and/or the timing of the start of the variation of the performance pattern 70a (first special pattern), and the operation performance of the first movable role 73 and/or the second movable member 74 can be executed. Similarly, in the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, the light-emitting effect of the special 2 start port 45 can be executed at the timing of the game ball entering the second winning port 47 and/or the timing of the start of the variation of the performance pattern 70a (second special pattern), and the operation performance of the first movable role 73 and/or the second movable member 74 can be executed.

In contrast, in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state, the light-emitting effect of the special 1 start port 45 is not executed at the timing when the game ball enters the first winning port 45 and/or the timing when the variable effect pattern 70a (first special pattern) starts to change, and the operation effect of the first movable role 73 and/or the second movable member 74 is not executed. In other words, when a left hit is made in the normal game state, the light-emitting effect and the operation effect are executed, but when a left hit is made in the special game state, the execution of the light-emitting effect and the operation effect is restricted.

By making the light-emitting effects and action effects different between the special 1 variable display in the normal game state and the special 1 variable display in the specific game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. The player can then be guided to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the fun of playing the game can be increased.

When the three performance symbols 70a show (stop) a specific pattern (specific result = chance eye), it may trigger a sudden probability change (2R probability change) or develop into an SP reach (a reach with a high possibility of a big win). The variable display in which such a chance eye appears may be a single variable or multiple variables. In this case, the chance eye may appear less frequently in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. Also, the chance eye may appear less frequently in multiple variables in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state.

The performance pattern 70a may be displayed in a variety of modes, such as a predetermined display mode consisting of an identification part such as numbers (1-9) or letters (A, B, etc.) and a decorative part such as a character, and a specific display mode consisting of only an identification part. There may be multiple predetermined display modes. In addition to or instead of the performance pattern 70a, a pseudo consecutive pattern such as "NEXT" may be displayed to execute a performance (pseudo consecutive) that changes multiple times regardless of one starting condition (one winning). In addition to or instead of the performance pattern 70a, for example, a change pattern, a mode entry pattern, a development pattern, etc. may appear to make the player expect a mode (for example, a performance mode) or performance that is different from the current one. Note that special patterns such as pseudo consecutive patterns, change patterns, mode entry patterns, and development patterns have different information (expectation of execution of a jackpot game) from that of normal performance patterns 70a. The appearance of such special patterns can also be an element of the linked performance.

The rate at which special symbols appear may be smaller in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. Also, the total number of symbols that can be displayed (normal performance symbols + special symbols) may be smaller in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. Also, the rate at which linked performances that are performed in conjunction with the appearance of special symbols are executed may be smaller in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state.

Even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to allow the game ball to enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be led to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the interest of the game can be increased.

(Example of Production 2)
A specific example 2 of the variable display presentation is shown.

(Normal game state special 1 change display)
The special 1 variable display in the normal game state will be described with reference to Fig. 175 and Fig. 176. As shown in Fig. 175, at the timing of P0, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1" when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". Furthermore, one hold icon T1 is additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B as a 10-frame animation (displayed so that it gradually gets larger from a very small size) (see FIG. 176(a)).

Next, at the timing of P1, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the variable display of the first special symbol begins. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". Furthermore, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "1" to "0". Furthermore, the reserved icons T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, and the first icon is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable indicator 81 starts, but the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after a preparatory operation such as a part of the decorative part moving or the whole or part expanding and contracting as in this embodiment (see FIG. 176 (b)).

At the timing of P2, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1" as a result of the game ball entering the first starting hole 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 changes from "0" to "1."

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold display 83 changes from "0" to "1". Furthermore, one hold icon T1 is additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B as a 10-frame animation (displayed so that it gradually gets larger from a tiny size) (see FIG. 176 (c)).

At the timing of P3, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2" as a result of the game ball entering the first starting hole 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 increases from "1" to "2."

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold display 83 changes from "1" to "2". Furthermore, one hold icon T1 is additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B as a 10-frame animation (displayed so that it gradually gets larger from a very small size) (see FIG. 176 (d)).

After that, at timing P4, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("259"). At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). Also, the reserved icon T and the icon TH are rotating (performance motion) (see FIG. 176 (e)).

Then, at the timing of P5, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed in a stopped state in a losing mode on the first special symbol display 60. Also, the performance control unit 130m performs processing to end the changing performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing state ("259") (see FIG. 176(f)), and the first lamp pattern stops in a losing state (e.g., off).

Next, at the timing of P6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first special symbol display 60 starts to display the changing of the first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 shown by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". Furthermore, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1", and processing is performed to start the changing performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". Also, the reserved icons T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern starts to change, and after a preparatory operation, scrolling starts (see FIG. 176 (g)).

At the timing of P7, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2" as a result of the game ball entering the first starting hole 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 increases from "1" to "2."

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold display 83 changes from "1" to "2". Furthermore, one hold icon T1 is additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B as a 10-frame animation (displayed so that it gradually gets larger from a very small size) (see FIG. 176 (h)).

After that, at timing P8, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("789"). At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance action). Also, the reserved icon T and the icon TH are rotating (performance action) (see FIG. 176 (i)).

Then, at the timing P9, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed in a stopped state in a losing mode on the first special symbol display 60. Also, the performance control unit 130m performs processing to end the changing performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing state ("789") (see FIG. 176(j)), and the first lamp pattern stops in a losing state (e.g., off).

From then on, the special 1 variation display will be performed in normal game mode according to the flow described above.

We have explained the special 1 change display in the normal game state, but the basic flow is the same for the special 2 change display in the normal game state and the special 2 change display in the special game state (time-saving game state, special bonus game state).

Specifically, the first reserved number, the first special symbol, the first special symbol display 60, the first special symbol reserved indicator 63, the sub-first variable indicator 81, the sub-first reserved indicator 83, the first reserved number display area 70E, the first reserved icon display area 70B, the first lamp symbol, and the first start port 45 should each be read as the second reserved number, the second special symbol, the second special symbol display 61, the second special symbol reserved indicator 64, the sub-second variable indicator 82, the sub-second reserved indicator 84, the second reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp symbol, and the second start port 47.

(Special 1 change display of specific game state)
The special 1 variable display in a specific game state will be described with reference to Fig. 177 and Fig. 178. As shown in Fig. 177, at the timing of P0, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1" as the game ball enters the first starting hole 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold display 83 changes from "0" to "1". However, no additional hold icon T1 is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 178(a)).

Next, at the timing of P1, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the variable display of the first special symbol begins. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". Furthermore, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "1" to "0". Note that the reserved icon T1 is not displayed (not shifted) in the first reserved icon display area 70B. Also, the display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable indicator 81 starts to change, but the performance pattern 70a remains stopped (see FIG. 178 (b)).

At the timing of P2, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1" as a result of the game ball entering the first starting hole 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 changes from "0" to "1."

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold display 83 changes from "0" to "1". However, no additional hold icon T1 is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 178 (c)).

At the timing of P3, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2" as a result of the game ball entering the first starting hole 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 increases from "1" to "2."

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold display 83 changes from "1" to "2". However, no additional hold icon T1 is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 178 (d)).

After that, at timing P4, even if a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a remains in a stopped state (see Figure 178 (e)).

Then, at the timing of P5, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed in a stopped state in a losing mode on the first special symbol display 60. Also, the performance control unit 130m performs processing to end the changing performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, and the performance symbol 70a remains stopped. In addition, the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined losing state ("259") (see FIG. 178(f)), and the first lamp symbol stops in a losing state (e.g., off).

Next, at the timing of P6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first special symbol display 60 starts to display the changing of the first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 shown by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". Furthermore, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1", and processing is performed to start the changing performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". However, the reserved icon T1 is not displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B. Also, the display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern starts to change, but the performance pattern 70a remains stopped (see FIG. 178 (g)).

At the timing of P7, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2" as a result of the game ball entering the first starting hole 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 increases from "1" to "2."

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold display 83 changes from "1" to "2". However, no additional hold icon T1 is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 178 (h)).

After that, at timing P8, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable presentation, the left, center, and right presentation patterns 70a remain in a stopped state (see Figure 178 (i)).

Then, at the timing P9, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed in a stopped state in a losing mode on the first special symbol display 60. Also, the performance control unit 130m performs processing to end the changing performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, the performance symbol 70a remains stopped, but the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined losing state ("789") (see FIG. 178(j)), and the first lamp symbol stops in a losing state (e.g., off).

After that, the special 1 variation display is performed in the specific game state according to the above flow. Note that in the above example, the performance pattern 70a does not vary, but the performance pattern 70a may vary.

In the embodiment, the gaming machine 1 can execute a specific change display in a specific game state in which the special pattern TZ changes without displaying the reserved icon T1 from the start to the end of the special 1 change display, and in the specific change display of this embodiment, the change of the performance pattern 70a is not executed. On the other hand, in the normal game state, the above-mentioned specific change display is not executed from the start to the end of the special 1 change display, and the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ change while displaying the reserved icon T1 from the start to the end of the special 1 change display.

In this way, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to allow the game ball to enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be led to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

In the embodiment, the gaming machine 1 can execute a specific change display in which the special pattern TZ changes without displaying the reserved icon T1 from the start to the end of the special 1 change display in a specific game state, and in the specific change display of this embodiment, the change of the performance pattern 70a is not executed. On the other hand, in the specific game state, the aforementioned specific change display is not executed from the start to the end of the special 2 change display, and the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ change while displaying the reserved icon T2 from the start to the end of the special 2 change display.

In this way, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to allow the game ball to enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be led to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

In the specific variable display, at least one of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ can be made to vary. For example, both the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ can vary, the performance pattern 70a can vary while the special pattern TZ does not vary, or the special pattern TZ can vary but the performance pattern 70a is not displayed.

In the embodiment, in the normal game state, the reserved icon and reserved number can be displayed variably in a predetermined manner according to the increase or decrease in the reserved number based on the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 45. In contrast, in the specific game state, the reserved icon can be displayed variably in a specific manner that differs from the predetermined manner according to the increase or decrease in the reserved number based on the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 45, with only the reserved number being displayed variably.

In this way, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to allow the game ball to enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be led to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

In an embodiment, in a specific game state, the reserved icon and reserved number can be displayed variably in a predetermined manner in response to an increase or decrease in the reserved number based on the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 47. In contrast, in a specific game state, the reserved icon can be displayed variably in a specific manner in which only the reserved number differs from the predetermined manner in response to an increase or decrease in the reserved number based on the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 45.

In this way, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to allow the game ball to enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be led to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

In the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state, information about the reserved number is displayed using a reserved icon, reserved number, and display, while in the special 1 change display in the specific game state, it is displayed using the reserved number and display. In other words, the total number of types of information about the reserved number is smaller in the special 1 change display in the specific game state than in the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. It can also be said that it is more difficult to grasp (confirm) information about the reserved number in the special 1 change display in the specific game state than in the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state.

In addition, the reserved (relevant) icon may not be displayed in the special 1 change display of the specific game state, but may be displayed. In addition, in the special 1 change display of the specific game state, the reserved (relevant) icon may not be shifted based on the increase or decrease in the reserved number, or the reserved (relevant) icon may not be operated, and may be displayed in a manner different from the special 1 change display of the normal game state or the special 2 change display of the specific game state. In other words, the reserved icon can be shifted in the special 1 change display of the normal game state or the special 2 change display of the specific game state, but the execution of the shift display of the reserved icon can be restricted in the special 1 change display of the specific game state. In addition, the reserved icon can be displayed in a predetermined manner in the special 1 change display of the normal game state or the special 2 change display of the specific game state, but the execution of the display of the reserved icon in a predetermined manner can be restricted in the special 1 change display of the specific game state.

In this way, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to allow the game ball to enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be led to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

(Example of Production 3)
A specific example 3 of a variable display presentation is shown.

(Special 1 change display of reserved number "1" in normal game state)
An example of the special 1 variation display when the reserved number is "1" in the normal game state will be described with reference to FIG. 179. The variation pattern is to be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

As shown in FIG. 179, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1." At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "0" to "1."

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". Furthermore, one hold icon T1 is additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B as a 10-frame animation (displayed so that it gradually becomes larger from a very small size) (see FIG. 179(a)).

Next, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0," and the variable display of the first special symbol begins. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0." Furthermore, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0," and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "1" to "0". Furthermore, the reserved icons T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, and the first icon is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable indicator 81 starts, but the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after a preparatory operation such as a part of the decorative part moving or the whole or part expanding and contracting as in this embodiment (see FIG. 179(b)).

At this time, the performance patterns 70a start scrolling in the order of the left performance pattern 70a, the central performance pattern 70a, and the right performance pattern 70a (see Figures 179 (c) to (e)).

After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("789"). At this time, the performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in the order of the left performance pattern 70a, the center performance pattern 70a, and the right performance pattern 70a (see Figure 179 (f) to (h)). In addition, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the reserved icon T and the icon TH are in a state of rotating (performance motion) (see Figure 179 (f) to (h)).

When the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed in a stopped state in a losing mode on the first special symbol display 60. Also, the performance control unit 130m performs processing to end the changing performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing state ("789") (see FIG. 179(i)), and the first lamp pattern stops in a losing state (e.g., off).

(Special 1 change display of reserved number "4" in normal game state)
An example of the special 1 variation display when the reserved number is "4" in the normal game state will be described with reference to FIG. 180. Note that the variation pattern is selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

As shown in FIG. 180, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4." At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 increases from "3" to "4."

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one hold icon T1 is additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B as a 10-frame animation (displayed so that it gradually becomes larger from a very small size) (see FIG. 180(a)).

Next, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the variable display of the first special symbol begins. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". Furthermore, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Furthermore, the reserved icons T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable indicator 81 starts, but the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after a preparatory operation such as a part of the decorative part moving or the whole or part expanding and contracting as in this embodiment (see FIG. 180(b)).

At this time, the left side performance pattern 70a, the center performance pattern 70a, and the right side performance pattern 70a start scrolling simultaneously (see Figure 180 (c)).

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4." At this time, the first reserved number U1 displayed by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 increases from "3" to "4."

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold display 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one hold icon T1 is additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B as a 10-frame animation (displayed so that it gradually gets larger from a very small size) (see FIG. 180(d)).

After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("789"). At this time, the left performance pattern 70a, the center performance pattern 70a, and the right performance pattern 70a temporarily stop at the same time (see Figure 180 (e)). In addition, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swinging display) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance action). In addition, the reserved icon T and the icon TH are in a state of rotating (performance action) (see Figure 180 (e)).

When the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed in a stopped state in a losing mode on the first special symbol display 60. Also, the performance control unit 130m performs processing to end the changing performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing state ("789") (see FIG. 180(f)), and the first lamp pattern stops in a losing state (e.g., off).

After this, the special 1 variation display will be performed in the normal game mode with the variation pattern selected according to the flow described above.

We have explained the special 1 change display in the normal game state, but the basic flow is the same for the special 2 change display in the normal game state and the special 2 change display in the special game state (time-saving game state, special bonus game state).

Specifically, the first reserved number, the first special symbol, the first special symbol display 60, the first special symbol reserved indicator 63, the sub-first variable indicator 81, the sub-first reserved indicator 83, the first reserved number display area 70E, the first reserved icon display area 70B, the first lamp symbol, and the first start port 45 should each be read as the second reserved number, the second special symbol, the second special symbol display 61, the second special symbol reserved indicator 64, the sub-second variable indicator 82, the sub-second reserved indicator 84, the second reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp symbol, and the second start port 47.

In an embodiment, the change time is shorter in a change pattern in which the three performance patterns 70a shown in FIG. 180 start scrolling simultaneously and the three performance patterns 70a temporarily stop simultaneously than in a change pattern in which the three performance patterns 70a shown in FIG. 179 start scrolling in sequence and the three performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in sequence.

As shown in FIG. 181, the average change time of the special 1 change display in the normal game state is different at least between the reserved number "1" and "4", and for example, the average change time becomes longer as the reserved number increases. The special 1 change display in the normal game state has the longest average change time when the reserved number is "1", and the shortest average change time when the reserved number is "4". Similarly, the average change time of the special 2 change display in the specific game state is different at least between the reserved number "1" and "4", and for example, the average change time becomes longer as the reserved number increases. The special 2 change display in the specific game state has the longest average change time when the reserved number is "1", and the shortest average change time when the reserved number is "4". Note that the average change time may be the same or different between the reserved number "2" and the reserved number "3", and the average change time may be the same or different for the reserved numbers "2" to "4".

In contrast, the average change time of the special 1 change display in a specific game state is the same or different at least for reserved numbers "1" and "4". For example, if they are different, the average change time is the longest when the reserved number is "1" and the shortest when the reserved number is "4".

Here, the difference between the average change display time when the reserved number is "4" and the average change display time when the reserved number is "1" when the special 1 change display is executed in the normal game state is smaller than the difference between the average change display time when the reserved number is "4" and the average change display time when the reserved number is "1". In other words, even if the average change time differs between the reserved numbers "4" and "1", the difference is smaller for the special 1 change display in the specific game state than for the special 1 change display in the normal game state.

In addition, when a special 2 variation display is executed in a specific game state, the difference between the average variation display time when the reserved number is "4" and the average variation display time when the reserved number is "1" is smaller than the difference between the average variation display time when the reserved number is "4" and the average variation display time when the reserved number is "1". In other words, even if the average variation time differs between the reserved numbers "4" and "1", the difference is smaller for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than for the special 1 variation display in the normal game state.

In the embodiment, the difference in average change time between the reserved number "4" and reserved number "1" in the special 2 variable display in the specific game state is smaller than the difference in average change time between the reserved number "4" and reserved number "1" in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state, and the difference in average change time between the reserved number "4" and reserved number "1" in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state is smaller than the difference in average change time between the reserved number "4" and reserved number "1" in the special 2 variable display in the specific game state (normal special 1 > specific special 2 > specific special 1).

In this way, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to allow the game ball to enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be led to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

In an embodiment, the change time is shorter in a change pattern in which the three performance patterns 70a shown in FIG. 180 start scrolling simultaneously and the three performance patterns 70a temporarily stop simultaneously than in a change pattern in which the three performance patterns 70a shown in FIG. 179 start scrolling in sequence and the three performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in sequence.

In the special 1 variable display in the normal game state, when the reserved number is "4", the variable pattern in FIG. 180 is more likely to be selected than the variable pattern in FIG. 179, and when the reserved number is "1" to "3", the variable pattern in FIG. 179 is more likely to be selected than the variable pattern in FIG. 180. In other words, in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state, there are multiple variable patterns that are determined according to the reserved number. In contrast, in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state, even if the reserved number is "4" to "1", the variable pattern in FIG. 179 is more likely to be selected than the variable pattern in FIG. 180, and the variable pattern in FIG. 180 is less likely to be selected (the selection rate may be 0). In other words, in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state, the variable pattern is almost determined regardless of the reserved number. In this way, the number of patterns of the variable display time determined by the predetermined reserved number when the special 1 variable display for miss judgment is executed in the specific game state is smaller than the number of patterns of the variable display time determined by the predetermined reserved number when the special 1 variable display for miss judgment is executed in the normal game state.

In this way, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to allow the game ball to enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be led to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

In the special 2 variable display of the specific game state, when the reserved number is "4", the variable pattern of FIG. 180 is more likely to be selected than the variable pattern of FIG. 179, and when the reserved number is "1" to "3", the variable pattern of FIG. 179 is more likely to be selected than the variable pattern of FIG. 180. In other words, in the special 2 variable display of the specific game state, there are multiple variable patterns determined according to the reserved number. In contrast, in the special 1 variable display of the specific game state, even if the reserved number is "4" to "1", the variable pattern of FIG. 179 is more likely to be selected than the variable pattern of FIG. 180, and the variable pattern of FIG. 180 is less likely to be selected (the selection rate may be 0). In other words, in the special 1 variable display of the specific game state, the variable pattern is almost determined regardless of the reserved number. In this way, the number of patterns of the variable display time determined by the predetermined reserved number when executing the special 2 variable display of the loss judgment in the specific game state is smaller than the number of patterns of the variable display time determined by the predetermined reserved number when executing the special 1 variable display of the loss judgment in the specific game state.

In this way, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to allow the game ball to enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be led to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

The number of patterns of variable display time determined by the reserved number from "4" to "1" when executing the special 1 variable display for loss judgment in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display for loss judgment in the specific game state is smaller than the number of patterns of variable display time determined by the reserved number from "4" to "1". In this way, when comparing the total number of variable display time patterns that can be determined by the reserved number from "4" to "1" rather than comparing by reserved number as described above, there are fewer special 1 variable displays for loss judgment in the specific game state than special 1 variable displays for loss judgment in the normal game state or special 2 variable displays for deviation judgment in the specific game state. In this way, the above-mentioned action and effect can be obtained.

In the special 1 variation display in the normal game state, when the reserved number is "4", the variation pattern in FIG. 180 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. 179, and when the reserved number is "1" to "3", the variation pattern in FIG. 179 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. 180. In other words, in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state, there are multiple variation patterns that are determined according to the reserved number. In contrast, in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, even if the reserved number is "4" to "1", the variation pattern in FIG. 179 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. 180, and the variation pattern in FIG. 180 is less likely to be selected (the selection rate may be 0). In other words, in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, the variation pattern is almost determined regardless of the reserved number. In other words, the ratio of the same variation pattern being executed for the reserved number "4" and the reserved number "1" is higher when the special 1 variation display for the miss judgment is executed in the specific game state than when the special 1 variation display for the miss judgment is executed in the normal game state.

In this way, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to allow the game ball to enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be led to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

In the special 2 variable display of the specific game state, when the reserved number is "4", the variable pattern of FIG. 180 is more likely to be selected than the variable pattern of FIG. 179, and when the reserved number is "1" to "3", the variable pattern of FIG. 179 is more likely to be selected than the variable pattern of FIG. 180. In other words, in the special 2 variable display of the specific game state, there are multiple variable patterns that are determined according to the reserved number. In contrast, in the special 1 variable display of the specific game state, even if the reserved number is "4" to "1", the variable pattern of FIG. 179 is more likely to be selected than the variable pattern of FIG. 180, and the variable pattern of FIG. 180 is less likely to be selected (the selection rate may be 0). In other words, in the special 1 variable display of the specific game state, the variable pattern is almost determined regardless of the reserved number. In other words, the rate at which the same variable pattern is executed for the reserved number "4" and the reserved number "1" is higher when the special 1 variable display of the miss judgment is executed in the specific game state than when the special 2 variable display of the miss judgment is executed in the specific game state.

In this way, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to allow the game ball to enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be led to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

Regardless of the number of reserved balls (even reserved ball number "4" and reserved ball number "1"), the special 1 change display in the specific game state has a higher execution rate of the same stop or start pattern of the change pattern than the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. Also, it can be said that the total number of change patterns with different stop patterns (start patterns) is smaller in the special 1 change display in the specific game state than in the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state.

In this way, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to allow the game ball to enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be led to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

As shown in Figures 179 and 180, the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after preparatory operations such as partial movement of the decorative part and full or partial expansion and contraction are performed. The presence or absence of such preparatory operations and the type of preparatory operation create anticipation of the execution of a jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 182, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state has a smaller execution rate of the preparatory operation than the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state (execution rate h3 < execution rate h1). In other words, the preparatory operation is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variation display when a left hit is performed in the specific gaming state than when a so-called left hit is performed in which the gaming ball is shot toward the left area of the gaming area 5a in the normal gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 182, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the preparatory operation is executed less frequently in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state (execution rate h3 < execution rate h4). In other words, the preparatory operation is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variation display when a left hit is performed in the specific game state than when a so-called right hit is performed in the specific game state, which shoots the game ball toward the right area of the game area 5a.

By having such a ratio of execution of the preparatory actions, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to allow the game ball to enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be guided to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 182, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the number of types of preparatory operations is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state (number of types of variable pattern H3 < number of types of variable pattern H1). In other words, the preparatory operations are more likely to be executed in the same pattern in the special 1 variable display when a left hit is performed in the specific game state than when a so-called left hit is performed in which the game ball is shot toward the left area of the game area 5a in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 182, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the number of types of preparatory operations is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state (number of types of variable pattern H3 < number of types of variable pattern H4). In other words, the preparatory operations are more likely to be executed in the same pattern in the special 1 variable display when a left hit is performed in the specific game state than when a so-called left hit is performed in which the game ball is shot toward the left area of the game area 5a in the normal game state.

By having such a number of types of preparatory actions, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be guided to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

As shown in Figures 179 and 180, when the display pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, it slightly swings (swings) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and a stopping operation is executed in which the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the display pattern 70a swing (displays).

As shown in FIG. 183, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution rate of the stop operation is smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal game state (execution rate i3 < execution rate i1). In other words, the stop operation is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variation display when a left hit is performed in the specific game state than when a so-called left hit is performed in which the game ball is shot toward the left area of the game area 5a in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 183, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution rate of the stop operation is smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state (execution rate i3 < execution rate i4). In other words, it is more difficult for the preparatory operation to be executed in the special 1 variation display when a left hit is performed in the specific game state than when a so-called right hit is performed in the specific game state, which shoots the game ball toward the right area of the game area 5a.

By using such a ratio of execution of the stopping operation, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to allow the game ball to enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be guided to aim for the ball to enter the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 182, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the number of types of stop operations is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state (number of types of variable pattern I3 < number of types of variable pattern I1). In other words, the same pattern of stop operations is more likely to be executed in the special 1 variable display when a left hit is performed in the specific game state than when a so-called left hit is performed in which the game ball is shot toward the left area of the game area 5a in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 182, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the number of types of stop operations is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state (number of types of variable pattern I3 < number of types of variable pattern I4). In other words, the same pattern of stop operations is more likely to be executed in the special 1 variable display when a left hit is performed in the specific game state than when a so-called left hit is performed in which the game ball is shot toward the left area of the game area 5a in the normal game state.

By having such a number of types of stopping actions, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be guided to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

In addition, instead of performing both the preparation operation and the stopping operation, it is also possible to perform only one of them.

In the embodiment, when the variable display is stopped by a miss judgment, there is a variable stop pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a are stopped in order (temporarily stopped) as shown in FIG. 179, and a variable stop pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a are stopped together as shown in FIG. 180. As shown in FIG. 184, the execution rate of the variable pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a are stopped together is smaller in the special 1 variable display that is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state, which is executed when the reserved number is "4", than in the special 1 variable display that is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the normal game state. In other words, the mode in which the three performance symbols 70a are stopped together is executed less easily in the special 1 variable display with the reserved number of "4" when a left hit is performed in the specific game state than when a so-called left hit is performed in which the game ball is shot toward the left area of the game area 5a in the normal game state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 184, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a stop in order is higher in the special 1 variation display that is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state and is determined to be a miss, than in the special 1 variation display that is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the normal game state and is determined to be a miss. In other words, the mode in which the three performance symbols 70a stop in order is more likely to be executed in the special 1 variation display with reserved number "4" when a left hit is performed in the specific game state than when a so-called left hit is performed in which the game ball is shot toward the left area of the game area 5a in the normal game state.

In this way, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to allow the game ball to enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be led to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

In the embodiment, when the variable display is stopped by a miss judgment, there is a variable stop pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a are stopped in order (temporarily stopped) as shown in FIG. 179, and a variable stop pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a are stopped together as shown in FIG. 180. As shown in FIG. 184, the execution rate of the variable pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a stop together is smaller in the special 1 variable display, which is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state and is determined to be a miss, than in the special 2 variable display, which is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state. In other words, the mode in which the three performance symbols 70a stop together in the special 1 variable display with the reserved number of "4" is executed more rarely when the player hits left in the specific game state than when the player hits right in the specific game state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 184, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a stop in sequence is higher in the special 1 variation display, which is a miss judgment executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state, than in the special 2 variation display, which is a miss judgment executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state. In other words, the mode in which the three performance symbols 70a stop in sequence is more likely to be executed in the special 1 variation display with the reserved number of "4" when the left hit is made in the specific game state than when the right hit is made in the specific game state.

As shown in FIG. 184, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a stop in sequence is the same for the special 1 variation display that is executed when the reserved number is "1" in the normal game state and the special 2 variation display that is executed when the reserved number is "1" in the specific game state and the special 1 variation display that is executed when the reserved number is "1" in the specific game state and the special 1 variation display that is executed when the reserved number is "1" in the specific game state and the special 2 variation display that is executed when the reserved number is "1" in the normal game state and the special 1 variation display that is executed when the reserved number is "1" in the specific ...

In the embodiment, when the variable display is started by a miss judgment, there is a variable start pattern in which the three performance patterns 70a are scrolled in order as shown in FIG. 179, and a variable start pattern in which the three performance patterns 70a are scrolled simultaneously as shown in FIG. 180. As shown in FIG. 185, the execution rate of the variable pattern in which the three performance patterns 70a start scrolling together is smaller in the special 1 variable display which is a miss judgment executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display which is a miss judgment executed when the reserved number is "4" in the normal game state. In other words, the mode in which the three performance patterns 70a start scrolling together in the special 1 variable display with the reserved number of "4" is executed more rarely when a left hit is performed in the specific game state than when a so-called left hit is performed in which the game ball is shot toward the left area of the game area 5a in the normal game state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 185, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three performance patterns 70a start scrolling in sequence is higher in the special 1 variation display in which a miss is determined to be executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state, compared to the special 1 variation display in which a miss is determined to be executed when the reserved number is "4" in the normal game state. In other words, the mode in which the three performance patterns 70a start scrolling in sequence is more likely to be executed in the special 1 variation display with reserved number "4" when a left hit is performed in the specific game state than when a so-called left hit is performed in which the game ball is shot toward the left area of the game area 5a in the normal game state.

In this way, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to allow the game ball to enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be led to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

In the embodiment, when the variable display is stopped due to a miss judgment, there is a variable start pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a start scrolling in order as shown in FIG. 179, and a variable start pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a start scrolling together as shown in FIG. 180. As shown in FIG. 185, the execution rate of the variable pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a start scrolling together is smaller in the special 1 variable display, which is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state and is determined to be a miss, than in the special 2 variable display, which is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state. In other words, the execution rate of the variable pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a start scrolling together in the special 1 variable display with the reserved number of "4" is smaller when the player hits left in the specific game state than when the player hits right in the specific game state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 185, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three performance patterns 70a start scrolling in sequence is higher in the special 1 variation display, which is a miss judgment executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state, than in the special 2 variation display, which is a miss judgment executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state. In other words, the mode in which the three performance patterns 70a start scrolling in sequence is more likely to be executed in the special 1 variation display with the reserved number of "4" when the left hit is made in the specific game state than when the right hit is made in the specific game state.

As shown in FIG. 185, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a start scrolling in sequence is the same for the special 1 variation display that is executed when the reserved number is "1" in the normal game state and the special 2 variation display that is executed when the reserved number is "1" in the specific game state and is a loss judgment, and the special 1 variation display that is executed when the reserved number is "1" in the specific game state and is a loss judgment. Also, as shown in FIG. 185, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a start scrolling in sequence is the same for the special 1 variation display that is executed when the reserved number is "1" in the normal game state and the special 2 variation display that is executed when the reserved number is "1" in the specific game state and is a loss judgment, and the special 1 variation display that is executed when the reserved number is "1" in the specific game state and is a loss judgment.

In this way, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to allow the game ball to enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be led to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

In the special 1 variable display in the specific game state, the displayed performance pattern 70a may not scroll, or may have a special display mode such as some of the decorative parts such as characters disappearing from the performance pattern 70a, or the performance pattern 70a may not be displayed at all, and may be, for example, a special display mode in which the decorative parts such as characters of the performance pattern 70a scroll but do not operate as specified, or other modes. In other words, it can be said that the special 1 variable display in the specific game state has a higher proportion of the performance pattern 70a being displayed in a special mode different from the mode displayed in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state than the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state.

The special patterns such as the pseudo consecutive patterns described above may be displayed over the performance pattern 70a or in place of the performance pattern 70a. In this case, the display of the special pattern makes all or part of the scrolling of the normal performance pattern 70a and the operation of the decorative parts such as the characters of the performance pattern (preparation operation and stopping operation) invisible. Furthermore, the proportion or range of the normal pattern that is hidden by the display of the special pattern is smaller in the special 1 change display in the specific game state than in the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be guided to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

(Example of Production 4)
A specific example 4 of the variable display presentation will be explained with reference to Figure 185.

As shown in FIG. 185(a), the "8" performance pattern 70a is displayed stationary (temporarily stopped) in the variable display areas to the left and right of the performance pattern 70a that was being displayed in a variable manner, while a reach performance is being executed in which the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner in the central variable display area.

After that, as shown in FIG. 186(b), a display is performed in which the temporarily stopped left and right performance patterns 70a change to a different display mode from the previous display mode (FIG. 186(b)), suggesting high expectations for a big win. Then, a pattern size change display is performed in which the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the screen, and a predetermined display such as the insertion of a video is performed in the first image display device 70. The reduced-size display performance pattern 70a changes from a normal display mode consisting of a rectangular base image, a character image CG consisting of a predetermined character, a bar-shaped image SG that is part of the character, and a decorative section consisting of a pattern effect image ZE that decorates the background of the character, and an identification section consisting of a hexagonal base image and a number section (identification character), to a simple reduced display mode consisting of only the identification section.

As shown in Fig. 185(d) and (f), the pseudo performance symbols (pseudo symbols) GZ are displayed in three rows, one above the other, to increase the expectation of a big win. After that, when the execution period of the reach performance that results in a big win ends (the performance control board 130 receives a special symbol determination command indicating a big win), as shown in Fig. 185(g), the big win performance symbol 70a of "888" indicating the type of big win game (here, the first big win game) and the special symbol TZ are temporarily stopped (shaking and changing) and then stopped, and the changing performance ends.

In an embodiment, the variable display can be performed with a normal mode performance pattern 70a and a specific mode performance pattern 70a that is displayed at a predetermined timing of the variable display (for example, when entering a reach performance, during a reach performance, when the fluctuation starts, during the fluctuation, or when the fluctuation stops, etc.). The specific mode performance pattern 70a may be not only a changed performance pattern 70a (changing pattern) or pseudo pattern GZ as shown in FIG. 185(b) but also a mode entry pattern that suggests a transition to a specified mode or an development pattern that stirs up expectations for a big win game.

As shown in FIG. 186, the rate at which the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state displays the special pattern 70a in a specific manner is smaller than the rate at which the special 1 variation display executed in the normal game state (m32<m12). In other words, it is less likely that the special 1 variation display will display the special pattern 70a in a specific manner when a left hit is made in the specific game state than when a left hit is made in the normal game state.

In this way, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to allow the game ball to enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be led to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 186, the rate at which the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state displays the performance pattern 70a in a specific mode is smaller than the rate at which the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state displays the performance pattern 70a in a normal mode is displayed more frequently in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than the rate at which the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state displays the performance pattern 70a in a normal mode. In other words, it is more difficult to display the performance pattern 70a in a specific mode when a left hit is performed in the specific game state than when a right hit is performed in the specific game state.

In this way, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to allow the game ball to enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be led to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 185, it is possible to execute a display size change effect that changes the display size of the performance pattern 70a in the variable display. And, as shown in FIG. 187, the execution rate of the display size change effect that changes the display size of the performance pattern 70a is smaller in the special 1 variable display that is executed in the specific game state and is judged as a miss than in the special 1 variable display that is judged as a miss in the normal game state (n3<n1). In other words, it is more difficult to execute the display size change effect of the performance pattern 70a in the special 1 variable display when a left hit is made in the specific game state than when a left hit is made in the normal game state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 187, the execution rate of the display size change effect that changes the display size of the performance pattern 70a is smaller in the special 1 change display that is determined to be a miss in a specific game state than in the special 2 change display that is determined to be a miss in a specific game state (n3<n4). In other words, the display size change effect of the performance pattern 70a is less likely to be executed when a left hit is made in a specific game state than when a right hit is made in a specific game state.

In this way, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to allow the game ball to enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be led to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

The display size change effect is not limited to being performed in conjunction with a reach effect, but can be performed at a specified timing such as when the change starts or during the change. The display size change effect may be performed in association with a winning hint effect such as the operation of a movable part, or with a specified condition such as the number of reserved balls or the operation of an operation button.

The execution rate of the pattern change presentation may be smaller for the special 1 change display that is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state and is a miss judgment than the special 1 change display that is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the normal game state or the special 2 change display that is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state and is a miss judgment. The execution rate of the pattern change presentation may be smaller for the special 1 change display that is executed when the reserved number is "1" in the specific game state and is a miss judgment than the special 1 change display that is executed when the reserved number is "1" in the normal game state or the special 2 change display that is executed when the reserved number is "1" in the specific game state and is a miss judgment.

The execution rate of the pattern change effect may be the same for the special 1 change display that is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state and is determined to be a miss, and the special 1 change display that is executed when the reserved number is "1" in the specific game state and is determined to be a miss. Also, the execution rate of the pattern change effect may be smaller or larger for the special 1 change display that is executed when the reserved number is "1" in the specific game state and is determined to be a miss, than the special 1 change display that is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state.

The effect (pattern change effect) in which the pattern changes to give the expectation of a jackpot game being played is not limited to a display size change effect, and may be other forms such as a change in the position where the performance pattern 70a is displayed or a change in the display order of the performance pattern 70a. In addition, when the pattern change effect has multiple patterns with different display sizes, display positions, display orders, etc., the total number of pattern change effect patterns may be smaller for the special 1 change display in the specific game state than for the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state.

In this way, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to allow the game ball to enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be led to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 186, the variable display shows reach effects (normal reach, SP reach, SPSP reach, reach development teasing effect, etc.). And, as shown in FIG. 188, the execution rate of reach effects is smaller for special 1 variable displays that are judged to be a miss in a specific game state than for special 1 variable displays that are judged to be a miss in a normal game state (o3<o1). In other words, it is less likely that a reach effect will be executed in the special 1 figure variable display when a left hit is made in a specific game state than when a left hit is made in a normal game state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 188, the execution rate of reach effects is smaller for special 1 variation displays that are determined to be misses in a specific game state than for special 2 variation displays that are determined to be misses in a specific game state (o3<o4). In other words, reach effects are less likely to be executed when a left hit is made in a specific game state than when a right hit is made in a specific game state.

In this way, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to allow the game ball to enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be led to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

Prior to the reach performance, a first performance such as a mode entry performance or a development performance is performed, and then a second performance such as a roulette performance or a development performance is performed. In this case, the execution rate of the advance notification performance executed before the reach performance may be smaller for the special 1 change display in the specific game state than for the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. In other words, the execution rate of the reach performance performed from the advance notification performance is smaller for the special 1 change display in the specific game state than for the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. Also, the execution number of the advance notification performance executed before the reach performance may be smaller for the special 1 change display in the specific game state than for the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. In other words, the rate at which a reach effect is executed after a pre-notification effect is smaller for the special 1 change display in the specific game state than for the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state.

The expectation of transitioning to a jackpot game after a reach effect is executed is smaller for a special 1 change display in normal game state than for a special 2 change display in specific game state, and the expectation of transitioning to a jackpot game after a reach effect is executed is smaller for a special 1 change display in specific game state than for a special 1 change display in normal game state (special 2 change display in specific game state > special 1 change display in normal game state > special 1 change display in specific game state).

When a reach effect is selected from multiple patterns and executed, the total number of reach effect types may be fewer for the special 1 change display in the specific game state than for the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state.

Related effects such as the operation of movable members and vibration of operation buttons, which are performed in association with the reach effect at appropriate timing such as during or before the reach effect, can be selected from multiple patterns and executed. In this case, the execution rate of related effects performed in association with the reach effect is smaller for the special 1 change display in the specific game state than for the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. Also, the number of types of related effects performed in association with the reach effect is smaller for the special 1 change display in the specific game state than for the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state.

The rate at which a normal reach develops into an SP reach or SPSP reach is lower for a special 1 change display in a specific game state than for a special 1 change display in a normal game state or a special 2 change display in a specific game state. The execution period of the reach effect is shorter for a special 1 change display in a specific game state than for a special 1 change display in a normal game state or a special 2 change display in a specific game state. The rate at which a reach effect spanning multiple changes is executed is lower for a special 1 change display in a specific game state than for a special 1 change display in a normal game state or a special 2 change display in a specific game state.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be guided to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

(Specific example of production 5)
A specific example of the variable display will be described with reference to Fig. 189 and Fig. 190. In the specific example of the variable display, the specific game state is in a specific game state, and the first specific notification SR1 is being performed in the upper right area of the first image display device 70 to guide the player to hit right.

As shown in FIG. 189, at the timing P0, a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 47, and the second reserved number U2 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". At this time, the second reserved number U2 indicated by the LED in the second special symbol reserved display 64 changes from "3" to "4". Note that the first reserved number stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m is "0", and the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "0".

At this time, the second hold number U2 indicated by the second hold number displayed in the second hold number display area 70F changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the second hold number U2 indicated by the LED of the sub-second hold indicator 84 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one hold icon T2 is additionally displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so that it gradually becomes larger from a very small size) (see FIG. 190(a)). Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is "0". Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 is "0", and no hold icon T1 is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B.

Next, at the timing of P1, the second reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the variable display of the second special symbol begins. Also, the second reserved number U2 indicated by the LED on the second special symbol reserved display 64 changes from "4" to "3". Furthermore, the second reserved number U2 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the second reserved number U2 indicated by the second reserved number displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the second reserved number U2 indicated by the LED of the sub-second reserved indicator 84 changes from "4" to "3". Furthermore, the reserved icons T2 displayed in the second reserved icon display area 70D are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-second variable indicator 81 starts, but the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after a preparatory operation such as a part of the decorative part moving or the whole or part expanding and contracting as in this embodiment (see FIG. 190(b)).

At the timing of P2, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1" as a result of the game ball entering the first starting hole 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 changes from "0" to "1."

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold display 83 changes from "0" to "1". However, no additional hold icon T1 is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 190(c)).

In addition to the first specific notification SR1, based on a winning entry into the first winning slot 45, a display such as "Hit to the right" is displayed in the center of the first image display device 70, and a second specific notification SR2 is executed in which the audio output device 9 outputs a sound such as "Please hit to the right" (see FIG. 190(c)).

After that, at timing P3, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("789"). At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance action). Also, the reserved icon T and the icon TH are rotating (performance action) (see FIG. 190(d)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the second special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the second special symbol display 61. Also, the performance control unit 130m performs processing to end the changing performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing state ("789") (see FIG. 190(e)), and the second lamp pattern stops in a losing state (e.g., off).

Next, at the timing of P5, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the variable display of the second special symbol begins. Also, the second reserved number U2 indicated by the LED on the second special symbol reserved display 64 changes from "3" to "2". Furthermore, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "2", and processing is performed to start the variable performance. Note that although the main control unit 110m also has a first reserved memory based on winning at the first winning port 45, the second reserved memory based on winning at the second starting port 47 takes priority and the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the second reserved number U2 indicated by the second reserved number displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F changes from "3" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the second reserved number U2 indicated by the LED of the sub-second reserved indicator 84 changes from "3" to "2". Furthermore, the reserved icons T2 displayed in the second reserved icon display area 70D are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-second variable indicator 81 starts, but the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after a preparatory operation such as a part of the decorative part moving or the whole or part expanding and contracting as in this embodiment (see FIG. 190(f)).

At the timing of P6, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2" as a result of the game ball entering the first starting hole 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 increases from "1" to "2."

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold display 83 changes from "1" to "2". However, no additional hold icon T1 is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 190 (g)).

In addition to the first specific notification SR1, based on a winning entry into the first winning slot 45, a display such as "Hit to the right" is displayed in the center of the first image display device 70, and a second specific notification SR2 is executed in which the audio output device 9 outputs a sound such as "Please hit to the right" (see FIG. 190(g)).

After that, at timing P7, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("913"). At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance action). Also, the reserved icon T and the icon TH are rotating (performance action) (see Figure 190 (h)).

Then, at the timing of P8, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the second special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the second special symbol display 61. Also, the performance control unit 130m performs processing to end the changing performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing state ("913") (see FIG. 190(j)), and the second lamp pattern stops in a losing state (e.g., off).

In this way, it is possible to execute a first specific notification that indicates a specific game state, and a second specific notification that is executed in addition to the first specific notification based on the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole 45 while the first specific notification is being executed. In this way, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to allow the game ball to enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be guided to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the interest of the game can be increased.

The second specific notification SR2 differs from the right-hit notification that is issued at the start of a jackpot game, and is issued based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 during a specific game state.

When only the first specific notification SR1 is executed, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect (win suggestion effect) such as an alarm sound effect, a light-emitting effect such as a start port, or a reserved icon change effect, but when the second specific notification SR1 is executed, it is possible to restrict the execution of a predetermined effect (win suggestion effect) such as an alarm sound effect, a light-emitting effect such as a start port, or a reserved icon effect. It can also be said that when a prize is won at the first start port 45 in a specific game state, the second specific notification SR can be executed instead of executing a predetermined effect.

In addition, the rate at which the specified effect (win hint effect) is executed is smaller when both the first specific notification SR1 and the second specific notification SR2 are executed than when only the first specific notification SR1 is executed.

In this way, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to allow the game ball to enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be led to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

(Example of Production 6)
As a notification effect (pre-notification effect) that makes one expect a big win game, there is a first notification that is executed at a predetermined timing (when the fluctuation starts) and a second notification that is executed at a timing different from the predetermined timing (when the starting hole wins). For example, in the embodiment, when the fluctuation of the performance pattern 70a (special pattern) starts, it is possible to execute a notification effect of the first notification with a first light-emitting mode (see FIG. 191(a)) in which the winning hole lamp NR (the starting hole 45, 47) flashes, for example, in blue, and a second light-emitting mode (see FIG. 191(b)) in which the winning hole lamp NR (the starting hole 45, 47) flashes, for example, in red, which is different from the first light-emitting mode. Furthermore, when a game ball enters the starting hole 45, 47, it is possible to execute a second notification notification performance using a third light emission mode (see Figures 191 (d) and (e)) which is different from the first and second light emission modes, for example, by combining the winning hole lamp NR with the board lighting device 76 or the frame lighting device 10 such as the decorative frame 41 to emit light. Note that even for the second notification, the first light emission mode and/or the second light emission mode may be executed. Furthermore, as a notification performance, there is a fourth light emission mode (see Figures 192 (c) and (f)) which is different from the first to third light emission modes, for example, does not involve the illumination of the winning hole lamp NR.

As shown in FIG. 192, the execution rate of the first light emission mode, the second light emission mode, and the third light emission mode in the notification presentation is smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal game state (p31<p11). Also, the execution rate of the notification presentation of the fourth light emission mode is larger in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the normal game state (p32>p12). In other words, the first light emission mode, the second light emission mode, and the third light emission mode in the notification presentation are less likely to be executed when the player hits left in the specific game state than when the player hits left in the normal game state. Also, the fourth light emission mode in the notification presentation is more likely to be executed when the player hits left in the specific game state than when the player hits left in the normal game state.

In this way, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to allow the game ball to enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be led to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

As the notification performance, the first notification can be executed in the first light-emitting mode, the second light-emitting mode, and the third light-emitting mode, and the second notification can be executed in the first light-emitting mode and the second light-emitting mode, but the third light-emitting mode cannot be executed in the second notification. Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 192, the execution rate of the first light-emitting mode, the second light-emitting mode, and the third light-emitting mode in the notification performance is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state (p31<p11). Also, the execution rate of the notification performance of the fourth light-emitting mode is larger in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the normal game state (p32>p12). In other words, the first light-emitting mode, the second light-emitting mode, and the third light-emitting mode in the notification performance are more difficult to execute when left-handed in the specific game state than when left-handed in the normal game state. Also, the fourth light-emitting mode in the notification performance is more easily executed when left-handed in the specific game state than when left-handed in the normal game state.

In this way, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be guided to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 191, a vibration effect is performed by the operation button 17 in conjunction with the above-mentioned notification effect. The vibration effect is to make the operation button 17 vibrate, which makes the player expect a big win, and may be performed in combination with a button light-up effect that makes the operation button 17 light up. In the notification effect, the first notification notification effect can be performed in a first light-up state (see FIG. 191(a)) in which the winning hole lamp NR (start hole 45, 47) flashes, for example, in blue, and a second light-up state (see FIG. 191(b)) in which the winning hole lamp NR (start hole 45, 47) flashes, for example, in red, which is different from the first light-up state. In addition, a second notification can be performed in a third light-up state (see FIG. 191(d) and (e)) in which the winning hole lamp NR is combined with other light-emitting means such as the board lighting device 76 or the frame lighting device 10 such as the decorative frame 41 to light up, which is different from the first light-up state and the second light-up state.

As shown in FIG. 193, in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state, the second notification has a higher execution rate of the vibration effect by the operation button 17 than the first notification (q12>q11). In other words, in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state, the vibration effect is more likely to be executed in combination with the second notification than in combination with the first notification. Also, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state has a lower execution rate of the vibration effect by the operation button 17 than the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state (r3<r1). In other words, the vibration effect is less likely to be executed when hitting left in the specific game state than when hitting left in the normal game state.

The vibration effect may be selected from a plurality of vibration patterns, such as a pattern executed over a certain period of time, or a pattern executed intermittently at a predetermined interval. The vibration effect may also be selected from a plurality of effect patterns, such as a weak effect pattern in which the device vibrates without emitting light, or a strong effect pattern in which the device vibrates while emitting light. The special 1 variation display in the specific game state may have fewer total vibration effect patterns than the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. The special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state may be capable of executing vibration effects of weak and strong effect patterns, but the special 1 variation display in the specific game state may be capable of restricting the execution of vibration effects of weak effect patterns, while allowing the execution of vibration effects of strong effect patterns.

In this way, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to allow the game ball to enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be led to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

The lighting effect is not limited to the starter lamp NR, but other parts such as the game board or frame may also light up.

As shown in FIG. 191, the light-emitting effect by the winning port lamp NR, the operation effect of the first movable member 73, and the vibration effect of the operation button 17 can be executed in accordance with the timing when the performance pattern 70a starts to change. Here, the light-emitting effect can be executed by selecting from multiple patterns, such as a mode in which only the winning port lamp NR emits light, a mode in which the winning port lamp NR is combined with the first movable member 73 other than the winning port lamp NR, the operation button 17, a specific position such as the game board (board lighting device) or the frame, and the like to emit light. In addition, the light-emitting effect can be executed by selecting from multiple patterns of light-emitting colors such as blue, red, and rainbow colors. In addition, the operation effect of the first movable member 73 can be selected from multiple patterns such as weak operation and strong operation. Furthermore, the vibration effect of the operation button 17 can be executed by selecting from multiple patterns with different periods, intensities, and intervals. As shown in FIG. 191, in this embodiment, in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state, the light-emitting performance of the winning port lamp NR and the operation performance of the movable role (movable member 73 and operation button 17) can be executed at the timing of the start of the fluctuation. Similarly, in the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, the light-emitting performance of the winning port lamp NR and the operation performance of the movable role (movable member 73 and operation button 17) may be executed at the timing of the start of the fluctuation. In contrast, in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state, the light-emitting performance of the winning port lamp NR and the operation performance of the movable role (movable member 73 and operation button 17) are not executed at the timing of the start of the fluctuation. In the special 1 variable display in the specific game state, the light-emitting performance of the winning port lamp NR and the operation performance of the movable role (movable member 73 and operation button 17) may not be executed at the same time, but may be executed at different times.

In this way, the total number of types of winning hint effects executed at the same time is smaller for the special 1 change display in the specific game state than for the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. Note that the timing for executing the effects may be when a prize is won, during a change, or when the change has stopped.

In this way, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to allow the game ball to enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be led to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

(Modifications of specific examples 1 to 6 of the performance)
In the special 1 variation display executed in the normal game state, the performance pattern 70a is displayed, but in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state, the performance pattern 70a may not be displayed or may not be scrolled even if it is displayed. In addition, in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state, the performance pattern 70a is displayed, but in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state, the performance pattern 70a may not be displayed or may not be scrolled even if it is displayed. By doing so, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is possible to make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. Then, the player can be guided to aim for the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Even if the reserved icon is not displayed in the special 1 variable display executed in a specific game state, related displays such as a pedestal that decorates the reserved icon may be displayed.

The performance pattern 70a used in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal game state and the performance pattern 70a used in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state may be shared or may be separate. Also, the performance pattern 70a used in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state and the performance pattern 70a used in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state may be shared or may be separate.

The special pattern TZ used in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state and the special pattern TZ used in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state may be separate and not shared. Also, the special pattern TZ used in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state and the special pattern TZ used in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state may be separate and not shared. The display position of the special pattern TZ may be the same in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state and the special 1 variable display in the specific game state, or may be different. Also, the display position and/or display mode of the special pattern TZ may be the same in the special 2 variable display in the specific game state and the special 1 variable display in the specific game state, or may be different.

The reserved numbers used in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state and the reserved numbers used in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state may be shared without being separate. Also, the reserved numbers used in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state and the reserved numbers used in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state may be shared without being separate.

It is possible to combine and execute advance notice performances with different execution times. At the start of the change, the degree of expectation for a big win game can be suggested by the action at the start of the change of the performance pattern itself or the character of the performance pattern, etc., or the order in which the performance patterns start to change. Also, at the end (stop) of the change, the degree of expectation for a big win game can be suggested by the action at the start of the change of the performance pattern itself or the character of the performance pattern, etc., or the order in which the performance patterns start to change. Furthermore, in the first half of the execution period of the advance notice performance in one or more change displays, conversation notices, cut-in notices, development destination roulette performances, long press performances or continuous hit performances of the operation button 17, changes in reserved icons or changes in the icon, display performances of the light guide plate, operation performances of the movable members 73 and 74 (suggestion, development, decision performances), vibration performances of the operation buttons (suggestion, development, decision performances), timer performances, lamp light emission performances of the start ports 45 and 47, etc., can be executed alone or in combination of multiple. Furthermore, in the latter half of the execution period of the advance notice performance with one or more variable displays, it is possible to execute development performances and deciding performances on display means such as LCD, display performances on light guide plates (such as light emission according to the result of deciding performances), vibration performances of the operation buttons 17 (hint, development, deciding performances), operation performances of the frame role devices and board role devices (movable members 73, 74), performances suggesting the type of big win (such as XX bonus), timer performances, lamp lighting performances of the start ports 45, 47 in accordance with changes in reserve, etc., either alone or in combination with multiple other effects.

In this case, the execution rate of the pre-notice performance executed in the first half of the execution time is smaller for the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than for the special 1 variation display executed in the normal game state. Also, the execution rate of the pre-notice performance executed in the first half of the execution time is smaller for the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than for the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state. The execution rate of the pre-notice performance executed in the second half of the execution time is smaller for the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than for the special 1 variation display executed in the normal game state. Also, the execution rate of the pre-notice performance executed in the second half of the execution time is smaller for the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than for the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state.

When there is a first performance performed in the first half of the execution period and a second performance performed in the second half of the execution period as advance notice performances, the first and second performances can be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state, but the first performance can be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state while the execution of the second performance can be restricted. Also, the first and second performances can be executed in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state, but the first performance can be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state while the execution of the second performance can be restricted.

In this way, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be guided to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

The various effects that give the expectation of a jackpot game being executed in the special 1 variable display during the specific game states described above (time-saving game state or probability-changing game state) may have an execution rate of "0".

The various effects (sometimes collectively referred to as winning suggestion effects) that give the expectation of the execution of the jackpot game described above may be set to only one effect (display) pattern, or may be selected and executed from multiple effect (display) patterns. The winning suggestion effects are not limited to having different execution rates depending on the relationship between the special 1 change display in the normal game state, the special 1 change display in the specific game state, and the special 2 change display in the specific game state. For example, the winning suggestion effects may have the same or different execution rates for multiple patterns that can be selected for the special 1 change display in the normal game state (special 1 change display in the specific game state, special 2 change display in the specific game state).

For example, when a winning suggestion effect is selected from a plurality of patterns in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, the execution rate of the specific pattern different from the predetermined pattern may be smaller than that of the predetermined pattern. On the other hand, when a winning suggestion effect is selected from a plurality of patterns in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, the first pattern that is the same as or corresponds to the predetermined pattern of the special 1 variation display in the specific game state and the second pattern that is the same as or corresponds to the specific pattern of the special 1 variation display in the specific game state may have the same execution rate, or may have a different execution rate from the special 1 variation display in the specific game state. Even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the difference in the execution rate of the patterns can make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. And, the player can be led to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state by aiming at the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the gaming state, and the interest of the game can be increased.

For example, when the expectation display by the color effect is selected from "blue", "red", and "rainbow", the "red" color effect selectable in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state may have a smaller execution rate than the "red" color effect selectable in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. In this case, the execution rate of the "blue" or "rainbow" color effect may be the same or different. It is not limited to the expectation display, but can also be applied to various effects that make players expect the execution of the jackpot game described above. In other words, when the winning hint effect is selected from multiple patterns, the execution rate of the specific pattern that is the same as or corresponds to the predetermined pattern selectable in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state may be smaller than the predetermined pattern selectable in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is possible to make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. This can lead the player to aim for a win at the second winning port 47 in a specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning port 45, 47 according to the game state, and the interest of the game can be increased.

Here, the winning hint effect or the pattern selected in the winning hint effect may have a different execution rate, linked to a predetermined condition such as timing (e.g., when the fluctuation starts, when the fluctuation stops, how many times in a row), a game state, or a combination with other patterns (e.g., fluctuation pattern, fluctuation time, etc.). For example, when a fluctuation pattern in which three performance patterns 70a stop in sequence is selected, the execution rate of the "red" color effect executed at the start of fluctuation in the special 1 fluctuation display of the specific game state may be smaller than the "red" color effect executed at the start of fluctuation in the special 1 fluctuation display of the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display of the specific game state. Similarly, when a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the performance pattern 70a is short is selected, the execution rate of the "red" color light-emitting effect executed at the start of fluctuation in the special 1 fluctuation display of the specific game state may be smaller than the "red" color light-emitting effect by the winning port lamp NR executed at the start of fluctuation in the special 1 fluctuation display of the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display of the specific game state. In addition, this is not limited to the expectation display and the starting port light emission display, but can also be applied to various displays that anticipate the execution of the jackpot game described above. In other words, when the winning suggestion display is executed under a predetermined condition, the winning suggestion display (predetermined pattern of winning suggestion display) performed in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state may have a smaller execution rate than the winning suggestion display (predetermined pattern of winning suggestion display) performed in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is possible to make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning port 45. Then, the player can be guided to aim for the second winning port 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning port 45, 47 according to the game state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The execution period of the winning suggestion effect (predetermined pattern of winning suggestion effect) performed in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state may be shorter than the execution period of the winning suggestion effect (predetermined pattern of winning suggestion effect) performed in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state.

When a joint performance in which multiple types of winning suggestion performances are performed simultaneously is executable, the execution rate of the joint performance may be smaller in the special 1 change display in the specific game state than in the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. When there is a joint performance that is a combination of multiple types of winning suggestion performances performed simultaneously, the execution rate of a specified winning suggestion performance among the joint performances may be smaller in the special 1 change display in the specific game state than in the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. When there is a joint performance that is a combination of multiple types of winning suggestion performances performed simultaneously, the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state may be able to execute a specified winning suggestion performance and a specific winning suggestion performance, but the special 1 change display in the specific game state may be able to restrict the execution of a specified winning suggestion performance among the joint performances while allowing the specific winning suggestion performance to be executed.

The confirmation effects (including high probability of big win effects) include a first effect in which movable members 73, 74 are activated and operation button 17 vibrates at a specified timing, and a specified display is performed, such as a rainbow display or rainbow light emission, and a second effect that is performed at a different timing from the first effect (for example, when the fluctuation starts, during the fluctuation, or when the fluctuation stops). The second effect can be performed alone or in combination, and has multiple patterns, such as a confirmation notification sound output when the fluctuation starts, a hold change in a rainbow mode, or a high probability confirmation effect that gives the expectation of a high probability hit due to a hit such as a battle victory.

The execution ratio of the first effect and/or the first effect of the final effect is different between the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state and the special 1 change display in the specific game state. In this case, the execution ratio of the first effect of the final effect may be smaller in the special 1 change display in the specific game state than in the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. Also, the execution ratio of the second effect of the final effect may be smaller in the special 1 change display in the specific game state than in the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. Furthermore, the execution ratio of one of the first effect and the second effect of the final effect may be smaller in the special 1 change display in the specific game state than in the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. In this case, the execution ratio of the other of the first effect and the second effect of the final effect may be the same or different.

In the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state, the first and second effects of the final effect can be executed, but in the special 1 change display in the specific game state, it is preferable to restrict the execution of at least a predetermined pattern of the second effect. For example, in the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state, the first effect involving the operation of the movable members 73, 74 and the operation button 17 is executed as the final effect, while the pattern of the second effect involving the operation of the movable members 73, 74 and the operation button 17 is not executed.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to allow the game ball to enter the first winning hole 45. The player can then be led to aim for a win in the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate winning hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

We have explained the winning hint effect in the variable display of a losing judgment, but even in the variable display of a winning judgment, the relationship between the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state and the special 1 variable display in the specific game state may be the same as when a losing judgment is made.

As explained above, if a player feels something is wrong with the execution level or type of the expected effects (win hint effects) in the special 1 variable display of a specific game state, he or she may suspect an error in the gaming machine 1 itself. In this case, it is expected that the hall manager will check the control parts that govern the game, such as the main control board. Therefore, in addition to the configuration of the effects in the special 1 variable display of a specific game state described above, the configuration of the board case described below makes it easier for the hall manager to check, reducing stress for the player and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

◇To solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (a winning entry into the winning slots 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (1) has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first starting condition established by the winning of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning slot 45), or Based on a second start condition established by the entry of a game ball into a second winning means (second winning port 47), a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and an expectation display (e.g., a color effect) that creates anticipation of the execution of the special game can be executed based on the judgment, and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the expectation display (e.g., a color effect) than the variable display based on the first start condition in the normal game state.

◆To solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (a win at the winning slots 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (1), which has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and is established based on a first start condition that is established by the winning of a gaming ball at the first winning means (first winning slot 45) or by the winning of a gaming ball at the second winning means (second winning slot 47). Based on the second start condition, a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and a special performance (e.g., a zone performance) that creates anticipation of the execution of the special game over a predetermined period based on the judgment can be executed at any timing of a predetermined variable display period based on one of the judgments or a predetermined variable display period based on multiple of the judgments, and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the special performance (e.g., a zone performance) than the variable display based on the first start condition in the normal game state.

◆To solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (a winning entry into the winning port 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment becomes a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (1), which has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first start condition established by the winning of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning port 45) or a second winning means (second winning port 46), Based on a second start condition established by the entry of a game ball into a winning slot 47), a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and a notification sound effect (such as a notification sound when a reserved icon changes) that creates anticipation of the execution of the special game can be executed based on the judgment, and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the notification sound effect (such as a notification sound when a reserved icon changes) than the variable display based on the first start condition in the normal game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (a winning entry into the winning slots 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment becomes a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (1), which has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and a second starting condition is established based on the establishment of a first starting condition by the winning of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning slot 45) or by the winning of a gaming ball into the second winning means (second winning slot 47). Based on the start condition, the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and can execute linked performances (e.g., color effects, notification sound performances, light emission performances, reserved icon change performances, movable member operation performances, etc.) that are executed consecutively or in association with each other in the multiple variable displays, and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the linked performances (e.g., color effects, notification sound performances, light emission performances, reserved icon change performances, movable member operation performances, etc.) than the variable display based on the first start condition in the normal game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (a winning entry into the winning slots 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (1), which has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first starting condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning slot 45) or a winning entry of a gaming ball into the second winning means (second winning slot 47), a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. Based on a second start condition established by winning, a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and a reserved icon change performance can be executed in which the display mode of the reserved icon (T1, T2, TH) displayed when the start condition is established changes from a normal mode (e.g., a CD icon) to a specific mode (e.g., a colored character icon), and the rate of execution of the reserved icon change performance is smaller for the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state than for the variable display based on the first start condition in the normal game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (a winning entry into the winning port 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (1), which has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first starting condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning port 45), or a second winning hand, Based on a second start condition established by the winning of a game ball into the stage (second winning port 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and a light-emitting performance (e.g., lighting up the winning port lamp NR) can be executed based on a winning into the first winning means (first winning port 45), and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the light-emitting performance (e.g., lighting up the winning port lamp NR) than the variable display based on the first start condition in the normal game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (a winning entry into the winning port 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment becomes a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (1), which has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, has the first display means (first image display device 70) and a second display means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) different from the first display means, and based on a first starting condition established by the winning of a gaming ball into the first winning port 45, or a special winning state (second winning entry means Based on a second start condition established by the entry of a game ball into the second winning slot 47), the first display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and the second display means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) can execute a display performance in a display mode including a first mode (e.g., a blue effect, etc.) and a second mode (e.g., a rainbow effect, etc.), and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the display performance based on the first mode (e.g., a blue effect, etc.) on the second display means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) than the variable display based on the first start condition in the normal game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (a win at the winning slots 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment becomes a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (1), which has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and the first start condition is established by the winning of a gaming ball in the first winning means (first winning slot 45) or by the winning of a gaming ball in the second winning means (second winning slot 47). Based on the second start condition, the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and the movable role (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) can be operated in an operation mode including a first operation mode (e.g., weak operation) and a second operation mode (e.g., strong operation such as a win), and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the first operation mode (e.g., weak operation) of the operation performance by the movable role (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) than the variable display based on the first start condition in the normal game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (a winning ball entering the winning hole 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (1) has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first starting condition established by the winning of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning hole 45), or Based on a second start condition established by the entry of a game ball into a second winning means (second winning port 47), a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and an expectation display (e.g., a color effect) that creates anticipation of the execution of the special game can be executed based on the judgment, and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the expectation display (e.g., a color effect) than the variable display based on the second start condition in the specific game state.

◆To solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (a win at the winning slots 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (1), which has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and is established based on a first start condition that is established by the winning of a gaming ball at the first winning means (first winning slot 45) or by the winning of a gaming ball at the second winning means (second winning slot 47). Based on the second start condition, a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and a special performance (e.g., a zone performance) that creates anticipation of the execution of the special game for a predetermined period based on the judgment can be executed at the timing of either a predetermined variable display period based on one of the judgments or a predetermined variable display period based on multiple of the judgments, and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the special performance (e.g., a zone performance) than the variable display based on the second start condition in the specific game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (a winning entry into the winning port 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment becomes a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (1), which has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first starting condition established by the winning of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning port 45) or a specific winning state (second winning game) that is advantageous to the player, Based on a second start condition established by the entry of a game ball into the ball hole 47, a display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and based on the judgment, a notification sound effect (such as a notification sound when a reserved icon changes) that creates anticipation of the execution of the special game can be executed, and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state 2497 has a smaller execution rate of the notification sound effect (such as a notification sound when a reserved icon changes) than the variable display based on the second start condition in the specific game state 2497.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (a winning entry into the winning slots 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment becomes a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (1), which has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and a second starting condition is established based on the establishment of a first starting condition by the winning of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning slot 45) or by the winning of a gaming ball into the second winning means (second winning slot 47). Based on the start condition, the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and can execute linked performances (e.g., color effects, notification sound performances, light emission performances, pending icon change performances, movable member operation performances, etc.) that are executed consecutively or in association with each other in multiple variable displays, and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the linked performances (e.g., color effects, notification sound performances, light emission performances, pending icon change performances, movable member operation performances, etc.) than the variable display based on the second start condition in the specific game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (a winning entry into the winning slots 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (1), which has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first starting condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning slot 45) or a winning entry of a gaming ball into the second winning means (second winning slot 47), a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. Based on a second start condition established by winning, a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and a reserved icon change performance can be executed in which the display mode of the reserved icon (T1, T2, TH) displayed when the start condition is established changes from a normal mode (e.g., a CD icon) to a specific mode (e.g., a colored character icon), and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate than the variable display based on the second start condition in the specific game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (a winning entry into the winning port 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (1), which has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first starting condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning port 45), or a second winning hand, Based on a second start condition established by the winning of a game ball into the stage (second winning port 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and a light-emitting performance (e.g., lighting up the winning port lamp NR) can be executed based on a winning into the first winning means (first winning port 45), and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the light-emitting performance (e.g., lighting up the winning port lamp NR) than the variable display based on the second start condition in the specific game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (a winning entry into the winning port 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment becomes a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (1), which has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, has the first display means (first image display device 70) and a second display means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) different from the first display means, and based on a first starting condition established by the winning of a gaming ball into the first winning port 45, or a special winning state (second winning entry means Based on a second start condition established by the entry of a game ball into the second winning slot 47), the first display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and the second display means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) can execute a display performance in a display mode including a first mode (e.g., a blue effect, etc.) and a second mode (e.g., a rainbow effect, etc.), and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the display performance in the first mode (e.g., a blue effect, etc.) on the second display means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) than the variable display based on the second start condition in the specific game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (a win at the winning slots 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment becomes a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (1), which has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and the first start condition is established by the winning of a gaming ball in the first winning means (first winning slot 45) or by the winning of a gaming ball in the second winning means (second winning slot 47). Based on the second start condition, the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and can execute an operation performance of the movable role (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) in an operation mode including a first operation mode (e.g., weak operation) and a second operation mode (e.g., strong operation such as a win), and the execution rate of the first operation mode (e.g., weak operation) of the operation performance by the movable role (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is smaller in the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state than in the variable display based on the second start condition in the specific game state.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (a winning entry into the winning port 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment becomes a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (1), which has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability-changing gaming state) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first starting condition established by the winning of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning port 45) or a second winning means (second winning port 46), Based on a second start condition established by the entry of a game ball into a winning slot 47, a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and when the first start condition is established in the specific game state, a specific variable display (for example, variable display of at least one of the performance pattern 70a or the special performance pattern TZ without displaying or operating a hold icon from the start to the end of the variable display) can be executed, and when the first start condition is established in the normal game state, the specific variable display is not executed.
In order to solve the above problem, according to another gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (a winning ball entering the winning hole 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment becomes a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (1) has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a probability-changing gaming state) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first starting condition established by the winning of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning hole 45), or based on a second start condition established by the entry of a game ball into a second winning means (second winning port 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and when the variable display based on the first start condition is executed in the normal game state, it is possible to execute a predetermined performance (for example, a color effect, a zone performance, a change in a reserved icon, an alarm sound, light emission, operation of a movable member, etc.) of a performance mode that cannot be executed by the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (a winning entry into the winning port 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment becomes a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (1), which has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability-changing gaming state) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first starting condition established by the winning of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning port 45) or a second winning means (second winning port 46), The display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) based on a second start condition established by the entry of a game ball into a winning port 47, and when the first start condition is established in the specific game state, a specific variable display (for example, variable display of at least one of the performance pattern 70a or the special performance pattern TZ without displaying or operating a hold icon from the start to the end of the variable display) can be executed, and when the second start condition is established in the specific game state, the specific variable display is not executed.
In order to solve the above problem, according to another gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (a winning ball entering the winning hole 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment becomes a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (1) has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a probability-changing gaming state) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first starting condition established by the winning of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning hole 45), or based on a second start condition established by the entry of a game ball into a second winning means (second winning port 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and when the variable display based on the second start condition is executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute a predetermined performance (for example, a color effect, a zone performance, a change in a reserved icon, an alarm sound, light emission, operation of a movable member, etc.) of a performance mode that cannot be executed by the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (a winning entry into the winning port 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment becomes a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (1) has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first starting condition established by the winning of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning port 45), or a second winning state, Based on a second start condition established by the entry of a game ball into the prize means (second winning port 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and in the normal game state, the reserved display corresponding to the increase or decrease in the reserved number based on the first start condition can be displayed in a predetermined manner (e.g., a rotation or other motion), and in the specific game state, the reserved display corresponding to the increase or decrease in the reserved number based on the first start condition can be displayed in a specific manner different from the predetermined manner (e.g., no motion or no display).

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (a winning entry into the winning port 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment becomes a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (1) has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first starting condition established by the winning of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning port 45), or a second winning state, Based on a second start condition established by the entry of a game ball into the prize means (second winning port 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and in the specific game state, the reserved display corresponding to the increase or decrease in the reserved number based on the second start condition can be displayed in a predetermined manner (e.g., a rotation or other motion), and in the specific game state, the reserved display corresponding to the increase or decrease in the reserved number based on the first start condition can be displayed in a specific manner different from the predetermined manner (e.g., no motion or no display).

◆To solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (a winning entry into the winning slots 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (1), which has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first starting condition established by the winning of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning slot 45), or based on a second starting condition established by the winning of a gaming ball into the second winning means (second winning slot 47), Based on this, the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and the difference between the average variable display time at the maximum reserved number (e.g., Hold 4) and the average variable display time at a predetermined reserved number (e.g., Hold 1) less than the maximum reserved number when executing the variable display for the loss determination based on the first start condition in the normal game state is smaller than the difference between the average variable display time at the maximum reserved number (e.g., Hold 4) and the average variable display time at a predetermined reserved number (e.g., Hold 1) less than the maximum reserved number when executing the variable display for the loss determination based on the first start condition in the specific game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (a winning entry into the winning port 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment becomes a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (1) has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first starting condition established by the winning of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning port 45), or Based on a second start condition established by the entry of a game ball into the second winning means (second winning port 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and the number of patterns of the variable display time determined by the predetermined reserved number when executing the variable display for the loss determination based on the first starting condition in the specific game state is smaller than the number of patterns of the variable display time determined by the predetermined reserved number when executing the variable display for the loss determination based on the first starting condition in the normal game state.

◆To solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (a winning ball entering the winning hole 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (1) has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first starting condition established by the winning of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning hole 45), , or based on a second start condition established by the entry of a game ball into the second winning means (second winning port 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and is characterized in that the same variable pattern is executed more frequently between the first reserved number (e.g., reserved 4) and the second reserved number (e.g., reserved 1) when the variable display of the loss determination based on the first start condition is executed in the specific game state than when the variable display of the loss determination based on the first start condition is executed in the normal game state.

◆To solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (a winning entry into the winning slots 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (1), which has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first starting condition established by the winning of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning slot 45), or based on a second starting condition established by the winning of a gaming ball into the second winning means (second winning slot 47), Based on this, the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and the difference between the average variable display time at the maximum reserved number (e.g., Hold 4) when executing the variable display for the loss determination based on the second start condition in the specific game state and the average variable display time at a predetermined reserved number (e.g., Hold 1) smaller than the maximum reserved number when executing the variable display for the loss determination based on the first start condition in the specific game state is smaller than the difference between the average variable display time at the maximum reserved number (e.g., Hold 4) and the average variable display time at a predetermined reserved number (e.g., Hold 1) smaller than the maximum reserved number.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (a winning entry into the winning port 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment becomes a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (1) has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first starting condition established by the winning of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning port 45), or Based on a second start condition established by the entry of a game ball into the second winning means (second winning port 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and the number of patterns of the variable display time determined by the predetermined reserved number when executing the variable display for the loss determination based on the first starting condition in the specific game state is less than the number of patterns of the variable display time determined by the predetermined reserved number when executing the variable display for the loss determination based on the second starting condition in the specific game state.

◆To solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (a winning ball entering the winning hole 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (1) has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first starting condition established by the winning of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning hole 45), , or based on a second start condition established by the entry of a game ball into the second winning means (second winning port 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and is characterized in that the same variable pattern is executed more frequently between the first reserved number (e.g., reserved 4) and the second reserved number (e.g., reserved 1) when the variable display of the loss determination based on the first start condition is executed in the specific game state than when the variable display of the loss determination based on the second start condition is executed in the specific game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (a winning entry into the winning slots 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (1), which has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first start condition established by the winning of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning slot 45) or the winning of a gaming ball into the second winning means (second winning slot 47), a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. Based on the second start condition established by the above, the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and can execute an action performance (e.g., a preparatory action or a stopping action) of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) at the start and/or end of the variable display, and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the action performance (e.g., a preparatory action or a stopping action) of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) at the start and/or end of the variable display than the variable display based on the first start condition in the normal game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (a winning entry into the winning slots 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (1), which has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first start condition established by the winning of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning slot 45) or the winning of a gaming ball into the second winning means (second winning slot 47), a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. Based on the second start condition established by the above, the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and can execute an action display (e.g., a preparatory action or a stop action) of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) at the start and/or end of the variable display, and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller number of types of action displays (e.g., a preparatory action or a stop action) of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed at the start and/or end of the variable display than the variable display based on the first start condition in the normal game state.

◆To solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (a win at the winning port 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment becomes a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (1), which has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and the start condition is established based on a first start condition established by the winning of a gaming ball at the first winning means (first winning port 45) or by the winning of a gaming ball at the second winning means (second winning port 47). Based on a second start condition established, a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the variable display can be executed with the pattern of a first aspect (e.g., 1 to 9) and the pattern of a second aspect (e.g., a special pattern not having numerical information, etc.) that is displayed at a predetermined timing of the variable display, and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller proportion of patterns of the second aspect (e.g., a special pattern not having numerical information, etc.) displayed than the variable display based on the first start condition in the normal game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (a winning entry into the winning slots 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (1), which has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first start condition established by the winning of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning slot 45) or the winning of a gaming ball into the second winning means (second winning slot 47), a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. Based on the second start condition established by the above, the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and can execute an action performance (e.g., a preparatory action or a stop action) of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) at the start and/or end of the variable display, and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the action performance (e.g., a preparatory action or a stop action) of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) at the start and/or end of the variable display than the variable display based on the second start condition in the specific game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (a winning entry into the winning slots 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (1), which has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first start condition established by the winning of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning slot 45) or the winning of a gaming ball into the second winning means (second winning slot 47), a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. Based on the second start condition established by the above, the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and can execute an action display (e.g., a preparatory action or a stop action) of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) at the start and/or end of the variable display, and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller number of types of action displays (e.g., a preparatory action or a stop action) of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed at the start and/or end of the variable display than the variable display based on the second start condition in the specific game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (a winning entry into the winning port 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment becomes a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (1), which has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first start condition established by the winning of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning port 45) or a second winning means (second winning port 46), Based on a second start condition established by the entry of a game ball into a winning slot 47), a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and in the variable display, the pattern can be displayed as a first pattern in a predetermined manner (e.g., 1 to 9) and a second pattern in a specific manner (e.g., a special pattern that does not have numerical information), and the first pattern is displayed more frequently in the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state than in the variable display based on the second start condition in the specific game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (a win at the winning slots 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (1), which has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and the display means (second winning slot 47) is activated based on a first start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning slot 45) or based on a second start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning means (second winning slot 47). A variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) can be executed on a single image display device 70), and the variable display includes a first stop display mode and a second stop display mode (e.g., a long time until the stop) in which the pattern (performance pattern 70a) is displayed as a stop, and the period of the stop display is different (e.g., a long time until the stop), and the variable display that is determined to be a miss based on the first start condition when the maximum number of reserved balls is reached in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the first stop display mode (e.g., a short time until the stop) than the variable display that is determined to be a miss based on the first start condition when the maximum number of reserved balls is reached in the normal game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (a win at the winning slots 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment reaches a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (1), which has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning slot 45), or based on a second start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning means (second winning slot 47), the pattern (performance pattern 70a) is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70). The display can execute a variable display of the displayed pattern (70a), and the stop display mode in which the pattern (70a) is stopped in the variable display includes a first stop display mode (e.g., simultaneous stop) in which the pattern (70a) is stopped in a first pattern, and a second stop display mode (e.g., sequential stop) in which the pattern (70a) is stopped in a second pattern different from the first stop display mode, and the variable display that is determined to be a miss based on the first start condition when the maximum number of reserved balls is reached in the specific game state has a higher execution rate of the second stop display mode (e.g., sequential stop) than the variable display that is determined to be a miss based on the first start condition when the maximum number of reserved balls is reached in the normal game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (a winning entry into the winning hole 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment becomes a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. In the gaming machine (1), the gaming state includes a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability-changing gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and the first start is established by the winning of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning hole 45). Based on the condition, or based on a second start condition established by the entry of a game ball into the second winning means (second winning port 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and the variable display that results in a miss determination based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of a pattern change performance that changes the display size of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) than the variable display that results in a miss determination based on the first start condition in the normal game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (a winning entry into the winning slots 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (1) has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and the winning entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning slot 45) Based on a first start condition established by a winning ball entering the second winning means (second winning port 47), or based on a second start condition established by a winning ball entering the second winning means (second winning port 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and the variable display that is determined to be a miss based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the reach performance than the variable display that is determined to be a miss based on the first start condition in the normal game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (a win at the winning slots 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (1), which has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and the display means (second winning slot 47) is activated based on a first start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning slot 45) or based on a second start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning means (second winning slot 47). A variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) can be executed on a single image display device 70), and the variable display includes a first stop display mode and a second stop display mode (e.g., a long time until the stop) in which the pattern (performance pattern 70a) is displayed as a stop, and the period of the stop display is different (e.g., a long time until the stop), and the variable display that is determined to be a miss based on the first start condition when the maximum number of reserved balls is reached in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the first stop display mode (e.g., a short time until the stop) than the variable display that is determined to be a miss based on the second start condition when the maximum number of reserved balls is reached in the specific game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (a win at the winning slots 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment reaches a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (1), which has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning slot 45), or based on a second start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning means (second winning slot 47), the pattern (performance pattern 70a) is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70). The display can execute a variable display of the displayed pattern (70a), and the stop display mode in which the pattern (70a) is stopped in the variable display includes a first stop display mode (e.g., simultaneous stop) in which the pattern (70a) is stopped in a first pattern, and a second stop display mode (e.g., sequential stop) in which the pattern (70a) is stopped in a second pattern different from the first stop display mode, and the variable display that is determined to be a miss based on the first start condition when the maximum number of reserved balls is reached in the specific game state has a higher execution rate of the second stop display mode (e.g., sequential stop) than the variable display that is determined to be a miss based on the second start condition when the maximum number of reserved balls is reached in the specific game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (a winning entry into the winning hole 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment becomes a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. In the gaming machine (1), the gaming state includes a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability-changing gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and the first start is established by the winning of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning hole 45). Based on the condition, or based on a second start condition established by the entry of a game ball into the second winning means (second winning port 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and the variable display that results in a miss determination based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of a pattern change performance that changes the display size of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) than the variable display that results in a miss determination based on the second start condition in the specific game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (a winning entry into the winning slots 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (1) has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special bonus gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and the winning entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning slot 45) Based on a first start condition established by the winning of a game ball into the second winning means (second winning port 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and the variable display that is determined to be a miss based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the reach performance than the variable display that is determined to be a miss based on the second start condition in the specific game state.

◆To solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (a winning entry into the winning hole 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment becomes a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (1) has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability-changing gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first start condition established by the winning of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning hole 45), The display means (first image display device 70) can display the varying patterns (performance patterns 70a) based on a second start condition established by the winning of a game ball into the second winning means (second winning port 47), and can display a first specific notification (e.g., a right-hit display) that indicates the specific game state, and a second specific notification (a display or notification other than the right-hit display) that is made in addition to the first specific notification (right-hit display) based on the winning of a game ball into the first winning means while the first specific notification (right-hit display) is being executed.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (a win at the winning slots 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (1), which has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability-changing gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and displays a first image display on the display means (first image display) based on a first start condition established by the winning of a gaming ball in the first winning means (first winning slot 45) or based on a second start condition established by the winning of a gaming ball in the second winning means (second winning slot 47). The display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and the light-emitting performance at a predetermined position (e.g., the start gate lamp NR) and the operation performance of the movable role (e.g., the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) based on the first start condition in the normal game state can be executed at a predetermined timing (e.g., the timing of winning or the timing of the start of the fluctuation, etc.), and the light-emitting performance at the predetermined position (e.g., the start gate lamp NR) and the operation performance of the movable role (e.g., the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) based on the first start condition in the specific game state can be restricted from being executed at a predetermined timing (e.g., the timing of winning or the timing of the start of the fluctuation, etc.).

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (a win at the winning port 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (1), which has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, special variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and is capable of executing the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) based on a first start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning port 45) or based on a second start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning means (second winning port 47), and a notification effect that gives the player hope for the execution of the special game is displayed at a predetermined timing. The first notification can be performed in a first mode (for example, the start gate lamp NR flashing blue) and a second mode different from the first mode (for example, the start gate lamp NR flashing red), and the second notification can be performed in a third mode different from the first and second modes (for example, the start gate lamp NR and the board and/or frame lighting device illuminating, etc.), and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the first to third modes in the notification performance and a larger execution rate of the notification performance in a fourth mode different from the first to third modes (for example, the start gate lamp NR does not emit light) in the notification performance based on the first start condition in the normal game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (a prize being won at the winning slots 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (1), and the gaming state can be a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a special probability game state, etc.) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state can be executed. ), and based on a first start condition established by the entry of a game ball into a first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on a second start condition established by the entry of a game ball into a second winning means (second winning port 47), a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) can be executed on a display means (first image display device 70), and as a notification performance that gives an expectation of the execution of the special game, a first notification that is executed at a predetermined timing (for example, when the variation starts) and a previous notification are executed. The second notification can be executed at a different timing from the first notification (when the ball enters the starting gate), and the first notification can be executed in a first mode (for example, the starting gate lamp NR flashes blue), a second mode different from the first mode (for example, the starting gate lamp NR flashes red), and a third mode different from the first mode and the second mode (for example, the starting gate lamp NR and the board and/or frame lighting device emit light, etc.). The second notification can be executed in the same mode as the first and second modes, but cannot be executed in the same mode as the third mode. The variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the first to third modes in the notification performance than the variable display based on the first start condition in the normal game state, and a larger execution rate of the notification performance of a fourth mode different from the first to third modes (for example, the starting gate lamp NR does not emit light).

In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (a winning entry into the winning slots 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment becomes a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (1), which has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability-changing gaming state) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first starting condition established by the winning of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first winning slot 45), or based on a second starting condition established by the winning of a gaming ball into the second winning means (second winning slot 47), the pattern (performance pattern 70a) is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70). The present invention is characterized in that a variable display of a pattern (70a) to be displayed can be executed, and that as a light-emitting effect to anticipate the execution of the special game, a first light-emitting mode using the first winning means (starting gate lamp NR) and a second light-emitting mode using another light-emitting means (for example, a lighting device for the board and/or frame) in conjunction with the first winning means, in the variable display based on the first start condition in the normal game state, the second light-emitting mode has a higher execution rate of a vibration effect by a vibration means (operation button) than the first light-emitting mode, and the variable display based on the first start condition executed in the specific game state has a lower execution rate of the vibration effect than the variable display based on the first start condition in the normal game state.
[Third embodiment]
Hereinafter, the present invention will be described in detail with reference to an embodiment (third embodiment) shown in the drawings.
<Basic configuration of gaming machine>
Figure 194 is a front view showing an example of a gaming machine according to this embodiment, Figure 195 is an oblique view showing an example of the back side of a gaming machine according to this embodiment, and Figure 196 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a gaming control device provided in the gaming machine according to this embodiment.

In the gaming machine 1 shown in Figure 194, an inner frame (opening/closing frame) 3 is attached so as to be openable and closable to an outer frame 2 which is attached to the island structure of a gaming hall, and a glass frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable.
A window 4a is formed in the glass frame 4, and a transparent plate (glass plate) 4b is attached to the window 4a. A game board 10z having a board surface from which game balls are shot out is attached to the inner frame 3, and a game area 10az in which game balls can roll and flow down is formed between the board surface of the game board 10z and the transparent plate in front of it. The transparent plate 4b is, for example, a glass plate, and is removably fixed to the glass frame 4.

The glass frame 4 is connected to the outer frame 2 via a hinge mechanism 5z at one end in the left-right direction (e.g., the left side when facing the gaming machine), and can rotate around the hinge mechanism 5z in a direction that opens the other end in the left-right direction (e.g., the right side when facing the gaming machine) from the outer frame 2. The glass frame 4 covers the gaming board 10z together with the transparent plate, and can open the inner part of the outer frame 2 including the gaming board 10z by rotating like a door around the hinge mechanism 5z. A lock mechanism is provided on the other end of the glass frame 4 to fix the other end of the glass frame 4 to the outer frame 2. The fixation by the lock mechanism can be released by a dedicated key. The glass frame 4 is also provided with an open detection switch 105z that detects whether the glass frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2.

A tray unit 7z having storage trays 6z (upper tray 6az and lower tray 6bz) for storing game balls is provided at the bottom of the glass frame 4 (the lower part of the window 4a), and the tray unit 7z is equipped with a performance button 8z (Figure 194) that can be pressed by the player, a cross key 40z with which the player can perform various selection operations, and an ejection button 9z for ejecting the game balls stored in the lower tray 6bz outside the gaming machine.
The effect button 8z is only enabled when, for example, a message to operate the effect button 8z is displayed on the image display device 31z described later. The effect button 8z is provided with an effect button detection switch 8az (see FIG. 196), and when the effect button detection switch 8az detects an operation by the player, a further effect is executed in response to the operation.
Furthermore, the cross key 40z is provided with cross key detection switches (up key detection switch, down key detection switch, left key detection switch, and right key detection switch).

An operating handle 11z is provided on the lower right side of the glass frame 4. When a player touches the operating handle 11z, a touch sensor 11az (see FIG. 196) in the operating handle 11z detects that the player has touched the operating handle 11z and transmits a touch signal to the launch control board 75z. When the launch control board 75z receives a touch signal from the touch sensor 11az, it allows the launch solenoid 12az to be energized. Then, when the rotation angle of the operating handle 11z is changed, the knob of the volume 11bz rotates. A voltage corresponding to the detected angle of this launch volume 11bz is applied to the launch solenoid 12az provided in the game ball launch mechanism. Then, when a voltage is applied to the launch solenoid 12az, the launch solenoid 12az operates according to the applied voltage, and the game ball is launched into the game area 10az of the game board 10z with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the operating handle 11z.

An outer rail R1 and an inner rail R2 are provided around the play area 10az on the play board 10z. These outer rail R1 and inner rail R2 guide the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the upper part of the play area 10az when the operating handle 11z is operated. The game ball guided to the upper part of the play area 10az falls within the play area 10az. At this time, the game ball falls unpredictably due to multiple nails and pinwheels provided in the play area 10az.
A center member 12z is disposed at approximately the center of the game board 10z. The center member 12z is provided with an image display device 31z such as a liquid crystal display device and a performance prop device 32 shaped like a sword.

In addition, a first starting hole 13z through which a game ball can enter is provided in the game area 10az at the center lower side of the center member 12z. A second starting hole 14z is provided below the first starting hole 13z. The second starting hole 14z has an opening and closing door 14bz, and is controlled to move between a first state in which the opening and closing door 14bz is kept closed and a second state in which the opening and closing door 14bz is open. Therefore, when the second starting hole 14z is in the first state, there is no chance of a game ball entering, and when it is in the second state, there is an increased chance of a game ball entering.
In this embodiment, when the second starting hole 14z is controlled to the first mode, the game ball is prevented from entering the second starting hole 14z. However, if there are fewer opportunities for the game ball to enter when the first mode is controlled than when the second mode is controlled, the game ball may enter the second starting hole 14z when the first mode is controlled. In other words, the first mode includes a state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 14z.

The first start hole 13z and the second start hole 14z are provided with a first start hole detection switch 13az (see FIG. 196) and a second start hole detection switch 14az, respectively, which detect the entrance of a game ball, and when these detection switches detect the entrance of a game ball, a lottery for the right to play a jackpot game, which will be described later (hereinafter, referred to as a "jackpot lottery") is held. Also, when the first start hole detection switch 13az and the second start hole detection switch 14az detect the entrance of a game ball, a predetermined prize ball (for example, three game balls) is paid out.
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when a gaming ball enters the first start hole 13z and the second start hole 14z, for example, three gaming balls are paid out, but it is not necessary to pay out the gaming ball when it enters. Also, the number of payouts may be different for each start hole, for example, three for the first start hole 13z and one for the second start hole 14z.

Gates 15z through which the game ball can pass are provided in the game areas 10az on both sides of the center member 12z. The gates 15z are provided with gate detection switches 15az (see FIG. 196) that detect the passage of the game ball. When the gate detection switches 15az detect the passage of the game ball, a lottery for a normal symbol, which will be described later, is held.
Furthermore, a first large prize opening 16 and a second large prize opening 17z into which game balls can enter are provided in the game area 10az on the right side of the center member 12z. For this reason, unless the game ball is shot out with a large force by rotating the operating handle 11z largely, the game ball will not enter the first large prize opening 16 and the second large prize opening 17z.

The first large prize opening 16 is normally kept closed by an opening/closing door 16bz, preventing game balls from entering the opening. In contrast, when a jackpot game, which will be described later, starts, the opening/closing door 16bz opens and functions as a tray that guides game balls into the first large prize opening 16, allowing the game balls to enter the first large prize opening 16. A first large prize opening detection switch 16az is provided in the first large prize opening 16, and when this first large prize opening detection switch 16az detects the entry of a game ball, a preset number of prize balls (e.g., 15 game balls) is paid out.

The second large prize winning hole 17z is normally kept in a closed state by the movable piece 17bz, making it impossible for game balls to enter. In contrast, when a big win game described later is started, the movable piece 17bz is actuated and opened, and the movable piece 17bz functions as a guide path that guides the game ball into the second large prize winning hole 17z, making it possible for the game ball to enter the second large prize winning hole 17z. The second large prize winning hole 17z is provided with a second large prize winning hole detection switch 17az, and when the second large prize winning hole detection switch 17az detects the entry of a game ball, a preset prize ball (for example, 15 game balls) is paid out.
Furthermore, the game area 10az is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 18z. When a game ball enters each of the general winning holes 18z, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 game balls) are paid out.

At the bottom of the game area 10az, there is an outlet 19z for discharging game balls that do not enter any of the general winning opening 18z, the first starting opening 13z, the second starting opening 14z, the first large winning opening 16, and the second large winning opening 17z.
The image display device 31z displays images during standby when no game is being played, and displays images according to the progress of the game. In particular, when a game ball enters the first start hole 13z or the second start hole 14z, a performance pattern 35z that notifies the player of the lottery result is displayed in a variable manner.
The performance pattern 35 is, for example, a scrolling display of three patterns (numbers), namely a first pattern (left pattern), a second pattern (right pattern), and a third pattern (center pattern), and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the scrolling is stopped and specific patterns (numbers) are displayed in an array.

This gives the player the impression that a lottery is currently being drawn while the symbols are scrolling, and the player is notified of the lottery results by the symbols displayed when the scrolling stops. By displaying various images and characters during the varying display of the performance symbols 35z, the player is given a high sense of expectation that he or she may win a jackpot.
Although not shown, the image display device 31z displays a fourth symbol in addition to the effect symbol 35z. The fourth symbol is a symbol that indicates a change state of the effect symbol 35z used to notify the lottery result of the big win lottery process.
In addition, the fourth symbol does not necessarily have to be displayed on the image display device 31z, and may be displayed by a separate fourth symbol display lamp.

A pair of performance lighting devices 33, one on each side, are mounted on the upper portion of the glass frame 4. Each performance lighting device 33 is equipped with a number of lights, and various performances can be performed by changing the irradiation direction and emission color of each light.
Each of the performance lighting devices 33 is equipped with a plurality of lights, and various performance effects can be created by changing the direction of light irradiation and the color of light emitted by each light.
Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 194, the gaming machine 1 is provided with an audio output device 34 (see FIG. 196) consisting of a speaker, which, in addition to the various presentation devices mentioned above, outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc., so as to provide sound-based presentation.

At the lower left side of the game area 10az, there are provided display areas including a first special pattern display device 20z, a second special pattern display device 21, a normal pattern display device 22, a first special pattern reserved display device 23, a second special pattern reserved display device 24, a normal pattern reserved display device 25z, and a round number display device 26z, which will be described later.
The first special symbol display device 20z notifies the player of the result of the lottery for the big win, which is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 13z, and is composed of multiple LEDs. In other words, multiple special symbols corresponding to the lottery results for the big win are provided, and the lottery results are notified to the player by displaying special symbols (lighting modes) corresponding to the lottery results for the big win on the first special symbol display device 20z. The special symbols displayed in this way are not displayed immediately, but are displayed in a variable manner (blinking) for a predetermined period of time and then displayed stationary.
More specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 13z, a lottery for a big win is held, but the result of the lottery is not immediately notified to the player, but is notified to the player after a predetermined time has passed. Then, after the predetermined time has passed, a special symbol corresponding to the lottery result for the big win is displayed in a stopped state, so that the lottery result is notified to the player.

The second special pattern display device 21 is intended to notify the result of the jackpot lottery that is triggered when the gaming ball enters the second starting hole 14z, and its display mode is the same as the display mode of the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 20z.
The normal symbol display device 22 is for notifying the result of the lottery for the normal symbol, which is triggered by the passing of the game ball through the gate 15z. As will be described in detail later, if a predetermined winning is won through the lottery for the normal symbol, the normal symbol display device 22 lights up, and then the second starting hole 14z is controlled to the second mode for a predetermined time. Note that the lottery result for this normal symbol is not immediately notified when the game ball passes through the gate 15z, but the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, such as by flashing the normal symbol display device 22, until the predetermined time has passed.
Furthermore, when a game ball enters the first start hole 13z or the second start hole 14z and a lottery for a jackpot cannot be held immediately, such as during the variable display of special symbols or during a special game described later, the right to a lottery for a jackpot is reserved under certain conditions. More specifically, the right to a lottery for a jackpot reserved when a game ball enters the first start hole 13z is reserved as a first reservation, and the right to a lottery for a jackpot reserved when a game ball enters the second start hole 14z is reserved as a second reservation.

The upper limit of the number of reserved symbols for each of these two reservations is set to four, and the number of reserved symbols is displayed on the first special pattern reserved indicator 23 and the second special pattern reserved indicator 24, respectively.
The maximum number of reserved ordinary symbols is also set to four, and the reserved number is displayed on the ordinary symbol reserved display 25z in a manner similar to that of the first special symbol reserved display 23 and the second special symbol reserved display 24.
The round number display 26z is for notifying the number of rounds of a round game played during a special game, which will be described later.

196, a main control board 50z, a performance control board 55z, a payout control board 60z, a lamp control board 65z, an image control board 70z, a launch control board 75z, a power supply board 80z, a game information output terminal board 27z, etc. are provided on the back surface of the gaming machine 1. In addition, a power plug 81z for supplying power to the gaming machine and a power switch (not shown) are provided on the power supply board 80z.
The image control board 70z is provided with a volume changeover switch 36z for changing the volume of the sound output from the sound output device 34.

Using Figure 196, we will explain the game control device that controls the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment.
In Fig. 196, a main control board 50z controls the basic operations of the game. This main control board 50z is equipped with at least a one-chip microcomputer consisting of a main CPU 50az, a main ROM 50bz, and a main RAM 50cz, and input and output ports for main control (not shown).
The main CPU 50az reads out the programs stored in the main ROM 50bz based on the input signals from the detection switches, performs arithmetic processing, directly controls each device and display, or transmits commands to other boards according to the results of the arithmetic processing. The main RAM 50cz functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the main CPU 50az.

The input side of the main control board 50z is connected to the first start hole detection switch 13az, the second start hole detection switch 14az, the gate detection switch 15az, the first large prize hole detection switch 16az, the second large prize hole detection switch 17az, and the general prize hole detection switch 18az, so that the detection signal of the game ball is input to the main control board 50z.
In addition, connected to the output side of the main control board 50z are a start opening opening/closing solenoid 14cz which opens and closes the opening/closing door 14bz of the second start opening 14z, a first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 16cz which opens and closes the opening/closing door 16bz of the first large prize opening 16z, and a second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 17cz which opens and closes the movable piece 17bz of the second large prize opening 17z.
Furthermore, the output side of the main control board 50z is connected to the first special pattern display device 20z, the second special pattern display device 21, the normal pattern display device 22, the first special pattern reserved display device 23, the second special pattern reserved display device 24, the normal pattern reserved display device 25z, and the round number display device 26z, and various signals are output via the output port.
In addition, the main control board 50z outputs external information signals required for managing the gaming machines in the gaming parlor's hall computer, etc., to the gaming information output terminal board 27z.

The main ROM 50bz of the main control board 50z stores game control programs (to be described later) and data and tables necessary for various games.
In addition, the main RAM 50cz of the main control board 50z has a plurality of storage areas.
For example, the main RAM 50cz is provided with a normal symbol reservation number (G) memory area, a normal symbol reservation memory area, a first special symbol reservation number (U1) memory area, a second special symbol reservation number (U2) memory area, a judgment memory area, a first special symbol memory area, a second special symbol memory area, a high probability game count (X) memory area, a time-saving game count (J) memory area, a round game count (R) memory area, an opening count (K) memory area, a first large prize entry ball count (C1) memory area, a second large prize entry ball count (C2) memory area, a game status memory area, a game status buffer, a stop symbol data memory area, a performance transmission data storage area, etc. The game status memory area includes a time-saving game flag memory area, a high probability game flag memory area, a special symbol special telephone processing data memory area, and a normal symbol normal telephone processing data memory area. Note that the above-mentioned memory areas are merely examples, and many other memory areas are provided.

The game information output terminal board 27z is a board for outputting an external information signal generated in the main control board 50z to a hall computer or the like of a gaming establishment. The game information output terminal board 27z is connected to the main control board 50z by wiring, and is provided with a connector for connecting to a hall computer or the like of a gaming establishment.
The main control board 80z converts the power supply voltage supplied from the power plug 81z to a predetermined voltage and supplies it to each control board. The main control board 80z also has a backup power supply consisting of a capacitor, which monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine and outputs a power interruption detection signal to the main control board 50z when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value. More specifically, when the power interruption detection signal becomes high level, the main CPU 50az becomes operable, and when the power interruption detection signal becomes low level, the main CPU 50az becomes inoperative. The backup power supply is not limited to a capacitor, and may be, for example, a battery, or a combination of a capacitor and a battery.

The performance control board 55z mainly controls each performance during play, standby, etc. This performance control board 55z is equipped with a sub-CPU 55az, a sub-ROM 55bz, and a sub-RAM 55cz, and is connected to the main control board 50z so as to be able to communicate in one direction from the main control board 50z to the performance control board 55z.
The sub-CPU 55az reads out a program stored in the sub-ROM 55bz and performs arithmetic processing based on a command transmitted from the main control board 50z or an input signal from the performance button detection switch 8az input via the lamp control board 65z, and transmits corresponding data to the lamp control board 65z or the image control board 150 based on the processing. The sub-RAM 55cz functions as a work area for data during arithmetic processing by the sub-CPU 55az.

The sub-ROM 55bz of the performance control board 55z stores programs for performance control, data required for various games, and tables.
For example, the sub-ROM 55bz stores a variable presentation pattern determination table (not shown) for determining a presentation pattern based on a variable pattern designation command received from the main control board 50z, a presentation pattern determination table (not shown) for determining a combination of presentation patterns 35z to be stopped and displayed, etc. Note that the above-mentioned tables are merely examples of characteristic tables among the tables in this embodiment, and many other tables and programs (not shown) are provided in the course of the game.

The sub-RAM 55cz of the performance control board 55z has multiple memory areas.
The sub-RAM 55cz is provided with a command receiving buffer, a game status storage area, a performance mode storage area, a performance pattern storage area, a performance symbol storage area, a judgment storage area (0th storage area), a first reserved storage area, a second reserved storage area, etc. The above-mentioned storage areas are merely examples, and many other storage areas are provided.
In addition, the performance control board 55z is equipped with an RTC (real-time clock) 55d that outputs the current time. The sub-CPU 55az inputs a date signal indicating the current date and a time signal indicating the current time from the RTC 55d, and executes various processes based on the current date and time.
The RTC 55d normally operates on the power from the gaming machine when the gaming machine is powered, and operates on the power supplied from the backup power source mounted on the main control board 80z when the gaming machine is powered off. Therefore, the RTC 55d can measure the current date and time even when the gaming machine is powered off. The RTC 55d may be powered by a battery provided on the performance control board 55z.

The payout control board 60z controls the launch of game balls and the payout of prize balls. This payout control board 60z is equipped with a payout CPU 60az, a payout ROM 60bz, and a payout RAM 60cz, and is connected to the main control board 50 so that it can communicate in both directions. The payout CPU 60az reads out a program stored in the payout ROM 60bz and performs calculations based on input signals from the payout ball counting switch 106z, which detects whether game balls have been paid out, and the opening detection switch 105z, and transmits corresponding data to the main control board 50z based on the processing.

Also, the output side of the payout control board 60z is connected to a payout motor 107 of a prize ball payout device for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls from a game ball storage section to a player. The payout CPU 60az reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM 60bz based on a payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 50z, performs calculation processing, and controls the payout motor 107 of the prize ball payout device to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls to a player. At this time, the payout RAM 60cz functions as a data work area during the calculation processing of the payout CPU 60az.
It also checks whether a game ball lending device (card unit) not shown is connected to the payout control board 60z, and if the game ball lending device (card unit) is connected, it transmits launch control data to the launch control board 75z to allow the game balls to be launched.
In addition, a tray full detection switch 51z and a ball jam detection switch 52z are connected to the dispensing control board 60z.

The launch control board 75z, upon receiving the launch control data from the payout control board 60z, permits launch. Then, it reads out the touch signal from the touch sensor 11az and the input signal from the launch volume 11bz, controls the energization of the launch solenoid 12az and the ball feed solenoid 12bz, and launches the game ball.
The firing solenoid 12az is a rotary solenoid. A firing member (not shown) is directly connected to the firing solenoid 12az, and the firing solenoid 12az rotates to rotate the firing member.
Here, the rotation speed of the launch solenoid 12az is set to about 99.9 (times/minute) based on the frequency based on the output period of the crystal oscillator provided on the launch control board 75z. As a result, the number of launched game balls per minute is about 99.9 (balls/minute), since one ball is launched per rotation of the launch solenoid. In other words, a game ball is launched about every 0.6 seconds.
The ball-feeding solenoid 12bz is composed of a linear solenoid, and sends out the game balls on the upper tray 6az (see Figure 194) one by one toward the firing member directly connected to the launch solenoid 12az.

The lamp control board 65z is connected to the performance control board 55z so as to be able to communicate in both directions, and its input side is connected to the performance button detection switch 8a provided on the performance button 8z, so that when a detection signal is input from the performance button detection switch 8az, it is output to the performance control board 55z.
The lamp control board 65z is also connected to the performance role device 32 and the performance lighting device 33 provided on the game board 10z, and the lamp control board 65z controls the lighting of the performance lighting device 33 and controls the drive of the motor for changing the direction of light irradiation based on data transmitted from the performance control board 55z. The lamp control board 65z also controls the supply of electricity to the drive sources such as the solenoid and motor that operate the performance role device 32. In this embodiment, the performance button 8z is configured to protrude, so the performance role device 32 includes the performance button 8z.
Further, the above-mentioned panel lamp 100z and frame lamp 101z are connected to the lamp control board 65z.
The image control board 150 is connected to the performance control board 55z so as to be capable of two-way communication, and the image display device 31z and the audio output device 34 are connected to its output side.

The main control board 50z will now be described in further detail.
A performance display monitor 600, a setting display monitor 650, a setting key switch 660, a setting switch 670, and an RWM clear switch 680 are further connected to the main control board 50z.
The details of these will be described later, but the performance display monitor 600 displays the performance, i.e., base value, of the gaming machine.
The base value is a number that indicates how much will be paid out under normal conditions (when there is no low-probability time-saving mode) excluding special conditions such as a jackpot, a special probability play state, or a time-saving play state. For example, when there is no low-probability time-saving mode and a player shoots out 100 game balls, if there are 50 prize balls, the base value is 50.
For each predetermined number of shots (usually 60,000 balls) in all game states including jackpot, probability variable game state, and time-limited game state, the base value calculated in the absence of low probability time-limited game state is displayed on the performance display monitor 600.
In addition, in gaming machines that have a setting function, the probability of winning a jackpot can be changed by changing the setting.
The setting values may be displayed on a setting display monitor 650 provided separately from the performance display monitor 600, or the performance display monitor 600 may also function as the setting display monitor 650 to display the setting values. In this case, there is no need to provide a separate setting display monitor 650.
Instead of providing a setting switch 670 for changing the settings of the gaming machine, an RWM clear switch 680 may be used instead.

Details will be given later, but the operation of changing and checking the settings of the gaming machine using the performance display monitor 600 will be explained.
When the door of the gaming machine 1 is opened (the glass frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2), the setting key switch 660 is turned ON, and the power is turned on while the RWM clear switch 680 is pressed, the current settings are displayed on the performance display monitor 600 and the settings can be changed.
The setting has six levels, for example, from "1" to "6." Each time the RWM clear switch 680 is operated, the setting value is incremented and displayed on the performance display monitor 600, and after "6" it returns to "1."
After selecting the setting, turning the setting key switch 660 to OFF confirms the setting displayed on the performance display monitor 600, and a dot is displayed on the performance display monitor 600 together with the setting value.

The setting display will switch to a performance display at regular intervals, and the game will be ready for play. Also, the RWM of the main control board will be cleared.
While the settings are being switched, notification is given by visual effects and sound effects.
In addition, when the door of the gaming machine 1 is opened and the power is turned on with the setting key switch 660 in the ON position, the current settings are displayed on the performance display monitor 600 along with dots, allowing the settings to be confirmed.
While the settings are being checked, notification is given by visual effects and sound effects.

Next, the performance button 8z is incorporated in the central portion of the plate unit 7z.
The effect button 8z is configured to be movable between a normal operation position (not shown), a depressed position retracted below the normal operation position, and a protruding operation position protruding above the normal operation position. The effect button 8z is also configured to be capable of being depressed from any position including the normal operation position and the protruding operation position to the depressed position.
In addition, the detailed structure of the performance button 8z is disclosed in, for example, JP 2013-116168 A, so a detailed explanation will be omitted in this specification.

<Configuration of the back of the game board>
Next, the configuration of the back side of the game board will be described.
FIG. 197 is a rear view showing the state in which each unit is assembled to the base frame 130z, and FIG. 198 is a partially exploded perspective view of FIG.
195, 197, 198, etc., a base frame (liquid crystal base frame) 130 having an opening penetrating in the front-to-rear direction is attached to the back (rear) of the game board 10z, and an image display unit (image display device 31z, and image display cover 165) 160 is attached to the back (rear) side of the base frame 130z so as to cover the opening. A lamp relay board 166 is attached to the back (rear) of the image display cover (liquid crystal cover) 165, and a board protection case (board case) 200 containing a main control board is attached to the lower back of the image display cover 165 below the lamp relay board 166.
The base frame (liquid crystal base) 130z is a substantially rectangular ring-shaped body having an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction, and its ring-shaped front surface 131 is affixed to and fixed on the rear surface of the game board 10z. The rear surface of the base frame 130z has space for arranging various circuit boards and components.
A performance control board 55z is disposed on the rear side of the image display unit (liquid crystal unit) 160 fixed to the rear side of the base frame 130z. The image display unit 160 is configured so that it can be freely slidably mounted on the side (left-right direction), up-down direction, or diagonally of the base frame 130z in a gap (storage space) for storing the image display unit provided in front of the performance control board.
The various circuit boards arranged on the rear surface of the base frame 130z are covered with a cover member 170 (FIGS. 197 and 198).

As shown in FIG. 197, at least the RWM clear switch 680 and the setting key switch 660 of the main control board 50z are exposed on the rear side of the board case 200z.
In addition, the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 provided on the main control board 50z can be seen through the transparent board case 200z.
Staff at the gaming facility can open the door of the gaming machine and, while visually checking the performance display monitor 600 and setting display monitor 650 on the back of the gaming machine, operate the RWM clear switch 680 and the setting key switch 660 to clear the RWM, change settings, check game performance, etc.

The RWM clear switch 680 on the main control board 50z is not directly exposed, and an operating member 685 that can be operated by game arcade staff or the like protrudes from an opening provided in the board case 200z at a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 680. When a staff member or the like presses the operating member 685, the pressed operating member 685 presses the RWM clear switch 680. This operates the RWM clear switch 680.

The setting key switch 660 is a cylindrical member that protrudes from the main control board 50z and has a keyhole on the end face thereof into which a key is inserted.
An end face of the setting key switch 660 having a keyhole is exposed from an opening provided in the board case 200z.
Staff at the gaming establishment can insert a key into the keyhole of the setting key switch 660 to operate it.

<Main control board>
Next, various operations executed by the main control board 50z, which is the main control board of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, will be described.
Figure 199 is an explanatory diagram of various random numbers obtained in the main control board 50z of the pachinko machine 1, where (a) is an example of a random number for determining a special pattern, (b) is an example of a random number for determining a jackpot pattern, (c) is an example of a random number for determining a reach, and (d) is an example of a random number for determining an auxiliary pattern.
In the main control board 50z, the special symbol is determined by the random number for determining the special symbol shown in Fig. 199(a) and the random number for determining the big win symbol shown in Fig. 199(b). Also, the auxiliary symbol is determined by the random number for determining the auxiliary symbol shown in Fig. 199(d).

The random number for determining the special pattern shown in FIG. 199(a) is obtained, when the ball enters the starting port, from among random numbers ranging from "0" to "60,000", for example.
As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot (being determined to be a jackpot) can be changed by making settings using the setting key switch 660, the setting switch 670, etc.
In addition, the pachinko machine 1 may not be equipped with the setting key switch 660, setting switch 670, etc. described above, and it may be impossible to change the setting of the probability of winning the jackpot.
Even if the gaming machine is equipped with a setting key switch 660 and a setting switch 670, the only setting provided may be "1" and it may be virtually impossible to change the probability of winning a jackpot.

We will explain the random numbers used to determine special patterns when the settings can be changed.
When the setting is "1", in the low probability game state (normal game state), the probability of a jackpot is set to 1/300, and a jackpot is determined when the obtained random number value for determining the special pattern is between "100" and "299".
On the other hand, in a high probability game state, the rate of a big win is set to 1/60, and a big win is determined when the obtained random number value for determining the special symbol is between "100" and "1099". In addition, the random number value for determining the special symbol shown in FIG. 199(a) also draws a small win, which is a type of miss. Here, the rate of a small win is set to 1/300, and a small win is determined when the obtained random number value for determining the special symbol is between "2000" and "2199". In any other case, a miss is determined.

When the setting is "2", in the low probability game state (normal game state), the probability of a jackpot is set to 1/295, and a jackpot is determined when the obtained random number value for determining the special pattern is between "100" and "302".
On the other hand, in the high probability game state, the rate of big win is set to 1/59, and a big win is determined when the acquired random number value for determining the special symbol is between "100" and "1114." The rate of small win is set to 1/300, and a small win is determined when the acquired random number value for determining the special symbol is between "2000" and "2199." In any other case, it is determined to be a miss.

When the setting is "3", in the low probability game state (normal game state), the probability of a jackpot is set to 1/290, and a jackpot is determined when the obtained random number value for determining the special pattern is between "100" and "306".
On the other hand, in the high probability game state, the rate of big win is set to 1/58, and a big win is determined when the acquired random number value for determining the special symbol is between "100" and "1134." Also, the rate of small win is set to 1/300, and a small win is determined when the acquired random number value for determining the special symbol is between "2000" and "2199." In any other case, it is determined to be a miss.

When the setting is "4", in the low probability game state (normal game state), the probability of a jackpot is set to 1/285, and a jackpot is determined when the obtained random number value for determining the special pattern is between "100" and "309".
On the other hand, in the high probability game state, the rate of a big win is set to 1/57, and a big win is determined when the acquired random number value for determining the special symbol is between "100" and "1149." Also, the rate of a small win is set to 1/300, and a small win is determined when the acquired random number value for determining the special symbol is between "2000" and "2199."
In any other case, it is judged as a miss.
In the explanation of FIG. 199, four setting values from "1" to "4" are exemplified, but the setting values may be six from "1" to "6".

Next, as shown in FIG. 199(b), one random number is obtained from 250 random numbers ranging from "0" to "249" for determining a jackpot symbol. Then, based on the obtained random number for determining a jackpot symbol, one of a plurality of types of jackpots is determined.
In this embodiment, multiple types of jackpots are available, including a long jackpot with normal time reduction, a short jackpot with normal time reduction, a long jackpot with high probability of time reduction, a short jackpot with high probability of time reduction, and a short jackpot without time reduction.
The time-saving game state refers to a game state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second starting hole 14z than in the normal game state. That is, when a predetermined condition described later is satisfied, the second starting hole opening/closing door 14bz of the second starting hole 14z is changed from a closed state in which the game ball is less likely to enter to an open state in which the game ball is more likely to enter, thereby increasing the probability of the game ball entering the second starting hole 14z.

In the normal long jackpot with time reduction, the first large winning port 16z or the second large winning port 17z is opened for a relatively long time during the jackpot game, and a relatively large amount of balls can be expected to be paid out. In addition, after the jackpot game ends, a time reduction game is granted for the period until the special pattern changes a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).
In the normal short win with time reduction, the opening time of the first large winning port 16z or the second large winning port 17z is short during the jackpot game, and payout of balls cannot be expected, but after the jackpot game ends, a time reduction game is granted until the special pattern changes a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The long win with high probability and time reduction is a jackpot in which the opening time of the first big winning port 16z or the second big winning port 17z is long during the jackpot game, and the largest amount of balls can be expected to be paid out, and both a high probability game with an increased probability of winning the jackpot and a time reduction game are given after the jackpot game ends.
The short win with high probability and time reduction is a jackpot that provides both a high probability game with an increased probability of winning a jackpot and a time reduction game after the end of the jackpot game, although the opening time of the first big winning port 16z or the second big winning port 17z is short during the jackpot game and payout of balls cannot be expected.
The high-probability short win without time reduction is a jackpot that provides a high-probability game with an increased probability of winning the jackpot after the jackpot game ends, although the opening time of the first big winning port 16z or the second big winning port 17z is short and payout of balls cannot be expected during the jackpot game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the selection ratio for some types of jackpots is configured to differ between when the game ball enters the first starting hole 13z and when the game ball enters the second starting hole 14z.
For example, the rate at which a long win with normal time reduction is selected is the same at 35/250 when the game ball enters the first start hole 13z and when the game ball enters the second start hole 14z. Similarly, the rate at which a short win with normal time reduction is selected is the same at 15/250 when the game ball enters the first start hole 13z and when the game ball enters the second start hole 14z.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 199(b), if the random number value for determining the jackpot pattern obtained when the game ball enters the first starting hole 13z or the second starting hole 14z is between "0" and "34", a long jackpot with normal time reduction is selected, and if it is between "35" and "49", a short jackpot with normal time reduction is selected.

On the other hand, the ratio at which a long win with high probability of time reduction and a short win with high probability of time reduction are selected differs between when a game ball enters the first starting hole 13z and when a game ball enters the second starting hole 14z. For example, the ratio at which a long win with high probability of time reduction is selected is 25/250 when a game ball enters the first starting hole 13z and 175/250 when a game ball enters the second starting hole 14z.
In addition, the ratio of the high probability short win with time reduction being selected is 75/250 when the game ball enters the first start hole 13z, and 25/250 when the game ball enters the second start hole 14z.
In addition, the ratio of the high probability short win without time reduction being selected is set to 100/250 only when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 13z.
Specifically, if the random number value for determining the jackpot pattern obtained when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 13z is between "50" and "74", a long win with a high probability of time reduction is selected, if it is between "75" and "149", a short win with a high probability of time reduction is selected, and if it is between "150" and "249", a short win without time reduction with a high probability is selected.
On the other hand, if the random number value for determining the jackpot symbol obtained when the game ball enters the second starting hole is "50" to "224", a long win with high probability of time reduction is selected, and if it is "225" to "249", a short win with high probability of time reduction is selected.

In addition, the random number for reach determination shown in Figure 199 (c) obtains one random number from 250 random numbers between "0" and "249" at the time of the initial winning, and if the obtained random number for reach determination is between "0" and "21", it is determined that "reach is in" and if the obtained random number for reach determination is between "22" and "249", it is determined that "reach is not in"

In addition, when passing through the gate, one random number value is obtained from 10 random numbers from "0" to "9" as the random number for determining the auxiliary pattern shown in Figure 199 (d).
In a low probability game state where both the time-saving flag and the high probability flag are OFF, or in a high probability game state without time-saving where the time-saving flag is OFF and the high probability flag is ON, a win is determined only when the acquired random number value for determining the auxiliary symbol is "7".
On the other hand, in a low-probability time-saving game state where the time-saving flag is ON and the high-probability flag is OFF, or in a high-probability time-saving game state where both the time-saving flag and the high-probability flag are ON, a win is determined when the acquired random number value for determining the auxiliary symbol is between "0" and "9."

Next, the main processing executed by the main control board 50z of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described. Note that the processing described below can be realized by the main CPU 50az of the main control board 50z executing a program stored in the main ROM 50bz. Note that a description of the random number update processing will be omitted.

[Main processing of the main control board]
The main processing of the main control board 50z will be described using FIG.
200 is a flow chart showing the main processing in the main control board. This main processing is performed when a system reset, which occurs when a power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 80z, is input to the main CPU 50az.
First, the main CPU 50az performs an initial setting process in step S1. Specifically, the initial setting process includes a preparation process for starting game control, a setting change process for changing a setting value based on a setting change operation, an RWM clear process for initializing a predetermined RWM area of the main RAM 50cz based on an RWM clear operation, and a setting confirmation process for confirming a setting value based on a setting confirmation operation. The initial setting process will be described in detail later.

In step S2, the main CPU 50az updates the random number value for determining the special symbol and the random number value for determining the reach, and in step S3, updates the initial random number value for determining the jackpot, the initial random number value for determining the special symbol, the initial random number value for determining the hit, and the initial random number value for determining the normal symbol.
In step S4, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not a voltage drop detection signal indicating the occurrence of a voltage drop in the power supply (for example, a voltage drop from 24 volts to less than 18 volts) has been input from the power interruption detection circuit of the power supply board 80z. If the voltage drop detection signal has not been input (No in step S4), the process proceeds to step S2, and if the voltage drop detection signal has been input (No in step S4), the process proceeds to step S5.

In step S5, the main CPU 50az judges whether or not the voltage drop detection signal has been continuously input for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 milliseconds). If the voltage drop detection signal has been continuously input for the predetermined period (Yes in step S5), it is determined that a complete power outage has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S6. If the voltage drop detection signal has not been input for the predetermined period (No in step S5), it is determined that there is a possibility of a momentary power outage in which the voltage of the power supply drops for just an instant, and the process proceeds to step S4.
In step S6, the main CPU 50az sets an interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interruption, and in step S7, transmits a power cutoff command to the payout control board 60z to notify that the power cutoff process has started. As a result, the payout control board 60z that has received the power cutoff command transmits a remaining payout ball number command indicating the remaining payout ball number stored in the payout RAM 60cz.

In step S8, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not it has received a command to designate the number of remaining balls to be dispensed. If it has not received the command (No in step S8), it proceeds to step S9, and if it has received the command (Yes in step S8), it proceeds to step S10.
In step S9, the main CPU 50az determines whether the waiting time for receiving the remaining number of balls to be dispensed has elapsed. If the waiting time has not elapsed (No in step S9), the process proceeds to step S8. If the waiting time has elapsed (Yes in step S9), the process proceeds to step S10, assuming that normal communication with the dispense control board 60z is not possible.

In step S10, the main CPU 50az saves the number of payout balls in the payout counter set in the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz. Specifically, if a remaining payout number designation command is received, the remaining payout number specified by the remaining payout number designation command is saved, and if a remaining payout number designation command is not received, "0" is saved as the remaining payout number. The remaining payout number saved here is referenced in the timer interrupt payout control process described later, and after the power is restored, a payout number designation command according to the remaining payout number is sent to the payout control board 60z.
The main CPU 50az clears the output ports in step S11, which initializes the output states of the output ports and stops the operations of various displays and various drive sources (motors, solenoids).

In step S12, the main CPU 50az calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the main RAM 50cz and saves it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 50cz. In this way, it becomes possible to perform data abnormality determination of the RWM area by the checksum the next time the power is turned on.
In step S13, the main CPU 50az saves a backup flag indicating that the data in the main RAM 50cz has been backed up (power has been restored) in the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz, and in step S14, prohibits RWM access and thereafter waits until the power supply is completely cut off.
In this way, when the supply of the operating power (18 volts or more) required for the operation of the gaming machine 1 starts, the initial setting process is performed, but when the supply of the operating power is resumed due to the occurrence of a momentary power outage (voltage drop to less than 18 volts), the initial setting process is not performed. In other words, even if a setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, or RWM clear operation is performed due to some factor when a momentary power outage occurs, the setting change process, setting confirmation process, and RWM clear process are not executed, so that the gaming machine will not perform unintended operations, and it is possible to ensure the reliability of the gaming machine.

(Initial setting process of main control board)
Using Figure 201, the initial setting process of the main control board 50z will be described.
FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing the initial setting process of the main control board.
First, the main CPU 50az prohibits all interrupts in step S21, performs CPU initialization such as setting the built-in register in step S22, and performs startup waiting processing for other boards in step S23. Specifically, it waits for one second for the payout control board 60z and the performance control board 55z to start up so that no command from the main control board 50z is missed.

In step S24, the main CPU 50az permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz, and in step S25, transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 60z. This causes the payout control unit (payout CPU 60az, payout ROM 60bz, payout RAM 60cz) to perform processing for permitting the launch of game balls by the launch device (launch solenoid 12az).
In step S26, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not a backup flag indicating power recovery has been saved in the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz. If the backup flag has been saved (Yes in step S26), it is determined that power recovery has occurred and the process proceeds to step S27. If the backup flag has not been saved (No in step S26), it is determined that power has been turned on for the first time and the process proceeds to step S28.

In step S27, the main CPU 50az calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the main RAM 50cz, and in step S28, determines whether a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the setting key switch 660, the RWM clear switch 680, and the open detection switch 105z are in the ON state. If a setting change operation has been performed (Yes in step S28), the process proceeds to step S29 to transition to setting change mode, and if a setting change operation has not been performed (No in step S28), the process proceeds to step S30.

The main CPU 50az performs a setting change process in step S29. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 680, the main CPU 50az performs a process to change (update) the setting value (of the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery), which is the stage of the advantageous degree of the game, to initialize the control state of the game (other than the setting value area of the RWM area), and to transmit a setting change designation command indicating that the setting is being changed to the performance control board 55z, and then proceeds to step S25. As a result, the performance control board 55z performs a process to execute a setting change notification indicating that the setting value is being changed.
The "setting change notification" refers to displaying a setting change screen on the image display device to let the user know that the setting value is being changed, or lighting up all of the frame lamps 101z and board lamps 100z in a predetermined light color (e.g., white) throughout the setting change. Note that the audio output device 34 may output a setting change notification sound ("setting change in progress") indicating that the setting is being changed.

In step S30, the main CPU 50az determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it determines whether the checksum saved in the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz matches the checksum calculated in step S27. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the RWM area) (Yes in step S30), the process proceeds to step S31, and if the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the RWM area) (No in step S30), the process proceeds to step S32.
If the backup flag has not been saved, that is, when the power is turned on for the first time, the checksum is determined to be abnormal.

In step S31, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not there is a setting change flag in the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz indicating that a setting change is in progress. If there is no setting change flag (No in step S31), the process proceeds to step S33 assuming that the previous power outage did not occur during the setting change process. If there is a setting change flag (Yes in step S31), the process proceeds to step S32 assuming that the previous power outage occurred during the setting change process. The setting change flag is saved in the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz when the setting change process begins, and is cleared from the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz when the setting change process ends.

In step S32, the main CPU 50az performs irrecoverable error processing. Specifically, it displays error information indicating an irrecoverable error on the information display 113, transmits an irrecoverable error designation command indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred to the performance control board 55z, sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interruption, clears the output port, and then outputs an irrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an irrecoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 27z, and performs processing to wait until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the performance control board 55z performs processing to execute an irrecoverable error notification indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred. An "irrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is not performed (the game control is not transferred), and is not released unless a setting change process is performed. Therefore, when an irrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 80z is turned OFF and then turned ON without a setting change operation, the error is not released, and the power switch must be turned ON with a setting change operation. Furthermore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, the system does not monitor the presence or absence of signals from various input devices (various switches, various sensors).

"Notifying an irrecoverable error" refers to displaying an irrecoverable error screen ("An irrecoverable error. Please change the settings.") on the image display device to make the user aware that an irrecoverable error has occurred, turning on all of the frame lamps 101z and board lamps 100z in a specified light color (e.g., red) until the power is turned off, and outputting an irrecoverable error sound ("An irrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) from the audio output device 34 indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred until the power is turned off.

In step S33, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not an RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the RWM clear switch 680 and the open detection switch 105z are in the ON state. If an RWM clear operation has been performed (Yes in step S33), the process proceeds to step S24 as a transition to the RWM clear mode, and if an RWM clear operation has not been performed (No in step S33), the process proceeds to step S36.
The main CPU 50az performs an RWM clear process in step S34. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 680, the main CPU 50az performs a process to initialize the game control state (initialize everything except the set value area of the RWM area) and to transmit an RWM clear designation command indicating that preparation for RWM clear is in progress to the performance control board 55z, and then proceeds to step S25. As a result, the performance control board 55z performs a process to execute an RWM clear preparation notification indicating that preparation for RWM clear is in progress.

The "RWM clear preparation notification" refers to displaying a clear confirmation screen on the image display device to make the user aware that the RWM will be cleared by operating the RWM clear switch 680, or lighting up all of the frame lamps 101z and board lamps 100z in a predetermined light color (e.g., white) during the RWM clear confirmation. Note that a confirmation notification sound ("RWM will be cleared by operating the RWM clear switch") indicating that the RWM clear confirmation is in progress may be output from the audio output device 34.
In step S35, the main CPU 50az transmits a power-on command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, the low probability non-time-limited game state as the normal game state) to the payout control board 60z and the performance control board 55z, and proceeds to step S31. As a result, the performance control board 55z performs processing to execute a power-on notification indicating that the game control state has been initialized.

A "power-on notification" refers to displaying the initial screen (background image and initial performance pattern "123") on the image display device when the power is turned on to let the user know that the game control state has been initialized, turning on all of the frame lamps 101z and board lamps 100z in a predetermined light color (e.g. white) for a predetermined period of time (e.g. 60 seconds), and outputting a power-on notification sound ("RWM has been cleared" + buzzer sound) from the audio output device 34 for a predetermined period of time (e.g. 30 seconds) indicating that the RWM area has been initialized.

In step S36, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not a setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the setting key switch 660 and the open detection switch 105z are in the ON state. If a setting confirmation operation has been performed (Yes in step S36), the process proceeds to step S37 to transition to setting confirmation mode, and if a setting confirmation operation has not been performed (No in step S36), the process proceeds to step S38 to return the game control state to the state before the power was turned off.

The main CPU 50az performs setting confirmation processing in step S37. Specifically, it performs processing to display the setting values saved in the setting value area of the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz on the information display 113 and to send a setting confirmation command indicating that the setting is being confirmed to the performance control board 55z. As a result, the performance control board 55z performs processing to execute a setting confirmation notification indicating that the setting value is being confirmed.

A "settings confirmation notification" refers to displaying a settings confirmation screen on the image display device to notify the user that the settings are being confirmed, or to lighting up all of the frame lamps 101z and panel lamps 100z in a predetermined light color (e.g., white) during the setting confirmation. In addition, a settings confirmation notification sound ("settings confirmation in progress") indicating that the settings are being confirmed may be output from the audio output device 34.

In step S38, the main CPU 50az clears (clears to 0) the backup flag and checksum saved in the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz, and sets the RWM area for when power is restored. This returns (restores) the game progress state (control state) to the state before the power was cut off, making it possible to resume gameplay from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S39, the main CPU 50az transmits a power restoration command to the presentation control board 55z, indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power outage occurred. This causes the presentation control board 55z to perform processing to end the setting confirmation notification, etc., described below, and execute a power restoration notification indicating that the game control state has returned to the state before the power outage.

The "power restoration notification" refers to displaying a power restoration screen (image) on the image display device for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) to make the user recognize that the game control state has returned to the state before the power was cut off, turning on all of the frame lamps 101z and board lamps 100z in a predetermined light color (e.g., white) for a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds), or outputting a power restoration notification sound (buzzer sound) from the audio output device 34 for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) to indicate that the power has been restored (from a power outage).
In step S40, the main CPU 50az transmits other commands (such as a special symbol storage command and a normal symbol storage command, which will be described later) to the performance control board 55z. This allows the performance control board 55z to grasp the number of special symbols reserved, and also performs processing to display the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the image display device.

In step S41, the main CPU 50az starts the CTC (counter timer circuit) to generate a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step S32, it allows all interrupts and ends this initial setting process.

In this way, multiple conditions (operations) are set for the setting change operation, RWM clear operation, and setting confirmation operation, making it difficult to change settings, clear the RWM, or confirm settings, which makes it possible to suppress fraudulent activity and improve the security of the gaming machine.

In addition, by having more conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation than for the RWM clear operation or the setting check operation, it is possible to increase security for the event in which fraudulent activity is most likely to occur (setting changes), and to effectively prevent fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, if the checksum is abnormal, an unrecoverable error process is executed to stop the progress of the game, thereby preventing the gaming machine from performing unexpected operations that cause inconvenience to gaming facilities and players, thereby improving the reliability of the gaming machine.
In addition, if there is a setting change in progress flag, that is, if the previous power outage occurred while the settings were being changed, even if the checksum is normal, an unrecoverable error process is executed to stop game progress. This prevents game play from progressing with a setting value that was not intended by the gaming facility, thereby improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

In addition, the setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation include the open detection switch 105z being in the ON state, but the open detection switch 105z being in the ON state may not be included.
Furthermore, if it is determined that a backup flag exists (power has been restored) and that no setting change operation has been performed, then if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in the subsequent step S40, an irrecoverable error process is executed; however, at the point in time when it is determined that the checksum is abnormal, the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz may be initialized (cleared to 0), an initial value of "1" may be saved in the setting value area, and the process may proceed to step S25.

In addition, the power-on command and power restoration command are transmitted including information indicating the current game status, but after transmitting the power-on command or power restoration command, a game status designation command indicating the current game status may be transmitted.
Also, by not judging whether or not the setting change in progress flag is present, unrecoverable error processing may be prevented from being performed even if the previous power outage occurred during a setting change.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Figure 202 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the main control board.
The main CPU 50az executes timer interrupt processing, such as random number update processing (S61), start port SW processing (S62), gate detection SW processing (S63), special pattern processing (S64), customer waiting setting processing (S65), auxiliary pattern processing (S66), large prize port processing (S67), and second start port opening processing (S68).

Next, various processes executed as the timer interrupt process will be described.
[Start port SW processing]
Figure 203 is a flowchart showing an example of a start port SW processing executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In this case, in step S101, the main CPU 50az determines whether the first start port detection SW13a of the first start port 13z is ON or not, and if it determines that the first start port detection SW13a is ON, in step S102, it determines whether the reserved number U1 of the first start port detection SW13a is less than "4".
Here, if it is determined that the reserved number U1 is less than "4", in step S103, "1" is added to the reserved number U1. After that, in step S104, the special symbol determination random number value for the special symbol, the jackpot symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number value, the variable pattern random number value, and the like are obtained and stored in the main RAM 50cz.
In this embodiment, it is assumed that 180 variation pattern random number values (0 to 179) are prepared.

Then, in step S105, the main CPU 50az increases the reserved number displayed on the first special symbol reserved display 23 and sets a first reserved number increase command. After the first reserved number increase command is set, the main CPU 50az transmits the first reserved number increase command to the performance control board 55z. Note that if a negative result is obtained in step S102, that is, if the reserved number U1 is determined to be "4", which is the maximum number that can be reserved, the process skips steps S103 to S105 and proceeds to step S106.

Next, in step S106, the main CPU 50az determines whether the second start port detection SW14a of the second start port 14z is ON or not, and if it determines that the second start port detection SW14a is ON, in step S107, it determines whether the reserved number U2 of the second start port detection SW14a is less than "4".
Here, if it is determined that the reserved number U2 is less than "4", in step S108, "1" is added to the reserved number U2. After that, in step S109, the special symbol determination random number value for the special symbol, the jackpot symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number value, the variable pattern random number value, and the like are obtained and stored in the main RAM 50cz.

Next, in step S110, the main CPU 50az increases the reserved number on the second special symbol reserved indicator 24 and sets a second reserved number increase command. After the second reserved number increase command is set, the main CPU 50az transmits the second reserved number increase command to the performance control board 55z and ends the start port SW processing. Note that if a negative result is obtained in step S107, that is, if the reserved number U2 is determined to be "4", which is the maximum number that can be reserved, the start port SW processing ends.

[Gate detection SW processing]
Figure 204 is a flowchart showing an example of a gate detection SW processing executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In step S121, the main CPU 50a determines whether the gate detection SW 15a of the gate 15z is ON or not, and if it determines that the gate detection SW 15a is ON, in step S122, it determines whether the number of gate passes G of the gate detection SW 15a is less than "4".

If it is determined in step S122 that the number of times G passed through the gate is less than "4", then in step S123, "1" is added to the number of times G passed through the gate, and in the following step S124, a random number for determining the auxiliary pattern is obtained and stored in the main RAM 50cz, and the gate detection SW processing is terminated.
In addition, if it is determined in step S121 that the gate detection SW 15a is not ON, or if a negative result is obtained in step S122, that is, if it is determined that the number of gate passes G is "4", which is the maximum number that can be held, the gate detection SW processing is terminated.

[Special pattern processing]
Figure 205 is a flowchart showing an example of special pattern processing executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In step S131, the main CPU 50az determines whether the special game flag is ON or not, that is, whether a big win game or a small win game is being played, and if it determines that a big win game or a small win game is not being played, in the following step S132, it determines whether the special pattern of the first special pattern display device 20z or the second special pattern display device 21 is changing or not.
If it is determined in step S132 that the special pattern is not changing, then in step S133 it is determined whether the reserved number U2 of the second start hole detection SW14a, which is to be consumed preferentially, is greater than "1", and if it is determined in step S133 that the reserved number U2 is greater than "1", in step S134 the reserved number U2 is decremented by "1".

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S133 that the reserved number U2 is not ≧1, that is, if the reserved number U2 is "0", then in step S135 it is determined whether the reserved number U1 of the first start port detection SW13a is greater than "1", and if it is determined in step S135 that the reserved number U1 is greater than "1", then in the following step S136, "1" is subtracted from the reserved number U1.

Next, in step S137, the main CPU 50az turns the customer waiting flag OFF if it is ON, and then executes a special game determination process (FIG. 207) described later in step S138. After the special game determination process is executed in step S138, a variation pattern selection process (FIG. 208) described later is executed in step S139. After the variation pattern selection process is executed in step S139, the corresponding first special pattern display device 20z or second special pattern display device 21 starts to vary in pattern in step S140, and a variation start command to be sent to the performance control board 55z is set in the following step S141.
The fluctuation start commands include a fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation time of the special pattern, a big win or small win command indicating the lottery result of the big win lottery, a big win pattern command indicating the lottery result of the big win pattern, a reach command indicating the lottery result of the reach lottery, a game status command regarding the current game status, etc.

Next, in step S142, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the variation time of the first or second special symbol has passed a predetermined variation time.
If it is determined in step S142 that the predetermined variation time has elapsed, then in the following step S143, the variation of the first special pattern display device 20z or the second special pattern display device 21 is stopped and the predetermined special pattern is displayed.
After this, in step S144, a fluctuation stop command is set, and in the following step S145, the stopped processing (FIG. 210) described later is executed to terminate the special pattern processing.

It should be noted that, in step S131, if it is determined that the special game flag is ON, or in step S142, if it is determined that the change time of the special symbol has not reached the predetermined change time, the special symbol processing is terminated.
If it is determined in step S132 that the special symbol is changing, the process proceeds to step S142, where it is determined whether or not the change time of the special symbol has passed a predetermined change time.
Also, in step S135, if it is determined that the reserved number U1 is not ≧1, that is, if it is determined that there are no reserved numbers U1 and U2, in step S146, the customer waiting setting process shown in FIG. 206 is executed and the special pattern processing is terminated.

[Customer waiting setting process]
FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing an example of a customer waiting setting process executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In step S151, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON, and if it determines that the customer waiting flag is ON, ends the customer waiting setting process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S151 that the customer waiting flag is not ON, a customer waiting command is set in step S152, and in the following step S153, the customer waiting flag is set ON, and then the customer waiting setting process is terminated.
The customer waiting flag is turned from OFF to ON when a state where there is no jackpot and no special symbols are reserved continues for a predetermined period of time.

[Special Game Judgment Processing]
Figure 207 is a flowchart showing an example of a special game determination process executed by the CPU of the main control board.
The main CPU 50az judges the random number value for determining the special symbol stored in the main RAM 50cz in step S161, and judges whether or not a big win has been won in the following step S162.
If it is determined in step S162 that a jackpot has been won, then in the following step S163, a random number value for determining the jackpot pattern stored in the main RAM 50c is determined, and in step S164, based on the determination result, the jackpot pattern to be displayed on the first special pattern display device 20z or the second special pattern display device 21 is set, and the special game determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S162 that the big win has not been won, then in step S165, it is determined whether or not a small win has been won based on the random number value for determining the special symbol.
If it is determined in step S165 that a small win has been won, then in the following step S166, a small win pattern to be displayed on the first special pattern display device 20z or the second special pattern display device 21 is set, and the special game determination process is terminated.
Also, if it is determined in step S165 that a small win has not been won, in step S167, a losing pattern to be displayed on the first special pattern display device 20z or the second special pattern display device 21 is set, and the special game determination process is terminated.

[Variation pattern selection process]
Figure 208 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern selection process executed by the CPU of the main control board.
First, in step S171, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not a time-saving flag indicating a time-saving game state is ON. If it is determined in step S171 that the time-saving flag is ON, the main CPU 50az sets a time-saving game state table as a variation pattern table in the following step S172, and proceeds to step S174.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S171 that the time-shortening flag is not ON, in step S173, the table for the non-time-shortening game state is set as the fluctuation pattern table, and the process proceeds to step S174.
Next, in step S174, the main CPU 50az determines the previously acquired fluctuation pattern random number value, and in the following step S175, sets the fluctuation pattern based on the set fluctuation pattern table and the fluctuation pattern random number value, and terminates the fluctuation pattern selection process.

Figure 209 shows an example of a fluctuation pattern table, where (a) is an example of a fluctuation pattern table for a non-time-saving game state, and (b) is an example of a fluctuation pattern table for a time-saving game state.

First, the non-time-saving gaming state fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 209(a) will be explained.
In the non-time-saving game state variation pattern table shown in Fig. 209(a), when the special symbol determination result is a big win and the variation pattern random number value is "0 to 89", variation pattern 1 with a long variation time of 90 seconds is selected. When variation pattern 1 is selected, a winning performance accompanied by reach A is performed.

Also, when the special symbol determination result is a big win and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "90 to 179," a fluctuation pattern 2 in which the fluctuation time is 60 seconds is selected. When the fluctuation pattern 2 is selected, a winning performance accompanied by reach B is performed.
In addition, when the special symbol determination result is a small win, regardless of the selected variation pattern random number value "0 to 179", variation pattern 3 with a variation time of 60 seconds is selected. When variation pattern 3 is selected, a chance performance is performed.

Next, a case where the special symbol determination result is a miss and the game state is the non-time-saving game state will be described.
If the random number value for determining the special pattern is a miss, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern, the random number value for reach determination, the fluctuation pattern random number value, etc.
Specifically, when the total number of reserved balls for the first and second special symbols is "0-2" and the reach judgment random number value is "22-249" and there is no reach, regardless of the selected variation pattern random number value "0-179", variation pattern 4 with a variation time of 12 seconds is selected. When variation pattern 4 is selected, the normal variation A performance is performed.

On the other hand, when the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "0-2", the random number value for reach judgment is "0-21" indicating a reach, and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0-29", the fluctuation pattern 5 with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is selected. When the fluctuation pattern 5 is selected, a miss performance accompanied by reach A is performed.
In addition, when the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "0-2", the reach judgment random number value is "0-21" with a reach, and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "30-179", the fluctuation pattern 6 with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected. When the fluctuation pattern 6 is selected, a miss performance accompanied by reach B is performed.

Next, when the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "3" and the reach judgment random number value is "22 to 249" and there is no reach, regardless of the selected variation pattern random number value "0 to 179", variation pattern 7 with a variation time of 8 seconds is selected. When variation pattern 7 is selected, the normal variation B performance is performed.
In addition, if the total number of reserved balls for the first and second special symbols is "3", the random number value for reach determination is "0 to 21" indicating a reach, and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0 to 29", fluctuation pattern 5, in which the above-mentioned fluctuation time is 90 seconds, is selected.
In addition, if the total number of reserved balls for the first and second special symbols is "3", the random number value for reach determination is "0 to 21" indicating a reach, and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "30 to 179", fluctuation pattern 6, in which the above-mentioned fluctuation time is 30 seconds, is selected.

In addition, when the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "4 to 8" and the reach judgment random number value is "22 to 249" and there is no reach, regardless of the selected variation pattern random number value "0 to 179", variation pattern 8 with a variation time of 4 seconds is selected. When variation pattern 8 is selected, the shortened variation A is performed.
In addition, if the total number of reserved balls for the first and second special symbols is "4 to 8", the random number value for reach determination is "0 to 21" indicating a reach, and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0 to 29", fluctuation pattern 5, in which the above-mentioned fluctuation time is 90 seconds, is selected.
In addition, if the total number of reserved balls for the first and second special symbols is "4 to 8", the random number value for reach determination is "0 to 21" indicating a reach, and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "30 to 179", fluctuation pattern 6, in which the above-mentioned fluctuation time is 30 seconds, is selected.

Next, the time-saving game state variation pattern table shown in Fig. 209 (b) will be explained. Note that the time-saving game state variation pattern table shown in Fig. 209 (b) is the same as the non-time-saving game state variation pattern table shown in Fig. 209 (a) in terms of the method of determining the variation pattern at the time of big win or small win, so the explanation is omitted, and here, only the case where the special symbol determination random number value is a miss and the game state is the time-saving game state will be explained.
If the random number value for determining the special pattern is a miss, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern, the random number value for reaching the target, the fluctuation pattern random number value, etc.
Specifically, when the total number of reserved balls for the first and second special symbols is "0-5" and the reach judgment random number value is "22-249" and there is no reach, regardless of the selected variation pattern random number value "0-179", variation pattern 4 with a variation time of 12 seconds is selected. When variation pattern 4 is selected, the normal variation A performance is performed.

On the other hand, when the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "0 to 5", the reach judgment random number value is "0 to 21" and there is a reach, and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0 to 29", the fluctuation pattern 5 with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is selected. When the fluctuation pattern 5 is selected, a miss performance accompanied by reach A is performed.
In addition, when the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "0-5", the reach judgment random number value is "0-21" with a reach, and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "30-179", the fluctuation pattern 6 with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected. When the fluctuation pattern 6 is selected, a miss performance accompanied by reach B is performed.

On the other hand, when the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "6 to 8" and the reach judgment random number value is "22 to 249" and there is no reach, regardless of the selected variation pattern random number value "0 to 179", variation pattern 9 with a variation time of 2 seconds is selected. When variation pattern 9 is selected, the shortened variation B is performed.
In addition, if the total number of reserved balls for the first and second special symbols is "6 to 8", the random number value for reach determination is "0 to 21" indicating a reach, and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0 to 29", the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern 5 will be selected.
In addition, if the total number of reserved balls for the first and second special symbols is "6 to 8", the random number value for reach determination is "0 to 21" indicating a reach, and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "30 to 179", the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern 6 will be selected.
In this embodiment, when a jackpot is won, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the random number value for determining the special pattern and the fluctuation pattern random number value. However, this is merely one example, and the fluctuation pattern may be determined based on the random number value for determining the special pattern and the random number value for determining the jackpot pattern, or the fluctuation pattern may be determined based on the random number value for determining the special pattern, the random number value for determining the jackpot pattern, and the fluctuation pattern random number value.

[Stop processing]
FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing an example of processing during stoppage executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In step S181, the main CPU 50az determines whether the time-saving flag is ON or not, and if it determines that the time-saving flag is ON, in the following step S182, it subtracts "1" from the remaining number of games J of the time-saving game stored in the main RAM 50cz.

Next, in step S183, the main CPU 50az determines whether the remaining number of games J is "0" or not. If the remaining number of games J is "0", this means that the variable display of the special pattern has been performed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times) in the time-saving game, and therefore in the following step S184, the time-saving flag is turned OFF.
If it is determined in step S181 that the time-saving flag is not ON, or if it is determined in step S183 that the remaining number of games J is not "0", the process proceeds to step S185.

Next, in the following step S185, the main CPU 50az determines whether the high probability flag is ON or not, and if it determines that the high probability flag is ON, in the following step S186, subtracts "1" from the remaining number of games X of the high probability game stored in the main RAM 50cz.
Next, in step S187, the main CPU 50az determines whether the remaining number of games X is "0" or not. If the remaining number of games X is "0", this means that the variable display of the special symbol has been performed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10,000 times) in the high probability game, and therefore in the following step S188, the high probability flag is turned OFF.
If it is determined in step S185 that the high probability flag is not ON, or if it is determined in step S187 that the remaining number of games X is not "0", the process proceeds to step S189.

Next, in step S189, the main CPU 50az judges whether or not a jackpot has been reached based on the special symbol set on the first special symbol display device 20z or the second special symbol display device 21. If it judges that the jackpot has not been reached, it then judges in step S190 whether or not the set special symbol is a "small jackpot." If it judges that the jackpot has been reached, the small jackpot game flag is turned ON in step S191. After this, in step S192, the opening of the jackpot is started, and in step S193, a jackpot opening command is set, and the stopped processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S190 that the winning combination is not a small win, the variable stop processing is terminated without turning on the small win game flag.
Also, if it is determined in step S189 that it is a jackpot, then in step S194 it is determined whether the jackpot is a long jackpot or not, and if it is determined that it is a long jackpot, in step S195 the long jackpot game flag (special game flag) is turned ON, and if not, in step S196 the short jackpot game flag (special game flag) is turned ON. After this, in step S197 the remaining number of games J of the time-saving game and the remaining number of games X of the high probability game are each set to "0", and the remaining number of games J/X is reset, and then in step S198 the time-saving flag and the high probability flag are turned OFF, and the process proceeds to step S192.

[Auxiliary pattern processing]
Figure 211 is a flowchart showing an example of auxiliary pattern processing executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In step S201, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON, and if it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is ON, ends the auxiliary symbol process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S201 that the auxiliary game flag is not ON, it is determined in step S202 whether the auxiliary symbol is changing or not. If it is determined in step S202 that the auxiliary symbol is not changing, it is determined in step S203 whether the gate passing number G, which stores the number of times the game ball has passed through the gate detection SW15a, is greater than "1". If the gate passing number G is greater than "1", the gate passing number G is decremented by "1" in the following step S204. If it is determined that the gate passing number G is not greater than "1", that is, if it is "0", the auxiliary symbol processing is terminated.

Next, the main CPU 50az determines a random number value for determining an auxiliary symbol in step S205, sets a stopped symbol to be displayed on the auxiliary symbol display device 22 in the following step S206, and sets a variable time in step S207.
Here, the variation time of the auxiliary symbols may be set to, for example, 4.0 seconds if the time-saving flag is OFF, and to, for example, 1.5 seconds if the time-saving flag is ON.
Next, in step S209, the main CPU 50az judges whether the change time of the auxiliary symbols has elapsed a predetermined time or not, and if it judges that the predetermined change time has elapsed, it stops the change in step S210. On the other hand, if it judges that the change time of the auxiliary symbols has not elapsed a predetermined time in step S209, it ends the auxiliary symbol processing.

Next, in step S211, the main CPU 50a determines whether or not the auxiliary symbol is a winning symbol. If the auxiliary symbol is a winning symbol, the main CPU 50a turns on the auxiliary game flag in step S212 and ends the auxiliary symbol processing.
In addition, in step S211, when it is determined that the stopped symbol is not a winning symbol, the auxiliary game flag is not turned ON and the auxiliary symbol process is terminated.
Also, in step S202, if it is determined that the auxiliary symbols are changing, the process proceeds to step S209, where it is determined whether or not the change time of the auxiliary symbols has passed a predetermined change time.

[Big prize slot processing]
Figure 212 is a flowchart showing an example of a large prize slot processing executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In step S221, the main CPU 50az judges whether the small win game flag or the special game flag is ON or not, and if it judges that the small win game flag or the special game flag is ON, it judges whether or not the opening is in progress in step S222. If it judges in step S222 that the opening of the big win is in progress, it next judges in step S223 whether or not the opening time has elapsed. If it is judged in step S223 that the opening time has elapsed, it sets the value of the number of rounds R to "0" and sets the number of rounds (number of Rs)/operation pattern in the following step S224.

FIG. 213 is a diagram showing an example of the number of rounds/operation pattern settings. For example, if the special game is a normal long hit with time reduction, the number of rounds (R number) is set to 4R, and the operation pattern in 1R is set to 29.5 seconds open x 1 time. If the jackpot is a normal short hit with time reduction, the number of rounds (R number) is set to 2R, and the operation pattern in 1R is set to 0.1 seconds open x 1 time. If the jackpot is a long hit with high probability time reduction, the number of rounds (R number) is set to 16R, and the operation pattern in 1R is set to 29.5 seconds open x 1 time. If the jackpot is a short hit with high probability time reduction or a short hit without high probability time reduction, the number of rounds (R number) is set to 2R, and the operation pattern in 1R is set to 0.1 seconds open x 1 time.
Also, in the case of a small win, for example, the number of rounds (R number) is set to 1R, and the operation pattern during 1R is set to 0.1 second opening x 2 times.

Next, in step S225, the main CPU 50az sets the number counter C, which indicates the number of prizes won per round in the first large prize opening 16 or the second large prize opening 17z, to "0", and in the following step S226, adds "1" to the value of the number of rounds R. Then, in the following step S227, the operation of the first large prize opening 16 or the second large prize opening 17z is started. In other words, either the first large prize opening 16 or the second large prize opening 17z is changed from a closed state to an open state.

Next, in step S228, the main CPU 50az determines whether the operation time of the first large prize slot 16 or the second large prize slot 17z has elapsed a predetermined time, and if it determines that the operation time has not elapsed the predetermined time, then in the following step S229, it determines whether the value of the quantity counter C has reached a specified number.
In step S229, when it is determined that the value of the number counter C is equal to the specified number C, the operation of the first large prize opening 16 or the second large prize opening 17z is terminated in step S230. In other words, the first large prize opening 16 or the second large prize opening 17z that is in the open state is closed.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the number counter C has not reached the specified number, the large prize opening process is terminated.
Also, in step S228, if the operation time of the first large prize opening 16 or the second large prize opening 17z has exceeded a predetermined operation time, the processing of step S229 is skipped, and without checking the number in the quantity counter C, the operation of the first large prize opening 16 or the second large prize opening 17z is terminated in step S230.

Next, in step S231, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the number of big win rounds is the maximum number of rounds R. That is, it determines whether or not the big win round is the final round.
If it is determined in step S231 that the big win round is the final round, an ending is started in step S232, and an ending command is set in step S233.

Next, the main CPU 50az sets the value of the number of rounds R to "0" in step S234. After that, in step S235, it is determined whether the ending time has elapsed, and if it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, it executes a game state setting process described later in the following step S236. After that, in step S237, it turns off the special game flag and ends the big prize opening process.
Also, if it is determined in step S222 that the jackpot is not in the opening stage, then in step S238 it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in the ending stage, and if it is determined that the jackpot is in the ending stage, the process proceeds to step S235, and if it is determined that the jackpot is not in the ending stage, then in step S239 it is determined whether or not the jackpot opening is in operation.

In step S239, if it is determined that the first large prize opening 16 or the second large prize opening 17z is in operation, the process proceeds to step S228, and if it is determined that the first large prize opening 16 or the second large prize opening 17z is not in operation, the process proceeds to step S225.
If it is determined in step S221 that the opening time has not elapsed, the large prize opening process is terminated. Similarly, if it is determined in step S229 that the value of the number counter C has not reached a specified number, if it is determined in step S231 that the large prize round is not the final round, or if it is determined in step S235 that the ending time has not elapsed, the large prize opening process is also terminated.

[Game Status Setting Process]
Figure 214 is a flowchart showing an example of a game status setting process executed by the CPU of the main control board.
The main CPU 50az first determines whether or not a small win has occurred in step S241, and if it determines that a small win has occurred, ends the game state setting process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S241 that the winning combination is not a small win, then in step S242 it is determined whether or not the winning combination is a normal win (normal long win with time-saving or normal short win with time-saving), and if it is determined that the winning combination is a normal win, in step S243 the time-saving flag is turned ON, and in step S244 the remaining number of games J of the time-saving game is set to, for example, "100", and the game status setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S242 that the winning combination is not a normal win, it is a jackpot that awards a high probability game, so in step S245, the high probability flag is turned ON, and in step S246, the remaining number of games X for the high probability game is set to, for example, "10,000."

Next, in step S247, the main CPU 50az determines whether the win is a win with time-saving function or not, and if it is determined that it is a win with time-saving function, in step S248, the time-saving flag is turned ON, and in step S249, the remaining number of games J for the time-saving game is set to, for example, "10,000", and the game status setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a win with time-saving function in step S247, the time-saving flag is turned OFF in step S250, and in step S251, the remaining number of games J for the time-saving game is reset, and the game status setting process is terminated.

[Second starting hole opening process]
Figure 215 is a flowchart showing an example of a second starting hole opening process executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In step S261, the main CPU 50az judges whether the auxiliary game flag is ON or not, and if it judges that the auxiliary game flag is ON, it next judges in step S262 whether the second start opening door 14bz is operating or not. If the second start opening door 14bz is not operating (open) in step S262, in step S263, it sets the operation pattern of the second start opening door 14bz according to the game state, and in step S264, it starts the operation of the second start opening door 14bz.
Here, the operation pattern (time) of the second starting port opening/closing door 14bz to be set can be, for example, set to 0.15 seconds opening x 1 time if the time-saving flag is OFF, and 1.80 seconds opening x 3 times if the time-saving flag is ON.

Next, in step S265, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed during operation of the second start port opening/closing door 14bz, and if it determines that the predetermined operation time has elapsed, in step S266, it turns OFF the auxiliary game flag and terminates the second start port opening process.
In addition, if it is determined in step S262 that the second starting port opening/closing door 14bz is in operation, the process proceeds to step S265.
Also, if it is determined in step S261 that the auxiliary game flag is not ON, or if it is determined in step S265 that the operation time of the second start port 14z has not elapsed, the second start port opening process is terminated.

In this manner, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, for example, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 13z while the variation of the special pattern displayed on the first special pattern display device 20z or the second special pattern display device 21 is stopped, the ball entry triggers the acquisition of a random number value for determining a special pattern, a random number value for determining a jackpot pattern, a random number value for determining a reach, etc. by lottery, and the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 20z is caused to vary and be displayed. Then, if it is determined that the acquired random number value for determining a special pattern is a win in a special game, the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 20z is caused to stop at a specific pattern. After this, one of the special games, a long win, a short win, or a small win, is executed.

During a long win game, a player can win a prize by shooting a game ball at the first large prize opening 16 or the second large prize opening 17z, which is in an open state.
On the other hand, during a short win game, the opening time of the large prize opening is extremely short, so even if a game ball is shot aiming at the first large prize opening 16 or the second large prize opening 17z, it is difficult to win any balls.

Similarly, for example, when the variation of the special pattern displayed on the first special pattern display device 20z or the second special pattern display device 21 has stopped, if a game ball enters the second starting hole 14z, this ball entry triggers a lottery to obtain a random number value for determining a special pattern, a random number value for determining a jackpot pattern, a random number value for determining a reach, etc., and causes the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 21 to be displayed in a varying manner.
Then, when it is determined that the acquired random number value for determining the special symbol wins the special game, the second special symbol of the second special symbol display device 21 is stopped at a specific symbol. After this, either the big win (long win or short win) or the small win is executed as the special game. During the long win game, balls can be obtained by shooting the game balls at the first big win opening 16 or the second big win opening 17z, which are in an open state for a predetermined period of time. On the other hand, as described above, during the short win game, the opening time of the big win opening is extremely short, so that it is difficult to obtain almost any balls even if the game balls are shot at the first big win opening 16 or the second big win opening 17z.

After the jackpot game ends, based on the result of the lottery of the random number value for determining the jackpot pattern, the game state will transition to one of the following bonus games: normal time-saving game in which a time-saving game accompanied by opening support for the second starting opening opening/closing door 14bz is played for a predetermined period of time, high-probability time-saving game in which the above-mentioned time-saving game and a high-probability game in which the probability of winning a jackpot is considered to be high are played for a predetermined period of time (so-called high-probability game), or high-probability game without time-saving game in which only high-probability game is played for a predetermined period of time (so-called latent high-probability game).
The high probability game continues until the number of times the special symbols change reaches a preset number of times (for example, 10,000 times) or until another big win is won.

On the other hand, the time-saving game continues until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a preset number of times (for example, 100 times in normal time-saving game, or 10,000 times in high-probability time-saving game) or until another jackpot is won.
During the time-saving game, the time from the start of the special symbol variation to the end of the variation is set to be shorter than that during the normal game, and the probability of winning the auxiliary symbol is set to be higher than that during the normal game.
Furthermore, the opening time of the second start opening door 14bz when the auxiliary symbol is won is set longer than that during normal play.
Therefore, during the time-saving game, the winning rate of the game ball into the second starting hole 14z becomes higher than during the normal game, so that the player can significantly improve the game efficiency compared to during the normal game by shooting the game ball aiming at the second starting hole 14z.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is configured so that the player is more likely to win a jackpot advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the second start hole 14z than when the game ball enters the first start hole 13z, making it easier for the player to win a jackpot advantageous to the player during time-saving play than during normal play.

Next, the processing executed by the performance control board 55z will be described.
[Timer interrupt processing]
Fig. 216 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the performance control board. The timer interrupt process shown in Fig. 216 can be realized by the sub-CPU 55az of the performance control board 55z executing a program stored in the sub-ROM 55bz.
In this case, the sub-CPU 55az of the performance control board 55z executes a command receiving process (step S310), a performance button process (step S320), a command sending process (step S330), etc. as timer interrupt processing.

Next, an example of a main process executed by the sub-CPU 55az of the performance control board 55z as a timer interrupt process will be described. The process described below can also be realized by the sub-CPU 55az of the performance control board 55z executing a program stored in the sub-ROM 55bz.

[Command reception process]
Figure 217 is a flowchart showing an example of a command receiving process executed by the CPU of the performance control board.
In step S401, the sub-CPU 55az determines whether or not a pending number increase command has been received, and if it determines that a pending number increase command has been received, in step S402, executes pending number increase command reception processing.
Next, in step S403, the sub-CPU 55az determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received, and if it is determined that a fluctuation start command has been received, in the following step S404, executes a performance selection process.
The effect selection process in step S404 is a process for selecting an effect to be performed while the special symbols are varying.
In addition, if it is determined in step S403 that the fluctuation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S405 without executing the performance selection process.

Next, in step S405, the sub-CPU 55az determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received, and if it determines that a fluctuation stop command has been received, in the following step S406, executes processing during the end of the fluctuation performance.
Processing during the end of the variable performance includes analysis of the variable stop command, various processing such as changing the mode flag based on the analysis results, and processing to set the variable performance end command.
In addition, if it is determined in step S405 that the fluctuation stop command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S407 without executing the processing during the end of the fluctuation performance.

Next, in step S407, the sub-CPU 55az determines whether or not an opening command has been received, and if it is determined that an opening command has been received, in the following step S408, executes a special game effect selection process.
The special game effect selection process includes analysis of an opening command, a special game effect pattern selection process, and a process for setting an opening effect start command.
If it is determined in step S407 that the opening command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S409 without executing the special game effect selection process.

Next, in step S409, the sub-CPU 55az determines whether or not an ending command for executing an ending performance selection process has been received, and if it determines that an ending command has been received, in the following step S410, executes the ending performance selection process.
The ending effect selection process includes analysis of the ending command, selection of an ending effect pattern, and setting of an ending effect start command.
If it is determined in step S409 that an ending command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S411 without executing the ending performance selection process.
Next, in step S411, the sub-CPU 55az executes a customer waiting command receiving process, and ends the command receiving process.

[Performance selection process]
Figure 218 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance selection process executed by the CPU of the performance control board.
In this case, the sub-CPU 55az first analyzes the fluctuation start command in step S421, and then in step S422, subtracts the number of reserved balls stored in the sub-RAM 55cz.
Next, in step S423, a variable performance pattern is selected based on the analysis result of the variable performance start command, and in the following step S424, the variable performance start command is set and the performance selection process is terminated.

[Processing during variable performance end]
Figure 219 is a flowchart showing an example of processing during the end of a variable performance executed by the CPU of the performance control board.
In this case, the sub-CPU 55az analyzes the fluctuation stop command in step S431, and performs various processes such as changing the mode flag based on the analysis results, and then in the next step S432, sets a fluctuation performance end command and ends the processing during the end of the fluctuation performance.

[Opening performance selection process]
Figure 220 is a flowchart showing an example of a winning effect selection process executed by the CPU of the effect control board.
In this case, the sub-CPU 55az analyzes the opening command in step S441, and then performs a winning effect pattern selection process in step S442. After that, in step S443, an opening effect start command is set, and the opening effect selection process is terminated.

[Ending production selection process]
Figure 221 is a flowchart showing an example of an ending performance selection process executed by the CPU of the performance control board.
In this case, the sub-CPU 55az analyzes the ending command in step S451, and selects an ending performance pattern in the following step S452. After that, in step S453, an ending performance start command is set, and the ending performance selection process is terminated.

<Main board protection case>
Next, the configuration of the main board protection case 200z according to this embodiment will be described.
In this embodiment, the main board protection case 200z, the payout board protection case 400, and the performance board protection case 700 will be described with the game board 10z side relative to the board case as the front direction, and the direction opposite the game board 10z as the rear direction.
Therefore, the left and right directions in the figure are the left and right directions when each board case is viewed from the opposite side to the game board 10z.

Fig. 222 is a diagram for explaining a main board protection case according to one example of this embodiment, (a) is a perspective view, (b) is a side view, and (c) is a front view. Fig. 223 is an exploded perspective view of the main board protection case including the base. Fig. 224 is a side view showing the state when the main board protection case is attached to the base.
Fig. 225 is a diagram for explaining the state in which the main board protection case of Fig. 222 has been removed from the base, (a) being a perspective view, (b) being a side view, and (c) being a front view. Fig. 226 is a rear perspective view of the main board protection case of Fig. 225.
The main board protection case 200 of this embodiment (hereinafter simply referred to as the main board case) is attached to the rear of an gaming machine such as a pachinko machine via a base 280, with the main control board 50 equipped with electronic components including ROM housed inside (see Figures 222 to 224).

The main board case 200z further comprises two case pieces (lower case piece 210, upper case piece 220) made of transparent resin which house the main control board (printed circuit board) 50 equipped with ROM sandwiched therebetween, a cutting member (hereinafter referred to as the cutting member) 230 for cutting the anti-opening seal which is sandwiched and held between the edges of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220, and a cap 240 which is removably attached to the sealing base portion 310 of the main board case 200z to which the anti-opening seal 250 described later is adhered.
In addition, the main control board 50 of this embodiment employs a single-sided mounting method in which electronic components are arranged on only one surface.
By mounting important electronic components (especially ROM) on only one side and orienting the mounting surface toward the surface (rear surface) that is visible from the outside, it becomes easier to detect fraudulent acts such as the replacement of electronic components.

The lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 form a substrate case main body (sealing body 300).
The two case pieces that make up the main board case 200z are described as the lower case piece and the upper case piece, but the positional relationship between the case pieces is different from the up-down direction shown in the figure.
For convenience, the case piece at the back from the inspector's perspective is described as the lower case piece and the case piece at the front is described as the upper case piece; however, following the directional notation in the figure, the upper case piece is the rear case piece and the lower case piece is the front case piece.
A protective cover 229 is disposed at the bottom of the upper case piece 220 to cover the connection between the internal connector provided on the internal main control board 50 and the external connector.
In this embodiment, the lower case piece 210 is fixed to the upper case piece 220 by a crimping member, with the main control board 50 sandwiched therebetween.

Crimp fastening parts 290 using crimping members are disposed at appropriate positions along the edge of main board case 200z, and lower case piece 210 and upper case piece 220 are locked in a closed state by driving (locking) crimping members (locking members) into fastening holes 291 (sealing parts) provided in crimping fastening parts 290. Lower case piece 210 and upper case piece 220 become openable, closable, and detachable by removing (breaking) the crimping members driven (locked) into fastening holes 291.
In the crimping fastening portion 290 of the main board case 200z of this embodiment, two crimping fastening holes (crimping fastening holes 291A, 291B) are provided.
Each crimp fastening hole is formed by communication between a lower case side fastening hole 292 provided in the lower case piece 210 and an upper case side fastening hole 293 provided in the upper case piece 220 .

As described below, when the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are engaged using the hook groove and the hook piece, by driving a crimping member into one of the crimp fastening holes 291, it becomes impossible to disengage the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 by sliding them against each other.
Therefore, it is not possible to access the main control board 50 housed inside the main board case.
Only one crimp fastening hole is used for one fastening of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220. After removing (breaking) the crimping member to release the fastening (after opening the main board case 200z), if fastening is to be performed again, the crimping member is driven into the other remaining crimp fastening hole to perform fastening. In other words, the main board case of this embodiment can be opened up to two times.
In the main board case 200z of this embodiment (eg, FIG. 225), for example, a crimping member is driven into the crimping fastening hole 291B on the lower side in the figure.

The base 280 is a connecting means for attaching the main board case 200z to a gaming machine side holding portion (in this embodiment, the lamp relay board 166) provided on the rear side of the gaming machine main body.
The main board case 200z, which houses the main control board, is assembled with the lower case piece 210 attached to the back of the game board of a pachinko game machine or the like via a base 280, so that the electronic components mounted on the internal control board surface can be seen from the back of the game board through the upper case piece 220.
In addition, by rotating the main board case 200z upward around the axis 281 located on the upper part of the base 280, the inside of the main board case can be seen from the bottom surface of the transparent lower case piece 210.

A description will now be given of main board case assembly 200A in which main board case 200z is attached to pedestal 280. As shown in Figures 222 to 224, main board case assembly 200A includes pedestal 280, main board case 200z, and protective cover 229. Pedestal 280 is a component used to attach main board case 200z to the rear side of game board 10z (see Figure 222).
223, the base 280 is formed in a generally rectangular shape with two sides along the left-right direction longer than the two sides along the up-down direction, and is provided with a pair of shaft parts 281 near both left and right ends of the lower side, and a plate-like part in the left-right center of the upper side. The axial direction of the shaft parts 281 coincides with the left-right direction.
The main board case 200z is provided with a pair of hook portions 249 that engage with each of the shaft portions 281. The pair of hook portions 249 are provided on the lower side of the upper case piece 220, which will be described later. The hook portions 249 are formed in a U-shape that protrudes toward the front side.

224, when attaching the main board case 200z to the base 280, the main board case 200z is positioned so that the hook portions 249 are convex toward the rear side. Then, the hook portions 249 are able to engage with the shaft portions 281, so the main board case 200z is brought closer to the base 280 and each hook portion 249 is engaged with each shaft portion 281.
Then, when the hook portion 249 engages with the shaft portion 281, the main board case 200z is rotated counterclockwise (in the direction of the arrow C in FIG. 224) around the shaft portion 281 as viewed from the left side, and the main board case 200z is placed on the base 280. As shown in FIG. 222, at this time, the plate-shaped hook 282 provided on the upper side of the base 280 is caught in the recess 3a provided on the upper side of the main board case 200z. Therefore, the main board case 200z is fixed to the base 280 by the engagement between the hook portion 249 and the shaft portion 281 and the engagement between the plate-shaped hook 282 and the main board case 200z.

222 and 223, a protective cover 229 is then attached to the main board case 200z. The protective cover 229 covers the lower portion of the main board case 200z including the hook portion 249. In this manner, the main board case assembly 200A is assembled and attached to the rear side of the game board 10z.
The main control board 50 and the main board case 200z will be described. As shown in FIG. 225, the main control board 50 that controls the game is stored in the main board case 200z. The main control board 50 is equipped with an integrated main ROM 502. In addition, the main control board 50 is equipped with a plurality of electronic components 595 different from the integrated main ROM 502. The plurality of electronic components 595 include various electronic components such as ICs, resistors, connectors, capacitors, and coils. In addition, as shown in FIG. 225(b), the main control board 50 is equipped with a plurality of connectors 771, 772, 773, 774, 775, and 776. Note that the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are shown in FIG. 225(b) and may be omitted from illustration in other figures.

The unified main ROM 502 stores memory contents used for controlling the game, and also stores memory contents that affect the outcome of the game.
The integrated main ROM 502 is a one-chip microcomputer that integrates the main CPU 50az, main ROM 50bz, and main RAM 50cz shown in FIG.
The multiple connectors 771 to 776 are lined up in order from left to right on the lower part of the main control board 50. The multiple connectors 771 to 776 are disposed inside six openings 779 provided on the lower part of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z.

Among the multiple connectors 771 to 776, the multiple connectors 774 and 775 are referred to as detection signal connectors 774 and 775. Signals from at least some of the first start hole detection switch 13az, second start hole detection switch 14az, first large prize hole detection switch 16az, second large prize hole detection switch 17az, and general prize hole detection switch 18az (see FIG. 196) that detect the entrance of a game ball are input to the detection signal connectors 774 and 775. In this embodiment, all signals from the first start hole detection switch 13az, second start hole detection switch 14az, first large prize hole detection switch 16az, second large prize hole detection switch 17az, and general prize hole detection switch 18az (see FIG. 196) that detect the entrance of a game ball are input to the detection signal connectors 774 and 775. The detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are a different color than the other connectors 771, 772, 773, and 776. In this embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are fluorescent, and the other connectors 771, 772, 773, and 776 are a different color than the fluorescent color.

The integrated main ROM 502 includes a plate-shaped main body 580 extending vertically and horizontally, and a plurality of first signal pins 582. The first signal pins 582 are signal pins that transmit signals between the integrated main ROM 502 and the main control board 50. The first signal pins 582 are arranged so as to be visible through the main board case 200z. In detail, the first signal pins 582 extend above and below the main body 580 of the integrated main ROM 502, and are electrically connected to the main control board 50. Therefore, the first signal pins 582 are visible from the front through the main board case 200z.
The signal pins provided on each of the electronic components 595 are called second signal pins 583 (see FIG. 223). The second signal pins 583 transmit signals between each of the electronic components 595 and the main control board 50. The signals are not limited to digital signals, but also include analog signals. The second signal pins 583 are arranged so as to be visible through the main board case 200z. In detail, the second signal pins 583 extend upward, downward, left, right, or forward from each electronic component, and are electrically connected to the main control board 50. Therefore, the second signal pins 583 are visible through the main board case 200z.
As shown in FIG. 223, the main board case 200z is a box-shaped case that houses the main control board 50 and the integrated main ROM 502 so that they are visible but difficult to contact.

Using Figures 225 to 234, we will explain the detailed structure of the main board case 200z and the tables provided for the main board case and the main control board contained therein.
The performance display monitor 600, setting display monitor 650, setting key switch 660, and RWM clear switch 680 described in Figures 196 and 197 will be explained in the configurations shown in Figures 255 and onwards, and will not be explained here.
Main board case 200z encloses main control board 50 so as to enable visual confirmation of multiple connectors 771-776 (see FIG. 225(b)) mounted on main control board 50. Main board case 200z is formed of a light-transmitting material such as transparent plastic.
As described above, the lower case piece 210 is combined with the upper case piece 220 to form an inner part 581 for containing the main control board 50. The upper case piece 220 is provided on the rear side of the main board case 200z, which is the integrated main ROM 502 side. The lower case piece 210 is provided on the front side of the main board case 200z, which is the opposite side to the integrated main ROM 502 side. Note that in FIG. 225(b), of the electrical components provided on the main control board 50 contained in the transparent main board case 200z, only the integrated main ROM 502 is shown, and the other electrical components are omitted (similar to FIG. 227(a) and the like).

As shown in Fig. 226, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 each include a control board storage section 211, 221 that stores the main control board 50 (see Fig. 223), and sealing sections 212, 222 that form a sealing base section 310 (see Fig. 227) described below. The control board storage sections 211, 221 each have a substantially rectangular plate section 211a, 221a, and a flange section 211b, 221b that protrudes from the peripheral edge of the plate section 211a, 221a and surrounds one side of each of the plate sections 211a, 221a.
223, a cylindrical portion 565 extending rearward toward the main control board 50 is provided on the left side of the plate portion 211a of the lower case piece 210. A hole 566 extending in the front-rear direction is formed in the cylindrical portion 565. A screw thread is formed on the inside of the hole 566. A hole 567 is provided in the main control board 50 at a position facing the cylindrical portion 565.

The main control board 50 is fixed to the lower case piece 210. More specifically, the hole 567 of the main control board 50 is disposed behind the cylindrical portion 565 of the lower case piece 210. The shaft of a screw 769 (see FIG. 225) is inserted from the rear side of the main control board 50 through the hole 567 into the hole 566 of the cylindrical portion 565. The threads formed in the hole 567 of the cylindrical portion 565 are mated with the threads provided on the shaft of the screw 769 (see FIG. 225(b)). As a result, the main control board 50 is sandwiched between the head of the screw 769 and the rear surface of the cylindrical portion 565, and the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower case piece 210. That is, the main control board 50 is screwed to the lower case piece 210 side.

As shown in FIG. 226, the flange portion 211b of the control board storage section 211 protrudes from the plate portion 211a along the two long sides of the plate portion 211a (hereinafter referred to as the "male portion"), and three L-shaped hook pieces 211c are formed on each of the portions.
On the other hand, the portion of the flange portion 221b of the control board storage portion 221 that protrudes from the plate portion 221a along the two long sides of the plate portion 221a (hereinafter referred to as the "female portion") is formed like a double wall, and an insertion groove portion 221c into which the male portion of the control board storage portion 211 can be inserted is provided between the walls that form the double wall. Also, a hook piece 221d is formed in each insertion groove portion 221c.

When lower case piece 210, to which main control board 50 is fastened by screws 769, and upper case piece 220 are assembled, the male part of flange portion 211b is inserted into the female part of flange portion 221b. Then, control board storage sections 211, 221 are slid relative to each other in the left-right direction of arrow α in Fig. 226. Then, hook piece 211c provided on the male part engages with hook piece 221d, so that lower case piece 210 and upper case piece 220 are assembled so as not to come apart unless they move relative to each other in the direction opposite to arrow α.
When combined in this manner, the control board storage sections 211, 221 form a box-shaped inner container section 581 that is shielded from the outside. The main control board 50 (see FIG. 223) is stored in the inner container section 581. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility of the main control board 50 and the integrated main ROM 502 being illegally replaced.

The main control board 50 is attached to the inside of the control board storage section 221 before the control board storage sections 211 and 221 are combined. At this time, the ICs and other components mounted on the main control board 50 are attached so as to face the plate section 221a of the control board storage section 221. This is because the plate section 221a is also made of transparent plastic, so that even if the main control board 50 is stored in the main board case 200z, it is possible to check from the outside through the plate section 221a whether the electronic components such as the integrated main ROM 502 mounted on the main control board 50 have not been illegally replaced. As shown in FIG. 197, in this embodiment, when the main board case assembly 200A including the main board case 200z is attached to the game board 10z, the electronic components mounted on the main control board 50 in the main board case 200z can be seen from the rear side of the game machine 1 through the upper case piece 220.

As shown in Fig. 226, sealing portions 212, 222 are provided at the right end portions of lower case piece 210 and upper case piece 220. As shown in Fig. 227, a first screw fastening piece 91 and a second screw fastening piece 92 are provided above sealing portions 212, 222 in lower case piece 210 and upper case piece 220.
When the control board storage sections 211 and 221 are slid together to be assembled, a sealing base section 310 is formed by the sealing sections 212 and 222 at the longitudinal ends of the assembled sealing body 300 .
As shown in FIG. 225, when the cap 240 is attached to the sealing body 300 by covering the sealing base portion 310, in addition to the first screw-stopping piece 91 and the second screw-stopping piece 92, the third screw-stopping piece 93 provided on the cap 240 overlaps with the longitudinal end of the sealing body 300 to form a screw-stopping portion 90z for screw fastening.

226, the sealing portions 212, 222 protrude rightward from the right ends of the control board housing portions 211, 221. The sealing portions 212, 222 are formed to have the same height in the left-right direction and the same width in the up-down direction.
A long groove portion 212a, 222a is formed along the left-right direction in each of the sealing portions 212, 222. Two parallel groove portions 222a are formed along the left-right direction at a predetermined distance in the sealing portion 222, and one groove portion 212a is formed along the left-right direction in the sealing portion 212.
As shown in FIG. 227 , when lower case half 210 and upper case half 220 are combined as described above, sealing portions 212 , 222 form a sealing base portion 310 on the right side of the combined control board storage portions 211 , 221 .
In the sealing base portion 310, the sealing portions 212, 222 are arranged in parallel with a fixed distance therebetween, and an insertion/removal space 310a (see FIG. 227) is formed between the opposing surfaces of the sealing portions 212, 222.

As shown in FIG. 226, the anti-tamper sticker 250 is used as a means of sealing the main board case 200z and certifies that it is an authentic product issued by an organization or the like with certification qualifications.
The open-do-not-open seal 250 is made of an easily cuttable material such as paper with an adhesive surface on one side thereof, and has multiple cuts formed thereon, taking into consideration cuttability. As will be described later, the open-do-not-open seal 250 is printed with, for example, a hologram and a QR code (registered trademark). The words "Do not open" are also printed on the open-do-not-open seal 250.
The cutting member 230 is formed in a shape having a base portion 230a, a pair of cut portions 61z, and a cutting portion 64z. The base portion 230a, which is the base of the cutting member 230, is formed in a substantially rectangular shape. One of the two long sides of the base portion 230a is formed with the cutting portion 64z. The cutting portion 64z is a portion where the tip of the base portion 230a is formed in a blade shape. The cut portions 61z are provided on both ends of the base portion 230a in the longitudinal direction, and are formed in a shape that is bent in an overall "L" shape. The left end of the cut portion 61z is called a free end portion 61az.

The cap 240 is formed to a size that allows it to be placed over the sealing base portion 310 to cover the entire sealing base portion 310 , and is formed to be detachable from the sealing base portion 310 .
The cap 240 includes a cap body 241 formed in a bowl shape covering the sealing base portion 310, and a third screw stop piece 93 formed on one end side in the longitudinal direction of the cap body 241. A protrusion 82z is provided on the inner surface of the cap body 241 at a position where the free end portion 61az of the knob portion 61z of the cutting member 230 inserted into the insertion/removal space 310a is caught when the cap 240 is attached to the sealing base portion 310. In addition, a groove portion 86z is formed on the inner surface of the cap body 241.
The cutting member 230 is inserted into the insertion/removal space 310a (see FIG. 227 ) of the sealing base portion 310. Then, an unsealing seal 250 is affixed. When the cap 240 is placed over the sealing base portion 310, the groove 86z fits into a part of the cutting member 230 inserted into the insertion/removal space 310a. Furthermore, the protrusion 82z engages with the free end 61az of the knob 61z of the cutting member 230.

225, as described above, when cap 240 is placed over sealing base portion 310, third screw-stopping piece 93 overlaps with the combination of first screw-stopping piece 91 of lower case piece 210 and second screw-stopping piece 92 of upper case piece 220 to form screw-stopping portion 90z for screw fastening. When crimping member 94 is driven into screw-stopping portion 90z, lower case piece 210, upper case piece 220, and cap 240 are fixed to one another.
When the seal of the main board case 200z is to be removed, the crimping member 94 is removed and the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base portion 310. The same applies when the seal of the main board case 200z is fraudulently removed.
The cutting member 230 and the cap 240 are integrated together. Therefore, when the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base 310, the cutting member 230 is also removed from the sealing base 310 at the same time. Then, the cutting portion 64z etc. causes irreparable damage to the open-prohibition seal 250.

The following describes the identification markings 520. As shown in FIG. 223, the identification markings 520 are provided on the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240.
The identification display 520 is a display including information related to the gaming machine 1. In the following description, the identification display 520 provided on the main control board 50 is referred to as an identification display 521, and the identification display 520 provided on the integrated main ROM 502 is referred to as an identification display 522. The identification display 520 provided on the upper case piece 220 is referred to as an identification display 523, and the identification display 520 provided on the lower case piece 210 is referred to as an identification display 524.
The identification mark 520 provided on the cap 240 is referred to as an identification mark 525 .

As shown in Fig. 223, the identification display 521 is displayed by silk screen printing on the upper part of the rear surface of the main control board 50. The identification display 521 is an information identification section for displaying specific information. The identification display 522 is affixed by engraving to the integrated main ROM 502. The identification display 522 is an information identification section for displaying specific information.
Identification marks 523, 524, and 525 attached to the main board case 200z are information identification parts for displaying specific information. The identification mark 524 is formed in the upper right part of the front surface of the lower case piece 210 by stamping using a mold for manufacturing the lower case piece 210 (see FIG. 227).
The identification mark 525 is formed on the rear surface of the cap 240 by stamping using a mold used to manufacture the cap 240. The display mode of the identification mark 523 will be described later.

The identification indications 521 to 525 are related to each other, and include at least the same identification indication 529. In this embodiment, as an example, the identification indication 521 is a character string of "ABCD01", and the identification indication 522 is a character string of "ABCD02". The identification indication 523 is a character string of "ABCD03", and the identification indication 524 is a character string of "ABCD04". The identification indication 525 is a character string of "ABCD05". The same identification indication 529 in the identification indications 521 to 525 is "ABCD". The identification indication 529 is, for example, an indication corresponding to a manufacturer name and a model name. In this embodiment, as an example, in "ABCD", "AB" represents the manufacturer name, and "CD" represents the model name.
In addition, in the identification displays 521 to 525, instead of displaying the manufacturer name as "AB" included in "ABCD", the manufacturer name itself may be displayed, such as "AA Company" in the identification displays 1595 and 1596 in Fig. 233. Also, instead of displaying the model name as "CD" included in "ABCD", the model name itself may be displayed, such as "CR AIU" in the identification displays 1595 and 1596 in Fig. 233. Also, in the identification displays 521 to 525, the model type may be displayed, such as the model type "GH101" in the identification displays 1595 and 1596 in Fig. 233. In this case, the same identification display in the identification displays 521 to 525 will be the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company".

In the following description, the surface of the upper case piece 220 that forms the inside of the main board case 200z is referred to as the inner surface 532. The surface of the upper case piece 220 that forms the outside of the main board case 200z is referred to as the outer surface 531. As shown in Figures 222(c), 225(c), and 227, the outer surface 531 is provided with a position display section 541. The position display section 541 is a section that displays the position where the identification display 523 is applied. The position display section 541 is provided in a section of the main board case 200z that is different from the section that overlaps the integrated main ROM 502. More specifically, the position display section 541 is rectangular when viewed from the rear side, and is provided in the lower right part of the upper case piece 220. The integrated main ROM 502 is provided to the left of the position display section 541 when viewed from the rear side. The position display section 541 is a recess that is recessed toward the front side.

225(b), a seal portion 542 made of a light-transmitting material is attached to the position display portion 541. In the present embodiment, the seal portion 542 is transparent, for example.
The seal portion 542 has a printed portion 797 printed on the seal body (base portion).
All of the seal parts to be affixed to all of the board cases described below have in common that printing is performed on an adhesive seal body (base part), or a writable base is formed on the seal body (base part).
In this embodiment, as an example, the printing portion 797 is an identification mark 523 .
The identification mark 523 is printed on the seal portion 542, so that the identification mark 523 is attached to the position display portion 541. The seal portion 542 is arranged across at least a portion of the electronic components 595 in the main board case 200z. In other words, the seal portion 542 is arranged in a state where it overlaps the electronic components 595 in the main board case 200z when viewed from the rear. Note that FIG. 225(b) illustrates a portion of the electronic components 595, and in reality, other electronic components (see FIG. 223) are also present. The identification mark 523 on the upper case piece 220 is displayed at an angle that allows the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 to be seen. In this embodiment, the identification mark 523 attached to the upper case piece 220 does not impede the visibility of the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502. As with the seal portion 1561 (see FIG. 234 ) in a modified example described later, when the main board case 200z is at a predetermined angle, the identification mark 523 may overlap the mounting location of the unified main ROM 502. In this embodiment, the identification mark 523 attached to the upper case piece 220 does not impede visibility of the mounting location of the unified main ROM 502.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is formed. In this embodiment, a main board case 200z is provided that contains the main control board 50. As shown in Figs. 222, 223, 225, and 227, the main board case 200z is provided with a position display section 541 that is a section that displays the position where the identification display 523 is provided. Therefore, compared to when the position display section 541 is not provided, the inspector can easily check the identification display 523 attached to the main board case 200. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the player's interest is improved.
Furthermore, when manufacturing the gaming machine 1, it is easier for the manufacturer to know the position where the identification mark 520 is to be attached, compared to when the position display unit 541 is not provided. Therefore, for example, when the seal unit 542 is used and the identification mark 523 is attached by the manufacturer, the possibility that the identification mark 523 is attached at different positions among a plurality of gaming machines 1 can be reduced. Therefore, compared to when the position display unit 541 is not provided, the inspector can easily check the identification mark 523 attached to the main board case 200z. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

Moreover, the position indication portion 541 is formed on the outer surface 531 of the main board case 200z, and is a recess for positioning the identification indication 520. Since the position indication portion 541 which is a recess is provided, it is easier for an inspector to grasp the position of the position indication portion 541, for example, compared to the case where the position indication portion 541 is displayed by printing or the like on the flat surface of the main board case 200z.
Therefore, the inspector can easily check the identification mark 523 on the main board case 200z. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of fraudulent acts. This allows the player to play with peace of mind, improving the player's interest.
Furthermore, the manufacturer can position the identification mark 520 along the recessed position indication portion 541. Therefore, when the manufacturer mass-produces gaming machines 1, the manufacturer can attach the identification mark 520 to the same position on a plurality of gaming machines 1. Since the identification mark 520 is attached to the same position on a plurality of gaming machines 1, an inspector can easily check the identification mark 520. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of fraudulent acts. This allows players to play with peace of mind, improving the players' interest.

The position display unit 541 is also provided in a location on the main board case 200z that is different from the location that overlaps the integrated main ROM 502. In this case, the possibility that the identification display 523 attached to the position display unit 541 will overlap with the integrated main ROM 502 can be reduced. This allows an inspector to check both the identification display 523 and the integrated main ROM 502 at the same time. This makes it easy to discover, for example, that the integrated main ROM 502 has been replaced due to fraudulent activity. This allows the player to play with peace of mind, increasing the player's interest.

In addition, the identification mark 523, which is an information identification part attached to the main board case 200z, and the identification mark 522, which is an information identification part attached to the integrated main ROM 502, include at least the same identification mark 529. In addition, the identification mark 523 attached to the upper case piece 220 is displayed at an angle at which the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 can be seen. In addition, in this embodiment, the identification mark 523 attached to the upper case piece 220 does not impede the visibility of the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502. Since the identification mark 523 attached to the upper case piece 220 is displayed at an angle at which the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 can be seen, the inspector can check the integrated main ROM 502 and the main board case 200z to which the same identification mark 529 is attached, and easily confirm that no fraudulent activity has been performed. Furthermore, even if, for example, the integrated main ROM 502 is replaced with another ROM due to fraudulent activity, an inspector can easily confirm that fraud has occurred by determining whether the identification mark 529 on the integrated main ROM 502 and the main board case 200z are the same. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of fraudulent activity. This allows players to play with peace of mind, increasing the player's interest.

In addition, the identification mark 523, which is an information identification part attached to the main board case 200z, the identification mark 522, which is an information identification part attached to the integrated main ROM 502, and the identification mark 521, which is an information identification part displayed on the main control board 50, all contain at least the same identification mark 529 (the character string "ABCD" in this embodiment). Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm that no fraudulent activity has been performed by checking the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, and the main board case 200, which have the same identification mark 529. In addition, even if at least one of the main control board 50 and the integrated main ROM 502 is replaced with another main control board 50 and integrated main ROM 502 due to fraudulent activity, the inspector can easily confirm that fraudulent activity has been performed by determining whether the identification mark 529 attached to the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, and the main board case 200z is the same. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. This allows players to play with peace of mind, increasing their interest.

The main board case 200z contains the main control board 50 so that the multiple connectors 771-776 can be seen. Because the multiple connectors 771-776 are visible, it is easy to determine whether or not cheating has occurred, for example, by connecting a device other than the main control board 50 to the connectors 771-776. This reduces the possibility of cheating, allowing players to play with peace of mind. This increases the player's interest.
In addition, since the detection signal connectors 774, 775 are fluorescent, they are easier for an inspector to see than if they were not fluorescent. This makes it easy to determine whether or not cheating has occurred, for example, by connecting a device other than the main control board 50 to the detection signal connectors 774, 775. This reduces the possibility of cheating, allowing players to play with peace of mind. This increases the player's interest.

In addition, a plurality of detection signal connectors 774, 775 are provided. Therefore, it is easier for an inspector to check the detection signal connectors 774, 775 compared to when there is only one detection signal connector. Therefore, it is easy to determine whether or not cheating has occurred, for example, when a device other than the main control board 50 is connected to the detection signal connectors 774, 775. This reduces the possibility of cheating, allowing players to play with peace of mind. This increases the player's interest.
In addition, the first signal pin 582 provided in the integrated main ROM 502 is arranged so as to be visible through the main board case 200z. Since the first signal pin 582 is visible, it is easy to determine whether or not cheating, such as connecting a device other than the main control board 50 to the first signal pin 582, is occurring. This reduces the possibility of cheating, allowing players to play with peace of mind. This increases the player's interest.
In addition, the second signal pins 583 provided on the multiple electronic components 595 are arranged so as to be visible through the main board case 200z. Since the second signal pins 583 are visible, it is easy to determine whether or not cheating, such as connecting a device other than the main control board 50 to the second signal pins 583, is occurring. This reduces the possibility of cheating, allowing players to play with peace of mind. This increases the player's interest.

Furthermore, the main control board 50 is secured to the lower case piece 210 with screws 769 (see FIG. 225(b)). This makes it more difficult to fraudulently replace the main control board 50 than if it were not secured with screws. This reduces the possibility of fraudulent activity, allowing players to play with peace of mind. This increases the players' interest.
In addition, the upper case piece 220 and the lower case piece 210 are slid into each other and assembled. Therefore, even if a person who intends to commit a fraudulent act simply tries to pull the upper case piece 220 and the lower case piece 210 apart in order to separate them, the upper case piece 220 and the lower case piece 210 are difficult to separate. Therefore, it is difficult to fraudulently replace the main control board 50. This reduces the possibility of fraudulent acts, allowing players to play with peace of mind. This increases the player's interest.
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications are possible. In the following modifications, the components corresponding to those in the above embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Although the position display portion 541 is a concave portion, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the position display portion 541 may be a convex portion, as described later.

228 to 230 are diagrams showing modified examples of position indication parts provided on the main board case.
Fig. 228 shows a cross section of the upper case piece 220 of a board case according to a modified example of the main board case 200z taken along the line A-A shown in Fig. 225. As shown in Fig. 228, the position indicator 541 is a convex portion formed on the outer surface 531 of the upper case piece 220, and protrudes rearward. An identification mark 523 is attached to the position indicator 541 by a seal portion 542.
In addition, the position indication portion 541 is provided on the outer surface 531 of the upper case piece 220, but is not limited to this. For example, the position indication portion 541 may be provided on the inner surface 532 of the upper case piece 220.

Figure 229 shows a cross section taken along the arrow A-A in Figure 225 of the upper case piece 220 of a board case according to a modified example of the main board case 200z. As shown in Figure 229, the position indicator 541 is a recess formed on the inner surface 532 of the upper case piece 220, and is recessed toward the rear. An identification indicator 523 is affixed to the position indicator 541 by a seal part 542. The identification indicator 523 is printed on the rear side of the seal part 542. Therefore, an inspector can check the identification indicator 523 from the rear side of the main board case 200z through the transparent upper case piece 220.

Fig. 230 shows a cross section in the direction of the arrow at the position of line A-A shown in Fig. 225 in the upper case piece 220 of a board case according to a modified example of the main board case 200z. As shown in Fig. 230, the position indicator 541 is a convex portion formed on the inner surface 532 of the upper case piece 220, and protrudes forward. An identification indicator 523 is attached to the position indicator 541 by a seal part 542. The identification indicator 523 is printed on the rear side of the seal part 542. Therefore, an inspector can check the identification indicator 523 from the rear side of the board case through the transparent upper case piece 220.
As described above, the position display portion 541 is formed on the inner surface 532 or the outer surface 531 of the main board case 200z, and is a convex portion or a concave portion for positioning the identification display 520. Since the position display portion 541, which is a convex portion and a concave portion, is provided, it is easier for an inspector to grasp the position of the identification display 520, compared to, for example, a case in which the position display portion 541 is displayed by printing or the like on the flat surface of the main board case 200z. Therefore, the inspector can easily check the identification display 520 attached to the main board case 200z. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the player's interest is improved.

Furthermore, the manufacturer can position the identification mark 520 along the position indication portion 541, which is a convex portion or a concave portion. Therefore, when the manufacturer mass-produces gaming machines 1, the manufacturer can attach the identification mark 520 to the same position on a plurality of gaming machines 1. Since the identification mark 520 is attached to the same position on a plurality of gaming machines 1, an inspector can easily check the identification mark 520. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of fraudulent acts. This allows players to play with peace of mind, improving the players' interest.
Furthermore, the multiple components enclosing main control board 50 may not include some of upper case piece 220, lower case piece 210, and cap 240. The multiple components may further include components different from upper case piece 220, lower case piece 210, and cap 240.

In addition, the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, and the multiple components are provided with the identification markings 520, but this is not limited thereto. For example, at least two of the main control board 50 and the multiple components may be provided with the associated identification markings 520. For example, the cap 240 included in the multiple components may not be provided with the identification markings 525. The lower case piece 210 included in the multiple components may not be provided with the identification markings 524. The upper case piece 220 included in the multiple components may not be provided with the identification markings 523. The inspector can easily check whether or not fraud has been committed by checking the identification markings 520 provided on at least two of the main control board 50 and the multiple components. For example, even if the main control board 50 is replaced with another control board due to fraud, the inspector can easily check whether or not fraud has been committed by determining whether or not the identification markings 520 provided on at least two of the main control board 50 and the multiple components are associated with each other. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of fraud. This allows players to play with peace of mind, increasing their interest.

The identification mark 520 may be attached to at least two of the main control board 50, the upper case piece 220, and the lower case piece 210. In this case, an inspector can easily check whether or not cheating has occurred by checking the identification mark 520 attached to at least two of the main control board 50, the upper case piece 220, and the lower case piece 210. For example, even if the main control board 50 is replaced with another control board due to cheating, an inspector can easily check that cheating has occurred by determining whether or not the identification mark 520 attached to at least two of the main control board 50, the upper case piece 220, and the lower case piece 210 are related. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of cheating. Therefore, a player can play with peace of mind, and the player's interest is improved.

Furthermore, the identification mark 520 may be attached to at least the upper case piece 220 and the integrated main ROM 502. In this case, an inspector can easily check whether or not a fraudulent act has been committed by checking the identification mark 520 attached to at least the upper case piece 220 and the integrated main ROM 502. For example, even if the integrated main ROM 502 is replaced with another ROM due to a fraudulent act, an inspector can easily check whether or not a fraudulent act has been committed by determining whether or not the identification mark 520 attached to at least the upper case piece 220 and the integrated main ROM 502 are related to each other. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of a fraudulent act. Therefore, a player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.
Also, the identification marks 520 may be related to each other. For example, all the identification marks 520 may be the same identification mark (for example, all "ABCD01" or the like). Also, the identification marks 520 may be different from each other, and may not include the same identification mark 529. The contents of the identification marks 520 are not limited as long as the inspection person can confirm them. Also, the identification marks 520 do not have to be character strings. For example, the identification marks 520 may be various marks. Also, the manner in which the identification marks 520 are attached is not limited. For example, not only the identification mark 521, but also all the identification marks 521 to 525 may be printed and attached to the seal portion. Also, the seal portion does not have to be transparent. Also, all the identification marks 523 to 525 may be stamped by a mold for manufacturing the main board case 200z.

In this embodiment, the position indication portion 541, which is an attachment position mark indicating the position where the seal portion 542 is attached, may take the following forms.
That is, the position indication portion 541 is a mark that surrounds the entire circumference of the seal portion 542 on the same surface as the upper case surface to which the seal portion 542 is attached or on the back surface, or an L-shaped mark on the same surface as the upper case surface to which the seal portion 542 is attached or on the back surface.
The position indication portion 541 is a linear protrusion provided so as to surround the periphery of the seal portion 542 .
The position indication portion 541 is a linear recess provided on the same surface as the sealing portion 542 so as to surround the periphery of the sealing portion 542 .
The position indication portion 541 is a linear protrusion provided on the back surface of the seal portion 542 so as to surround the periphery of the seal portion 542 .

The position indication portion 541 is a linear recess provided on the back surface of the seal portion 542 so as to surround the periphery of the seal portion 542 .
The position indication portion 541 is an L-shaped linear protrusion provided on the same surface as the sealed portion 542 so as to surround a predetermined corner of the sealed portion 542 .
The position indication portion 541 is an L-shaped linear recess provided on the same surface as the sealing portion 542 so as to surround a predetermined corner of the sealing portion 542 .
The position indication portion 541 is an L-shaped linear protrusion and recess provided so as to surround a predetermined corner on the back surface of the seal portion 542 .
The position indication portion 541 is a position mark that is neither a convex nor a concave portion and is provided so as to surround the seal portion 542 .

In addition, the identification mark 520 may be formed inside the material of the main board case 200z.
231 and 232 are diagrams showing a modified example in which an identification mark is formed on the main board case.
This modified example will be described below with reference to Fig. 231 and Fig. 232. In the main board case shown in Fig. 231, the portion on which the identification display 523 is displayed is referred to as an identification display portion 1390. The portion outside the identification display portion 1390 is referred to as an outer portion 1391. As shown in Fig. 232, the identification display portion 1390 protrudes rearward from the outer portion 1391. Therefore, the thickness L1 of the identification display portion 1390 is greater than the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391.
The identification mark 523 is formed inside a member (in this embodiment, the material of the upper case piece 220) that forms the identification mark portion 1390. The identification mark 523 is divided into a plurality of (four in this embodiment) levels 1381, 1382, 1383, and 1384 in the thickness direction (front-rear direction) of the identification mark portion 1390.
The character "A" 1371 of the identification display 523 is formed on layer 1381. The character "B" 1372 is formed on layer 1382. The character "C" 1373 is formed on layer 1383. The character "D" 1374 is formed on layer 1384. The character "0" 1375 is formed on layer 1382. The character "3" 1376 is formed on layer 1383.

The method for forming the identification mark 523 inside the member that forms the identification mark portion 1390 is not limited. For example, the identification mark 523 may be formed by 3D laser engraving. 3D laser engraving is a technique for concentrating a laser to form minute cracks, for example, of 100 microns, at intervals of, for example, 0.08 mm to 0.016 mm inside the material of the main board case 200z. By forming a plurality of such cracks, the identification mark 523 is formed inside the main board case 200z.
In this embodiment, the identification mark 523 is formed inside the member forming the identification mark portion 1390. Therefore, the identification mark 523 is more difficult to remove than when, for example, the entire identification mark 523 is formed on the outer surface 531 or the inner surface 532 of the main board case 200z. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the player's interest is improved. Furthermore, when the identification mark 523 is removed by fraud, scratches are formed on the main board case in Figures 231 and 232. Therefore, an inspector can easily find fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the player's interest is improved.

Furthermore, the identification indicator 523 is divided into a plurality of layers 1381-1384 in the thickness direction of the identification indicator portion 1390. Therefore, the identification indicator 523 is more difficult to remove than when the identification indicator 523 is formed on only one layer. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of fraudulent acts. This allows the player to play with peace of mind, improving the player's interest.
Also, in the main board case of Figs. 231 and 232, the thickness L1 of the identification display portion 1390 is greater than the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391. In this case, compared to when L1 is equal to or less than L2, if a cheater attempts to remove the identification display 520, he or she must cut deeper into the main board case 200z. This makes it easier for scratches to form on the main board case of Figs. 231 and 232. This allows an inspector to easily discover cheating. This allows players to play with peace of mind, improving the player's interest.
The identification mark 523 does not have to be divided into a plurality of layers 1381 to 1384 in the thickness direction in the identification mark portion 1390. For example, the identification mark 523 may be formed on only one layer. Furthermore, the thickness L1 of the identification mark portion 1390 may be equal to or smaller than the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391. Furthermore, although the identification mark 523 has been described above, the identification marks 524, 525, etc., provided on the main board case in FIGS. 231 and 232 may also be formed inside the main board case in FIGS. 231 and 232 in the same manner.

In addition, various stickers other than the sticker portion 542 may be affixed to the main board case 200z. Furthermore, the content displayed on the printed portion (e.g., the printed portion 797) provided on various stickers such as the sticker portion 542 is not limited.

FIG. 233 shows a modified example of the main board case.
The performance display monitor 600, setting display monitor 650, setting key switch 660, and RWM clear switch 680 described in FIGS. 196 and 197 will be described in the configurations shown in FIG. 255 and subsequent figures, and will not be described here.
For example, in the main board case according to the modified example shown in Fig. 233, in addition to the seal part 542, a seal part 1560 and a seal part 1561 are attached. In Fig. 233, members having the same configuration as those in the above embodiment are indicated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
The seal portion 1560 is attached to the upper part of the left-right center of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z. The seal portion 1561 is attached to the upper left part of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z. The seal portions 1560 and 1561 are formed of a material having optical transparency, and in this embodiment, as an example, the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are transparent. The seal portions 1560 and 1561 are each disposed across a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223). Note that in FIG. 233, various electronic components such as the plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223) located in front of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are omitted from illustration.

A printed portion 1571 is printed on the seal portion 1560. The printed portion 1571 includes a plurality of areas 1575. The printed portion 1571 is colored, and in this embodiment, as an example, has a white background. The plurality of areas 1575 include a code portion 1572, an information display portion 1573, and a writing area 1570. The seal portion 1560 is provided so that the printed portion 1571, the code portion 1572, the information display portion 1573, and the writing area 1570 are positioned so as not to overlap with the integrated main ROM 502.
Code portion 1572 is provided on the upper left of sticker portion 1560. Code portion 1572 includes predetermined information. Code portion 1572 is a portion from which information can be read by other devices, and for example, a QR code (registered trademark), a barcode, or the like is printed in black in a rectangular colored area (white in this embodiment). In this embodiment, as an example, code portion 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

The code section 1572 is linked to information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50, which is stored in a device other than the gaming machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as the "other device"). For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), which is information contained in the code section 1572, is read by a camera provided in a portable information terminal or the like. The portable information terminal uses the URL to access the other device via a network. As a result of accessing the other device, the information displayed on the portable information terminal includes the delivery destination of the main control board 50 (for example, the name of the store where the gaming machine 1 was delivered) and information on whether the gaming machine 1 has been discarded. This allows the inspector to easily check the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 and information on whether the gaming machine 1 has been discarded.

The information display section 1573 includes various information. The information display section 1573 may include, for example, information similar to the identification display 529. In this embodiment, as an example, the information display section 1573 has the character string "EF001" printed in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. The character string is, for example, the management number of the main control board 50. Using the management number, an inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the gaming machine 1 and whether the gaming machine 1 has been discarded from information linked to the management number held by the manufacturer. The character string of the information display section 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, model, etc. In addition, the rectangular area of the information display section 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code section 1572 are connected in the left-right direction.

As an example, six writing areas 1570 are provided, with three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction. The writing areas 1570 are printed on a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) background. "Opener" is printed in black above the upper left writing area 1570. "Date of opening" is printed in black above the upper right writing area 1570. A circle 1 is printed to the left of the upper left writing area 1570. A circle 2 is printed to the left of the writing area 1570 in the vertical center on the left side. A circle 3 is printed to the left of the lower left writing area 1570.
For example, when an inspector opens main board case 200z, he/she writes the inspector's name in left-side writing area 1570, and writes the date that main board case 200z was opened in right-side writing area 1570. The inspector may also write in writing area 1570 the date that he/she confirmed whether or not tampering had occurred with main control board 50.

The seal portion 1560 includes a viewing portion 1574 for viewing the electronic component 595. The viewing portion 1574 is provided between the multiple regions 1575. The viewing portion 1574 is optically transparent. In this embodiment, the viewing portion 1574 is formed by an unprinted portion of the seal portion 1560, and is transparent. In this embodiment, the viewing portion 1574 extending in the left-right direction is provided between three rows of writing regions 1570 in the vertical direction. In addition, the viewing portion 1574 extending in the left-right direction is provided between the code portion 1572 and the information display portion 1573 arranged to the left and right, and the two upper writing regions 1570. The viewing portion 1574 extending in the up-down direction is provided between two rows of writing regions 1570 in the horizontal direction.

The sticker portion 1561 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name is printed as the specific information. In this embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR Aiu GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company" are printed. In this embodiment, the part on which this information is printed is also referred to as the printed portion 1563. The specific information displayed on the sticker portion 1561 is referred to as the identification display 1595. In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR Aiu GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company".

Also, a sticker 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502. The sticker 1562 is attached to the left of the identification 523 "ABCD02" of the integrated main ROM 502. The sticker 1562 is an information identification section for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name is printed as the specific information. In this embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company" are printed on the sticker 1562 as the predetermined information. Also, the specific information displayed on the sticker 1562 is called an identification 1596. In this embodiment, the identification 1595 is the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company".

Furthermore, the seal portion 1561 and the seal portion 1562 are displayed including at least the same identification marks 1595, 1596. In this embodiment, the type name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company" in the identification marks 1595, 1596 are all the same, but it is sufficient if only some of them are the same.
A QR code (registered trademark) indicating the information specified by the identification mark 1596 may be displayed on the sticker portion 1562 .
Although the identification marks 1595 and 1596 are provided on the main board case 200z and the integrated main ROM 502, they may be provided on other components. For example, the main control board 50 may be displayed with the same identification marks as the identification marks 1595 and 1596.

As described above, in this embodiment, the seal parts 542, 1560, 1561 are arranged across at least a portion of the electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223), so that, for example, by checking the positional relationship between the seal parts 542, 1560, 1561 and the electronic components 595, an inspector can determine whether or not tampering has occurred with the main control board 50. This reduces the possibility of tampering, allowing players to play with peace of mind. This increases the player's interest.
In addition, since the area 1575 is provided, the inspector can write the inspector's name and the date when the main board case 200z was opened in the area 1575 (more specifically, the writing area 1570). The inspector can also write the date when it was confirmed whether or not tampering was performed on the main control board 50 in the area 1575. In addition, since the viewing section 1574 is provided between the areas 1575, the area 1575 is more noticeable than when only the area 1575 is provided. Therefore, it is easier for the inspector to check the characters and the like written in the area 1575. Therefore, the possibility of tampering can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Furthermore, since the viewing section 1574 is provided, the inspector can check the electronic component 595 through the viewing section 1574. Therefore, compared to a case where the viewing section 1574 is not provided, the inspector can easily check whether or not tampering has occurred with the electronic component 595. This reduces the possibility of tampering, allowing the player to play with peace of mind. This increases the player's interest.
Moreover, the code section 1572 is provided at a position that does not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502. Therefore, an inspector can easily check the integrated main ROM 502. Therefore, an inspector can check the integrated main ROM 502 and easily determine whether or not cheating has occurred. Therefore, a player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is increased.

The code section 1572 is also linked to information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50, which is stored in a device other than the gaming machine 1. This allows an inspector to easily check the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 using the code section 1572. Therefore, the inspector can check the delivery destination information and easily determine whether or not fraud has occurred in which a main control board 50 with a different delivery destination has been installed. This allows the player to play with peace of mind. This increases the player's interest.

Also, a sticker 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502, and predetermined information is displayed on the sticker 1562. Therefore, an inspector can easily check for tampering such as replacing the integrated main ROM 502 by checking the sticker 1562. This reduces the possibility of tampering, allowing players to play with peace of mind. This increases the player's interest.
Furthermore, since at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name is printed on the sticker portion 1561, the inspector can easily ascertain at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name. Therefore, the inspector can easily determine whether or not cheating has occurred by checking at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is increased.

The shape of the integrated main ROM 502 is not limited. The integrated main ROM 502 in the above embodiment has a plate-shaped main body 580 extending up, down, left and right as shown in FIG. 225. However, the main body 580 may extend forward, backward, left and right. In this case, the first signal pin may extend forward and be electrically connected to the main control board 50. Furthermore, when the main body 580 extends forward, backward, left and right, the predetermined information displayed on the seal portion 1591 may be displayed on the upper or lower surface of the main body 580.
Furthermore, the various information displayed on the stickers 542, 1560, and 1561 may be displayed at an angle that allows the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 to be visually recognized.
For example, FIG. 234 is a view of the seal portion 1561 and the integrated main ROM 502 seen from diagonally above the rear. In FIG. 234, illustration of members other than the seal portion 1561 and the integrated main ROM 502 is omitted. In this case, the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 overlaps the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502. That is, FIG. 234 is a view of the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 seen from an angle at which the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 is difficult to visually recognize. However, as shown in FIG. 233, when viewed from the rear side, the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized. That is, FIG. 233 is a view of the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 seen from an angle at which the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized. In this way, the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 is displayed at an angle at which the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized. Although the example has been described using sticker portion 1561, the various pieces of information (e.g., information on identification mark 523) displayed on other sticker portions 542 and 1560 may be displayed at an angle that allows the installation location of integrated main ROM 502 to be viewed.

<Main control board structure>
The configuration (layout) of the main control board housed in the main board case of this embodiment is not limited to that described above.
Figure 235 is a diagram for explaining another configuration of the main control board according to this embodiment, where Figure 235(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the component side (front side) of the main control board, and Figure 235(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the solder side (back side) of the main control board.
Figure 236 is a diagram showing the configuration of a printed circuit board used in the main control board, with Figure 236(a) showing the configuration of the component side (front side) of the printed circuit board, and Figure 236(b) showing the configuration of the solder side (back side) of the printed circuit board.

As shown in Figures 236(a) and 236(b), main control board 50 uses a printed wiring board 701 having wiring patterns formed on both sides of the printed board.
In the printed wiring board 701, a single-sided mounting method is adopted as a mounting method for mounting electronic components, in which various electronic components and connectors are mounted only on a component surface 701a of the printed wiring board 701.
Furthermore, the printed wiring board 701 employs an insertion mounting method in which various electronic components such as resistors R, capacitors C, transistors Tr, and ICs, and connectors CN, are mounted in through holes (component insertion holes) formed in the board.
236, through holes (component insertion holes) 702 for inserting leads of various electronic components are provided in a printed wiring board 701. In this case, connection electrodes (connection lands) 703 are provided around the through holes 702 on the solder surface 701b side of the printed wiring board 701.

The connection electrode 703 is an electrode for connecting, for example, by solder, the lead of an electronic component inserted into the through hole 702 from the component surface 701a side of the printed wiring board 701. When the lead of the electronic component is connected by solder, the electronic component and the wiring pattern on the board are electrically connected and the electronic component is mechanically held in place.
That is, the main control board 50 is composed of a printed wiring board 701 having through holes 702 into which the leads of the insertion-mount type electronic components can be inserted.

Fig. 237 shows the main board case of this embodiment when the main control board shown in Fig. 235 and Fig. 236 is stored, (a) shows a perspective view of the assembly, (b) shows a front view of the assembly, and Fig. 238 shows an exploded perspective view of the main board case including the base.
The main board case shown in Figures 237 and 238 has a seal portion 1560 and a seal portion 1561 attached.
Also, similar to Figures 222 to 234, identification markings 520 are attached to the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240.
The identification mark 520 is a mark including information related to the gaming machine 1. The identification mark 520 provided on the control board 50 is referred to as an identification mark 521, and the identification mark 520 provided on the integrated main ROM 502 is referred to as an identification mark 522. The identification mark 520 provided on the upper case piece 220 is referred to as an identification mark 523, and the identification mark 520 provided on the lower case piece 210 is referred to as an identification mark 524. The identification mark 520 provided on the cap 240 is referred to as an identification mark 525.

The identification mark 521 is displayed by silk screen printing on the upper part of the rear surface of the main control board 50. The identification mark 521 is an information identification section for displaying specific information. The identification mark 522 is affixed by engraving to the integrated main ROM 502. The identification mark 522 is an information identification section for displaying specific information.
The identification marks 523, 524, and 525 on the main board case 200z are information identification portions for displaying specific information.
The position indication portion 541 is, for example, a recess formed on the inner surface 532 of the upper case piece 220, and is recessed toward the rear. An identification indication 523 is attached to the position indication portion 541 by a seal portion 542. The identification indication 523 is printed on the rear side of the seal portion 542.
Identification mark 524 is formed on the upper right corner of the front surface of lower case piece 210 by stamping using a mold used to manufacture lower case piece 210 (see Figure 227).
The identification mark 525 is formed on the rear surface of the cap 240 by stamping using a mold used to manufacture the cap 240 .
In Figures 237 and 238, components having the same configuration as those in the above embodiment (particularly Figures 222 to 234) are indicated by the same symbols, and detailed descriptions are omitted.
The seal portion 1560 is attached to a position indicator 561 provided at the lower left side in the left-right direction of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z. The seal portion 1561 is attached to a position indicator 561 provided at the upper right part of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z.
Both the seal parts 1560 and 1561 are formed of a material having optical transparency, and in this embodiment, as an example, the seal parts 1560 and 1561 are transparent. Each of the seal parts 1560 and 1561 is disposed across a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223). Note that in FIG. 237, various electronic components such as the plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223) located in front of the seal parts 1560 and 1561 are not shown.
In this example, a seal body (base portion) 1560A of the seal portion 1560 is provided with a watermark to prevent counterfeiting.
A "watermark" is, for example, a display that looks different depending on the viewing angle, and various types can be applied, such as those using holograms, those that look different depending on the physical shape, etc. In general, a seal with a watermark has poor light transmittance of the base part, which is the main body of the seal, compared to one without a watermark, and therefore visibility through the seal is low.

A printed section 1571 is printed on the seal section 1560. The printed section 1571 has a plurality of areas 1575. The printed section 1571 is colored, and in this embodiment, as an example, has a white background. The plurality of areas 1575 include a code section 1572, an information display section 1573, and a writing area 1570. The seal section 1560 is provided so that the printed section 1571, the code section 1572, the information display section 1573, and the writing area 1570 are positioned so that they do not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502.

That is, the seal portion 1560 (opener indication seal) is provided with a writing area 1570 for writing the opener who opened the main board case 200z and the date of opening.
The seal portion 1560 is made of a transparent material. For example, within a frame with a heading such as "Main Board Control Number" in black, a total of six writing areas 1570 are formed with three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction. Therefore, the seal portion 1560 is a seal for main board control.
The writing area 1570 is a white base formed on a transparent material on which writing can be performed with a pen or the like.
Above the writing areas 1570, headings such as "Opener" and "Date Opened" are printed in black, and to the left of each writing area, a circled number indicating the number of the writing area is printed.
Apart from the printing and writing area 1570 (white background), the transparent material is exposed, and the electronic components on the main control board 50 can be seen through the transparent material.
The seal portion 1560 is attached in a position where the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated main ROM 502 on the main control board 50 can be seen through the transparent material from all angles.
The seal portion 1560 is provided so that the three rows of writing areas 1570 are positioned so as not to overlap with the integrated main ROM 502 from any angle.
The writing area 1570 provided on the sealed portion 1560 is 3 rows in the vertical direction and 2 columns in the horizontal direction, for a total of 6 areas, and allows three sets of "opener" and "date of opening" to be written.

In contrast, as described above, the main board case 200z has two crimping portions (crimping holes 291, i.e., closing portions) (crimping holes 291A and 291B).
In other words, the number of crimped portions (closing portions) provided on main board case 200z is equal to or less than the number of fields for writing the opener and the date of opening provided on seal portion 1560 affixed to main board case 200z.
By providing more entry fields than the number of times the package can actually be opened, it is possible to deal with clerical errors and other mistakes, and it is possible to respond more flexibly than if the number of crimped parts and the number of entry fields were the same.
In addition, in the main control board 50 shown in Figures 237 and 238, the ROM 502 has a plate-shaped main body 580 and a plurality of first signal pins 582, similar to the above.
However, the integrated main ROM 502 in Figures 237 and 238 is erected so that its main surface is perpendicular to the board surface of the main control board 50.
A seal portion 1562, which will be described later, is attached to the main surface perpendicular to the substrate surface.

The display content of the sticker portion 1560 will be described in detail below.
Code portion 1572 is provided on the upper left of sticker portion 1560. Code portion 1572 includes predetermined information. Code portion 1572 is a portion from which information can be read by other devices, and for example, a QR code (registered trademark), a barcode, or the like is printed in black in a rectangular colored area (white in this embodiment). In this embodiment, as an example, code portion 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

The code section 1572 is linked to information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50, which is stored in a device other than the gaming machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as the "other device"). For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), which is information contained in the code section 1572, is read by a camera provided in a portable information terminal or the like. The portable information terminal uses the URL to access the other device via a network. As a result of accessing the other device, the information displayed on the portable information terminal includes the delivery destination of the main control board 50 (for example, the name of the store where the gaming machine 1 was delivered) and information on whether the gaming machine 1 has been discarded. This allows the inspector to easily check the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 and information on whether the gaming machine 1 has been discarded.

The information display section 1573 includes various information. The information display section 1573 may include, for example, information similar to the identification display 529. In this embodiment, as an example, the information display section 1573 has the character string "EF001" printed in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. The character string is, for example, the management number of the main control board 50. Using the management number, an inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the gaming machine 1 and whether the gaming machine 1 has been discarded from information linked to the management number held by the manufacturer. The character string of the information display section 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, model, etc. In addition, the rectangular area of the information display section 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code section 1572 are connected in the left-right direction.

As an example, six writing areas 1570 are provided, with three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction. The writing areas 1570 are printed on a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) background. "Opener" is printed in black above the upper left writing area 1570. "Date of opening" is printed in black above the upper right writing area 1570. A circle 1 is printed to the left of the upper left writing area 1570. A circle 2 is printed to the left of the writing area 1570 in the vertical center on the left side. A circle 3 is printed to the left of the lower left writing area 1570.
For example, when an inspector opens main board case 200z, he/she writes the inspector's name in left-side writing area 1570, and writes the date that main board case 200z was opened in right-side writing area 1570. The inspector may also write in writing area 1570 the date that he/she confirmed whether or not tampering had occurred with main control board 50.

The seal portion 1560 has a viewing portion 1574 for viewing the electronic components 595 on the main control board 50. The viewing portion 1574 is provided between the multiple regions 1575. The viewing portion 1574 has optical transparency. In this embodiment, the viewing portion 1574 is formed by an unprinted portion of the seal portion 1560 and is transparent. In this embodiment, the viewing portion 1574 extending in the left-right direction is provided between three rows of writing regions 1570 in the vertical direction. In addition, the viewing portion 1574 extending in the left-right direction is provided between the code portion 1572 and the information display portion 1573 arranged to the left and right and the two upper writing regions 1570. The viewing portion 1574 extending in the left-right direction is provided between two rows of writing regions 1570 in the horizontal direction.

The seal portion 1561 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of the model name, manufacturer name, rated voltage, and total capacity is printed as the specific information. In the present embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company" are printed. In the present embodiment, the part on which this information is printed is also referred to as the printed portion 1563. The specific information displayed on the seal portion 1561 is referred to as the identification display 1595. In the present embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name including the model number "CR AIU GH101", the manufacturer name "AA Company", the rated voltage, and the total capacity (AC 24V±5%, 250VA).
In addition, in the area where the model name is to be displayed, a background is created using a conspicuous color such as red or yellow against the transparent material, and the model name is displayed in white letters on the background.

A sticker 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502. The sticker 1562 is attached to the left of the identification 523 "ABCD02" of the integrated main ROM 502. The sticker 1562 is an information identification section for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name is printed as the specific information. In the present embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company" are printed on the sticker 1562 as the predetermined information. The specific information displayed on the sticker 1562 is called an identification 1596. In the present embodiment, the identification 1595 is the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company".
A QR code (registered trademark) indicating the information specified by the identification mark 1596 may be displayed on the sticker portion 1562 .
Furthermore, the seal portion 1561 and the seal portion 1562 are displayed including at least the same identification marks 1595, 1596. In this embodiment, the type name "CR Aiu", the model number "GH101", and the manufacturer name "AA Company" in the identification marks 1595, 1596 are all the same, but it is sufficient if only some of them are the same.
Although the identification marks 1595 and 1596 are provided on the main board case 200z and the integrated main ROM 502, they may be provided on other components. For example, the main control board 50 may be displayed with the same identification marks as the identification marks 1595 and 1596.

As described above, in this embodiment, the seal parts 1560 and 1561 are arranged across at least a portion of the electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223), so that, for example, by checking the positional relationship between the seal parts 1560 and 1561 and the electronic components 595, an inspector can determine whether or not tampering has occurred with the main control board 50. This reduces the possibility of tampering, allowing players to play with peace of mind. This increases the player's interest.
In addition, since the area 1575 is provided in the seal portion 1560, the inspector can write the inspector's name and the date when the main board case 200z was opened in the area 1575 (more specifically, the writing area 1570). The inspector can also write in the area 1575 the date when it was confirmed whether or not tampering had occurred in the main control board 50. In addition, since the viewing area 1574 is provided between the areas 1575, the area 1575 is more noticeable than when only the area 1575 is provided. This makes it easier for the inspector to check the characters and the like written in the area 1575. This reduces the possibility of tampering, and the player can play with peace of mind. This increases the player's interest.

Furthermore, since the viewing portion 1574 is provided in the seal portion 1560, the inspector can check the electronic component 595 through the viewing portion 1574. Therefore, compared to a case where the viewing portion 1574 is not provided, the inspector can easily check whether or not tampering has occurred with the electronic component 595. This reduces the possibility of tampering, allowing the player to play with peace of mind. This increases the player's interest.
Moreover, the code section 1572 is provided at a position that does not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502. Therefore, an inspector can easily check the integrated main ROM 502. Therefore, an inspector can check the integrated main ROM 502 and easily determine whether or not cheating has occurred. Therefore, a player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is increased.

Furthermore, the code section 1572 is linked to information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50, which is stored in a device other than the gaming machine 1. This allows an inspector to easily check the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 using the code section 1572. Therefore, the inspector can check the delivery destination information and easily determine whether or not fraud has occurred in which a main control board 50 with a different delivery destination has been installed. This allows the player to play with peace of mind. This increases the player's interest.
Also, a sticker 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502, and predetermined information is displayed on the sticker 1562. Therefore, an inspector can easily check for tampering such as replacing the integrated main ROM 502 by checking the sticker 1562. This reduces the possibility of tampering, allowing players to play with peace of mind. This increases the player's interest.
Furthermore, since at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name is printed on the sticker portion 1561, the inspector can easily ascertain at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name. Therefore, the inspector can easily determine whether or not cheating has occurred by checking at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is increased.

The shape of the integrated main ROM 502 is not limited. The integrated main ROM 502 in the above embodiment has a plate-shaped main body 580 extending up, down, left and right as shown in FIG. 225. However, the main body 580 may extend forward, backward, left and right. In this case, the first signal pin may extend forward and be electrically connected to the main control board 50. Furthermore, when the main body 580 extends forward, backward, left and right, the predetermined information displayed on the seal portion 1591 may be displayed on the upper or lower surface of the main body 580.
Furthermore, the various information displayed on the stickers 1560 and 1561 may be displayed at an angle that allows the mounting location of the unified main ROM 502 to be visually recognized.
The main board case 200z, particularly the upper case piece 220, does not have any ventilation holes.
The main board case 200z has date marks formed on the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220.
The date mark is a mark for lot management that is added to the case, which is a plastic molded product, during production (molding).
A feature of this embodiment is that no parts are provided near the main ROM that are so high that the ROM identification seal (ROM seal/seal portion 1562) becomes invisible.

Figures 239(a) to (d) are schematic diagrams focusing on the protruding piece of the upper case piece, showing the procedure for assembling the cutting member, anti-opening seal, and cap to the sealing base part, and are shown in FIG. 239(e) is an end view of the protruding piece, Figure 240 is an exploded oblique view showing the state just before the cutting member, anti-opening seal, and cap are assembled to the sealing base part 310, Figure 241 is an oblique view showing the state where the anti-opening seal has been adhered to the sealing base part, Figure 242 is an oblique view showing the state where the cap has been attached to the anti-opening seal, Figure 243 is an oblique view showing the state where the cap has been removed and the anti-opening seal has been broken, and Figures 244(a) and (b) are a surface view and a partially enlarged view of an example of an anti-opening seal.
The cutting member 230 shown in Figures 239 to 243 has a slightly different configuration than that shown in Figure 226, but is the same in that it breaks the anti-tamper seal when the cap is removed, and is similarly applicable.

<Do not open sticker>
As a means for sealing the main board case 200z having the above-mentioned configuration, an unsealing seal 250 shown in Fig. 244(a) is used. The unsealing seal 250 is made of a paper material that can be cut or broken relatively easily, and has security (anti-counterfeiting) printing or the like on the front side and an adhesive layer formed on the back side.
The strip-shaped portions 251 arranged along the top and bottom sides of the surface are identification areas (fine pattern areas) 251 for authenticity identification (anti-counterfeiting) composed of minute components including random micro characters. As security measures other than the identification area 251, a hologram 252, a QR code (registered trademark) 253, etc. are provided.
Random microtext is a technology that embeds extremely small characters into lines, parts of patterns, etc. Microtext cannot be reproduced by low-resolution copying machines, so it is one way to verify the authenticity of reproductions.

Figure 244(b) is a 10x enlarged view of a portion of the identification area (fine pattern area) on the do-not-open seal 250, in which hidden text such as "Do not open" and "Security" is written within a pattern of tiny circles or dots.
By adhering this anti-opening seal 250 across the two case pieces that make up the main board case, any unauthorized opening will always break the identification area 251. Even if a fraudster replaces the ROM and then closes the case body and cover body again, joining together the broken parts of the anti-opening seal 250 to restore the appearance to the original state, it is possible to reliably confirm the presence of the broken and repaired parts by examining the identification area (and other parts) with a magnifying glass.

Since minute characters such as random microcharacters cannot be distinguished (read, recognized, or identified) by the naked eye, they can only be distinguished by magnifying them 5 to 10 times using a magnifying glass such as a loupe. For example, when individual characters have a minute size of 1/10 to 1/5 mm, it is difficult to distinguish or read them with the naked eye, but by magnifying them 10 times or 5 times, it is possible to enlarge them to a size of about 1 mm, which is distinguishable and readable by a person with normal eyesight.
The identification area 251 of the open-do-not-open seal 250 of the present invention is not limited to random micro characters, but may include characters, figures, symbols, and/or patterns that are so small (fine) that at least a part of them is difficult to distinguish (read, recognize, distinguish) with the naked eye of an observer with normal eyesight. These minute characters, etc. can be magnified to enable the observer to distinguish, read, and determine the authenticity.
In addition, "difficult to distinguish with the naked eye" broadly includes cases where it is difficult but not impossible to distinguish with the naked eye, and cases where it is impossible to distinguish with the naked eye.
Needless to say, the arrangement and shape of the identification area 251 on the anti-tamper seal can be modified in various ways.

<Main structure of the main board case>
Next, the structure of the main circuit board case will be described, focusing on the area where the anti-opening seal is attached.
That is, when the main board case 200z is in the closed state as shown in Figures 222 and 223, the unsealing seal 250 is adhered so as to straddle the edges of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 (sealing base portion 310 = unsealing seal adhering portion), so that the two case pieces cannot be opened without damaging the unsealing seal 250. That is, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are provided with sealing portions 212, 222 on one longitudinal end edge, respectively, and both sealing portions 212, 222 constitute the sealing base portion 310. That is, the both sealing portions 212, 222 are provided at approximately the same position on one longitudinal end edge of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220, so that when the two case pieces are closed, the both sealing portions 212, 222 are aligned to form the sealing base portion (unsealing seal adhering portion).

In this embodiment, the anti-opening seal adhesive portion (seal adhesive portion) A is composed of both sealing portions 212, 222, and the cutting member 230 is supported in a state where it is sandwiched between both protruding pieces, but the cutting member 230 may be supported (temporarily locked) on the outer surface of one of the protruding pieces, or the anti-opening seal adhesive portion A may be composed of only one of the protruding pieces, and the cutting member may be supported by one surface of this one protruding piece.
In other words, the cutting member 230 may be configured to be held by at least one of the case pieces (projecting piece) at the adhesive portion of the anti-opening seal.
The generally plate-shaped cutting member 230 is disposed to be sandwiched between the sealing portions 212, 222 (between the edges) of the two lower and upper case pieces 210, 220 which are in the closed state.
The tip surfaces of the open-prohibition seal adhesive portion A (the tip surfaces of both sealing portions 212, 222) constitute the first adhesive surface A1, and the outer surfaces of the sealing portions 212, 222 perpendicular to the first adhesive surface A1 constitute the second adhesive surface A2 (Figures 239 and 240).
An accommodation space S for accommodating the cutting member 230 is provided on the inside of the first adhesive surface A1 and the second adhesive surface A2 (Figure 240).

In addition, a first opening O1 communicating with the storage space S is formed on the first adhesive surface A1, and a second opening O2 (guide slit 224) communicating with the storage space S is formed on the second adhesive surface A2. In this embodiment, two second openings O2 are formed in the upper case piece 220, and one second opening O2 is formed in the lower case piece 210.
The do not open seal 250 has a first seal adhesive portion 250A that covers all or part of the first opening O1 and is adhered to the first adhesive surface A1, and a second seal adhesive portion 250B that covers part of the second opening O2 and is adhered to the second adhesive surface A2 (Figure 244).

The cap 240 is detachably attached to the outer surface of the sealing base part 310 so as to surround (conceal) the unsealable seal 250 with the unsealable seal adhered to the outer surface of the sealing base part 310. The cap 240 includes a cap body 241 that surrounds the outer surfaces of both protruding pieces (sealing base part 310) including the unsealable seal 250, and a locking part 242 (FIG. 225) that elastically engages with the cutting member 230 (locked part 236) that is sandwiched between the sealing parts 212 and 222 when attached to the sealing base part 310, and when the cap is removed from the sealing base part, the cutting member is removed as a unit, thereby breaking and removing the unsealable seal.
A tubular crimping member 203A (third screw piece 93) is provided on one side of cap 240, and when the cap is attached so as to cover both sealing portions 212, 222 and the do-not-open seal as shown in Figures 222 and 228, the central hole of crimping member 203A communicates with holes of crimping members 203B (first screw piece 91, second screw piece 92) provided at corresponding positions on the upper and lower case pieces. In this state, the cap is fixed to the upper and lower case pieces by inserting and crimping a crimping pin 94 (Figure 225).
In the illustrated embodiment, an example is shown in which the cap 240 surrounds the entire sealing portion 212, 222 including the anti-tamper seal, but the cap may be configured to be attached to at least a portion of the sealing base portion (anti-tamper seal adhesive portion = cap attachment portion) 310 so as to surround at least a portion of the anti-tamper seal.

The cutting member 230 has a blade portion (first broken piece) 231 provided at the tip edge in the direction (b) (FIG. 226) in which the cap 240 is detached from the sealing base portion 310, and a broken piece (second broken piece) 233 protruding in a direction intersecting (perpendicular to) the detachment direction (b). One broken piece 233 is provided on the surface of the lower case piece facing the sealing portion 212, and two are provided on the surface of the upper case piece facing the protruding piece 222.
A second opening O2 (guide slit 224) is formed in the sealing portion 212 of the lower case piece for accepting one broken piece 233, and two second openings O2 (guide slits 224) are formed in the protruding piece 222 on the upper case piece for accepting two broken pieces 233 respectively.
By making the cutting member 230 a separate member from each case piece, it becomes possible to independently and arbitrarily mold and process the shape of the cutting means, such as the blade portion 231, and it becomes possible to configure it so as to remarkably break the anti-open seal.

<Procedure for assembling each component and breaking the seal>
Next, the procedure for assembling the cutting member 230, the anti-opening seal 250, and the cap 240 to the sealing base portion 310 will be described with reference to FIG. 241, focusing on the protruding piece 222 of the upper case piece.
In this embodiment, the cutting member 230 is configured to be provisionally locked to the inner surface of the protruding piece 222 of the upper case piece. A pair of locking parts (provisional locking parts) 223 are protruding from the inner surface (cutting member support part) of the protruding piece 222, and these locking parts 223 are configured to engage with and hold the inner edge parts of two recesses (provisional locking parts) 232 provided at the rear end edge of the cutting member 230 that is attached in the direction of the arrow in Figure 241 (a). In addition, a broken piece 233 is protruding from the surface side of the cutting member, and a guide slit 224 that allows the broken piece 233 to pass when the cutting member is attached to the inner surface of the protruding piece 222 from the direction of the arrow is formed in the protruding piece 222. Therefore, when the cutting member 230 is moved in the direction of the arrow as shown in Figure 241 (a) to seat on the inner surface of the protruding piece 222, the surface of the cutting member can be attached while sliding along the inner surface of the protruding piece 222. At this time, the broken pieces 233 move while fitting into the guide slits 224, so they do not become an obstacle when mounting.

By providing tear fragments 233 on both sides of the cutting member 230 and providing guide slits 224 on both sealing portions 212, 222 as in this embodiment, the anti-opening seals adhered to the outer surfaces of both sealing portions 212, 222 can be simultaneously broken when the cutting member is detached from the anti-opening seal adhesive portion A together with the cap.
In this embodiment, a configuration example in which a cutting member support portion is provided on the protruding piece 222 on the upper case half has been shown, but it is also possible to provide a cutting member support portion on the inner surface of the sealing portion 212 on the lower case half.

Furthermore, the cutting member 230 has elastically deformable claw-shaped latched portions 236 at both ends in the longitudinal direction (direction perpendicular to the mounting direction). When the cutting member 230 is sandwiched between the sealing portions 212 and 222 (see Fig. 241 (b) and (c)), the latched portions 236 are exposed to the outside from the gap between the two protruding pieces. This allows the cap to engage with the cutting member when the cap is mounted on the sealing base. The leading edge of the cutting member is also exposed from the gap between the two protruding pieces, allowing the cutting member to be removed smoothly from the sealing base together with the cap and to break the anti-open seal.
After the cutting member 230 has been attached to the protruding piece 222 in this manner, the lower case piece 210 is attached to the upper case piece 220 , and an unsealing seal 250 is adhered across both sealing portions 212 , 222 .

Next, Figure 241 (b) shows the state in which an anti-tamper seal is adhered to the sealing base portion with the lower case piece 210 omitted, and Figure 241 (c) and Figure 241 show the state in which the cap 240 is attached.
The cap 240 has a protruding locking portion 242 on the inside of the cap body 241 that can engage with the locked portion 236 of the cutting member 230, and when the cap is attached to the sealing base as shown in Figure 241 (c), each locking portion 242 elastically engages with the tip of each locked portion 236 to become temporarily integrated.
In this state, when the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base portion as shown in Figures 241(d) and 243, the cutting member 230 integrated with the cap is also removed as one unit, and the cutting member is pulled out from the gap between the two sealing portions 212, 222. At this time, the blade portion 231 and the tearing piece 233 of the cutting member break the open-prohibition seal. That is, the blade portion 231 is configured to be freely removable from the gap (first opening O1) between the two sealing portions 212, 222 to the outside (outside), while the tearing piece 233 is configured to be removable from within the guide slit 224 provided in the protruding piece 222 to the outside (outside), so that each portion of the open-prohibition seal located in the movement path of the blade portion 231 and the tearing piece 233 can be broken.
Each tear piece (second tear piece) 233 protrudes from a portion of each second opening O2 that is not covered by the anti-tamper seal.

In the configuration example of the open-danger seal shown in Fig. 244, when the open-danger seal 250 is attached to both protruding pieces, the identification area 251 consisting of random microcharacters is in the moving path of the breaking piece (second breaking piece) 233 provided on the cutting member 230. Therefore, the identification area 251 is broken (destroyed) by the breaking piece 233 when the cutting member is detached together with the cap.
When the identification region 251 is provided at a position corresponding to the blade portion 231 at the tip edge of the cutting member, the identification portion will be broken by the blade portion 231 (Figure 243).
In this embodiment, the cap 240 is attached to cover the outer surface of the sealing base part 310 of the main board case with the anti-tamper seal 250 adhered to the outer surface of the sealing base part 310 so as to straddle the sealing parts 212, 222 of both case pieces, and at this time, the cutting member 230 held between the sealing parts 212, 222 and the cap 240 engage and become one body. Therefore, before the main board case is opened, that is, in the process of removing the cap 240 from the sealing base part, the cutting member 230 breaks the anti-tamper seal 250.

The cutting member 230 has a jagged blade 231 at its tip (the tip in the removal direction), and is configured to break the first seal adhesive portion 250A of the anti-open seal when the cutting member 230 protrudes to the outside from the butted position of both sealing portions 212, 222. This makes it possible to know if the main board case has been illegally opened.
Furthermore, the cutting member 230 has a breakable piece 233 that protrudes in a direction (toward the upper case piece) that intersects with the direction in which the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base part 310, and when the cutting member 230 is attached to the protruding piece 222, the breakable piece 233 protrudes from the guide slit 224 provided in the protruding piece 222 of the upper case piece 220 onto the surface of the protruding piece 222. If an unsealing seal is attached to the surface of the protruding piece 222 in this state, the breakable piece 233 is in constant contact with the unsealing seal 250 and interferes with it. Therefore, when the cutting member moves in the removal direction by removing the cap 240 from the sealing base part, the breakable piece moves along the guide slit 224, and the unsealing seal can be broken in a straight line. The unsealing seal part (second seal adhesion part 250B) broken by the breakable piece 233 is a part that corresponds to the surface of the protruding piece 222, so it can be directly seen from the back side of the gaming machine, and evidence of cheating can be easily found from this breakable part.
When the main board case is opened by rotating it relative to the base as shown in FIG. 223, it becomes possible to see the opposite side of the cap 240 .

In this embodiment, assuming that the open-do-not-open seal 250 is attached across both sealing parts 212 and 222, the cutting member 230 is provided with a blade 231 for irretrievably cutting the identification area 251 and a tearing piece 233 for reliably leaving visible evidence of the breakage, but this is merely one example, and only the blade 231 at the tip or only the tearing piece 233 on the other side may be provided. In particular, when the open-do-not-open seal 250 is not attached across both sealing parts 212 and 222 but is attached only to the outer surface of one of the protruding pieces, for example, the protruding piece 222 on the upper case side, it is sufficient to provide the cutting member 230 with the tearing piece 233. In other words, according to the present invention, it is possible to deal with both cases in which the open-do-not-open seal is attached across both protruding pieces and only to one of the protruding pieces.

In the example shown in FIG. 243, when the main board case 200z is opened, the anti-opening seal (anti-opening seal) 250 is broken in a state in which the QR code (registered trademark) 253 cannot be read.
However, it is preferable to configure the blade portion 231 so that the tamper-evident seal 250 is broken in a state in which the QR code 253 can be read.

<Dispense control board protection case>
Next, the configuration of the payout control board protective case in the gaming machine of this embodiment will be described.
Figure 245 is a diagram showing the component layout of the dispensing control board 60z in this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 245, the dispensing control board 60z comprises a one-chip microcomputer (IC chip) 601 which integrates (integrates) a dispensing CPU 60az, a dispensing ROM 60bz, and a dispensing RAM 60cz, a capacitor, ICs and other electronic components 605, and an error indicator 610 for displaying error information.
The error indicator 610 may be configured by one 7-segment liquid crystal display or a 7-segment LED. The 7-segment liquid crystal display is a liquid crystal display device that is configured by seven segments that can be individually turned on and off to represent one character of a number.
A 7-segment LED is an LED display device consisting of seven segments that can be individually turned on and off to represent one character of a number.
The error indicator 610 may further include a segment for displaying dots in addition to the seven segments for displaying numbers, similar to the performance display monitor 600 and setting display monitor 650 described below.
Not only the error display 610, but also the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 described below can utilize a 7-segment liquid crystal display or a 7-segment LED having segments that display dots.
Although detailed explanation will be omitted, the printed wiring board 701 of the dispensing control board 60z, like the main control board 50, adopts a single-sided mounting method for mounting electronic components, in which various electronic components and connectors are mounted only on the component side of the printed wiring board.

Figure 246 is a diagram explaining the configuration of the dispensing control board protective case, where (a) is an oblique view, (b) is a side view, and (c) is a front view.
Figures 247 and 248 are exploded oblique views of the dispensing control board case.
The dispensing control board protective case (hereinafter referred to as the dispensing board case 400) is composed of an upper case piece 410 and a lower case piece 420.
As with the main board case 200z described above, the upper case piece 410 and the lower case piece 420 each have a control board storage section 411, 421 for storing the dispensing control board 60z.
In addition, the control board storage sections 411, 421 are each formed in a shape having a plate portion formed in an approximately rectangular shape and a flange portion protruding from the peripheral edge of the plate portion and surrounding one side surface of each plate portion.

Of the flange portions constituting the control board storage section 411 of the upper case piece 410, five L-shaped hook pieces 412 are formed on each of the portions protruding along the two long sides of the upper case piece 410.
Meanwhile, among the flanges constituting the control board storage section 421 of the lower case piece 420, the portions protruding along the two long sides of the lower case piece are formed into a double wall shape, and an insertion groove 422 into which the hook piece 412 of the upper case piece 410 can be inserted is provided between the walls forming the double wall. Also, a hook piece 423 is formed in each insertion groove 422.

When the upper case piece 410 and the lower case piece 420 are assembled together, the hook piece 412 of the upper case piece 410 is inserted into the insertion groove portion 422 of the lower case piece 420 .
Then, upper case piece 410 is slid in the direction of arrow α in Fig. 247 along the left-right direction relative to lower case piece 420. Then, hook piece 412 engages with hook piece 423, so that lower case piece 210 and upper case piece 220 are combined so as not to come apart unless they move relative to each other in the direction opposite to arrow α.
When combined in this manner, the upper case piece 410 and the lower case piece 420 form a box-shaped inner package portion that is shielded from the outside by the control board storage sections 411, 421, and the dispensing control board 60z is stored in the inner package portion. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility of the dispensing control board 60z and the integrated dispensing ROM 601 being illegally replaced, etc.
In addition, a protective cover is disposed at the bottom of the upper case piece 410 to cover the connection portion between the internal connector provided on the internal dispensing control board 60z and the external connector.

In this embodiment, the lower case piece 420 and the upper case 410 are fixed together by a crimping member with the dispensing control board 60z sandwiched between them.
A crimp fastening portion 450 using a crimping member is disposed at an appropriate position along the edge of the dispensing board case 400, and the lower case piece 420 and the upper case piece 410 are locked in a closed state by driving a crimping member into the crimp fastening portion 450. By removing (breaking) the crimping member driven into the fastening hole 451, the lower case piece 420 and the upper case piece 410 become openable, detachable, and detachable.
In the dispensing board case 400 of this embodiment, two crimp fastening portions are provided (crimp fastening portions 450A, 450B).

Upper fastening pieces 455 are provided at appropriate locations along the edges of the upper case piece 410, and upper fastening pieces 455 are provided with fastening holes 456 therethrough.
A lower fastening piece 455 protrudes from a position on the inner surface of the lower case piece 420 corresponding to the upper fastening piece 455. A fastening hole 457 is formed in the lower fastening piece 455.
When the lower case piece 420 and the upper case piece 410 are engaged with each other using the hook pieces 412, 423 and the insertion groove portion 422, the through fastening hole 456 of the upper fastening piece 455 communicates with the fastening hole 457 of the lower fastening piece. By driving a crimping member into this communicated fastening hole (crimping fastening hole), it becomes impossible to release the engagement between the lower case piece 420 and the upper case piece 410.
Therefore, it is not possible to access the dispensing control board 60z housed inside the dispensing board case.
In addition, only one crimp fastening portion is used for one fastening of the lower case piece 420 and the upper case piece 410. After removing the crimp member and removing the fastening (after opening the dispensing board case 400), if fastening is to be performed again, the crimp member is driven into the other remaining crimp fastening hole to perform fastening. In other words, the dispensing board case of this embodiment can be opened up to two times.
Position indicators similar to those of the main board case 200z are provided on the lower left and lower center of the front surface of the upper case piece 410.
A sticker (error display sticker) 1565 indicating the content of the error display is affixed to the position display area on the lower left, and a sticker (opener display sticker) 1566 for recording the person who opened the dispensing board case and the date and time of opening is affixed to the position display area in the lower center.

As shown in FIG. 247 , the position indication portion and the seal portion 1565, 1566 are formed and affixed to the outer surface side of the upper case piece 410, but they may also be formed and affixed to the inner surface side of the upper case piece 410.
This is similar to the seal portions 542, 1560, and 1561 of the main board case 200z.
The position indication portion may be provided on the outer surface side or the inner surface side of the upper case piece 410, as explained in Figures 228 to 230 for the main board case 200z.

In this embodiment, the position indication portion 541, which is an attachment position mark indicating the position where the seal portion is attached, can take the following forms.
That is, position indication portion 541 is a mark surrounding the entire circumference of seal portions 1565, 1566 on the same surface as the upper case surface or on the back surface to which seal portions 1565, 1566 are attached, or an L-shaped mark on the same surface as the upper case surface or on the back surface to which seal portions 1565, 1566 are attached.
The position indication portion 541 is a linear protrusion provided so as to surround the periphery of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 .
The position indication portion 541 is a linear recess provided on the same surface as the seal portions 1565 and 1566 so as to surround the periphery of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 .
The position indication portion 541 is a linear convex portion provided on the back surface of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 so as to surround the periphery of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 .
The position indication portion 541 is a linear recess provided on the back surface of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 so as to surround the periphery of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 .

The position indication portion 541 is an L-shaped linear protrusion provided on the same surface as the seal portions 1565 and 1566 so as to surround a predetermined corner of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 .
The position indication portion 541 is an L-shaped linear recess provided on the same surface as the seal portions 1565 and 1566 so as to surround a predetermined corner of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 .
The position indication portion 541 is an L-shaped linear convex portion and concave portion provided on the back surface of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 so as to surround a predetermined corner portion.
The position indication portion 541 is a position mark that is neither a convex nor a concave portion and is provided so as to surround the seal portions 1565 and 1566 .

In Figures 246 to 248, the position indication portion 541 is an L-shaped linear protrusion provided on the same surface as the sticker (the front side of the upper case piece), but is not limited to this and can take any of the forms described above.
The sticker portion 1565 is affixed near the error display 610 provided on the dispensing control board 60z housed in the dispensing board case 400, and indicates the content of the error display to be displayed on the error display 610.
The error indicator 610 displays the number of the error shown on the sticker portion 1565 .
When multiple errors have occurred, only the most serious error among the errors that have occurred is displayed on the error display 610. Alternatively, all of the multiple errors that have occurred are displayed on the error display 610 in sequence.
Furthermore, the error indicator 610 may be provided with a number of LEDs each corresponding to an error number, and an error may be notified by lighting up the LED corresponding to the occurring error.
Here, for example, a plurality of error numbers are displayed on sticker portion 1565, and LEDs corresponding to each error number are arranged vertically next to each of the error numbers.
For example, if an "abnormal dispensing quantity error" corresponding to error number 0 occurs, the LED positioned next to the error number "0" on the seal section 1565 is turned on, and if a "main control unconnected error" corresponding to error number 1 occurs, the LED positioned next to the error number "1" on the seal section 1565 is turned on.
The seal portion 1566 is made of a transparent material, and for example, within a frame printed in white, an error display number and the content of the error it indicates are printed in white.
Other than the frame, number, and error content display, the transparent material is exposed, and the electronic components on the dispensing control board 60z can be seen through the transparent material.
That is, the error indicator 610 can see the transparent material of the seal portion 1566. Alternatively, the seal portion 1566 is attached to the dispensing board case 400 so as not to overlap the error indicator 610 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the error indicator 610 is always visible.
The seal portion 1565 is attached to a position where the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated dispensing ROM 601 on the dispensing control board 60z can be seen through a transparent material from all angles.

As shown in FIG. 246 (c), the sticker portion 1565 (error display explanation sticker) has, for example, the following contents written on it corresponding to the errors detected by the main control board and various sensors.
That is,
0 Abnormal number of dispensed items error 1 Main control not connected error 2 Dispense switch abnormality detection error 1
3. Dispatch switch abnormality detection error 2
4. Payout case error; 5. Main control case error; 6. Full tank error; 7. Out of ball error; 8. Game ball lending device not connected to cell; 9. Game ball lending device communication error.

In addition, the error display 610 may display one of the following errors: "tray full error,""counter case error,""counting switch error,""over-payouterror,""game ball etc. lending device not connected error,""game ball etc. lending device communication error,""door open error,""abnormal winning error 1,""abnormal winning error 2,""dischargeerror,""magnet detection error,""abnormal prize frequency error," or "abnormal door open error," and the content of the corresponding error display may be displayed on the sticker section 1565 (error display explanation sticker).
A "dish full error" is an error that occurs when the tray becomes full due to the payment of prize balls or the tray becomes full due to the loan of balls.
A "counter case error" is an error that occurs when balls get stuck between the tank and the dispensing mechanism.
A "counting switch error" is an error that occurs when the wiring connecting the dispensing control board and the dispensing device relay terminal board, or the wiring connecting the dispensing device relay terminal board and the components within the dispensing mechanism, is not connected correctly.

An "excessive distribution error" occurs when more than the requested number is distributed.
A "dispensing command error" is an error that occurs when the signal sent from the main control board to the dispensing control board is not normal.
The "game ball etc. lending device not connected error" is an error that occurs because the game ball etc. lending device is not connected to the gaming machine.
A "game ball etc. lending device communication error" is an error that occurs when the payout control board detects that the signal from the game ball etc. lending device is invalid.
A "door open error" is an error that occurs when the upper decoration is opened.
A "switch unconnected error" is an error that occurs when a broken wire or poor connection is detected in a switch on the game board, such as a gate or winning slot.

"Abnormal winning error 1" is an error that occurs when five or more winnings are detected in the right start port between the end of operation of a normal electric device and the start of the next operation, or when one or more winnings are detected between the time the power is turned on and the start of operation of a normal electric device, when a winning entry is detected in the upper right large winning port when the upper right special electric device is not in operation, or when a winning entry is detected in the lower right large winning port when the lower right special electric device is not in operation.
"Abnormal winning error 2" is an error that occurs when a game ball is detected for an extremely long period of time by the switch in each winning slot.
An "exhaust error" is an error that occurs when the difference between the number of game balls that pass through the switch in each winning port and the number of game balls that pass through the out switch exceeds 49.
A "magnet detection error" is an error that occurs when magnetic force is detected near the left windmill, near the upper left prize opening, near the center left prize opening, near the lower left prize opening, near the center starting opening, or the lower right corner of the game board.
An "abnormal winning frequency error" is an error that occurs when an abnormal number of winnings is detected in either the center starting port, the lower left winning port, the center left winning port, the upper left winning port, or the right winning port when a certain number of balls is fired.
An "abnormal door opening error" is an error that occurs when the inner frame opens when the upper decoration is closed.

As shown in Figure 246 (c), the seal portion 1566 (opener indication seal/dispensing board management seal) has a writing area 1567 for writing the opener who opened the dispensing board case 400 and the date of opening.
The seal portion 1566 is made of a transparent material and is not subjected to processing such as watermarking. For example, three writing areas 1567 are formed within a frame with a heading such as "Dispensing Control Board" in black.
The writing area 1567 is a white base formed on a transparent material on which writing can be done with a pen or the like.
Above the writing areas 1567, headings such as "Opener" and "Date Opened" are printed in black, and to the left of each writing area, a circled number indicating the number of the writing area is printed.
Apart from the printing and writing area 1567 (white background), the transparent material is exposed, and the electronic components on the dispensing control board 60z can be seen through the transparent material.
The seal portion 1566 is attached to a position where the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated dispensing ROM 601 on the dispensing control board 60z can be seen through a transparent material from all angles.
The seal portion 1566 is provided so that the three writing areas 1567 are positioned so as not to overlap the integrated dispensing ROM 601 from any angle.

In addition, in the sealed portion 1566 shown in FIG. 246(c), the writing area 1567 is integrated with the columns for writing "opener" and "date of opening". In contrast, as with the sealed portion 1560 of the main board case 200z shown in FIG. 233 and FIG. 237, the columns for writing the opener and date of opening may be separated, with a viewing area made of transparent material between them. In this way, it becomes even easier to check the electronic components on the dispensing control board 60z through the sealed portion 1566.

As described above, similar to the main board case 200z, the dispensing board case 400 of this embodiment has a crimped portion.
The dispensing board case 400 has two crimping parts. In contrast, the seal part 1566 has three writing areas 1567.
In the dispensing board case 400, the number of crimped portions does not match the number of times an opener or the like can write on the sealed portion 1566 (the number of writing areas 1567).
The number of crimping parts provided in the dispensing board case 400 is equal to or less than the number of entry fields for the opener and the opening date provided on the dispensing board management seal (sealing part 1566). By providing more entry fields than the number of times that the seal can actually be opened, it is possible to deal with typos and other errors, and it is possible to respond more flexibly than if the number of crimping parts and the number of entry fields were the same.

The dispensing board case 400, particularly the upper case piece 410, does not have any ventilation holes.
A seal portion 1562 is affixed to the dispensing ROM 60bz (dispensing chip) 601.
As described above, the sticker 1562 is an information identification section for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name is printed as the specific information. In the present embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company" are printed on the sticker 1562 as the predetermined information. The specific information displayed on the sticker 1562 is called an identification display 1596. In the present embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company".
The sticker 1562 affixed to the integrated dispensing ROM 601 may be the same color as the sticker 1562 of the same content affixed to the main ROM of the main control board 50, or it may be a different color.

The dispensing board case 400 and the main board case 200z differ in the number of times that information such as the opener can be written in the seal parts 1560 and 1566. Alternatively, the size of the writable area in the seal parts 1560 and 1566 differs.
In the description of Figure 246, the seal portion 1565 and the seal portion 1566 are different seal portions, but this is not limited thereto, and the seal portion 1565 and the seal portion 1566 may be integrated.
That is, a single sticker containing the contents of sticker portion 1565 and sticker portion 1566 may be affixed.

<Performance control board protection case>
Next, the configuration of the performance control board protective case in this embodiment will be described.
First, the board structure of the image control board will be described with reference to Figures 249 and 250.
Figure 249 is a diagram for explaining the structure of the image control board, where Figure 249(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the component side (front side) of the image control board, and Figure 249(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the solder side (back side) of the image control board.
Figure 250 is a diagram showing the configuration of a printed circuit board used in an image control board, with Figure 250(a) showing the configuration of the component side (front side) of the printed circuit board, and Figure 250(b) showing the configuration of the solder side (back side) of the printed circuit board.

As shown in Figures 249 and 250, image control board 70z is mounted with a large number of electronic components including a VDP.
The image control board 70z uses a printed wiring board 801 having wiring patterns formed on both sides of the printed board.
In this embodiment, the image control board 70z has been described as using a printed wiring board 801 as an example, but this is merely one example, and the image control board 70z may also use a multilayer printed wiring board in which wiring patterns are formed on both sides and inner layer surfaces of the printed wiring board.
The mounting method used when mounting electronic components on the printed wiring board 801 is a surface mounting method in which various surface-mount electronic components, connectors, etc. are mounted on connection electrodes (lands) 802 formed on both sides (component surface 801a and solder surface 801b) of the printed wiring board 801. In other words, the image control board 70z is configured using a printed wiring board 801 of the surface mounting method.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the main control board 50 is configured with a printed wiring board 701 having through holes into which the leads of insertion-mounted electronic components (hereinafter referred to as "insertion-mounted components") can be inserted, and the boards other than the main control board 50 are configured with printed wiring boards 801 having connection electrodes that can be connected to the connection terminals of surface-mounted electronic components (hereinafter referred to as "surface-mounted components").

FIG. 251 is an enlarged view of a portion of a printed wiring board used in an image control board.
As shown in FIG. 251, a printed wiring board 801 has land groups 811 and 812 formed of lands 802 each connected to a connection terminal of a surface mounted component.
For example, if the surface mount component is an IC 850 as shown in Fig. 242(a), a land group 811 for the IC 850 is formed on a printed wiring board 801 by a plurality of lands 802 each connected to a plurality of lead terminals of the IC 850. In this specification, a plurality of lands 802 each connected to a plurality of lead terminals of one surface mount component is called a land group.
Similarly, if the surface mounted component is a connector 851 as shown in FIG. 242(a), a land group 812 for the connector 851 is formed on the printed wiring board 801 by a plurality of lands 802 which are respectively connected to a plurality of lead terminals of the connector 851.
The plurality of lands 802 constituting the land groups 811 and 812 are made up of a first land 802a and a second land 802b having a shape different from that of the first land 802a.
Specifically, of the multiple lands 802 constituting each of the land groups 811 and 812, the lands 802b at the four corners are made larger (for example, about 1.5 times larger) than the other lands 802a.

Figure 252 is a front view explaining the configuration of the performance control board protective case.
Figures 253 and 254 are exploded oblique views of the performance control board case.
As shown in Figures 252 to 254, an image control board 70z in a performance control board case (performance board case) 700 has a number of electronic components mounted thereon, including a host CPU, a VDP, and an image ROM.
As described above, in the printed wiring board of image control board 70z, a double-sided mounting method is adopted as a mounting method for mounting electronic components, in which various electronic components and connectors are mounted on both the component side and the solder side of the printed wiring board.

The performance board case 700 comprises a lower case piece 710 and an upper case piece 720.
The performance control board and image control board 70z are housed in an inner container formed by a control board storage section 711 in the lower case piece 710 and a control board storage section 721 in the upper case piece 720.
The performance board case 700, particularly the upper case piece 720, is provided with an air vent 725, unlike the main board case 200z and the dispensing board case 400 described above.
In addition, the upper case piece 720 of the performance board case 700 does not have the sticker sections 1560, 1566 that were affixed to the main board case 200z and the dispensing board case 400 for writing the name of the opener and the date of opening.
Therefore, the performance board case 700 does not have a crimping portion for sealing the performance board case 700, as is provided in the main board case 200z and the dispensing board case 400.

On the other hand, an opaque sticker portion 1580 with instructions regarding volume settings is affixed to the upper case piece 720 of the performance board case 700 near the volume change switch 36z.
Correspondingly, a position display unit 541 is provided on the rear surface of the upper case piece 720 of the performance board case 700.
As described above, the image control board 70z is a double-sided mounting board, and the electronic components mounted on the front side (the gaming board side) cannot be directly visually inspected.
Furthermore, since the image control board 70z simply has the function of outputting effect images and sound effects, unlike the main control board 50 and the payout control board 60z, there is a low risk of ROM chips, etc. being illegally replaced.
Therefore, since there is little need to see the board surface through the seal, an opaque seal portion 1580 can be attached to the performance board case 700.
Also, for the same reason, no crimping portion (sealing portion) for sealing the performance board case 700 is provided.
As a result, the seal portion 1566 having a writing area 1567 for writing the name of the opener who opened the performance board case 700 and the date of opening is not affixed.

The position display unit 541 may be provided on the front side of the upper case piece 720 .
In this embodiment, the position indication portion 541, which is an attachment position mark indicating the position where the sticker portion 1580 is attached, may take the following forms.
That is, position indication portion 541 is a mark surrounding the entire circumference of seal portion 1580 on the same surface as the upper case surface to which seal portion 1580 is attached or on the back surface, or an L-shaped mark on the same surface as the upper case surface to which seal portion 1580 is attached or on the back surface.
The position indication portion 541 is a linear protrusion provided so as to surround the periphery of the seal portion 1580 .
The position indication portion 541 is a linear recess provided on the same surface as the sealing portion 1580 so as to surround the periphery of the sealing portion 1580 .
The position indication portion 541 is a linear protrusion provided on the back surface of the seal portion 1580 so as to surround the periphery of the seal portion 1580 .
The position indication portion 541 is a linear recess provided on the back surface of the seal portion 1580 so as to surround the periphery of the seal portion 1580 .

The position indication portion 541 is an L-shaped linear protrusion provided on the same surface as the sealing portion 1580 so as to surround a predetermined corner of the sealing portion 1580 .
The position indication portion 541 is an L-shaped linear recess provided on the same surface as the sealing portion 1580 so as to surround a predetermined corner of the sealing portion 1580 .
The position indication portion 541 is an L-shaped linear protrusion and recess provided so as to surround a predetermined corner on the back surface of the seal portion 1580 .
The position indication portion 541 is a position mark that is neither a convex nor a concave portion and is provided so as to surround the seal portion 1580 .

The distance from the imaginary plane to which the main control board 50 is extended is different between the seal portion 1561 provided on the surface of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z, the seal portion 1560 serving as the main board control number seal, and the QR code (registered trademark) of the open-do-not-open seal 250. The distance from the imaginary plane (main control board 50) to the QR code (registered trademark) of the open-do-not-open seal 250 is shorter (closer).
This is because, as shown in FIG. 241 etc., the QR code (registered trademark) 253 of the anti-opening sticker 250 is located lower than the top surface of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z.

The board cases of the gaming machine, including the main board case 200z, the payout board case 400, and the performance board case 700, have information displays such as stickers on the case parts, ROM stickers, color codes for lead resistors, identification codes for network resistors, IC model codes, capacitor model codes, display information for the performance display monitor, and setting display monitor.
The distances from the control boards stored in the board cases (main board case 200z, payout board case 400, performance board case 700) are different for each of these pieces of information. The distances from the top surface of the board case are also different. As explained above, the top surface of the board case is where the seal part is attached, and is also the highest point on the board case.
The seal part of the board case part is attached at the highest point of the board case, the ROM seal is attached on the ROM mounted on the board inside the case, and the display information of the performance display monitor and the setting display monitor are displayed on the performance display monitor and the setting display monitor mounted on the board. Naturally, the height of this information differs based on the control board.

In this embodiment, a seal is attached to the top surface of the board case so that the ROM legs of the control boards (main control board 50, dispensing control board 60z, image control board 70z) stored in the board case can be seen and are not hidden by the seal. The ROM legs are not hidden, even partially, by the seal when the board case is viewed from above.
In this embodiment, the electronic components including the ROM may be hidden when viewed from above, but can be seen from the viewing section when viewed from a different angle.
In order to make it clear at a glance that no tampering has been done with the ROM leg, transparent connectors are provided as the connection points of the ROM to the control boards (main control board 50, dispensing control board 60z, image control board 70z).
The identification information provided on the case pieces of the board case has different distances from the control board (main control board 50, dispensing control board 60z, image control board 70z). For example, the identification information displayed on the upper case piece, lower case piece, and (in the case of the main board case) cap has different distances based on the control board (main control board 50, dispensing control board 60z, image control board 70z), and the positional relationship is also different front to back. In addition, the color of the area on the control board (main control board 50, dispensing control board 60z, image control board 70z) where the electronic components are installed is different from the color of the area displaying the manufacturer's name.

<Structure of main control board>
The configuration (layout) of the main control board housed in the main board case of this embodiment is not limited to that described above, such as that shown in Figure 235.
Figure 255 is a diagram for explaining another configuration of the main control board according to this embodiment, and in particular shows the configuration of the component side (front surface) of the main control board.
The basic configuration of the main control board is the same as that of Figures 235 and 236, but in the example shown in Figure 255(a), the main control board is provided on its component surface (front surface) with a performance display monitor (performance display section) 600 and a setting display monitor (setting display section) 650. In addition, the main control board 50 is provided with a setting key switch 660 and an RWM clear switch 680.

The performance display monitor 600 displays the base values of the gaming machine.
The base value is a number that indicates the performance of the gaming machine, ie, how much will be paid out when in a normal state (when there is no low probability time-saving mode) excluding special states such as a jackpot, a sure-win state, or a time-saving mode.
For example, when there is no low probability time reduction and a player shoots out 100 game balls and there are 50 winning balls, the base value is "50."
The number of game balls shot by the player is called the number of outs, and in the gaming machine 1, a base value when there is no low probability time-saving is calculated for each total number of outs (usually 60,000) in all game states including jackpot, special probability game state, and time-saving game state, and is displayed on the performance display monitor 600.
The base value when there is no low-probability time-saving feature is expressed as (number of payouts when there is no low-probability time-saving feature / number of outs when there is no low-probability time-saving feature).

The performance display monitor 600 will now be described. The performance display monitor 600 includes a display and a circuit section on the main control board 50. A display unit that combines the display section and the circuit section may be mounted on the main control board 50.
The display shows four digits arranged horizontally. There are dots below the numbers. The left two digits of the four digits are the discrimination segment, and the right two digits are the ratio segment.

FIG. 255(b) is a diagram for explaining the display of the performance display monitor. The performance display monitor 600 displays the following four types of information in sequence and in a repeated manner.
As shown in (b-1) to (b-4), the discrimination segment sequentially switches between the values of "bL.", "b1.", "b2.", and "b3.", and the ratio segment displays the corresponding base value.
The display switching time for "bL.", "b1.", "b2.", and "b3." is approximately 5.0 seconds.
For example, "bL.xx" may be displayed for 5.0 seconds, "b1.yy" for 5.0 seconds, "b2.zz" for 5.0 seconds, "b3.ww" for 5.0 seconds, and then "bL.xx" again for 5.0 seconds.
"bL." shown in (b-1) indicates the base value when there is no low-probability time reduction for every 60,000 total outs, and this is the real-time value during measurement.
“b1.” shown in (b-2) indicates the base value when there is no low-probability time-saving when the total number of outs in the previous round was 60,000.
“b2.” shown in (b-3) indicates the base value when there was no low-probability time-saving when the total number of outs two times ago was 60,000.
“b3.” shown in (b-4) indicates the base value when there was no low-probability time-saving when the total number of outs three times ago was 60,000.

Here, the performance display process performed by the main control board 50 will be described.
The main CPU 50az starts counting the number of outs (total number of outs) in all game states from the first power-on (RWM all clear).
Until the total number of OUTs reaches an arbitrary number less than 300, the main CPU 50az blinks "bL." in the identification segment and displays "--" in the ratio segment in (b-1).
In (b-2), "b1." flashes in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
In (b-3), "b2." flashes in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
In (b-4), "b3." flashes in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.

After that, the main CPU 50az initializes the total number of outs, the number of payouts when there is no low-probability time-saving (number of low-probability payouts), and the number of outs when there is no low-probability time-saving (number of low-probability outs), and starts the first measurement.
Until the total number of outs reaches 60,000 in the first round, the main CPU 50az performs the following process.
That is, in (b-1), "bL." is displayed in the identification segment, and the base value when there is no low-probability time reduction is calculated in real time and displayed in the ratio segment.
In addition, when the number of low-probability outs is between 0 and 5,999, "bL." will flash, and when the number of low-probability outs is 6,000 or more, "bL." will be lit up.
In (b-2), "b1." flashes in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
In (b-3), "b2." flashes in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
In (b-4), "b3." flashes in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
Then, the main CPU 50az stores the final ratio segment value of the identification segment "bL." of the first measurement as AA.

When the total number of outs reaches 60,000 in the first time, the main CPU 50az initializes the total number of outs, the number of low-probability payouts, and the number of low-probability outs, and starts the second measurement.
The main CPU 50a performs the following process until the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the second time.
That is, in (b-1), "bL." is displayed in the identification segment, and the base value when there is no low-probability time reduction is calculated in real time and displayed in the ratio segment.
In addition, if the number of low-probability outs is between 0 and 5999, "bL." will flash, and if the number of low-probability outs is 6000 or more, "bL." will be lit up.
In addition, in (b-2), "b1." is lit in the discrimination segment, and the stored AA is displayed in the ratio segment.
In addition, in (b-3), "b2." flashes in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
In addition, in (b-4), "b3." flashes in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
The final value of the ratio segment of the identification segment "bL." of the first measurement is stored as AA.
The final value of the ratio segment of the discrimination segment "bL." in the second measurement is stored as BB.

When the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the second time, the main CPU 50az initializes the total number of outs, the number of low-probability payouts, and the number of low-probability outs, and starts the third measurement.
The main CPU 50az performs the following process until the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the third time.
That is, in (b-1), "bL." is displayed in the identification segment, and the base value when there is no low-probability time reduction is calculated in real time and displayed in the ratio segment.
In addition, if the number of low-probability outs is between 0 and 5999, "bL." will flash, and if the number of low-probability outs is 6000 or more, "bL." will be lit up.
Also, in (b-2), "b1." is turned on in the identification segment, and the stored BB is displayed in the ratio segment.
Also, in (b-3), "b2." is turned on in the identification segment, and the stored AA is displayed in the ratio segment.
Also, in (b-4), "b3." flashes in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
The final value of the ratio segment of the identification segment "bL." of the first measurement is stored as AA.
The final value of the ratio segment of the discrimination segment "bL." in the second measurement is stored as BB.
The final value of the ratio segment of the identification segment "bL." of the third measurement is stored as CC.

When the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the third time, the main CPU 50az initializes the total number of outs, the number of low-probability payouts, and the number of low-probability outs, and starts the fourth measurement.
The main CPU 50az performs the following process until the total number of outs reaches 60,000 in the fourth round.
That is, in (b-1), "bL." is displayed in the identification segment, and the base value when there is no low-probability time reduction is calculated in real time and displayed in the ratio segment.
In addition, if the number of low-probability outs is between 0 and 5999, "bL." will flash, and if the number of low-probability outs is 6000 or more, "bL." will be lit up.
Also, in (b-2), "b1." is turned on in the identification segment, and the above-mentioned stored CC is displayed in the ratio segment.
Also, in (b-3), "b2." is turned on in the identification segment, and the stored BB is displayed in the ratio segment.
Also, in (b-4), "b3." is blinked in the identification segment, and the stored AA is displayed in the ratio segment.
When the total number of outs reaches 60,000 the next time, the main CPU 50az repeats the measurement from the fifth time onwards in the same manner as described above.

The board case 200z of this embodiment may be used to house the main control board of a slot machine (pachinko slot machine), and in that case, the game information display device provided on the main control board displays information such as the winning ratio of the slot machine (pachinko slot machine).
The performance display monitor 600 described above is a type of gaming information display device that shows the gaming information of the gaming machine, and the gaming information of the gaming machine includes not only base value information of a pachinko gaming machine, but also information such as the role ratio of a pachislot machine.
A game information display that displays information such as the winning ratio of a pachislot machine is called a winning ratio monitor.
The role ratio monitor is
(1) Cumulative advantageous zone ratio; (2) consecutive win ratio every 6,000 games; (3) win ratio every 6,000 games; (4) cumulative consecutive win ratio; and (5) cumulative win ratio.
Here, the advantageous zone ratio is the ratio of the number of advantageous zone games to the total number of games. The advantageous zone is a zone in which it is possible to give instructions such as push order navigation.
The role ratio and consecutive role ratio refer to the ratio of the number of payout coins of the role (so-called bonus) to the total number of payout coins.
The role ratio is calculated for all reels, and the consecutive role ratio is calculated for the period when the reel continuous operation device is in operation.
The game information display that shows the game information of the gaming machine may also include such a role ratio monitor, but in this embodiment, the monitor for displaying the base value of the pachinko gaming machine is particularly described in detail, and a detailed description of the role ratio monitor is omitted.

Next, a description will be given of the setting display monitor 650. The setting display monitor 650 displays the setting values of the gaming machine 1.
As described above, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment allows the probability of winning a jackpot to be changed by changing the settings (Figure 199 (a)).
The setting display monitor 650 is mounted inside the main control board case 200z, has a single-digit display as shown in FIG. 255(c), and can display any one of the setting values shown in FIG. 199(a).
These setting values may be displayed on the performance display monitor 600, and the setting display monitor 650 may not be provided.

The following describes the setting display monitor 650. The setting display monitor 650 is installed for the purposes of clearly indicating to players that a setting change device is installed, clearly indicating to game facility staff how to operate the device, and preventing fraudulent acts related to settings.
The settings can be displayed using either numbers or symbols other than numbers. If numbers are used, the settings can be displayed using the numbers "1", "2", "3", or "4" according to the set value. If the set value ranges from "1" to "6", the settings can be displayed using the numbers "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", or "6" according to the set value.

For the setting operation, for example, the setting key switch 660 and the setting switch 670 described above are used.
The setting key switch 660 is a switch that triggers a transition to a "setting change state" and a "setting confirmation state," and is operated using a key.
The setting key switch 660 can be in two states, OFF and ON, and can maintain either state. Also, the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state.
The setting key switch 660 is mounted inside the main control board case 200z.
The setting switch 670 is a switch for switching settings when in a setting change state, and is mounted in an arbitrary position where it cannot be operated by the player.
The setting switch 670 can also serve as an RWM clear switch 680 or the like.

When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned ON and the RWM clear switch 680 turned ON, the gaming machine 1 transitions to a "setting change state" for changing the settings.
When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned ON and the RWM clear switch 680 turned OFF, the gaming machine 1 transitions to a "setting confirmation state" for confirming the settings.

The setting change process by the main control board 50 will now be described.
(1) When the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is OFF, the setting display monitor 650 is turned off. (2) The setting key switch 660 is turned ON by an operator such as a gaming facility staff member. The setting display monitor 650 is still turned off.
(3) When the RWM clear switch 680 is turned ON by the user who sets the game, and the power supply of the gaming machine is turned ON in this state, the main CPU 50az transitions the gaming machine 1 to a "setting change state." The main CPU 50az displays the current setting state on the setting display monitor 650. (4) When the setting switch 670 (or the RWM clear switch 680) is pressed in this state, the main CPU 50az sequentially changes the setting values, and displays the changed (currently being set) setting values on the setting display monitor 650.
(5) When the setting key switch 660 is turned OFF by the setting person, the main CPU 50az confirms the setting value and turns off the setting display monitor 650.
When the performance display monitor 600 also functions as the setting display monitor 650, the main CPU 50az displays the setting value in the "setting change state" on one of the segments (digits) of the performance display monitor 600.
When the setting key switch 660 is turned OFF by the user to confirm the setting value, the main CPU 50az starts the performance display described above on the performance display monitor 600.

The setting confirmation process performed by the main control board 50 will now be described.
(1) When the gaming machine 1 is in a power-off state, the setting display monitor 650 is turned off.
(2) The setting key switch 660 is turned ON by the setting person, and the setting display monitor 650 remains turned off.
(3) In this state, when the power supply of the gaming machine is turned ON without turning ON the RWM clear switch 680, the main CPU 50az transitions the gaming machine 1 to a setting confirmation state. The main CPU 50az causes the setting display monitor 650 to display the current setting state.
When the setting key switch 660 is turned OFF by the setting person's operation, the main CPU 50az ends the setting confirmation state and turns off the setting display monitor 650.
When the performance display monitor 600 also functions as the setting display monitor 650, the main CPU 50az uses one of the segments (digits) of the performance display monitor 600 to display the setting value during the "setting confirmation state."
When the setting key switch 660 is turned OFF by the user to terminate the setting confirmation state, the main CPU 50az starts the performance display described above on the performance display monitor 600.

As shown in FIG. 255, the main control board 50 has connectors 771 to 776 on its component surface.
The multiple connectors 771 to 776 are lined up in order from left to right at the lower end of the main control board 50.
Although not shown in Figure 256 below, multiple connectors 771 to 776 are arranged inside six openings 779 provided in the lower part of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z, similar to that shown in Figure 233.
The performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 provided on the component side of the main control board 50 are both provided on the upper end side of the main control board 50.
That is, the connectors 771 to 776 , the performance display monitor 600 , and the setting display monitor 650 are provided in opposing positions on the main control board 50 .
With this arrangement, the cables and harnesses connected to the multiple connectors 771 to 776 do not impede the visibility of the inspector checking the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 .
In particular, since the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 are provided at the upper end sufficiently spaced away from the connectors 771 to 776, the cables and harnesses hanging down from the connectors do not interfere with the field of view of an inspector attempting to view the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650.

The configuration of the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 50 in Figure 255 is the same as that in Figure 235 (b).
Furthermore, main control board 50 in FIG. 255 uses a printed wiring board 701 having wiring patterns formed on both sides of the printed board, similar to FIGS. 236(a) and (b).
In the printed wiring board 701, a single-sided mounting method is adopted as a mounting method for mounting electronic components, in which various electronic components and connectors are mounted only on a component surface 701a of the printed wiring board 701. The printed wiring board 701 is similar to that shown in Figures 236(a) and (b), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Fig. 256 shows the main board case of this embodiment when the main control board described in Fig. 255 is stored, (a) shows a perspective view of the assembly, (b) shows a front view of the assembly, and Fig. 257 is an exploded perspective view including the base of the main board case shown in Fig. 255.
In the description of Figures 256 and 257, components having the same configuration as those in the above embodiments (particularly Figures 199 to 234, 237, and 238) are indicated by the same symbols, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted as appropriate.
The main board case shown in Figures 256 and 257 has a seal portion 1560 and a seal portion 1561 affixed thereto.
Also, similar to Figures 199 to 234 and Figures 237 to 238, identification markings 520 are attached to the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240.

The seal portion 1560 is attached to a position indicator 561 provided at the lower left side in the left-right direction of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z. The seal portion 1561 is attached to a position indicator 561 provided at the upper right part of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z.
Both of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are formed from a material having optical transparency, and in the present embodiment, as an example, they are transparent (made of a transparent material).
Each of the sealing portions 1560 and 1561 is disposed across a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223). Note that in FIG. 256, various electronic components such as the plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223) located in front of the sealing portions 1560 and 1561 are not shown.

The sealing portion 1560 will now be described.
The seal portion 1560 is a seal for managing the main board.
In this example, a watermark for preventing counterfeiting is provided on a seal body (base portion) 1560A of the seal portion 1560. That is, the seal portion 1560 (opener indication seal) is a processed seal in which a watermark processing is applied to the seal body 1560A.
A "watermark" is, for example, a display that looks different depending on the viewing angle, and various types can be applied, such as those that use holograms or those that look different depending on their physical shape.
However, although sealing member main body 1560A has been subjected to a predetermined processing (watermark processing), it is transparent and at least has high light transmittance, ensuring a certain degree of visibility.

The seal portion 1560 has, on the seal portion main body 1560A, a white writing area (writing column) 1570, a code portion 1572, and an information display portion 1573 within a frame with a black heading such as "Main board control number" or the like.
The writing area 1570, the code portion 1572, the information display portion 1573, and the text display associated with these areas (described later) are each non-translucent areas with low translucency because the transparent material of the seal portion main body 1560A is not exposed.
The seal portion 1560 has a number of non-transparent portions, through which it is difficult to see the main control board 50 inside the main board case 200z.
The code portion 1572 as a non-transparent portion, the information display portion 1573 and the writing area 1570 are provided at positions on the seal portion main body 1560A that do not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502, the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650.

On the other hand, the areas other than the writing area 1570, the code portion 1572, the information display portion 1573, and the areas associated with these areas and containing the text display described below in the seal portion main body 1560A are translucent portions 1574 in which the transparent material of the seal portion main body 1560A is exposed and which have high translucency.
The translucent portion 1574 is the above-mentioned viewing portion through which the electronic components 595 on the main control board 50 in the main board case 200z can be seen through a transparent material.

In main board case 200z, main control board 50 can be seen through sealing member 1560 and main board case 200z.
Therefore, the inspector can easily check the main control board 50. Therefore, the inspector can check the main control board 50 through the seal member 1560 and easily determine whether or not cheating has occurred. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is increased.

Furthermore, regardless of whether or not there is a translucent or non-translucent portion, the seal portion 1560 is affixed to the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated main ROM 502 on the main control board 50 in a position that can be seen from all angles.
Furthermore, regardless of whether or not there is a light-transmitting portion or a non-light-transmitting portion, the sealing portion 1560, including the writing area 1570, the code portion 1572, and the information display portion 1573, is positioned so that the entire sealing portion 1560 does not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502 from any angle.
Therefore, when the main board case 200z is viewed from the front, the unified main ROM 502 can always be seen through the main board case 200z.
Therefore, the inspector can easily check the integrated main ROM 502. Therefore, the inspector can easily check the integrated main ROM 502 and determine whether or not cheating has occurred. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Regardless of whether it has a translucent or non-translucent portion, the sealing portion 1560, including the writing area 1570, the code portion 1572, and the information display portion 1573, is positioned so that the entire sealing portion 1560 does not overlap with the performance display monitor 600 or the setting display monitor 650 from any angle.
Therefore, when looking at the main board case 200z from the front, the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 can be seen through the main board case 200z.

256, it cannot be said that the sealed portion 1560 and the performance display monitor 600 are in close proximity, but if all of the following conditions are met: the sealed portion 1560 does not overlap the integrated main ROM 502 or the performance display monitor 600, the performance display monitor 600 is located sufficiently separated from the connectors 771 to 776, and the sealed portion 1561 does not overlap the performance display monitor 600, the sealed portion 1560 and the performance display monitor 600 may be in close proximity to each other. For example, the performance display monitor 600 may be located at the position indicated by the dashed line above the sealed portion 1560 in FIG. 256(b).
In this case, the inspector can check the performance display monitor 600 and the seal portion 1560 at the same time at a glance.

The display content of the sticker portion 1560 will be described in detail below.
The writing area 1570 is an area for writing down the person who opened the main board case 200z and the date of opening.
The writing area 1570 is a white base formed on a transparent material on which writing can be performed with a pen or the like.
As an example, six writing areas 1570 are provided, with three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction, allowing three sets of "opener" and "date of opening" to be written.
The writing area 1570 is printed with a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) base.
Above the writing areas 1570, headings such as "Opener" and "Date Opened" are printed in black, and to the left of each writing area, a circled number indicating the number of the writing area is printed.
That is, "Opener" is printed in black above the upper left writing area 1570. "Date Opened" is printed in black above the upper right writing area 1570. A circle 1 is printed to the left of the upper left writing area 1570. A circle 2 is printed to the left of the writing area 1570 in the vertical center on the left side. A circle 3 is printed to the left of the lower left writing area 1570.
For example, when an inspector opens main board case 200z, he/she writes the inspector's name in left-side writing area 1570, and writes the date that main board case 200z was opened in right-side writing area 1570. The inspector may also write in writing area 1570 the date that he/she confirmed whether or not tampering had occurred with main control board 50.

Code portion 1572 is provided in the upper left part of sticker portion 1560. Code portion 1572 includes predetermined information. Code portion 1572 is a portion where information can be read by other devices, and for example, a QR code (registered trademark), barcode, etc. is printed in black in a rectangular colored area (white in this embodiment). In this embodiment, as an example, code portion 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

The code portion 1572 is linked to information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50, which is stored in a device other than the gaming machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as the "other device").
For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), which is information included in the code portion 1572, is read by a camera provided on a portable information terminal or the like. The portable information terminal uses the URL to access other devices via a network. As a result of accessing other devices, the information displayed on the portable information terminal includes the delivery destination of the main control board 50 (for example, the name of the store to which the gaming machine 1 was delivered) and information on whether the gaming machine 1 was discarded or not. This allows the inspector to easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 and information on whether the gaming machine 1 was discarded or not. Therefore, the inspector can confirm the delivery destination information and easily determine whether or not fraud has occurred in which a main control board 50 with a different delivery destination has been installed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

The information display section 1573 includes various information. The information display section 1573 may include, for example, information similar to the identification display 529. In this embodiment, as an example, the information display section 1573 has the character string "EF001" printed in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. The character string is, for example, the management number of the main control board 50. Using the management number, an inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the gaming machine 1 and whether the gaming machine 1 has been discarded from information linked to the management number held by the manufacturer. The character string of the information display section 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, model, etc. In addition, the rectangular area of the information display section 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code section 1572 are connected in the left-right direction.

The light-transmitting portion (viewing portion) 1574 provided in the sealing portion 1560 will be described.
The light-transmitting portion 1574 is the area of the seal body 1560A other than the writing area 1570, the code portion 1572, the information display portion 1573, the notation "main board control number", the frame, the notation of the opener, the notation of the opening date, and the notations of circles 1 to 3.
The light-transmitting portion 1574 is, for example, an area extending in the left-right direction between three lines of writing areas 1570 in the vertical direction.
The light-transmitting portion 1574 is an area extending in the left-right direction between the code portion 1572 and the information display portion 1573 arranged side by side, and the two writing areas 1570 on the upper side.
The light-transmitting portion 1574 is also an area extending in the vertical direction between the two horizontal rows of writing areas 1570 .
An inspector can check electronic component 595 (see FIG. 255(a)) through light-transmitting portion 1574. Therefore, compared to a case where light-transmitting portion 1574 is not provided, an inspector can easily check whether or not tampering has occurred with electronic component 595. This reduces the possibility of tampering, allowing players to play with peace of mind. This increases the player's interest.

The sealing portion 1561 will be described.
The sticker portion 1561 is attached to the sticker portion 1562 attached to the integrated main ROM 502 on the main control board 50 in a position that allows it to be seen from all angles.
The seal portion 1561 is provided at a position that does not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502 from any angle.
Therefore, when the main board case 200z is viewed from the front, the unified main ROM 502 can always be seen through the main board case 200z.
The seal portion 1561 is provided at a position so as not to overlap the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 from any angle.
Therefore, when looking at the main board case 200z from the front, the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 can be seen through the main board case 200z.
The description of the seal portion 1561 is the same as that in FIG. 237, so the description will be omitted.
In addition, a sticker 1562 is attached to the unified main ROM 502. The sticker 1562 is the same as that shown in Figures 233 and 237, and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The main control board 50 shown in Figures 256 and 257 is equipped with a setting key switch 660 and an RWM clear switch 680.
The RWM clear switch 680 will now be described.
256 and 257, the RWM clear switch 680 on the main control board 50 is not directly exposed. A recess 688 is provided in the upper case piece 220 of the board case 200z, and an opening 687 is provided in the recess 688.
256(b) and 257, the operating member 685 is provided at a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 680, and when a staff member or the like presses the operating member 685, the pressed operating member 685 presses the RWM clear switch 680. This causes the RWM clear switch 680 to be operated.
A cover member 686 is provided in the recess 688. The cover member 686 is journaled within the recess 688 so as to be rotatable between a first position where the operating member 685 is covered to make it inoperable, and a second position where the operating member 685 is opened to make it operable.
By moving the operating member 685 to the second position, the RWM clear switch 680 can be operated.
In this way, it is only necessary to provide the substrate case 200z with an opening 687 large enough to insert the operating member 685. Furthermore, the operating member 685 cannot be operated unless the cover member 686 is opened. Therefore, unauthorized access to the inside of the substrate case 200z can be prevented.
The RWM clear switch 680 may have an end exposed from an opening 687 so that it can be operated directly without being operated using the operating member 685 .

The setting key switch 660 is a cylindrical member that protrudes from the main control board 50 and has a keyhole on the end face thereof into which a key is inserted.
An end face of the setting key switch 660 having a keyhole is exposed from an opening 661 provided in the upper case piece 220 of the board case 200z.
Staff or the like can insert a key into the keyhole of the setting key switch 660 to perform the operation.
The end face of the setting key switch 660 having a keyhole is slightly lower than the surface of the board case 200z.

Figure 258 is a diagram for explaining yet another configuration of the main control board according to this embodiment, and in particular shows the configuration of the component side (front surface) of the main control board.
The basic configuration of the main control board 50 is the same as that shown in Figure 255, but in the example shown in Figure 255 (a), the main control board 50 has a performance display monitor 600 on its component side (front surface), but does not have a setting display monitor 650.
The function of the setting display monitor 650 is shared by the performance display monitor 600, and an independent setting display monitor 650 is not provided.
Alternatively, the main control board 50 shown in FIG. 258 is a main control board for a gaming machine that does not have a setting change function.
As shown in FIG. 255, the main control board 50 has connectors 771 to 776 on its component surface.
The multiple connectors 771 to 776 are lined up in order from left to right at the lower end of the main control board 50.

Although not shown in Figure 256 below, multiple connectors 771 to 776 are arranged inside six openings 779 provided in the lower part of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z, similar to that shown in Figure 233.
The performance display monitor 600 , which can also be used as a setting display monitor 650 , is provided on the component side of the main control board 50 and is disposed on the upper end side of the main control board 50 .
That is, the connectors 771 to 776 and the performance display monitor 600 are provided at opposing positions on the main control board 50 .
With this arrangement, the cables and harnesses connected to the multiple connectors 771 to 776 do not impede the visibility of an inspector checking the performance display monitor 600 .
In particular, since the performance display monitor 600 is provided at the upper end sufficiently spaced away from the connectors 771 to 776, the cables and harnesses hanging down from the connectors do not interfere with the field of view of an inspector attempting to view the performance display monitor 600.

The configuration of the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 50 in Figure 258 is the same as that in Figure 235 (b).
Furthermore, main control board 50 in FIG. 258 uses a printed wiring board 701 having wiring patterns formed on both sides of the printed board, similar to FIGS. 236(a) and (b).
In the printed wiring board 701, a single-sided mounting method is adopted as a mounting method for mounting electronic components, in which various electronic components and connectors are mounted only on a component surface 701a of the printed wiring board 701. The printed wiring board 701 is similar to that shown in Figures 236(a) and (b), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Fig. 259 is a diagram showing the main board case of this embodiment when the main control board described in Fig. 258 is stored, (a) is a perspective view of the assembly, (b) is a front view of the assembly, and Fig. 260 is an exploded perspective view including the base of the main board case shown in Fig. 259.
In the description of Figures 258 and 259, components having the same configuration as those in the above embodiments (particularly Figures 199 to 234, 237, and 238) are indicated by the same symbols, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted as appropriate.
The main board case shown in Figures 258 and 259 has a seal portion 1560 and a seal portion 1561 affixed thereto.
Also, similar to Figures 199 to 234 and Figures 237 to 238, identification markings 520 are attached to the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240.
The seal portion 1560 is attached to a position indicator 561 provided at the lower left side in the left-right direction of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z. The seal portion 1561 is attached to a position indicator 561 provided at the upper right part of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z.

Both the seal parts 1560 and 1561 are formed of a material having optical transparency, and in this embodiment, as an example, the seal parts 1560 and 1561 are transparent. Each of the seal parts 1560 and 1561 is disposed across a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223). Note that in FIG. 256, various electronic components such as the plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223) located in front of the seal parts 1560 and 1561 are not shown.
In this example, a seal body (base portion) 1560A of the seal portion 1560 is provided with a watermark to prevent counterfeiting.
The configuration of the seal portion 1560, which is a processed seal, is the same as that shown in Figures 237 and 256, so detailed explanation will be omitted.

Except for the code portion 1572, the information display portion 1573, and the writing area 1570 (white background), the transparent material of the seal portion main body 1560A is exposed, and the electronic components on the main control board 50 can be seen through the transparent material.
In main board case 200z, main control board 50 can be seen through sealing member 1560 and main board case 200z.
Therefore, the inspector can easily check the main control board 50. Therefore, the inspector can check the main control board 50 through the seal member 1560 and easily determine whether or not cheating has occurred. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is increased.

Furthermore, regardless of whether or not there is a translucent or non-translucent portion, the seal portion 1560 is affixed to the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated main ROM 502 on the main control board 50 in a position that can be seen from all angles.
Furthermore, regardless of whether or not there is a light-transmitting portion or a non-light-transmitting portion, the sealing portion 1560, including the writing area 1570, the code portion 1572, and the information display portion 1573, is positioned so that the entire sealing portion 1560 does not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502 from any angle.
Therefore, when the main board case 200z is viewed from the front, the unified main ROM 502 can always be seen through the main board case 200z.
Therefore, the inspector can easily check the integrated main ROM 502. Therefore, the inspector can easily check the integrated main ROM 502 and determine whether or not cheating has occurred. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
The sealing portion 1560, regardless of whether it has a translucent or non-translucent portion, is positioned so that the entire sealing portion 1560, including the writing area 1570, code portion 1572, and information display portion 1573, does not overlap with the performance display monitor 600 from any angle.
Therefore, when the main board case 200z is viewed from the front, the performance display monitor 600 can be seen through the main board case 200z.

259, it cannot be said that the sealed portion 1560 and the performance display monitor 600 are in close proximity, but if all of the following conditions are met: the sealed portion 1560 does not overlap the integrated main ROM 502 or the performance display monitor 600, the performance display monitor 600 is located sufficiently separated from the connectors 771 to 776, and the performance display monitor 600 does not overlap the sealed portion 1561, then the sealed portion 1560 and the performance display monitor 600 may be in close proximity to each other. For example, the performance display monitor 600 may be located in the position indicated by the dashed line above the sealed portion 1560 in FIG.
At this time, the inspector can check the performance display monitor 600 and the seal portion 1560 at the same time at a glance.

The description of the seal portion 1561 is the same as that in FIG. 237, so the description will be omitted.
In addition, a sticker portion 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502 .
The seal portion 1562 is the same as that shown in Figures 233 and 237, so a detailed description will be omitted.

As described above, the main control board 50 is mounted with the integrated main ROM 502 that controls the game, the performance display monitor 600 that displays the performance of the gaming machine, and other board components 595 that are different from these. A transparent seal member 1560 is attached to the main control board 50.
This allows the other board components 595 to be seen through the transparent seal portion 1560 and the main board case 200z. Also, the integrated main ROM 502 and the performance display monitor 600 can be seen directly through the main board case 200z.
By watermarking the transparent portion of the predetermined seal portion 1560, which has a transparent portion and multiple non-transparent portions and which needs to be affixed to the main board case 200z, duplication of the seal portion 1560 can be prevented.
Furthermore, by attaching the seal portion 1560 to a position that does not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502 and the performance display monitor 600, it is possible to reliably ensure the visibility of the integrated main ROM 502, which is an important board component, and the performance display monitor 600, which needs to be read accurately, without being affected by watermark processing or the multiple non-transparent portions.
For board components 595 that are less important than the integrated main ROM 502 and the performance display monitor 600, their status can be confirmed through the gaps between the multiple non-transparent parts and the surrounding transparent parts (viewing parts 1574) via watermark processing. Even if there are multiple non-transparent parts, the visibility of the board components can be ensured by the transparent parts.
In addition, the non-transparent portion can display predetermined information, for example, necessary information for identifying the integrated main ROM 502. Different information can be displayed or written in each of the multiple non-transparent portions.

Furthermore, in the case where the main control board 50 is separately provided with the setting display monitor 650, by attaching the seal portion 1560 to a position that does not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502, the performance display monitor 600, and the setting display monitor 650, it is possible to reliably ensure the visibility of the integrated main ROM 502, which is an important board component, the performance display monitor 600 which needs to be read accurately, and the setting display monitor 650, without being affected by watermark processing or the multiple non-transparent parts.
For board components 595 that are less important than the integrated main ROM 502, the performance display monitor 600, and the setting display monitor 650, their status can be confirmed through the gaps between the multiple non-transparent parts and the surrounding transparent parts (viewing parts 1574) via watermark processing. Even if there are multiple non-transparent parts, the visibility of the board components can be ensured by the transparent parts.

The performance display monitor 600 may be disposed on the lower end side instead of the upper end side of the main control board 50. In that case, it is desirable that the connectors 771 to 776 are disposed on the upper end side opposite (opposite) the performance display monitor 600.
The performance display monitor 600 may be disposed on the left or right end side of the main control board 50. In that case, it is desirable that the connectors 771 to 776 are disposed on the opposite end to the performance display monitor 600.
As described above, the performance display monitor 600 may be disposed inside the main control board 50 instead of at the end of the board. Even in this case, it must be disposed in a position that does not overlap with the cables and harnesses extending from the connectors 771 to 776, the seal portion 1560, and the like.
In this embodiment, the RWM clear switch 680 is described as being arranged on the main control board 50, but is not limited to this and may also be provided on the dispensing control board 60z.
In addition, in this embodiment, the setting key switch 660 is described as being arranged on the main control board 50, but this is not limited to this.
The setting key switch 660 can be located in a different position away from the main control board 50 as long as it is electrically connected to the main control board 50 .
The RWM clear switch 680 and the setting key switch 660 may be combined into one.

FIG. 261 shows the display transition of the image display device and the performance display unit when the RWM is cleared.
In the following explanation, the configurations of the performance display section and the setting display section will be assumed to be similar to those shown in Figures 255(b) and 255(c).
It is assumed that the open detection switch 105z is ON.
When clearing the RWM, in (1), the setting key switch 660 is turned OFF, the RMW clear switch 680 is turned ON, and then the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON.
After the power is turned on, in (2), the image display device 31z displays, for example, "POWER ON" to indicate that the power is being turned on. The performance display monitor 600 remains turned off.
When the RWM clear process is completed, (3) a message such as "RWM clear completed" is displayed on the image display device 31z to notify that the RWM clear has been completed.
Then, the performance display monitor 600 performs an initial operation, which is an operation in which all segments are turned on and then turned off repeatedly for five seconds.
When the initial operation of 5 seconds is completed, in (4), the performance display monitor 600 starts sequentially displaying the performance values as explained in Fig. 255(b). The RWM clear notification continues on the image display device 31z.

Figure 262 shows the display transition of the image display device and performance display unit when the settings are changed in a gaming machine equipped with a performance display unit that also serves as a setting display unit.
It is assumed that the open detection switch 105z is ON.
When changing the settings, in (1), the setting key switch 660 is turned ON, the RMW clear switch 680 is turned ON, and then the gaming machine 1 is powered ON.
After the power is turned on, in (2), the image display device 31z displays, for example, "POWER ON" to indicate that the power is being turned on. The performance display monitor 600 remains turned off.

In (3), the performance display monitor 600 displays the current setting value. If only one setting level is available, "P" or "1" is displayed.
The set value is displayed, for example, in the leftmost segment of the four-digit segments of the performance display monitor 600, but may be displayed in another segment. Regardless of which digit is used for displaying the set value, the set value is displayed together with a dot.
The image display device 31z displays a message such as "Settings are being changed" to notify that the settings are being changed. The image display device 31z does not display the setting value. The audio output device 34 outputs a sound such as "Settings are being changed" to notify that the settings are being changed. The frame lamp 101z and the board lamp 100z may be illuminated in a predetermined color (e.g., white) to notify that the settings are being changed.

When the person setting the settings operates the setting switch 670 or the RWM clear switch 680 which also serves as the setting switch 670, the performance display monitor 600 displays the setting value for each change operation in (4). Change operations can be performed any number of times until the setting change is completed, and the setting value is changed by one step each time an operation is performed.
As described above, with the operation of the setting switch 670 or the RWM clear switch 680 which also serves as the setting switch 670, the value increases by one step, such as from "1" to "2", and when it reaches the setting of "6", it returns to "1". During the change operation, no dot is displayed with the set value.
During this time, the image display device 31z continues to display "settings being changed" or the like to notify that the settings are being changed. The setting values are not displayed on the image display device 31z. The sound output device 34 also continues to output the sound to notify that the settings are being changed. The frame lamp 101z and the board lamp 100z also continue to emit light.
During the setting change, a history of setting changes may be displayed on the image display device 31z in response to operations using the cross key 40z, the performance button 8z, etc.

When the person setting the setting turns OFF the setting key switch 660, the setting value is confirmed as the value currently displayed on the performance display monitor 600 in (5). The performance display monitor 600 displays any of the setting values with a dot.
At this time, the display and sound notifying that the setting change is in progress may be continued or may be terminated. Instead of the display and sound notifying that the setting change is in progress, a display and sound such as "The setting change has been completed" may be output by the image display device 31z and the sound output device 34 to notify that the setting change has been completed.

Thereafter, at (6), a message such as "RWM clear completed" is displayed on the image display device 31z to notify that the RWM clear has been completed.
Along with such a display, a sound such as "RWM clearing has been completed" may be output from the sound output device 34 to notify that RWM clearing has been completed.
Then, the performance display monitor 600 performs an initial operation, which is an operation in which all segments are turned on and then turned off repeatedly for five seconds.
When the initial operation for 5 seconds is completed, in (7), the performance display monitor 600 starts sequentially displaying the performance values. The RWM clear notification continues on the image display device 31z.

Figure 263 shows the display transitions of the image display device, performance display unit, and setting display unit when the settings are changed in a case where the gaming machine is equipped with a separate performance display unit and setting display unit.
The basic premise is that the open detection switch 105z is ON.
When changing the settings, in (1), the setting key switch 660 is turned ON, the RMW clear switch 680 is turned ON, and then the gaming machine 1 is powered ON.
After the power is turned on, in (2), the image display device 31z displays, for example, "POWER ON" to indicate that the power is being turned on. The performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 remain turned off.

In (3), the setting display monitor 650 displays the current setting value. If only one setting level is available, "P" or "1" is displayed. The setting value is displayed with a dot.
The image display device 31z displays a message such as "settings are being changed" to notify that the settings are being changed. The frame lamp 101z and the board lamp 100z may be illuminated in a predetermined color (e.g., white) to notify that the settings are being changed.
The setting value is not displayed on the image display device 31z, and the performance display monitor 600 remains turned off.

When the person setting the setting operates the setting switch 670 or the RWM clear switch 680 which also serves as the setting switch 670, the setting display monitor 650 displays the setting value for each change operation in (4). Change operations can be performed any number of times until the setting change is completed, and the setting value is changed by one step each time an operation is performed.
As described above, with the operation of the setting switch 670 or the RWM clear switch 680 which also serves as the setting switch 670, the value increases by one step, such as from "1" to "2", and when it reaches the setting of "6", it returns to "1". During the change operation, no dot is displayed with the set value.
During this time, the image display device 31z continues to display "settings being changed" or the like to notify that the settings are being changed. The setting values are not displayed on the image display device 31z. The performance display monitor 600 remains turned off.
During the setting change, a history of setting changes may be displayed on the image display device 31z in response to operations using the cross key 40z, the performance button 8z, etc.

When the user turns off the setting key switch 660, the setting change ends, and in (5) the setting value currently displayed on the setting display monitor 650 is confirmed. After that, the setting display monitor 650 goes out.
At this time, the display and sound notifying that the setting change is in progress may be continued or may be terminated. Instead of the display and sound notifying that the setting change is in progress, a display and sound such as "The setting change has been completed" may be output by the image display device 31z and the sound output device 34 to notify that the setting change has been completed.
Thereafter, at (6), a message such as "RWM clear completed" is displayed on the image display device 31z to notify that the RWM clear has been completed.
Along with such a display, a sound such as "RWM clearing has been completed" may be output from the sound output device 34 to notify that RWM clearing has been completed.
Then, the performance display monitor 600 performs an initial operation, which is an operation in which all segments are turned on and then turned off repeatedly for five seconds.
When the initial operation for 5 seconds is completed, in (7), the performance display monitor 600 starts sequentially displaying the performance values. The RWM clear notification continues on the image display device 31z.

Figure 264 shows the display transition of the image display device and performance display unit when checking settings, when the gaming machine is equipped with a performance display unit that also serves as a setting display unit.
It is assumed that the open detection switch 105z is ON.
When changing the settings, in (1), the setting key switch 660 is turned ON, the RMW clear switch 680 is turned OFF, and then the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON.
After the power is turned on, in (2), the image display device 31z displays, for example, "POWER ON" to indicate that the power is being turned on. The performance display monitor 600 remains turned off.

In (3), the performance display monitor 600 displays the current setting value. If only one setting level is available, "P" or "1" is displayed.
The set value is displayed, for example, in the leftmost segment of the four-digit segments of the performance display monitor 600, but may be displayed in another segment. Regardless of which digit is used for displaying the set value, the set value is displayed together with a dot.
The image display device 31z displays a message such as "Checking settings" to notify that the settings are being checked. Also, a sound such as "Checking settings" is output to notify that the settings are being checked. The setting value is not displayed on the image display device 31z. The frame lamp 101z and the board lamp 100z may be illuminated in a predetermined color (e.g., white) to notify that the settings are being checked.
During setting confirmation, a history of setting changes may be displayed on the image display device 31z in response to operations using the cross key 40z, the performance button 8z, etc.

When the person setting the setting turns OFF the setting key switch 660, the setting confirmation ends, and the setting confirmation notification using the above-mentioned voice and display also ends.
At this time, the display and audio notifying that the setting check is in progress may be continued or may be terminated. Instead of the display and audio notifying that the setting check is in progress, a display and audio output such as "Setting check has been completed" may be output by the image display device 31z and the audio output device 34 to notify that the setting check has been completed.
Thereafter, in (4), a message such as "Power has been restored" is displayed on the image display device 31z to notify that the power has been restored.
Along with such a display, a voice such as "Power has been restored" may be output from the voice output device 34 to notify that power has been restored.
Then, the performance display monitor 600 performs an initial operation, which is an operation in which all segments are turned on and then turned off repeatedly for five seconds.
When the initial operation for 5 seconds is completed, in (5), the performance display monitor 600 starts to sequentially display the performance values. The RWM clear notification continues on the image display device 31z.

Figure 265 shows the display transitions of the image display device, performance display unit, and setting display unit when checking settings, when the gaming machine is equipped with a separate performance display unit and setting display unit.
It is assumed that the open detection switch 105z is ON.
When changing the settings, in (1), the setting key switch 660 is turned ON, the RMW clear switch 680 is turned OFF, and then the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON.
After the power is turned on, in (2), the image display device 31z displays, for example, "POWER ON" to indicate that the power is being turned on. The performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 remain turned off.

In (3), the setting display monitor 650 displays the current setting value. If only one setting level is available, "P" or "1" is displayed. The setting value is displayed with a dot.
The image display device 31z displays a message such as "Checking settings" to inform the user that the settings are being checked. Also, a sound such as "Changing settings" is output from the audio output device 34 to inform the user that the settings are being changed.
The frame lamp 101z and the board lamp 100z may be illuminated in a predetermined color (e.g., white) to indicate that the setting is being confirmed. The setting value is not displayed on the image display device 31z. The performance display monitor 600 remains turned off.
During setting confirmation, a history of setting changes may be displayed on the image display device 31z in response to operations using the cross key 40z, the performance button 8z, etc.

When the user turns off the setting key switch 660, the setting confirmation ends, and the setting confirmation notification using the above-mentioned voice and display ends. The setting display monitor 650 goes out.
At this time, the display and audio notifying that the setting check is in progress may be continued or may be terminated. Instead of the display and audio notifying that the setting check is in progress, a display and audio output such as "Setting check has been completed" may be output by the image display device 31z and the audio output device 34 to notify that the setting check has been completed.
Thereafter, in (4), a message such as "Power has been restored" is displayed on the image display device 31z to notify that the power has been restored.
Along with such a display, a voice such as "Power has been restored" may be output from the voice output device 34 to notify that power has been restored.
Then, the performance display monitor 600 performs an initial operation, which is an operation in which all segments are turned on and then turned off repeatedly for five seconds.
When the initial operation for 5 seconds is completed, in (5), the performance display monitor 600 starts to sequentially display the performance values. The RWM clear notification continues on the image display device 31z.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising a board on which a main control unit that controls games, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a processed seal that has been subjected to openwork processing, the processed seal having a light-transmitting portion with high light-transmittance and a plurality of non-light-transmitting portions with low light-transmittance, the processed seal being affixed to the board case at a position that does not overlap the main control unit and the information display unit, the other board components are visible through the light-transmitting portions between the plurality of non-light-transmitting portions and the board case, the main control unit is visible through the board case, and the information display unit is visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising a board on which a main control unit that controls games, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a processed seal that has been subjected to openwork processing, the processed seal having a light-transmitting portion with high light-transmittance and a plurality of non-light-transmitting portions with low light-transmittance, the processed seal being affixed to the board case at a position that does not overlap the information display unit, the other board components are visible through the light-transmitting portions between the plurality of non-light-transmitting portions and the board case, and the information display unit is visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising a board on which a main control unit that controls games and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a processed seal that has been subjected to openwork processing, the processed seal having a translucent portion with high translucency and a plurality of non-translucent portions with low translucency, the processed seal being affixed to the board case in a position that does not overlap the main control unit and the information display unit, the main control unit being visible through the board case, and the information display unit being visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising a board on which a main control unit that controls games and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a processed seal that has been subjected to openwork processing, the processed seal having a translucent portion with high translucency and a plurality of non-translucent portions with low translucency, the processed seal being affixed to the board case in a position that does not overlap the information display unit, and the information display unit being visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising a board on which a main control unit that controls games, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a processed seal that has been subjected to openwork processing, the processed seal having a light-transmitting portion with high light-transmittance and a non-light-transmitting portion with low light-transmittance, the processed seal being affixed to the board case at a position that does not overlap the main control unit and the information display unit, the other board components are visible through the light-transmitting portion and the board case, the main control unit is visible through the board case, and the information display unit is visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising a board on which a main control unit that controls games, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a processed seal that has been subjected to openwork processing, the processed seal having a light-transmitting portion with high light transmittance and a non-light-transmitting portion with low light transmittance, the processed seal being affixed to the board case at a position that does not overlap the information display unit, the other board components are visible through the light-transmitting portion and the board case, and the information display unit is visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising a board on which a main control unit that controls games and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a processed seal that has been subjected to openwork processing, the processed seal having a translucent portion with high translucency and a non-translucent portion with low translucency, the processed seal being affixed to the board case in a position that does not overlap the main control unit and the information display unit, the main control unit being visible through the board case, and the information display unit being visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising a board on which a main control unit that controls games and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a processed seal that has been subjected to openwork processing, the processed seal having a translucent portion with high translucency and a non-translucent portion with low translucency, the processed seal being affixed to the board case in a position that does not overlap the information display unit, and the information display unit being visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising: a board on which a main control unit that controls games, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted; a board case that houses the board; and a sticker having a highly translucent portion and multiple fields in which an administrator can write, the sticker being affixed to the board case in a position that does not overlap the main control unit and the information display unit, the other board components are visible through the translucent portion between the multiple fields and the board case, the main control unit is visible through the board case, and the information display unit is visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising: a board on which a main control unit that controls games, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted; a board case that houses the board; and a sticker having a highly translucent section and multiple fields in which an administrator can write, the sticker being affixed to the board case in a position that does not overlap with the information display unit, the other board components are visible through the translucent section between the multiple fields and the board case, and the information display unit is visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising a board on which a main control unit that controls games and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a sticker having a highly translucent section and multiple fields in which an administrator can write, the sticker being affixed to the board case in a position that does not overlap the main control unit and the information display unit, the main control unit being visible through the board case, and the information display unit being visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising a board on which a main control unit that controls games and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a sticker having a highly translucent section and multiple fields in which an administrator can write, the sticker being affixed to the board case in a position that does not overlap the information display unit, and the information display unit being visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising: a board on which a main control unit that controls games, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted; a board case that houses the board; and a sticker having a highly translucent portion and a writing field in which an administrator can write, the sticker being affixed to the board case in a position that does not overlap the main control unit and the information display unit, the other board components being visible through the translucent portion and the board case, the main control unit being visible through the board case, and the information display unit being visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising: a board on which a main control unit that controls games, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted; a board case that houses the board; and a sticker having a highly translucent portion and a writing field in which an administrator can write, the sticker being affixed to the board case in a position that does not overlap with the information display unit, the other board components being visible through the translucent portion and the board case, and the information display unit being visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising a board on which a main control unit that controls games and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a sticker having a highly translucent section and a writing field in which an administrator can write, the sticker being affixed to the board case in a position that does not overlap the main control unit and the information display unit, the main control unit being visible through the board case, and the information display unit being visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising a board on which a main control unit that controls games and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a sticker having a highly translucent section and a writing field in which an administrator can write, the sticker being affixed to the board case in a position that does not overlap the information display unit, and the information display unit being visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising: a board on which a main control unit that controls games, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted; a board case that houses the board; and a sticker having a highly translucent portion and an information writing portion on which predetermined information is written, the sticker being affixed to the board case in a position that does not overlap the main control unit and the information display unit, the other board components being visible through the translucent portion and the board case, the main control unit being visible through the board case, and the information display unit being visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising: a board on which a main control unit that controls games, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted; a board case that houses the board; and a sticker having a highly translucent portion and an information writing portion on which predetermined information is written, the sticker being affixed to the board case in a position that does not overlap with the information display unit, the other board components are visible through the translucent portion and the board case, and the information display unit is visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising a board on which a main control unit that controls games and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a sticker having a highly translucent portion and an information writing portion on which predetermined information is written, the sticker being affixed to the board case in a position that does not overlap the main control unit and the information display unit, the main control unit being visible through the board case, and the information display unit being visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising a board on which a main control unit that controls games and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a sticker having a highly translucent portion and an information writing portion on which predetermined information is written, the sticker being affixed to the board case in a position that does not overlap the information display unit, and the information display unit being visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising a board on which a main control unit that controls games, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a processed seal that has been subjected to openwork processing, the processed seal having a light-transmitting portion with high light-transmittance and a plurality of non-light-transmitting portions with low light-transmittance, the processed seal being affixed to the board case at a position that does not overlap the main control unit and the information display unit, the other board components are visible through the light-transmitting portions between the plurality of non-light-transmitting portions and the board case, the main control unit is visible through the board case, and the information display unit is visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising a board on which a main control unit that controls games, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a processed seal that has been subjected to openwork processing, the processed seal having a light-transmitting portion with high light-transmittance and a plurality of non-light-transmitting portions with low light-transmittance, the processed seal being affixed to the board case at a position that does not overlap the information display unit, the other board components are visible through the light-transmitting portions between the plurality of non-light-transmitting portions and the board case, and the information display unit is visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising a board on which a main control unit that controls games and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a processed seal that has been subjected to openwork processing, the processed seal having a translucent portion with high translucency and a plurality of non-translucent portions with low translucency, the processed seal being affixed to the board case in a position that does not overlap the main control unit and the information display unit, the main control unit being visible through the board case, and the information display unit being visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising a board on which a main control unit that controls games and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a processed seal that has been subjected to openwork processing, the processed seal having a translucent portion with high translucency and a plurality of non-translucent portions with low translucency, the processed seal being affixed to the board case in a position that does not overlap the information display unit, and the information display unit being visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising a board on which a main control unit that controls games, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a processed seal that has been subjected to openwork processing, the processed seal having a light-transmitting portion with high light-transmittance and a non-light-transmitting portion with low light-transmittance, the processed seal being affixed to the board case at a position that does not overlap the main control unit and the information display unit, the other board components are visible through the light-transmitting portion and the board case, the main control unit is visible through the board case, and the information display unit is visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising a board on which a main control unit that controls games, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a processed seal that has been subjected to openwork processing, the processed seal having a light-transmitting portion with high light transmittance and a non-light-transmitting portion with low light transmittance, the processed seal being affixed to the board case at a position that does not overlap the information display unit, the other board components are visible through the light-transmitting portion and the board case, and the information display unit is visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising a board on which a main control unit that controls games and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a processed seal that has been subjected to openwork processing, the processed seal having a translucent portion with high translucency and a non-translucent portion with low translucency, the processed seal being affixed to the board case in a position that does not overlap the main control unit and the information display unit, the main control unit being visible through the board case, and the information display unit being visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising a board on which a main control unit that controls games and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a processed seal that has been subjected to openwork processing, the processed seal having a translucent portion with high translucency and a non-translucent portion with low translucency, the processed seal being affixed to the board case in a position that does not overlap the information display unit, and the information display unit being visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising: a board on which a main control unit that controls games, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted; a board case that houses the board; and a sticker having a highly translucent portion and multiple fields in which an administrator can write, the sticker being affixed to the board case in a position that does not overlap the main control unit and the information display unit, the other board components are visible through the translucent portion between the multiple fields and the board case, the main control unit is visible through the board case, and the information display unit is visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising: a board on which a main control unit that controls games, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted; a board case that houses the board; and a sticker having a highly translucent section and multiple fields in which an administrator can write, the sticker being affixed to the board case in a position that does not overlap with the information display unit, the other board components are visible through the translucent section between the multiple fields and the board case, and the information display unit is visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising a board on which a main control unit that controls games and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a sticker having a highly translucent section and multiple fields in which an administrator can write, the sticker being affixed to the board case in a position that does not overlap the main control unit and the information display unit, the main control unit being visible through the board case, and the information display unit being visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising a board on which a main control unit that controls games and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a sticker having a highly translucent section and multiple fields in which an administrator can write, the sticker being affixed to the board case in a position that does not overlap the information display unit, and the information display unit being visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising: a board on which a main control unit that controls games, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted; a board case that houses the board; and a sticker having a highly translucent portion and a writing field in which an administrator can write, the sticker being affixed to the board case in a position that does not overlap the main control unit and the information display unit, the other board components being visible through the translucent portion and the board case, the main control unit being visible through the board case, and the information display unit being visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising: a board on which a main control unit that controls games, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted; a board case that houses the board; and a sticker having a highly translucent portion and a writing field in which an administrator can write, the sticker being affixed to the board case in a position that does not overlap with the information display unit, the other board components being visible through the translucent portion and the board case, and the information display unit being visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising a board on which a main control unit that controls games and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a sticker having a highly translucent section and a writing field in which an administrator can write, the sticker being affixed to the board case in a position that does not overlap the main control unit and the information display unit, the main control unit being visible through the board case, and the information display unit being visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising a board on which a main control unit that controls games and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a sticker having a highly translucent section and a writing field in which an administrator can write, the sticker being affixed to the board case in a position that does not overlap the information display unit, and the information display unit being visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising: a board on which a main control unit that controls games, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted; a board case that houses the board; and a sticker having a highly translucent portion and an information writing portion on which predetermined information is written, the sticker being affixed to the board case in a position that does not overlap the main control unit and the information display unit, the other board components being visible through the translucent portion and the board case, the main control unit being visible through the board case, and the information display unit being visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising: a board on which a main control unit that controls games, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted; a board case that houses the board; and a sticker having a highly translucent portion and an information writing portion on which predetermined information is written, the sticker being affixed to the board case in a position that does not overlap with the information display unit, the other board components are visible through the translucent portion and the board case, and the information display unit is visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising a board on which a main control unit that controls games and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a sticker having a highly translucent portion and an information writing portion on which predetermined information is written, the sticker being affixed to the board case in a position that does not overlap the main control unit and the information display unit, the main control unit being visible through the board case, and the information display unit being visible through the board case.

■This specification discloses the following: A gaming machine is characterized by comprising a board on which a main control unit that controls games and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a sticker having a highly translucent portion and a transparent information writing portion on which predetermined information is written, the sticker being affixed to the board case in a position that does not overlap the information display unit, and the information display unit being visible through the board case.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to pachinko gaming machines, but can also be used in reel-type gaming machines (so-called slot machines). Furthermore, it can also be used in jan-ball gaming machines and arrange-ball gaming machines.

Furthermore, the embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

1 gaming machine 45 first start port 47 second start port 70 first image display device (display means)
70a Production design (design)
110 Main control board (main control means)
110m Main control unit (main control means)
130 Performance control board (performance control means)
130m Production control unit (production control means)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player,
An operation means operable by a player;
an acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on the satisfaction of a first acquisition condition or a second acquisition condition;
a performance control means for executing a game performance in which a performance pattern is changed on a display means based on the determination information and then stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display period;
A state control means for controlling the game state to a specific game state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ,
A light-emitting effect using a light-emitting means provided at a predetermined position can be executed as an effect that makes the player expect the execution of a special game.
It is possible to execute a vibration effect in which the operation means is vibrated during execution of the game effect,
The game performance can be executed with the performance pattern of a first aspect and the performance pattern of a second aspect displayed at a specific timing of the game performance,
The vibration effects include:
a first vibration effect that generates an operation valid period and is executed in response to an operation of the operation means during the operation valid period;
A second vibration effect is executed without generating the operation effective period,
The first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that their effect periods do not overlap,
The game performance includes:
A first game presentation according to a result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition;
A second game presentation according to a result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition;
Including,
The ease of execution of the second vibration effect during a predetermined period after the start of the game effect differs between a case where the first game effect is executed in the specific game state and a case where the second game effect is executed in the specific game state;
When the first game performance is executed in the normal game state, the linked performance that is executed in conjunction with the appearance of the performance pattern of the second mode is more likely to be executed than when the first game performance is executed in the specific game state.
It is possible to display, in a display area of a display means, reserved information corresponding to each of the reserved memories related to the judgment information in which the game performance has not been executed;
When the plurality of effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the game effect, the reserved information can be effected,
This gaming machine is characterized in that when a start signal for the game presentation in which the reserved memory becomes the predetermined number is received while the reserved information is temporarily stopped for the multiple presentation patterns performing a presentation operation and a specific number of reserved information that is three more than the predetermined number is being displayed, the game presentation is started and the predetermined number of reserved information is displayed without displaying the number of reserved information that is one less than the specific number.

Images